HomeMy WebLinkAbout2024-08-22-technical-design-guidelinesTarrant ®
CountyCollege
REAL ESTATE & FACILITIES DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
VOLUME ONE: TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES
Copyright 2018 Tarrant County College District
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form or by any electronic or mechanical
means without written permission from its publisher.
Original Edition Publish Date: November 1, 2014
Second Edition Publish Date: April 6, 2015
Third Edition Publish Date: June 1, 2017
Fourth Edition Publish Date: November 20, 2017
Fifth Edition Publish Date: June 26, 2018
Sixth Edition Publish Date: May 14, 2020 - Changes highlighted.
Seventh Edition Publish Date: March 30, 2022 - Changes described in Addendum 6
Eighth Edition Publish Date: September 20, 2022 - Changes described in Addendum 7
Ninth Edition Publish date: May 17, 2023 - Changes described in Addendum 8
Tenth Edition Publish date: May 10th, 2024. Changes described in Addendum 9. This will be the final
published edition date with Addendum descriptions, since the Technical Design Guidelines document is
going real time live editing from this date on.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 08/22/2024[Introduction]
Tarrant County College District provides this guide presenting administrative and technical guidelines
for those involved in the planning, design, and construction of new facilities, additions, expansions or
renovations of existing facilities.
For additional details about the implementation requirements, process of modifications, updates and
variances, refer to Chapter 1 General Requirements.
Introduction
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 08/22/2024[Table of Contents]
Table of Contents
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES (click on link to go to specific desired section)
Table of Contents
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 708/22/2024[Division 01] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Tarrant County College Technical Design Guidelines (TDGs) and all associated supporting standards
included in the Uniform Facilities Library (refer to section 1.03, paragraph “E”) are intended as a general
guidelines for design and services. These documents are not intended to replace the work and due diligence
of the design professional and their best judgment, nor is it to be taken verbatim as a contract specification.
The goal is to ensure that all campuses are provided with code compliant, functional, durable buildings and
infrastructure, with consistent materials, finishes and fixtures for efficient maintenance.
Tarrant County College District (TCCD) or its representative(s) will review design work to assure general
compliance with TCCD Design Standards. TCCD will not undertake a detailed technical review of your work.
Reference section 1.09 in this guideline for processes regarding implementation, updates, deviations, and
variances from the Technical Design Guidelines.
As a Design Professional it is your responsibility to ensure code compliance, adherence to all TCCD stan-
dards, completeness, and correctness of the design, cost estimate, and all engineering concepts and details
of the work. This responsibility includes coordination of the various architectural, civil, structural, mechanical,
electrical, and other subdivisions with each other and with the specifications.
TCCD’s review, approval or acceptance of, and payment for the design services shall not be construed as a
waiver of any rights under the design agreement.
If TCCD determines that a design submittal is unacceptable, a resubmittal may be required. During the con-
struction phase of the project, TCCD or their representative(s) may review any project submittals.
If TCCD determines that a construction submittal, or a portion of, is unacceptable, a resubmittal may be
required.
General Requirements01
8 [Division 01] GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
1.01 GOALS AND VALUES
Tarrant County College’s Mission Statement:
Tarrant County College provides affordable and open access to quality teaching and learning.
A. The College carries forward its values from the Vision 2015 Strategic Pan:
1. Student Sucess: belief in providing quality instruction, resources, and support services to assist
our students in achieving their lifelong goals.
2. Access: belief in providing educational opportunities for all the members of the community.
3. Excellence: belief in providing outstanding quality in educational programs, administrative
support, and services to its students, faculaty and staff.
4. Diversity: beliefe that the College should reflect the diversity of the community.
5. Innovation and Creativity: belief in cultivating a learning environment that evaluates and
incorporates emerging technologies and methodologies to enhance the quality of instruction and
administrative support for our students, faculty and staff.
B. The College has adopted the following goals to support students and the community:
1. One College: TCC will function as One College to provide a consistent and successful student
experience.
2. Student Ready College: TCC will put students at the core of all programs and services, welcomed,
engaged and supported inside and outside the classroom.
3. Serve the Community: TCC will serve the community and be its first choice for partnership.
C. The College has adopted the following principles to support students and the community:
1. Learning Commons: Learning Commons are an integrated component with the College-wide
active learning experience and foster greater student engagement by meeting student needs in a
dynamic and flexible environment.
2. Integrated Instructional Learning Environments: The College embraces a culture of teaching and
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 908/22/2024[Division 01] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
learning as the foundation of its mission, and supporting innovation in space, technology, and
teaching practices serves as the core for student learning and success.
3. Integrated Student Success Model: The College dedicates significant resources focused on
student success including faculty and staff, space, equipment, and technology.
4. Student Experience: A Student-Ready Collegeprovides an experience for students that is
welcoming, simple to understand, provides a clear pathway, and breaks down barriers.
5. High Schools: Building and maintaining strong P-20 partnerships is essential for the student
pathways to sucess.
6. Scheduling and Facility Utilization: A student-centered schedule of classes is offered and
supports studnet access and sucess.
7. Campus Character and Quality: A Sudent-Ready College provides a welcoming and easily
navigated experience for students and uses space effectively to maximize the student experience.
8. Workspace Environments; Redesigned workspace environments will promote more collegiality,
enhance spatial quality, provide flexibility and increased efficiency, and support a culture of
collaboration.
D. College History
Tarrant County College was established by a countywide election on July 31, 1965, as Tarrant
County Junior College, with a name change in 1999. The South Campus opened in 1967, followed by
Northeast (1968), Northwest (1976), Southeast (1996) and Trinity River Campus (2009). The Trinity
River Campus East for Health Care Professions opened in downtown Fort Worth, just blocks away
from the Trinity River Campus, in the fall of 2011.
The College District is governed by a seven-member Board of Trustees elected for staggered six-
year terms in single member districts. Enrollment growth has been steady throughout recent years.
The South Campus, at 4,772, had the largest opening-day enrollment of any community college in
the nation up to that time. Overall credit student enrollment passed the 20,000 mark in 1980 and
exceeded 50,000 in the fall of 2011. As of 2012, TCC is the sixth-largest college or university in Texas.
10 [Division 01] GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
E. Quick Facts
• TCC has five campuses covering Fort Worth, Arlington, Hurst and North Richland Hills, and
includes Trinity River Campus East for Health Care Professions in downtown Fort Worth.
• Other sites include the TCC Opportunity Center, TCC Corporate Training Center Alliance Texas
and several learning centers.
• TCC is the sixth largest college or university in Texas, in terms of enrollment.
• Approximately 1 in every 18 Tarrant County residents takes a class at TCC each year.
• TCC offers four types of degrees: Associate of Arts, Associate of Science, Associate of Arts in
Teaching, Associate of Applied Science, in addition to certificates of completion and several
continuing education programs.
• College programs cover more than 80 technical and transfer areas.
1.02 DISTRICT FACILITIES
Northeast Campus
828 Harwood Road
Hurst, TX 76054
Northwest Campus
4801 Marine Creek Pkwy
Fort Worth, TX 76179
South Campus
5301 Campus Drive
Fort Worth, TX 76119
Southeast Campus
2100 Southeast Pkwy
Arlington, TX 76018
Trinity River Campus
300 Trinity Campus Circle
Fort Worth, TX 76102
Trinity River Campus East
245 E. Belknap Street
Fort Worth, TX 76102
TCC Opportunity Center
5901 Fitzhugh Avenue
Fort Worth, TX 76119
ODMC
5450 N. Riverside Drive
Fort Worth, Tx 76137
Alliance West (OWTL / Erma C. Johnson-Hadley CEATL)
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1108/22/2024[Division 01] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2301 Horizon Drive
Fort Worth, Tx 76177
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. It is the responsibility of the Design Professional to determine all Authorities Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ) over Tarrant County College District (TCCD) construction projects and to comply therewith. The
Design Professional must ensure compliance with all Federal, State, and Local building codes which
are applicable to any given project within TCCD.
B. The Design Professional shall prepare a detailed project code summary and analysis during the Sche-
matic Design phase. The code summary shall be reviewed with the appropriate AHJ and TCCD. In all
cases, compliance with the most restrictive code requirement shall be attained. The final approved
code summary shall be placed in the project construction documents for reference.
C. The Design Professional must also comply with TCCD Technical Design Guidelines contained herein.
In addition, TCCD is AFM/FM Global insured, projects and materials should comply with FM Global
Loss Prevention Data Sheets and use FM Approved products when available. Submittals should be
madeto FM Global prior to start of construction.
D. TCCD and FM Global standards may exceed code and acknowledge this. The design professional is
to follow the most stringent requirement. The design professional may bring this to the attention of
TCCD but cannot vary from these requirements without a written approved variance.
E. In addition to the Technical Design Guidelines, TCCD has standards for several other inititatives
which support the TDG’s. These other initiatives and standards are located in https://www.tccd.edu/
community/business/design-construction-standards/ in our TCCD website, inside the Uniform
Facilities Library. All documents inside these library are available for viewing and downloading.
1.04 PROFESSIONAL SERVICES FURNISHED BY THE OWNER
A. When required by project scope Surveys, Topographic Surveys and Sub-surface soil investigations
and reports will be furnished to the project design consultant by TCCD.
B. Construction materials testing as required by TCCD shall be furnished by TCCD.
C. When required by project scope HVAC Testing and Balancing shall be furnished by TCCD.
D. When required by TCCD Commissioning shall be furnished by TCCD.
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. INTRODUCTION
1. The energy and environmental conservation standards contained herein are intended to assist
the design professional in designing a facility that provides a sustainable and efficient operating
facility and serves to minimize any detrimental impact on the environment.
2. Specific energy performance, environmental and sustainability goals should be extensively
reviewed early in the design process to ensure complete integration with the overall project.
These goals should be documented and published to serve as a conservation performance guide
for the project. It is important to note that energy performance and environmental conservation
12 [Division 01] GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
is a deliberate and pre-defined strategy. TCCD, Program Manager, AFM/FM Global, Architectural
and Engineering design firms, general and subcontractors must function as a team with common
goals using a collaborative process to ensure the design and implementation of the conservation
approach that best meets the needs of TCCD, its students, the community and the environment.
3. In certain instances, TCCD may wish to attain LEED certification for a campus project; if so, the
design requirements associated with the United States Green Building Council Leadership in
Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) program shall be employed to achieve the desired
certification rating. This shall be identified at conception of project design.
B. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Coordinate specific project energy and environmental conservation goals with TCCD prior to
design initiation.
2. In the event that LEED performance strategies are being employed in the design which exceeds
the performance requirements stated herein, the more stringent LEED requirement will take
precedence.
3. Each project and discipline design shall undergo a thorough Quality Assurance process to
ensure the pre-defined energy and environmental conservation goals and strategies have been
incorporated into the design and are achievable.
4. The design team is required to develop a basis of design document for each project and
coordinate with TCCD regarding the “Owner’s Project Requirements” document. Reference
Chapter 23 Commissioning for additional requirements.
C. ENTRY VESTIBULES
1. Provide recessed walk-off mats
D. PUBLIC RESTROOMS
1. Provide dedicated exhaust and maintain negative pressure from adjacent spaces.
2. Floor plan should restrict sight lines through doors and to interior mirrors
3. All ceilings in restrooms shall be painted gypsum board (mold resistant paint), and shall have
access panels.
4. All walls shall be finished with tile to 72” AFF minimum in height with bullnose top edge.
5. Painted surfaces shall be hard gloss enamel.
6. All floor surfaces shall slope to floor drain.
7. Restroom walls shall be partitions to deck with sound attenuation as required to minimize noise
transfer to adjacent spaces.
E. CUSTODIAL CLOSETS
1. For every 8,000 square feet of useable building floor space (or portion thereof) provide one Basic
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1308/22/2024[Division 01] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Custodial Closet with at least one custodial closet per floor. This space is for the exclusive use of
housekeeping staff (key lock as directed by TCCD).
2. Strategically locate custodial closets throughout the building to avoid requirement of moving
janitorial equipment long distances.
3. Custodial closets shall be located on all floors throughout the building and always open to the
main corridors. They should not be located in machine areas, restrooms, utility chases or utility
corridors.
4. Do not place non-room plumbing, mechanical, or electrical equipment in this room.
5. Provide a 24” x 24” x 12” precast terrazzo service basin with stainless steel cap and a hose bibb.
6. All walls shall be finished in tile to 72” minimum in height with bullnose top edge. Painted
surfaces shall be hard gloss enamel.
7. Provide 3’ wide door minimum (open out).
8. Wall mounted hot and cold water faucets, 30” above the bottom of the service sink (fixture
controls shall be reinforced to wall).
9. Provide a minimum of three wet mop hooks or clips arranged to permit dripping of wet mops into
sink basin.
10. Provide three or more dry mop and dust mop hooks or clips on wall opposite sink basin.
11. Provide a floor drain in center of room, sloped floor minimum 1/4” per foot to the floor drain.
12. Floors shall be sealed concrete or other approved finish.
13. Heavy duty shelving on wall above service sink with shelves 12” deep on adjustable heavy duty
standards and brackets.
1.06 STRUCTURAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. ALTERNATIVE SYSTEMS
1. A minimum of three (3) feasible alternative structural systems shall be evaluated unless otherwise
directed by TCCD. A narrative describing the advantages and disadvantages of each system
shall be submitted and a recommended system identified. Comparative cost estimates based
on market trends shall be included. The structural system selected shall be the one that best
combines overall economy with suitability of design. It shall be compatible with the architectural,
mechanical, electrical, geotechnical requirements and fire protection systems.
B. FUTURE EXPANSION
1. Any specific plans for future vertical or horizontal expansion shall be accommodated. Provisions
shall be made for the addition of future floors and additions as determined by the Tarrant County
College District (TCCD) on a project-by-project basis. Future expansion plans, including assumed
14 [Division 01] GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
type of construction and live loads, shall be shown on the drawings.
C. SUBSTRUCTURES
1. The foundation system shall be selected based on the recommendations of the geotechnical
report and considering overall economy and suitability of design.
2. The foundation design shall consider possible future occupancy changes and any TCCD plans for
future expansion.t
3. The decision to use a slab-on-grade on an improved sub-grade or a structural floor slab
constructed over a crawl space or void space shall take place at the project initiation and shall
be based on the need for accessibility for future changes to the occupancy above, costs and the
magnitude of potential slab vertical movements acceptable to TCCD. Discussion should include
and consider fire protection requirements, exterior wall construction, and project schedule.
D. SUPERSTRUCTURES
1. The structural system shall be selected based on all of the following criteria:
a. Flexibility to accommodate future occupancy changes
b. TCCD plans for future expansion
c. Suitability of design
d. Overall economy
e. TCCD life cycle requirements
f. The structure shall meet Factory Mutual loss prevention requirements when required by TCCD
E. SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS
1. VIBRATION
a. Structural engineer shall evaluate vibration serviceability due to human activities and design
the structure considering human comfort.
b. Laboratory construction for both new construction and renovations requires the use of a
consultant specializing in vibration analysis. Consultant shall address issues relative to
vibration-sensitive equipment and specialized functions such as nuclear magnetic resonance,
mass spectrometry and fitness centers. Specialized equipment requirements shall be verified
with the equipment manufacturer.
1.07 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN GOALS
TCCD desires to build sustainable buildings and campuses per board approved sustainability
plan. It is our goal to provide exceptional learning environments for students and be responsible
stewards of the environment. Projects identified to achieve LEED Certification shall go above
and beyond the following goals as required to attain the targeted level of LEED Certification. To
achieve this, all TCCD projects shall be designed to achieve the following goals.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1508/22/2024[Division 01] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. ENERGY CONSERVATION GOALS:
1. At the start of each project the design team shall coordinate with TCCD to establish the minimum
percentage improvement above code required for energy efficiency of that project. Calculations
shall be based on the building performance rating method on Appendix G of ANSI / ASHRAE/
IESNA Standard 90.1-2010, with errata but without addenda, using a computer simulation model
for the whole building project.
B. INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL GOALS:
1. Minimize the impact of materials on indoor environmental quality (IEQ).
a. All adhesives, sealants, paints, coatings, flooring systems, composite wood, agrifiber, ceiling
and wall systems used on the interior of the building (within the exterior envelope) shall be
low emitting complying with the standards as listed below.
b. Adhesives, sealants and primers must comply with South Coast Air Quality Management
District Rule #1168.
c. Architectural paints and coatings must comply with VOC content limits established in Green
Seal Standard GS-11, Paints, 1st Edition.
d. Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints must not exceed the VOC content limit of 250g/L in Green
Seal Standard GC-03, Anti-Corrosive Paints, 2nd Edition.
e. Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, primers, and shellacs must not exceed the
VOC content limits established in South coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1113,
Architectural Coatings.
f. All carpet must meet the testing and product requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute
Green Label Plus program.
g. All carpet cushion must meet the requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label
program.
h. All hard surface flooring must be certified as compliant with the FloorScore standard by an
independent third party.
i. Composite wood, agrifiber products and adhesives used to bind these products to each other
must contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
j. All gypsum board, insulation, acoustical ceiling systems and wall coverings must meet the
testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services Standard
Practice Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers, including 2004 addenda.
2. NOISE AND ACOUSTICS MANAGEMENT
a. Perform demolition and construction operations to minimize noise.
b. Perform repetitive and/or high level noise-producing work in less sensitive hours of the day or
16 [Division 01] GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
week as directed by TCCD.
c. Coordinate with TCCD on a per project basis to establish campus, daytime, and nighttime
hours and allowable work hours.
3. MANUFACTURE SOURCING
a. All piping shall be domestic manufactured piping.
1.08 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Specify that the contractor develop a training program for TCCD to demonstrate and review site
specific procedures and management plans that need to be implemented during facility operation and
maintenance. The program should include the following information at a minimum:
1. Overview of environmental issues related to the project facility.
2. Review of site specific procedures and management plans implemented during construction,
including waste management, noise and acoustics management and environmental management.
3. Include review of environmentally related aspects of operations and maintenance manuals.
1.09 IMPLEMENTATION AND ALTERATION OF THE TDG
A. Implementation
1. This document comprises the Technical Design Guidelines (TDGs) that state the general
principles to be used in the design and construction of facilities with the objective of achieving
design consistency, equity and quality, facilitating timely completion of buildings, and which can
be effectively, efficiently and economically managed through their life cycle. Another goal of the
TDGs is to provide for a safe, functional and sustainable environment conducive to learning while
maintaining a balance with and allowing for design creativity.
2. The TDGs are one volume of the Real Estate and Facilities Design and Construction Standards.
The other components include the Educational Specifications and the Furnishing Standards.
The TDGs are supplemental and complementary to the other components of the Real Estate and
Facilities Design and Construction Standards. Any content within the TDGs in conflict with other
portions of the Real Estate and Facilities Guidelines and Construction Standards shall be called
to the attention of TCCD.
3. The TDGs are supplemental to other requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, including
but not limited to building codes, energy codes, health codes, national and state accessibility
codes, requirements of the Texas Higher Education Coordinating Board, other state laws, and
USGBC’s LEED program (on applicable projects). Any content within the TDGs in conflict with
these requirements shall be called to the attention of TCCD.
4. This document, in conjunction with other relevant design guidance, is intended both as a design
tool-kit for the District and Design Team and as part of a set of reference documents for the
evaluation of design submissions and contract compliance. All Architect / Engineering Firms,
Construction Managers, General Contractors, Sub-Contractors and other consultants / vendors,
under contract with TCCD are required to abide these guidelines.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1708/22/2024[Division 01] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5. The content of the TDGs are requirements set forth by TCCD. No alteration or variance from
these standards is permissible without the express written agreement of TCCD as set forth in
this Chapter. Both the design team and construction team shall acknowledge receipt of and
compliance with these standards. The contract of the design team with TCCD shall reference and
require these standards. The design team is required to meet the most current version of the TDGs
including all addenda, but not variances issued as of the date of contract with TCCD. The design
team shall endeavor to comply with addenda issued after the date of contract, but are not required
to do so, except items TCCD has identified as a critical inclusion. Compliance with critical
inclusion items is required regardless of date. Instances where compliance with a critical inclusion
creates an undue burden on the design team and or construction team shall be considered for
additional services. The design team shall include the TDGs in their entirety, including addenda
and approved variances used in that project as part of the construction documents project
manual. The contract of the construction firm with the owner shall reference the construction
documents that include the TDGs. All references to the TDGs outside of this chapter include
addenda and or variances, or exclude variances as defined in this chapter.
B. Regular Periodic Updates.
1. It is the intent of TCCD to provide regular periodic updates of this document. All questions
and comments regarding the content and intent of the TDGs shall be sent to TCCD for review.
TCCD shall gather and review all submitted questions and content. Based on these comments,
questions, changes in TCCD preferences and/or other causes, TCCD may issue Addenda on a
semi-annual or quarterly basis.
C. Variances
1. Any deviation from the TDGs shall only be allowed by official written consent of TCCD, as part
of the variance process. When a deviation from the TDGs is identified as needed or desired the
design team, and/or construction team shall follow the process below.
a. Submit written request to TCCD clearly identifying the requested deviation, related section of
the TDGs and reason for the deviation. Written request shall be submitted to the designated
TCCD representative for that project. Variance may required additional review by FM Global.
b. TCCD shall distribute and review the request. Approval is only granted by signature of the
designated TCCD representative.
c. Completed variance request, approved or denied shall be sent by the designated TCCD
18 [Division 01] GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
D. Variance Request Process (used by vendors for deviations from the TDG’s)
1. Form is submitted to the TCCD Director of Engineering by an Employee of TCCD, member of a
Design Team currently working on a TCCD project, or a General Contractor currently working
on a project. This form would be accepted during the Design Phase only - once a project is in
construction, variance forms will not be accepted. This form currently resides in the TCCD Website
and a sample of it is included in the TDG’s for reference. Please disregard the process description
attached to the form provided in the Website.
2. TCCD Review Committee conducts an internal review – to approve or reject request.
3. Record of the review results is filed internally by TCCD.
4. Notification sent to the Requestor, TCCD Representative for the project, A/E Representative for
the project, and General Contractor Representative for the project. Notification includes copy of
the signed request form with Approval or Rejection stamped. If approved Design team shall be
required to include a copy of the approved variance in the project manual if the project is in the
planning or design phase; if approved during the construction phase the design team shall issue a
copy of the approved variance by ASI or Change Order as applicable.
5. Approved variances shall be kept for internal review by TCCD as a potential permanent change. If
recommended to be a permanent change to the Technical Design Guidelines, a TCCD employee
from the variance review process shall submit a Change Request Form to the Engineering Dept..
E. Change Request Process (used by TCCD for issuing critical changes or changes to the TDG’s)
1. Form is submitted to the TCCD Director of Engineering by a TCCD employee. This form currently
resides in the TCCD Website and a sample of it is included in the TDG’s for reference. Please
disregard the process description attached to the form provided in the Website.
2. TCCD Review Committee conducts an internal review to decide whether this change is to be
implemented in the TDG’s or to be issued as a Critical Inclusion to a current project.
3. Record of the review results is filed internally by TCCD.
4. If the change is to be implemented in the TDG’s, it will be collected and issued in the next
possible semi-annual adenda release. TDG changes will not be released individually. TCCD
typically issues TDG Addendums twice a year. The exact timing for the addendums is to be
determined by TCCD.
5. If the change is a critical item, and the addendum is not ready for release, direction for the
change is sent to Requestor, all relevant TCCD Employees and representatives of design and
construction teams currently working on projects in writting for immediate implementation, until
the addendum is released.
6. Approved Critical Inclusion Canges shall be included in the Technical Design Guidelines as sonn
as possible, in the next semi-annual adenda release.
7. Addedums to the TDG’s can be seen in the TCCD Website, and they typically include a description
of all items changed as well as a new full version release to superseed the previous release.
Real Estate & Facilities - Design and Construction Standards
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES
Tarrant ®
CountyCollege
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1908/22/2024[Division 01] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Technical Design Guidelines
VARIANCE REQUEST FORM
Real Estate & Facilities
Design & Construction Standards
Volume 1
Variances from the Technical Design Guidelines can be submitted by an Employee of TCCd, a member of a design team currently working on a project,
or a general contractor currently building a project. This form can only be submitted prior to construction; it will not be accepted once construction
documents are complete. The requestor is required to include cut sheets for the recommended variance. Refer to the TDG’s, Division 1. section 1.09 for
process description.
The following section is for TCCD Review Committee use only.
Approval of this variance by TCCD is only for the scenario and project for which it was submitted, and shall not be assumed to be applicable to other concur-
rent or subsequent scenarios or projects. TCCD review and approval of this variance is in relation to the acceptability of the product to TCCD, and does not repre-
sent a thorough analysis of the applicability and code compliance. Applicability and code compliance is the sole responsibility of the design team and contractor.
TCCD Project Name
Date Submitted
Project Stage
Variance Requested:
Reason for Request:
Requestor Phone Number
Date
Date
TCCD Dept. or Company
VR #
CSI Division
TDG Section TDG Page #
Status (circle one)
Approved Rejected
Requestor Name (please print)
Signature of Requestor Request Deadline
Reviewed By (please print name)Reviewed By (signature)
Project Type
Requestor Email Address
Discipline
Potential Impact of the Variance on cost
During Design:
During Construction:
During Occupancy and Maintenance:
Potential Impact of the Variance on schedule
During Design:
During Construction:
During Occupancy:
Tarrant ®
County
College
20 [Division 01] GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
Technical Design Guidelines
CHANGE REQUEST FORM
Real Estate & Facilities
Design & Construction Standards
Volume 1
Changes to the Technical Design Guidelines can only be submitted by an Employee of TCCD. Changes to the TDG are issued on a semi- annual basis as
an Addendum. Design teams and construction teams are required to comply with the TDG and all Addenda issued prior to the date of contract, except for
Changes identified as Critical Inclusions. Compliance with a Critical Inclusion is required for all projects currently in progress. Instances where compliance
with a Critical Inclusion creates an undue burden on the design team and or construction team shall be considered for additional services. The requestor is
required to include cut sheets for the recommended variance. Refer to the TDG’s, Division 1. section 1.09 for process description.
Date Submitted
Project Stage
Change Requested:
Reason for Request:
Requestor Phone Number
TCCD Department
Requestor Name (please print)
Project Type
Requestor Email Address
Discipline
Potential Impact of the Change on cost
During Design:
During Construction:
During Occupancy and Maintenance:
Potential Impact of the Change on schedule
During Design:
During Construction:
During Occupancy:
Tarrant ®
County
College
The following section is for TCCD Review Committee use only.
Date
DateCR #Status (circle one)
Approved Rejected
Signature of Requestor
Is this Change being requested as a Critical Inclusion? (A Critical Inclusion is a change that must be complied with as of the date of issue.)
YESCircle one:NO
Reviewed By (please print name)Reviewed By (signature)
TCCD Project Name
CSI Division
TDG Section TDG Page #
Request Deadline
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2108/22/2024[Division 01] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
representative for that project to the design team and or construction team.
2. Approved variances apply only to the project and scenario for which it was submitted, and shall
not be assumed to be applicable on other concurrent or subsequent projects.
1.10 PROJECT SEQUENCING, COORDINATION AND DELIVERABLES
A. Development of the Schedule and Sequence of Events
At the initiation of each project the design team shall coordinate with TCCD to develop the project
schedule including intermediate review stages, coordination meetings and deliverables. The project
schedule should allow for up to 10 days review time by FM Global and additional time for additional
reviews and responses.
1. At a minimum the design team shall be required to conduct the following coordination meetings:
a. Topographic, geotechnical and sub-surface utilities surveys
b. Commissioning
c. Systems Infrastructure, utilities and energy management
d. Electronic security and surveillance
e. Electronic door access control systems
f. Audio / video and technology
g. Fire detection and alarm systems
h. HVAC & lighting controls
2. At a minimum the design team shall be required to submit the following deliverables:
a. Electronic CAD files meeting the TCCD CAD drafting standards
1) Architectural and engineering seals are not required
2) Of the Sealed for construction and permitting set
3) Of the Updated Record Drawing set Including all:
i. Addenda
ii. ASI and RFI drawing revisions
iii. General Contractor As-Built notations
b. Record Drawings including all:
1) Addenda
2) ASI and RFI revisions
3) General Contractor As-Built notations
c. Schedule of Finishes
22 [Division 01] GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
1) Review printings
2) Prior to issuing sealed construction documents
d. Color Board
1) Showing all finishes, color chips and material samples
i. Prior to issuing sealed construction documents
e. HVAC & Lighting Controls Diagrams including
1) Lighting Controls as-built
f. Code review and compliance summary including
1) Egress travel distances
2) Egress widths for stairs and doors
3) Room, floor and building occupancy
4) Plumbing fixture counts
g. Design Professional Field Observations Reports.
h. Design Professionals to coordinate with TCCD Technical Teams for key observations,
deficiency lists, and punch lists.
i. TCCD Project Manager shall maintain and coordinate deficiency reports with TCCD Technical
Team.
B. Information required for inclusion in the construction documents.
1. All information required for the bidding, permitting and construction of the project
2. All basis of design assumptions, including but not limited to:
a. Structural loads including capacity for future additions or modifications
b. HVAC loads including capacity for future additions or modifications
c. Electrical loads including capacity for future additions or modifications
d. Building code occupancy required and provided egress widths
3. TCCD Technical Design Guideline
C. Pre-Installation Conferences
1. The General Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the following pre-installation
conferences:
a. Door Hardware
1) Prior to the installation of Door Hardware, manufacturer’s representatives for locksets,
closers, and exit devices shall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the Door
Hardware Installer’s personnel on the proper installation of their respective products.
A letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting is held and a list of those in
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2308/22/2024[Division 01] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
attendance, shall be sent to the Architect and TCCD
D. Close Out Documents
1. Follow BIM and CAD Standards per section 1.11
2. The General contractor shall provide the following documentation prior to Substantial Completion,
which cannot be achieved until all required documentation has been provided to TCCD.
a. HVAC Controls diagrams
b. HVAC Operation and Maintenance Manuals
c. Network addressing diagrams
d. Security camera system addressing diagrams
e. Electronic door access control addressing diagrams
f. Door keying schedule
g. Fire alarm
h. Fire suppression
i. Lighting Control Diagram
j. Emergency Lighting Layout and Control Modes
k. Operation and Maintenance Manual
l. Asset Onboarding document describing all assets installed by the project. Document to be
provided by TCCD.
3. The General Contractor shall provide the following training of TCCD personnel prior to Substantial
Completion, which cannot be achieved until all required training has been provided to TCCD.
a. HVAC Operation and Maintenance
b. Elevator Operation and Maintenance (when applicable)
c. Floor finish cleaning and maintenance
4. The General Contractor shall provide the following documentation prior to Final Completion,
which cannot be achieved until all required documentation has been provided to TCCD.
a. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
b. Executed Warranties
1) General Contractor and Sub-Contractor
2) Manufacturer’s
c. As-Built Documents
1) Containing General Contractors field notes
2) On the AHJ stamped permit set
3) Including all final AHJ inspection tags
24 [Division 01] GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
4) Including CAD or BIM file per Section 1.11 provided for each of the following scopes
when applicable
i. General construction
ii. Fire alarm
iii. Data network
iv. A/V network
v. Security network
d. Schedules for electronic safety and security
1) Critical deliverables expected from security contractor
i. It is essential for TCCD to receive all test results and as-built drawings prior to job
acceptance. The test results must adhere to the following specifications, formats
and delivery conditions:
2) Specifications
i. Complete end-to-end test results for all copper Shielded Twisted Pair (STP), copper
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) and fiber optic cables installed are required.
ii. All fiber optic cable should be tested using Division 27 testing criterion.
iii. 100% of all pairs in copper cables shall be tested for continuity and wire-map.
3) Format
i. Test Results must be submitted in both hard and soft copy in a format previously
agreed to by TCCD.
ii. As-built drawings must be submitted with a .dwg file extension.
4) Delivery
i. Test Results must be both hard copy and electronically submitted to TCCD
Contact. Information will be provided after contract is awarded and before project
completion.
5. The General Contractor shall provide the following training of TCCD personnel prior to Final
Completion, which cannot be achieved until all required training has been provided to TCCD.
E. Post Occupancy Observation Site Visit
1. The General Contractor shall schedule a post occupancy observation site visit during the eleventh
month after substantial completion
a. The following items shall be reviewed
1) Door Hardware
i. Examine each item and adjust as necessary to restore function of doors and
hardware.
ii. Consult with and instruct TCCD personnel in recommended additions to the
maintenance procedures.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2508/22/2024[Division 01] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
iii. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,
materials, or installation.
iv. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature)
in the performance of the hardware.
1.11 TCCD CAD AND BIM DRAFTING STANDARDS
At the beginning of each project TCCD shall decide if the project is to be developed and delivered in
CAD software or BIM software.
A. CAD Standards
1. Refer to Appendix E.
B. BIM Standards
1. Refer to Appendix D. \
1.12 TCCD - CONSTRUCTION RESPONSIBILITY CHART
The following charts define the scope of responsibility for specific construction components. The list
26 [Division 01] GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
is not all inclusive, and represents the typical responsibility for listed items. The design team shall
develop a complete responsbility chart with all construction components ona per project basis. Once
developed, the design team shall review the proposed responsibilities with TCCD and include the
approved project specific chart in the construction drawings and process.
TARRANT COUNTY COLLEGE DISTRICT - RESPONSIBILITY CHART
FURNITURE, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
CATEGORY / ITEM A B C D COMMENTS
GE
N
E
R
A
L
C
O
N
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
(
G
C
)
OW
N
E
R
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
/
G
C
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
OW
N
E
R
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
&
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
VE
N
D
O
R
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
&
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
GENERAL
Projection Screens X
White Boards/Chalk Boards X
Storage Cabinets - Fixed X Built-ins
Storage Cabinets - Freestanding X
Special Storage Cabinets -
Fixed X Nursing, Horticulture, Media and similar needs
Special Storage Cabinets -
Freestanding X Nursing, Horticulture, Media and similar needs
Lockers (non furniture)X Built-ins
Cubbies X Built-ins
Moveable Carts X
Waste Cans X
Special Teaching Equipment X Identify needs for specific academic programs
Display Cabinets X Movable by TCCD
Trophy Cases X Movable by TCCD
Room Signage X
Exterior Signage X
Wayfinding X
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2708/22/2024[Division 01] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
TARRANT COUNTY COLLEGE DISTRICT - RESPONSIBILITY CHART
FURNITURE, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
CATEGORY / ITEM A B C D COMMENTS
GE
N
E
R
A
L
C
O
N
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
(
G
C
)
OW
N
E
R
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
/
G
C
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
OW
N
E
R
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
&
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
VE
N
D
O
R
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
&
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
FURNITURE See detailed list of furniture (furniture standards)
Loose Furniture X GC to coordinate electrical, data and installation
Fixed Furniture X
AUDIO VISUAL
Projectors X
Fixed Lecterns X GC to coordinate electrical, data and installation
Movable Carts X
Computers X
Flat Screen TV X GC provides electrical, data, blocking and J-Box
LAB EQUIPMENT
Lab Goggles Cases X
Loose Lab Equipment X
Safety Eye Wash &/or Shower X Emergency lab, shops and other similar locations
Fume Hoods X
Chemical Storage Cabinets X Special fire rated, vented (small / movable by TCCD)
Fire Blanket X
First Aid Kit X
Lab Cart X
Pegboard / drip trough X
Hydraulic Lift X
Sim Men/Women X
28 [Division 01] GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
TARRANT COUNTY COLLEGE DISTRICT - RESPONSIBILITY CHART
FURNITURE, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
CATEGORY / ITEM A B C D COMMENTS
GE
N
E
R
A
L
C
O
N
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
(
G
C
)
OW
N
E
R
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
/
G
C
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
OW
N
E
R
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
&
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
VE
N
D
O
R
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
&
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
EQUIPMENT
Phones X GC provides wires and outlet
Intercom System X
Computers X GC to provide electrical and data
Computer Printers X GC to provide electrical and data
Copy/Fax/Scan Machines X GC to provide electrical and data
Large Format Printers X GC to provide electrical and data
Refrigerators X
Built-In Microwaves X
Countertop Microwaves X
Key Watchman System X
Coffee Makers X GC to provide electrical
Coffee Makers w/Water Line X GC to provide electrical and water line
Dishwashers X
Security System X
Library Security Gate X GC to provide electrical and data
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2908/22/2024[Division 01] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
TARRANT COUNTY COLLEGE DISTRICT - RESPONSIBILITY CHART
FURNITURE, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
CATEGORY / ITEM A B C D COMMENTS
GE
N
E
R
A
L
C
O
N
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
(
G
C
)
OW
N
E
R
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
/
G
C
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
OW
N
E
R
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
&
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
VE
N
D
O
R
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
D
&
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
KITCHEN / FOOD SERVICE
Specialty Loose Kitchen Equip-
ment X
LIFE SAFETY
AED Cabinets X AED unit model to be approved by TCCD.
Code Blue Phones X
Fire Extinguisher X
Fire Extinguisher Cabinet X
Emergency Communication De-
vice (clock)X
Speakers X
ACCESSIBILITY AND OTHER
Wheel Chairs X
Motorized Scooters X
Accessible Lifts X
Emergency Stair Evacuation
Chair (motorized at basement) X Semi-Recessed install is preferred. Surface mount if
necessary. Model to be approved by TCCD.
Key Watchman System
END OF DIVISION
30 [Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
Existing Conditions02
1.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. For new construction the design team shall review existing drawings of adjacent facilities to ensure
compliance with building set back requirements.
B. For additions and renovations the design team shall review existing drawings of the facility involved as
well as adjacent facilities.
C. The design team shall identify portions of existing facilities to be demolished as part of the project.
Reference Demolition for additional information.
D. TCCD may hire a hazardous material testing agency and abatement contractor when required. The
abatement contractor will only demolish those items required by AHJ related to hazardous materials.
The design team shall include the demolition of all remaining portions as part of the project.
E. The design team shall identify all items required to be temporarily removed, stored and reinstalled and
or relocated as part of the project.
F. The construction team is responsible for identifying and providing protection for existing conditions to
remain.
G. The design team shall gather all existing documentation and develop a report for TCCD of all
incongruencies and conditions requiring further exploration.
H. The design team shall field verify existing conditions to confirm the accuracy of any as-builts provided
by TCCD. This is to include verification of property lines and easements in accordance with the most
recent survey and or plat. If an applicable survey or plat is not available or in the design team’s
opinion is out of date, the design team shall advise TCCD of the need for a new topographic survey
and or legal plat. TCCD can require that updated drawings of existing conditions be submitted for
TCCD records and use.
I. For each project with related scope the design team shall identify existing subsurface utilities and
clearly delineate requirements for the contractor to perform subsurface utility engineering.
J. The design professional and/or contractor shall assess existing project site conditions for all items on
TCCD PRE-RENOVATION CHECKLIST on pages 32-33 of this document and all other relevant items.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3108/22/2024[Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
PRE-RENOVATION CHECKLIST
☐ Verify location of existing devices
☐ Verify system capacity
☐ Provide a list of existing non-compliant items and/or safety issues
Please rate the condition of the existing plumbing lines. Provide or attach details.
☐ GOOD ☐ FAIR ☐ POOR
Please rate the condition of the existing plumbing lines. Provide or attach details.
☐ GOOD ☐ FAIR ☐ POOR
☐ Smoke Test of existing sewer lines.
☐ Provide a list of existing non-compliant items and/or safety issues
☐ Supply
☐ Return
☐ Temperature sensor
Division 21: Fire Suppression
Division 22: Division 22: Plumbing
Division 23: Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning
32 [Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
☐ Building Automation System (BAS)
☐ Provide a list of existing non-compliant items and/or safety issues
☐ Verify locations of electrical panels and number of spare circuits, if applicable
☐ Verify locations and condition of emergency and egress lighting
☐ Verify if nLight Controls are installed and device locations (including connected bridge/ gateway or nearest nLight bridge and gateway)
☐ Verify locations and functionality of BRG clocks and code blue devices
☐ Verify location of existing fire alarm devices
☐ Provide a list of existing non-compliant fire alarm items and/or safety issues
Please rate the condition of the existing plumbing lines. Provide or attach details.
☐ GOOD ☐ FAIR ☐ POOR
☐ Flag locations of existing sprinkler heads
☐ Test condition of existing irrigation lines
Please rate the condition of the existing irrigation system. Provide or attach details.
☐ GOOD WORKING ☐ PARTIALLY WORKING ☐ NON – WORKING
Division 25: Integrated Automation
Division 26: Electrical
Division 28: Electronic Safety & Security/ Fire Systems
Division 32: Irrigation
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3308/22/2024[Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
1.02 PHASING PLAN
A. TCCD will be continuously occupying portions of existing buildings and campuses. A phasing plan
shall be developed in order for work to be carried out carefully and in an orderly manner to minimize
interference with the daily operations and with adjacent portions of the structures to remain. The
construction team shall submit this plan to TCCD for review.
B. All efforts shall be made to minimize the impact of construction on building services to existing
portions of the building or campus. Such building services include but are not limited to, HVAC,
supply water, sanitary sewer, electrical, gas, fire alarm, fire suppression system, and internet
service. When required to interrupt such services the phasing plan should be developed so that the
interruption of service occurs during times with the least impact on building and campus functions.
When fire alarm and or fire suppression systems are planned to be interrupted the phasing plan must
be coordinated with the AHJ to establish requirements for any temporary protection, and should be
reported to FM Global Customer Services.
C. Design team shall minimize the impact of new construction and additions on existing trees.
D. Design team and Construction team shall incorporate the operation of parking lots, roads, and
sidewalks in the phasing plan. The phasing plan shall also provide for temporary egress within
buildings and from buildings to the right of way where required.
E. Design team and Construction team shall review existing drawings and survey for underground
utilities. Relocation of any existing utilities shall be part of the project causing the need for relocation.
F. Coordinate all known shut downs of any building or campus utility or service with TCCD at least 3
weeks prior to the scheduled date.
1.03 DEMOLITION
A. Demolition operations and protection shall conform to all requirements of all applicable codes and
authorities having jurisdiction over the project where demolition activity may be required.
B. Specific project plan of demolition activity shall be developed by the construction team in detail and
reviewed with the TCCD prior to commencement of any demolition operations.
C. Comprehensive liability insurance and other insurance policies shall be required of contractors
performing such operations in amount specified by TCCD and through insuring underwriters approved
by TCCD.
D. No explosives shall be used without prior approval of TCCD.
E. Dust, dirt and debris from demolition operations shall be contained to prevent spreading of such
matter. Appropriate safeguards should be observed during demolition. These include control of all
ignition sources and good housekeeping.
F. On a per project basis the design team shall coordinate with TCCD to determine if all hazardous, toxic
or other dangerous materials should be removed from premises to be demolished prior to demolition
using licensed approved contractors and methods as may be applicable to such materials, or if such
scope of work is to be included in the contract for general construction.
34 [Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
G. Demolition site shall be isolated from the public and all personnel and equipment not required for the
accomplishment of demolition.
H. Adequate security precautions and enforcement shall be required. All protections shall be taken to
provide maximum life/safety for project personnel and public.
I. Prior to commencement of demolition operations, utility connections of all types (including but not
necessarily limited to water, natural gas, sewer service, electrical power, telephone/data line service,
etc.) shall be disconnected, closed off and properly secured. Full coordination with utility provider
companies, agencies and TCCD shall be made. Reference the requirements for field verification of
existing conditions including subsurface investigation.
J. Demolition operations shall take place ONLY at times approved by TCCD.
K. After existing buildings are demolished, the location of all existing building foundations remaining in
the new building footprint shall be surveyed by the construction team and tied back to the benchmark
shown on the site survey. The construction team shall provide a plan to the Architect and TCCD
showing the existing foundation coordinates, diameter, and dimensions once the foundation survey
has been performed so the location can be coordinated with new foundations.
L. After demolition operations are completed, all debris, trash and other contamination of project site
caused by operations shall be completely removed from the site and properly disposed of.
M. Note that contractor is to remove existing room signs and turnover to TCCD.
1.04 GEOTECHNICAL
A. A comprehensive geotechnical investigation may be performed for all construction projects, at the
determination of TCCD. The design team shall advise TCCD when in the design team’s opinion a
geotechnical investigation is warranted by the project scope.
B. The structural engineer shall provide the geotechnical engineer with written general requirements
for subsurface exploration and analysis describing the extent of the work and submittals required. It
shall contain a description of the project including the building type, the anticipated loads and the
proposed number, locations, and depth of the soil borings. The geotechnical engineer shall insure
that the number, locations, and depth of the soil borings are adequate to achieve the objectives of the
general requirements for subsurface exploration and analysis.
C. The geotechnical engineer shall provide a geotechnical report with the analysis and recommendations
required by the general requirements for subsurface exploration and analysis.
D. The geotechnical/engineer shall provide recommendations for the ground floor consisting of the
applicable options derived from the geotechnical subsurface investigation.
E. Engineer shall include the boring logs from the geotechnical report in the bidding and construction
documents (as a section) of the specifications.
F. The geotechnical design values and parameters used to design the foundations shall be enumerated
on the structural drawings.
G. A geotechnical engineer may be retained by TCCD during construction to verify materials, monitor
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3508/22/2024[Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
earthwork operations, and subgrade preparation for foundation and slab-on-grade.
1.05 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL AND ABATEMENT
A. The design team shall specify that no asbestos containing material (ACM) is to be utilized on any
TCCD new construction.
B. The design team shall specify that the General Contractor shall agree contractually to not utilize
materials containing ACM and a letter of certification that no ACM was used shall be provided by the
General Contractor at the end of the project.
C. If during construction, any suspect ACM or other hazardous materials are encountered during field
verification, demolition or construction, the Design Team and the General Contractor agree to contact
TCCD immediately and to not disturb those materials.
D. The Design Team shall submit to the TCCD Environmental Department for review appropriate
assessment documents and specifications for removal/remediation of hazardous materials associated
with the project. All drawings shall include in the general notes a requirement to coordinate
abatement operations with the TCCD Environmental Department. Abatement operations for any
materials classified as hazardous or as a waste under the regulations of the Texas Commission on
Environmental Quality (30 TAC Chapter 335, Subchapter R) including but not limited to asbestos
containing materials, mold, chemical, biological, biomedical and toxic materials of all types shall
be carried out in strict accordance with applicable regulations and protocols of all agencies
having jurisdiction. All such wastes shall be properly characterized for disposal through process
knowledge, if possible, or through appropriate laboratory analytical tests with waste characterization
documentation provided to TCCD. Only items specifically requested in specifications to remain
such as attic stock or salvage and return to owner shall remain on-site, with ALL other debris to be
removed.
E. Firms and Contractors entering into an agreement with TCCD for any services related to hazard-
ous material or waste discovery, survey, analysis, abatement, containment, removal and disposal
shall be currently licensed, certified and registered, as required, to perform such work by the Texas
Department of Human Health Services, the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) and
all other applicable regulatory agencies including Federal, State and Local, as required. Proof of a
current license, certification or registration shall be required from all firms as part of entering into an
agreement with TCCD.
F. The following insurance coverage will be required to be maintained in effect by firms engaged in
hazardous materials handling/abatement in coverage amounts as approved by the TCCD for each
project:
1. Automobile and General Liability.
2. Workmen’s Compensation Insurance.
3. Special Liability Insurance covering operations related to Hazardous Materials.
4. Professional Liability Coverage for Consultants
G. Prior to commencement of operations, firms shall file all required notifications and obtain applicable
permits required for the performance of their work.
36 [Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
H. Firm or Contractor shall develop appropriate site specific Health and Safety Plans prior to
commencement of operations which provide detailed information regarding potential risks and safety
measures to be taken to help ensure safe operations.The Health and Safety Plans shall conform to the
requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120 and 29 CFR 1926.65
I. During operations related to Hazardous Materials or waste discovery, survey, analysis, abatement,
containment, removal and disposal, the project site shall be adequately secured and protected so as
to prevent risk of contamination of property and personnel, including the public, by such materials.
J. Hazardous Materials or wastes to be removed from the project site shall be handled, removed,
contained, accounted for and disposed of in strict accordance with applicable regulations affecting
the operations. Disposal is only to occur at appropriate licensed disposal facilities with TCCD to
provide approval of the Firm’s or Contractor’s selected facility. Written documentation of appropriate
disposal including waste manifests or other documentation shall be provided to TCCD with other
project documentation or separately, but it shall be provided not more than 60 days of the disposal.
K. Firms contracting with TCCD for operations related to Hazardous Materials shall agree to indemnify
and hold TCCD harmless from all liability whatsoever related to such operations using the form of
Agreement provided by TCCD.
1.06 TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY
Recommendations for survey task items prepared as a part of a Design Project may comply with the
following:
A. General Specifications
1. Procurement of surveying services may be determined on a per project basis.
2. TCCD may provide existing maps/plats/as-builts or utility plans for use by the consultant. The
design team is responsible for verification of any information provided by the District.
3. Surveys shall be prepared under the direct supervision of a Registered Professional Land
Surveyor.
B. Datum
1. The horizontal datum will be Texas State Plane Coordinate System – NAD 83 (CORS96), North
Central Zone 4202, scaled to surface values using the TXDOT standard combined scale factor for
Tarrant County.
2. Vertical datum will be tied to the benchmark network of the City where the site is located (if the
City has established such a network).
C. Deliverables (provided on CD/DVD media, or other method approved by TCCD)
1. Survey file in AutoCAD format
2. PDF
3. ASCII files of the point data
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3708/22/2024[Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
4. Written benchmark list with coordinates & elevations
5. Digital site photos
6. Surface file in XML format
7. Property descriptions in MS Word format
D. Topographic Design Surveys
1. Depending on the project, may include the following items:
a. Location of permanent improvements on, and immediately adjacent to, the project specific
limits.
b. Spot elevations on a 50-foot grid.
c. Contours on one foot intervals.
d. Top of curb and gutter elevations for paving on, and immediately adjacent to, the site.
e. Locations, common name and trunk diameter of trees over 3 inches in caliper or the outline of
heavily wooded areas.
f. Tree locations shall comply on a site specific basis per the requirements of the governing
jurisdiction.
g. Location of visible utilities and appurtenances.
h. Location and sizes of underground utilities based on available record information.
i. Rim elevation of all manholes, flow line elevation & direction for all gravity lines, top-nut for
all valves.
j. Finished floor elevations at all doorways and building entrances within project specific limits.
k. Contact DigTess/One-call and request markings for utilities within the project scope area.
l. Graphically plot, if any, the Special Flood Hazard Area from the Flood Insurance Rate Map
(FIRM).
m. Plot easements or setbacks of which the surveyor has knowledge or has been made aware.
n. Retrieve subdivision plats, maps and/or deeds delineating the ownership for the project,
including private property lines immediately adjoining the project limits.
o. Indicate scale, orientation, and date of the survey.
p. Include legend of symbols and abbreviations used on the survey.
q. Give area in square feet and acres based upon areas as shown in plat or deed instruments.
r. Note width of adjoining streets based on record documents.
s. Show recorded easements and rights-of-way, of which the surveyor has knowledge, and
identify owners (holders), including contact name and phone number.
t. Establish a minimum of two (2) on-site benchmarks & permanent control points per project.
38 [Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
E. Plats
1. Platting shall be performed on a site specific basis per the requirements of the governing
jurisdiction.
F. Easements
1. Easements shall be dedicated by separate instrument. Easement documents shall be prepared in
accordance with the rules adopted by the Texas Board of Professional Land Surveying.
G. Construction Staking
1. The general contractor for each project shall be responsible for providing all the construction
staking necessary to construct the project.
H. Subsurface Utility Engineering Services
1. Through the use of a qualified consultant, the services to be provided range from QL-D to QL-A as
defined by the ASCE standard guidelines (ASCE 38-02). The general description of these services
is as follows:
a. Quality Service Level D (QL-D):
1) This level of service consists of the collection of existing utility record information (as-
built) from utility purveyors, municipalities, counties and other agency suppliers within
the project area. The TCCD will provide any previously collected utility records, and the
design team will collect all available utility records.
b. Quality Service Level C (QL-C)
1) This level of service consists of field locating to obtain accurate horizontal position
of visible utility surface features for all of the utility systems located within the project
limits.
c. Quality Service Level B (QL-B Designating Services)
1) Designating services are to indicate, by marking with paint, the presence and
approximate horizontal location of subsurface utilities using geophysical prospecting
techniques, including, without limitations, electromagnetic, sonic and acoustical
techniques.
d. Quality Service Level A
1) Locating (Test Hole) Services - Locating services are to locate the accurate horizontal
and vertical position of subsurface utilities by excavating a test hole using vacuum
excavation techniques and equipment that is non-destructive to utilities.
1.07 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ENGINEERING AND TESTING
A. GENERAL
1. Testing and inspection services.
2. General requirements for TCCD’s testing laboratory services to perform quality control services
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3908/22/2024[Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
and testing. Testing lab services to be performed by the following company:
a. Construction Material Testing
1) Lab to be selected by owner per project.
3. Employment of a testing laboratory by TCCD in no way relieves Contractor’s obligation to perform
work in accordance with Contract Documents.
B. REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for
Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2011c.
2. ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2012.
3. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing
and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2012a.
4. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or
Testing; 2011.
5. ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2009.
6. The latest adopted edition of all standards references in this section shall apply, unless note
otherwise. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and a referenced standard, the
Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and the
Building Code; the more stringent shall govern.
7. FM Global Loss Prevention standards, RoofNav and FM Approval Guide.
C. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OWNERS QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
1. TCCD may employ various testing laboratories and/or geotechnical engineering services to
perform inspection services, testing of construction materials and verification testing services
and to transmit copies of test reports to Contractor. Sampling and testing that TCCD may require
is specified in this Section and in the various technical Sections requiring quality control or
verification testing. Cooperate with TCCD’s testing laboratory personnel, provide access to the
work, to manufacturer’s and fabricator’s operations, furnish incidental labor and facilities, and
samples for test and inspections, as specified.
a. Employment of testing laboratory to perform quality control tests is for benefit of TCCD in
confirming that performance and quality of the Work is in conformance with the Contract
Documents.
b. TCCD’s testing laboratory shall not be the same as Contractor’s testing laboratory used for
design and certification testing unless otherwise acceptable to the A/E and TCCD.
c. Where the terms “Inspector” and “Laboratory” are used, they mean and refer to an officially
designated and accredited inspector of the testing laboratory engaged by TCCD.
d. The inspecting agency shall make all inspections and perform all tests in accordance with the
rules and regulations of the building code, local authorities, the Specifications of the ASTM
40 [Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
and these Contract Documents.
e. Submittals
1) The Agency shall submit to TCCD’s Representative:
i. Detailed procedures
ii. Agenda
iii. Report forms
2. Earthwork
a. The testing lab shall verify suitable soil material at borrow material location by sampling and
testing material. Fill property requirements shall be as specified by the Structural Drawings
and Civil Drawings and Specification Sections and as recommended by the Geotechnical
Report. Provide one test for every 5000 square feet. Borrowed or imported soil found to be
unsuitable or contaminated is not permitted on the project site.
3. Commercial Testing Laboratories
a. In general, all Contracts awarded by TCCD will require that testing not performed by the
Contractor (i.e., hydrostatic testing of piping) or by the A/E (i.e., spot checking of air flow by
the Engineer) will be performed by a commercial testing laboratory selected by TCCD. The
cost of such commercial testing will be paid directly by TCCD. Retesting of non-conforming
work will also be paid by TCCD, but will be reinvoiced at cost to the Contractor. The number of
copies of test reports will be determined for each individual project but in general will include:
1) Two copies for TCCD, two copies for the General, Contractor, two copies for the
Architect, and one copy for the Structural Engineer.
b. Employment of the testing laboratory is for the benefit of TCCD in confirming that performance
and quality of the Work is in conformance with the Contract documents.
c. The engagement of a testing laboratory by TCCD in no way relieves the Contractor of its
responsibility. In full compliance of the Contract, the Contractor remains liable for the quality
of the materials, products/equipment installed, and satisfactory work performance.
D. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Laboratory Qualifications and Procedures:
a. Meet “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification,” latest
edition published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. Testing agencies shall
meet the requirements of ASTM E 329, “Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing
Agencies for Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction” and ASTM
E 543, “Determining the Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Agencies.” Submit a copy
accreditation certificate as received from a nationally recognized accreditation firm such as:
AASHTO, CCRL, AMRL, A2LA, etc. validating as meeting these requirements.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4108/22/2024[Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
b. The inspection and testing services of the testing agency shall be under the direction of
Registered Engineer licensed in the State of Texas, charged with engineering managerial
responsibility, and having at least five years engineering experience in inspection and testing
of construction materials.
c. Inspecting personnel monitoring concrete work shall be ACI certified inspectors.
d. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of
National Bureau of Standards during most recent tour of inspection. Include memorandum of
remedies of deficiencies reported by this inspection.
e. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to
either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.
f. Tests and inspections shall be conducted in accordance with specified requirements and if
not specified, in accordance with applicable standards of the American Society for Testing
and Materials and other recognized authorities as approved.
g. Primary inspectors performing structural steel inspection shall be currently certified AWS
Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI), in accordance with the provisions of AWS QCI, “Standard
and’ Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors.” The inspector may be
supported by assistant inspectors who may perform specific inspection functions under the
supervision of the inspector. Assistant inspectors shall be currently certified ASW Certified
Associate Welding Inspectors (CAWI). The work of assistant inspectors shall be regularly
monitored by the inspector, generally on a daily basis.
h. Contractor shall review scope of TCCD’s testing and advise any additional testing to be
provided by the construction team.
2. Laboratory Duties: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor. Upon notice, provide qualified
personnel to perform required tests and inspections. In performing tests and inspections,
Laboratory shall:
a. Comply with specified standards. Comply with building code requirements for “Special
Inspection” whether or not such inspections are specified herein. Refer to the Table of
Required Observations on the Structural Drawing sheets.
b. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. If the material
furnished and/or work performed fails to meet requirements of contract documents, laboratory
inspector shall promptly notify both the Contractor and the A/E of such failure.
c. Promptly notify TCCD’s Representative, Contractor and Architect of observed irregularities or
deficiencies in the Work.
d. A representative of TCCD’s testing laboratory, who has reviewed and is familiar with
the project and specifications, shall participate in all preconstruction conferences. It
shall coordinate material testing and inspection requirements with the Contractor and
its subcontractors consistent with the planned construction schedule. The laboratory
representative shall attend, throughout the course of the project, such conferences as may be
required or requested to address quality control issues. The laboratory representative shall
also attend any pre-construction meetings as required.
e. Laboratory personnel shall inspect and/or test materials, assemblies, specimens, and work
performed, including design mixes, methods and techniques and report to the Architect the
42 [Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
progress thereof.
3. Limits of Testing Laboratory Authority: Laboratory is not authorized to:
a. Release, revoke, alter, relax, or enlarge requirements of Contract Documents.
b. Approve or reject any portion of the work.
c. Perform any duties of the Contractor and subcontractors.
d. Laboratory technicians do not act as foremen, or perform other duties for Contractor. Work will
be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall not, in
any way, prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered.
e. The laboratory inspector is not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any
requirement of the Contract Documents or to approve or accept any portion of the work,
except where such approval is specifically called for in the Specifications.
4. Contractor’s Responsibilities: (For only the inspection and testing items noted within this CMET
technical design guidelines Section.)
a. Cooperate with laboratory personnel; provide access to work, to manufacturer’s and
fabricator’s operations wherever work is in preparation or progress.
b. Secure and deliver to the laboratory without cost to TCCD adequate quantities of
representative samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.
c. Furnish Incidental Labor and Facilities:
1) To provide access to work to be tested.
2) To obtain and handle samples at the project site or at the source of the product to be
tested.
3) To facilitate inspections and tests. Furnish such labor as is required to assist laboratory
personnel in obtaining and handling samples at the site.
4) For safe storage and curing of concrete test cylinders at project site and other test
samples as required for field curing by ASTM C31.
d. Costs of tests, samples, and mock-ups of substitute material, where the substitution is
requested by the Contractor and the tests are necessary in the opinion of the Architect to
establish equality with specified items; shall be borne by the Contractor.
e. Costs of tests, samples, and mock-ups performed solely for the benefit or convenience of the
Contractor.
f. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of construction operations to allow for laboratory to
complete any required checks or tests and to make assignment of personnel and scheduling
of tests.
g. TCCD’s testing laboratory will conduct additional tests at Contractor’s expense when initial
quality control testing indicates work is defective or does not conform to requirements.
Materials and workmanship not meeting the required standards or performance obligations are
to be removed and replaced. Replacement and subsequent testing shall be at the expense of
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4308/22/2024[Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
the Contractor.
h. Furnish concrete mix designs, in accordance with ACI 301, Section 3.9, made by an
independent testing laboratory or qualified concrete supplier. Where mix designs by
an independent testing laboratory are required, the laboratory shall be selected by the
Contractor, approved by the Architect, and paid by the Contractor.
i. Obtain required inspections or approvals of the building official when required. All inspection
requests and notifications required by the building code are the responsibility of the
Contractor.
j. Provide current welder certifications for each welder to be employed.
k. Furnish fabrication/erection inspection and testing of all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1,
Chapter 6.
l. Prequalification of all welding procedures to be used in executing the work.
E. SUBMITTALS
1. General: Testing laboratory shall promptly submit written report of each and every test and
inspection; two (2) copies each to Architect and Contractor, two (2) copies each to TCCD and one
copy to the Structural Engineer. Each report shall include:
a. Date issued.
b. Project title and number.
c. Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number.
d. Name of laboratory inspector and signature of project manager.
e. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
f. Record of temperature and weather conditions.
g. Date of test.
h. Identification of product and specification section.
i. Location of sample or test in the project.
j. Type of inspection or test.
k. Results of tests and observation regarding compliance with Contract Documents.
l. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect.
2. State in report all details of each inspection and test. Indicate compliance or noncompliance
with requirements of tile Contract Documents. Also state in report any and all unsatisfactory
conditions.
3. In addition to furnishing a written report, notify the Architect and the Contractor verbally of any
uncorrected conditions or failures to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents
4. At completion of each trade or branch of work requiring inspecting and testing, submit a final
certificate attesting to satisfactory completion of work and full compliance with requirements of
Contract Documents.
44 [Division 02] EXISTING CONDITIONS
5. Upon completion of building, testing laboratory shall furnish, to TCCD and Architect, statement
(certified by Notary Public) that all required tests and inspections were made in accordance with
requirements of Contract Documents.\
F. EXECUTION
1. Refer to design professional’s specificationsl.
END OF DIVISION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4508/22/2024[Division 03] CONCRETE
Concrete03
1.01 LOW VAPOR PERMABILITY ADMIXTURES
A. Design team shall consider use of LVPA for situations where moisture vapor is a concern.
B. All concrete used for floor slabs shall include a VOC free integral waterproofing and permeability
reducing admixture. The admixture shall be a permeability reducing admixture under hydrostatic
conditions (PRAH) as defined by the American Concrete Institute’s 212.3R-10 report on chemical
admixtures. Admixture shall carry a life of the concrete warranty and adhesion guarantee.
1.02 TRANSITION DETAILING
A. Design team to evaluate settlement potential and implement transition detailing at transitions from
structural foundation to flatwork at all pedestrian access points such as sidewalks. The design team
shall detail a hinged portion of the flatwork such that any shift in the subgrade shall not cause an
abrupt edge between flatwork and structural foundation.
1.03 EXTERIOR DOOR DETAILING
A. Design team to evaluate settlement potential and implement exterior door detail as follows:
1. Structural foundations shall be extended to provide porches below the full projection of all out-
swinging doors, five foot (5’) extension from the door frame minimum.
1.04 VOID FORMS
A. Trapezoidal carton forms are not allowed.
END OF DIVISION
46 [Division 04] MASONRY
Masonry04
1.01 GENERAL
A. The Tarrant County College District (TCCD) must approve all masonry intended for use on any
project within TCCD. Products not listed in this section shall not be used without approval by TCCD.
The design team shall compile product data for review during construction document coordination
meetings, and provide additional information as requested by TCCD.
B. EFFLORESCENCE
1. Particular care must be taken in the selection of materials and in design and detailing of exterior
walls to prevent efflorescence in brickwork. Certification shall be provided that brick and any
masonry trim material have passed the “wick” test (ASTM C67).
C. DISIMILAR MASONRY VENEER MATERIALS
1. A bond break material shall be provided between dissimilar masonry veneer materials; such as
between clay brick, stone, cast stone and CMU courses.
D. Single wythe exterior construction is not permitted.
E. Detail the return of masonry veneer at all door and window jambs. Due to increase in wall thickness
from continuous insulation requirements standard 4 1/2” aluminum storefront does not span from
back-up wall system to masonry veneer without returning the veneer.
1.02 CLAY UNIT MASONRY
A. Clay unit masonry used as facing brick shall be Grade SW, modular size (2 1/4” x 3 5/8” x 7 5/8”),
design team shall verify existing facing brick size and review any other size discovered with TCCD.
Manufacturer’s identification on any face is not acceptable.
B. Provide solid special shapes at special coursing corners such as soldiers, headers, rowlock, sill, etc.
Mitered brick corners are not acceptable.
C. Recessed and projected courses shall stop and return to flush 4” from intersection with dissimilar
materials that must be attached to the facing brick. Examples include aluminum storefront framing
systems, hollow metal door frames, and or sun shade and canopy devices.
D. SAMPLE BRICK PANELS
1. Design Professional shall specify that a sample brick panel selected for the project be laid up
with specified jointing for approval by TCCD prior to starting exterior face brick installation. The
design team shall specify the sample panel size, which will be proposed by the design team to
properly address the varied color and types of masonry included in the project.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4708/22/2024[Division 04] MASONRY
2. Brick Mock-up shall include the following if applicable:
a. Mortar including any varying colors
b. Joint sealants including any varying colors
c. Water repellents (treated and untreated surfaces for clarity)
d. All colors and types of masonry on project.
E. SURFACE WATER REPELLANT TREATMENT
1. Design team to evaluate requirement for surface water repellant treatment. All exterior masonry
work shall receive a water repellent treatment
F. MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
1. Exterior mortar shall have an integral liquid polymeric water repellent admixture.
2. Shall be factory pre-mixed.
3. Setting accelerators or antifreeze compounds are not permitted
1.03 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
A. Exterior masonry shall have an integral liquid polymeric water repellent admixture.
B. CMU with non-smooth surfaces such as split-face, rock face, strewn shall be stopped and returned to
smooth face 4” from intersections with dissimilar materials such as aluminum storefront, hollow metal
doors frames, sun shades, and canopy systems.
C. MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
1. Exterior mortar shall have an integral liquid polymeric water repellent admixture.
2. Shall be factory pre-mixed.
3. Only portland cement shall be used for mortar mix - no masonry cement.
D. Provide sash blocks with pre-formed rubber control joint at control joint locations. Control joint shall
be rubber not PVC.
E. Walls filled solid for sound shall be grouted not sand filled.
1.04 STONE
A. APPROVAL: Stone selections shall be reviewed by TCCD prior to being incorporated into the design
documents.
B. LIMESTONE shall be no closer than four (4) inches to grade, when adjacent to lawns and planting
areas.
48 [Division 04] MASONRY
C. ANCHORS, DOWELS, AND OTHER ACCESSORIES: Used in setting stone shall be stainless steel or
hot dip galvanized.
D. MARBLE: Marble shall be domestic. Edges of marble window stools shall be eased.
E. GRANITE: Granite shall be domestic. Granite may be specified for exterior stair treads when heavy
traffic is anticipated.
1.05 CAST STONE MASONRY
A. Shall be manufactured by a current member producer of the Cast Stone Institute
B. Specify that the anchorage and reinforcement of cast stone units shall be engineered by the
manufacturer.
C. Specify an average water absorption of 6% or less by dry weight when tested per ASTM C642 or
ASTM C1195
D. Shall have a minimum compressive strength of 6,500 psi at 28 days when tested per ASTM C 1194
1.06 COPING STONES
A. All coping stone joints shall be raked to a depth of 1/2-inch and filled with approved joint sealant.
B. Thru-wall flashing shall be installed beneath all coping stone installations.
1.07 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. WALL TIES
1. For Masonry veneer or facing to metal stud, concrete or CMU back-up shall be model 2-Seal tie
with 3/16” Dia. 2-Seal Byna-Lok wire tie as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard Co.or equal,
#75 Pos-I-Tie with 3/16” Dia. triangular wire tie as manufactured by Heckmann Building Products
or equal, Sure-Tie with 3/16” Dia. adjustable Sure-Tie triangle as manufactured by Wire Bond or
equal. Ties shall be hot dipped galvanized minimum. Wall ties that span more than 4 1/2” shall be
engineered.
B. JOINT REINFORCEMENT
1. Wire mesh type is prohibited. Trussed type is preferred over ladder type, except at grouted
reinforced CMU walls.
C. WEEP / VENT HOLES
1. Design veneer walls with a ‘drainage plane’ to allow water that penetrates the veneer to flow down
freely and drain through weep holes to the exterior.
2. Provide venting weeps at the top of each air space / cavity wall system.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4908/22/2024[Division 04] MASONRY
3. Open weeps, straws, and rope are not acceptable.
D. PLUG ANCHORAGE:
1. Use of wood or plastic is prohibited.
E. DRAINAGE MAT:
1. Mortar netting is to be used to protect and insure weeps remain functional during and after
construction.
1.08 THRU-WALL FLASHING
A. Thru-Wall flashing shall be a self-adhering polyester scrim reinforced 40-mil thick membrane
formulated with non-migrating non-liquid PVC plasticizer. Thru-wall flashing shall be tucked into the
back up substrate or mechanically attached with termination bars.
END OF DIVISION
50 [Division 05] METALS
Metals05
1.01 GENERAL
A. ORNAMENTAL METAL WORK (ARCHITECTURAL)
TCCD prefers that ornamental metal work shall be constructed of Schedule 40 clear anodized
aluminum or stainless steel as directed by TCCD per project.
1. Handrails including all fasteners and anchors shall be Schedule 40 clear anodized aluminum or
stainless steel as directed by TCCD per project.
2. Handrails in designated fire escapes shall be galvanized steel.
3. Handrails of rectangular cross sections are not acceptable.
4. Rails shall be oval or round.
5. Rails shall not terminate with open ends. They shall return to wall or in the case of an isolated
center rail, it shall return to the post.
6. Where rails change direction, the corner shall be made with as large a radius as possible.
B. CAPS
1. Where end caps or post caps are required, they should be permanently fastened by welding or
with rivets or screws that cannot be easily removed.
C. STEEL STAIRS
1. Stair treads shall have a non-slip surface. Where pan-type treads are used to receive terrazzo or
other fill material such as concrete, provide slip-resistant nosings.
1.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
D. ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL: Minimize its use due to additional associated
costs.
E. WEATHERING STEEL: Avoid all “weathering” steel including “weathering” sheet metal.
1.03 STEEL JOISTS
A. MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE of compliance with Steel Joist Institute Specifications is required.
B. PRIME COAT AND TOUCH-UP PAINTING will be considered adequate for joists, except where
subjected to moisture or where exposed to view.
C. The use of steel joists in crawl spaces shall be reviewed by TCCD for approval.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 5108/22/2024[Division 05] METALS
1.04 STEEL DECKING
A. MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE of compliance with Steel Deck Institute Specifications is required.
B. PRIME COAT AND TOUCH-UP PAINTING will be considered adequate for non-roof metal deck, except
where subjected to moisture or where exposed to view.
C. G60 galvanized coatings shall be required for all roof decks.
D. HANGING LOADS: Architectural finishes and mechanical, electrical and plumbing equipment shall not
be hung directly from steel roof deck.
E. FM Approved in RoofNav and securement per FM Global Data Sheets / RoofNav.
1.05 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. GALVANIZING REQUIREMENTS: All exterior ferrous metals shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
B. MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING FOR ELECTRICAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS: If electrical equipment is
attached to support framing, the Electric Contractor will provide and install that metal framing.
C. USE OF INK MARKING PENS ON SURFACES of any kind of materials is prohibited. Experience has
shown that such marks bleed through paint and other finishes.
D. GRATINGS: Ferrous gratings shall be hot-dip galvanized. Galvanized hardware cloth shall be installed
under all areaway grating.
END OF DIVISION
52 [Division 06] WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
Woods, Plastics and Composites06
1.01 SHEATHING
A. Sheathing shall be fiberglass mat faced gypsum. Paper or foil faced products are not acceptable.
1.02 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1. As a standard, specify work conforming to Custom Grade quality standards established by the
current edition of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. Any item not given a specific quality grade
shall meet the standards of Premium grade.
a. Exception: “Economy Grade” shall be acceptable for millwork installed in custodian closets,
warehouses and storage rooms. As approved by TCCD.
b. Specialty Areas as approved by TCCD: Stain-finish millwork shall conform to Premium Grade.
2. On large projects, TCCD may require submission of base, upper and or full height mock-up units.
Design team shall coordinate with TCCD.
3. The design team shall propose to TCCD materials for use at wet and moisture prone areas. These
materials should be selected based on resistance to damage from moisture and resistance to
mold and mildew growth. Basis of design product is Corian by Dupont. Cultured marble is not
acceptable.
4. Specify full extension drawer slides.
5. Adjustable Shelves:
a. Prefer maximum shelf span of 24” and maximum overhang of 8”.
b. Design as modular units so that they can be interchanged with other shelving units in the
Project. The design team shall coordinate the module size with existing conditions.
c. Design with integral book ends at each end of unit.
6. Coat Hooks:
a. Provide minimum 3-1/2” clearances behind door for coat hook.
7. Cabinet Door Hardware:
a. Specify European, self-closing concealed hinges
b. Where remodeling, match existing hardware style as close as possible
c. A mock-up cabinet may be required for approval by the Architect and TCCD. Review with
TCCD per project to establish requirements.
d. Solid Surfacing: Basis of Design: Gibraltar Solid Surfacing by Wilsonart or Corian Surfaces
by DuPont.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 53
e. District Standard for cabinet pulls is satin chrome 4” metal wire pull. Review with TCCD per
project
8. Coordinate lockset and keying requirements with TCCD.
a. All built-in millwork and architectural woodwork inside the building, such as cabinets and
drawers in all classrooms, laboratories, offices/work areas, break rooms and others shall be
provided with locks. Coordinate exact locations with TCCD.
b. Pin tumblers only; wafer not acceptable
END OF DIVISION
54 [Division 07] THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Thermal and Moisture Protection07
1.01 VAPOR PERMABLE AIR BARRIERS
A. Fluid applied or sheet good vapor permeable membrane air barriers should be specified for use in
cavity wall systems based on the type of rain screen material being provided. Such products should
have certified air leakage and vapor permeance rates that exceed the requirements of ASTM E2178.
All ancillary products related to the system including flashing of openings should come from one
manufacturer or be a listed approved product for use with this system. The design team shall verify
compatibility of materials and installation procedures with the thru-wall flashing system used per
Division 4.
1.02 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. Self-adhering sheet waterproofing shall be used at all inside or outside corners of the exterior
envelope, changes in substrate support system, and behind exterior rain screen expansion joints.
B. PRODUCTS The product shall be 40 mils thick with polyester scrim reinforcement formulated with non-
migrating, non-liquid PVC plasticizer.
1.03 MECHANICAL ROOM FLOOR COATING
A. Provide low VOC, 100% acrylic, waterborne floor coatings. Provide integral curb and floor drains.
Design team shall coordinate with TCCD for locations.
B. The following are minimum requirements to assure adequately designed waterproof floors for machine
and equipment rooms and other areas subject to flooding from equipment failure or seepage from
exterior sources.
C. DRAWINGS shall fully detail the installation of the membrane. Continuous membrane risers shall be
provided above the finished floor surface at vertical walls, pads, curbs, pipes, and ducts through the
slab. Risers shall be at least as high as the lowest curb and shall be bonded to the vertical surface.
Concrete foundation walls around elevator pits and around basements, from grade to footings, shall
be treated with membrane waterproofing. When elevators open into areas subject to flooding, opening
sills must be above membrane riser height to keep flood water out of elevator shaft.
1.04 DAMPROOFING
A. BITUMINOUS TYPE: Surfaces of exterior walls and walls below grade, which will receive an applied
finish, shall be primed and coated with bituminous dampproofing prior to installation of furring.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 55
1.05 BUILDING INSULATION
A. Thermal: The design team shall recommend building insulation for review and approval by TCCD.
Where batt insulation is proposed for use for exterior envelope thermal purposes it shall be unfaced
fiberglass batt or equal. Spray applied foam insulation systems may be acceptable; the design
team shall analyze the vapor permeance of such system and coordinate with the HVAC engineer
to fully account for air moisture content equilibrium between conditioned spaces and the outdoor
environment.
B. Sound: Design in accordance with good practice to achieve conventional ambient noise levels
qualified in Noise Criteria (NC) defined in current ASHRAE Applications Volume, Chapter 42 and ANSI
S1.8 Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels – ASA 84.
1. The ambient sound level of an occupied space is not to exceed the following NC listed for
its respective typical occupancy, unless specifically directed otherwise. These conventional
standards of the level of ambient noise are independent of and prior to the installation of any
Owner-furnished equipment and furniture, unless specified otherwise.
Typical Occupancy Maximum Noise Criteria (NC)
Offices 30
Conference Rooms 30
Open Office Areas 40
Business machine areas 45
Public Circulation 45
Classrooms and Lecture 30
Public Areas 40
C. Partition walls from floor to deck surrounding learning spaces shall be provided with acoustical
fiberglass batt insulation the full thickness of the partition cavity.
1.06 ROOF INSULATION
A. ROOF DECK INSULATION: The Polyisocyanurate insulation boards should have felt or glass fiber
mat facer on both major surfaces. Compatibility with roofing materials or separation is mandatory for
wood, treated wood, fibrous materials, insulation, etc. Roof insulation should be FM Approved, listed
within the specific RoofNav assembly materials.
1.07 FIREPROOFING
A. Where required, fireproofing shall be cementitious fireproofing in lieu of mineral fiber fireproofing.
At exposed conditions intumescent materials may be used only with the prior approval of TCCD. All
fireproofing shall be designed per UL requirements and shall be detailed and specified as part of the
construction documents. The design team shall inform TCCD if a specific UL assembly is required
for a project that includes products not approved within the Technical Design Guidelines and clearly
identify why the use of another UL assembly is not possible. In addition, fireproofing should be FM
Approved listed in Approval Guide.
1.08 SKYLIGHTS
56 [Division 07] THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
A. SKYLIGHTS must have TCCD approval for types, location and application.
B. Skylights in VSH areas should be FM Approved with a SH rating tested using 2 inch diameter ice balls
and provided with separate hail guards per FM Global Data Sheet 1-34.
1.09 SEALANTS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: The following conditions shall be included in the specifications:
1. INTERIOR: Use acrylic type suitable for application of paint.
2. EXTERIOR: Use two-part polyurethane.
1.10 ROOFING SYSTEM
A. TCCD has a standing maintenance agreement for existing roof areas. For new roofs, performance
requirements have been included in Appendix A. Coordinate with TCCD to confirm existing roof areas
warranty requirements. The design team is responsible for reviewing the sample specification and
editing as required per the project scope, warranty requirements, and code requirements of the AHJ.
The design team shall notify TCCD of any alterations of the specification.
B. Roofing systems should be FM Approved in RoofNav with appropriate wind rating, hail rating (VSH),
and Zone 2 and 3 securement enhancements.
1.11 ROOFING SPECIALITIES
A. WALKWAYS: Provide per roof system manufacturer’s specifications. Refer to Appendix A, section 2.06
for more information.
1.12 EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
A. The design professional shall review project conditions and propose types and materials for
expansion joints and expansion joint https://www.yahoo.com/lifestyle/one-inflammatory-carb-never-
eat-120024000.html cover systems manufactured by the same roof system manufacturer.
1.13 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. FLASHING GUARANTEE requirements apply to this work. Note that curb heights must comply with
manufacturer’s requirements for warranty of roofing systems.
2. PLUG ANCHORAGE by use of wood, or plastic is prohibited.
3. No power or powder driven tools to be used unless approved for use by TCCD.
B. MATERIALS
1. METAL FLASHING: Copper, PVDF coated 24ga galvanized steel, or Austenitic stainless steel
24 gauge type 304 minimum. No aluminum or uncoated galvanized steel. They should be FM
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 57
Approved in RoofNav with appropriate wind ratings and also comply with FM Global Data Shhets
1-49.
2. GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS: Copper, PVDF coated 24ga galvanized steel, Austenitic stainless
steel 24 gauge type 304 minimum, or enamel baked steel. No aluminum or uncoated galvanized
steel.
3. FASCIAS AND GRAVEL STOPS: Aluminum, copper, PVDF coated 24ga galvanized steel, Austenitic
stainless steel 24 gauge type 304 minimum. Aluminum sections, if used, must be extruded, be for
appearance, and not function as part of the weatherproofing.
4. PITCH PAN OR POCKETS: Use of pitch pans or pockets only if approved by TCCD. Items
penetrating roofing must be flashed with sheet metal secured with clamps or with box curbs
welded, or otherwise secured, to the penetrating items.
5. COPINGS: Copper, PVDF (Kynar) coated 24 gauge galvanized steel, or Austenitic stainless steel
24 gauge type 304 minimum. No aluminum or galvanized steel.
1.14 METAL WALL PANELS AND ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS
A. When proposed for use on a project the design team shall coordinate with TCCD to establish
minimum performance standards.
B. ACM/MCM wall panels with core materials are only permitted when the core is fire retardant, the wall
panel has passed a national recognized test (such as NFPA 285 or BS 8414), panel facers are of
aluminum or a higher melting temperature metal alloy, non-combustible insulation is provided within
the wall behind the panel, weather resistance barriers are not exposed to air withing the cavity and
covered with a thermal barrier or non-combustible insulation / substrate, and wind resistance for
zones 4 and 5 plus applicable safety factors.
C. Simple sheet metal panels for walls without a core do not have to follow the fire rating criteria listed
above.
END OF DIVISION
58 [Division 08] OPENINGS
Openings08
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. EXTERIOR DOORS shall be hollow metal or aluminum.
B. MULTIPLE DOORS shall have keyed removable mullions.
C. DOORS FOR USE BY PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES.
1. The design team shall coordinate with TCCD to determine locations and type for power door
operators.
D. EXTERIOR DOORS shall be prepared for electronic access control system by providing 3/4”raceway
from electronic latch recess (confirm location with TCCD) to accessible space above ceiling that
provides a path back to electronic access control system door controller. An additional 3/4” raceway
shall be provided from the card reader location to the electronic access control system door
controller.
E. INTERIOR DOORS For rooms to receive electronic access control as directed by TCCD provide 3/4”
raceway from electronic latch recess (confirm location with TCCD) to accessible space above ceiling
that provides a path back to electronic access control system door controller.
F. DEMOLITION/REMODELING: Removal of existing Door Hardware shall be coordinated with the TCCD.
All Door Hardware shall remain the property of TCCD and shall be returned to TCCD
G. Specify tested windows / doors per FM Global Data Sheet 1-28.
1.02 DOOR AND FRAMES - HOLLOW METAL
A. EXTERIOR DOORS shall be not less than 16-gauge metal. The top channel of each metal door shall
be turned web up, to avoid a dirt pocket or moisture trap. Louvered doors and full glazed doors shall
have ten (10) inch bottom rails.
B. INTERIOR DOORS shall be not less than 18-gauge metal. Louvered doors and full glazed doors shall
have ten (10) inch bottom rails.
C. ACCESS DOORS shall be provided at plumbing chases and in ceiling areas. Coordinate with
Plumbing and HVAC Contractors. Type and material to be reviewed and approved by TCCD.
D. STEEL FRAMES shall be one-piece, welded frames of not less than 16-gauge metal for interior doors.
Frames in interior walls through eight (8) inch thickness shall be full width of wall. Knock-down frames
are generally prohibited; however, such frames may be used in movable partitions. In remodeling
work, permission may be granted by TCCD to use knock-down frames if conditions justify their use.
Frames for exterior doors shall be one-piece, welded frames of 14 gauge or heavier metal. All frames
shall be heavily reinforced at hinge, strike and closer locations. Frames shall be primed and painted.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 59
1.03 DOOR AND FRAMES - ALUMINUM
A. ENTRANCE DOORS
1. WIDE STILE ONLY.
2. Dimensions of components shall be at least: Metal thickness - 1/8 inch, Head rail size - 6-1/2 x
1-3/4 or 6 x 2 inches, Stile size - 5-1/2 x 1-3/4 or 5 x 2 inches, Bottom rail size - 12-1/2 x 1-3/4 or
12 x 2 inches, and Hardware reinforcement - 1/4 inch thick metal material.
3. Doors shall be fully glazed. Door glazing shall be ¼” single pane unless required otherwise by
code, and shall not be tinted.
1.04 GLASS
A. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. For Exterior glazing, use of clear Low-E, insulated glass is preferred. Verify color of glass with
TCCD during design stage, as well as shading devices.
B. WARRANTY
1. Two (2) years minimum, five (5) years or more preferred. Review with TCCD per project.
2. Specify manufacturer’s warranty minimum to include:
a. Sealed glass units from seal failure, inter-pane dusting or misting, and replacement of same.
b. Reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same.
c. De-lamination of laminated glass and replacement of same.
C. EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Design team to coordinate with TCCD to develop requirements for additional materials.
1.05 ALUMINUM FIXED WINDOWS
A. APPROVAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Verify type and color of window system glass with TCCD during design stage.
1.06 WOOD DOORS
A. All wood doors shall be at least 1-3/4” thick to accommodate mortise locks.
B. WOOD VENEERS: Judicious selection of face veneers shall be exercised. The contractor shall be
required to make a grain selection, prior to placing wood doors in the more prominent or public
places, subject to the approval of the Design Professional. Wood doors in, or adjacent to, wood
paneling will have veneers to match the paneling.
60 [Division 08] OPENINGS
C. VISION PANELS: The following doors shall have 10” by 30” vision panels with glazing to meet
applicable codes:
1. Classrooms.
2. Offices.
3. All other doors designated by TCCD.
D. WARRANTY: Interior doors, except some fire rated doors, shall be flush type, solid core, and
hardwood, with life of installation warranty. Warranty shall include, new door finishing, and hanging
of doors at no cost to TCCD.
1.07 FIRE RATED DOORS
A. MINERAL CORE LABELED DOORS ARE PROHIBITED because the narrow rails and stiles, required to
obtain U.L. approval, are expected to reduce the service life and security of these doors in rigorous
service.
1.08 SPECIAL DOORS
A. ACCESS DOORS TO MACHINE AND EQUIPMENT SPACES shall be hollow metal doors in 4-sided steel
frames, minimum size 2’-0” by 4’-0”. All lockable access doors shall be equipped with Schlage Everest
D Restricted Interchangeable Core (IC) Full Size Cylinders or as otherwise approved by TCCD.
1.09 OVERHEAD DOORS
A. To be specified by design professional for any location required by the project.
B. To be push-button electrically operated.
1.10 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS
A. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. WIDE STILE ONLY.
2. Specify thermally decoupled mullions. Deeper mullion profiles are preferred versus veneer returns
to accommodate wall thickness due to continuous insulation requirements of energy conservation
codes.
3. 2” sight line
4. Finish to match existing, anodized preferred, PVDF coated, must be approved by TCCD.
1.11 HARDWARE
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 61
A. GENERAL
1. SUMMARY
a. TCCD has selected the listed products which are to be used as a standard for all TCCD
projects. Items listed as NO SUBSTITUTIONS are to be provided without exception.
B. HARDWARE SCHEDULE: Submit for approval two (2) typewritten copies and 1 digital copy of the
Hardware Schedule, including Product Data sheets, listing each door or opening included in the
Project. Schedule hardware for all doors or openings or otherwise required to allow for proper
function of each door or opening as intended.
1. The completed Hardware Schedule must be submitted for approval prior to the issue of
construction documents for bidding or permitting to facilitate the performance of other Work
critical to the Project schedule.
C. KEYING SCHEDULE: After approval of the Hardware Schedule coordinate the preparation of the
Keying Schedule with the TCCD Electronic Access Control Department.
1. The Keying Schedule shall include the door number, level of keying for each door, lock type, key
symbols, and doors controlled.
2. The Project shall be “NGGM or SGGM” Master keyed as directed by TCCD.
3. The number of keys provided per lockset or cylinder shall be as directed by TCCD.
4. Submit two (2) copies of the completed detailed Keying Schedule to TCCD for approval.
D. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS: Furnish not less than three (3) sets of any specialized tools or equipment
necessary for the continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of Door
Hardware.
E. WIRING DIAGRAMS: A detailed wiring diagram shall be provided, with the Hardware Schedule
submittal for approval, for each item of electrical Door Hardware.
1. Provide complete and detailed system operation descriptions and elevation diagrams specifically
developed for each opening that requires electrified hardware, except openings that require only
magnetic hold-opens or door position switches.
2. Provide approved detailed wiring diagrams with each item of Door Hardware at time of delivery to
the General Contractor.
3. Verify and coordinate installation of electrified Door Hardware with electrical systems installer.
F. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENT: Door Hardware has been specified by manufacturer for the purpose of
establishing a basis for quality, design and operational function.
2. Obtain each type of hardware from a single manufacturer.
3. Hardware Sets within this Section are not complete with respect to thickness of doors, hand,
backset, method of fastening, and other detail requirements.
62 [Division 08] OPENINGS
4. Provide concealed fastening wherever possible. Where exposed, use countersunk Phillips oval-
head type screws, except flat head for hinges.
5. Do not attach hardware to metal frames and metal doors with self-tapping or sheet metal screws.
6. Thru Bolts: Anchor overhead door closers to fire-rated wood doors with thru bolts.
G. DOOR HARDWARE SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS: The Door Hardware Supplier shall have been
furnishing Door Hardware to projects of similar size and difficulty in the vicinity for a period of not
less than five (5) years, and who is, or who employs an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who
will be available at reasonable times during the course of Work for consultation about Door Hardware
required for the Project.
1. ARCHITECTURAL HARDWARE CONSULTANT: The AHC shall be certified by the Door and
Hardware Institute and shall have not less than five (5) years of experience with Door Hardware
on projects of similar size and difficulty.
2. CERTIFICATION: After completion of Door Hardware installation the Door Hardware Supplier
shall submit written certification attesting that all Door Hardware has been installed in accordance
with manufacturer’s templates and instructions.
3. DOOR HARDWARE INSTALLER: The Door Hardware Installer shall have been installing Door
Hardware on projects of similar size and difficulty in the vicinity for a period of not less than three
(3) years, and is certified in the installation of Door Hardware required for this Project, including
the specific requirements of this Section.
H. EXISTING DOORS AND HARDWARE
1. All hardware removed from existing doors is to be turned over to TCCD.
I. PRODUCT STANDARDS
1. HINGES
a. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1) Hager Hinge Co., St. Louis, MO.
2) McKinney, ASSA ABLOY, Scranton, PA.
3) Ives, Indianapolis, IN.
4) Or Equal as approved by TCCD
b. BUTT HINGES: ANSI A156.1 and A156.7.
1) Five knuckle design with square corners.
2) All hinges shall be full mortise ball bearing type.
3) Flat button tip and matching plug.
4) Non-removable pins for out-swinging exterior doors and for interior reverse bevel doors
equipped with locking device; safety stud also acceptable. Non-rising pin for other
doors.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 63
5) Non-ferrous construction at locations exposed to exterior atmosphere.
6) Heavy weight for doors 40 inches and over in width and for fire rated doors over 8 feet
in height. Heavy weight also required for high frequency doors where indicated in
Hardware Schedule. Standard weight at other doors.
7) Anti-friction type for doors equipped with closers.
c. MINIMUM NUMBER HINGES:
1) Doors 5 feet or less in height: Two (2) each.
2) Doors over 5 feet and not over 90 inches: Three (3) each.
3) Doors over 90 inches: One (1) for each additional 30 inches height or fraction thereof.
4) Dutch Doors: Continuous Hinge.
d. MINIMUM SIZE AND GAUGE:
1) Doors 3 feet in width or less: 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 inches, 0.134 gauge.
2) Doors over 3 feet and up to 40 inches: 5 x 4-1/2 inches, 0.146 gauge.
3) Doors over 40 inches: 5 x 4-1/2 inches, 0.190 gauge.
4) Fire rated Doors over 8 feet in height: Sized as indicated above, except not less than
0.180 gauge.
e. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS:
1) Heavy duty full mortise non-ferrous, brass bronze or stainless steel hinge.
i. Hager.
ii. McKinney.
iii. Ives.
iv. or approved equal.
2) Heavy duty full mortise steel hinge.
i. Hager.
ii. McKinney.
iii. Ives.
iv. or approved equal.
3) Standard duty full mortise non-ferrous, brass bronze or stainless steel hinge.
i. Hager.
ii. McKinney.
iii. Ives.
iv. or approved equal.
4) Standard duty full mortise steel hinge.
i. Hager.
ii. McKinney.
iii. Ives.
iv. or approved equal.
f. CONTINOUS HINGES (Required on All Exterior Doors and Store Fronts):
64 [Division 08] OPENINGS
1) Heavy Duty Full Mortise.
i. McKinney MCK-112HD.
ii. Roton 780-112HD.
iii. Ives 112HD.
iv. or approved equal.
2) Electric Power Transfer (EPT) at electrical openings or electrified hinges.
i. Von Duprin VDEPT-10C.
ii. Bommer Electrified Hinge
iii. or as approved by TCCD
3) Armored Door Cords with Caps. (Use only when EPT will not work).
i. Schlage Electronics 798C-18.
ii. or approved equal.
2. LOCKING AND LATCHING DEVICES
a. MORTISE LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS:
1) Acceptable Prod ucts:
i. Schlage L series, B rose, Cast Lever 03, 626 finish.
ii. NO SUBSTITUTIONS
2) Locksets shall be heavy duty mortise type with1” throw stainless steel deadbolt and
3/4” throw stainless steel latch with anti-friction tongue.
3) Functions and design as indicated in Hardware Schedule.
4) Faceplate: 8” by 1-1/4” x 7/32”.
5) Strike: L9000 series ANSI curved lip strike 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” x 1-3/16” lip to center.
i. Provide strikes with proper lip length to protect trim of the frame, but not to project
more than 1/8” beyond frame trim or the inactive leaf of a pair of doors.
ii. Equip with dust box.
b. MORTISE AUXILIARY DEADBOLTS: ANSI A156.5, Grade 1.
1) Acceptable Products:
i. Schlage L400 Series, 626 finish.
ii. NO SUBSTITUTIONS
2) Faceplate: 1-1/4” x 5-19/32” with finish to match trim on hinge side of door.
3) Backset: 2-3/4”.
4) Dead Bolt: 1” throw.
5) Strike: A115.3, 3-5/8” x1-1/8”, no lip.
i. Equip with dust box.
ii. Finish matching trim on hinge side of door.
c. MORTISE ELECTRIFIED LOCKS:
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 65
1) Acceptable Products:
i. Schlage L9000 Series electric lock, 626 finish.
ii. NO SUBSTITUTIONS
2) Voltage: 24V AC or 24V DC.
d. GANG TOILETS:
1) Gang toilet doors in rated walls furnish L9070 classroom lock, for lockdown during
maintenance.
2) Gang toilet doors in non-rated walls furnish L463 classroom deadlock, for lockdown
during maintenance.
3. CYLINDERS
a. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1) Schlage.
2) NO SUBSTITUTIONS
b. Provide all cylinders for locksets, deadlocks, exit devices, and other control and locking
devices indicated in Hardware Schedule from one manufacturer with 626 finish.
1) Provide cylinders for locking devices specified in other sections; coordinate
requirements with following Sections.
i. 08310 - Access Doors and Panels.
ii. 08331 - Overhead Coiling Doors.
iii. 08332 - Overhead Coiling Grilles.
iv. 08411 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.
2) Equip all cylinders with required rings.
3) Equip all cylinders with required tail piece for mortise locks, deadbolts, and exit devices.
c. All lock cylinders shall be Schlage Interchangeable Core (IC) Full Size (Large Format)
Cylinders six (6) pin with the cores factory keyed to TCCD’s existing Great Grand Master Key
System as directed by TCCD.
1) NO SUBSTITUTIONS
d. INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR DOORS: Where access control is specified, or in place, use
Schlage Primus Interchangeable Core (IC) Full Size Cylinders, otherwise use Schlage Everest
D Restricted Interchangeable Core (IC) Full Size Cylinders.
4. KEYS AND KEYING
a. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER:
1) Schlage.
2) NO SUBSTITUTIONS
b. Provide only factory original nickel silver cut keys in the following quantities or as otherwise
instructed by the TCCD Access Control Department.
1) NGGM or SGGM Master Keys : Coordinate with TCCD
66 [Division 08] OPENINGS
2) Master Keys (MK): Coordinate with TCCD
3) Change Keys (per lock): Coordinate with TCCD
c. The Door Hardware Supplier shall coordinate the preparation of the Project Keying Schedule
with the TCCD Access Control Department as required in Paragraph D of the Submittals
portion of this Section.
d. All cylinder cores are to be factory keyed.
e. Identification and Control: Stamp or emboss permanent keys with identification codes as
directed by TCCD.
f. Permanent cores and keys will be forwarded directly to TCCD.
g. During construction all doors shall be equipped with temporary construction cores provided
by the Door Hardware Supplier. Deliver Construction Master Keys to the General Contractor at
Project site. Other openings will be secured at the direction of TCCD.
h. Permanent cylinder cores shall be installed by the General Contractor at the time of
Substantial Completion under supervision of TCCD. Temporary construction cores shall be
returned to the Door Hardware Supplier by the General Contractor.
5. KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
a. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1) Key Control Systems, Inc., Bechtelsville, PA.
2) Lund Equipment Co., Inc., Bath, OH.
3) Telkee, Inc., Glen Riddle, PA.
4) or approved equal.
b. CABINET: Surface mounted [Recess mounted] hinged panel type cabinet [multiple drawer
type floor cabinet] manufactured from cold-rolled furniture steel, electro-welded construction,
with manufacturer’s standard baked enamel finish.
1) Equip cabinet with pin tumbler locking mechanism.
2) Cabinet to be sized to contain indexed keys for the Project plus 50 percent expansion.
c. KEY CONTROL SYSTEM: Dual tag indexed system complete with numbered labels and
numbered tags, permanent key tags, working key tags, key loan and receipt system.
d. Provide electronic key security system by Watchman, coordinate with TCCD for badge / card
reader requirements.
6. EXIT DEVICES AND MULLIONS
a. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1) Von Duprin, Indianapolis, Ind.
2) NO SUBSTITUTIONS
b. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS:
1) CD99XP series 110NL X 8190 (Exterior)
2) 996L Trim (Interior – Function as indicated in hardware sets)
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 67
3) SD-QEL-RX-99XP series 110NL X 8190 (Exterior with Access Control)
4) 996L Trim (Interior – Function as indicated in hardware sets)
c. Exit devices shall be rim or mortise touch-pad type as specified in the Hardware Schedule.
1) Functions and trim design as indicated in the Hardware Schedule.
2) Exit devices shall be constructed to allow the cylinder to be removed and re-keyed
without removing the device from the door either by use of removable core cylinders or
construction of the exit device.
3) Exit devices shall be constructed to allow conversion of the device from one function to
another simply within the lock stile case and selecting the proper outside trim.
4) Exit devices shall be furnished with outside trim lever handles matching the locks.
d. POWER SUPPLY: Where electric exit devices are used provide required accessories such as a
power supply and electric power transfer (EPT).
1) Power supplies shall be furnished and installed with a 120VAC power cord w/plug
capable of being plugged into a 20A 120VAC grounded receptacle. Receptacle will be
furnished by the Electrical Contractor. Coordinate location with Electrical Contractor.
2) Furnish and connect all wiring between electric door hardware devices and the power
supply. Use wire gauge as recommended by the door hardware manufacturer.
3) Power supplies shall be connected to a UPS system in the IDF closet.
4) Power supplies shall be mounted to a 4x8 sheet of painted (white fireproof) plywood.
e. STANDARD: ANSI A156.3, Grade 1.
1) UL listed for “Accident Equipment List - Panic Hardware” at exit assemblies.
2) UL listed for “Fire Exit Hardware” at labeled assemblies.
f. TOUCH BAR: Modern design, recessed to provide proper clearance at door openings.
g. DOGGING OPTIONS:
1) CD – Cylindrical dogging (mechanical).
2) SD – Special center case dogging (electrical).
h. REMOVABLE MULLIONS: Keyed and equipped with strikes mated to exit device.
1) For use with standard exit devices assemblies:
i. VD KR4954 – At non-fire rated assemblies.
ii. VD KR9954 – At fire rated assemblies.
2) At exterior openings with mullions provide mullion stabilizer kits.
3) VD154.
i. SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS
1) ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT: Multi-sized, full featured door closer.
i. LCN 4040XP Series.
ii. NO SUBSTITUTIONS
2) STANDARD: ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.
3) Required Features:
68 [Division 08] OPENINGS
i. Cast iron construction (No Aluminum).
ii. Regular or parallel arm mounting or top jamb mounting where indicated in
Hardware Schedule.
iii. Rack and pinion construction with compression spring.
iv. Fully hydraulic.
v. Closing speed and latching speed controlled by independently operated valves.
vi. Adjustable spring power allowing adjustment up to 50 percent in field to suit
individual door conditions.
vii. Adjustable back-check for interior and exterior applications.
viii. Maximum operating force of 8.5 pounds (3.86 kg) exterior doors, 5 pounds (2.27
kg) for interior doors, and 15 pounds (6.80 kg) for labeled doors.
ix. Size as recommended by manufacturer for door size and weight.
x. Hold open, dead-stop, or spring shock-absorbing arm features where indicated in
Hardware Schedule.
xi. Adjustable hydraulic delayed action feature where indicated in Hardware Schedule.
xii. All exterior doors shall have LCN Heavy Duty Spring Cush Arm (4010-3077SCNS),
Cush Shoe Support (4040-30) absorbing closer arm assemblies and, if needed,
blade stop spacer (4040-61) & plate (4040-18PA).
4) ACCESSORIES: Manufacturer’s standard full size cover, non-metallic or metal
construction for painted 689 finish.
i. Furnish with necessary arms, tracks, brackets, plates, shoes, and other accessories
to suit door and frame conditions.
ii. Furnish and install closers with Through Bolts and/or Sex Nut & Bolts.
iii. Finish accessories to match cover.
7. DOOR STOPS
a. Door stops consist of roller bumpers, wall stop/holders, floor stop/holders, floor stops or wall
stops to prevent doors from striking building components or equipment.
b. Provide door stops at each door leaf except at doors equipped with overhead stops/holders,
doors equipped with a closer with a swing of 130 degree angle or greater, or doors equipped
with closers having dead-stop or spring shock-absorbing feature.
c. Wall Bumpers shall be used at all locations except where roller bumpers, wall stop/holders,
floor stop/holders, and floor stops are specified in the Hardware Schedule.
d. Dome Floor Stops, with machine screw and expansion shield, shall be used where indicated
in the Hardware Schedule.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 69
e. Floor stops shall be installed out of the path of travel to minimize tripping hazards. The design
team shall recommend overhead door stops when floor stops cannot be located out of the
path of travel. Review all such conditions with TCCD.
8. PULL PLATES:
a. Stainless steel, square corner design, beveled edges, 0.125 inch thickness, and except where
indicated otherwise, equipped with exposed mounting screws.
b. Plate size: 4 by 16 inches.
9. PUSH PLATES:
a. Stainless steel, square corner design, beveled edges, 0.125 inch thickness, and except where
indicated otherwise, equipped with exposed mounting screws.
10. PROTECTION PLATES:
a. Stainless steel, square corner design, .050 inch thickness.
b. Size: Width of plate, 2 inches less than door width.
c. Pair of doors push side of door, 1 inch less than door width.
d. Single door push side of door, 2 inches less than door width.
e. Single or pair pull side of door, 1 inch less than door width.
f. Kick Plates: Beveled three edges, 10 inch height unless indicated otherwise in Hardware Sets.
11. Where over head stops are scheduled following are Acceptable Manufacturers: Surface or
Concealed as indicated in hardware sets.
a. Rixson Firemark.
b. Norton.
c. Ives.
d. or approved equal.
12. FLUSH BOLTS
a. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1) Hager, St. Louis, Mo.
2) Rockwood Manufacturing Co., Rockwood, PA.
3) Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. (Trimco), Los Angeles, CA.
4) Ives, Indianapolis, IN.
b. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS:
1) Manual design at non-labeled metal or wood doors.
2) Automatic design at labeled metal or wood doors.
3) Equip with extension bolts of lengths to locate operating mechanism at 12” above floor
70 [Division 08] OPENINGS
for bottom unit and not over 72” above floor for top unit.
c. DUST PROOF STRIKE:
1) Manual flush bolts: Equip bottom bolts with dust proof strike
d. COORDINATORS: as required and approved by TCCD.
13. ELECTRIC STRIKES AND MAGNETIC LOCKS
a. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1) HES Electric Strikes: (Fail Secure).
i. 1006 series or 8500 series at interior locations (Only as Directed by TCCD Access
Control Department)
ii. 2005M3 Smart Pac III. (Only as Directed by TCCD Access Control Department)
iii. NO SUBSTITUTIONS
2) Securitron Magnetic Locks:
i. M490
ii. Schlage Electronics
3) Provide all necessary accessories including power supplies, switch’s, buttons, etc. as
indicated in Hardware Schedule.
14. ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
a. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER:
1) Record.
2) Or equal as approved by TCCD
b. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT:
1) Record Series 6100, a Low Power Operated Door System as defined in ANSI/BHMA
A156.19-2007.
i. Design team shall verify existing conditions and propose finish to TCCD. Preferred
finishes are CL 204R1 clear aluminum finish. DB 313R1 dark bronze aluminum finish
if applicable.
ii. Non-Handed.
iii. Interior and exterior doors. Thirty-six (36) inch single or seventy-two (72) inch pairs.
iv. Programming and timing by microprocessor control.
v. On board 12/24 VDC power supply and diagnostics.
vi. Utilize Concealed Switch (CS) feature on all units.
vii. NEW CONSTRUCTION: Provide flush mounted wall plate actuator(s) with bollard
post(s).
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 71
viii. EXISTING CONSTRUCTION: If unable to hard wire use bollard mount RF actuator(s)
with bollard post(s) or surface mount RF actuator(s). Include RF receiver. Utilize
same configuration for existing masonry application where hardwiring is not
feasible.
ix. One (1) year warranty from date of installation.
x. Provide a dedicated AC circuit to each operator.
xi. Furnish at gang toilet entry doors.
15. CARD READERS
a. Because of the perpetual technology advances in this area of access electronics TCCD
requires that you contact the TCCD Electronic Access Control System (EACS) Manager to
obtain information regarding the readers required by TCCD.
b. All Access Credentials (Access Cards) will be furnished by TCCD.
16. DRAWER AND CABINET LOCKS (BUILT-IN ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK / MILLWORK)
a. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT:
1) Keyless Combination Cam Lock.
b. MATERIALS AND FINISHES:
1) VAULT KNOB: Die-cast zinc; zinc and yellow chromate-finished, then black polyurethane
painted, plus over painted numbers.
2) SHELL: Die-cast zinc; polished plus copper and nickel-plated.
3) CYLINDER AND MOUNTING NUT: Die-cast zinc; zinc and clear chromate finished
combination.
4) DISCS: Carbon steel; case-hardened and nickel-plated.
5) CAMS: straight cam or 1/4” offset cam.
c. LOCATIONS
1) Provide at all laboratories, classrooms, office areas, breakrooms and others. Coordinate
exact locations with TCCD.
17. MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
a. SILENCERS: Preformed neoprene or rubber.
1) Location and Quantities:
i. Pairs of Doors: Two (2) at header.
ii. Single Doors: Three (3) at strike jamb.
18. WEATHERSTRIPPING, SEALS AND THRESHOLDS
a. THRESHOLDS:
1) Thresholds: Extruded aluminum of types detailed and at locations where indicated on
Hardware Sets.
72 [Division 08] OPENINGS
b. WEATHER STRIPPING: Extruded aluminum with silicon seal bulb.
c. SEALS:
1) Meeting Stile Seals: Extruded aluminum with neoprene seals.
2) Smoke Gasketing: S-Labeled for smoke, surface applied self-adhesive, polypropylene or
silicone rubber strips.
i. Color: Black.
d. SWEEP STRIPS: Extruded aluminum with nylon brush seal.
e. RAIN DRIPS: Extruded aluminum.
19. WALL MAGNETS FOR FIRE DOORS
a. As approved by TCCD.
b. Provide where listed in hardware sets a low profile magnet for hold open function used on fire
rated doors. Provide triple voltage magnets 12V, 24V or 120V. Final wiring connection and
extension of power to devices to be provided by others.
20. FINISHES
a. Except where indicated otherwise in this Section (08 71 00), the hardware set assigned in the
Door Schedule, or the hardware set description in the Hardware Schedule Hardware Sets,
comply with the following.
1) 626 (US26D) brushed chrome.
b. Special care is to be taken to assure the uniformity of the finish of the various manufactured
items.
1) Extruded aluminum products, except for thresholds and specified gasketing, are not
acceptable.
J. CLEANING
1. Clean all hardware items as necessary to assure proper operation and function and to restore
finish of hardware and doors.
2. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
3. Protect all installed door hardware to assure it is without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
K. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
1. Provide product demonstration and training, by a factory authorized service representative, for
each type of Door Hardware to personnel designated by TCCD in accordance with Section 01 769
00. Demonstration and training will include proper adjustment and maintenance procedures for
Door Hardware and care of hardware finishes.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 73
L. HARDWARE SETS
1. Provide hardware for each door to comply with the requirements of this Section (08 71 00), the
hardware set assigned in the Door Schedule, and hardware set description in the Hardware
Schedule.
a. The Door Hardware Sets indicate quantity, item description, manufacturer, manufacturer’s
product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable.
b. Where a Door Hardware product is indicated with NO SUBSTITUTIONS provide the product by
the manufacturer(s) indicated only.
M. HARDWARE SCHEDULE
1. FOR ASSISTANCE IN PREPARING A HARDWARE SCHEDULE CONTACT:
Tarrant County College Access Control
OFFICE 817-515-1960
CELL 817–515-1963
END OF DIVISION
74
Finishes09
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The preferred materials and finishes are those which are durable, easily maintained and resistant to
normal occupancy damage. Materials which meet this criteria, but are not included in this section,
may be considered with TCCD Interior Design Department’s approval. In addition, limit the amount of
combustible materials in the ceiling, walls and equipment/furnishings. Ceiling finishes should avoid
interferring with the proper operation of sprinkler heads and other fire protection systems.
B. FINISH SCHEDULE: Finish Schedules shall be developed by the design team. Documents shall
clearly indicate finishes by name or common abbreviation, and shall be submitted to TCCD for review
prior to issuing construction documents.
C. REMODELING: In buildings requiring remodeling, patched materials and surfaces must be made to
look as much like new as is economically feasible. It is the intent to avoid a patched appearance.
D. BUILT-IN EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES
Items that are built-in or affixed to the structural, mechanical, plumbing members of a building, or its
A/V systems, fall under the design and specification responsibility of the Design Professional/Design
Team and are to be procured through the Construction Contract. Finishes for these items shall be
presented and approved along with the rest of the building interior finishes. Those items include but
are not limited to:
1. Building directories, graphics, and way-finding.
2. Bulletin boards in public areas.
3. Carpet and carpet base.
4. Chalkboards and liquid writing boards in public areas.
5. Cubicle curtain and tracks.
6. Draperies on electrified tracks or that fit into wall or ceiling pockets.
7. Exterior and interior signage.
8. Fixed lighting fixtures.
9. Floor to ceiling and accordion room dividers.
10. Stage rigging and draperies.
11. Window blinds, drapery, shutters, and shades whether interior or exterior.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 75
12. Fixed furniture and furnishings.
1.02 PLASTER ASSEMBLIES
A. Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C 926, PCA Plaster Manual, and manufacturer’s instructions.
Utilize the most stringent requirements if conflicts exist.
B. Do not re-temper or use material that has partially set. Do not use frozen, caked or lumpy materials.
Clean mixer or mixing boxes of set or hardened materials before materials for a new batch are loaded.
Mix each batch separately. Thoroughly dry mix materials before adding water. Mix only as much
plaster as can be used prior to initial set.
1.03 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Install as recommended by U.S. Gypsum Co., “Gypsum Construction Handbook.”
B. Use Type X or better at all interior conditions
C. Use 20ga min. metal studs at all interior partitions
D. Gypsum wallboard shall be 48 inches wide by 5/8” thick by maximum permissible length, with tapered
edges.
E. Utilize water-resistant gypsum board in wet areas.
F. Gypsum sheathing shall be 4’ x 8’ x ½” thick water-resistant treated core with glass mats front and
back.
1.04 CERAMIC TILE
A. Tile for floor applications should have a Dynamic Coefficient Of Friction that exceeds 0.42 when wet.
B. Tiles shall have a minimum hardness of 7 on the MOH’s scale.
C. Grout shall be sealed at the following locations:
1. Wall tile in wet areas
2. Floor tile
D. Install metal trim at outside corners, exposed edges and floor transitions to other materials. Basis of
design is Schluter.
E. Install minimum 40-mil waterproof membrane at shower pans
F. Install 5/8” Type X Tile Backer board behind ceramic tile walls at shower locations
G. Toilet Rooms and Custodial Closets
1. Tile size to be approved by TCCD
76
2. Latex Grout in all tile.
1.05 QUARRY TILE
A. Seal with slip resistant, low lustre, non-buffing type sealer.
1.06 STONE TILE
A. Nominal 12x12 tiles
B. Provide Ardex leveling and patching compound
C. Provide 20 year wear warranty
1.07 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
A. ACOUSTICAL TILE
1. 24”x24”x 5/8” thick, non-directional, fine fissured Tegular Edge tile, or other as approved by
TCCD.
2. NRC range of 0.50 – 0.60
3. Acoustic panels shall be Class 25 (non-combustible)
B. VINYL COVERED LAY-IN PANELS, when required by code and AHJ
1. ½” thick, fine-textured, white vinyl-faced.
C. FIBERGLASS ACOUSTIC LAY-IN PANELS, when a high level of sound control is required and as
approved by TCCD.
1. NRC range of 0.90 – 1.00.
D. SUSPENSION ASSEMBLIES
1. Intermediate duty structural classification per ASTM C 635
2. 1” wide white enamel finish
3. Maximum deflection of L/360.
4. Suspended ceiling systems should be of the type that allows the ceiling material to be removed
from its supporting framework, or otherwise removable, and replaceable, without refinishing.
E. WARRANTY
1. Minimum 30 year warranty
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 77
1.08 RESILIENT FLOORING
A. RUBBER BASE AND ACCESSORIES
1. Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) rubber base, 1/8” thick x 4” high
2. Manufacture in continuous rolls.
3. Outside corners shall be matching, factory formed, pre-molded units.
B. VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
1. 12x12x1/8 inch thick size
2. Class 2 (through pattern construction)
3. Minimum 5 year warranty
4. Provide slip-retardant, textured vinyl composition tile on sloped surfaces.
C. LUXURY VINYL TILE
1. Minimum 5.0mm thick
2. Minimum 0.55mm wear layer
3. 10 year wear warranty
D. POLYESTER COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
1. Meet ASTM F2982
2. Non-PVC materials
3. Through pattern tile
4. Minimum 10% pre-consumer recycled content
5. Minimum 2% rapidly renewable materials
6. Meet guidelines for LEED low emitting requirements for product and adhesives
7. Minimum NSF/ANSI 332 Level Gold
E. RUBBER FLOORING
1. Homogeneous construction with non-porous texture
2. Sheet or tile, minimum 3mm thick
3. Rated for heavy traffic
78
1.09 EPOXY TERRAZZO FLOORING
A. Overall thickness of synthetic terrazzo floor shall be ¼”
B. Full coverage flexible membrane shall be Terroxy® Iso-Crack or approved equal
1. Epoxy terrazzo sealer shall be slip-resistant (min. 0.5) and stain-resistant water based surface
sealer that is chemically neutral with pH factor between 7 and 12, does not affect color or physical
properties of terrazzo type indicated, and complies with NTMA Guide Specification for epoxy
terrazzo.
2. Provide a terrazzo control joint at spacing recommended by manufacturer and over building slab
control joints.
1.10 TERRAZZO TILES
A. Product shall conform to the latest edition of the National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association (NTMA)
and the Tile Council of North America (TCNA) Handbook.
B. Installation shall be blended at the jobsite from multiple pallets
C. Mortars shall be ANSI A-118.4 and ISO C2S1 or better.
1.11 CARPETING (Modular Preferred):
A. Textured or level loop, tufted or woven, pile height shall be between 0.107 and 0.187, with maximum
pile height variation of 1/32 inch
B. Pile Density of minimum 5500 oz per cubic yard, for moderate to heavy traffic, as defined in HUD/FHA
publication UM-44d:
1. Pile density = [36 x pile yard weight (ounces per square yard)] / pile thickness
C. Class 1 flammability rating
D. Flooring Radiant Panel Test, NFPA-253, ASTM E 648
E. Smoke Density, NBS Smoke Density Chamber NFPA-258, 450 or less
F. Static Test, AATCC Test Method 134-1979, 2.5KV or below under standard test conditions 70o F, 20%
R. H.
G. Appearance Retention Characteristics:
1. Appearance Retention Rating (ARR): Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) test TMI101 graded in
accordance with ASTM D-5252 (hexapod). Rating shall be a minimum of 3.0 after 12k revolutions.
2. Colorfastness to Light: Test Method AATCC-16-E with a rating of 3 minimum, 4 for heavy light
exposure locations, after 40 AATCC fading units using AATCC gray scale for color change.
3. Soiling Resistance: AATCC 171 (HWE) for 2 washings to simulate removal of topical treatments
by hot water extraction, followed by AATCC 175. Minimum rating of 7 using AATCC Red 40 Stain
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 79
Scale.
H. Durability Characteristics: Provide carpet meeting or exceeding the following:
1. Tuft Bind / Edge Ravel: ASTM D1335, minimum of 8 lbs-force or higher, wet.
2. Delamination Strength of Secondary Backing: ASTM D-3936 minimum 2.5 lbs per inch width.
I. Dye method: minimum 80% solution dyed, 100% preferred.
J. Backing:
1. Broadloom Carpet Backing: Primary Backing: woven polypropylene or approved equal.
Secondary Backing: woven polypropylene or approved equal
2. Hard-Backed or Modular Carpet Backing: Primary Backing: Reinforced synthetic. Secondary
Backing: vinyl or urethane backing system.
a. Cushion Backed allowed where acoustical dampening is desired. Pre-approval of use
required by TCCD: Secondary backing: PVC Free polyurethane cushion
K. Lifetime warranty, with a 10 year, non-prorated warranty against delaminating, edge ravel, zippering,
moisture penetration and maximum 10% wear.
L. Recycle excess/removed carpet.
1.12 WALL COVERINGS
A. The preferred materials and finishes for interior walls are those which are durable, easily maintained
and resistant to normal occupancy damage. The use of vinyl wall covering and wood paneling will be
considered for specific areas. Vinyl wall covering shall in no case be used on the interior face of an
exterior wall.
1.13 PAINTING
A. All new work shall be a three (3) coat system. Different shades of color shall be used for each coat.
The number of coats for existing work shall be as required to equal new work.
1. PRIMER: One coat.
2. FINISH: Two coats.
B. All paints and coatings used on the interior of the building must comply with the volatile organic
compound limits established in Green Seal Standard GS-11, Paints 1st Edition. Zero VOC.
C. Paint Schedule Notes:
80
1. HIGH TRAFFIC AREAS: All walls in main corridors and areas defined by TCCD as “high traffic
areas” shall be covered with water based highperformance coating for surface durability.
2. TOP AND BOTTOM EDGES OF WOOD DOORS shall be sealed after fitting and finished with at
least two (2) coats of varnish or paint.
3. TOP AND BOTTOM OF METAL DOORS shall be painted with the same materials and number of
coats as used on the door faces.
4. DRY FILM THICKNESS shall be specified for all coats of paint on metals.
5. ACCENT COLORS: If it is anticipated 5% or more of the scheduled finishes will be in accent
colors, attention should be called to this fact. Estimated percentage of accent colors should be
given as an aid to bidders in preparation of bids. A statement should be made to the effect that
the information given in no way restricts the Design Professional in his final selection of colors.
6. COLOR CODING FOR PIPING: Include finish painting of insulated and uninsulated piping in the
General Contract documents and include color banding of finished piping in the appropriate
specifications section.
1.14 STAINING
A. Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, primers and shellacs applied to interior elements must not
exceed the VOC content limits established in South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD)
Rulle 1113, Architectural Coatings, rules in effect on January 1, 2004.
1.15 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING
A. High performance, low maintenance, colored/textured impact resistant coating with class A fire rating,
two step water-based system and ASTM scrub raing of a minimum of 11,000 rubs.
1.16 DRY ERASE COATING
A. Two part solvent based coating. Install on Level 5 finished gypsum board walls only. Coordinate with
TCCD interior design department.
END OF DIVISION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8108/22/2024[Division 10] SPECIALTIES
Specialties10
1.01 MARKERBOARDS & TACKBOARDS
A. Markerboards: Provide porcelain enamel steel liquid chalk writing system with low gloss projectable
surface. Coordinate with TCCD interior design department.
1. For markerboards used as a projection surface provide Low Gloss White surface.
2. For all other markerboards provide White surface.
B. Tackboards: Provide vinyl covered tackboard. Board shall be constructed of self healing vinyl
covering over ¼” natural cork with rigid backing of ¼” hardboard; factory assembled and bonded
together.
C. Dry Erase Wallcoverings: Install on Level 4 finished gypsum boards walls. Coodinate with TCCD
interior design department.
D. Magnetic Dry Erase Wallcoverings: Coordinate with TCCD interior design department.
E. Dry Erase Paint: Limited use with approval by TCCD. Refer to Division 09, Section 1.16
1.02 LOCKERS
A. GENERAL
1. Lockers shall be 18 gauge steel with all-welded connections. Design team to review quantities,
sizes, and types with TCCD on a per project basis.
1.03 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
A. GENERAL
1. Toilet Compartment assemblies. Components must conform to the following testing requirements:
a. ASTM D 6578-00 Graffiti Removal.
b. ASTM D 2197-98 Scratch Resistant.
c. ASTM D 2794-93 Impact Resistant.
d. ASTM E 84-01 Flame Spread and Smoke Development.
B. Provide SOLID PHENOLIC, BLACK CORE floor-mounted over head braced stall dividers.
C. 10 year warranty
1.04 TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. Specify stainless steel accessories only.
B. Accessories shall be semi-recessed or fully recessed based on models below.
82
C. Provide shelf in every stall
D. Provide clothes hook in all public toilet room stalls
E. Acceptable Products
1. Trash Receptacle Unit
a. Georgia Pacific Model #59491 or approved equal.
2. Automated Touchless Towel Dispenser with AC Power Kit
a. Georgia Pacific enMontion Model # 59466 or approved equal.
b. Georgia Pacific enMotion Model # 59477 or approved equal.
3. Clothes Hook
a. Bobrick Model B-2116 or approved equal.
4. Shelf
a. Bobrick Model B-295 or approved equal.
5. Grab Bars with Snap Flange
a. Bobrick Model B-6806 or approved equal.
6. Recessed Multi-Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser
a. Bobrick Model B-4388 or approved equal.
7. Napkin Vendor
a. Bobrick Model B-3706 or approved equal.
8. Sanitary Napkin Disposal
a. Bobrick Model B-4353 or approved equal.
9. Soap Dispenser (provided by TCCD) installed by General Contractor
a. Technical Concepts AutoFoam System
10. Mirror
a. Bobrick Series B-165 or approved equal.
11. Special Accessories for Janitorial services
a. Design team shall coordinate with TCCD.
12. Baby changin station
a. Stainless steel finish and construction.
b. Located public restrooms and where indicated in the Educational Specifications and drawings.
c. Surface mounted as long as it complies with ADA and TAS requirements, otherwise recessed
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8308/22/2024[Division 10] SPECIALTIES
and mounted to meet ADA and TAS requirements. Specific type depending on site conditions.
d. Provide with stainless steel built-in handles on each end of the lid so the table can me
mounted high enough for use and still provide for cane detection when opened.
e. Exact model to be approved by Owner.
1.05 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. CABINET: Formed sheet steel, 20 gauge, semi-recessed type (1-1/2 inch maximum projection), size to
accommodate extinguisher.
B. In some laboratories and mechanical spaces, only mounting board with hanging hooks required
instead of cabinets. Verify with TCCD.
C. APPROVALS: The locations and sizes of fire extinguishers are subject to the review and approval of
TCCD.
D. A means of identifying fire extinguisher locations that complies with NFPA 10, latest addition, must be
done. The method used must be approved by TCCD.
1.06 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Extinguishers shall conform to National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 10, latest edition and shall
be approved by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) and bear their label.
1.07 AED DEVICES
A. Provide AED machines for new construction and renovation projects per the following guidelines:
1. A minimum of one (1) AED device to be installed per 4,000 s.f. of floor space
2. If a building has multiple floors, provide a minimum of one (1) AED device per floor.
3. Additional AED devices are to be installed in close proximity to areas that have a greater
likelihood of need such as swimming pools, workout rooms or any other areas of strenuous
activity.
4. The device is to be stored in box designed to store the device.
5. Box is to be installed in a central location, accessible from all sides of the building and in plain
sight, ideally beside fire estinguishers, alert beacons or other safety equipment. Semi-recessed
installation is preferred, unless surface mounting is required by building conditions.
6. Box is to be installed at 48” from floor to top of the handle on the box cover to meet ADA and
TAS.
7. Signage that protrudes from wall is to be installed above the box for easier identification. Signage
mounting is to meet all applicable codes.
8. Specific model to be approved by TCCD.
1.08 EVACUATION CHAIRS
A. Provide evacuation chairs for new construction and renovation projects per the following guidelines:
84
1. Semi-recessed installation is prefer unless project conditions require surface mounting.
2. Provide one at every stair above the first level above the ground floor.
3. In buildings with a basement, a motorize chair shall be provided at every level below the first floor.
4. Contractor provided, contractor installed.
5. Specific model to be approved by TCCD.
1.09 COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL / ACID STORAGE CABINETS / GAS TANKS RACKS
A. To be specified by design professional and to be approved by TCCD.
B. Provide venting rough-in in plenum for acid storage cabinets.
1.10 WALL GUARDS
A. Wall guard rails on corridor walls with cart traffic, 18 gage stainless steel corner guards.
1. Snap lock vinyl, snap lock stainless steel in high impact areas. Coordinate with TCCD.
1.11 FOLDING PARTITIONS
A. Manually operated, flat panels hinged in pairs, top supported with operable floor seals.
B. Sound Transmission Class (STC) minimum 45
1.12 SIGNAGE
A. All new and temorary signage shall comply with ADA, AHJ, and any applicable codes.
B. TCCD presently has two main signage standards packages, which are described below. Design
Professional shall coordinate required signage standard with the TCCD Project Manager prior to start
of project.
C. New signage standards - TCCD is in the process of adopting a new wayfinding signage standard,
which is being implemented in new building construction projects. These new standards will be
published on the TCCD website at a later date. In the meantime, please contact TCCD Real Estate and
Facilities Engineering Department for a copy of the new standards.
D. Existing signage standards - TCCD is in the process of replacing exisitng signage with new signage
conformingwith the new standards, however, many buildings remain with the existing standards, which
may still be needed in the case of renovation projects. If the project needs to match existing signage,
please contact TCCD Real Estate and Facilities Engineering Department for a copy of the existing
signage standards.
1.13 CERAMIC WHEELS / KILNS
A. These are project specifics to be specified by design professional and to be approved bt TCCD.
END OF DIVISION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8508/22/2024[Division 11] EQUIPMENT
Equipment11
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Reference the TCCD Education Specification for requirements of equipment layouts and clarification of
equipment to be included in the construction documents, by contactor, by owner etc.
B. Reference the Uniform Facility Library folders for any applicable supplemental specifications.
1.02 PLANNING LAYOUTS:
The design professional will provide layouts of all Furniture, Fixtures, and Equipment (FFE) identified
in the TCCD Construction Responsibility Chart found in Chapter 01 (see Section 1.12). in order to
ascertain function and space usage.
A. DESIGN AND SPECIFICATIONS
1. For projects having fixed equipment budgets, these items will be included as part of the general
contract work. Unless otherwise directed by TCCD the following equipment shall be classified as
fixed equipment:
a. Library Shelving.
b. Food service equipment.
c. Unit kitchens and cabinets.
d. Laboratory casework.
e. Benches and associated equipment.
f. Fume hoods.
g. Fixed classroom tables and seating.
h. Auditorium seating.
i. Classroom and Lecture Hall audio/visual equipment and sound systems to be determined by
TCCD.
2. For projects having movable equipment budgets, these items will be acquired by TCCD. The
Design Professional shall be alerted to coordinate the design and construction to accommodate
movable equipment items.
1.03 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
1. On projects involving food service equipment the design team shall coordinate with TCCD for
minimum standards for each piece of equipment, and submit a layout for TCCD review prior to
86
issuing construction documents.
2. Kitchen cooler / freezer panels should be FM Approved in Approval Guide.
1.04 APPLIANCES
A. GENERAL
1. Reference the TCCD Education Specification for responsibility, quantity and location requirements
for appliances. Models listed below may or may not be included in the construction documents
to be provided for or installed by the general contractor. All appliances should be shown in
construction documents for coordination of utility and space requirements. Design team shall
review applicability of each appliance and review proposed models with TCCD.
a. Diswahers/Microwaves/Ice Makers/Refrigerators are to be specified by the design proffesional,
as required by the project. Coordinate voltage current requirements and water as well as
drainage requirements.
b. Energy star when available
c. Full Height Ice Machine / Dispenser: Place on stand or countertop with 4” legs as directed by
TCCD. Undercounter Ice Makers are not allowed.
1.05 AUTOMATIC SHUT-OFF VALVES
A. Specify that these must have a ten (10) year written warranty.
B. Utility controller and Solenoid Cabinet shall be pre-assembled
1.06 VENDING EQUIPMENT
A. If vending equipment is required, it will be provided under a separate contract with a franchisee;
however, the Design Professional shall plan spaces, plumbing, HVAC and electric to accommodate the
desired vending equipment. Refer to the TCCD for quantity and locations on each project. Be certain
to provide utility connections including, but not limited to, electricity, water, drains, etc.
1.07 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
A. The Design Professional must plan spaces, plumbing, HVAC and electric to accommodate all
laboratory equipment. Provide utility connections including, but not limited to, electricity, water,
drains, etc. and coordination of installation sequences. Review equipment selection with TCCD at
Design Development stage.
B. Equipment that may be classified as a higher hazzard occupancy, ignitable / flammable liquid storage
should be in compliance with FM Global Data Sheet 7-29. Use FM Approved products.
1.08 LABORATORY HOODS
A. Review hood selection with TCCD at Design Development stage.
1.09 STERILIZERS
A. Provide two in each prep room, one for glassware (clean) and one for hasmat materials (dirty).
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8708/22/2024[Division 11] EQUIPMENT
B. 20”x20”x38”, 250 liters capacity each with internal boiler. Prevacuum.
C. Manual vertical sliding door(s), single door, single door cabinet, steam activated door seals.
D. Standard piping: brass and copper threaded.
E. Carbon fiber electric steam generator.
F. 120V, 1Ph; 460/480V, 3Ph (for vac pump &/or steam generator)
G. Auto Flush Integral Generators.
H. Programable enhanced control system with real time monitoring capabilities.
I. 2 years warranty minimum for door seals, 15 years warranty minimum for pressure vessel.
1.10 LABORATORY SERVICE FITTINGS AND SINKS
A. Provide non-recessed emergency shower/ eyewash units. Review need and location with TCCD
Reference chapter 22 for design guidelines.
B. Provide Epoxy resin sinks formed in metal molds to provide one piece units with coved corners and
bottoms pitched to the drain outlet with overflow stopper and drain pieces at every sink.
C. Coordinate traps and chemical waste piping with Division 22 of the design guidelines.
D. Laboratory Ball valves shall be used for air, vacuum and gasses. The valves shall be vandal resistant
chrome plated brass with non-removable nut and integral check valve to prevent backflow.
E. Laboratory faucets shall be vacuum breaker goosenecks. The faucets shall be vandal resistant
chrome plated brass.
F. The hand held emergency eye wash shall be vandal resistant aerated outlet head with rubber eye
guard, stay open valve with squeeze handle, and reinforced PVC high pressure hose.
1.11 INCUBATOR, DRYING OVEN, DOUBLE REFRIGERATOR, EXPLOSION PROOF
REFRIGERATOR
A. Review laboratory equipment selection with TCCD Physical Plant at Design Development stage.
1.12 GATE OPERATOR
A. TCCD prefers sliding gates to swinging gates.
B. Any deviation must be approved by TCCD
1.13 THEATHRICAL RIGGING AND LIGHTING SYSTEMS
A. Refer to Theater Equipmwent in the Uniform Facility Library for specifications.
END OF DIVISION
88 [Division 12] FURNISHINGS
Furnishings12
1.01 GENERAL
A. FURNITURE LAYOUTS: The Design Professional will provide layouts of all FF&E identified in the
program to ascertain function and space usage. Submittals are required at the end of each design
phase.
B. PRELIMINARY FURNITURE LAYOUTS
1. The Design Professional shall provide preliminary furniture layouts for the entire building during
the Design Development stage to substantiate that program space requirements have been met,
and to confirm electrical, telecommunication, and audio/visual locations.
2. Layouts shall be based on information obtained from TCCD.
3. Planning by the Design Professional must be provided for furniture items as they relate to
doorways, circulation, windows, electrical outlets, communications system outlets, mechanical
and plumbing coordination and ADA clearances.
C. FINAL FURNITURE LAYOUT
1. Requests for revisions to the Preliminary Furniture Layouts shall be incorporated into the layouts
as part of the Design Development effort. The resulting furniture layouts developed by the Design
Professional shall receive the approval and sign-off of the TCCD.
2. Construction documents must show furniture layouts.
3. When final revised layouts have been completed, a clean set of floor plans for both base bid and
alternates that includes walls, windows, doors, room numbers, built-in cabinetry, and equipment
shall be sent to TCCD. If transmitted electronically, the Design Professional shall advise the
designer of software type and version used prior to sending (dwg format is preferred). This set of
layouts shall include a site/project location map as well as electrical/data layers for each floor.
D. COORDINATION
1. TCCD will be given an opportunity to review and coordinate all furniture layouts with the building
systems including electrical outlets, lighting, and telephone and data outlet locations prior to the
completion of the Construction Documents
2. For projects that have movable equipment funding, TCCD will be responsible for coordinating
the services of professional design consultants for movable equipment planning, design and
specification. These services will be provided by or coordinated through the Design Professional
to coincide with the design and construction of the project.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 89
1.02 FURNITURE
A. Refer to Furniture Standards for minimum compliance levles and additional information.
B. SYSTEMS FURNITURE AND SEATING
1. Warranty shall be lifetime, including laminate, parts and labor, 24 hour/7 days a week, for non-
wood components. Only allowable exceptions are listed below:
a. 5 years for operational parts, controls and electrical (except light ballasts and bulbs)
b. 5 years for seating upholstery, based on standard commercial use
c. 3 years for upholstery, finishes and labor to repair
d. 2 years for all other extra products
e. 1 year on light ballasts and bulbs, wood casegoods, upholstered surfaces, finishes and labor
to repair.
2. All panels shall be tackable and acoustical; skins shall be replaceable in the field without tearing
down the panel run
3. Phone and data components shall be part of the system
4. Keying: all locking components shall be keyed alike by station. Provide 4 master keys and
keying schedule for project.
5. Furniture contractor shall be responsible for any damage to building surfaces and finishes. All
trash shall be removed from TCCD property, and product shall be cleaned, tested and adjusted.
C. LECTERNS: Coordinate installation with integrated technology trades.
1.03 WINDOW TREATMENT
A. Blinds
1. Provide 1” wide by 0.0085” thick slat-type aluminum blinds. Manufacture shall provide minimum
10 year warranty.
B. Automated Roller Shading Devices
1. Provide concealed hembar which is heat sealed on all sides
2. Shade fabric shall hang flat with maximum warp distortion of 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in either direction
per 8 feet (2438 mm).
3. Required Battens shall be concealed
4. Manufacturer shall provide a non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty for Roller Shade
Hardware and Shadecloth. Electronic Roller Shade Control Systems shall have a non-depreciating
five-year warranty.
90 [Division 12] FURNISHINGS
1.04 LABORATORY CASEWORK AND ACCESSORIES
A. Meets the standards of the Scientific Equipment & Furniture Association (SEFA).
B. Custom units shall be of the same quality as standard units specified.
C. Material shall be steel, wood and/or a combination of steel and wood.
D. Review style of cabinet with TCCD during the design stage.
1. Wood casework material
a. Interior of cabinet veneer shall be the same species of exterior cabinet. The interior and
exterior cabinet is sealed with a highly chemical resistant finish.
b. Cabinet end panels, top, bottom and back shall be ¾” minimum, 9 ply veneer core plywood
with 1/8 inch hardwood edge banding. The entire structure including end panels, top, bottom
and back shall be of rabbet joint construction with each joint secured from two directions with
countersunk screws affixed to hardwood blocking from the interior of the cabinet.
c. Doors: Doors shall be fabricated using minimum ¾” particleboard.
d. Shelf Support Clips: Shall be plastic twin pin seismic type, for mounting on interior of
cabinets.
e. Adjustable shelves for cabinets over 36 inches wide shall be 1 inch thick.
f. Review requirements for locks with TCCD.
2. Steel casework material
a. Sheet steel: Mild, cold rolled and leveled unfinished steel. Cabinet shall be welded steel body
with full height removable back. Steel finish shall be electrostatically applied power coat
finish.
b. Minimum gauges:
1) 20 gauge: Exterior/interior drawer fronts, interior door panels, scribing strips, filler
panels, enclosures, drawer bodies, shelves, security panels and sloping tops.
2) 18 gauge: Door fronts, case tops, ends, bottoms, bases, backs, vertical posts, uprights,
and access panels.
3) 16 gauge: Top front rails, top rear gussets, intermediate horizontal rails, table legs and
frames, leg rails and stretchers.
4) 14 gauge: Drawer suspensions, door and case hinge reinforcements and front corner
reinforcements.
5) 11 gauge: Table leg corner brackets and gussets for leveling screws.
c. Review requirements for locks with TCCD.
E. Countertops shall be 1” thick epoxy resin with front and end overhang of 1” with continuous drip
groove on the underside ½” from the edge of the counter.
F. Fire Blanket shall be able to be removed from cabinet, refolded and returned to cabinet.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 91
G. Goggle Storage shall be a steel cabinet with automatic timer to sanitize 30 goggles. Safety interlock
switch turns off U.V. light when doors are opened.
H. Glassware Peg Board is epoxy resin with a stainless steel drip foot and plastic pegs.
1.05 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the current edition of “Architectural Woodwork Standards”
B. Provide certification of compliance with AWI Quality Certification Program.
C. Casework, countertops and accessories shall be provided by a single source of responsibility.
D. Custom units shall be of the same quality as standard units specified.
E. Musical Instrument Cabinet System – coordinate with TCCD interior design department.
F. Review requirements for locks with TCCD.
1.06 MULTIPLE SEATING
A. STACK CHAIRS AND PORTABLE SEATING (Movable Equipment)
1. For areas of assembly, the Design Professional shall show generic seating layouts, demonstrating
seating volumes, aisle dimensions etc. as required for Schematic and Design Development
Submittals.
2. The Design Professional shall plan for adequate storage space for chair trucks or dollies.
B. AUDITORIUM AND LECTURE HALL SEATING (Fixed Equipment)
1. The design team shall coordinate with TCCD to develop minimum performance standards on a per
project basis.
2. At tiered environments, TCCD preference is fixed tables with loose, non-castered chairs
1.07 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS (NON-LEED INSTALLATION)
A. Vinyl Cushion Carpet shall meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Patterned Loop Construction
2. Heavy duty rubber backing with water dam border
3. Synthetic non-woven primary tufting substrate
4. Density minimum 18.5 lbs. per cubic foot
5. Thickness minimum 0.156 inches
6. Compression set maximum 10%
7. Pile density: minimum 4600 oz per cubic yard, as defined in HUD/FHA publication UM-44d:
92 [Division 12] FURNISHINGS
a. Pile density = [36 x pile yard weight (ounces / square yard)] / pile thickness
8. Pile Height Average: 0.15 – 0.2 Inch
9. Dye Method: Solution Dyed.
10. Soil Stain Protection
B. Provide Manufacturer’s warranty of 25-years from Substantial Completion date, non-prorated, against
product failure covering all costs including freight, labor, and material for the following:
1. Edge Ravel - wet or dry.
2. Back delamination, wet or dry.
3. Loss of 20 lb. average tuft bind - wet or dry.
4. Static protection - 3.0 KV when tested under the Standard Shuffle Test, 70° F - 20% RH
5. Wear - No more than 10% face yarn loss
6. Adhesive failure
1.08 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS (LEED INSTALLATION)
A. Roll up, recessed aluminum tread rails with polypropylene carpet inserts, vinyl fillers and PVC hinges.
1.09 INTERIOR WASTE RECEPTACLES
1. For large common areas provide square container, beige with untouchable lid, 23 gallons capacity.
2. For smaller areas such as classrooms and offfices, provide 28 quart rectangular black plastic for
waste or approved equal, and blue 28 quart rectangular blue plastic for recycling.
1.10 SITE FURNISHINGS
Site Furnishings is reserved for future use. The design team shall coordinate with TCCD to establish
minimum performance requirements for all items within this Section. The minimum performance
standards are to be developed on a per project basis and reviewed with TCCD prior to the issue of
construction documents for bidding or permitting.
END OF DIVISIONFG2956
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 9308/22/2024[Division 13] SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Special Construction13
1.01 General
Division 13 Special Construction is reserved for future use. The design team shall coordinate with
TCCD to establish minimum performance requirements for all items within this Chapter as defined
by CSI Master Format 2004 (with 2012 updates). The minimum performance standards are to
be developed on a per project basis and reviewed with TCCD prior to the issue of construction
documents for bidding or permitting.
END OF DIVISION
94 [Division 14] CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Conveying Systems14
1.01 ELEVATORS (ELECTRIC TRACTION AND HYDRAULIC)
A. GENERAL
1. SUMMARY
a. Design Professionals shall ensure elevator requirements are coordinated throughout the
construction documents. Contractor shall ensure execution of all work in accordance with the
requirements of the elevator manufacturer.
b. Energy Efficiency, Sustainability, and Life Cycle Costs must be considered in the selection of
elevator systems.
c. Machine Room-Less Traction Electric Elevators are preferred. Review with TCCD on a per
project basis.
d. Car speed shall not exceed 350 feet per minute. Car capacity shall be a minimum of 3,500 lbs.
e. Car leveling tolerance shall be plus-or-minus 1/4 inch regardless of load or direction of travel.
f. Specify connections for card readers and security cameras. Coordinate requirements with
TCCD.
g. Center opening doors shall be provided.
h. Elevators must service all floors.
i. Elevator access to mechanical rooms and roof shall be controlled by the TCCD Electronic
Access Control System. If electronic access control is not available an alternate means of
controlling access must be recommended to TCCD for approval.
j. Shunt trip breakers are required if sprinklers are present in hoistway or elevator machine
room.
k. ALLOWANCES:
1) The design team shall coordinate with TCCD for the possible development of
allowances for custom finishes.
l. Reference Division 27 – Communications – For telephone service to elevators.
2. INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATES AND OPERATIING PERMITS: As required
by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. TCCD WILL PROVIDE
AN INDEPENDENT INSPECTOR FOR THE INITIAL INSPECTION. The cost of any additional
inspections required because the initial inspection revealed code discrepancies will be at the
contractor’s expense.
3. WARRANTY
a. SPECIAL MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing
to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period.
Warranty Period shall be twelve (12) months from date of Substantial Completion.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 95
4. MAINTENANCE SERVICE
a. INITIAL MAINTENANCE SERVICE: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide twelve (12)
months’ full maintenance service by skilled employees of the elevator Installer to include:
1) Monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator
operation at rated speed and capacity.
2) Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original
equipment.
3) Provide emergency callback service 24 hours-per-day, 7 days-per-week with a response
time of 2 hours or less Provide emergency callback service 24 hours-per-day.
B. PRODUCTS
1. MANUFACTURERS
a. AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS: To be selected subject to compliance with the requirements of
the specific project or application.
b. TCCD must approve all conveying systems (elevators) intended for use on any TCCD Project.
C. OPERATING SYSTEMS
1. PASSENGER ELEVATORS: Provide manufacturer’s standard microprocessor operation system for
each elevator or group of elevators as required to provide operating system indicated.
a. Single Elevator: Provide “selective collective automatic operation” as defined in ASME A17.1.
b. Multiple-Car Group: Provide “group automatic operation” as defined in ASME A17.1.
2. AUXILIARY OPERATIONS: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following
operational features for elevators where indicated.
a. STANDBY POWER OPERATION: On activation of standby power, cars are returned to lowest
floor and parked with doors open. If a car cannot be returned, it is removed from the system.
One car is selected for service on standby power by a switch located at the fire command
center or other designated location.
b. BATTERY-POWERED LOWERING: When power fails, cars are lowered to the lowest floor, open
their doors, and shut down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging
system.
c. INDEPENDENT SERVICE: Key switch in car control station removes car from group operation
and allows it to respond only to car calls. When in independent service, doors close only in
response to the door close button.
3. SECURITY FEATURES: In addition to above operational features, provide the following security
features, where indicated. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters’ service.
a. CARD-READER OPERATION: For access to restricted landings. Provide required conductors
in traveling cable and panel in machine room for interconnecting card readers, other security
access system equipment, and elevator controllers. Allow space in car as indicated for card
reader.
96 [Division 14] CONVEYING SYSTEMS
1) When system is activated, car calls to restricted landings do not register until card
is accepted by security access system. Security access system determines which
landings are restricted and which of those are accessible to cardholder.
2) Card readers and other Electronic Access Control System equipment by TCCD.
4. SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
a. GENERAL: Provide signal equipment for each elevator or group of elevators with hall-call and
car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate
lighted elements of acrylic or other permanent, non-yellowing translucent plastic.
b. CAR CONTROL STATIONS: Provide manufacturer’s standard semi-recessed car control
stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, if not otherwise indicated. Design to be
approved by TCCD.
1) Include call buttons for each landing served and other buttons, switches, and controls
required for specified car operation.
2) Provide two (2) car control stations, main and auxiliary, in each center opening
passenger elevator; equip only one (1) with required key-switches, if any.
3) Provide space for installation of flush mounted card reader in main car control station,
card reader to be furnished by TCCD.
c. EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: On activation, system dials preprogrammed
number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System
provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals
that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded.
System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and
battery backup power supply.
d. CAR POSITION INDICATOR: For passenger elevator cars, provide illuminated-signal type,
digital-display type, or segmented type, located above the car control station. Also provide
audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the
floors served. Include travel direction arrows.
e. HALL PUSH-BUTTON STATIONS: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing for each
elevator or group of elevators as indicated. For each group of passenger elevators, locate
between two (2) elevators, at the center of the group, or at a location designated by the
architect. Design to be approved by TCCD.
1) Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall.
2) Provide units with direction-indicating buttons; two (2) buttons at intermediate landings;
one button at terminal landings.
3) Provide fire service controls with engraved instructions at main egress level.
f. HALL LANTERNS: Provide units with illuminated arrows at each landing for each elevator; two
(2) arrows at intermediate landings; one (1) arrow at terminal landings.
1) Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall and with
illuminated elements projecting from faceplate for ease of angular viewing.
2) Place lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance, unless otherwise
indicated. Mount at a minimum of seventy-two (72) inches (1829) above finished floor.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 97
3) With each lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel.
Signals sound once for up and twice for down.
g. HALL POSITION INDICATORS: Provide illuminated-signal type or digital-display type, located
above each hoistway entrance at main egress floor. Provide units with flat faceplate for
mounting with body of unit recessed in wall.
1) Integrate main egress floor hall lanterns with hall position indicators.
5. DOOR REOPENING DEVICES
a. INFRARED ARRAY: Provide door reopening devices with a uniform array of 36 or more
microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption
of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.
1) NUDGING FEATURE: After car doors are prevented from closing for a predetermined
adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound
and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy.
6. PASSENGER HOISTWAY ENTRANCE
a. GENERAL: Provide manufacturer’s standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway
entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size
and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction.
1) Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with
reinforced head sections.
b. MATERIALS AND FABRICATION: Provide manufacturer’s standards but not less than the
following:
1) Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed stainless-steel sheet.
2) Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction, fabricated from stainless steel.
3) Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. Provide polished
finish on nickel silver.
4) Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-
gaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.
7. PASSENGER AND/OR SERVICE ELEVATOR(S) AS REQUIRED
a. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: To be selected subject to compliance with the requirements
of the specific project or application.
1.02 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
1. PUMP UNITS: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load
and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide the following:
a. Submersible pump, with submersible squirrel-cage induction motor, suspended inside tank
from vibration isolation mounts.
b. Motor solid-state starting.
c. Environmentally safe hydraulic oil, vegetable based oil or equal as approved by TCCD.
98 [Division 14] CONVEYING SYSTEMS
2. HYDRAULIC SILENCERS: Provide hydraulic silencer
3. PROTECTIVE CYLINDER CASINGS: PVC pipe casings complying with ASME A17.1, of sufficient
size to provide not less than one (1) inch (25 mm) clearance from cylinder, and extending above
pit floor.
4. CORROSION PROTECTIVE FILLER: A solvent less, petroleum-based gel formulated for filling the
space between hydraulic cylinders and protective casings. Filler is heavier than water, electrically
nonconductive, and liquefies at approximately 150ºF (66ºC).
5. Reference Division 22, section 1.04, M, 1 for additional requirements.
1.03 EXECUTION
A. DEMONSTRATION
1. INSTRUCTION: Instruct TCCD’s personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of
elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be
followed at time of operational failure and other building emergencies. Train TCCD’s personnel
in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with
TCCD on requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program.
2. FINAL CHECK: Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner’s personnel present
and before date of Acceptance. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning
properly.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. TEMPORARY USE: Do not use elevators for construction purposes unless cars are provided with
temporary enclosures, either within finished cars or in place of finished cars, to protect finishes from
damage. Elevators must be inspected for construction use if used as such.
1. Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of elevator Installer for
elevators used for construction purposes. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement
of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper
elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use same parts and supplies as used in the
manufacture and installation of original equipment.
2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and other procedures to protect elevators.
If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore
damaged work so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be
refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new
units as required.
END OF DIVISION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 9908/22/2024[Division 21] FIRE SUPPRESSION
Fire Suppression Systems21
1.01 INTRODUCTION
A. Fire sprinkler designs by the design professional shall be based on a performance based design and
shall outline the sprinkler requirements of the project. Performance based construction documents
shall include plans outlining sprinkler coverage areas, required densities, sprinkler head types and
information from the Owner as described by NFPA 13 for the Owner’s Certificate.
B. The performance based fire sprinkler system shall require a fire sprinkler contractor to provide all
sprinkler piping plans, calculations and furnish all labor, material and equipment for the complete
installation of the Fire Sprinkler System in accordance with all applicable requirements of the NFPA,
the Insurance Underwriter (FM Gloabal Data Sheets and FM Approved components) and the local Fire
Marshal. The work shall include design, obtaining of necessary approvals, fabrication, and installation
of the Fire Sprinkler System, monitoring devices and all other items and accessories required to
complete the installation. Design of the automatic Fire Sprinkler System shall be by an engineer
registered in the State of Texas. The systems are to be designed with a 40 to 50 year service life
expectancy.
C. A current fire hydrant flow test shall be required anytime a new fire suppression system is part of a
project. For stand-alone fire suppression retrofit projects, a current flow test shall be completed as
part of the performance specification to determine adequacy of the water supply without the use of
fire pumps, if at all possible. The hydrant flow test shall be conducted at a maximum flow from a
hydrant as close to the proposed system as possible. A minimum of two-2.5 outlets should be flowed,
then static & residual reading recorded. If possible standard play pipes should be attached to the 2.5
inch outlets with the brass nozzle tip removed so readings are taken from the 1.75 inch nozzle outlet.
It is possible a pumper outlet (~4”) is the only outlet to be flowed. The sprinkler contractor shall be
accountable to verify the water test is accurate so their designs and provide a minimum safety factor in
all calculations. Minimum required data for each fire flow test shall include the following:
1. Date
2. Time
3. Performed by
4. Location of Residual Fire Hydrant.
5. Location of Flow Fire Hydrant.
6. Static Pressure at Residual Fire Hydrant.
7. Measured Flow at Flow Fire Hydrant.
8. Residual Pressure at Residual Fire Hydrant.
D. No mechanical joints will be concealed or inaccessible. Where piping is concealed or inaccessible, it
shall be welded by Certified and Licensed welders or factory pre-fabricated.
100
1.02 MATERIALS
A. STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
1. Fire sprinkler piping NPS 1-1/4 or smaller shall be Schedule 40 blacksteel and may be joined by
either threaded fittings, or welding. Fire sprinkler piping larger than NPS 2 shall be Schedule 10
and shall be joined by grooved coupling fittings. All grooved coupling fittings shall be Victalulic
brand, domestically-manufactured 73-009N FireLock EZ type fittings. Grooves for all piping shall be
machine-rolled, not cut. Where piping is welded, all welds shall be primer coated. Flex drops must
have 2 inch minimum bend radius. All pipe and fittings shall be domestically manufactured.
2. All piping installations shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times tested residual pressure for a
period of 12 hours. Provide documentation of testing.
B. FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
1. Fire department connections are preferred to be remotely from each building when possible. Post
type remote fire hydrants shall include connection devices as required by each municipality. Each
post hydrant shall include designs for drainage of the system for compliance with NFPA. If wall
mounted fire department connections are proposed, each fire department connection shall include
a custom flush mounted plate, epoxy coated or chrome metal, engraved to indicate the building
served and the function. All fire department connections shall be chrome plated or brass. Plastic
is prohibited.
C. WATER SERVICE ENTRANCE
1. Water service to each building shall occur within 6-feet of the building perimeter in accordance
with NFPA 24 and be located in an equipment or mechanical room. Water service into each
building shall utilize a one piece stainless steel riser (Ames IBR or equivalent) capable of
extending beyond the foundation of each building. Riser inlet coupling shall be AWWA C900 and
riser outlet shall be AWWA C606 grooved. No connections are permitted under the slab. Thrust
blocking shall be included to meet or exceed requirements in NFPA 24 and the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2. Zoning of fire suppressions systems shall be coordinated with TCCD.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10108/22/2024[Division 21] FIRE SUPPRESSION
D. SPRINKLER HEADS
1. Sprinkler heads utilized for wet pipe sprinkler systems in spaces with ceilings, recessed type
pendent sprinkler heads shall be the standard type utilized in TCCD buildings. Concealed type
pendent sprinkler heads are acceptable in areas where enhanced appearances are required or
where a specific room function or hazard condition exists (athletics spaces, computer labs).
Concealed head cover plates shall have custom colors based upon the architects color scheme;
only factory painting of cover plates is permissible.
2. Sprinkler heads for dry pipe sprinkler systems shall be up right heads listed for the application.
In cases where dry pipe sprinkler heads are required to be pendent type, listed dry pendent
type sprinkler heads are acceptable when piped in accordance with the manufacturers listing for
installation in unconditioned areas.
3. Where possible, use freeze-proof dry sidewall sprinkler heads in lieu of antifreeze or dry-pipe
systems in areas prone to freezing.
4. Flexible fire sprinkler drops are allowable but must meet UL-listed requirements for 2” minimum
bend radius and number of allowable bends of the FlexHead® or Victaulic® brands.
E. SPECIAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS, INCLUDING DRY-PIPE, PRE-ACTION, CLEAN AGENT, FOAM,
SERVICE ENTRANCE DETAILFIRE MAIN
1
THRUSTRESTRAINTRODS
ONE PIECESTAINLESSSTEEL FIRERISER
CONCRETETHRUST BLOCK
TWO 3/4" STEEL RODS BENTAROUND FITTING AND ANCHOREDIN THRUST BLOCK (TAR COAT ALLEXPOSED STEEL)
WRAP RISER INPOLYETHYLENE
PLASTIC SHEETING
FIRE MAIN SERVICE ENTRANCE DETAIL
102
KITCHEN HOOD, AIR ASPIRATION PIPING, ETC.
1. Special fire suppression systems are project specific. Consult with TCCD.
2. Coordinate design and operation of these systems with main fire detection and suppression
systems.
3. Dry pipe and pre-action systems shall be Schedule 40 black steel, grooved-coupling pressurized
with nitrogen using nitrogen generators. These systems shall be monitored with nitrogen
concentrations controlled by automatic purge controls.
4. Dry pipe and pre-action system risers shall be located in riser rooms if possible.
F. STANDPIPE SYSTEMS
1. Standpipe systems shall be avoided if at all possible in TCC buildings. When unavoidable,
standpipe systems are to be designed and installed per current Edition of NFPA 14 Standard for
the Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems, current International Building
Codes, and the current International Fire Code. Per the current International Building Code,
sprinkled buildings having floors greater than 30 feet above the lowest level of the fire department
vehicle access are required to have Class I standpipe systems with a 2½” hose valve located in
the intermediate landing. If the building is not sprinkled, a Class III standpipe, which includes 1½”
hose valves as well as the 2½” hose valves is required. The standpipe system must be designed
to deliver 500 gpm to the most remote standpipe and 250 gpm to any additional standpipes up to
a maximum of 1250 gpm as required by NFPA 14. The 1250 gpm maximum requirement may be
reduced to 1000 gpm for buildings with sprinkler protection throughout. Per NFPA 14, buildings
having a floor(s) greater than 75 feet above the lowest level of the fire department vehicle
access are required to have standpipes able to provide the NFPA 14 required flow rate at 100
psi of pressure at the top of the most remote standpipe for firefighting operations. It is assumed
for buildings less than 75 feet that the fire department will provide the required pressure for
firefighting operations utilizing the local fire department’s fire apparatus. Combination sprinkler/
standpipe systems may be provided where a sprinkler system is required in addition to the
standpipe system.
G. FIRE PUMPS
1. Avoid if possible. Utilize passive means to decrease pressure drop to necessary level.
2. Fire pumps shall be designed and installed per current edition of NFPA 20, Standard for the
Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection. Electrical service to the fire pump is to be
installed per current Edition of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. Select a fire pump with a rated
pressure and flow based on the standpipe system demand (if provided) or the most demanding
sprinkler system, whichever is greater. Provide an electric fire pump when the NFPA 20 power
reliability power requirements can be met. Provide a service entrance rated fire pump controller
with an integrated service disconnect per NFPA 20 and NFPA 70. An automatic transfer switch
connected to the fire pump controller is required for buildings provided with an alternate power
source such as a standby generator or secondary utility power source.
Where the power reliability requirements cannot be met, a standby generator would be required
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10308/22/2024[Division 21] FIRE SUPPRESSION
to provide a secondary power source for the electric fire pump or a diesel fire pump could be
installed. Provide a fire pump for buildings where the city water supply cannot provide adequate
pressure to support the standpipe and/or sprinkler system demands. Fire pumps are to be
designed and installed per current edition of NFPA 20, Standard for the Installation of Stationary
Pumps for Fire Protection. Electrical service to the fire pump is to be installed per current
Edition of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. If the building is fully sprinkled, select a fire pump
with a rated pressure and flow based on the standpipe system demand (if provided) or the most
demanding sprinkler system, whichever is greater.
H. TEST VALVES
1. Inspector’s test valves shall be installed for each sprinkler control valve assembly equipped
with a flow switch and piped to a stairwell drain test riser within the building. When used in
combination with the drain and test riser requirements for testing standpipes equipped with
pressure-regulating hose valves, the drain test riser size shall be a minimum size of 3 in. A 2-½”
female test connection with cap shall be provided on each floor of the 3” test riser with using
pressure reducing hose valves. Each drain test riser discharge shall be piped to the exterior of
the building. The exterior discharge point shall not discharge on a sidewalk, driveway or any
other area that could result in staining, water accumulation or soil erosion. When exterior piping
is not feasible, the drain test riser shall be piped to a suitable drain having sufficient capacity to
accept full flow of pressure-regulating hose valves. When a project cannot meet this requirement,
an alternative plan must be submitted for approval.
I. RISERS
1. Install backflow preventers in fire riser room, avoid installation in vaults. Backflow assemblies
must be USC approvedtype for application. Backflows types must be documented on plans.
2. Multiple vertical risers:
a. Valves operable/accessible from standing position (less than 4.5’ AFF).
b. No crowding: Valve handles spaced to operate easily when wearing heavy gloves.
c. Devices installed at same heights, with straight-out orientation (not rotated/oblique).
d. Consistent orientation of valve indicators (OPEN/CLOSED, etc.) and gauge dials with lettering
upright; properly spaced to provide unobstructed views.
3. All FDC check valves shall be installed at fire riser manifold.
4. Riser signage must be visable and must reflect:
a. Site/Floor plan with label indicating which area of the building the riser serves..
b. Shut off valve location.
c. Main Riser - indentification of attached antifreeze, dry, pre-action, and auxillary systems.
d. Anti-freeze system design information.
END OF DIVISION
104 [Division 22] PLUMBING
Plumbing22
1.01 INTRODUCTION
A. The Design Professional shall coordinate in writing with the TCCD for specific requirements that may
not be expressly stated within this document. The design standards contained herein are intended
to assist the design professional in developing a system design adhering to the level of quality,
efficiency, and system operability consistent with the expectations of TCCD. The Design Professional
shall communicate with TCCD for specific requirements that may not be expressly stated within this
document.
B. In addition to all applicable codes, refer to the TCCD Water Conservation Standards and Compliance
Certification Form.
1.02 NOT USED
1.03 MATERIALS
A. PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
1. WASTE AND VENT
a. BURIED: Schedule 40 PVC and DWV fittings. In pipe- bursting applications HDPE piping rated for
sanitary sewer use.
1) HDPE pipe will be produced from resins meeting the requirements of ASTM
D1248, designation PE3408, ASTM D3350 cell classification PE345444C, and
will meet the requirements of AWWA C901 and C906. HDPE pipe will meet the
minimum stability requirements of ASTM D3350. Pipe will be legibly marked at
intervals of no more than five feet with the manufacturer’s name, trademark,
pipe size, HDPE cell classification, appropriate legend such as SDR 19 or
SDR 17, ASTM D3035, AWWA C901 or C906, date of manufacture and point of
origin.
b. ABOVE GRADE & CRAWL SPACE: Cast iron piping and fittings, ASTM A888, CISPI 301, service
weight, no-hub with CISPI 310 neoprene elastomeric gaskets and stainless-steel clamp-
and-shield assemblies, marked with the CISPI trademark. All no-hub clamps must have 4 bands
minimum. Sizes 5”-10” shall have 6 bands minimum.
B. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
1. BURIED: PVC Piping and Fittings: Schedule 40 PVC, SDR 35 or equivalent.
2. ABOVE GRADE & CRAWL SPACE: Cast iron piping and fittings, ASTM A 888, CISPI 301, service
weight, hubless with CISPI 310 neoprene elastomeric gaskets and stainless-steel clamp-and-shield
assemblies, marked with the CISPI trademark. All no-hub clamps must have 4 bands minimum. Sizes
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10508/22/2024[Division 22] PLUMBING
5”-10” shall have 6 bands minimum.
C. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
1. BURIED:
a. Three (3) inch diameter and smaller: ASTM B 88 copper tubing, Type L, hard temper, with
ASME B16.22 wrought copper fittings and brazed joints conforming to ASME A5.8 BCuP lead
free brazing material and AWS A5.31 flux. No joints below slab entry. Design underground
piping systems to accomodate expansion and contraction of piping using expansion and offset
loops, without theb use of slip couplings.
b. Four (4) inch diameter and larger: AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pressure pipe
and fabricated fittings (PR165) installed per the manufacturer’s instructions. Follow the
manufacturer’s guidelines for expansion loops and offsets associated with pipe thermal
expansion.
2. ABOVE GRADE & CRAWL SPACE:
a. 4-inch diameter and smaller: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard temper with ASME B16.18 cast bronze or ASME
B16.22 wrought copper and bronze fittings and soldered joints using ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA solder and
ASTM B 813 flux. Press fittings that are equivalent to Viega, Nibco, etc. are acceptable.
b. 6 inch and larger diameter: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard temper with ASME B16.18 cast bronze or ASME B16.22
wrought copper and bronze fittings and brazed joints using ASME A5.8 BCuP lead free brazing material and
AWS A5.31 flux. Please consult with TCCD before making selection.
D. COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
1. Two (2) inch diameter and smaller: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard temper with ASME B16.22 wrought copper
fittings and soldered joints using ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA solder and ASTM B 813 flux. Press fittings that are
equivalent to Viega, Nibco, etc. are acceptable.
2. Larger than two (2) inch diameter: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard temper with ASME B16.22 wrought copper
fittings and brazed joints using ASME A5.8 BCuP-5 or BCuP-6 lead free brazing material and AWS A5.31 flux. Press
fittings that are equivalent to Viega, Nibco, etc. are acceptable.
E. VACUUM PIPING
1. Provide Type L copper vacuum tubing using a manufactured product made especially for vacuum
service.
2. Support vacuum tubing every eight (8) feet and at all drops. Press fittings that are equivalent to Viega,
Nibco, etc. are acceptable.
F. MEDICAL GAS PIPING
1. All medical gas system installations shall comply with NFPA 99 and 99C Standards and the (AHJ)
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
G. GAS CYLINDER RESTRAINTS
1. Provide cylinder rack restraints for owner-furnished bottled lab gas services as indicated and
located on the Drawings.
106 [Division 22] PLUMBING
H. NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS
1. BURIED: Polyethylene, PE 2406 as classified by ASTM D 3350, SDR 11, manufactured in
accordance with ASTM D 2513 minimum of 3,000 hours typical performance when tested
according to ASTM F 1473 and ASTM D 2239. Provide with fittings manufactured in accordance
with ASTM D 2513, heat fusion welded joints, installed in accordance with ASTM D 2774. Prtovide
anodeless gas piping riser with one-piece steeel outer protective pipe sleeve bent to form a 90°
radius to route and fully contain the polyethylene tubing above grade. Terminate riser with steel to
plastic and threaded pipe connection.
2. ABOVE GRADE & CRAWL SPACE: Black steel, ASTM A 53, Grade B, Schedule 40, seamless or
ERW, in accordance with ASME B36.10M. Provide piping two (2) inches and smaller with ASME
B16.11 forged steel fittings and piping larger than two (2) inches with ASME B16.9 wrought steel
fittings. Provide socket welded joints for piping two (2) inches and smaller and butt welded joints
for piping larger than two (2) inches. Weld joints in accordance with ASME B31.1. Press fittings
equivalemt to Viega, Nibco, etc. are acceptable. Install necessary testing taps and isolation
valves to accommodate sectionalized gas piping system service-level testing both on campus site
distribution and inside buildings in accordance with Texas State Fire Marshal directive without
requiring complete system shutdown.
I. ACID RESISTANT PIPING
1. ACID RESISTANT PIPING: Polypropylene pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM D-4101, with
minimum tensile strength of 3480 PSI when tested at 73 degrees F per ASTM D-638, and pressure
rating of 150 PSIG at 68 degrees F. Provide George Fischer Fuseal 25/50 PVDF flame retardant
polyvinylidene fluoride pipe and fittings in return air plenums, joined using the George Fischer
Sloane, Inc. Fuseal II polypropylene acid waste electrofusion system, using couplings with
electrically resistant coils energized by a variable low voltage power supply or equal system.
J. DEIONIZED (DI) WATER PIPING
1. DEIONIZED (DI) WATER PIPING - Deionized (DI) Water Piping are design specific. Consult with
TCCD for design criteria
K. FUEL OIL PIPING
1. FUEL OIL PIPING – Consult with TCCD for design criteria.
1.04 MATERIALS
A. VALVES AND ACCESSORIES (Prefer American Made)
1. VALVE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
a. Refer to the mechanical section for additional valve types and requirements.
b. Provided solenoid controlled shut-off valve at domestic water service entrance to all buildings.
This valve will allow for remote shut-off of the domestic water supply to the building. The
valve shall be normally open and actuated by a 24 volt solenoid (coordinate electrical and
control interface for the valve). The installation of the valve shall be downstream from the
domestic water meter but prior to any tees, taps, etc. in the piping system.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10708/22/2024[Division 22] PLUMBING
c. Provide valves on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall
be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder-type connections for tubing. Valves
three (3) inches and larger shall have flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Rate valves for
pressures in accordance with system requirements.
d. Provide full port ball valves for branch lines in the water supply piping, and for use to
sectionalize the water distribution system.
e. Provide chrome plated valves and accessories in exposed areas.
f. Provide vacuum relief valves in conformance with ANSI Z21.22.
g. Provide water pressure reducing valves in conformance with ASSE 1003.
h. Provide water heater drain valves in conformance with ASSE 1005.
i. Provide temperature and pressure relief valves for hot water supply systems in conformance
with ANSI Z21.22.
j. Provide temperature and pressure relief valves for automatically fired hot water boilers in
conformance with ASME CSD-1 Safety Code No., Part CW, Article 5.
k. THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE: Provide valve sized to match the output load, constructed
with rough or finished bodies. Select each valve to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver
tempered water at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature changes. Provide body
fabricated of heavy cast bronze, with brass, bronze, stainless steel, or copper interior parts. Equip valve with
necessary stops, check valves, unions, and sediment strainers on the inlets. Select mixing valves to maintain
water temperature within plus or minus three (3) ºF of any setting.
l. NATURAL GAS SHUT-OFF VALVES: Provide valves two (2) inches and smaller in conformance
with ASME B16.33, with materials consistent with system construction; valves 2-1/2 inches and
larger fabricated of carbon steel conforming to API Spec 6D, Class 150.
m. HOSE BIBBS: Provide where required in conformance with ASME A112.21.3M. Provide with
vacuum breaker in accordance with ASSE 1011. Connect hose bibbs to protected domestic
water piping systems only.
n. WALL HYDRANTS: Specify non-freeze type conforming to ASSE 1019 and ASME A112.21.3M.
Provide with vacuum breaker in accordance with ASSE 1011 self-draining type lockable
recessed box and removable key. Connect wall hydrants to protected domestic water piping
systems only.
o. ROOF HYDRANTS: Are Prohibited.
B. WATER METER
1. Meter register shall be digital, indicating gallons. Specify with a digital output BAS interface,
remote readout registers and necessary wiring and accessories. Connect pulse readout point to campus
BAS system.
2. The domestic water meter is intended to capture all domestic water use for a building (restrooms
fixtures, water fountains, sinks, hose bibbs, etc.). The meter shall be installed up stream of
the building main domestic water shut off solenoid valve. The meter shall be installed in an
easily accessible mechanical space. The water meter shall be a turbine type with a digital
register calibrated for gallons of water. The meter shall have a pulse readout point that will
108 [Division 22] PLUMBING
connect to the district BAS interface..
3. Provide domestic water pressure regulator if pressure is greater than 80 psig. Regulators shall be
approved by TCCD.
C. GAS METER
1. Provide turbine type gas sewer meter with digital display, Specify meter with a minimum of two (2)
4-20 mA output points, and calibrate to monitor flow rate and level. Connect monitored points to
District BAS system.
2. Furnish spring-loaded diaphragm pressure regulation type natural gas pressure regulators.
Provide ventless regulators with adjustable pressure reduction.
D. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
1. 3/4-inch to two (2) inch: Reduced pressure backflow preventer, conforming to ASSE 1013,
USC FCCC HR, and CSA B64.5, bronze body, modular design with replaceable seats, two (2)
independent check valves with intermediate relief valve, ball valve test cocks, 1/4 turn full port
resilient seated bronze ball valves, bronze strainer, soft sated check valve.
2. 2½”-10”: Reduced pressure backflow preventer, conforming to ASSE 1013, USC FCCC HR, and
CSA B64.5, Iron body, removable bronze seats, two (2) independent check valves with intermediate
relief valve, external sensing line, stainless steel internal parts, non-rising stem gate valve shut offs.
Strainers and check valves shall be epoxy coated internally.
a. Pipe: Relief valve with an air gap fitting to adjacent floor sink.
3. Provide reduced pressure backflow preventers on domestic water source to laboratories. Create
a dedicated loop within the laboratories to prevent cross connections.
4. Reduced pressure valves are prohibited in crawl spaces.
E. DRAINS
1. Furnish floor drains with a coated cast iron body floor drain, two-piece body with double drainage
flange, invertible non-puncturing flashing collar, weep-holes, bottom outlet, and trap guard.
2. Furnish floor drains in finished areas with an adjustable satin finish nickel-bronze strainer.
3. Furnish floor sinks in mechanical rooms and shop areas with a removable shallow sediment
bucket which supports medium-duty loose-set anti-tilting grate with perimeter drainage slots and
acid resistant.
4. Provide floor sinks for fire riser rooms, double drainage flange with weepholes, aluminum internal
dome strainer, nickel-bronze, nickel-bronze grate and trap guard.
5. Provide floor sinks for kitchen areas with acid-resisting interior, double drainage flange with
weep-holes, aluminum internal dome strainer, nickel-bronze sanitary sloped rim, and nickel-
bronze anti-tilting grate.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10908/22/2024[Division 22] PLUMBING
6. Trench Drains are design specific. Consult with TCCD for design criteria.
7. Provide roof drains with a coated cast iron body with clamping collar with integral gravel guard,
adjustable extension, secondary clamping collar with O-ring, secured aluminum dome and under
deck clamp and roof sump receiver.
8. Provide overflow drains when scuppers are not present. Provide overflow drain having a coated
cast iron body with a non adjustable three (3) inch high water level regulator, with combination
membrane flashing/clamp gravel guard, secured aluminum dome and under deck clamp and roof
sump receiver.
9. Roof drains and roof overflow drains should be designed in accordance with FM Global Data
Sheet 1-54 systems.
F. CLEANOUTS
1. Furnish round coated cast iron floor cleanouts in service areas with internal gasketed ABS
cleanout plug and adjustable ABS housing with scoriated secured round satin nickel bronze top.
2. Furnish square coated cast iron floor cleanouts in finished areas, with internal gasketed ABS
cleanout plug and adjustable ABS housing with secured square satin nickel-bronze top. Provide
with secured vandal-proof cover screws and top recessed for tile or carpet cleanout marker.
3. Furnish round stainless steel access cover for wall cleanouts with secured center vandal-proof
screw, coated cast iron cleanout tee with hub and spigot connection and recessed bronze tapped
plug.
G. COMPRESSED AIR ACCESSORIES
1. REGULATOR: Provide single-seated pilot operated type compressed air pressure regulator with
valve plug, bronze body and trim, designed for maximum inlet pressure of 200 psig. Provide with
pressure gauge and adjustment screw for adjusting pressure differential from 0 to 200 psig.
2. AUTOMATIC DRAIN TRAPS: Provide float operated moisture traps, rated for 200 psig, with 30 by
30 mesh screen, full 1/4-inch drain orifice, and self-cleaning drain seat.
3. QUICK COUPLINGS: Provide 1/2-inch aluminum bronze hose couplings.
4. COALESCING FILTER: Provide 0.1-micron filter with heavy-duty cast aluminum housing and
differential pressure indicator rated for 150 psig.
5. PARTICULATE FILTER: Provide 5-micron filter with heavy-duty cast aluminum housing and
differential pressure indicator rated for 150 psig.
6. OIL/WATER SEPERATOR: Provide oil/water designed to separate the oil contaminants from the
compressed air condensate water before discharging into building drainage system. Provide
separator with pressure relief chamber, coalescing sponge filter, oil collection bottle, pre-filter and
final carbon filter.
7. HOSE REELS:
a. REEL: Manufacture steel frames, spools, and base plate of heavy gauge steel, with bronze
self-lubricating bearing fitted to solid axle, replaceable spring type cartridge with motor spring
110 [Division 22] PLUMBING
and arbor, adjustable cast aluminum ratter guide and arm, all brass swivel joint with double
O-ring seals, flexible lead-in line (size same as hose), and nylon hose rollers on solid steel
pins.
b. DISPENSER VALVE AND HOSE: 3/8-inch I.D. neoprene tube, two-fabric braid, neoprene
covered hose, 75-foot length, rubber hose stop and a maximum working pressure of 300 psi.
Provide coupler and connector.
c. LUBRICATOR: Provide mist/fog type lubricator with steel or heavy-duty cast aluminum
housing, maximum operating pressure of 150 psig, maximum operating temperature of 140 ºF
and holding capacity of six (6) ounces.
H. LABORATORY SERVICE ACCESSORIES
1. ACID NEUTRALIZATION BASIN: Scientifics Plastics Neutralization Tanks. Supply and install sump
with an initial complete neutralizing fill of 1” to 3” size range. Connect the basin into the system
vent and drainage piping. Fill tank with water and limestone chips to the appropriate level.
2. COMBINATION EMERGENCY SHOWER/EYEWASH: Floor mounted ADA Barrier Free, all stainless
steel construction, corrosion resistant, combination eye/face wash and shower safety station with
stainless steel shower head, stainless steel bowl, stainless steel flag handle and floor flange, 1
¼” IPS Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe and fittings, 1” IPS and ½” IPS U.S. made stainless steel
stay open ball valves, and polished stainless steel pull rod. Unit shall have (4) polypropylene ‘GS
Plus’ spray heads with integral “flip-top” dust covers, filters, and 1.8-GPM flow control orifices
mounted on a stainless steel head assembly. Unit shall include ANSI compliant sign. Consult
TCCD for use of concealed emergency showers/eyewashes.
3. Provide with flow switch, local alarm, alarm back to BAS and light indicating activation. TCCD
does not recommend installation of emergency shower thermostatic mixing valve to supply tepid
water (80ºF) to fixture.
4. Provide a floor drain beneath each eyewash or combination eye-wash/safety shower. For
eyewash stations, provide drain pipe to floor drain with air gap.
5. Provide flow switch with alarm to notify BAS operator of emergency fixture operation.
I. FUEL OIL STORAGE TANKS
1. Fuel Oil Storage Tanks are design specific. Consult with TCCD for design criteria.
2. Fuel Oil storage tanks should be in accordance with FM Global Data Sheets.
J. OIL WATER SEPARATORS
1. Provide underground oil/water separator meeting the requirements of the International Plumbing
Code (IPC) and the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Coordinate separator requirements
with Design Professional and the TCCD.
K. GREASE INTERCEPTORS
1. Provide underground grease interceptor meeting the requirements of the IPC and the local AHJ.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 11108/22/2024[Division 22] PLUMBING
Coordinate interceptor requirements with Design Professional and the TCCD.
L. OIL AND SAND INTERCEPTOR
1. Provide underground oil and sand interceptor meeting the requirements of the IPC and the local
AHJ. Coordinate interceptor requirements with Design Professional and the TCCD.
M. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
1. For hydraulic elevator installations the design professional shall comply with Texas Elevator
code requirements and the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. Provide an
integrated, oil/water separator, pumping and alarming system equal to the Park EleVader System.
Coordinate with Division 14 for additioanl hydraulic elevator requirements.
1.05 PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. The plumbing fixtures listed in this section are intended to convey a minimum level of quality for
a campus standard. Coordinate specific plumbing fixture requirements with Design Professional,
consistent with the level of quality of the fixtures listed herein.
2. The amount of plumbing fixtures should be based oon the maximum occupancy load per actual
use of the space and according to the International Plumbing Code. Verify exact version of the IPC
with AHJ.
3. Coordinate specific plumbing fixture and water conservation requirements with specific
environmental and/or LEED-related project goals. See equipment list this chapter.
B. PLUMBING FIXTURE
1. WATER CLOSETS: Wall-hung, elongated bowl, white vitreous china, siphon jet action, and 1-inch
top spud. Provide with open front seat, no cover seat and 1.28 gallons per flush diaphragm type
flush valve. Automatic flush feature such as infrared technology shall be hard wired. Provide
adjustable cast iron frame carrier with integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor
and wall attachment, and threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers.
a. Flush Valves - Sloan, Zurn, or approved equal.
2. URINAL: Wall hung, white vitreous china, siphon jet action, integral extended shields, integral
trap, removable stainless steel bee hive strainer, 3/4-inch top spud and steel support hanger.
Provide with 0.125 gallon per flush diaphragm type flush valve. Automatic flush feature such as
infrared technology shall be hard wired, provide adjustable cast iron and steel frame carrier with
rectangular uprights, block bases for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture
hangar, hangar plate, bearing plate, and bearing studs.
a. Flush Valves - Sloan, Zurn, or approved equal.
3. COUNTERTOP LAVATORY: White vitreous china, self-rimming, 20-inch by 17-inch oval with front overflow
and polished chrome plated faucet .5 gpm, with infrared technology, hard wired, 1-1/4-inch
chrome plated tailpiece with flat perforated open grid strainer.
112 [Division 22] PLUMBING
a. Flush Valves - Sloan, Zurn, or approved equal.
b. 1/4 turn vandal proof stops, stainless steel braided supply lines.
4. COUNTERTOP UNDERMOUNT LAVATORY: White vitreous china, self-rimming undermount, 19-inch by
16-inch oval with front overflow and polished chrome plated faucet .5 gpm with, four (4)
inch wrist blade handles with color coded indexes, with infrared technology, hard wired,
point-of-use mixing valve, 1-1/4-inch chrome plated tailpiece with flat perforated open grid strainer.
a. Flush Valves - Sloan, Zurn, or approved equal
b. 1/4 turn vandal proof stops, stainless steel braided supply lines.
5. WALL HUNG LAVATORY: WALL HUNG LAVATORY: White vitreous china, drilled for concealed arms,
20-inch by 18-inch rectangular basin with splash lip and four (4) inch high back, with
front overflow, and soap depression. Provide with polished chrome plated faucet .5
gpm, with infrared technology, hard wired, point-of-use mixing valve, 1-1/4-inch chrome
plated tailpiece with flat perforated open grid strainer. Provide floor-mounted carrier with
concealed arms, leveling and securing screws, structural uprights, and block bases.
a. Flush Valves - Sloan, Zurn, or approved equal
b. 1/4 turn vandal proof stops, stainless steel braided supply lines.
6. WALL HUNG LAVATORY WHEEL CHAIR ACCESSIBLE: White vitreous china, drilled for concealed
arms, 23-inch by 20 1/4-inch rectangular basin with splash lip and four (4) inch high back, with front overflow,
and soap depression. Provide with polished chrome plated faucet .5 gpm with infrared technology, hard wired,
point-of-use mixing valve, 1-1/4-inch chrome plated tailpiece with flat perforated open grid strainer. Provide floor-
mounted carrier with concealed arms, leveling and securing screws, structural uprights, and block bases.
a. Flush Valves - Sloan, Zurn, or approved equal
b. 1/4 turn vandal proof stops, stainless steel braided supply lines.
7. SINKS: Single or double basin, 18 gauge Type 302 stainless steel, countertop, self-rimming,
undercoated for sound dampening, drilled for three (3) holes. Provide chrome plated brass
perforated grid strainer with 1-1/2-inch tailpiece.
a. Sink 1 - Provide with polished chrome plated faucet .5 gpm up to 2.2 gpm, with infrared technology,
hard wired and gooseneck nozzle.
1) Flush Valves - Sloan, Zurn, or approved equal
2) 1/4 turn vandal proof stops, stainless steel braided supply lines.
b. Sink 2 (Option 2) - Provide with polished chrome plated faucet with, four (4) inch wrist blade
handles with color coded indexes, and gooseneck nozzle.
1) Flush Valves - Sloan, Zurn, or approved equal
2) 1/4 turn vandal proof stops, stainless steel braided supply lines.
8. ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS: Split level or standard wall mounted, stainless steel top and body,
anti-squirt bubbler with stream guard, automatic stream regulator, integrated bottle filling station,
angle iron mounting bracket, refrigerated cooling system with integral air-cooled condenser;
capacity of 8.0 gallons per hour of 50 degrees F water with inlet at 80ºF and room temperature
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 11308/22/2024[Division 22] PLUMBING
of 90ºF. Provide floor mounted carrier with hanger plate, bearing plate, adjustable support rods,
structural uprights, block bases and apron. The recessed configuration is preferable to TCCD.
9. MOP SINKS: One piece precast terrazzo, 24” x 24” x 12” deep, stainless steel drain body cast
integral to basin, lint basket and a self-draining stainless steel top shelf. Provide with chrome
plated faucets with integral vacuum breaker, integral stops, adjustable wall brace, pail hook and
3/4-inch hose thread on spout. Provide with hose and hose bracket, vinyl bumper guard, mop
hanger, and stainless steel wall guards.
a. Faucet - T&S Brass or approved equal.
10. SERVICE SINKS: 14 gauge, type 304 (18-8) stainless steel service sink with vertical and horizontal
coved corners, rolled rims. Full length 12-inch high back-splash. Furnished with wall hanger and
stainless steel support brackets. Provide with rough chrome plated mixing faucet with 3/4-inch
hose thread spout.
11. FLOOR MOUNTED SINKS: Provide where called for in the Educational Specs an ADA accessible
and a standard stainless steel sink for washing paint brushes and other uses with above floor
sediment trap closed to the fixture for ease of maintenance, trap size according to sink size, deep
and wide sink with integral drain board on each side and backsplash, bolted to floor, 14 gauge
min imum, 304 steel, hot and cold water, to be specified by design proffesiona, size and locations
to be approved by TCCD.
12. SHOWERS: Concealed anti-scald balanced pressure valve, chrome plated metal wall plate with
black index, metal lever handle, adjustable temperature limit stop, brass body and ceramic
temperature regulating module. Unit shall be vandal-resistant and provided with 1/2-inch
pipe connections. Provide with separate check stops. Provide with water conserving pressure
compensating showerhead, bent arm with wall flange, and provide six (6) foot hose and shower
arm bracket for ADA/TAS compliant showers.
13. COMBINATION EMERGENCY SHOWER/EYEWASH: Floor mounted ADA Barrier Free, all stainless
steel construction, corrosion resistant, combination eye/face wash and shower safety station with
stainless steel shower head, stainless steel bowl, stainless steel flag handle and floor flange, 1 ¼”
IPS Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe and fittings, 1” IPS and ½” IPS U.S. made stainless steel stay
open ball valves, and polished stainless steel pull rod. Unit shall have (4) polypropylene ‘GS Plus’
spray heads with integral “flip-top” dust covers, filters, and 1.8-GPM flow control orifices mounted
on a stainless steel head assembly. Unit shall include ANSI compliant sign.
a. Provide with flow switch, alarm, light. Flow switch and alarm should connect to campus BAS.g.
b. Provide a floor drain beneath each eyewash or combination eyewash/safety shower. Provide
drain pipe to floor drain with air gap.
C. DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
1. TCCD desires to use non-centralized domestic hot water production where there is currently no
centralized system. Non-centralized production of domestic water may use electric, natural gas or
heat pump production means but the means selected shall be justified by life cycle cost analysis
of all three system alternatives. Tankless water heaters are allowed where applicable.
D. PLUMBING PUMPS
114 [Division 22] PLUMBING
1. IN-LINE CIRCULATION PUMPS:
a. Provide two (2) equally sized parallel in-line circulators for domestic hot water distribution
systems.
b. Pumps shall be controlled via BAS.
c. All in-line circulating pumps shall have sensors installed to monitor temperatures.
E. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
1. Water Softener is design specific. Consult with TCCD for design criteria.
2. Deionized (DI) Water Systems or other tyoes are design specific. Refer to Processed Water
System Guidelines in the Uniform Facilities Library for requirements at Chemistry and Biology
laboratories.
1.06 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
F. Any work done within the TCCD Campus on private utilities and outside the 5’ building line shall be
done by a licensed plumber. Refer to the Utilities Section.
G. All demolition work requires the removal of the complete system, which is not limited to piping,
valves, hangers and any other associated items. Owner has the first right of refusal for all
demolished equipment and accessories. Contractor is responsible for removing and disposing of all
equipment and accessories TCCD has declined to keep.
H. All domestic hot water, cold water, recirculating hot-water, roof drain leaders piping and any waste
piping that is exposed to freezing conditions shall be continuously insulated. Install insulation over
fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions and other specialties. Valves stems are required to be long
enough to clear insulation and have clearance to work properly.
I. Provide floor drains in all toilet rooms and janitor closets. Provide floor sink in all mechanical rooms
and fire riser room.
J. Design plumbing systems in accordance with the latest edition of the International Plumbing Code or
the code adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
K. Provide locatable utility marker tape for buried pipe depths of 2 feet. Provide GPS cordinates for all
utilities to TCCD and add the cordinates to as-built drawings.
L. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface, with access covers installed flush to the finished
surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance
at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
M. Coordinate all cleanout locations with the TCCD or designated representative.
N. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete, with access cover installed flush with grade utilizing recessed
plug type.
O. Install water hammer arresters complete with accessible isolation valve hot and cold water lines
between the next to last and the last fixture in a battery of plumbing fixtures, and at each plumbing
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 11508/22/2024[Division 22] PLUMBING
fixture located remote from a battery of fixtures, at fixtures using quick close valves and as code
required. Size in accordance with PDI WH-201.
P. Route compressed air piping in an orderly manner to maintain gradient. Slope piping toward main
drain at one (1) inch per 20 feet of pipe. Provide capped drip leg six (6) inches long at the base of
each vertical riser, compressed air drops, and at the ends of main piping runs with a valved drain pipe
discharging to the nearest floor or trench drain.
Q. Provide six (6) inch dirt legs fittings at natural gas pipe equipment connections.
R. Provide continuous welded (all joints and seams) steel sleeve around natural gas piping concealed
above ceilings in accordance with code requirements. Vent sleeve to exterior of building.
S. Contractor to furnish and install (TCCD standard) water meter and solenoid controlled shut-off valve
on all building. Meter/valve locations and control/monitoring interfaces to be coordinated through
TCCD. The contractor shall furnish and install (TCCD standard) natural gas meters and coordinate
the control/monitoring interfaces with TCCD. Provide isolation valves to accommodate meter and
valve servicing.Verify location, capacity and connection of new building services to existing utilities
(domestic water, sanitary sewer, natural gas, etc.) with TCCD.
1. IRRIGATION WATER METER:
a. The irrigation water meter is intended to capture all irrigation water use for a building site.
The meter shall be ordered with pulse capabilities and installed up stream of the irrigation
solenoid shut off valve and any branch tees on the irrigation water system.
2. IRRIGATION WATER SOLENOID CONTROLLED SHUT-OFF VALVE:
a. The irrigation water solenoid controlled shut-off valve is intended to provide the ability to
remotely shut off the irrigation water supply. The valve is to be normally closed and actuated
by a 24v solenoid. The installation is to be installed downstream of the irrigation water meter
prior to any tees etc. in the irrigation plumbing system.
T. Coordinate openings in existing roofs with the design professional to avoid nullifying the roof warranty
and with the TCCD Project Manager to assure compliance with the Roof Management Plan.
U. Provide unions and flanges to permit removal of equipment.
V. Provide adequate space to permit service of valves and related piping specialties. Layout equipment
with sufficient service clearances to ensure proper maintenance. Install equipment so that
maintenance service can be accommodated. Indicate required clearances by using dashed lines on
the Drawings.
W. Slope piping systems to permit drainage. Provide drain valves at low points and manual air vents at
high points. Provide hose bibb drains on domestic hot and cold water mains.
X. Conceal piping within the building inside walls, above ceilings or in furred chases. Use exposed
piping only in mechanical rooms unless directed otherwise.
Y. Provide a minimum two (2) inch clearance between insulated piping and other piping, structural
members or obstructions.
116 [Division 22] PLUMBING
Z. Isolate domestic water lines for building services from cross connection by means of a code-approved
backflow preventer. Provide additional backflow protection devices in process water connections off
the building main service. Coordinate with TCCD to obtain flow test data to ensure adequate flow
and pressure exists to support building and systems. Avoid installing backflow preventers in series
arrangements.
AA. Isolate domestic water lines for laboratory use from cross connection by means of a code-approved
backflow preventer. Laboratories will have an independent non-potable hot water loop separate from the
main building. The laboratory loop may feed from the main building loop.
AB. Tee-pulling of copper tube is not allowed.
AC. Provide major plumbing fixtures with minimum six (6) year warranty.
AD. Coordinate plumbing system design requirements with overall project design objectives with respect to
LEED requirements, specific environmental performance objectives etc., as identified by TCCD.
AE. Provide trap guard in all floor drains and floor sinks in place of trap primers.
AF. Provide roof top pipe support made of thermoplastic, or polyethylene that is uv-resistant and
weatherproof. If the support contains metal, use electro-galvanized. The use of wood is prohibited.
AG. PVC is prohibited in the crawl space.
AH. Press fittings are acceptable.
AI. All non-fire rated wall penetrations shall be sealed with caulk for sound isolation.
AJ. All branch lines shall have shutoff valves.
AK. All sensor activated lavatories shall have thermostatic mixing valves (TMV).
AL. Provide check valves on all central faucet sections.
AM. Specify that smoke test be performed on all renovation plumbing sanitary sewer/vent systems.
AN. Disinfect domestic water systems per code requirement verifired by third-party testing.
AO. TCCD Science labs require non-potable domestic cold and hot water loops to supply all fixtures except
eyewash/emergency showers properly backflow protected. Lab domestic hot water loops shall derive
from central or building level potable domestic hot water supplies where possible and shall have electric
or heat pump booster water heaters to maintain loop temperature.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 11708/22/2024[Division 22] PLUMBING
1.07 PLUMBING PIPING LABELING
1. All piping shall follow Tarrant County College Districts labeling standards.
END OF DIVISION
118 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
1.01 INTRODUCTION
A. This section is broken into three major sections: materials, equipment, and systems. The materials
section will list what is acceptable for use on TCCD projects, the equipment section will provide
information on equipment types and items specific to TCCD, the systems section will indicate how the
materials and equipment are to be combined to provide energy efficient and mai ntainable systems
1.02 PROPRIETARY EQUIPMENT LIST
A. TCCD has standardized on the following equipment that will be used as the basis for design where
applicable.
1. Building Automation System – All campuses, Reliable Controls, RC Studio.
2. CHW/HW Flow meters – Onicon F-3500 (insertion magnetic).
3. Hydronic control valves – Belimo PIV or Energy Valves (for AHUs and large diameter modulating
control depending on the application) and QCV (for fan coil units, VAV boxes and other small
loads)
4. Airflow stations – Ebtron
5. Variable frequency drives - ABB ACH Series
6. Lab Supply and Exhaust Air Valves - Accutrol.
1.03 MATERIALS
A. Air Side Materials
1. Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be scheduled on the drawings and supplemented, if needed,
by a specification. All diffusers used on TCCD projects shall be aluminum. The standard air
devices to be used for TCCD projects shall be equivalent to:
a. Lay-in Ceiling Supply – Titus TMS-AA or approved equal.
b. Lay-in Ceiling Return – Titus PAR-AA or approved equal.
c. Gypsum board Ceiling Supply – Titus TDC-AA (face size coordinated with neck size) or
approved equal.
d. Gypsum board Ceiling Return or Exhaust – Titus 8F or approved equal.
e. These air devices or formally approved equals by other manufacturers shall be selected
and scheduled. There are many instances in buildings where other types of air devices
will be needed, where this is the case they shall comply with the material and architectural
requirements. Coordinate with the Architect and Engineer of record.
Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning23
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 11908/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
f. Where supply air devices are located in a gypsum board or other hard ceiling and there
is no access to the ductwork for air balancing then opposed blade dampers (OBD) will be
scheduled for the neck of the diffuser. Size supply air devices with OBDs appropriately to
achieve desirable sound levels.
2. Flexible ductwork
a. Flexible ductwork shall comply with the current version of the International Energy
Conservation Code for insulation R-value. Flex ducts shall have a core that is bonded to
the steel wire coil to support the fiberglass insulation. The polyethylene inner liner shall be
acoustically rated to reduce noise. Temperature range shall be from -20F to 200F and static
pressure ratings shall be -1” W.G. to +6”W.G. The maximum length of flex duct shall be 5 feet
and shall only be used to connect a single branch duct to a single air device. Where shallow
plenum spaces prevent vertical drops from metal duct elbows to the supply diffuser, connect
flex duct directly to supply diffusers using Thermaflex FlexFlow elbows.
3. Sheet metal ductwork
a. Sheet metal ductwork comes in two configurations, rectangular and round. All ductwork
shall be minimum 24 gauge with G90 galvanized coating constructed and supported in
accordance with the current version of SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible” for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods,
unless otherwise indicated. The design professional shall select the duct material and finish
based on the application (i.e. natatoriums and other corrosive environments would need to be
assessed for duct material and if the ductwork is going to be exposed the finish would need to
be coordinated with the architect to determine if a galvanized coating or a paint grip coating is
appropriate). Metal shall be minimum 24 gauge G90 galvanized.
b. Rectangular ducts shall be cross broken and joined using a flange, gasket and retainer clips.
Where specialty fittings are required the joint shall be taped and mastic applied. Select and
document the correct pressure class of ductwork based on the system type that the ductwork
will support.
c. High and Medium pressure round and flat oval ducts shall be spiral seam. Fittings shall be of
spiral construction. Low pressure snap lock longitudinal seam round duct is acceptable.
4. Sheet metal fittings
a. Sheet metal fittings shall be fabricated in accordance with the current version of SMACNA
standards and shall match the pressure class of the overall ductwork system. Change in
direction fittings for rectangular ductwork shall be either radius type of mitered with turning
vanes. All duct transition fittings, whether round or rectangular shall be no more than 30
degree angle from the surface of the adjacent duct.
5. Ductwork insulation.
a. Rectangular ductwork can either be internally lined (only where exposed) or externally
wrapped (preferred). As a minimum rectangular ductwork shall have internal insulation from
the connection to any air moving equipment to 15 feet from the connection to attenuate sound.
In some applications the design professional may determine that all rectangular ductwork
needs to be internally insulated; which is acceptable for acoustically sensitive projects.
All concealed spiral round ductwork shall be wrapped with insulation unless round duct
120 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
liner is needed for an acoustically sensitive application. Specify insulation and associated
accessories to have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed
index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Specify UL-approved assemblies for
pipes and ducts passing through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions as required.
b. Duct liner shall be fibrous glass liner thermal insulation with the glass fibers bonded with
a thermosetting resin. The insulation shall comply with ASTM C 1071, Type I, ASTM G-21
and G-22 with factory applied edge finish and air velocity rating of 5000 feet per minute. At
1-1/2” thickness the liner shall have an installed R-value of 6.0, at 2” the R-value shall be 8.0.
Insulation shall have a noise reduction coefficient of .70 minimum when tested in accordance
with ASTM C423. The insulation shall be similar to Johns-Manville, Permacote Linacoustic
Standard.
c. Duct wrap shall be fibrous glass blanket thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 553-
92, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from reinforcing scrim,
aluminum foil, and vinyl film. At 1-1/2” thickness the liner shall have an installed R-value of
4.5, at 2” the R-value shall be 6.0. Duct wrap shall be similar to Johns-Manville, Microlite.
Duct wrap insulation joints shall be sealed with fiber mesh and mastic to provide a continuous
vapor barrier.
6. Fire, smoke and fire/smoke dampers
a. Shall be UL555 or UL555S listed.
b. Fire dampers shall be galvanized steel frame band shutter with a fusible link element. Fire
dampers used in the horizontal position shall be designed for that use. The damper rating,
either 1-1/2 hour or 3 hour, shall be determined based on the wall rating where the penetration
occurs.
c. Fire/smoke dampers shall be sleeve type with a smoke detector mounted in the sleeve,
coordination with the fire alarm design is required to ensure building fire alarm system
compatibility with the sleeve mounted smoke detector. The frame/sleeve and damper blades
shall be galvanized steel with the motor actuator mounted on the outside of the linkage frame.
The only acceptable type of fire/smoke damper for TCCD project is one with an electronic
fusible type element. The electronic detector acts as the fusible element upon reaching a
temperature set point and sends a signal to close the damper. The electronic fusible element
shall be mounted on the frame of the fire/smoke damper and shall have a trip indicator LED on
the housing and a fusible element reset button.
d. All fire, smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers shall have adequately sized duct access
doors.
7. Control dampers shall be single blade with gaskets for round duct and opposed airfoil blade
type for rectangular duct. The actuator shaft shall be suitable for connection to a manual control
handle or an electric actuator. Manual dampers shall have a locking feature an indicator showing
the position or percent open of the damper blades and stand-offs to preserve duct insulation
thickness beneath them.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 12108/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
8. Ductwork access doors shall be gasketed for air tightness and shall be rated for the ductwork
pressure class. The access door shall be double walled with perforated interior and glass fiber
insulation between the galvanized metal panels. All door hinges shall be piano type and extend
the full length of the door. Latches shall be cam type with one latch on doors up to 12 inches and
two latches for doors larger than 12 inches. Access doors that are 24” and larger shall have two
compression type latches with handles on the inside and outside of the door.
9. Air moving equipment to ductwork flexible connectors shall be flexible glass fabric double coated
with neoprene for indoor equipment. For outdoor equipment the connectors shall be glass fabric
double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
B. Water Side Materials
1. Control valves.
a. All chilled or heating water control valves on TCCD projects shall be Belimo valves as specified
in the proprietary equipment section with Belimo MFT actuators. Belimo MFT actuators on
Belimo ePIV valves shall have integral logic needed to optimize operation of Belimo “smart
valves”. Belimo is a TCCD proprietary standard, substitutions are not acceptable. The design
professional shall be responsible for coordinating the valve size and flow characteristics for
each piece of equipment.
2. Critical gages are insertion thermometers and pressure gages.
a. The design professional is responsible for determining, based on the project, whether other
types of gages or measuring devices are required.
b. Insertion thermometer case shall be plastic with integral solar cell and minimum 3/4” tall
LCD display. Thermometer should have a non-reflective screen that displays temperature in
degrees F. The stem shall be copper plated steel or brass with the length coordinated with
the installed thermo-well. The stem to thermometer connection shall allow adjustment of 180
degrees in the vertical plan and 360 degrees in the horizontal plane. Unit shall be calibrated
and accurate to 1% of the range.
c. Pressure gages shall be liquid filled type, drawn cast aluminum case, 4” diameter for
thermo-well mounting. The pressure element shall be Bourdon tube with mechanical link to
pointer. Dial shall be satin finish on aluminum with etched scale markings and a red pointer.
Coordinate with the installation and provide either a bottom or back outlet. Accuracy, Grade
A, 1% of scale
d. Other devices, thermo-wells, test ports, etc. are required in association with thermometers and
pressure gages, these shall be shown on drawing or in details indicating where the design
professional requires a device. As a minimum TCCD requires thermo-wells and test ports
on supply and return piping and water chillers, pumps, hyrdronic coils associated with air
handlers (for air handlers with multi-section coils provide test ports on the supply and return
main for each coil section) and at boilers.
3. Hydronic piping above ground
a. Shall be either schedule 40 black steel or type K copper. Support and mounting of all piping
shall comply with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Provide pipe hangers within 12 inches of each
change in direction and provide hangers on both sides of line valves or unions.
122 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
b. Pipe 2-1/2 inches and smaller, domestic manufactured copper ASTM B 88, type K, hard
drawn. Joints two inch diameter and smaller, soldered with ASTM B 32, grade Sb5 tin-
antimony alloy (lead free) with Sil-Fos flux. 2-1/2-Inch diameter, brazed using AWS A5.8, Type
BAg-5 with AWS A5.31 flux, except Type BCuP-5 or BCuP-6 may be used for brazing copper-
to-copper joints. Fittings shall be wrought copper and bronze fittings conforming to ASME
B16.22 or cast bronze fittings conforming to ASME B16.18. Pro-press or similar types of pipe
joining system are allowed on TCCD projects. Pull-tee pipe connects are not acceptable.
c. Pipe three inches to ten inches; domestic manufactured black steel pipe, ASTM A 53, grade
B, Schedule 40, in accordance with ASME B36.10M.
d. Pipe twelve inches and larger; domestic manufactured black steel pipe, standard schedule.
e. Joints 3 inch diameter and larger, butt-welded. Fittings 3 inch to 10 inch diameter, ASTM
A 234/A 234M, WPB(W), butt-weld, Schedule 40, in accordance with ASME B16.9. Twelve
(12) inch diameter and larger, ASTM A 234/A 234M, WPB(W), butt weld, standard wall in
accordance with ASME B16.9. Victaulic or similar types of pipe joining systems are not
allowed on TCCD projects.
4. Hydronic piping below grade
a. Shall be direct buried type, factory pre-insulated steel piping suitable for direct burial and
rated for temperatures up to 230ºF, for underground chilled and heating hot water campus
distribution. Provide Schedule 40 piping with closed cell polyurethane foam insulation having
a minimum thermal conductivity of 0.14 BTU inch/hour-square foot-ºF and an extruded black,
high-density polyethylene (HDPE) jacket with a minimum thickness of 125 mils. Provide
factory prefabricated and pre-insulated fittings with jacket identical to pipe sections
5. Valves
a. Valves are required in a variety of locations for water shutoff, balancing, etc., at a minimum,
shutoff valves will be provided at all hydronic coils, chillers, boilers, pumps and branch pipes
for maintenance. The design professional shall locate, on the drawings where other valves
are required. The valves to be used are listed below.
b. Ball valves shall be full port design; ball valves 1/2 inch and larger in accordance with MSS
SP-72 or MSS SP-110, cast iron or bronze with threaded, soldered, or flanged ends. Provide
valves eight (8) inches and larger with manual gear operators with position indicators.
c. Butterfly valves shall be full lugged drilled and tapped for dead end service type valves in
accordance with MSS SP-67, Type 1. Provide throttling handles with a minimum of seven (7)
locking positions for valves smaller than eight (8) inches. For valves eight (8) inches and
larger, provide totally enclosed manual gear operators with adjustable balance return stops
and position indicators. Provide high-performance double offset butterfly valves (Keystone
K-LOK or approved equal) in central plant hydronic piping for flow isolation and balancing
service.
d. Check valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be provide in accordance with MSS SP-80.
Provide check valves three (3) inches and larger in accordance with MSS SP-71, Class 125
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 12308/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
e. Design professional note – TCCD requires that all hydronic pumps use variable frequency
drives.
6. Piping system or hydronic specialty item requirements
a. Will vary based on the project, the design professional shall select the specialty items needed
for the project and indicate where in the system the specialty equipment is located. The
specialties scheduled shall meet the standards indicated below.
b. Air separators shall be steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME SEC VIII, 125 psig
operating pressure, with tangential inlet and outlet connections and internal stainless steel
air collector tube. Provide air separators on the pumps suction side of main distribution pump
headers.
c. Expansion tanks shall be welded steel closed bladder type, tested and stamped in accordance
with ASME SEC VIII, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with replaceable flexible heavy-
duty butyl bladder, pressure gauge and steel support stand.
d. Strainers shall be cleanable, basket or “Y” type, size to match piping. Provide strainer bodies
fabricated of cast iron with drilled and tapped bottoms, blowoff outlet with pipe nipple, gate
valve, discharge pipe nipple and cast arrows indicating the direction of flow.
e. Flexible pipe connectors shall be flexible stainless steel piping connectors with single braid
for piping connections to coils. Equip flanged assemblies with limit bolts to restrict maximum
travel to the manufacturer’s standard limits. Unless otherwise required, the length of the
flexible connectors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the service intended.
Internal sleeves or liners, compatible with circulating medium, shall be provided when
recommended by the manufacturer.
f. Flexible equipment connectors shall be Kevlar reinforced EPDM double sphere type flexible
connectors (Mason SFDEJ or approved equal) for connections to boilers, chillers, cooling
towers, pumps, etc. Connectors designed to provide volumetric response to sound pressure
waves and sound attenuation.
g. Pump suction diffusers shall be angle type body with removable strainer basket and internal
straightening vanes, integral adjustable support, with casing connection sizes to match pump
suction and inlet pipe sizes. Provide with a blowdown outlet and plug, and strainer with
permanent magnet located in flow stream.
h. Air vents shall be provided at all high points in the hydronic system. Where easily accessible
manual operated general service type air venting valves shall be used. Where access is
difficult or regular air entrainment is possible automatic type air vents shall be used and piped
to a floor drain. Combination manual / automatic air vent manifold air vents shall be ball-
float type design with brass/bronze or brass bodies, 300 series corrosion-resistant steel float,
linkage and removable seat.
7. Pipe Insulation material
a. Type shall follow the table below. Insulation thicknesses shall comply with the current version
of the International Energy Conservation Code, unless otherwise indicated. Exterior piping
shall have an aluminum jacket over the insulation.
b. Fiberglass or mineral fiber molded insulation shall be ASTM C 547, ‘k’ value of 0.26 at 75ºF;
noncombustible, with factory applied white kraft foil vapor barrier.
124 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
c. Flexible elastomeric closed cell insulation shall be ASTM C 534, Grade 1, Type I or II. Type II
shall have vapor retarder skin on one or both sides of the insulation.
Service Material ASTM Spec Type Vapor BARRIER
Required
Chilled Water Supply & Return,
Interior Application Fiberglass C547 I Yes
Chilled Water Supply & Return,
Exterior Application Fiberglass C 547 I Yes
Condenser Water Supply &
Return Fiberglass C 547 I No
Heating Hot Water Supply &
Return (Max. 250ºF)Fiberglass C 547 I No
Refrigerant Suction and Liquid
Piping
Flexible Elastomeric
Cellular C 534 I Yes
C. Specialty Materials
1. WARRANTY
a. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. MANUFACTURERS
a. Chromalox, Inc. Or approved equal.
3. MATERIALS
a. Heat Tracing Cable: Self-limiting design. When cable is cut to length in the field, heat output
per foot will not change.
b. Freeze Protection Service Voltage: 277 volt, single phase, 60 hertz rated for non-hazardous
area with one point power supply.
c. Heating Cable System
1) Maintain minimum temperature of 40 degrees Fahrenheit for specified piping system.
2) Heating cable watts rating shall be based on a minimum 0 degrees Fahrenheit ambient
temperature.
3) Power Demand: 5 watts per foot for pipe sizes 4 inches and less, 8 watts per foot for 6
inches through 8-inch pipe, and 12 watts per foot for 10 inch to 14 inch pipe.
4) Cable shall have self-regulating factor of at least 90 percent.
5) Cable Core: Radiation cross-linked, semi-conductive polymer. Chemically crosslinked
material is not acceptable.
6) Additional protective dielectric jacket between heat producing core material and outer
jacket of heater.
7) Cable shall be fed via one control per loop to sense ambient air and pipe temperature
for specified piping systems.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 12508/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
8) Provide a digital electronic controller to control and monitor the electric heating cable
system for pipe freeze protection and grease waste systems. The controller shall be
listed as na electronic controller for electric heat tracing and have a voltage rating of
100-277 Vac. Enclosure shall be FRP and Nema 4/12 rated. Controller shall be capable
of (BMS) BAS integration to monitor heat tracing system. Digital electronic controller
shall include built-in ground fault protection device (GFPD).
4. Chimneys and stacks
a. Chimneys and stacks serving natural gas fired appliances or boilers shall comply with the
material requirements listed below. Sizing shall comply with the manufacturers requirements
based on length of run and number of fittings.
b. For stacks six (6) inches and less, specify double-wall, factory-built type vent pipe, tested in
accordance with UL 441, for use with approved Category I appliances burning natural or LP
gas, which produce flue gases exhausted at temperatures not exceeding 550º F, with inner
jacket of aluminum alloy and outer jacket of galvanized steel
c. For stacks greater than six (6) inches in diameter, specify double wall, factory-built type metal
stacks, tested to UL 103 for use with equipment burning gaseous, liquid, or solid fuels, rated
in accordance with NFPA 211, with type 316 stainless steel inner and outer walls. Stack to be
listed for internal static pressures of 60 inches water gage. Provide with one (1) inch ceramic
fiber insulation between the inner and outer walls
d. For condensing boilers and direct vent equipment, specify double wall, factory-built type metal
vent, tested to UL 1738 for use with condensing appliances or pressurized venting systems
serving Category II, III, or IV appliances or as specified by the equipment manufacturer with
a maximum temperature not to exceed 550ºF. Specify with one (1) inch minimum air space
between walls, inner jacket of AL-29-4C super-ferritic stainless steel and outer jacket of Type
316 stainless steel. Stack to be listed for an internal static pressure of 6 inches water gage.
Avoid horizontal flue runs; provide separate flue for each boiler/water heater. and tested to 15
inches water gage. Provide with one (1) inch ceramic fiber insulation between the inner and
outer walls.
e. Provide accessories, each bearing factory applied UL label: Ventilated Roof Thimble,
consisting of roof penetration, vent flashing with spacers and storm collar; Exit Cone,
consisting of inner cone, and outer jacket, to increase stack exit velocity 1.5 times and Stack
Cap, consisting of conical rain-shield with inverted cone for partial rain protection with low
flow resistance.
5. Diesel or natural gas engine generator exhaust systems
a. Diesel or natural gas engine generator exhaust systems shall comply with the manufacturer’s
requirements for system back-pressure. The design professional shall coordinate all aspects
of the exhaust system to ensure full engine/generator power output using the materials listed
below.
b. Mufflers shall be “super critical grade”. The learning environment associated with TCCD
campuses requires quite engine operation.
c. Roof or wall thimbles for exhaust pipe penetrations of a building exterior shall be a
manufactured product specifically designed for use with diesel or natural gas driven engines.
The thimble shall be rated for use with the wall or roof material where the penetrations occur,
126 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
this refers to combustible vs. non-combustible walls or roofs.
d. Exhaust pipe terminations shall be horizontal with a 45 degree angle on the end of the pipe
for sound attenuation. The end of the pipe shall have an expanded metal cover to prevent
bird nesting.
e. Insulation shall be provided on all exhaust system components located inside of a building.
The insulation shall start at the muffler connection to the engine and extend to the wall or roof
thimble. The insulation type and thickness requirements are shown in the table below.
SURFACE
TEMPERATURE RANGE
INSULATION
MATERIAL <1.25 1.5 to 3 3.5 to 5 6 to 10 11 to 36
Diesel Engine Exhaust
(Up to 1200ºF)Calcium Silicate 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.0 6.0
f. Type 304 stainless steel jacket shall cover all of the calcium silicate insulation and shall have
band type closures to hold the cover material in place.
6. Refrigerant piping, valves, fittings, and accessories
a. Shall comply with ASHRAE 15 and ASME B31.5
b. Piping shall be domestically produced copper tubing ASTM B 280, type ACR, hard drawn with
joints soldered with ASTM B 32, grade Sb5 tin-antimony alloy (lead free) with ASTM B 813
solder flux or brazed with AWS A5.8, type Bag-5 with AWS A5.31 flux, except type BCuP-5 or
BCuP-6 may be used for brazing copper-to-copper joints. Provide with wrought copper fittings
conforming to ASME B16.22.
c. Moisture and liquid indicators shall be provided on all system and shall be single port type,
UL listed with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color coded paper
moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap.
d. Refrigerant filter driers shall conform to ARI 710 and shall be one direction flow with molded
porous core to remove moisture and foreign matter from the refrigerant stream and will be
provided on all systems. For heat pump systems provide filter dryer as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer, if no recommendations are present provide a filter dryer suitable for
the system reversal associated with a heat pump.
7. Equipment insulation
a. Shall be provided on all mechanical equipment where the operating temperatures are in
the range indicated by the table below. Where insulated equipment will require access or
maintenance provide flexible reusable insulation blankets. Insulating specifications shall
require that equipment identification tag and the manufacturer’s nameplates be exposed.
b. Mineral fiber complying with ASTM C 547, Types I, II or III; supply the insulation with
manufacturer’s recommended factory-applied jacket
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 12708/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
c. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Grade 1, Type I or Type II
with vapor retarder skin on one or both sides of the insulation.
EQUIPMENT HANDLING
MEDIA AT INDICATED
TEMPERATURE
INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS
30 to 200ºF Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 1.5 inches
8. Pipe sleeves
a. Shall be provided for all pipe penetrations through wall, roof or floors. Provide sleeves one
size larger than the pipe it serves (accounting for insulation). Provide sleeves in non-load
bearing surfaces fabricated of galvanized sheet metal, and sleeves in load bearing surfaces
constructed of uncoated carbon steel pipe, Schedule 40. Sleeves shall not be installed in
structural members. Seal all sleeves water and airtight. Provide UL listed sealant between pipe
and sleeve as required by code. Provide escutcheon around penetrations in finished areas.
b. Provide Linkseal pipe penetration sealing device (or approved equal) assembly for pipe
penetrations through waterproofed floors and walls.
c. When penetration is through a fire rated floor or wall, provide fire rated system so that the
assembly, when complete, is UL listed and equals the fire rating of construction penetrated by
the sleeve.
D. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
1. Identify and label mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, valves, control damper, fire dampers,
smoke dampers, fire/smoke dampers and accessories per the following requirements.
2. Use the systems and equipment identification scheme developed for the project in conjunction
with TCCD. There are naming conventions for each campus that will be provided as the beginning
of each project.
3. Identify each individual piece of equipment (pump, chiller, valve, instrument, panel, etc.) with a
unique tag number.
4. Specify equipment identification tags fabricated of laminated three-layer plastic with engraved
white letters on a black background; minimum size 3 inches long by 1 inch high. Minimum
lettering height for numbers and names is 3/8-inch; other data is 1/4-inch. Mechanically fasten
tags to equipment using screws or rivets. Exterior equipment labeling shall be a brass tag riveted
to the equipment casing.
5. Label plumbing and mechanical piping systems in accordance with the table below. Identify pipe
flow directions using arrows.
PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS LABELING
128 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
SERVICE BAND LETTERS/ARROWS LEGEND
Domestic cold water (potable)Lt. Blue White DCW
Domestic hot water Orange White DHW
Domestic hot water return Orange White DHWR
Fire protection water Red White FIRE
Condenser water supply Brown White CWS
Condenser water return Brown White CWR
Chilled water supply Dark Blue White CHS
Chilled water return Lt. Blue White CHR
Heating hot water supply Orange White HWS
Heating hot water return Orange White HWR
Lab waste ACID Purple Black LAB WASTE
Lab vent ACID Purple Black LAB VENT
Deionized water Purple Black DI
Non-potable water Purple Black NPW
Sanitary vent Tan White VENT
Sanitary sewer Brown White SS
Chemical feed Purple Black CHEM FEED
Fuel oil Forest Green Black FUEL OIL
Natural gas Yellow Black NAT. GAS
Storm Drain Green White SD
Overflow Drain Green White OD
Condensate Lt. Blue White COND
Compressed Air Blue White CA
6. For piping without insulation, paint exposed piping located within mechanical rooms. Wrap-around
or placard Pipe identification bands or stenciled paint identifiers shall be provided on all piping.
If non-wrap-around plastic band type identifiers are used they shall come with a minimum of two
band type clamps.
7. For piping with insulation that is exposed in mechanical rooms, provide color impregnated PVC
jackets that match the color table above. The PVC jackets shall cover all fittings, valves, etc.
in addition to the straight pipe. Pipe identification bands shall be provided on all piping at a
minimum of 20 foot intervals, for non-potable water the interval shall be 10 feet. Plastic band
type identifiers shall come with a minimum of two band type clamps.Specify underground piping,
both mechanical and plumbing, to be installed with buried pipeline marker. Provide magnetic-
type warning tape installed above the piping in the backfill at least six (6) inches below grade,
imprinted to read “Caution- buried pipe below”.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 12908/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
Refer to table below for text and arrow size associated with pipe markers.
OUTSIDE DIAMETER
OF PIPE COVERING
(INCHES)
LENGTH OF
COLOR BAND
(INCHES)
ARROW LENGTH
BY WIDTH
(INCHES)
SIZE OF LEGEND
LETTERS
AND NUMERALS
(INCHES)
Less than 1 1/2 8 8 x 1 1/2
1 1/2 to 2 3/8 8 8 x 2 1/4 3/4
2 1/2 to 7 7/8 12 8 x 2 1/4 1 1/4
8 to 10 24 12 x 4 1/2 2 1/2
Over 10 32 12 x 4 1/2 3 1/2
8. Specify identification for valves by using a securely attached brass valve tag stamped with valve
tag number. Provide valve schedule identifying valve number and function
9. Identify ductwork with stenciled painting. Identify as to air handling unit number and area served.
Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure and
at each obstruction.
1.04 EQUIPMENT
All roof mounted equipment shall be secured for wind resistance and should have hail guards.
All mechanical equipment should be FM Approved.
A. CONDENSING WATER BOILERS
1. MANUFACTURERS
a. AERCO Benchmark Platinum Series or approved equal.
2. MATERIALS
a. Description: Boiler shall be dual ful fired (nat.gas/propane) fully condensing fire tube design.
It shall be designed to operate in variable primary or primary secondary piping configuration.
Power burner shall have full modulation with minimum 15:1 turndown ratio and discharge into
a positive or negative pressure vent.
b. Boiler efficiency shall increase with decreasing load (output), while maintaining setpoint.
Boiler shall be factory-fabricated, factory-assembled and factory-tested, fire-tube condensing
boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure-tight, built on a steel base, including insulated
jacket, flue-gas vent connections, combustion-air intake connections, water suply, dual inlet
returns, condensate drain connections and controls.
c. The boiler water pressure drop shall not exceed five (5) psig.
d. The boiler water connections shall be flanged 150-pound, ANSI rated.
e. Dual Returns: The boiler shall include dual return connections form low and high return
130 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
temperature zones for added flexibility and thermal efficiency optimization. The boiler
shall not have a minimum flow rate requirement through either return connection as long
as the specified minimum flow of the boiler is met through a combination of the two return
connections. Boilers with single return will be deemed unacceptable.
f. Dual Fuel Capability. Dual fuel boiler (natural gas / propane) shall include a combustion
system capable of operating on both Natural Gas and Propane. The boiler efficiency and
turndown shall remain unchangedregardless of fuel source. The dual fuel system shall
incorporate independent natural gas and propane gas trains and a fuel selector switch.
The switching mechanism shall be such that it shall not be possible to flow both fuels
simultaneously. The unit shall be calibrated to run on both fuel sources at start-up. No
additional re-calibration shall be required when switching between fuel sources for a period of
one year from the initial calibration.
g. Exhaust Manifold: The exhaust manifold shall be corrision resistant cast aluminum or 316
stainless steel. The exhaust manifold shall have a collecting reservoir and a gravity drain for
the elimination of condensation.
h. The boiler shall have an integrated boiler control that is capable of operating the boiler and
associated accessories including but not liited to its pumps, valves and dampers.
i. Building Automation: The control shall be able to communicate to Building Management
Systems using BACnet and Modbus without the use of external gateways. The control shall
be able to communicate over each of the two protocols using IP as well as RS485. The use of
external gateways is not acceptable.
j. Software update: The control shall be capable of field software updates without the need for
hardware component(s) replacement. This shall be performed either using software on a USB
flash drive or via Internet connection. The software update mechanism shall be performed by
a trained technician. The software update menus shall be secured using a password level.
After the software update, the control shall retain all of its prior field settings.
k. The controls shall annunciate boiler and sensor status and include extensive self-diagnostic
capabilities.
l. Each boiler shall have an electric, single-seated combination safety shutoff valve / regulator
with proof of closure switch in its gas train. Each boiler shall incorporate dual over-
temperature protection with manual reset, in accordance with ASME Section IV and CSD-1.
m. O2-Trim: Each boiler shall be equipped with and advance O2 -trim system for condensing
boiler applications. The system shall utilize a low cost reliable automotive O2 sensor that
measure and monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. The system shall adjust the
blower speed to maintain optimal air-fuel ratios in the event of any site condition changes (air
density, gas pressure, BTU content, etc.).
n. The boiler shall be capable of venting in Polypropylene venting material. The exhaust
vent must be UL Listed for use with category II, III and IV appliances and compatibe with
condensing flue gas service, UL-listed vetns of AI 29-4C stainless steel must be used with
boilers.
o. Combustion-Air Intake: Boilers shall be capable of drawing combustion air from the outdoors
via a metal or PVC duct connected between the boiler and the outdoors.
p. Common vent and common combustion air must be an availble option for boiler installation.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 13108/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
To improve system efficiency, multi-boiler system shall utilize sequencing logic with common
venting as well as individual boiler venting configuration. Manufacturers not allowing parallel
modulation for common shall not be acceptable. Consult manufacturer for common vent and
combustion air sizing.
q. Follow guidelines specified in manufacturer’s venting guide.
3. WARRANTY
a. The pressure vessel heat exchanger shall carry 15-year from shipment, non-prorated, limited
warranty against any failure due to condensate corrosion, thermal stress, mechanical defects
or workmanship.
b. The pressure vessel is warranted against failure due to thermal shock for the lifetime of the
boiler provided the boiler is installed, controlled, operated and maintained in accordance with
the operation and maintenance manual.
c. The burner shall be conditionally guaranteed against any failure for (5) five years from
shipment.
d. Manufacturer labeled control panels are conditionally warranted against failure for (3) three
years from shipment.
e. Manufacturer labeled control panels are conditionally warranted against failure for (3) three
years from shipment.
f. All other components, with the exception of the igniter, flame detector and O2 sensor, are
conditionally guaranteed against any failure for (2) two years from shipment.
4. Specify boiler with efficiencies in accordance with the latest edition of ASHRAE 90.1 as accepted
by the Texas State Energy Conservation Office (SECO).
5. Specify low NOx boiler with emissions in compliance with the current levels set forth by Texas
Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ).
6. Provide common, manifolded acid neutralizer systems, not boiler-specific kits where possible.
B. WATER CHILLERS – WATER COOLED
1. Provide factory assembled and tested, packaged water cooled, liquid chiller consisting of (VFD
with adaptive internal controls if applicable to specific design), magnetic bearings, centrifugal
compressor, compressor motor, condenser, evaporator, purge unit, refrigeration accessories,
instrument and control panel including gauges and human interactive control screen (control
screen shall be full color with touch screen control), auxiliary components and accessories, and
motor starters. Provide units meeting the requirements of ARI Standard 550/590. JCI/York, Trane
or approved equal.
2. Evaporator and Condenser: Provide flanged piping connections, with marine water boxes for
both evaporator and condensers, with thermometer well for temperature controller, thermometer
well and thermometer, nipple and flow switch, tee and valve for pressure gauge on the inlet
connection. On the outlet, provide thermometer well for temperature controller, thermometer well
and thermometer, tee and valve for pressure gauge.
132 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
3. Provide chillers with single point electrical connections to the chiller unit.
4. Provide each chiller with necessary controls interface or datalink to fully integrate with the BAS
via BacNET protocol.
5. Provide factory closed-cell foam insulation for chiller cold surfaces.
6. Provide a 10 year agreement / special services warranty.
7. Provide Life Cycle Cost Analysis of a minimum of three manufacturers before selection.
C. WATER CHILLERS – AIR COOLED
1. Provide factory assembled and tested, packaged air cooled, liquid chiller consisting of motor
starter(s), compressor(s) (screw or scroll depending on the unit size), condenser section,
evaporator, purge unit, refrigeration accessories, instrument and control panel including gauges
and interactive control screen, auxiliary components and accessories. Provide units meeting the
requirements of ARI Standard 550/590. Trane or approved equal.
2. Evaporator: Provide flanged piping connections for the evaporator, with thermometer well for
temperature controller, thermometer well and thermometer, nipple and flow switch, tee and
valve for pressure gauge on the inlet connection. On the outlet, provide thermometer well for
temperature controller, thermometer well and thermometer, tee and valve for pressure gauge.
3. Provide chillers with single point electrical connections and integral disconnect switch. All air
cooled chillers will have hail guards, be selected at maximum efficiency and be provided with the
manufacturer’s sound attenuation package.
4. Provide each chiller with necessary controls interface or datalink to fully integrate with the BAS
via BacNET protocol.
5. Coordinate warranty requirements with TCCD.
6. Provide Life Cycle Cost Analysis.
D. AUTOMATIC TUBE BRUSHING
1. An Automatic Tube Brushing (ATB) System shall be installed on each air conditioning water
cooled chiller condenser to provide optimum tube cleanliness and heat transfer.
2. Provide one spare set of turbo brush and basket sets per condenser tube on the chiller.
3. The pneumatically actuated four-way valve shall be of steel construction (A36 or better) positive
sealing type, with all internal sealing parts of hard rubber and 304 Stainless Steel. It shall be
manufactured in accordance with ASME Unfired Pressure Vessel Code Specification per Section
VIII for operation at a system working pressure of 125 PSIG with a maximum differential of 35
PSIG. End connections shall be flanged or welded.
4. The control panel shall have the following features:
a. NEMA 4X enclosure with mounting bracket.
b. Cycle counter.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 13308/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
c. 24-hour timer to automatically initiate the on-load cleaning cycle.
d. Manual Override of pre-set cleaning cycle.
e. Power On Light.
f. Diverter Position Indicator Lights:
1) Normal Flow.
2) Reverse Flow.
g. Malfunction Light – To indicate slow turning or incomplete valve turning.
h. 4-Way Solenoid Valve for actuator operation to be mounted at control panel or actuator.
i. Ability to be integrated into Front End / BAS for trending purposes.
5. The manufacturer’s warranty shall guarantee system, when operated according to its instructions,
and shall provide a fouling factor in the condenser of .00025 or better. Manufacturer to warranty
components for one (1) year against defective materials and workmanship.
E. COOLING TOWERS
1. Packaged cooling towers, provide complete factory assembled unit or units for outdoor
installation, cross-flow induced draft type vertical discharge tower with permanent magnet motor
direct drive, ultra-quiet fan, water distribution basins, and VFD compatible premium efficiency
motor. Cooling tower shall be constructed entirely of type 304 stainless steel with 14 mil thick
PVC fill. Sump basin shall have an electronic/digital water level controller that is BacNet
compatible. No belt driven fans shall be used.
2. Provide packaged cooling tower with self-cleaning, stainless steel collection basin with bottom
outlet.
3. Provide inlet screens in front of fill to eliminate debris from being drawn into the tower, and bottom
mounted sump outlet connection with drain.
4. Provide fan assembly with VFD duty permanet magnet motor, and one-piece, removable welded
stainless steel wire fan guard. Provide axial flow fan selected to meet the acoustic requirements
of the site installation.
5. Provide packaged cooling towers with equalization header pipe to maintain equal basin water
levels on headered cooling tower cells.
6. Provide five (5) year warranty for watertight assembly of cold water basin and against failure
of any mechanical equipment component of the fan driven system and its supports, with the
exception of the motor. Include repair or replacement of defective materials in the warranty
7. Select cooling towers with a design condenser water supply temperature of 85ºF, with a ten (10)
degree temperature differential based on an 80ºF wet bulb temperature as a minimum capacity/
sizing.
8. Use submersible electric resistance heaters for cooling tower basin freeze protection.
134 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
9. Provide cooling tower with vibration limit switch mounted on fan assembly to automatically
shutdown fan operation on excessive vibration.
10. Connections to cooling tower shall be threaded or flange.
11. Provide safety railings, and ladder and safety cage from bottom of tower to access fan deck,
fabricated of stainless steel or fiberglass, per OSHA requirements.
12. Provide condenser water system with packaged side stream media filtration skid sized to filter the
contents of the entire condenser water system volume a minimum of once every hour.
13. Specify cooling towers to be tested upon installation completion in accordance with the
requirements of CTI-ATC-105, Acceptance Test Code for Water Cooling Towers.
14. As part of the cooling tower selection process the design professional shall coordinate with TCCD
to determine which of the following evaluations should be included as part of the tower selection.
a. Perform a life cycle cost analysis that includes the tower size, tower fan, tower pumps and the
temperature differential to optimize energy usage.
b. Evaluate the need for debris or bird screen on the tower.
c. Evaluate how required architectural screening of the tower might impact tower performance.
d. Evaluate cooling tower sound attenuation.
e. 16. Life Cycle Cost Analysis shall be performed on a minimum ot two alternatives including the
use of direct drive permanent magnet motors.
f. Code compliant Entry / Exit platforms at each point of entry / exit.
F. LIQUID-SOLIDS SEPARATION SYSTEM
1. MANUFACTURER
a. PEP Filters or approved equal.
2. PRODUCT
a. Furnish and install the liquid-solids separation system as specified herein.
b. Units and accessories shall be designed and constructed to remove solids as specified herein
from the basin of a cooling tower.
c. A completely assembled package shall be supplied from the isolated re-circulation and
particle / fltration of the fluid in the cooling tower basin in order to prevent accumulation of
solids in the tower basin. Flow through the separator package shall be continuous, without
interruption for the periodic evacuation of separated solids.
d. The separator package shall provide for initial pre-straining prior to pump suction, followed
by directly pumping through a centrifugal action solids from liquid separator and immediate
return of flow to the nozzles. Separated solids shall be continuously bled from the separator’s
collection chamber into the pakage’s integral solids recovery vessel and solids collection bag.
e. Strainer: Cast iron housing, manual cleaning, 9/32-inch minimum mesh rating.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 13508/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
f. Pump: End-suction, single stage; TEFC motor, cast iron or bronze housing, iron or stainless
steel shaft, bronze or cast-iron impeller with shaft sleeve and with mechanical sealfor shaft
sealing. No packing allowed for pump shaft sealing.
g. Separator: Centrifugal-action design, incorporating a tangential inlet to promote the proper
velocity necessary for the removal of the seperable solids. When operating in the separator
flow midrange, single pass separation for solids with a specific gravity of 1.8 and greater
shall yield 98% removal of particulate 71 micron or larger. Oprating pressure differential shall
be between 3 and 10 psig. The centrifugal separator housing shall be constructed of carbon
steel and shall have an epoxy coated exterior. The separator housing shall be equipped with
a manual air vent and inlet & outlet pressure gauges. Separator inlet and outlet shall be ANSI
150 lb. raised face flanged connections. The separator and system matched pump shall be
designed to accommodate flows sufficient to adequately clean the tower basins.
h. Piping: Schedule 80 pvc.
i. Electrical control panel: NEMA-4X UL control panel with all electrical components necessary
for a complete and operational system.
j. Skid plate: carbon steel epoxy coated for separator packages over 4”. Packaged systems
smaller than 4” use stainless steel structural steel framework.
k. Maximum working pressure and temperature: 150 PSI, 100 F0.
3. WARRANTY
a. Full parts warranty from one year from start-up or 18 years from shipment, whichever occurs
first.
b. Provide five (5) year warranty for separator including material and workmanship only.
G. PUMPS
1. Provide in-line pumps (avoid couplings) with motors, drives, mechanical seals, couplings, starters,
controls, suction strainers, pressure gauges, vibration isolation, check valves, and isolation
valves.
2. Provide pumps designed to operate at 1,750 rpm unless directed otherwise.
3. For centrifugal pumps, include certification that pump impeller diameter is less than 85% of the
range of impeller diameters available for the selected pump casing, and that fabricated structural
steel base is of sufficient strength to prevent vibration, warping or misalignment of the pump.
4. Provide pumps with grease lubricated ball bearings, grease fittings and relief plugs.
5. Provide pumps to be free of flashing and cavitations at all flow rates between 25 and 125% of
design flow under the suction conditions of the pump installation.
6. Provide pumps sized for a critical speed of at least 115% of the operating speed listed in the
schedule.
7. Provide flanged pump connections three (3) inches and larger; connections 2-1/2 inches and less
may be threaded.
8. Select motors to drive the pump through its characteristics curve from zero flow to 125% of the
136 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
design flow without exceeding the rated full load nameplate horsepower. Provide with non-
overloading motors, such that the rated horsepower will not be exceeded at any point on the
pump curve.
9. Where pumps will be controlled by a variable frequency drive the pump motor shall be rated for
use with the VFD. Pumps with integral VFDs are not permitted.
H. AIR HANDLING UNITS
1. Coordinate with TCCD to determine if the air handler should be configured with an enthalpy
controlled economizer. If an economizer is needed the system shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1 for
air handling unit systems, to serve design airflow requirements using 100% outside air.
2. Designer to evaluate ability to convert multi-zone system to VAV
3. Provide double wall casing construction with two (2) inch thick foam insulation (R-13 minimum).
Provide double-die formed 16 gauge unit casing with galvanized exterior panels, installed with
closed cell neoprene gaskets. Specify with panels that are completely removable without affecting
structural integrity of unit. Provide solid inner liner panels of galvanized steel. Provide thermal
break construction between exterior panel and frame to ensure an airtight fit.
4. Provide double wall access door panels with full perimeter gaskets. Provide with door handles
operable from both the exterior and interior of the unit. Provide a minimum of one (1) access door
for each fan, filter, and access section. Service access with hinged access door required between
coils to insure complete access to fin surfaces and drain pan for cleanablity.
5. Provide one (1) piece drain pans constructed from Type 304 stainless steel with insulation
between pan and casing. Drain pan shall have raised lips, welded corners, and pipe drain
connection. Cross break and double slope pan, and pitch to drain connection.
6. Construct coil section so coils can be removed without affecting the structural integrity of the
casing. Completely enclose connections, coil headers, and return bends. Do not use coil frame
as structural member for coil section. Provide stainless steel cooling coil casings with galvanized
supporting frame work.
7. Provide each access section with a 100-watt equivalent LED lamp in a vapor tight marine light
with sealed glass fixture and metal guard. Provide weatherproof switch located on the unit
exterior near the fan access door.
8. Provide UV-C disinfectant systems downstream of coils (minimum 25 watts/sq. ft.).
9. Provide bi-polar ionization generators downstream of all fans and coils with sufficient intensity to
provide virus-killing capability in the served spaces.
10. Unit as shipped from the factory shall be ARI-430 certified for standard air handlers. For custom
air handlers, the manufacturer shall provide performance testing in accordance with ARI standard
testing procedures.
11. All fans on TCCD projects shall be plug or plenum type. For air handlers sized at 2,500 CFM or
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 13708/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
less the unit shall have a single supply fan. For units sized for air volumes above 2,500 CFM the
fans shall be configured in a fan array configuration. Coordination with TCCD is required when
specifying a fan wall air handler to determine the correct number of fan in the array and whether a
return air fan array will be required.
12. All air handlers will be configured with premium efficiency motors and controlled using a variable
frequency drive.
13. Provide counterflow water coils, up to six (6) rows deep to accommodate the calculated load.
Base coil selections on 45ºF chilled water for cooling coils and 140ºF heating water for heating
coils, with the design delta T across the coils being 20ºF and 40ºF respectively.
14. Rate coils in accordance with ARI certified data. Select coil to provide capacity in accordance
with water flow and temperatures with maximum water pressure drop through coil of 15 feet and
maximum velocity in tubes of five (5) feet per second. Maximum face velocity for chilled water
coils not to exceed water carryover limit at design conditions.
15. Provide coils constructed of 5/8 inch outside diameter copper tubes, with aluminum plate fins,
maximum ten (10) fins per inch, and copper headers. Provide coils with plate fin wall thickness
and tubes wall thickness to standard of coil type and tube diameter by coil manufacture. Provide
with minimum 16 gauge Type 304 stainless steel casing.
16. Filter housings to be manufactured by the air handling unit manufacturer with both 2” pre-filter
racks and 4” filter racks, unless the project specific filtration requirements necessitate more
stringent filtration. Provide access doors on each side of section. Provide gasketed galvanized
steel filter blanks to prevent air bypass around filters. Filter arrangement to flat with a maximum of
450 feet per minute across filter area.
17. Provide MERV 8 pre-filters for main air handling units and MERV 134 post-filters for main air
handling units.
18. Provide each filter bank with a Magnehelic (Dwyer Series 2000) or approved qual differential air
pressure gage with static pressure tips. Gage to be mounted on the exterior unit casing. Static
sensor connected BAS.
19. Provide low leakage dampers with extruded aluminum airfoil blades, flat or formed metal blades
are not acceptable. Provide internally mounted ultra low leak airfoil blade dampers as scheduled
on drawings. Damper leakage rates shall not exceed 4 cfm per square foot at 1” water gage in
compliance with ASHRAE 90.1.
20. UV-C lights shall be factory engineered to provide no less than 200 microwatts per square
centimeter of UV-C energy, at no more than 13 watts of power consumption per each square foot
of treated, cross sectional area. UV-C lamps shall be positioned downstream of the cooling coil
and shall irradiate the leaving air side of the cooling coil and the condensate drain pan.
21. All fixtures shall be functionally tested after factory installation by the air handling unit
manufacturer.
22. A dedicated external light switch shall be installed to disconnect power from the UV-C lights.
Switch shall include lockout/tagout capabilities and shall be installed within visual sight of the
138 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
lights. All points of access to sections where UV-C lights are located must have a mechanical
interlock switch wired to disconnect power to the lights if a door is opened or the primary access
panel is removed. A viewing window shall be provided to allow for full view of the UV-C array as a
means of confirming proper operation. Viewing window shall be treated and tested to insure that
any energy transmitted through the window is below the threshold limits as specified by NIOSH
and ACGIH.
23. Bi-polar ionization shall be interlocked with the operation of the supply fans.
I. PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS
1. The rooftop unit shall be factory assembled and tested to ARI standards. A fully Bacnet
compatible controller shall be provided with each unit. The controller shall control all aspects
of the unit operation and shall have terminals for thermostat/temperature sensor inputs and
general alarm outputs. Where indicated on the construction documents the unit shall include an
economizer section, including dampers, motor actuators, controls and relief. The preference on
all TCCD projects is to utilize natural gas heating with the unit heat exchanger being stainless
steel. Electric heating can only be used with prior approval from TCCD. All units shall be high
efficiency models with ECM evaporator fan motor. Indicate the following options for all units
– insulated roof curb, hail guards, integral disconnect switch, through the roof curb electrical
connections, unit mounted GFCI receptacle and 2” filter rack with MERV 13 filtration. Provide curb
design/installation required to fully control compressor unloading and othe equipment generated
noise and vibration.
J. ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS WITH ARI 1060
1. The air-handling unit shall have a total energy wheel capable of both latent and sensible heat
energy exchange, as an integral part of the air-handling unit. Only rotary wheels that are ARI 1060
listed shall be considered. Wheel performance shall meet or exceed scheduled performance,
but shall be no less than 70% effective when the specified flow rate and exhaust rate are equal.
On mixed air units, the return air damper shall be an integral part of the energy wheel section.
Access sections with service doors shall be provided both upstream and downstream of energy
wheel. Access shall be of sufficient length in direction of airflow to provide physical access
to both airstreams paths for periodic wheel maintenance or cleaning. Energy recovery system
shall have both certified performances of the air-handling unit (ARI 430 and ARI 410) and of
the enthalpy wheel. (ARI 1060). Coordinate BAS interface/integration with energy recovery unit
internal controls.
K. FANS, EXHAUST AND SUPPLY
1. Specify fans tested and rated according to AMCA 210.
2. Specify fan sound power levels not to exceed 85 dB(A) when tested per AMCA 300 and rated per
AMCA 301. All fans to carry an AMCA Seal.
3. The preferred fan configuration for TCCD projects is a direct drive fan with a variable frequency
drive, with motors 1/2 HP and above being selected at 3 phase, if motor is only available in
single phase the preferred voltage shall be 277 volts. If a direct drive fan is not available for the
intended design application then a V-belt drive shall be used. Use V-belt drives designed for
not less than 120 % of the connected driving capacity. Provide variable frequency drives on belt
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 13908/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
driven fans for balancing. Provide removable metal guards for exposed V-belt drives, and provide
speed-test openings at the center of rotating shafts. Provide fans with personnel screens or
guards on both suction and supply ends, except that screens are not required, unless otherwise
indicated, when ducts are connected to the fan. Specify fans with L50 bearing life rated at not less
than 200,000 hours as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.
4. Provide fan and motor assemblies with vibration-isolation supports or mountings. Use vibration-
isolation units that are standard products with published loading ratings.
5. If equiped with VFD / Drives, the VFD / Drives are not to be located in the fans, if the fans are
located outdorrs.
L. AIR TERMINAL UNITS
1. Provide ETI, variable volume, single duct terminal units with a calibrated air volume sensing
device, air valve or damper, actuator, foil faced scrim backed insulations and accessories.
Provide 25% spare flow capacity in VAV terminal units for potential changes in space use. Fan
powered units shall be equipped with high efficiency ECM motors with speed controllers.
2. Select fin-and-tube type hot-water reheat coils constructed of seamless copper tubes with
aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and copper headers. Specify 16 gauge casing
and tube support sheets fabricated of galvanized steel, formed to provide structural strength.
Select drainable coils conforming to ARI 410, suitable for 250 psig working pressure, with
circuited tubes for proper water velocity without excessive pressure drop. Factory test each coil at
not less than 300 psig air pressure. Select VAV terminal heats with the maximum delta T possible.
3. Valve only VAV terminal unit shall be used for spaces with cooling only applications (i.e. electrical
rooms, IT rooms, etc.) Parallel and series fan powered VAV terminal units shall be used for all
applications associated with personnel comfort.
M. LABORATORY VENTILATION SYSTEMS: Coordinate with specific project requirements.
1. Design system in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Systems Applications, SMACNA Accepted
Industry Practice for Industrial Duct Construction, SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct
Construction Standards, SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, ASHRAE
Handbook – HVAC Applications, US OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910, NFPA 45, ANSI/AIHA Z9.5, American
Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienist (ACGIH) Manuals, and National Institute of
Health (NIH) design guidelines, as required.
2. Single fume hood installations shall have a dedicated roof mounted exhaust fan and an air flow
monitoring station at the duct connection to the hood. The system shall be integrated into the
campus BAS system.
3. Incorporate 100% outside air supply/exhaust heat recovery.
4. Provide low-flow fume hoods equipped with occupancy control.
5. Multiple fume hood installations shall be connected by a duct manifold and exhausted by a
single vortex type roof mounted fan. Each fume hood shall have an air flow monitoring station
and a precision venturi air valve. The campus control system shall directly control the air valves
and other system components, the use of a sub-control system for the fume hood system is not
acceptable.
140 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
1.05 SYSTEMS
A. GENERAL
1. Do not locate mechanical, plumbing or other piping in transformer vaults, elevator hoist-ways,
elevator equipment rooms, or telecommunications equipment rooms.
2. The design professional shall coordinate equipment and system metering with TCCD early in
the project. The design professional shall document the metering requirements and submit it to
TCCD for approval prior to start of construction drawings.
3. Verify location, capacity and connection of new building services to existing utilities (chilled
water, heating water, domestic water, sanitary sewer, natural gas, etc) with TCCD.
4. Coordinate openings in existing roofs with the design professional to avoid nullifying the roof
warranty and with the TCCD Project Manager to assure compliance with the Roof Management
Plan.
5. Provide sufficient unions and flanges to permit removal of equipment and valves.
6. Provide a dielectric union or dielectric nipples with a non-dielectric union to join dissimilar piping
materials.
7. Provide adequate space to permit service for valves and related piping specialties. Layout
equipment with sufficient service clearances to ensure proper maintenance. Install equipment
so that tube pull, filter replacement, strainer cleaning, equipment draining, air handler coil pull,
motor and shaft replacement and other maintenance service can be accommodated. Locate
equipment like VAV terminal units in corridors and common areas if at all possible to minimize
noise and service disruption to classrooms, meeting rooms, etc. Indicate required clearances
by using dashed lines on the Drawings. Clearances shall not be less than manufacturer’s
recommendations.
8. Group piping, valves and accessories in common locations to accommodate service and
maintenance. Design and arrange systems requiring regular preventative maintenance for ease of
access and maximum serviceability.
9. Slope piping systems to permit drainage. Provide drain valves at low points and automatic air
vents at high points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level.
10. Conceal piping within the building inside walls, above ceilings or in furred chases. Use exposed
piping only in mechanical rooms unless directed otherwise.
11. Provide a minimum two (2) inch clearance between insulated piping and other piping, structural
members or obstructions.
12. Provide one piece (preferred) or split hinge polished stainless steel escutcheons for piping
entering floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Secure plates in place by internal spring
tension or set screws.
13. Isolate domestic water lines for building services from cross connection by means of a code-
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 14108/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
approved backflow preventer. Provide additional backflow protection devices in process water
connections off the building main service. Coordinate with TCCD to obtain flow test data to ensure
adequate flow and pressure exists to support building and systems. Avoid installing backflow
preventers in series arrangement.
14. Avoid routing chilled, hot water and domestic water piping directly beneath floor slabs. Routing of
pipes beneath floor slabs must be approved by TCCD and Design Professionals.
15. Allowed refrigerants: HCFC-123, HFC-134a, and HFC-410A.
16. Provide three-phase power for motors 1/2-horsepower and larger.
17. Coordinate warranty requirements for all equipment with TCCD.
18. For new projects, major renovations and additions and central plant upgrades, perform complete
energy simulation calculations to model building heating, cooling, lighting, ventilating, and other
energy flows at end of Design Development. Calculations shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1-current
version, and the IECC, using Trane Trace 700 or DOE2 software. Simulation calculations shall be
used for load estimating, equipment sizing and selection and optimization of complete system for
Life Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA). The results of the analysis, including all data files for Trane Trace
700 or DOE2, shall be presented in usable format and coordinated with TCCD.
B. Chillers
1. Evaluate the selection of water-cooled chillers with respect to efficiency based on Life Cycle Cost,
to determine the optimum unit selection.
2. Evaluate chiller selections based on three (3) different chiller and cooling tower groupings to
determine the highest efficiency and the best return on investment. Alternates shall meet ASHRAE
90.1 minimum requirements at the design operating conditions and shall include the Life Cycle
Cost Analysis.
3. Evaluate the applicability of an integrated free-cooling heat recovery package for the chiller(s)
selected in the first step life cycle cost analysis. If deemed acceptable based on life cycle cost,
provide factory free-cooling option on the chiller lineup designed to supply campus cooling
requirements during the months of the year when condenser water free cooling is available (i.e.
free-cooling may not necessarily be required for every chiller in the system). This needs to be
compared with providing the appropriate flat plate heat exchanger.
4. Comply with ASHRAE 15 (latest edition) for construction and operation of refrigerant systems
related to centrifugal chiller installations.
5. Allow sufficient clear space equal to the overall length and width of the machine for tube pull
clearance inside the mechanical room.
C. Cooling towers
1. Coordinate the cooling tower selection with TCCD to meet project specific requirements for
acoustic performance, aesthetics, plume discharge, etc. Account for site-specific cooling tower
requirements in Life Cycle Cost evaluation.
142 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
2. Design cooling towers to support the application of a chiller free-cooling system or plate-and-
frame heat exchanger system, if applicable.
3. Connect makeup water piping with flanged or union connections to tower. Heat trace exterior
makeup water piping and condenser piping (see section on Heat Trace for specification on Heat
Trace system).
4. Connect overflow and drains to the sanitary sewer system with a code-approved connection.
5. Design cooling towers to operate using variable-frequency driven fans staged to modulate based
on the BAS optimization programming. Where multiple cells are in operation, control fan VFD
speeds equally between operating cells. The motors specified shall be premium efficiency rated
for use with VFD operation with intended application. The motors shall be located outside the air
stream. Coordinate with BAS provider for Condenser Water optimization requirements.
6. Provide cooling tower with full-size return water bypass connection from the cell return piping to
the cold water basin for cold-weather operation to bypass the cooling tower fill.
D. Boilers
1. Provide boiler system installation complete with necessary accessories for operation, and
comply with all local, state and federal codes. Boiler construction to comply with ASME Section
VIII requirements. Provide life cycle cost analysis for a minimum of three different boiler or plant
configurations.
2. For additions to existing central plants or the development of a new central plan the number of
boilers to be added and the integration into the system, if the central plant is existing, shall be
closely coordinated with TCCD early in the project.
3. Design boilers plants or additions to existing plants in a parallel piping arrangement, with
efficiency optimized staged operation to respond to the campus heating demand. Provide
condensing boiler lineup with N+1 redundancy. .
4. Layout equipment and rooms to allow installation with sufficient clearances for maintenance.
5. Configure distribution layout so that heating water distribution pumps take suction from the boiler
outlet connection and pump through the campus load, to decrease the potential for air entry into
the system and to reduce the system head on the boiler.
6. Provide inline centrifugal separator in the pump suction line.
E. PUMPS
1. Provide in-line vertical pump circulators or close-coupled end suction pumps for low flow (up to
50 GPM) circulating systems.
2. Provide in-line pumps for circulating systems with flow rates between 50 and 1000 GPM.
3. Provide in-line pumps for applications with flow rates exceeding 1000 GPM.
4. Provide vertical turbine submersible pumps with TEFC Hazard-duty motors for cooling tower
concrete basin structures.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 14308/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
5. Provide two (2) sets of strainers with pumps; a fine mesh startup strainer and a final operating
strainer.
6. Provide concrete filled inertia bases with open mount springs installed on top of a concrete
housekeeping pad for base-mounted pumps installed on floors above grade.
7. Design pipe size changes off pumps using long radius reducing elbows or eccentric reducers,
while maintaining the top of pipe level. Support piping adjacent to pump such that piping weight
is not transferred to pump flanges or casing. Provide supports under elbows attached to inertia
bases on pump suction and discharge elbows.
8. Provide a minimum of five (5) straight pipe diameters at pump inlet connections, unless a suction
diffuser is used. Provide line size isolation valve and strainer on pump suction piping. Provide
line sized tilting disc check valve, (balancing valve for non-VFD applications) and isolation valve
on pump discharge piping. A triple duty valve may be provided on the pump discharge line, along
with a separate isolation valve downstream of the triple duty valve.
F. AIR HANDLING UNITS
1. Provide central station air handling units configured to serve campus buildings or portions of
buildings consistent with good engineering practice and zoned in a practical manner to facilitate
convenient building operation and shutdown. Provide Life Cycle Cost Analysis as appropriate to
differentiate between air handling system types and unit sizes in order to determine the optimal
system configuration. Coordinate with TCCD for final equipment selections.
2. Utilize dedicated 100% outside air energy recovery units to pre-treat ventilation air prior to
delivery to main central air handling units. Provide outside air handling units dedicated to
a single or group of central air handlers consistent with prudent engineering practice and to
facilitate convenient building operation and shutdown.
3. Design building air distribution systems using factory fabricated air handling units with fan, fan
motor, filtered mixing boxes, damper sections, filter section, guards, belt drives, chilled water and
hot water coil section and other accessories.
4. Air handling units to be installed in interior mechanical rooms. Design mechanical rooms to
provide adequate maintenance clearances for service for coil pull, fan and fan shaft removal, filter
service, etc. Show required service clearances using dashed lines on the Drawings.
5. Control air handling system outside air supply rates using a carbon-dioxide based demand
ventilation control strategy in conjunction with monitoring occupancy in critical rooms to reduce
the total supply of outside air during periods of reduced occupancy. Monitor the carbon-dioxide
levels in the zones or systems as well as the outdoor levels, and vary ventilation rates to track a
carbon dioxide offset consistent with ASHRAE 62 recommendations. The outdoor air supply to the
air handler shall be ducted from the outside of the building to the air handler unless specifically
approved by TCCD to allow an alternate configuration.
6. Provide safety controls in air handling units along with sequences of operation in the BAS to
protect water coils from damage due to freezing.
7. Duct Smoke Detectors: Contractor shall coordinate all air handler duct detector installations with
TCCD prior to installation.
144 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
G. AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
1. Provide central station air handling units configured to serve campus buildings or portions of
buildings consistent with good engineering practice and zoned in a practical manner to facilitate
convenient building operation and shutdown. Provide Life Cycle Cost Analysis as appropriate to
differentiate between air handling system types and unit sizes in order to determine the optimal
system configuration. Coordinate with TCCD for final equipment selections.
2. Provide vibration isolation curbs (Mason Industries model RSC or approved equal) sized to match
the air handling unit base rail for air handler installations on floors above grade if air handlers are
not internally isolated, with exception for fanwall.
3. Provide electronic enthalpy controlled economizer in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 for air
handling unit systems, to serve design airflow requirements using 100% outside air. Economizer
operation to be controlled by the BAS for individual air handling units to maintain space
temperature and humidity conditions.
4. Control air handling system outside air supply rates using a carbon-dioxide based demand
ventilation control strategy in conjunction with monitoring occupancy in critical rooms to reduce
the total supply of outside air during periods of reduced occupancy. Monitor the carbon-dioxide
levels in the zones or systems as well as the outdoor levels, and vary ventilation rates to track a
carbon dioxide offset consistent with ASHRAE 62 recommendations.
H. SHOP VENTILATION SYSTEMS: Coordinate with specific project requirements.
1. Design system in accordance with SMACNA Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct
Construction, SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards, SMACNA Round
Industrial Duct Construction Standards, ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC Applications, American
Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienist (ACGIH) Manuals, as required.
I. KITCHEN VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS: Coordinate with specific project requirements.
1. Design Systems in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Systems Applications, ASHRAE Standard
154P, ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC Applications, NFPA Standard 96, UL Standard 300, UL Standard
710, UL Standard 762.
J. VEHICLE EXHAUST SYSTEMS: Coordinate with specific project requirements.
1. Design system in accordance with SMACNA, Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct
Construction, SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards, SMACNA Round
Industrial Duct Construction Standards, ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC Applications, American
Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienist (ACGIH) Manuals, as required.
K. CAMPUS UTILITIES
1. Coordinate new building and expansion projects with TCCD to ensure new and revised loads are
accounted for in central plant equipment capacities.
2. Design piping utilities serving more than one building to be fully accessible for maintenance.
Avoid routing piping beneath buildings unless accessible for service and maintenance.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 14508/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
3. Coordinate design to maintain utility services to all buildings during design and/or renovation
activities.
4. Size internal building chilled water and heating hot water distribution piping to maintain a water
velocity less than four (4) feet per second and less than three (3) feet of pressure loss per 100 feet
of pipe. Size building services piping for 125% of the expected design system flow rate. Use two-
way pressure independent control valves for building air handler coil control.
5. Provide expansion loops, offsets, anchors, and guides as required to accommodate pipe thermal
expansion in accordance with ASHRAE recommendations.
L. CENTRAL CAMPUS UNDERGROUND UTILITY DISTRIBUTION
1. When layout and topography permit, and when preferable for campus construction, expansion
and renovation projects, provide a walkable underground utility tunnel extending from the campus
central plant. The utility tunnel shall extend from the central plant and be routed in the most
efficient manner possible to serve the extended campus buildings.
2. Provide branch tunnels extending from the main tunnel to serve individual buildings or groups of
buildings. Isolate building branch piping from main distribution piping using butterfly valves.
3. Design the utility tunnel to carry main campus distribution systems including chilled water, heating
hot water, domestic cold and hot water, electrical, voice/data, BAS, etc. Natural gas and sanitary
sewer shall not be installed in utility tunnels. Do not route storm sewer services within utility
tunnels.
4. Provide inserts and plates embedded in the tunnel walls for piping, wiring and cable tray supports.
5. Slope tunnel floors towards the piping side of the tunnel to minimize water on walking surfaces,
and provide drain piping beneath tunnel floor.
6. Provide provisions for tunnel extensions to serve planned future buildings.
7. Provide permanent LED tunnel lighting rated for environment in which they will be located,
at manholes and spaced uniformly throughout length of tunnel to allow safe access and
maintenance. Provide service receptacles spaced throughout the tunnel for maintenance
activities.
8. Maintain a uniform tunnel slope between access manholes. Provide manhole sections for tunnel
access. Below the top manhole section, provide steel grated landings connected by a ship ladder
and safety railing. Provide galvanized ladders with safety cages for tunnel access through the top
grating. Avoid locating manholes in roadways.
9. Provide for drainage of storm water through manhole using offset opening to prevent rainwater
from entering the tunnel.
10. Secure branch tunnel connectors to building basement mechanical rooms with six (6) inch
concrete masonry block walls and lockable metal access doors.
11. Design tunnel penetrations to accommodate expansion and contraction without compromising the
waterproof integrity of the tunnel.
146 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
12. Design tunnels with code required ventilation system. Provide steel grated ventilation openings
with security locks bolted from inside the tunnel.
M. UNDERGROUND DIRECT-BURY PIPING
1. When the campus site layout, topography, subsurface geology or other conditions prohibit
the construction of utility tunnels, use direct-bury pre-insulated piping, as manufactured by
Thermacor, for campus chilled water and heating hot water piping distribution. Provide a
minimum of six (6) inches clearance between outside of insulation of individual pipes for future
maintenance.
2. Provide concrete vaults for piping valves and taps. Vault designs shall be similar to utility tunnel
design, each vault shall have a sump and sump pump and gravity drains to sanitary sewer if
possible. Sump pumps shall be used where gravity drainage is not feasible.
3. Bury underground systems in a trench not less than four (4) feet deeper than the top of the pipe
and not less than 36 inches wider than the combined outside diameter of all piping systems.
Provide a minimum thickness of 36 inches of compacted backfill with no rocks or stones or other
debris larger than two (2) inches placed over the top of the pipe to meet H-20 highway loading.
4. Provide trench bottom with a minimum of 12 inches of sand fill material as a cushion for the
piping. Cover the top of the pipe a minimum of 12 inches with a sand fill material as a cushion for
the piping. Install a brightly colored blue plastic marker above and extending completely across
the entire width of the buried piping in the trench plus six (6) inches on each side between the 12
inches top fill and the 36 inches of compacted backfill.
N. LIFE CYCLE COST ANALYSIS
1. Perform a life cycle cost analysis (LCCA) for identified mechanical equipment and systems to
evaluate the relevant costs associated with system operation and performance over a specified
service life. The LCCA evaluates relevant costs, including design, procurement, installation,
operation, system life, maintenance, repair, replacement, salvage, utility cost escalation, interest
and depreciation, among other factors, over a specified study period to determine the option that
offers the lowest cost over the life of the system in terms of that option’s present value.
2. Perform an LCCA for the identified systems and equipment using a procedure consistent with
ASTM E 917, Standard Practice for Measuring Life-Cycle Costs of Buildings and Building Systems.
Commercially available software may be used for the analysis, including BLCC5 (Building Life
Cycle Cost), a program developed by the Office of Applied Economics at the National Institute of
Standards and Technology. The software is available for download through the U.S. Department
of Energy (DOE) Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) website at http://www.eere.energy.
gov/femp/program/lifecycle.cfm.
3. Perform the LCCA based on a present value analysis. If using the BLCC5 program, utilize the
End of Year Discounting method with the Constant Dollar Analysis (simplified to omit inflation
influence, as utility cost escalations are accounted for elsewhere in the program).
4. The following inputs and economic parameters are required to complete the LCCA. Current
economic data should be obtained from TCCD to the fullest extent possible prior to evaluation.
Use consistent economic factors throughout LCCA evaluations to avoid disparity between
analyzed alternatives.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 14708/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
a. REAL DISCOUNT RATE (time value of money).
b. EQUIPMENT/SYSTEM SERVICE DATE: Set the period of analysis to equal the expected life of
the system. Use equipment life data appropriate for the expected usage and system installation.
ASHRAE-Applications Handbook data tabulated in Estimates of Service Lives of Various System
Components may be used for consistency.
5. COST DATA
a. INITIAL CAPITAL COST: Compile a comprehensive and accurate cost estimate of the expected
design, procurement and installation cost for the proposed system or equipment to be evaluated.
Use cost data sources such as R.S. Means Cost Data books (current year) or estimates generated
by a contractor or cost estimator for system cost input. Use consistent cost data sources between
analyzed alternatives.
b. ANNUAL OPERATING COST: Operating costs should be determined based on the electricity,
natural gas and water utility rates provided by TCCD. Apply utility rates to annual system energy
consumption and performance simulations, performed in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 of this
Standard, to determine the operating costs for each alternative.
c. Use the same operational system profile for evaluation of alternatives.
d. Escalate annual utility rates per TCCD.
e. ANNUAL MAINTENANCE COST: Estimate annualized maintenance costs for each system or
piece of equipment to be evaluated. Use maintenance cost data provided by TCCD or estimate
maintenance costs using the procedure outlined in the Owning and Operating Costs chapter of the
ASHRAE-Applications Handbook.
1) SALVAGE VALUE: Assess salvage or resale value to systems or equipment as appropriate.
2) Omit from the LCCA costs that are not significantly affected by system selections or design
decisions between alternatives.
3) When one analyzed alternative offers an opportunity to avoid Capital Costs by reducing
building or system scope in other areas of design (e.g. one system alternative eliminates the
need for building square footage required by another alternative), reduce the Capital Cost of
that particular alternative by the amount of the avoided capital expense.
4) Cash flows should be simplified to occur at the end of the year for evaluation purposes.
f. In the event any of the required economic data not available through TCCD, use the data provided
in the DOE FEMP Annual Supplement to Handbook 135 (ASHB 135), Energy Price Indices and
Discount Factors for Life-Cycle Cost Analysis.
g. When performance advantages exist that favor one alternative over another (e.g. one system offers
superior comfort, or improved noise performance over another), make adjustments to incorporate
the differences into the LCCA by subtracting the value of the performance improvement from the
corresponding cost of the alternative. Coordinate with TCCD for evaluation of qualitative issues.
h. The system or equipment alternative providing the lowest Life Cycle Cost should be selected as
the best alternative, assuming the proposed alternative is capable of satisfying the design and
operating requirements.
i. Refer to ASTM E 917 and NIST Handbook 135, Life Cycle Costing Manual for the Federal Energy
Management Program, for specific guidance on completing the LCCA.
148 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
j. Provide a list of assumptions and inputs to TCCD for review and approval prior to completion
of the Life Cycle Cost Analysis.
k. Provide an LCCA to determine the optimal equipment selections and system alternatives
including but not limited to the mechanical equipment and systems listed below:
1) Optimized chiller selection and piping configurations with respect to performance.
2) Applicability of VFD compressors for selected central plant chillers.
3) Applicability of integrated chiller free-cooling module for selected chillers.
4) Applicability of heat recovery chiller to serve campus loads.
5) Applicability of Thermal Energy storage (stratified CHW) for campus chilled water
system.
6) Field erected versus packaged stainless steel cooling towers.
7) Building envelope upgrades exceeding ASHRAE 90.1 requirements by 30%.
8) Other alternatives as identified by TCCD.
9) Applicability of plate-and-frame heat exchanger free-cooling.
O. DESIGN CONDITIONS
1. Use the general guidelines listed in Table 23.05.1-A for indoor and outdoor design conditions and
equipment selection purposes; IECC may override TCCD preferred parameters:
TABLE 23.05.1-A - INDOOR AND OUTDOOR DESIGN CONDITIONS
SUMMER OUTDOOR DESIGN:100ºF dry bulb / 78ºF wet bulb
WINTER OUTDOOR DESIGN:17ºF (extreme minimum design)
DEGREE DAYS:
HDD65: 2,304
CDD50: 6,557
INDOOR DESIGN; OCCUPIED AREAS*:
74ºF dry bulb / 55% maximum RH (summer)
70ºF dry bulb (winter)
UNOCCUPIED AREAS:
Design for 80ºF (summer) and 60ºF (winter) in me-
chanical and electrical rooms, and other non-occu-
pied areas.
*Note: Special use areas such as telecom areas, laboratories, shops, etc. may have specific
design criteria outside the ranges listed above. Design in accordance with project-specific
requirements.
2. Provide the required ventilation air for building areas in accordance with ASHRAE 62 (latest
edition), Ventilation for Acceptable Air Quality.
3. Provide dedicated outside air handling units sized to pre-treat the outside air supply for delivery
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 14908/22/2024[Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
to the intake of the building/zone air handling unit intake. The units shall be energy recovery
(ER) type units utilizing energy wheels, air-to-air heat exchangers, runaround loops, etc. Evaluate
using an LCCA to support additional costs while maximizing energy savings and minimizing peak
demand. Outside air units need to be sized to supply air dry enough to offset latent loads in the
spaces. Utilize Demand Controlled Ventilation techniques to control outside air ventilation rates
utilizing CO2 sensors and occupancy sensors.
4. Locate building discharge air openings to avoid entraining potentially contaminated air into
the building ventilation system. Locate air intakes to avoid introducing air pollutants into the
building, a minimum of 15’-0” above grade, with sufficient separation to avoid recirculation of the
air discharged from nearby equipment, including but not limited to cooling towers, boiler flues,
chemical fume hoods, general exhaust, etc. Roof mounted outside air intakes shall be required
if at all possible on existing facilities. Detailed computational fluid dynamics simulations may be
required depending upon nearby potential contaminant sources.
5. Zone mechanical systems in accordance with sound engineering judgment relating to varying
load and envelope conditions, function of space, occupancy schedules, etc. Coordinate system
zoning with TCCD during the conceptual design stage. Provide individual zone control for each
auditorium, classroom, conference room, and special use type room. Groups of offices may be
grouped into zones, with no more than two (2) offices per zone.
6. Utilize SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction during the construction
and pre-occupancy phases of a project.
7. Document maximum allowable and design noise levels for building classrooms, offices or
other acoustically sensitive areas. Design such spaces in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook-
Applications as the maximum or specifications from acoustic consultant for lower sound level
recommendations.
8. Refer to Table 23.05.8 for general pressure relationships and ventilation requirements
for certain areas.
TABLE 23.05.8 – PRESSURE RELATIONSHIPS AND VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
AREA
DESCRIPTION
PRESSURE
RELATIONSHIP
TO ADJACENT
AREAS*
MINUMUM
OUTDOOR AIR
REQUIREMENTS
ALL AIR
EXHAUSTED
TO OUTDOORS
RECIRCULA-
TION PERMIT-
TED
Auditoriums P Note 1 No Yes
Classrooms P Note 1 No Yes
Computer Rooms P Note 1 No Yes
Copy Centers N Note 1 Yes No
Darkrooms N Note 1 Yes No
Dining Areas P Note 1 No Yes
Janitors Closets N Note 3 Yes No
Kitchens N Note 1 Yes No
Laboratories Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4
150 [Division 23] HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
AREA
DESCRIPTION
PRESSURE
RELATIONSHIP
TO ADJACENT
AREAS*
MINUMUM
OUTDOOR AIR
REQUIREMENTS
ALL AIR
EXHAUSTED
TO OUTDOORS
RECIRCULA-
TION PERMIT-
TED
Laundry N Note 1 Yes No
Libraries P Note 1 No Yes
Locker Areas N Note 1 No Yes
Lounges N Note 1 No Yes
Mech/Elec Rooms Note 2 Note 1 Yes No
Offices P Note 1 No Yes
Telecom Rooms P Note 1 No Yes
Restrooms N Note 3 Yes No
Chemical Storage N Note 3 Yes No
a. Notes:
1) Provide ventilation air for all building areas in accordance with ASHRAE 62 - Ventilation
For Acceptable Air Quality (Latest Edition) Requirements.
2) Mechanical rooms with gas-fired equipment must be maintained with a positivespace
pressure.
END OF DIVISION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 15108/22/2024[Division 24] COMISSIONING
Commissioning24
1.01 INTRODUCTION
A. TCCD has established a Commissioning Program for the purpose of ensuring quality for new campus
facilities construction and renovation projects. Commissioning activities are the shared responsibility
of the Commissioning Team with members as indicated in this document.
B. Project commissioning will consist of the systematic process of documenting that specified
components and systems have been designed, installed and started properly, and functionally
tested to verify and document proper operation through all modes of operation. In addition, training
for TCCD Physical Plant Department (PPD) Operations Personnel will be verified and final project
Operations and Maintenance (O&M) documentation will be reviewed for completeness.
C. The design professional and TCCD shall meet to determine if commissioning by a third party Cx firm
will be part of the project and establish the level of involvement of the Cx firm. If commissioning is to
be provided the construction documents (drawings and specifications) shall clearly indicate that the
contractor and the contractor’s sub-contractors need to include the needed time to coordinate and
provide support for the commissioning agent.
D. Cx firm shall be contracted in two phases - design review and implementation. This will better help
the Cx agent accurately scope the implementation phase based on the actual design.
1.02 REFERENCES/CODES
A. ASHRAE Standard 202-2018 – Commissioning Process for Buildings and Systems
B. .ASHRAE Guideline 0-2019 – The Commissioning Process.
C. ASHRAE Guideline 0.2-2015 – Commissioning Process for Existing Systems and Assemblies.
D. ASHRAE Guideline - HVAC&R Technical Requirements for The Commissioning Process (current
version).
E. ASHRAE Application Handbook – Chapter 42 – New Building Commissioning.
F. ASHRAE Guideline 4 – Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems.
G. SMACNA HVAC Systems Commissioning Manual.
H. USGBC LEED-NC (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design) Green Building Rating System
Reference Guide – current applicable version for the project type.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. COMMISSIONING: Systematic process whose purpose is to verify and ensure buildings components/
systems perform interactively and that the building systems meet TCCD’s functional needs. This is
152
achieved by reviewing and recording the Owner’s Project Requirements and performance throughout
the design, construction, acceptance and warranty period with written documentation of activities and
system characteristics. The commissioning process encompasses and coordinates the traditionally
separate functions of system documentation, equipment startup, control system checkout and
calibration, testing adjusting and balancing, functional testing procedures and operator/user training.
B. COMMISSIONING COORDINATOR: A representative of TCCD, designated to the Commissioning Team,
who attends commissioning meetings and acts as the responsible central point of contact between
TCCD and the Commissioning Team.
C. COMMISSIONING PLAN: Plan, written by the Commissioning Agent (CxA), outlining the process
verifying that the new systems perform at or above the expected level. The Plan is a detailed
account of the Commissioning activities as they relate to the project. The plan includes a listing
of commissioning team members, phases of the particular project, and each team member’s
commissioning-related responsibilities during each phase, along with the expected deliverables from
each team member. Communication protocols between the members of the team and their respective
company are defined in the Commissioning Plan. As a living document, the plan will be continuously
updated to reflect the evolving process as developed by the commissioning team. The Commissioning
Plan also includes all relevant prefunctional checklists and functional test procedures to be used
during the commissioning of systems.
D. CONTRACTORS TEST REPORT: Contractor tests are defined as any form of startup, adjustment or
calibration performed on individual pieces of equipment as specified within the equipment sections of
the construction documents. The CxA will provide a Test Report Form to be used by the contractor as
a cover sheet to the actual test results, for the documentation of each specified contractors test.
E. DEFICIENCY: An issue that prohibits the successful passing of any step on the functional test
procedure for any equipment/system that is specified in the commissioning scope of the project.
F. BASIS OF DESIGN DOCUMENT: A concise document prepared by the Architect/Engineer (A/E)
containing information necessary to fulfill the Owner’s Project Requirements, including design data,
required operating conditions, assumptions, calculations, code requirements, references and other
data and information as appropriate to fully document the design methodology.
G. OWNER’S PROJECT REQUIREMENTS DOCUMENT: The Owner’s Project Requirements Document is
a concise document prepared by the A/E with input from CxA of record based on their understanding
of the project requirements and TCCD Design Standards. It records in quantitative and verifiable
terms, the performance goals for the systems to be commissioned. The system performance testing
conducted toward the end of the commissioning process ultimately demonstrates that what was
designed and built does meet the criteria defined in the Owner’s Project Requirements Document.
H. FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST: Test of dynamic function and operation of equipment and
systems, rather than components, under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads,
high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, and power
failure. Systems will be run through control system sequences of operation and components verified
to ensure response as required by sequence of operations.
I. PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLIST: List of items to inspect and elementary component tests to conduct
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 15308/22/2024[Division 24] COMISSIONING
to verify proper installation of equipment. Prefunctional checklists are primarily static inspections
and procedures to prepare the equipment or system for initial operation including simple testing of
function of component, piece of equipment or system (e.g. measuring voltage imbalance on a three-
phase pump motor of a chiller system). Word “prefunctional” refers to before functional testing.
Prefunctional checklists will augment and be combined with manufacturer’s startup checklist.
J. FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURE: Procedure that confirms each system will perform its specified
functionality. The contractor will perform the functional test. The CxA will direct and witness the final
functional testing. During the functional testing, the installing contractor will sequence the system as
directed and provide the required test equipment.
1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. TCCD will engage the project CxA. Though contracted to TCCD, the commissioning firm is obligated
to work and coordinate with all design professionals, construction managers, contractors, trade
sub-contractors, testing and balancing firms and other project team members to deliver a project
satisfactory to TCCD.
B. The CxA will provide independent third-party building commissioning services in accordance with both
listed and applicable ASHRAE standards and guidelines, or other standards as identified by TCCD.
C. The A/E shall provide a Basis of Design Document to the CxA describing the primary thought
processes and assumptions behind the design decisions that were made to meet the Owner’s Project
Requirements. Describe systems, components, conditions, and methods chosen to meet intent.
Update as necessary during progress of project.
D. Warranty period for the entire project, including equipment components, begins at Substantial
Completion and extends for at least one year, unless specifically noted otherwise in Contract
Documents and accepted submittals.
1.05 COMMISSIONING DESCRIPTION
A. GENERAL
Commissioning will comprise a comprehensive and systematic process to verify that building systems
perform interactively as designed to meet TCCD’s functional and operational needs. Commissioning
activities during the design, construction, acceptance, and warranty phases will consist of the
following:
1. Design review at specified Construction Document (CD) submittal, to ensure that the required
elements of TCCD’s Design Guidelines have been fully incorporated into the project design.
2. Using the Owner’s Project Requirements Document and the Basis of Design Document, create a
Commissioning Plan prior to CD submittal; assist A/E team to develop.
3. Verification and documentation that equipment is installed and started in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations, industry accepted minimum standards, and Contract
Documents.
154
4. Verification and documentation that equipment and systems receive complete operational
checkout by installing contractors.
5. Verification and documentation of equipment and system performance including Test and Balance
Contractor/Professional’s (T&B) interim and final reports to allow the commissioning agent to
assess system performance.
6. Verification of operations and maintenance materials for systems being commissioned.
7. Ensuring that TCCD PPD operating personnel are adequately trained on operation and
maintenance of building equipment.
1.06 COMMISSIONING PLAN
A. The CxA will develop a Commissioning Plan to identify how commissioning activities will be integrated
into general construction and trade activities, including the following:
1. Identifying those parties responsible for producing various procedures, reports, project team
notifications and forms.
2. Developing a commissioning timeline for use by the contractor.
3. Develop test/acceptance procedures.
4. Following the initial commissioning kickoff meeting, the CxA will update the plan, which will then
be considered the Final Commissioning Plan, although it may continue to evolve and expand as
project progresses.
5. Should conflict arise between Specifications and the Commissioning Plan, Specifications will take
precedence.
1.07 COMMISSIONING PROCESS
A. The following provides a brief overview of typical commissioning tasks during construction and
general order in which tasks shall occur in the commissioning process:
1. Develop Basis of Design, Owner’s Project Requirements and Commissioning Plan documents
based on design guidelines and TCCD requirements. The Owner’s Project Requirements.
Document and Basis of Design Documents are the responsibility of the A/E, with review by the
CxA
2. Commissioning during design includes review of A/E design submittals to ensure compliance with
TCCD’s programming requirements and Design Guidelines.
3. Commissioning during construction begins with kickoff meeting conducted by CxA where
commissioning process shall be reviewed with commissioning team members.
4. Additional meetings will be required throughout construction, scheduled by the CxA with
necessary parties attending to plan, scope, coordinate, schedule future activities, and resolve
problems.
5. Equipment documentation shall be submitted to the CxA during normal submittals, including
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 15508/22/2024[Division 24] COMISSIONING
detailed startup procedures.
6. CxA shall work with contractors to develop startup plans and startup documentation formats,
providing contractors and direct that appropriate sub contractors be provided with prefunctional
checklists to be completed during startup process.
7. Review T&B Reports (seasonal).
8. Checkout and performance verification proceeds from simple to complex: from component level,
to equipment, to systems and intersystem levels, with prefunctional checklists being completed
before functional testing.
9. Contractors, under their own direction, shall execute and document prefunctional checklists
and perform startup and initial checkout. The CxA documents that checklists and startup were
completed according to approved plans. CxA will witness startup of selected equipment where
determined by CxA to be necessary.
10. CxA will develop specific equipment and system functional performance test procedures.
Procedures will be submitted to contractors for review.
11. Procedures shall be executed by contractors, under direction of, and documented by, CxA.
12. The contractor shall correct items of non-compliance in material, installation, or setup and
will retest system at no additional cost to TCCD. The CxA will document all retesting. Should
additional retesting be required beyond a first retest, the Contractor shall correct items of non-
compliance and will test to TCCD’s satisfaction at no additional cost. In addition, the Contractor
shall reimburse the CxA or A/E, as appropriate, for costs related to retesting activities.
13. CxA will review operating and maintenance documentation for completeness.
14. CxA will verify that deferred testing is conducted as specified or required to address the overall
system level performance and functional requirements.
15. The Cx process shall be tracked using the Cx Alloy web application tool.
1.08 COMMISSIONING PERFORMANCE
A. Commissioning will be achieved beginning in the design phase by documenting the Owner’s Project
Requirements, with continuation through construction, acceptance, and warranty period with actual
functional testing of performance. The commissioning process shall encompass and coordinate
traditionally separate functions of system documentation, equipment startup, control system
calibration, testing and balancing, performance testing and training.
B. DESIGN PHASE: Commissioning during design shall achieve the following specific objectives:
1. Provide commissioning focused design review.
2. Ensure that design and operational intent are clearly documented.
3. Develop pre-construction phase Commissioning Plan, if applicable based on project size.
4. Ensure that commissioning for construction phase is reflected in bid documents.
156
5. Ensure TCCD Design Guideline requirements are fully incorporated into design documents, as
applicable.
C. CONSTRUCTION PHASE: Commissioning during the construction phase shall achieve the following
specific objectives according to Contract Documents:
1. SYSTEM READINESS: Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according
to manufacturer’s recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and that
equipment and systems receive operational checkout by installing contractors.
a. The CxA will issue Prefunctional Checklists for each piece of equipment or system to be
commissioned.
b. The Contractor shall complete each item on the Checklist as the equipment / system
installation is completed.
c. The CxA will review and approve individual Prefunctional Checklists as they are completed
properly.
d. The CxA, controls contractor and the design professional will meet to review the systems
sequence of operation and control strategies.
2. FUNCTIONAL TESTING: Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems.
a. The CxA shall submit Functional Test Procedures to TCCD for review and approval.
b. The CxA shall provide TCCD approved Functional Test procedures to the GC for distribution to
their required Subcontractors.
c. The GC and required Subcontractors shall provide personnel and equipment to perform
the Functional Test Procedures under the direction of the CxA. This includes any Specialty
Contractors, T&B Contractor, T&B Professional, Controls Contractor, Manufacturers Reps,
Vendors, Consultants, etc) as requested by the CxA.
d. The following requirements must be met before the Functional Testing Process will begin:
1) All equipment/systems to be commissioned have had startup procedures completed.
2) System Prefunctional Checklists are complete.
3) T&B work is complete and T&B Final Reports submitted and approved by the design
professional.
4) O&M Manuals are submitted and approved by design professional and CxA.
5) The contractor shall perform the self performance testing and prepare a list of
deficiencies.
3. DEFICIENCIES / CORRECTIVE ACTION: The Contractor will be responsible for performing
corrective actions for resolution of deficiencies found during the following:
a. Contractor Testing.
b. Test and Balance.
c. Control System Calibration, graphics and front end completion.
d. System Prefunctional Checklist Performance Review.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 15708/22/2024[Division 24] COMISSIONING
e. Functional Testing.
4. DOCUMENTATION: Verify that operating and maintenance documentation left on site is complete.
1.09 SYSTEMS AND ACTIVITIES TO BE COMMISSIONED
A. Commissioning may include all or parts of the following systems and activities, as dictated by TCCD
and specific project requirements:
1. Chillers
2. Boilers
3. Cooling Towers
4. Distribution and Circulating Pumps
5. Air Handling Units
6. VAV Terminal Units
7. Building Automation System
8. Special Building Systems (Lab Ventilation, Lab Exhaust systems, Fume hoods, Kitchens, Shops,
Process Systems or others)
9. Domestic Water Heaters
10. Domestic Water Booster Pumps
11. Refrigeration Systems
12. Outdoor air delivery monitoring systems.
13. Fire Alarm (field observation and installing contractor’s Cx report review only).
14. Standby/Emergency Power Systems
15. Grounding Systems
16. Additional systems or components as identified by TCCD.
17. Lighting Controls (Interior and Exterior)
18. Refrigerant Monitoring
19. Sump and Sewage Ejection Pump Systems
20. Fire Suppression Systems (field observation and installing contractor’s Cx report review)
21. Building Envelope System
158
1.10 COMMISSIONING COORDINATION
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Perform commissioning services to expedite testing process and minimize unnecessary delays,
while not compromising integrity of procedures.
2. CxA shall provide overall coordination and management of commissioning program as specified.
3. Commissioning Team:
a. Construction Project Manager (PM).
b. Construction Manager (CM), if applicable.
c. TCCD Infrastructure Director or a designated representative.
d. General Contractor (GC).
e. Architect/Engineer (A/E) and related Design Professionals (DP).
f. Subcontractors responsible for each portion of Work being commissioned: Mechanical
Contractor (MC), Electrical Contractor (EC), Plumbing Contractor (PC), Fire Protection
Contractor (FP), Testing and Balance Representative (T&B), Controls Contractor (CC),
Vendors (as appropriate).
g. LEED Consultant, if applicable.
h. TCCD or TCCD’s Representative
i. Test and Balance Engineer.
j. Commissioning Agent (CxA).
1.11 SCHEDULING
A. CxA will work with GC and CM in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents to schedule
commissioning activities.
B. The GC will provide sufficient notice to the CxA for scheduling commissioning activities. GC shall
integrate commissioning activities into master construction schedule.
C. Commissioning Team and others involved in the commissioning process shall address scheduling
problems and make necessary notification in timely manner in order to expedite the commissioning
process.
D. CxA will provide initial schedule of commissioning events at commissioning kickoff meeting.
1.12 RESPONSIBILITIES
Commissioning Team and others involved in the commissioning process shall follow the
Commissioning Plan and attend commissioning kickoff meeting and additional meetings, as
necessary. The following are team member responsibilities:
A. COMMISSIONING AGENT (CxA)
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 15908/22/2024[Division 24] COMISSIONING
1. Plan, organize, and implement the commissioning process.
2. Prepare the pre-construction commissioning plan and ensure its distribution for review and
comment. Commissioning plan shall be submitted as a part of the bid documents.
3. Revise the commissioning plan as required during construction.
4. Facilitate commissioning meetings and prepare and distribute minutes to all commissioning team
members, whether or not they attended the meeting.
5. Coordinate commissioning activities among all contractors, sub-trades, and suppliers.
6. Carry out all required system pre-functional checks and document the results as the checks are
done.
7. In cooperation with the controls contractor, ensure all control point checkouts are carried out and
the results documented as the checks are done.
8. Review T&B Reports (seasonal).
9. Verify all startups and initial system operational tests and checks have been completed. Observe
and verify functional performance tests, ensuring the results are documented.
10. Ensure all required instruction and demonstrations are provided to TCCD’s designated operating
staff.
11. Participate in 10-month warranty review walkthrough.
12. Provide and lead system-wide overview training.
13. Develop functional test procedures.
14. Track corrective items and deficiency reports.
B. DESIGN PROFESSIONALS (DP)
1. Provide the Owner’s Project Requirements and Basis of Design Documents to the CxA for Review.
Update Basis of Design and Owner’s Project Requirements as needed.
2. Provide SD, DD and CD document submittal packages to the CxA for review in parallel with other
project reviews.
3. Review the commissioning plan, as well as participate, as appropriate, in on-site commissioning
meetings.
C. TCC PROJECT MANAGER (PM)
1. Manage contract of CxA.
2. Review and approve Commissioning Plan.
3. Coordinate the T&B activities and send T&B Final Report to CxA.
160
4. Arrange for TCCD operating personnel to attend various field-commissioning activities and
training sessions.
5. Review commissioning progress and deficiency reports.
6. Provide final approval for completion of commissioning work.
7. Ensure that seasonal or deferred testing and deficiency issues are addressed.
D. CONSTRUCTION MANAGER (CM)
1. Facilitate coordination of commissioning work by CxA, with GC and CxA to ensure that
commissioning activities are being scheduled into master construction schedule.
2. Attend commissioning kickoff meeting and other commissioning team meetings.
3. Review and approve functional performance test procedures submitted by CxA prior to testing.
4. Where requested by CxA or where otherwise required, observe and witness prefunctional
checklists, startup, and functional testing of selected equipment.
5. Review commissioning progress and deficiency reports.
6. Coordinate resolution of non-compliance and design deficiencies identified in all phases of
commissioning.
7. Sign-off on individual commissioning tests as completed and passing.
8. Recommend completion of commissioning process to PM.
9. Set up meetings for training of TCCD Physical Plant Department operating personnel.
10. Assist CxA in seasonal or deferred testing and deficiency corrections.
E. GENERAL CONTRACTOR (GC)
1. The contractor, along with subcontractors and suppliers, shall cooperate with the CxA in carrying
out the commissioning process. In this context, the contractor shall:
a. Provide equipment, testing and systems startup as required.
b. Coordinate T&B Activities to assist the CxA.
c. Operate equipment and systems as required for both initial systems operations and final
functional performance tests.
d. Attend commissioning meetings, and attend to action items arising from them, as required to
allow the commissioning process to proceed on schedule.
e. Provide instruction and training for the TCCD physical plant department operating personnel
in order to meet all specified requirements in this regard.
f. Perform the specified system tests as required by the CxA and Authorities Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ).
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 16108/22/2024[Division 24] COMISSIONING
g. Participate in 10-month warranty review walkthrough.
F. SUBCONTRACTORS
1. The appropriate Subcontractors shall be responsible for cooperating and coordinating their
work with the CxA. They shall also be responsible for carrying out all the physical activities
required for physical installation of components and systems, and for operating them during the
commissioning process.
2. Participate in 10 month warranty review walkthrough.
1.13 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The CxA shall submit the following:
1. Minutes from Scoping Meetings.
2. Commissioning Plans, pre-construction phase and construction phase.
3. Commissioning Schedule.
4. Prefunctional Checklists forms.
5. Functional performance test forms.
6. Deficiency Report and Resolution Record.
7. Final Commissioning Report.
8. LEED™ Documentation (where required). Format as required by USGBC for submittal under
LEED™ rating system.
9. Monthly status report with or without invoicing.
END OF DIVISION
162 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Integrated Automation25
1.01 GENERAL
A. SECTION INCLUDES
Building Automation System (BAS). The BAS system will consist of a combination of Building
Controllers and Custom Application Controllers linked together on a main Local Area Network
(LAN) and subLAN, measuring and controlling input and output devices and being accessed and
programmed from one or more Operator Workstations (OWS).
TCCD is implementing a Smart Building Master Plan intended to leverage the interoperability of the
various control and operational technology systems to increase efficiency and provide better staff
and end user experiences. To that end, TCCD has adopted a set of Smart Buiilding specification
requirements for Division 25 that must be incorporated into any project’s contract documents. These
will be published in the TCCD website in the future, but in the meantime, please inquire with RE&F
Engineering Department for a copy of these requirements.
B. SCOPE
1. Provide all labor, materials, programming and supervision necessary to install a digital Building
Automation System (BAS).
2. The scope of work shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. The digital Building Automation System (BAS) shall be 100% compatible with all Tarrant
County College District (TCCD) facilities utilizing server based control and server based
graphical user interface software manufactured by Reliable Controls Corporation.
b. The database utilized by the server based graphical user interface shall be 100% compatible
with the P.C. based graphical user interface. Any icon links to additional control system
applications are not acceptable.
c. The Control Contractor shall furnish all electrical control and interlock wiring connected to
the controls and instrumentation systems. 120 VAC or greater voltage power wiring to main
control panels as shown on the mechanical plans and/or specifications, shall be provided
by Division 26 Contractor (Electrical), and coordinated by this Contractor. Failure of this
Contractor to coordinate requirements with other Divisions shall result in this Contractor to be
responsible for any non-coordinated items.
d. All conduits in connection with the controls and instrumentation system shall be furnished
and installed by this Contractor.
e. The Control Contractor shall complete all sensing and control installations including electrical
and electronic components, not the Mechanical Contractor, unless otherwise required.
f. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician-training program as described herein.
g. Provide as-built documentation, software, and all BAS control logic and all associated support
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 163
documentation on TCCD approved media, which accurately represents the final installed
system.
h. Provide all necessary hardware and software to allow the BAS to reside on the owners existing
Ethernet TCP/IP infrastructure.
C. COORDINATION
1. The direct digital portions and automatic temperature control system shall be provided and
installed by the Control Contractor.
2. Coordination of all controls items with other trades shall be the responsibility of the Controls
Contractor. Coordination of wall space for panels shall be the responsibility of the Controls
Contractor.
D. TEST
1. The Control Contractor shall test the entire system and document the point-by-point operation of
all controls and perform all required continuity testing of conductors prior to final connection to
control equipment.
2. Substantial Completion inspections will not be scheduled or performed until a detailed statement
has been received from the Control Contractor certifying that the point-to-point checks have been
completed. Also, a list of any noncompleted or improperly operating devices shall be a part of this
certified statement. This list must be submitted a minimum of five (5) days prior to Substantial
Completion inspection.
3. Provide an all points print report log (site specific) with the substantial completion inspection
report.
E. CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENT
1. After completion of the installation, perform calibration and adjustments of the BAS provided
under this contract, and supply services incidental to the proper performance of the temperature
control system under the warranty below.
2. Provide a detailed calibration and checkout log detailing the calibration and adjustment activities
performed.
F. SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE CONTRACT
1. System Warranty:
a. All control Global Controllers and Unitary Controllers (as defined in this section) devices
provided by this Contractor shall be warranted – by the Manufacturer, not the local installation
contractor -- to be free of defects in workmanship and material for a period of five (5) years
from the first date of beneficial use. Any Global Controllers and Unitary Controllers found to
be defective during this period shall be repaired or replaced without equipment expense to the
Owner.
164 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
b. All other components of the control system are to be warranted to be free of defects in
workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year from the first date of beneficial use.
c. The Contractor shall respond to warranty items within one working day from when they are
reported. Provide a report to the Owners Maintenance Department identifying the problem,
the devices affected and the nature of the repair or replacement.
d. Throughout the first year of warranty period, the warranty shall cover all costs for parts,
labor, associated travel, any software sequence modifications, and expenses throughout the
warranty period.
G. SUBMITTAL SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIREMENT
1. After award of the Construction Contract, and prior to delivering submittal data to the Engineer,
the Control Contractor with the Engineer shall schedule a pre-submittal conference. The purpose
of the pre-submittal conference is to review the proposed system concept and to discuss the
sequence of construction activities.
2. The following data/information shall be submitted for approval (prior to ordering any hardware or
software items):
a. An overall system interconnecting diagram showing all remote panels (PCs, Field Panels, and
LAN devices), and power/surge protection locations and Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS).
b. Distributed panel locations (site and/or building plan, as appropriate to identify physical
locations).
c. Data sheets for all hardware and software control components.
d. Thermostat/sensor locations.
e. A description of the methodology used to keep graphics files on various PC terminals updated
and consistent with one another. (Remote computer graphics vs. site computer)
f. A detailed point-to-point diagram of circuitry of all BAS panels. Submit on a per distributed
panel basis. Typical are accepted, provided all applicable units are listed and the units are
identified.
g. A list of connected data points, including connected control unit and input or output devices.
h. A detailed Sequence of Operations.
i. Detailed documentation on the specific field equipment to be supplied by the Controls
Contractor shall be submitted and approved prior to installations; including, but not limited
to, actuators, valves, temperature sensors, surge protection, and damper operators.
j. All schemes and methods proposed to provide lightning protection for the BAS, entering and
leaving each building shall be submitted for review and approval.
k. Proposed graphics for the components and systems controlled shall be submitted along with
the component or system architecture submittal for approval.
1.02 PRODUCTS
A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 165
1. Subject to compliance with terms and conditions each authorized installation contractor agrees to
provide the following from BAS manufacturers and suppliers except for the campuses as noted in
section 1.01,B,3 above where the systems noted will be used:
a. Reliable Controls Corporation
2. The controls contractor shall have been in business a minimum of ten years installing and
servicing direct digital control systems.
3. The installation of the direct digital control systems shall be installed and programmed by full-time
employees of the controls contractor. No installation subcontractors will be allowed.
4. The controls contractor shall have completed a minimum of thirty projects within the last five years
that are equal in the scope to this project.
B. COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, PC, AND MODEM SUPPORT
1. The Communications network between all buildings systems must be achieved by utilizing the
existing Ethernet TCP/IP infrastructure
2. Each facility will have a global controller with communication network.
3. Local PC Software: The operator interface panel software shall be compatible with the most
current Windows desktop operating system deployed at TCCD. All operating system software,
control software, and graphics generation software shall be provided, along with required usage
licenses. All software shall be provided for the Owner to make any changes to the system without
Control Contractor support. (i.e. if the Owner needs to change a graphic, provide the graphic
software that generated the original)
4. Remote authorized personal computers shall have access to the automation system, and shall be
able to communicate with and control the remote site even if the on-site PC is turned off or not
functioning.
5. Upon failure of the LAN to communicate information, each controller will retain the last legitimate
value of its imported network points, and continue to control the systems based on those values.
Failure of any controller, or any part of a controller on the LAN shall nor affect the ability of the
LAN to communicate among the remaining controllers.
C. GLOBAL CONTROLLER PANELS
1. Provide an independent, stand alone, microprocessor based control panel (Global Controller) for
each facility. These panels shall communicate with the operator via the Main Communications
Trunk – EIA-232C and/or EIA-485 and/or Ethernet (IEEE.802.2) with TCP/IP, using PC/Graphics
Interface Software.
2. The controller shall reside on and communicate on the TCCD’s building automation VLAN using
either Ethernet (IEEE.802.3) with TCP/IP utilizing static, DHCP or Software Defined Access (SDA)
switching.
3. In addition to main LAN communications, the controller shall support EIA-485 subLANs, PC,
modem communications.
166 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
4. The controller shall have at least two ports (other than the PC port) which can be configured to
BACnet conformance class 3 using TCP/IP or EIA-232 point-to-point communications for interface
to other BACnet products
5. The Global Controller panel (GC) shall contain the necessary hardware and firmware to interface
the building Unitary Controller Devices with the PC over the Main Communications Trunk,
modem interface, existing Ethernet and the Internet (WWW) infrastructure utilizing IEEE.802.3
specifications with TCP/IP for off-site access to data and programming functions. Simply put, the
GC controller plugs into the existing 10BaseT Capable Ethernet backbone. Configure the GC with
customer provided masking, TCP/IP routers and addresses for each GC; the system works.
6. Each Global Controller panel shall be stand alone in a standard NEMA 1 enclosure. The electrical
requirements shall be identified and coordinated by this Contractor. Any 110 VAC requirements
are to be coordinated with Division 26 Contractor. The division 26 Contractor shall provide 110
VAC power circuits to each panel. Use panduits in each control panel to conceal all wiring. Fuse
all transformers. Control panels shall be clearly identified by labels (1” lettering). Provide and
install as-built wiring diagrams to indicate the control points on all equipment.
7. Each GC panel shall have a clock with battery back-up. Where there are multiple GC panels, the
respective clocks shall be synchronized by the PC or a designated GC.
8. As many GC panels, as required, shall be furnished to provide the monitoring and control
functions and capabilities specified. The panel shall be strategically located in areas of the
building that are easily accessible for maintenance and repair.
9. The main communications trunk using a peer-to-peer communications protocol or IEEE.802.3 with
TCP/IP shall directly interface the GC panels. The GC panel shall communicate without requiring
a PC or remote modem device.
10. The GC panel shall have at least two digital inputs.
11. The trend log, schedules and alarms shall be located in the GC not the PC. The GC should have
the capability to log all the information.
12. The GC shall have automatic protection from any power failure of at least twenty-four (24) hours
duration.
13. During a power outage situation, the real-time clock continues to operate and the GC
automatically restarts upon restoration of power.
14. Any Input, Variable, Schedule point shall have a user-definable, unique, system-wide logical point
mnemonic.
15. The BAS contractor shall coordinate the availability of temporary construction phase network
access to facilitate completion of the BAS and start of the TAB and commissioning processes.
D. SOFTWARE
1. The graphic software shall be based on the most current Windows desktop operating systems
deployed at TCCD.
a. Basic Interface Description
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 167
1) The Controls contractor shall make available to owner free software upgrades for the life
of the control system.
2) Operator workstation interface software shall minimize operator use and through the
use of English language prompting. English language point identification and industry
standard PC application software. The software shall provide, as a minimum, the
following functionality:
i. Real-time graphical viewing and control of environment
ii. Scheduling and override of building operations
iii. Collection and analysis of historical data and dynamic data (trend plot)
iv. Definition and construction of dynamic color graphic displays
v. Editing, programming, storage and downloading of global controller databases
vi. The software shall have a “simulator” mode that allows controllers to be fully
programmed offline without the need of any controller hardware.
vii. Alarm reporting, routing, messaging, and acknowledgment
3) Provide a graphical user interface that shall minimize the use of keyboard through
the use of a mouse or similar pointing device and “point and click” approach to menu
selection. The software shall provide a multitasking type environment that allows the user
to run several applications simultaneously.
4) The mouse or keyboard shall be used to quickly select and switch between multiple
applications. The operator shall be able to work in Microsoft Word, Excel, and other
Windows based software packages, while concurrently annunciation online BAS alarms
and monitoring information.
i. The TCCD standard for BAS system graphics is to have system (chilled water,
heating water, etc.) be displayed in 3 dimensional isometric format and building
floor plans to be displayed in 2 dimensional floor plan format.
ii. Provide functionality such that any of the following may be performed
simultaneously online, and in any combination, via user-sized windows:
• Dynamic color graphics and graphic control
• Alarm management, routing to designated locations, and customized
messages
• Week at a Glance Time-of-Day scheduling
• Trend data definition and presentation
• Historical Data Archiving to the local computer hard drive
• Graphic definition and construction
• Program and point database editing on-line
• Each system graphic group will accommodate up to 160 points.
5) Provide a security system that prevents unauthorized use unless the operator is logged
on. Access shall be limited unless the user is logged on.
168 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
i. Provide security for 124 users (minimum). Each user shall have an individual
password. Each user shall be individually assigned which control functions
and menu items the user has access to. All passwords, user names and access
assignments shall be adjustable on-line, at the operators terminal. Each user shall
also have a set security level that defines access to displays and also defines what
individual points the user can control.
6) Operator Activity Tracking - An audit trail report to track system changes, accounting
for individual user logons shall be printable and archived for future use. The operator
activity tracking shall be in a tamper-proof buffer file.
7) Reports shall be generated on demand and directed to computer workstation displays,
printers or disk. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the
following types of reports:
i. A general listing of all or selected points in the network
ii. List of all points currently in alarm
iii. List of all points currently in override status
iv. List of all disabled points
v. List of all points currently locked out
vi. List of user accounts and access levels
vii. List all weekly schedules
viii. List of limits and dead-bands
ix. Excel reports
x. System diagnostic reports including, list of BAS panels on line and communicating,
status of all BAS terminal unit device points
xi. List of programs
8) Scheduling and override
i. Provide a graphical spreadsheet-type format for simplification of time-of-day
scheduling and overrides of building operations. Schedules reside in BAS Global
Controller to ensure time equipment scheduling when PC is off-line, PC is not
required to execute time scheduling. Provide override access through menu
selection or function key. Provide the following spreadsheet graphic types as a
minimum:
• Display of Weekly schedules shall show all information in easy to read 7-day
(week) format for each schedule. This includes all on/off times for each day
along with all optimum start information.
• Holiday schedules shall show all dates that are to be holidays. Holidays
shall be shown on the terminal in a graphical calendar format showing all
scheduled days for a given month. User shall be able to easily scroll through
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 169
the months for each year. Each day assigned as a holiday shall display as
“All Off” or show “Scheduled” for that day.
• Event schedules shall be shown in the same graphical calendar format
and manner as Holiday schedules. Event schedules allow for scheduling
of special events. After an event has elapsed, control returns to normal
schedule.
• Operator shall be able to change all information for a given Weekly, Holiday
or Event schedule if logged on with the appropriate security access.
This includes all information that has to do with optimum start including
assignments such as sensors to use and heating/cooling factors.
• Scheduling application shall be capable of importing commonly format
scheduling files from TCCD space scheduling system Ad Astra.
9) Collection and Analysis of Historical Data
i. Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and preserve
records of system activity over an extended period of time. Any system point may
be trended automatically at time-based intervals or change of value, both of which
shall be user-definable. Trend data may be stored on the enterprise server(s)
for future diagnostics and reporting. Additionally, trend data may be archived to
network drives or removable disk media for future retrieval.
ii. Trend data reports shall be provided to allow the user to view all trended point data.
Reports may be customized to include individual point or predefined groups of at
least sixteen points. Provide additional functionality to allow predefined groups of
up to 250 trended points to be easily transferred online to Microsoft Excel. BAS
contractor shall provide custom designed spreadsheet reports for use by the owner
to track energy usage and cost, equipment run times equipment efficiency, and/or
building environmental conditions. BAS contractor shall provide setup of custom
reports including creation of data format templates for monthly or weekly reports.
iii. A minimum of sixteen points may be graphed, regardless of whether they have
been predefined for trending. The dynamic graphs shall continuously update point
values. At any time the user may redefine sampling times or range scales for any
point. In addition, the user may pause the graph and take “snapshots” of screens
to be stored on the workstation disk for future recall and analysis. Exact point
values may be viewed and the graphs may be printed.
iv. System software shall be capable of graphing the trend log point data. Software
shall be capable of creating x-y graphs that display up to 6 points at the same time
in different colors. Graphs shall show point value relative to time.
v. Operator shall be able to change trend log setup information as well. This includes
information to be trend logged as well as interval at which information is to be
logged. All points in the system may be logged. All operations shall be password
protected. Setup and viewing may be accessed directly from any and all graphics
point is displayed on.
10) Application Software
170 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
i. The application software is the auxiliary software, which shall be integrated in this
system:
ii. Energy Management software
• Daily use
• Monthly use
• Daily Hi and Low
• Monthly Hi and Low
• Demand Limiting and Load Shedding Program
iii. Maintenance Software
• Schedule Maintenance
• Run time accumulation for any specified equipment
iv. Occupancy Software
• After hour use log
11) Alarm Indication
i. System Terminal shall provide audible, visual, email and text and becapable of
printed means of alarm indication. The Alarm Dialog box shall always become the
Top Dialog box regardless of the application(s) being run at the time (such as a
word processor). Printout of alarms shall be sent to the assigned terminal and port.
ii. Provide log of alarm messages. Alarm log shall be archived to the hard disk of the
system terminal. Each entry shall include point descriptor and address, time and
date of alarm occurrence, point value at time of alarm, time and date of point return
to normal condition, time and date of alarm acknowledge.
iii. Alarm messages shall be in plain English (or specified language) and shall be user
definable on site or via remote communication. System shall provide a minimum of
20 user definable messages for each zone controlled.
12) Energy Log Information
i. System shall periodically gather energy log data stored in the field equipment and
archive the information on the enterprise server. Archive files shall be appended
with the new data, allowing data to be accumulated over several years. Systems
that write over archived data shall not be allowed. System shall automatically open
archive files as needed to display archived data when operator scrolls through the
data. Display all energy log information in standard engineering units.
ii. System software shall be capable of graphing the Energy log data. Software shall
be capable of creating graphs in x-y format that show recorded data relative to
time.
iii. Operator shall be able to change the Energy log setup information as well. This
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 171
includes which meters to be logged, meter pulse value and what type of energy
units are being logged. All meters monitored by the system may be logged. All
operations shall be password protected.
iv. Provide means for operator to export to a comma delimited file format all trend log
data for use by other spread sheet programs. Operation of system shall not be
affected by this operation. In other words, it shall stay completely on-line.
13) Controller Status
i. Provide means for operator to view communication status of all controllers
connected to the system. Display shall include controller, status and error count.
Status will show if controller is communicating or not.
14) Configuration/Setup
i. Provide means for operator to display and change system configuration. This shall
include but not be limited to system time, day of the week, date of day light savings
set forward/ setback, printer type and port addresses, modem port and speed,
etc. Items shall be modified utilizing easy to understand terminology using simple
mouse/cursor key movements.
15) Dynamic Color Graphic Displays
i. Create Site Layout Color graphic including building penetration Icons, building
floor plan displays with room temperatures and other building sensors values
dynamically displayed. Icon links on the floor plans will allow penetration to
the building Mechanical equipment. Provide System graphics for each piece of
mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled and hot water systems
as applicable, with dispersed dynamic data as indicated in the system point I/O
summary of this specification. Points required by the sequence of operations shall
also be displayed even if they are not defined by the I/O schedule to optimize
system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition. Provide as a minimum
the following graphics.
• Site layout
• System layout
• Building Floor plans (two-dimensional)
• Individual AHU graphics: all AHU graphics shall be accessible from links on
both building summaries and floor plans.
• VAV summary pages by respective AHU with the following but not limited to
points:
• AHU DAT Zone Temperature
• Active Zone Temperature Set point
172 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
• Active mode: Heating, Cooling or Ventilation
• Airflow Set point
• Air flow
• Damper Position
• Heating output
• VAV DAT
• CO2 level (as applicable)
• Fan status (as applicable)
• Zone information shall be shown on the floor plans, clicking on the device will
display all data associated with the device. Temperature control zones shall be
color-coded to their associated AHUs.
• All graphics will provide in addition to the system points the following:
1. Outside air temperature
2. Outside air humidity
3. Weekly scheduling
ii. The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics
and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection or text-based
commands. Graphics software shall permit the importing of *.BMP, *.PNG, or *.TIF
drawings for use in the system.
iii. Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values and status indication
shall be shown in their actual respective locations and shall automatically update to
represent current conditions without operator intervention and without pre-defined
screen refresh rates.
• Analog values displayed in 3 color conventions shall be available for monitor
and control of analog values; high and low alarm limit settings shall be
displayed on the analog scale or available and displayed separately. The user
shall be able to “click and drag” the pointer to change the set point.
• Provide the user the ability to display blocks of point data by defined point
groups; alarm conditions shall be displayed by flashing point blocks.
• Equipment state can be changed by clicking on the point block or graphic
symbol and selecting the new state (on /off) or set point.
• Colors shall be used to indicate status and change as the status of the
equipment changes. The state colors shall be user definable. (Example: Red-
Alarm, Green-OK).
• The windowing environment of the PC operator workstation shall allow the
users to simultaneously view several applications at a time to analyze total
building operation or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an
alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress.
2. Internet/Intranet Connectivity utilizing a Web Browser
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 173
a. Shall be a “Server” based product that provides browser access to Ethernet enabled
automation controllers. Access is accomplished by utilizing the current versions of common
web browsers including Microsoft Internet Explorer, Google Chrome and Mozilla Firefox . No
other “client” side software shall be necessary to view and utilize the system. The “Server”
hosting the Web Application can be located anywhere on the Internet. The software functions
by taking real-time data from the automation systems and combining that information with the
appropriate graphic file in an HTML format to be viewed by the web browser. The number of
simultaneous users connected to the web application is only limited by the capability of the
server hosting the application. The application can service multiple sites.
b. The graphics utilized for this system shall not require external applications to convert the
images for use between the web server based application and the traditional graphical user
interface. Graphics shall be interchangeable between applications.
c. Web Browser Server The server-based software must support Microsoft’s .NET standards for
the exchange and interoperability of information and data.
d. Server-based software upgrades shall be free to the owner for as long as TCCD utilizes the
system.
3. Web Browser Interface
a. User Configuration
i. Usernames and Passwords can be setup via the Web Browser Interface. Physical
access to the server is not required but will be password protected.
• Individual user names/passwords are to be utilized
• Usernames/passwords can be specifically unique to allow the user to be
automatically redirected to a specific site, and or graphic display when
logging into the system.
• TCCD preferred method of user management is connection to Active Directory.
ii. Passwords can be configured to allow the user to modify setpoints or not.
iii. All user configuration functions shall be provided through and intuitive graphical
user interface.
iv. Web Browser Interface shall not require any external applications, “Client Side”
software or “Plug-Ins” to connect, view, control any aspect of the building
automation system.
v. Access to the installed automation system shall be performed through Microsoft
Internet Explorer
b. Site Graphics
i. Graphics displayed through the Web Browser Interface must be the same graphic
images provided through the Graphical User Interface described above. No external
applications are to be required to interchange graphic images between the web
server application and the graphical user interface.
ii. Trend data must be able to be displayed graphically and in “spread sheet “format
174 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
without the addition of any additional” client side software, plug-Ins, or additional
applications.
iii. Digital Start/Stop Logging shall be able to be displayed and printed from the
browser interface without the addition of any additional “client side” software, plug-
Ins, or additional applications.
iv. The display and printing of alarm data shall be performed without the addition of
any “client side” software, plug-Ins, or additional applications.
v. Points that are manually overridden shall be displayed on the graphic screen by
an icon adjacent to the overridden point to provide a quick visual indication of any
point on the screen that are overridden.
vi. The viewing and modification of weekly schedules shall be performed in a
graphically intuitive manner that is consistent with the non Web Enabled
application. This shall be performed without the addition of any “client side”
software, plug-Ins, or additional applications.
vii. The viewing and modification of annual holiday schedules shall be performed
in a graphically intuitive manner that is consistent with the non Web Enabled
application. This shall be performed without the addition of any “client side”
software, plug-Ins, or additional applications.
viii. “Right clicking” on the point and modifying the value shall perform the editing of
point values.
ix. Points can be placed in “manual” or “automatic” mode from the Web Browser,
providing password restrictions for the user allow such functionality.
E. AUXLLIARY CONTROL DEVICES
1. AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS AND OPERATORS
a. Damper actuators shall be supplied and installed by the controls contractor. The motors shall
be of the proper size required to operate the damper with uniform and gradual movement and
shall return the damper to the same position for a given signal during an opening or closing
movement of the damper. Damper operators shall be of the proportional type capable of
accepting 0-10 volts control signal and 2-10 VDC feedback signal.
b. Damper operators shall be spring return on all outdoor and return air dampers.
c. All modulating dampers shall be sized for an effective linear air flow control characteristic
within the angle of rotation and maximum pressure drop specified.
d. Damper actuators shall be Belimo or Siemens with 5-year warranty.
2. CURRENT SWITCHES
a. Provide a solid state switch which when the current level sensed by the internal current
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 175
transformer exceeds the adjustable trip point. Internal circuits are to be totally powered by
induction from the line being monitored.
3. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
a. Differential pressure switches shall be furnished as indicated by the sequence for status
purposes for either air or water applications. Provide single pole double throw switch with
fully adjustable differential pressure settings. The switch shall have a snap-acting Form C
contact rated for the application. The switch contact shall be rated for 5 amps at 120 volts
as a minimum. Units shall be selected for ranges consistent with the application and shall be
submitted for the Engineer’s approval.
1) Dwyer or owner approved equal.
4. ELECTRONIC SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSORS
a. Electronic space temperature sensors shall be transducer based and shall be calibrated to
less than or equal to a ¼ degree F resolution for the specific application.
b. Electronic space temperature sensors shall have a minimum of six programmable buttons and
two dedicated buttons for set-point adjustment.
c. Electronic space temperature sensors shall have a built-on RJ11 connector that will allow
access via laptop computer to the host network.
d. Electronic space temperature sensors shall have an external dry contact available to work as a
auxiliary input
5. ELECTRONIC DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSORS
a. Temperature sensors shall be thermistors or transducer based and shall be calibrated to less
than or equal to a 1/4 degree F resolution for the specific application. The Engineer must
approve substitutions. All sensors to be field verified as correct.
b. Provide twisted pair lead wires and shield for input circuit or as otherwise required by the
manufacturer.
c. Use insertion elements in ducts not affected by temperature stratification or smaller than one
square meter. Use averaging elements where larger or prone to stratification.
d. Insertion elements for liquids shall be brass separable sockets (thermo wells) with minimum
insertion length of 2-1/2 inches.
e. Provide outside air sensors with watertight inlet fittings, shielded from direct rays of the sun.
Mount on the North side of the facility.
f. The temperature sensors shall be field verified by the Installing Contractor. Engineer will spot
check and verify these calibrations during walk through inspection.
g. Wall mounted sensor shall be mounted at 5’-6” above finished floor in an area which free
air current is not constricted or blocked, final location shall be approved by the Owner and
Engineer prior to installation
h. Sensor elements shall be applicable for the medium being sensed; i.e., room elements, well-
176 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
mounted elements, duct mounted elements and outdoor mounted elements. Range shall be
from 0 to 150 degrees F.
i. Strap on sensors shall not be used unless specifically required.
6. ELECTRONIC STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS
a. Static pressure sensors shall be differential pressure sensors, with the “high” output sensing
the duct pressure and the “low” input sensing atmospheric pressure.
b. The range for the static pressure sensor shall be matched to the static pressure of the system
being sensed, 0 to .5 inches, 0 to 2 inches, 0 to 5 inches, or 0 to 10 inches. Even lower value
sensors may be necessary for UFAD systems at TR Campus.
c. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2% of the full range being sensed.
7. FIRESTATS
a. Provide UL-listed fire protection thermostats where indicated in main return air ducts of air
handling units which are rated less than 2,000 cfm. Connect thermostats that are capable of
stopping fans in event of excessive temperatures in fan control circuits. Provide thermostats
with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 F above normal maximum
temperature at their location in the air handling system. Comply with requirements of NFPA
90A. Provide thermostats with the following operating features:
1) Provide manual reset type thermostat.
8. TEMPERATURE THERMOSTATS (Stand/alone applications, as required)
a. Two position (On/Off) room thermostat with bimetallic sensing element, set point dial or
thumb wheel dial, room temperature indicator, surface mounting base, and hard plastic cover
plate, UL listed.
9. HUMIDITY SENSOR/TRANSMITTER
a. Provide relative humidity sensor/transmitter where shown on the control drawings. Sensor and
transmitter shall have:
1) System Accuracy: ±2% RH @ 25°C from 20-95% RH
2) Output Signal: Two wire 4-20 ma linear, proportional to 5-95% RH
b. The transmitter power shall be compatible with and powered by, the low voltage power
supplied by this Contractor.
10. LOW TEMPERATURE LIMIT SENSORS
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 177
a. Provide low temperature protection thermostats of manual-reset type, with sensing elements
8’-0” or 20’ in length. Provide thermostat designed to operate in response to coldest 1’-
0” length of sensing element, regardless of temperature at other parts of element. Support
element properly to cover entire duct width. Provide separate thermostats for each 25 sq. ft.
of coil face area or fraction thereof.
11. WATER FLOW SENSORS
a. Provide Onicon F-3500 insertion magnetic flow system. If TCCD has owner-furnished Rosemont
8700 Series, magnetic flowmeter system. Flow meters shall be configured with dual output
terminals to allow connection to the BAS system and to have a spare output for TCCD use.
Coordinate flow meter size with flow rates shown on the construction documents. Where
flow is used to calculate energy usage, flow meters and matched temperature sensors shall
be integrated into Onicon System 10 energy metering interfaces. When large AHU systems
perhaps serving an entire building are used then use of Belimo Energy Valves should be
evaluated for lower life cycle cost of the system.
12. CONTROL WIRING
a. All conductors shall be of stranded copper wire.
b. All EMT/rigid steel conduit and outlet boxes shall conform to the requirements specified under
Division 26, Electrical.
c. All cable runs exposed in return air plenums shall be smoke rated for the application and
secured to the building structure. Do not run wire in drywall without conduit.
d. All wiring cables shall have 300-volt insulation.
e. Cables shall be properly identified/tagged with matching wire markers on both ends as to the
control point.
1.03 EXECUTION
A. CONTROL WIRING
1. Provide outlet boxes.
2. Line voltage and exposed low voltage control wiring shall be run in conduit in mechanical
equipment rooms. Low voltage wires will be decided by the detail spec (project scope).
3. No splices will be allowed except at junction boxes and control centers.
4. No two wires of the same color shall be run in one conduit unless wires of the same color are
properly tagged at both ends and any splice points. Do not change colors at splice points.
5. EMT Conduit fittings shall be steel compression type or Set Screw type fittings
6. All electrical components shall be UL listed.
B. INSTALLATI0N
1. The control sequences indicated in the specifications herein show the intended sequence of
178 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
operation of the various control systems.
2. Each control system shall be complete with all necessary thermostats, relays, switches,
accessories, etc., and all interconnections, and so arranged that they will provide the proper
automatic sequence of operation between the various control devices as required to maintain the
desired temperature, conditions and sequence, to provide a complete operating system.
3. All control equipment shall be fully modulating unless otherwise noted, and relays or accessories
not specifically mentioned but required for proper operation shall be included.
4. Competent personnel, who are well trained and regularly employed by the Control Contractor,
shall install the system. Installation by the others is not acceptable.
5. Control and instrument wiring and capillaries are to be secured to the building structure, not to
ductwork, conduits, or water piping.
6. The exact location of instruments, panel boards, accessories, etc., shall be approved by the
project Engineer, reviewed and discussed with the owner during the pre-submittal conference.
7. All automatic controls and accessories shall be located in accessible locations.
8. All non-panel, as well as panel mounted instruments, shall be clearly labeled as to use and
system served by means of engraved laminated nameplates.
9. Where control instruments or accessories are to be installed on covered casings, ductwork etc.,
they shall be mounted on the finished surface of the covering. Care shall be taken that there are
no leaks around the stems where they pass through the metal work
10. All modulating control valves, dampers, etc., shall operate in a slow, gradual manner without any
jerking or slamming. Valve actuators shall be vertical. Horizontal shall not be acceptable.
11. All controls shall operate satisfactorily without any cycling or hunting.
12. Controls Contractor shall provide power to all electric actuators requiring an external power
source. If equal to or greater than 110 VAC, coordinate with Division 26 Contractor.
13. All labor to mount controllers in the multi-zone units shall be responsibility of Automatic Controls
Contractor.
14. The Automatic Control Contractor shall furnish and install all motorized damper actuators.
C. CONTROL MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES AND INSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Start-up and commissioning system: Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior
to placing control systems in permanent operation. On-site training shall not begin until the
system has been accepted by the Engineer and comissioning and field verifications have been
completed.
2. On-site Training: Provide an appropriate amount of hours of training, mutually agreed upon
between the BAS contractor and TCCD. This training shall be completed in groups of no more
than 6 persons per group at one time in one 4hour session for each group. Also include four (2)
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 179
hours of training for the Test and Balance Representative. The training shall focus on the specific
installation and shall address both hardware and software. Specific as-built documentation for this
project shall be used for reference as a part of this training.
3. For all levels of training, a sign-in sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer certifying that each
individual has completed such training to the satisfaction of the instructor. Hours of instruction
received shall be a part of the sign-in sheet.
4. It shall be the Owner’s responsibility to provide adequate time for attendance at all training
sessions.
D. DEMONSTRATION
1. General: Provide field-testing and adjustment of the complete BAS and an on-site operational
acceptance test of the complete operational BAS. Notify the Owner in advance of all testing
activities. The Owner may witness all tests.
2. Field Test: Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the Format/Form that shall be used for field-
testing for approval, with submittal package. When installation of the system is complete,
calibrate equipment and verify transmission media operation before the system is placed on
line. The Automatic Control Contractor shall complete all testing, calibration, adjusting, and final
field tests. Provide a cross check of each control point within the BAS by making a comparison
between the control demand at the Master and field controlled device. Verify that all systems are
operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon BAS failure or loss of power. Verify
that all systems return to BAS control automatically upon resumption of BAS operation or return
of power. Submit the results of functional, cross and diagnostic tests, along with a request for the
Engineer to complete controls verification.
3. The punch list items shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer within a four (4) week
period directly following the verification period and shall be demonstrated to the Engineer (re-
verification) in order to complete the verification process. This process shall continue until all
items have been successfully demonstrated and acknowledged to the Engineer in writing.
E. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE AND WARRANTY
1. After the Engineer’s verification, an acceptance test of the completed system in the presence of
the Owner’s representative, Engineer and CxA shall be performed. When the system performance
is deemed satisfactory by these observers and all record (as-built) drawings and commissioning
report has been received by the Owner, that part of the system shall be considered complete.
2. All control hardware, software, and firmware installed by the Automatic Control Contractor shall
be warranted for a period of one (2) year form date of owner’s acceptance. Defects arising during
this warranty period shall be corrected without cost to the Owner. This warranty is for material only
and labor is not included beyond the standard project warranty.
180 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 181
182 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 183
184 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 185
186 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 187
CONTROLLEDBYPASS
188 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 189
190 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 191
192 [Division 25] INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
END OF DIVISION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 19308/22/2024[Division 26] ELECTRICAL
Electrical26
1.01 REQUIREMENTS
The design professional shall communicate in writing with TCCD for specific requirements that may
not be expressly stated within this document.
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Design shall be in accordance with the current edition of the following codes, and the editions,
revisions, amendments, or supplements of applicable statutes, ordinances, codes or regulations
of Federal, State, and Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
2. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
3. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
4. ANSI C2, National Electrical Safety Code.
5. IESNA Handbook, Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.
6. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.
7. NFPA 780, Lightning Protection Standard.
8. NETA Electrical Testing Standards.
B. Energy Codes and Conservation:
1. As a minimum, lighting and power systems shall meet the requirements of the energy codes for
new work and retrofit work in existing facilities.
2. Follow requirements of SECO, State Energy Conservation Office.
C. TCCD LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS STANDARDS.
1. TCCD has adopted standards for lighting and lighting controls. These standards are now available
online as part of the Uniform Facilities Library located at https://www.tccd.edu/community/
business/uniform facility library/. The lighting and lighting control standards are based on the
brands described in the sections below and based on the following playbooks:
a. Acuity LED Fixture and nLight AIR / ROAM Control System design playbook.
b. Acuity LED Fixture and nLight / ROAM Control System design playbook.
2. Refer to Theater Equipment in the Unifrom Facility Library for theater lighting requirements.
D. Calculations and Supporting Data:
1. Each design shall be supported by the following calculations and data and be made available in
written form to TCCD upon request.
194
2. Lighting calculations for each representative type of space for review and compliance with
established standards (IESNA Standard) of lighting quality and illumination level.
3. Calculations to confirm compliance with energy codes (with the latest edition adopted by AHJ).
4. Short circuit and voltage drop calculations.
5. Coordination Study and Arc Flash Analysis.
6. Load analysis to support selection of equipment and conductors.
E. Emergency Power.
1. Refer to Emergency Power Guidelines in the Uniform Facility Library for more requirements.
1.02 PROPRIETARY EQUIPMENT LIST
A. TCCD has standardized on the following equipment that will be used as the basis for design where
applicable.
1. LED Light Fixtures – ACUITY
2. LED Interior Lighting Controls – nLight and nLight Air
3. LED Exterior Lighting Controls – ROAM and nLight Air
4. Power Meters – Schneider Electric
a. PM 5560 series for building service panels or loads that need separate metering up to 1000
amps.
b. PM 8000 series for building service panels or loads that need separate metering above
1000 amps.
c. Micrologic 5.0P and 6.0P Trip Units for loads that need separate metering on building
service panels down to 400 amp breaker frame size.
d. ION 9000 series for Medium Voltage Service Entrances for Campuses or critical loads as
determined by TCCD.
5. Variable Frequency Drives – ABB, ACH series with integral output circuit breaker
6. Surge Suppression Equipment – MN(feed)M4EF2 Building Services, MSB’s, Large separately
derived sources. Requires HPI cable set from OCP device. • CGP-(kA rating)(voltage) other code
required or where layered protection is recommended.
7. Dry-Type Transformers –Square-D EX(kVA)T3HBCU series or Powersmiths E-Saver (kVA)-35H
series
1.03 MATERIALS
A. Wiring (600 volt rated) and Terminations
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 19508/22/2024[Division 26] ELECTRICAL
1. All wiring shall be UL-listed building wires and cables with conductor material, insulation type,
cable construction, and rating required for the intended application.
2. Rubber insulation material shall comply with NEMA WC 3, thermoplastic insulation material shall
comply with NEMA WC 5, cross-linked polyethylene insulation material shall comply with NEMA
WC 7 and ethylene propylene rubber insulation material shall comply with NEMA WC 8.
3. Conductor Material: Copper.
4. Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for No. 8
5. Color code conductors as follows:
120/208V SYSTEM
PHASE COLOR
A Black
B Red
C Blue
N White
G Green
IG GRN w/YEL stripe
277/480V SYSTEM
PHASE COLOR
A Brown
B Orange
C Yellow
N Gray
G Green
6. UL-listed, factory-fabricated wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class
for application and service required for the intended applications, including self-insulating wire
nuts and copper compression connectors.
B. Medium Voltage Cable and Terminations
1. Medium voltage copper single-conductor shielded power cable, rated 15kV or 25kV as required,
type MV-105, 133% insulation level. Cable shall have semi-conducting conductor shield, type EPR
insulation, semi-conducting insulation shield, and sunlight-resistant PVC jacket
2. Provide elbow-type separable connectors for cable terminations at new pad-mounted transformers
and switchgear with load-break type connectors.
C. Low Voltage Cable
196
1. All Low Voltage Cables shall be blue in color. The standard, factory-tested Cat6a Cables to be
used for TCCD projects shall be:
a. Panduit Mini-Com TX6a 10 Gig UTP Jack Module - CJ6X88TG
b. Panduit TX6a 10 Gig Copper Cable with Advanced MaTriX Technology - PUP6AM04-UG
c. GenSpeed 10,000 - 7131819
2. Color scheme exceptions are as follows:
a. nLight lighting controls shall be White.
b. Access Control cabling shall be Yellow.
3. Building Automation System (BAS) cabling shall be two-conductor, shielded cable.
D. Raceways
1. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1
2. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5. (special applications)
3. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
4. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.
5. Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.
6. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
7. Fittings: compression or set-screw type.
a. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
8. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
9. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit materials.
10. Non-metallic Conduit
11. ENT: NEMA TC
a. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC
b. ENT and RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
E. Wiring Devices
1. Switches and receptacles shall be commercial, specification grade devices utilizing compression
type connections.
2. NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacles for general use with device color to coordinate with interior
finishes.
3. Cover plates, brushed type 302 stainless steel wall plate. Provide stamped steel cover for surface-
mounted devices in unfinished spaces.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 19708/22/2024[Division 26] ELECTRICAL
4. Poke-thru flush floor fitting: duplex receptacle and communications ports.
5. Cast-in-place multi-service floor box: 6” deep, cast-in-place, multi-compartment floor box with
cover, carpet flange, and ac divider.
6. Provide special electrical outlet with appropriate NEMA configuration as required.
7. Provide weatherproof, GFCI, arc fault rated electrical outlet as applicable
1.04 EQUIPMENT
A. Medium Voltage Switchgear
1. S&C Vista pad-mounted switchgear for medium voltage campus distribution. Typical
configurations utilized: 936243-F2L2M3OP6R2T4Z5-E231 Model 624 29kV 125 kV BIL 600 Amp
Continuous 12.5 kA Fault Interrupting rating 933123-F2L2M3OP4R2T2Z5-E231 Model 312 29kV
125 kV BIL 600 Amp Continuous 12.5 kA Fault Interrupting rating alternate manufacturers must
be designed by electrical engineer.
2. Provide Schneider ION 8650 series metering installed in Elliot Industries PMU for medium voltage
service entrance feeds to campuses.
3. All metering data, including Trip Unit data shall be transported over Ethernet to the TCCD Power
Monitoring Expert (PME) Server and integrated into its displays and data bases.
4. Low pressure alarms for SF6 insulated switchgear shall be connected to nearest building BAS
system for monitoring.
5. FCI Load Tracker LM # 29-6115-3FO-4 utilized to monitor sections of MV loop down stream of
switches. This is mounted in the S&C VISTA switch.
B. Medium Voltage Pad Mounted Transformer
1. Provide ENVIROTEMP less-flammable fluid, 65ºC rise, copper windings, primary
2. Coordinate protection and features of transformers with TCCD.
3. Medium Voltage Transformers to be amorphous core type only for units 500kVA and larger.
loop feed switch (second MV termination for surge arrestor). Transformer efficiency must meet
or exceed 2016 or current minimum standards.
C. Switchgear and Switchboards (480V)
1. Floor-mounted or pad-mounted switchboards shall be used for distribution equipment rated 1200
amps and larger.
2. Switchboard bus construction shall be tin-plated copper with a load rating as scheduled. Equip
switchboards with grounding and neutral busses.
3. Equip switchboards with molded-case circuit breakers for main and branch protection, with:
a. Thermal-magnetic (For frame sizes 250 amp and below, inverse time-current element for
low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits and adjustable
magnetic trip setting)
198
b. Electronic trip units (For frame sizes 400 amp and above, field-replaceable rating plug, rms
sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings: instantaneous trip, long- and short-time
pickup levels, long- and short-time time adjustments (Schneider 5.0P trip units or owner-
approved equal) with communication to PME Server.
c. Current-limiting circuit breakers (For frame sizes 600 amp and below).
d. Appropriate fused disconnects may be utilized where short circuit fault capability cannot be
met by circuit breakers for main and or branch circuits.
e. Provide ground-fault protection for service entrances of 480/277V, 3 phase, 4 wire which are
1000-amps or larger as per NEC.
f. Size switchboards to allow for a minimum 25% spare load capacity, and 40% spare circuit
breaker mounting space. Coordinate spare capacity with TCCD.”
D. Panelboards
1. Circuit breaker-type power, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards shall have copper
bus construction with a load rating to accommodate the available fault current.
2. Panelboards shall use bolt-on type thermal-magnetic circuit breakers. Breakers serving
mechanical equipment shall be HACR rated, if required by the specific application. Provide AFCI
or GFCI breakers where required by NEC or AHJ.
3. Equip panelboards with separate neutral and grounding busses, extended wire ways and hinged
trim construction.
4. Segregate 277V lighting circuits from 480V and 277V HVAC loads in separate, metered panels.
5. Size panelboards to allow for a minimum 25% spare load capacity, and 40% spare circuit breaker
mounting space.
6. Manufacturer(s): Square D or owner-approved equal.
E. Dry-type Transformers
1. Provide dry-type transformers to step down utilization voltage. The preferred transformer voltage
rating is 480 volts, delta, primary, 120/208 volts, wye, secondary.
2. Single-phase and other special voltage transformers may be required for specific applications.
3. Winding taps: For transformers 15 kVA and smaller, specify two 5 percent below rated voltage,
full capacity taps on primary winding.
4. Winding taps: For transformers 25 kVA and larger: Two 2.5 percent above rated voltage and four
2.5 percent below rated voltage, full capacity taps on primary.
5. Transformers shall have a temperature rise of not more than 80ºC and the maximum temperature
of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50 degrees C rise above a 40 degree C ambient.
6. If the design professional believe that there are sufficient non-linear loads to create harmonic
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 19908/22/2024[Division 26] ELECTRICAL
distortions the this will be brought to TCCD to determine if a K-rated transformer should be
utilitzed.
7. Manufacturer(s): Powersmiths, Schneider Electric,or approved equal.
8. Copper windings
F. Surge Protection Device and Connection Cable
1. Surge Protection Device (SPD) and electrical high frequency noise filtering shall be provided at
each service panelboard or switchboard, and at each panel board supplying sensitive electronic
equipment and at all emergency power panels. For new equipment, provide non-integral TVSS
mounted on or adjacent to equipment.
2. For existing equipment, provide modular SPD located adjacent to equipment.
3. Select current rating and protection level for SPD as recommended by manufacturer for level of
service. SPD shall have a minimum fifteen (15) year warranty.
4. Cable to connect non-integral SPD and switchgear/switchboard shall have a minimum fifteen (15)
year warranty and have the following characteristics:
CABLE CHARACTERISTICS
NOMINAL IMPEDANCE @ 10KHz
Line 0.009 ohms/ft
Neutral 0.004 ohms/ft
Ground 0.004 ohms/ft
NOMINAL IMPEDENCE
Line – Line 35.6 pf/ft
Neutral – Neutral 52.6 pf/ft
Neutral - Ground 57.1 pf/ft
NOMINAL INDUCTANCE
Line 0.098 μF/ft
Neutral 0.041 μF/ft
Ground 0.021 μF/ft
5. Fire stop/seal conduit at SPD end to prevent ingress of smoke and/or particulate matter, via
conduit, to panel board or switchboard. This situation would occur if SPD is hit with large surge
that permanently damages it.
6. Current Technology Model SL3-300 or owner-approved equal.
G. Motors and Motor Starters
1. Motors shall be “NEMA Premium efficiency” designation.
2. ` Motors shall be equipped with inverter rated windings and insulation.
200
3. Motors shall be equipped with an integral shaft-to-casing OEM ground device.
4. Motor controls to interface with BAS as dictated by mechanical or other equipment design.
5. Fractional horsepower, less than ½ horsepower, manual starter, AC general-purpose, Class A,
full-voltage controller for induction motor, with thermal overload element, pilot light, H-O-A
switch interfaced with BMS.
6. Motor applications, ½ HP and larger require variable speed motor control, provide an ABB
variable frequency drive, selected based on current rating of motor. For critical loads discuss
drive configuration with TCCD. Provide communications interface/s to BMS system. TCCD shall
approve recommended selection.”
H. Protective Device Coordination and Voltage Drop
1. Switchgear manufacturer to provide short circuit, coordination study and arc-flash study.
2. For building services having ground fault protection on the main device, provide coordinated
ground fault protection on each main feeder device.
3. For critical processes where selective coordination must be insured under all conditions, provide
electronic monitoring and control of circuit breakers to provide selective coordination under all
conditions.
4. Size feeders and branch circuits to limit voltage drop to 4%, generally apportioned as follows:
building service, 1%; feeders, 1%; branch circuits: 2%. Also follow voltage drop requirements
prescribed in energy codes.”
I. Emergency, Legally Required Standby, and Optional Standby Systems
1. Provide emergency and legally required standby systems meeting the requirements of the NEC
NFPA 110 and all applicable local building codes. Coordinate optional standby with TCCD.
2. UPS equipment serving telecommunication, IT facilities and other loads shall be coordinated with
TCCD for final equipment selection.
3. Where emergency power is not available, connect EXIT and emergency egress lights to an
AC inverter that has the capability to self test to meet the requirements of NFPA 101. AC
inverter equipment shall be Cooper SureLites Lifeway II Three Phase or owner-approved equal.
Coordinate with TCCD for final equipment selection. If emergency generator and associated
emergency panel are present, connect EXIT and emergency egress lights to emergency generator
panel.
4. For new facilities or existing facilities, without an ample emergency system, provide or augment,
respectively, the emergency power source as required. The TCCD shall approve methods.
5. Normal, legally required and optional standby loads may share raceways, cables, boxes, and
cabinets, but emergency loads must be segregated.
6. Generator system including all automatic transfer switches shall be installed and tested in
accordance with NETA electrical testing standards and NFPA 110.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 20108/22/2024[Division 26] ELECTRICAL
J. Disconnect Switches
1. Provide heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter disconnect switches for utilization
equipment to meet NEC requirements and to facilitate equipment maintenance.
2. Select non-fused disconnect switches. Provide over current protection with circuit breaker at the
source. Clearly label disconnect switch with OCP source identification.
3. Furnish mechanical and other utilization equipment with factory-provided disconnect switches if
available.
4. If special conditions require fusible disconnect switches, provide disconnect equipped with 600-
volt, Class R, current limiting rejection fuses, with Class R rejection kit.
1.05 SYSTEMS
A. Exterior Electrical Distribution
1. The electrical distribution system is operated and maintained by TCCD. Unless otherwise
directed, new facilities, additions and modifications shall be served from this system. Provide
primary cable, raceways, switchgear, and transformers as required for electrical service. System
distribution voltages and arrangements vary from site to site. New sites shall be served at the
highest voltage available. The final service parameters shall be approved in writing by the TCCD.
2. Medium voltage switchgear shall be set up to isolate sections of the medium voltage loop feed to
the campus and provide the isolation of components like transformers, power factor correction
equipment etc. The goal is to provide for little or no service interruption to perform maintenance
and the ability to isolate problems to minimize disruption to the facility.
3. Size medium voltage transformer(s) to meet the anticipated diversified demand load for the
project. Transformer sizing per design proffesional and coordinated with TCCD.
4. Provide a minimum of one (1) spare conduit into the primary compartment of each transformer.
Spare conduit shall be of same size as the active conduits.
5. MV cable splices are not allowed.
6. Where new medium voltage cable is installed in a manhole, specify enough cable length to
make one complete loop around manhole from cable entrance to exit.
7. Medium voltage duct banks shall be Schedule 40 PVC conduit 54” deep, chat encased with a 6”
thick concrete cap (dyed red). Utilize long sweep fiberglass elbows for bends. Conduits shall
terminate in end bells where duct banks enter manholes.
8. Provide a continuous detectable tracer tape at least 3” wide, 1 foot above all medium voltage duct
banks. “Caution Buried High Voltage Cable Below”.
9. Provide galvanized rigid steel conduit for above ground exposed locations.
10. Low voltage electrical power duct banks shall be Schedule 40 PVC conduit 42” deep, chat
encased with a 6” thick concrete cap (dyed red). This includes building service entrance race
ways. Utilize long sweep PVC elbows for bends. Conduits shall terminate in end bells where duct
202
banks enter manholes.
11. Provide a continuous detectable tracer tape at least 2” wide, 1 foot above all low voltage duct
banks. “Caution Buried Electric Line Below”.
12. Install listed low voltage watertight connectors for wire and cable splices made in hand holes
and or manholes below grade. These can only be utilized if approved in writing by TCCD.
13. Low voltage branch circuit conduits shall be 24” below grade.
14. Install appropriately sized cable limiters (at both terminations) where eight (8) or more sets of
parallel conductors are required.”
B. Lightning Protection
1. A complete Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. certified “Master Label” lightning protection system
shall be provided, as directed by TCCD, for structures.
C. Cathodic Protection
1. All uncoated metal piping, conduit and equipment in direct contact with the earth shall be
protected by a sacrificial anode type cathodic protection system. This system shall be designed
by a registered engineer who specializes in corrosion protection.
D. Exterior Lighting Illumination Levels
1. Horizontal foot candles, measured at grade, shall comply with the following table:
EXTERIOR ILLUMINATION LEVELS
AREA DESCRIPTION DESIGN FOOTCANDLES AVG : MIN RATIOActiveInactive
Major Walkways,
Bikeways, Stairways 3 1.5 3:1
Minor Walkways,
Bikeways, Stairways 1.5 1.5 3:1
Courtyards 1.5 1.5 3:1
Building Entrance 5 1 3:1
Building Surrounds 1 0.25 4:1
Parking Lot 2 0.5 3:1
Roadway 1 -4:1
Emergency Phones 5 --
Information Signs 5 --
2. Design foot candle levels for exterior sports lighting and associated recreational activities based
on latest IES Lighting Handbook recommendations and the requirements of TCCD.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 20308/22/2024[Division 26] ELECTRICAL
3. Exterior wall mounted fixtures shall be on each building entrance to provide lighting to the public
way. Power fixture from an emergency circuit (277V) and coordinate with TCCD.
4. Control exterior lighting by via the TCCD ROAM or nLight AIR(Acuity Lighting) exterior lighting
control system.
E. Fixture Selection
1. Reference TCCD Lighting Playbook for standard exterior fixture schedules.
2. Building mounted area lights will be selected to match or coordinate with adjacent pole
mounted fixtures
3. Bollard type and in-ground-structure fixtures to be selected by design professional and to be
approved by TCCD.
4. The preferred method of floodlighting for building facades is by building mounted or pole
mounted fixtures in lieu of ground-mounted fixtures. If ground-mounted fixtures are installed,
recognize that the fixture is a high-temperature hazard and place it where it is not readily
accessible by the public, minimize glare to pedestrians and minimize additional effort by grounds
maintenance personnel.
5. Use of wall-pack fixtures to be coordinated through TCCD.
6. Fixtures may be supplied at 277V or 480V, except that fixtures below twenty (20) feet above
finished grade shall not be supplied above 277V.
7. Fixtures supplied from a circuit breaker rated 20A and above shall have inline fusing.
F. Lamps, Drivers and Ballasts
1. Reference TCCD Lighting Playbook for standard exterior fixture schedules.
2. LED is the preferred lamp type; Sodium vapor, metal halide, mercury vapor and incandescent
lamps shall not be used.
G. Fixture Mounting and Poles
1. Building mounted fixtures shall be mounted on flush mounted junction boxes.
2. Conduit for building mounted fixtures may not be exposed on building surface.
3. Concrete bases for pole-mounted fixtures shall have a minimum of 36” of concrete above finished
grade in parking lots, and 12” in non-vehicular areas.
4. All exterior lighting circuits shall have a separate insulated ground wire.
5. Provide a lightning surge suppressor for circuit breakers that feed exterior lighting (parking lot,
building surface, emergency power sources for Code Blue phones, CCTV power sources etc.).
Use Current Technology’s “Load Guard Series”or owner-approved equal.
6. Each pole-mounted fixture shall have a ground rod at the pole adjacent to the base. Ground rod
204
shall be bonded to the metal pole and the equipment ground of the circuit supplying the fixture.
7. Maximum fixture height shall be forty (40) feet above ground. Pole heights shall match height of
existing poles where applicable.
8. Specify poles with integral hand hole.
9. Lighting poles shall be metal, type and finish as specified in Luminaire Schedule as shown on the
drawings.
10. The entire pole assembly shall withstand a steady wind load rating as specified per Gulf Coast
rating with a gust factor of 1.3 without permanent deflection.
11. Poles shall be provided with the manufacturer’s internal vibration damping system.
12. Inline fuses shall provide ballast/driver protection.
H. Exterior Lighting Controls
1. The preferred method of control for exterior lighting including roadways is through ROAM system
on TCCD servers.”
I. Light Pollution and Trespass
1. Where area or roadway lighting fixtures are located adjacent to residential neighborhoods and
other developed areas, or where light trespass is regulated by local codes, provide fixtures with
internal cutoff to avoid light trespass into adjacent property. All outdoor lighting fixtures shall
comply with Dark Sky Initiative.
J. Interior Electrical Distribution
1. Unless otherwise approved by TCCD, distribution service entrance voltage shall be 277/480
volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, wye, with dry-type transformers used to provide a 120/208 volt sub-system
voltage.
2. Connect circuit lighting and large equipment loads to the 277/480 volt system, and connect
receptacles and small utilization equipment to the 120/208-volt system.
3. A service entrance voltage of 120/208 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, wye, is allowable for smaller facilities
where the anticipated electrical loads are not large enough to justify a higher service entrance
voltage but must be approved in writing by TCCD.
4. Service entrance equipment shall be connected to non-integral, selenium enhanced, surge filter
system. Select current rating and protection level for TVSS as recommended by manufacturer for
level of service.
5. Provide a four (4) inch concrete housekeeping pad for switchboard installation if floor structure
will allow. Extend pad four (4) inches beyond equipment footprint, except for switchboards
equipped with drawout type circuit breakers.
6. For flush mounted panelboards provide a spare 1” conduit, stubbed above ceiling space, for every
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 20508/22/2024[Division 26] ELECTRICAL
nine (9) single breaker blanks. Coordinate spare capacity with TCCD.
7. Floor mount transformers on four (4) inch concrete housekeeping pad in electrical equipment
room. Extend pad four (4) inches beyond equipment footprint. Provide isolation pads to prevent
sound transmission to building structure.
8. Interior and above grade exterior building wiring shall have type THWN or THHN insulation.
Underground wiring shall have USE insulation.
9. Building wire, #4 AWG and larger, shall be thermoplastic type THWN/THHN or XHHW, copper
conductor.
10. Type MC cable may be used only for lighting whips and in existing walls. Type AC or BX cable is
not allowed.
11. Terminate and splice #6 AWG and larger conductors with high conductivity, wrought copper,
color-keyed compression connectors. Where three (3) or more conductors are installed in wiring
gutter, utilize a screw-type power distribution block.
12. Connect and splice #8 AWG and smaller conductors with self-insulating, wire nut connectors.
13. Provide electrical raceways to facilitate the installation of building wiring and cable. Select
and install raceways to meet NEC requirements as applied to the specific project conditions.
Additional guidelines for raceway selection are given in this section.
14. Provide electrical metallic tubing for interior locations with compression fittings.
15. Conceal raceways in finished spaces. Install raceways parallel to building structure.
16. Minimum size for raceways: 3/4” minimum for panel homeruns and minimum ½” within
walls.
K. System and Equipment Grounding
1. Provide telecommunications grounding per Division 27.
2. Ground rods shall be ¾” diameter, 10’ length, stainless steel.
3. Ground connection made below grade shall be with exothermic (Cadweld) connections. Use
exothermic or mechanical connectors for above grade work.
4. Provide electrical raceway grounding and boding as required by NEC. In addition, provide a
supplemental equipment grounding conductor in all feeders and branch circuits, except for main
service entrance.
5. Ground and bond building electrical service as required by NEC. Provide a ground rod at service
equipment. Ground electrical service to ground rod, building steel structure, counterpoise (if
available), and other grounding electrodes as prescribed by NEC. Supplement with Ufer ground at
main service.
6. Ground access flooring structure and metallic cable tray to building steel structure or other
206
supplemental grounding electrodes if building structure is not grounded. Provide ground
connections at 100-foot minimum intervals.
7. Grounding system shall be tested to ensure a resistance of 5 ohms or less. Testing methods to
be approved by design professional.
8. Ground and bond dry-type transformers, power distribution units, and other separately derived
systems as required by NEC. Connect to nearest effectively grounded building steel structure and
other grounding electrodes as prescribed by NEC.
L. Interior Lighting
1. Reference the current version of the TCCD Lighting Playbook and its standard fixture schedule.
2. Illumination foot candle levels shall be based on the recommended values given in the IESNA
Handbook and allowances prescribed by the energy codes.
3. Task lighting as appropriate for the application. Coordinate in writing with TCCD.
4. Incandescent lighting is not permittted.
5. Specify glass, metal, and other long-life materials for fixture construction that are not degraded
quickly by age, environment, and exposure to UV radiation.
6. Locate fixtures to facilitate maintenance. Avoid locating fixture drivers in non-accessible ceiling
spaces. Locate overhead fixtures so that they are accessible by ladder, power lift, or other readily
available means.
7. Interior Lighting Controls
a. Lighting controls shall meet the minimum requirements of the current, applicable energy
codes.
b. Use of “Daylight Harvesting” by dimming fluorescent fixtures where applicable through the use
of photo controls is recommended. In rooms that have NLight controls, the daylight harvesting
zone should be operated by the NLight system.
c. In areas where automatic lighting shutoff is required, this may be accomplished by occupancy
sensors and/or time schedule control, as provided by the campus NLight system.
d. Occupancy sensors will be ceiling-mounted in rooms. Avoid using occupancy sensors
in rooms larger than 2500 square feet, or in locations with modular furniture or other
obstructions that might obstruct the control signal or provide enough occupancy sensors to
adequately control the room.
e. In areas with audio-visual presentation requirements, provide multi-zone switching and
dimming controls for lighting fixtures to enhance the visual presentation. Coordinate with
TCCD for specific requirements.
f. TCCD has standardized on equipment manufactured by NLight for standalone and system
occupancy sensors. If the room is equipped with NLight controls then the occupancy sensor
will be anNLight unit attached to the NLight network and programmed into the campus NLight
system along with touch stations for controlling the lights.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 20708/22/2024[Division 26] ELECTRICAL
g. Because of the ability for one circuit to power lighting in multiple classrooms, the design shall
incorporate key switches located above the entrance to the classroom that can remove power
from that classrooms lighting circuit. This will avoid repairs in one classroom from taking a
whole bank of classrooms out of service.
8. Emergency Egress and Exit Lighting
a. The preferred method to power egress lighting is to provide fixtures supplied from a circuit
in an emergency panel fed by the emergency power source, centralized inverter system or
generator as directed by design professional.
b. Emergency inverter, where used, shall have a typical efficiency (AC out/AC in) of 98%. SNMP
communication interface, extended warranty with factory startup, external bypass switch, and
upgraded battery charger. Coordinate equipment selection with design professional. Inverters
shall be networked to TCC’s IT moniotring system.
c. Building expansion or renovation projects will require coordination with TCCD to determine
if the existing egress lighting system is to be maintained/expanded or if a new system is
needed.
d. Locate emergency egress lighting to provide illumination levels prescribed by the local codes
in effect. Provide EXIT lights at all doors that lead to an exterior exit and directional EXIT
lights indicating shortest path of travel to nearest exit.
9. Existing Conditions
a. The design professional shall study, when available, record, as-built, and/or renovation
drawings to verify existing conditions. Every attempt should be made, short of destructive
demolition, to verify existing conditions. Reuse lighting/mechanical circuits, for new lighting
fixtures/mechanical equipment, when existing lighting fixtures/mechanical equipment has
been removed. Update panel schedules after renovation work is complete, schedules shall be
type written.
10. Electrical Identification
a. Provide circuit identification for electrical equipment, receptacles and circuits for new and
retrofit work.
b. Provide underground warning tape with metallic tracer wire at below-grade electrical circuits.
c. Provide circuit directory for new and existing panels. Provide MS Excel spreadsheet data file
for all circuit directories to TCCD in closeout documentation.
d. Provide orange color adhesive vinyl labels to identify electrical power, lighting, and control
conduits. Place label at load, source, and at intermediate points at fifty (50) foot intervals.
Label should describe type of service, such as, voltage, power, lighting, control, etc.
e. Provide wire markers with circuit number on each conductor in splice box, pull box, and first
load connection on homerun.
f. Provide engraved plastic nameplate on electrical equipment enclosure.
g. Junction boxes shall be color-coded as follows:
i. Fire Alarm - Red.
208
ii. Emergency Power - Yellow.
iii. Controls / Automation - White.
iv. 120/208V Power - Blue.
v. 277/480V Power - Orange.
h. Identify circuit number on pull and junction box cover with indelible marker or printed
adhesive tape.
i. Provide label at electrical equipment to indicate the short circuit and Arc Flash rating per NEC
M. EV chargers.
1. Refer to Sustainability in the Uniform Facility Library located in the TCCD website for EV Chargers
Operating Standards.
N. Retractable Power Chords
1. Ceiling mount or other to be specified by design professional.
2. 12 gauge wire, 20 amp circuit breaker.
END OF DIVISION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 20908/22/2024[Division 27] COMMUNICATIONS
Communications27
Note: For Dvision 27 Communications Section, the term “installation” shall mean the physical placement
of the device(s)(wireless access points, PoECamera, etc) or electronics (network routers, switch, security
appliance, etc.) in the location shown in the architectural drawings or as provided by the TCCD’s OneIT
department, the connecting of any copper or fiber cabling to the Panduit 48-port panels, no cross-
connection to the switches (cross connection to the Panduit switches is determined by the programing of
the port and will not be available to the installation teamat the time of ionstallation), and the connecting
of the appropriate electrical power to that device or electronics, “installation” does not include any
programing of the device(s) or electronics by the GC or their designate. ALL programing and cross-
connection will be performed by OneIT Department post installation.
The General Contractor (GC) will notify OneIT when the installation of the device(s) or electronics is
comp[leted. Staff from OneIT will perform acceptance testing on the device(s) or electronics. Once
testing has been completed, the GC will receive signature of acceptance at which time the responsibility
for the device(s) or electronics is turned over to TCCD’s OneIT Department.
A. Consultant Qualifications
1. Where Technology or AV design scope is identified, The A/E design team shall include a data/
voice/audio/video design consultant with BICSI RCDD credentials and with extensive previous
experience in university/college building design environment.
2. The contractor shall place and maintain on the project a sufficient number of skilled installers
who are thoroughly educated and experienced on the necessary crafts and completely familiar
with the specified requirements and methods needed for the proper performance and completion
or the work.
B. General ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-00 page 1-33 )
1. In General, TCCD Telecommunications infrastructure is required to meet the standards
recommended by Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) IEEE, ISO/IEC,
CENELEC, ANSI & TIA. along with local, state and national codes and standards. Where conflict
in codes or standards exists, the more stringent should apply. Design professional to confirm
existing infrastructure and coordinate with TCCD to determine where modification or additional
infrastructure is required to meet standard.
2. On per project basis, OneIT will work with the contractor or their designate to define the make,
model, quantity needed for the device(s) and electronics in accordance with the architectural
drawings for the project including any accessories needed to complete the installation (i.e.,
mounting hardware, small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers, and other miscellaneous
items.).
C. Definitions (Appendix B, section 27 05 00, page 4).
1. These are basic definitions used in this document to describe rooms or equipment used by
TCCD’s OneIT department.
210
D. Campus Connectivity (New Building) – Pathway: ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-00, 27-05-43 & 27-13-00 )
1. Provide a minimum of two, four inch schedule 40 PVC (or equivalent) conduits between the
building’s Main Equipment Room (MER) and the building, crawlspace, telecommunications
maintenance hole, tunnel, or other service point as designated by TCCD.
2. Coordinate with TCCD and Fire Alarm Designer to ensure that NFPA conduit separation
requirements are met.
3. Provide POLYETHYLENE TUBING or textile mesh innerduct for all Outside Plant (OSP) pathway
greater than 2” in diameter. TCCD’s preferred choice is a 2” polyethylene pathway. Please
coordinate with TCCD’s OneIT Department.
E. Campus Connectivity (New Building) – Cabling:( APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-00, 27-05-43 & 27-15-00 )
1. Fiber Backbone: Provide one 24 strand Single Mode Fiber and one 12 Strand Multi-mode OM4
Fiber in one pathway and one 6 strand single Mode and 6 strand OM4 Multi-mode Fiber in a
separate pathway.
a. Pathway diversity is require for Fire Alarm signal transmission.
b. Fiber optic cabling, not in conduit or armored, must be installed in properly rated innerduct.
F. Inside Plant Backbone Pathway: ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-00, 27-05-43 & 27-15-00 )
1. MER and Telecom Rooms (TR) shall be linked as needed plus 1 spare 4” twist-to-reseal firestop
sleeves for vertical and horizontal transitions out of TR and MERs. Cable tray may be used
to connect MER to TRs in the same building, however fiber optic cabling must be armored or
installed in properly rated innerduct for protection.
G. Inside Plant Backbone Cabling: ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-00, 27-13-00 )
1. Fiber Backbone: Provide one 24 strand Single Mode Fiber and one 12 Strand Multi-mode
OM4 Fiber in one pathway and one 6 strand single Mode and 6 strand OM4 Multi-mode Fiber in
a separate pathway. Pathway diversity is require for Fire Alarm signal transmission. Fiber optic
cabling, not in conduit or armored, must be installed in properly rated innerduct
H. Horizontal Cable Distribution System: ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-00, 27-05-53 & 27-15-00 )
1. The telecommunications cable distribution system will be run above the finished ceiling or in the
below floor interstitial space to the nearest ER/TR on the corresponding floor. Acceptable pathway
methods are conduit, cable-hooks, open cable tray or enclosed cable tray.
2. Cabling may not be visible to the public at any point outside of the MER or TRs; conduit or
enclosed cable tray are required in exposed areas.
3. All cabling pathway must be installed and supported per industry or manufacturer standard. Field
modification of pathway elements is not permitted unless the product is designed to be modified.
4. The minimum acceptable conduit size for telecommunication use in 1”; larger conduits maybe
used where applicable, however fill ratio standards must be maintained.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 21108/22/2024[Division 27] COMMUNICATIONS
5. Standard work area outlet rough-in will include one 1”min. conduit routed from accessible ceiling
to a double gang back box installed with a single gang reducer plate. The conduit termination
points shall be installed with an insulated throat fittings or bushings to protect cables during
installation.
6. All cabling in mechanical or electrical rooms must be installed in conduit.
I. Termination Hardware ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-00 )
1. All cable termination hardware shall be mounted in 19” racks.
2. Copper backbone cabling shall terminate on rack patch panels and Fiber backbone cabling shall
terminate in, fully populated, rack mounted Fiber Panels using LC connectors and adapters.
a. Blue for data ports
b. Purple for wireless access points
c. Yellow for surveillamce cameras and other devices
d. Red for emergency phones or emergency communication devices
3. Horizontal copper cabling shall terminate on rack mounted Category 6 48 port angled patch
panels in the ER/TRs, and on 8P8C (RJ45) 568B Category 6 inserts at the outlet. Information
outlets shall be blue for data and gray for analog voice.
4. Floor poke thru devices must be specified with adapters designed to accept the specified 8P8C
jacks ( PANDUIT )
J. Horizontal Cabling ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-00 & 27-15-00 )
1. The TCCD is standardized on Panduit Connectivity for use with General or Panduit Cable; required
part numbers are available in the Master Specification.
2. Coordinate with MEP to ensure that at least one-15/20 amp, 120 VAC, standard duplex
convenience outlet is located within 12” of all standard telecom outlets, PoE powered device
locations excluded.
K. Wireless Access Point Locations ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-00 )
1. Each cable should be installed with a 20 ft service loop at the access point end. The cables
should be terminated with 8P8C outlet in a two port surface mount plenum-grade mount. Wireless
access points are generally located in ceilings, however locating access points in ceilings higher
than 14ft is not recommended. In those locations, strong consideration should be given to a wall
mounted outlet. Wall mounted outlets for access points should be located no more than 14 ft high.
2. All wireless cabling must be CAT 6a with a termination designation color code violet part#
PANDUIT CJ6X88TGVL.
3. Wireless Access Point Labeling will be provided in the scope of the installation services. See
naming convention section at the end of this document for label requirements.
L. Communications Equipment Room Locations and Sizing ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-00, 27-05-53 & 27-
212
11-00”.
1. MER and TR Room sizing shall conform to BICSI recommended sizing standard based on
building use and square footage served with accomodation for minimum 50% future growth in
rack space. Mimimum size is 9’x10’ for new construction; larger accomodations may be needed
based on technology to be installed in the room. Contractor to review requirements with OneIT
and RE&F prior to construction.
2. MER/TR should not be located adjacent to restroomsor janitorial closets due to the risk of
flooding.
3. MER/TR rooms in multi-floor facilities shall be stacked.
4. No open thru hole penetrations are allowed to be made from condition space to unconditioned
space. No crawl space or roof access is permitted in MER/TR rooms.
5. No ceilings are permitted in MER/TR rooms.
6. No means of liquid conveyance (water lines, sanitary or roof drain pipes, thermal, water, etc.)
may pass through MER/TR rooms. Exception: Sprinklers may be installed in TR rooms as
required by NFPA code. Sprinkler heads must be caged.
7. Do not locate ductwork or plumbing cleanouts in MER/TR rooms.
8. All MER and TR doors to be solid without windows.
9. No equipment should be permanently installed behind equipment racks.
M. Communications Equipment Room Fittings
1. Refer to representative floor plans and elevations for TCCD equipment room fittings.
Enlarged Floor Plan
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 21308/22/2024[Division 27] COMMUNICATIONS
Enlarged Floor Plan with UPS
North Wall Elevation
214
Standard
Rack Elevation
2. All walls to have 8 ft covering of A/C plywood painted front and back with off-white fire retardant
paint, as required.
3. Provide 7’ x 19” racks and patch panels as appropriate to accommodate initial infrastructure in
the area served by each room plus 50% for future growth.
4. Provide 10” vertical wire manager between racks and 6” verticals on the end of each row.
5. Diagrams note standard layout and adjacencies and not necessarily required room size or
configuration. Cross reference with MEP.
6. Ensure that proper arrangements have been made for wire management/strain relief between
main communications and electronic access control systems.
N. MER/TR Environmental Requirements ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-00, 27-05-23, 27-11-00 & 27-16-19 )
1. Lighting level at 50 foot candles with lighting fixtures located off set from ladder tray. Cross
reference with MEP.
2. Telecom rooms shall be air conditioned and humidity controlled. Inline cooling units may be
required using #6 AWG GREEN for server applications, coordinate with TCCD and MEP. Each
equipment rack must be individually bonded to MER/TR main bus bar using #6 AWG GREEN wire.
( NO DAISY CHAIN WILL BE ACCEPTED ).
3. MER/TR’s air conditioning should be supported by emergency power if network attached devices
in the building will be running on emergency power.
4. MER/TR convenience outlets - Provide a minimum of one fourplex isolated ground 120-volt power
outlet on each wall with a maximum of two duplex outlets per circuit. These circuits are to be
dedicated to the telecom room and are not allowed to serve any other load.
5. UPS buffered, generator backed power is recommended for all MER/TRs as security and life
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 21508/22/2024[Division 27] COMMUNICATIONS
safety systems may be controlled by the network. UPS buffered power is required for all new TR
build outs. Elements supported by TR UPS include all rack-mounted and wall mounted equipment
housed in the MER or TRs; excluding building lighting.
6. Large format expandable UPS Cabinets are preferred and usually sized to support the
requirements of multiple stacked TRs with rooms being served by UPS fed power panels
dedicated to each MER and TR. Coordinate UPS locations and power connectivity requirements
with TCCD and MEP.
7. Equipment Rack Power - Each equipment rack shall be supplied with one L5-20R Receptacles
attached to the tray above each rack.
8. Server Cabinet Power - Each server cabinet shall be supplied with one L5-20R Receptacles and
one L21-20R Receptacle attached to the tray above each cabinet.
O. Telecommunication Ground and Bonding: ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-00)
1. Provide grounding system and busbar design per ANSI/TIA 607 and BICSI Standard. Coordinate
proper grounding of TMGB with electrical system design engineer.
2. All cable and ladder trays, racks and conduits shall be properly bonded to the TMGB/TGB as
required.
3. All termination panels shall be installed with manufacturer approved grounding washers
Note: Installer will be required to provide full documentation as to the device type, campus, building,
floor, room, label, etc. for each device installed.
P. Telecommunications Labeling: APPENDIX B SEC 27-05-53
1. Cable and Outlet Labeling
2. Voice and data outlets and cables shall by labeled with the MER/TR Number – Rack/ Wallfield
Designation – Rack Unit Location of Patch Panel – Port Number. ie. 15-A-40-01, 09-B-10-23
3. Outlet numbers shall be marked by permanent means on each cable at the outlet and at the TR.
4. Prior placement of any permanent labels, contractor must coordinate with TCCD Communications
216
Services or Project manager.
Q. Patch Cords, Station Cords, and X-Connect Wire ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-16-19 )
1. Contractor shall provide two (2) Category 6 patch cords per horizontal cable installed shall be
BLUE in color and coordinate lengths and quantities with TCCD’s OneIT Department.
2. Contractor shall provide one (1) duplex fiber optic patch cords per fiber termination; patch cords
shall be consistent with fiber type.
3. Contractor shall provide two (2) Category 6A (28 AWG) patch cords per wireless access point.
Cable installed shall be PURPLE in color and coordinate lengths and quantities with TCCD’s
OneIT Department
4. Contractor shall provide two (2) Category 6 patch cords per securitycamera. Cable installed shall
be YELLOW in color and coordinate lengths and quantities with TCCD’s OneIT Department..
R. Data Communications Equipment ( APPENDIX B SEC 27-20-00 )
1. Data communications contractor equipment will be acquired based on equipment specification
from OneIT’s network and communications group. Coordinate with OneIT’s netwrok engineers to
ensure rack space is provided, appropriate power, and HVAC requirements are met by electrical.
2. Contractor shall be responsible for the acquisityion, physical installation, and powering up the
device to ensure that it is not in a DOA condition.
3. OneIT network engineers will review and accept installation as being complete at which time
ownership is transferred to TCCD.
4. For security purposes, ALL programing of the network electronics(routers, switches, wireless
access points, etc.) will be the responsibility of the OneIT Network and Communications team.
S. Voice Communications Equipment
1. Voice commmunications equipment will be acquired based on equipment specifications from
OneIT’s Network and Communications group. Coordinate with OneIT’s network engineers to
ensure rack space is provided, appropriate power, and HVAC requirements are met by electrical.
2. Contractor shall be responsible for the acquisityion, physical installation, and powering up the
device to ensure that it is not in a DOA condition.
3. OneIT network engineers will review and accept installation as being complete at which time
ownership is transferred to TCCD.
4. For security purposes, ALL programing of the voice communications equipment will be the
responsibility of the OneIT Network and Communications team.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 21708/22/2024[Division 27] COMMUNICATIONS
T. Security Surveillance System (Appendix B, section 27 44 00, pages 81-85).
1. Security Camera equipment will be acquired based on equipment specifications from OneIT’s
Network and Communications group. Physical location for installation will be based on
architectural drawings or by designation based on TCCD’s Master Security Planning Documents.
2. Contractor shall be responsible for the acquisityion, physical installation, and powering up the
device to ensure that it is not in a DOA condition.
3. OneIT network engineers will review and accept installation as being complete at which time
ownership is transferred to TCCD.
4. For security purposes, ALL programing of the voice communications equipment will be the
responsibility of the OneIT Network and Communications team.
U. Synchronized time system (Appendix B SEC 27 53 13 - Digital clocks)
Tarrant County College District Standard Physical Device
Naming - Labeling Conventions for OneIT Infrastructure Group
Preface: The naming convention is based on industry best practices and the experience of the staff. The
key elements that are common in any naming convention is location, device type, and function to the
extent that support staff can quickly identify the impact on the college.
• Location will include campus, building and floor or room depending on the physical structure of
that location.
o For example, Trinity River complex of buildings have both open floor and classroom
designations. There could be a mix of floor number designations and well as floor and
room number designations.
• Device type includes a high-level view of that device.
o For example, physical server, switch, wireless access point, security camera, etc.
• Function is also at the high-level for several reasons including the transient nature of virtual
devices and servers including those applications that are supported by that physical device.
o For example, a physical server may run an application like DNS, DHCP, or Active Directory
on a single device. To use these functions as part of the name would be impractical.
Note: As of this writing (August 2022), Real Estate and Facilities (RE&F) is going through a building
naming standards change. To that extent, this document will be updated as the naming convention is
set. For now, the document will reflect a default value for campus, building and room.
218
Standards are shown for the various physical devices in the tables below.
Examples in the various areas are as follows:
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 21908/22/2024[Division 27] COMMUNICATIONS
Quality of assurance
1. The contractor shall place and maintain on the project a sufficient number of skilled installers
who are thoroughly trained and experienced on the necessary crafts and completely familiar
with the specified requirements and methods needed for the proper performance and completion
or the work. If worker is found to be deficient in this area, the contractor must immediately provide
necessary training to remove the deficiency or replace the worker with one having the required
skills.
END OF DIVISION
220 [Division 28] ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY/FIRE SYSTEMS
Electronic Safety & Security/ Fire Alarm Systems28
1.01 CONSULTANT QUALIFICATIONS
A. Where security design scope is required, The A/E design team shall include a security design firm with
that is licensed by the State of Texas Private Security Bureau. The firm should include design staff
with BICSI RCDD, ESS or ASIS PSP credentials and with extensive previous experience in university/
college building design environment.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All Electronic Safety and Security design shall be in accordance with the current edition of the
following codes, as applicable, and the editions, revisions, amendments, or supplements of applicable
statutes, ordinances, codes or regulations of Federal, State, and Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ).
1. Local Codes and regulations
a. Ft. Worth
b. Arlington
c. Hurst
d. North Ridgeland Hills
B. ANSI/TIA Standards.
C. ESSDRM – Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc. Electronic Safety and Security
Design Reference Manual.
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
A. POLICY AND PROCEDURES
1. Management of the TCCD Security Network is the responsibility of, the Network and
Communications Department (NCSD), the Physical Plant Department (PPD), the Police Department
(PD), the Systems Infrastructure and Engineering Department (SIED), and the Video Support
Services (VSS). This includes operations, performance monitoring, optimization, troubleshooting,
repair, and disaster recovery. The NCSD is also responsible for the planning and development
of operational and design standards for the security system interface to the Local Area Networks
(LANs) including the security infrastructure and substructure.
2. NCSD staff will be responsible for installation and support of LAN hardware, software and data
communications to support interface with the Access Control Surveillance, Detection and Alarm,
and Monitoring and Control systems.
B. DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
1. TCCD requires that the security infrastructure and substructure be designed and installed
in accordance with applicable codes and industry standards. Due to the unique physical
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 221
characteristics of many TCCD facilities, some technical design solutions are better suited than
others. These guidelines identify which design solutions are appropriate and approved for the
various types of buildings and areas in TCCD facilities.
C. NEW CONSTRUCTION
1. All new TCCD construction projects shall contain a security infrastructure designed and installed
in accordance with the requirements of these guidelines.
D. RENOVATION TO EXISTING STRUCTURES
1. All existing TCCD facilities undergoing renovation or remodeling shall incorporate a security
infrastructure designed and installed in accordance with the requirements of these guidelines as
much as is practical.
E. APPROVAL FOR ALTERNATIVE DESIGN SOLUTIONS
1. This standard identifies specific design solutions that are intended to meet the requirements of
TCCD. Requests to deviate from this standard or any industry standard will be considered on a
case-by-case basis.
F. PROCUREMENT AND INSTALLATION POLICY
1. In large construction projects the security infrastructure procurement and installation will be
part of the general construction contract. A competitive acquisition should still be pursued with
vendors listed by TCCD as approved. Coordination of the procurement and installation of the
security infrastructure with the general contractor and vendors will be a combined effort of the
NCSD, PPD, PD, SIED and VSSD.
G. SECURITY SYSTEM WARRANTY AND CERTIFICATION
1. TCCD requires a warranty on all equipment, material and installation work included in the security
infrastructure of a project of at least one (1) year from project acceptance. In addition, TCCD
requires that 100% of the security infrastructure equipment and material installed be tested and
certified at the designed and intended performance level. The general contractor shall apply for
and provide a certificate of warranty from all vendors at the time of project acceptance.
H. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
1. Installation contractors must be manufacturer trained and certified resellers. The installation
contractor must be engaged in the normal business of installing security systems, and licensed to
operate in the State of Texas.
1.04 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
A. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
1. GROUNDING, BONDING AND ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
a. Per ANSI J-STD 607 and BICSI Standard
222 [Division 28] ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY/FIRE SYSTEMS
B. PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
1. Surveillance Camera pathway shall be consistent with Division 27- Pathway Requirements.
2. DESIGN CRITERIA FOR INSIDE PLANT CONDUIT
a. Pathway for security cabling shall adhere to BISCI standard from TR to junction box above
each door. ¾” conduit may be used to route cabling from over door junction box to door
elements.
3. DESIGN CRITERIA FOR INSIDE PLANT PULLBOXES
a. Pull boxes used with security conduits in interior locations shall be rated NEMA-1. Pull boxes
used in damp or wet locations such as plumbing chases or outside shall be rated NEMA-3R.
4. CABLE PATHWAYS AND SUPPORT STRUCTURES
a. The Inside Plant (ISP) security substructure are the cable pathways and support structures
necessary for routing security cabling between ERs, and from the ER to the device location.
Some of these methods include:
1) Enclosed conduit system.
2) Open or enclosed cable trays.
3) Routing above a false ceiling using cable supports.
b. 12-24V Security cable pathways may share cable tray with IT cable tray providing a metallic
divider is installed between the cables.
c. The conduit system shall be routed inside ceilings, floors, and walls to the greatest extent
possible. Surface mounted conduit shall be used only when there is no other route to provide
service to the desired location.
d. For the main floor of “slab on grade constructed buildings” conduit will route in walls and
ceilings, not in or under the slab. If this design is not possible, an alternate must be presented
to TCCD.
e. All device locations shall have a minimum 3/4 inch conduit. Increase the conduit size as
necessary for the quantity of cables to be installed. Cable fill shall not exceed 40% and plan
on 25% growth.
C. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
1. SECURITY ADMINISTRATION
a. Administration of the security infrastructure includes documentation of cables, termination
hardware, cross-connection facilities, conduits, other cable pathways, ERs, TRs, and
other security spaces. TCCD shall implement and maintain a system for documenting and
administering the security infrastructure.
1) All security devices and cables shall be clearly marked using permanent means. The
designation scheme must be consistent with the scheme in use on the campus where
the work is being performed. The scheme shall be approved by TCCD prior to use.
2) Each individual cable shall be clearly marked on both ends and multi conductor cables
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 223
shall have each conductor clearly marked.
2. DRAWINGS
a. Drawings shall be used to illustrate different stages of security infrastructure planning,
installation, and administration.
1) INSTALLATION (CONSTRUCTION) DRAWINGS: Will show the installer how the
infrastructure is to be installed. The quality of the installation can be directly impacted
by the level of detail in the installation drawings and written specifications. Installation
drawings for TCCD projects shall, at a minimum, show device locations, pathway and
routing, configuration of security spaces including backboard and equipment rack
configurations, and wiring details including identifier assignments.
2) AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: Graphically document the installed security infrastructure
through floor plan, elevation, and detail drawings. In many cases, these drawings will
differ from the installation drawings because of changes made during construction and
specific site conditions. In the as-built drawings, the identifiers for major infrastructure
components must be recorded. The pathways, spaces, and wiring portions of the
infrastructure each may have separate drawings if warranted by the complexity of the
installation, or the scale of the drawings. As-built drawings are a vital component of the
security administration system, and must be kept current as additions, deletions, and
changes take place. TCCD requires the installer to provide a complete and accurate set
of as-built drawings.
3. LABELING
a. To be consistent with ANSI/TIA standards and industry practices, it is important that labeling
be applied to all security infrastructure components. Labeling with the unique identifier will
identify a particular component.
1.05 SCHEDULES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
A. CRITICAL DELIVERABLES EXPECTED FROM SECURITY CONTRACTOR
1. It is essential for TCCD to receive all test results and as-built drawings prior to job acceptance.
The test results must adhere to the following specifications, formats and delivery conditions:
B. Specifications:
1. Complete end-to-end test results for all copper Shielded Twisted Pair (STP), copper Unshielded
Twisted Pair (UTP) and fiber optic cables installed are required.
2. All fiber optic cable should be tested using Division 27 testing criterion.
3. 100% of all pairs in copper cables shall be tested for continuity and wire-map.
C. Format:
1. Test Results must be submitted in both hard and soft copy in a format previously agreed to by
TCCD.
2. As Built drawings must be submitted with a .dwg file extension.
224 [Division 28] ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY/FIRE SYSTEMS
D. Delivery:
1. Test Results must be both hard copy and electronically submitted to TCCD. Contact information
will be provided after contract is awarded and before project completion.
1.06 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION
1. TCCD has a complete functioning LenelS2 OnGuard 8.0 Electronic Access Control System
(EACS) in place capable of including all five campuses (NE, NW, SE, SO, TR), and various remote
locations. The system is linked through a TCCD owned and operated high speed Metropolitan
Area Network.
2. TCCD will require that any vendor performing work on a new or existing portion of TCCD’s EACS
be a LenelS2 OnGuard 8.0 Strategic Partner.
3. Prior to the start of any EACS project the vendor shall notify the EACS Manager who will in turn
schedule TCCD technical support for the project. Project technical support provided by TCCD
shall consist of front end programming, provision of network connection(s) and field panel
programming, and field testing support.
4. Upon project completion the vendor shall submit written certification attesting that all elements of
the EACS have been installed in accordance with the design documents and perform according
to TCCD requirements. In addition, the vendor shall provide system test results in booklet and
electronic form and accurate AS BUILT electronic drawings with a .dwg file extension.
5. Access control for any TCCD facility, new or renovated, will be included in the existing TCCD
EACS. TCCD will provide:
a. All necessary LenelS2 OnGuard 8.0 licensing.
b. The ACS shall be the Lenel OnGuard system. (no substitutions). The Badging Solution shall be
Lenel OnGuard. The ACS field controllers shall be Mercury Hardware bearing the “Authentic
Mercury” mark.
c. The Lenel OnGuard Access Control Management System is the existing access control
system for TCCD and utilizes with an existing data import script tied to the District’s student
and employee database. The system is a sophisticated, multi-tasking, multi-user Access
Control Management System and is modular and network capable. The system has the
ability of handling multiple sites, controls access with various reader technologies supported
simultaneously, includes alarm monitoring with text and graphics-based annunciation, and
allows for easy expansion and modification of readers, inputs, and outputs.
d. The system utilizes an existing central server and is managed under a single software program
by the existing Lenel OnGuard Access Control Server Software, which provides full integration
of all.
e. System components. Reconfiguration shall be accomplished on-line through system
programming, without hardware changes (except for database, operating system, or
technology upgrades by Owner).
f. Access Control Contractor shall provide and install the Lenel OnGuard System for all specified
doors including the following equipment: card readers, intelligent system controllers,
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 225
system enclosures, card reader panels, input panels, output panels, interface relays, power
distribution modules, door contacts, egress motion detectors, exit buttons, door props horns,
key switches, system power supplies, fused relayed outputs, back-up batteries, and power
distribution modules for fail-safe locks only (to be tied into the building fire alarm system).
g. Access Control Contractor shall provide and install all low voltage plenum cabling to access
control devices and electrified door hardware and make all low voltage connections.
h. Access Control Contractor shall provide door lock power supplies.
i. Access Control Contractor shall provide specified Lenel OnGuard client software, and
associated training.
j. The system programmer shall have attended manufacturer training and obtained certification
in Lenel OnGuard.
k. The system programmer shall be a Lenel/S2 certified partner.
l. All contractors shall submit to the Owner prior to starting any work the factory training
certificates for all personnel that will be working on the access control system. No person can
work on the system without proper manufacturer’s certification.
m. All Access Credentials (Access Cards).
n. Technical support by performing system programming and assisting in the testing and
acceptance of the finished work.
6. ALL DOORS and/or DOORWAYS, as designated by TCCD, shall be PREPPED for electronic access
by providing:
a. A single gang deep electrical box mounted at TAS acceptable location with a minimum 3/4”
raceway from the electrical box to area above ceiling that is accessible for cable pulling.
b. A single gang deep electrical box mounted at door latch level with a minimum 3/4” raceway
from electrical box to area above ceiling that is accessible for cable pulling.
7. DOORS to be included in the EACS, as designated by TCCD, door prioritization shall be reviewed
with TCCD on a per project basis as part of a EACS design review meeting.
a. All exterior doors.
b. Entrances to central energy plants and campus utility distribution areas.
c. Entrances to telecommunications rooms.
d. Entrances to campus police areas.
e. Entrances to president’s or dean’s office suites.
f. Entrances to business services office suites.
g. Entrances to financial aid office suites.
h. Entrances to food services areas.
i. Other areas as identified by the TCCD.
8. ALL DOORS designated by TCCD to be INCLUDED in the EACS shall be provided with:
226 [Division 28] ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY/FIRE SYSTEMS
a. Access Control Reader
A Card Reader (CR) with a single gang deep electrical box mounted at TAS acceptable
location with a minimum 3/4” raceway from the electrical box to the area above ceiling that is
accessible for cable pulling.
1) Manufacturer: Schlage Multi-technology readers MT15, MT11
i. MT15 - Proximity and Smart Card Reader mounted on single gang box.
ii. MT11- Proximity and Smart Card Reader mounted on narrow mullion
iii. Color: Black
b. Proximity and Smart Card readers are to be place 44” above finish floor to centerline of the
reader
1) Card Reader models shall be reviewed with TCCD on a per project basis as part of a
EACS design coordination meeting.
2) A HES#1006 Electric Strike (ES) with a minimum 3/4” raceway from the electric strike to
area above the ceiling that is accessible for cable pulling and strike faceplate.
9. The LenelS2 OnGuard 8.0 will provide, install and connect an adequate number of LenelS2
OnGuard 8.0 panels to accommodate all electronic access additions. Use of any existing spare
panels will be at the discretion of TCCD.
10. CONTROLLERS (no substitue).
11. Lenel Mercury Authentic Hardware or approved equal if approved by Owner.
12. Intelligent Dual Reader Controller (IDRC) LNL-X2220.
13. Dual Reader Interface Module (DRI) LNL-1320.
14. Batteries:n 12-volt minimum 7AH.
15. CONTROLER/READERS AND LIFESAFETY POWER PANEL (no substitute) LSP-24DRN-E12MWPA.
16. Lenel / LSP Pro Wire fully managed 24 door, dual voltage - LSP-24DRN-E12MWPA.
a. All ACUs and RREs will be mounted in a designated telecomunications room. The panels shall
be mounted so that the top of the panel is no higher than six (6) feet above the finished floor.
b. TCCD requires Lenel (most current model). TCCD furnishes a separate IP address for each
panel. ACUs will not be daisy-chained.
17. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
a. CONTROLLERS:
1) Access Control
2) Upstream Panels: Lenel Mercury Hardware
3) If conditions require style of panel, owner’s rep must approve.
b. Intrusion Detection.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 227
c. Input Panels: Input Control Module (ICM).
d. LNL-1100-S3
e. Output Board: Output Control Module (OCM)
f. LNL-1200-S3
g. Card Readers / Hardware
h. Reference Division 8 for all neccessary interfaces to card readers, AD and NDEB or LEB locks.
All of those to be provided by Division 28.
i. Securely mount all card readers using tamper-resistant fasteners.
j. Card readers shall completely cover any electrical back box. Provide trim plate at locations
where required.
k. Completely seal openings in exterior walls for outdoor mounted card readers to make weather
tight.
l. TCCD requires Lenel Remote Input Modules (RIM) or Remote Relay Modules (RRM).
18. ALL CABLING used in the installation of EACS equipment shall be Composite Cable.
a. Cabling from a Card Reader (CR) to the Telecom Room (TR) or Equipment Romm (ER) shall
be 8 conductor / 22AG / shielded. Conductor colors shall be green, blue, red, black, brown,
orange, white and silver (shield/drain). NO COLOR SUBSTITUTIONS.
b. Cabling from an electric strike (ES) to the TR shall be 2 conductor / 18 AWG at 200 feet
maximumn.
c. Cabling from a Power Supply (PS) to an Electrified Panic Device (EPD) shall be 2 conductor /
18 AWG at 200 feet maximum.
d. Cable from Power Supply / Panel minimum shall be 18 AWG for 200’, 16 AWG for 320’, 14
AWG for 500’, 12 AWG.
e. Card Reader Cabling: Black and Red, Green and White, Orange and Brown (3 pair 22 AWG).
f. Lock Power Cabling: Bblack, Red, White, Green (4C 18 AWG).
g. Request Exit: Black, White, Green (4C 22 AWG).
h. Door Contact: Black, Red (2C 22 AWG).
1.07 ELECTRONIC SURVEILLANCE AND OBSERVATION CAMERAS
A. Refer to Security Surveillance System (Appendix C, section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance)
B. Security Camera equipment will be acquired based on equipment specifications from OneIT Network
and Communications group. Physical location for installation will be based on architectural drawings
by designation based on TCCD’s Master Security Planning Documents.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for the acquisition, physicall installation, and powering up the device
to ensure that is is not in a DOA condition.
D. General Contractor shall be responsible for network cabling.
228 [Division 28] ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY/FIRE SYSTEMS
E. OneIT network engineers will review and accept installation as being complete at which time
ownership is transferred to TCCD.
F. For security purposes, ALL programing of the equipment will be the responsibility of the OneIT
Network and Communications team.
1.08 INTRUSION DETECTION
A. A door status switch shall be provided at each card reader controlled door, and other doors as
indicated by TCCD, to indicate open/closed status which will establish a basis for reporting a door-
propped or unauthorized entry condition.
1.09 PERSONAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS
A. Emergency Call Boxes and duress buttons shall be provided in strategic locations throughout new
building interior and exterior areas.
B. Interior Call Box – To be located in common areas such that a box or strobe light is visible from any
hallway location in the building.
1. Code Blue CB 6-p Wall-mount
a. Code Blue IP5000 FP1 Speakerphone
b. Unit: 3-1/2” Flushmount Finish: Black
c. Single Button w/EMERGENCY/EMERGENCIA Bezel Voltage: 24v
2. Code Blue S-1000 LED Beacon/Strobe and Remote Mount. Corridor phones shall be surface-
mounted except at Trinity River Campus where they shall be flush-mounted. On all phones, the
call button centerline shall be 48” above finished floor. Interior flush mount installations require a
custom fabricated trim ring which needs to be contractor furnished.
3. Corridor phones shall be surface-mounted except at Trinity River Campus where they shall be
flush-mounted. On all phones, the call button centerline shall be 48” above finished floor. Interior
flush mount installations require a custom fabricated trim ring which needs to be contractor
furnished.
C. Exterior Call Box – To be located in high traffic areas between buildings and around building
perimeter. Coordinate with Facilities for location assignment.
1. Code Blue CB 1-d Call Tower with custom TCCD Finish.
2. Code Blue Overhead Camera mount
3. Refer to Security Surveillance System (Appendix C, section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance) for
camera requirements.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 229
4. Code Blue CB 2-s Wall-mount with custom TCCD Finish.
5. Code Blue IP5000 FP1 Speakerphone (see applicable specifications for wall-mounted phone
above)
6. Bollards with parapet mounts need to be ordered separately.
7. A quad power outlet and a means of disconnect is required in each bollard
8. For communications, if run from the building is over 300 feet fiber is required, if under 300 feet
copper can be used, but surge protection is required. If fiber is used, a IE3000 switch is needed
in the bollard. Overcurrent protection needs to be contractor furnished, contractor installed.
9. Coordinate all camera selections and specifications with the TCCD Police Systems Administrator.
D. Duress Buttons – Duress Button requirements differ from building to building, coordinate with PD for
project specific requirements.
1.10 EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS
A. The standard physically built emergency notification system shall consist of networked Alertus
Technologies beacons located at public personal protection (Code Blue) stations within buildings.
Consult TCCD Real Estate and Facilities and Emergency Management Departments for more specific
requirements.
B. Standards for Alertus beacon mounting locations
1. TCCD Emergency Management has final review and approval of all alert beacon locations.
2. Stand alone alert beacons should be installed at a height of 48” A.F.F. to the center of the push
button, vertically.
3. Alert beacons installed above Code Blue phones should be mounted at a height of 60” A.F.F. to
the center of the device, vertically. Horizontally, the centerline of the Alertus device shall be the
same as the centerline of the Code Blue device.
4. For new construction and remodel projects, alert beacons should be installed at every interior
Code Blue phone except in classrooms.
5. Every occupied floor of every building needs at least one alert beacon.
6. Conference rooms and mixed used rooms with occupancy of over 75 persons need at least one
alert beacon.
7. The following areas need at least one alert beacon:
a. Within 100 feet of loading docks
b. Pools
c. Gymnasiums
230 [Division 28] ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY/FIRE SYSTEMS
d. Theaters
e. Libraries
f. Bookstores
g. Other large spaces with the potential for high occupancy such as cafeterias, eating areas,
sticky spaces and others.
8. Depending on building layout, additional alert beacons may need to be installed at points of
entry/egress or other high traffic areas.
9. For parking garages, an alert beacon should be installed inmediately outside of each entrance to
the building on each level.
10. The contact person at TCCD for this discipline:
W. Kirk Driver, CEM, TEM, MPA
Director | Emergency Management
Tarrant County College District | Office TRPG 1120B
300 Trinity Campus Circle | Fort Worth, TX 76102
817-515-1290 | Fax 817-515-0687
kirk.driver@tccd.edu | www.tccd.edu
1.11 NOT USED
1.12 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. GENERAL
1. As a design professional it is your responsibility to ensure code compliance, completeness,
and correctness of the design, cost estimate, and all engineering concepts and details of the
work. This responsibility includes the coordination of the various architectural, civil, structural,
mechanical, electrical, and other subdivisions with each other and with the specifications.
B. CODES AND STANDARDS
1. All Fire Alarm design shall be in accordance with the current edition of the following codes, as
applicable, and the editions, revisions, amendments, or supplements of applicable statutes,
ordinances, codes or regulations of Federal, State, and Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ). In addition, all fire alarm systems should be designed in accordance with FM Global Data
Sheets and use FM Approved components.
a. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
b. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code.
c. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code.
d. IFC – International Fire Code.
e. TAS – Texas Accessibility Standards.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 231
C. EQUIPMENT
1. Fire Alarm System – Notifier or Simplex to match existing. Coordinate exact system with TCCD.
D. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
1. DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
a. TCCD requires that the fire alarm infrastructure and substructure be designed and installed
in accordance with applicable codes and industry standards. Due to the unique physical
characteristics of many TCCD facilities, some technical design solutions are better suited than
others. These guidelines identify which design solutions are appropriate and approved for the
various types of buildings and areas in TCCD facilities. All fire alarm systems work shall be
reviewed and approved by local and state AHJs.
2. NEW CONSTRUCTION
a. All new TCCD construction projects shall contain a fire alarm system designed and installed in
accordance with the requirements of these guidelines.
3. RENOVATION TO EXISTING STRUCTURES
a. All existing TCCD facilities undergoing renovation or remodeling shall either, redesign the
existing fire alarm system to accommodate the new building configuration or design a new fire
alarm system if the building did not previously have a fire alarm system.
4. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WARRANTY AND CERTIFICATION
a. TCCD requires a warranty on all equipment, material and installation work included in the fire
alarm infrastructure of a project of at least one (1) year from project acceptance. In addition,
TCCD requires that 100% of the fire alarm infrastructure equipment and material installed be
field tested and certified by the system manufacturer’s representative at the designed and
intended performance level. The general contractor shall apply for and provide a certificate of
warranty from all vendors at the time of project acceptance.
5. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
a. Installation contractors must be manufacturer trained and certified resellers. The installation
contractor must be engaged in the normal business of installing fire alarm systems, and
licensed to operate in the State of Texas. All installation technicians must be familiar with the
codes, standards, and procedures required by this standard and must be manufacturer trained
and certified for installations.
E. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1. EQUIPMENT AND INFRASTRUCTURE FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
a. Underground conduits connecting separate buildings shall be a minimum of 36” below grade
and shall be separated from electrical conduits by a minimum of 36 inches. Underground
conduits carrying opposite legs of a Class-A circuit shall be separated by a minimum distance
of 6 feet.
b. Fire alarm wiring that is routed in exposed spaces shall be in conduit. At exposed ends of a
conduit a plastic bushing shall be provided to reduce cable abrasion.
232 [Division 28] ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY/FIRE SYSTEMS
c. Fire alarm wiring that is concealed in walls shall be in conduit, fire alarm wiring above ceilings
shall be and suspended in cable tray or by other TCCD approved cable support system. All
exposed cable shall be plenum rated. All fire alarm detection wiring shall be red in color,
notification device wiring shall be yellow and voice wiring shall be blue.
d. All conduits and cables that penetrate fire rated walls or floors must be fire stopped.
e. Fire alarm wiring in conduit shall have a minimum 3/4” conduit size.
2. DESIGN CRITERIA FOR PULLBOXES
a. Provide as required by code. Pull boxes used with fire alarm conduits shall be rated NEMA-1.
Pull boxes used in damp or wet locations such as plumbing chases or outside shall be rated
NEMA-3R. Pull boxes shall be installed in conduits at an interval no greater than every 100
feet. A pull box shall be installed in conduit runs whenever there are two 90° sweeps, or a total
of 180° of sweeps, in a conduit run.
3. VISUAL AND AUDIO/VISUAL DEVICES
a. The College District’s preference is to have ceiling mounted devices were possible where
a gypsum board or lay-in ceiling is present. Where there is no ceiling the preference is to
suspend the device from above with the device located at the same elevation as the bottom of
the room light fixtures, ductwork, etc.
b. Devices with an audio component shall be housed in a color impregnated plastic case.
All devices for a project shall be the same color and when the project is an expansion or
renovation the device color shall match the existing. The dB rating for the device shall meet
the requirements of NFPA-72 as applicable for the intended use.
c. Visual devices or combination audio/visual devices shall be housed in a color impregnated
plastic case. All devices for a project shall be the same color and when the project is an
expansion or renovation the device color shall match the existing. Each device shall have an
adjustable candela setting and shall be capable of strobe synchronization.
d. Addressable notification devices shall not be used, NACs (notification appliance circuits) shall
be Class-B.
4. SMOKE DETECTORS
a. Where required by the building and/or the fire code the building design shall include smoke
detectors. All smoke detectors shall be addressable type and where visible all devices shall
be the same manufacturer and model number. Smoke detector data SLCs (signaling line
circuits) shall be Class-A.
b. Locate all smoke detectors per code and in accordance with NFPA-72.
c. Air handler return air and, in some cases, supply air smoke detectors shall be provided as
required by mechanical and fire codes. The type of detector used for this application shall
be specifically designed for mechanically driven air stream use and shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
d. Where smoke detectors are not easily accessible for testing a remote, keyed, test switch shall
be provided.
5. HEAT DETECTORS
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 233
a. Locate all heat detectors per code and in accordance with NFPA-72..
6. ALTERNATIVE DETECTORS
a. Where a smoke or heat detector is required but building structure does not allow easy access
to the detector for maintenance (this is typically a height issue, such as an atrium) then other
types of detectors shall be utilized, such as beam detectors, VESDA system, etc.
7. FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
a. Fire alarm control panels for new construction or system replacements shall be Simplex
4100ES or Notifier NFS-3030, depending on project location, fully addressable with voice
command, Class-A system. Detector data SLCs (signaling line circuits), panel-to-panel
communication SLCs, and network voice command audio circuits shall all be Class-A.
b. The construction documents shall clearly indicate the location of the fire alarm control panel
and the remote annunciator panels.
8. IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
a. FIRE ALARM ADMINISTRATION
1) Administration of the fire alarm infrastructure includes documentation of cables,
termination hardware, facilities, conduits, and equipment.
2) All fire alarm devices and cables shall be clearly marked using permanent means. The
designation scheme must be consistent with the scheme in use on the campus where
the work is being performed or as directed by TCCD. The scheme shall be approved by
TCCD prior to use.
3) Point labeling (software programming) shall include the Campus, Building, Room
Number (or panel node for pseudo/software points), point type (smoke / heat detector,
pull station, flow / tamper switch, duct detector, etc.) and current point condition (alarm
/ trouble / supervisory / normal / etc). Programmer shall follow labeling scheme as
preferred and approved by TCCD.
4) Building partitioning, with per-point monitoring: As new buildings or un-partitioned
existing buildings are added to the fire alarm system, the contractor shall add a new
partition to the existing annual monitoring service contract. This additional monitoring
shall include reporting on a per-point basis, to allow each point to report its statuses
individually.
5) Device color with the architect.
6) As-Built drawings shall graphically document the installed fire alarm infrastructure
through floor plans and elevations as needed to show device and panel locations.
7) TCCD shall be provided as-built pdf files and AutoCAD files at the completion of each
project.
END OF DIVISION
234 [Division 31] EARTHWORK
1.01 GENERAL
Division 31 Earthwork is reserved for future use. The design team shall coordinate with TCCD to
establish minimum performance requirements for all items within this Chapter as defined by CSI
Master Format 2004. The minimum performance standards are to be developed on a per project basis
and reviewed with TCCD prior to the issue of construction documents for bidding or permitting.
END OF DIVISION
Earthwork31
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 23508/22/2024[Division 32] EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Exterior Improvements32
1.01 SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN
A. If requested by TCCD, the Design Professional will be required to assist in the siting of the project.
The Design Professional must visit the proposed site, evaluate possible building or site improvement
locations, and discuss any problems regarding siting with TCCD before commencing the design
process. The Design Professional may recommend building or site improvement arrangements
differing from those shown in the program requirements if conditions warrant.
B. The Design Professional’s building design, approach, and access should be developed with
consideration to its relationship to other nearby immovable objects such as buildings, natural
outcroppings, hardscape, open spaces and landscaping. Careful attention should be given to building
entrances and their effect on pedestrian traffic patterns, as well as to service drives and loading dock
locations. Every effort should be made to coordinate any proposed design with the TCCD Campus
Master Plan.
C. It is the intent of the District that all future site improvements shall include features that enhance the
security and safety of users and facilities and may also incorporate the Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design (LEED) design criteria. Materials with lower life cycle costs shall be utilized in
all designs submitted.
1.02 SITE DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Building Entry, Walks, Steps, and Ramps.
1. All entrances to buildings shall be ADA accessible with a clearly delineated hierarchy.
2. Sidewalk minimum widths below unless otherwise specified by TCCD:
a. Minimum width- 6 feet.
b. Inner-campus width- 10 feet with radius at intersection.
c. Service width- 4 feet.
3. New walkways should be carefully planned and connect major destinations with a pedestrian safe,
accessible, and relatively direct means of travel. Walkways should be clearly indicated on the
schematic design site plan. Special consideration should be given to pedestrian paths crossing
vehicular routes. In areas where pedestrian path dominates, continue paving materials across the
vehicular route. All crosswalks shall be of a different paving material than that used for a vehicular
route. Enhanced lighting shall be provided at pedestrian crosswalks to optimize pedestrian safety.
4. Parking shall be provided as required by all codes and ordinances governing the specific project
location, and in coordination with TCCD. Parking stalls stripe colors are as follow: Yellow for
faculty/staff, White for students, White/Blue for Handicap, Blue for visitors, Red for motorcycles
and White striping for service areas.
5. Parking shall also be provided for emergency, delivery, and service vehicles. Proposed design
improvements shall minimize the need for service and delivery vehicles to operate in inner
236
campus areas to enhance pedestrian safety.
6. Fixed elements within the landscape should be designed for ease of maintenance. Suggest no 90º
corners.
7. Provide surface materials that require minimal maintenance under low overhangs or elevated
walkways.
8. Roof drains shall incorporate best management practices in diverting storm water. Such best
management practices are but not limited to: use of bio-retention areas, rain gardens, swales,
cisterns and the storm sewer system. Federal, state and local regulations require that a Storm
Water Management Plan is in place and filed with the governing agencies.
9. Maximum slope for banks is 3:1 (Horizontal : Vertical). Use 4:1 or less where possible. Preserve
the natural inclination of existing features as much as possible. (i.e. creek beds, outcrops)
10. Lighting layouts shall be coordinated with landscape architecture and designed to increase
pedestrian safety and security and minimize light pollution.
11. Provide for protection of existing plant material during construction. Reference this chapter.
12. Submit site plan showing layout of new site utilities to TCCD.
13. The use of exposed wood as an expansion joint filler is not acceptable in sidewalks, flatwork and
or building slabs.
1.03 LANDSCAPE
A. GENERAL LANDSCAPE REQUIREMENTS
1. The landscape is a critical element to the image of the college. Landscape guidelines are intended
to aid in the preparation of landscape documents. Designs shall integrate buildings into their
surroundings, unify elements of the campus, create pedestrian interest and atmosphere, frame
and focus views, break up long building elevations, and provide screening for roadways, parking
and service areas.
2. In general, as a minimum, all plantings along public roadways shall be in accordance with local
landscape ordinances. Landscape plans shall be prepared by a landscape architect registered in
the State of Texas.
3. The designs shall provide minimized life cycle costs.
4. All planting is to be completed no later than three (3) months after issuance of a certificate of
occupancy for the relevant building or site improvement. If delays occur that are caused by
weather or seasonable unavailability of plant materials, planting may be completed within the next
planting season provided that approval of TCCD is obtained.
5. Landscape plans shall be reviewed by TCCD before construction documents are issued.
B. LANDSCAPE CHARACTER
1. Landscape character shall reflect both elements of its natural and built environment. Such
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 23708/22/2024[Division 32] EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
character shall incorporate native and adapted plantings and use hardscape materials that require
the least maintenance and are environmentally friendly.
C. EXISTING VEGETATION
1. Existing vegetation may consist of trees, shrubs or groundcover. Where appropriate, and as
approved by TCCD, existing shrubs and groundcover may be reused. If existing trees, shrubs
and groundcover are reused in the proposed landscape, they shall be moved, and protected in
accordance with the latest version of the “American Standards for Nursery Stock”, as published
by the American Nursery and Landscape Association. If the existing vegetation is not to be
used in proposed project, efforts should be made to give TCCD the opportunity to reuse viable
vegetation elsewhere.
D. INTRODUCED VEGETATION
1. All introduced vegetation shall be nursery grown container stock except field selected specimen
material. Nursery grown and field selected stock and the planting methods shall conform to the
latest version of the “American Standards for Nursery Stock”.
2. All plant material shall conform to the following minimum sizes and spacing in accordance to
species natural mature size and landscape use at the time of installation, unless otherwise
specified.
3. All plant material shall conform to the following minimum sizes and maximum spacing at the time
of installation, unless otherwise specified:
a. Shade Tree – 3” caliper or larger
b. Evergreen Tree – 6’ to 10’ height.
c. Ornamental Tree – 2” caliper, 8’ to 12’ height.
d. Evergreen Shrubs – 24” min. height and spread.
e. Broadleaf Evergreen Shrubs – 24” min. height and spread.
f. Low Spreading Shrubs – 18” min. height and spread.
g. Groundcover – 1 gallon, 18” O.C. max. spacing.
h. Groundcover – 4” pot, 10” O.C. max. spacing.
i. Vines – 1 gallon minimum.
j. Ornamental Grasses and Perennials – 4” pots – 10” OC max. spacing. Small variety – 1
gallon, 24” max spacing. Medium to Large varieties, 3 gallon, 36” O.C. max spacing.
k. Seasonal Color Plantings – 1 gallon, 14” O.C. max. spacing / 4” pot, 10” O.C. max. spacing.
l. Lawn areas shall be hydro mulched or sodded using drought tolerant turfgrass varieties.
Solid sod shall be used in high image areas adjacent to and around the building or other
highly visible areas. TCCD may determine the most appropriate locations for sod on a given
development.
238
E. INTRODUCED VEGETATION– RECOMMENDED PLANT
*Native to DFW area **Native to Texas
1. SHADE TREES
Common Name Botanical Name
Live Oak* Quercus viginiana
Shumard Oak* Quercus shumardii
Chinkapin Oak* Quercus muehlenbergii
Bur Oak* Quercus macrocarpa
Cedar Elm* Ulmus crassifolia
Winged Elm* Ulmus alata
Lacebark Elm Ulmus parvifolia
Bald Cypress* Taxodium distichum (large turf and non hardscape areas)
Pecan* Carya illionenensis (Park setting only, fruit staining)
Sawtooth Oak Quercus acutissima
Western Soapberry* Sapindus drummondii
Chinese Pistache Pistacia chinensis
2. EVERGREEN TREES
Common Name Botanical Name
Yaupon Holly* Ilex vomitoria
Wax Myrtle* Myrica cerifera
Holly Ilex species
Hollywood Juniper Juniperus chinensis ‘Torulosa’
Leyland Cypress Cupressocyparis leylandii
Eldarica Pine Pinus eldarica
Austrian Pine Pinus nigra
Japanese Black Pine Pinus thunbergii
Slash Pine Pinus elliotii
Savannah Holly Ilex x attenuate ‘Savannah’
Oak Leaf Holly Ilex hybrid ‘Conaf’
Wax Myrtle Myrica cerifera
Magnolia Magnolia Spp (limited to open areas)
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 23908/22/2024[Division 32] EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
3. ORNAMENTAL TREES
Common Name Botanical Name
Crape myrtle Lagerstroemia indica
Possum Haw* Ilex decidua
Eastern Redbud* Cercis canadensis var. canadensis
Texas Redbud* Cercis canadensis var. texensis
Forest Pansy Redbud Cercis canadensis var. canadensis ‘Forest Pansy’
Rusty Blackhaw* Viburnum rufidulum
Carolina Buckthorn* Rhamnus caroliniana
Texas Buckeye* Aesculus glabra ‘Arguta’
Mexican Buckeye* Ungnadia speciosa
Texas Mountain Laurel* Sophora secundiflora
Flameleaf Sumac* Rhus lanceolata
Mexican Plum* Prunus mexicana
Eve’s Necklace* Sophora affinis
Texas Persimmon* Diospyros texana
4. EVERGREEN SHRUBS
Common Name Botanical Name
Shore Juniper Juniperus conferta
Sea Green Juniper Juniperus x pfitzeriana
Japanese Garden Juniper Juniperus procumbens
Bar Harbor Juniper Juniperus horizontalis ‘Bar Harbor’
5. BROADLEAF EVERGREEN SHRUBS
Common Name Botanical Name
Dwarf Burford Holly Ilex cornuta ‘Burfordi Nana’
Indian Hawthorn Rhaphiolepis indica ‘Jack Evans’
Dwarf Indian Hawthorn Rhaphiolepis indica ‘Enchantress’
Barberry Berberis atropurpurea
Elaeagnus Elaeagnus macrophylla ‘Ebbenji’
Nellie R. Stevens Holly Ilex ‘Nellie R. Stevens’
Dwarf Yaupon Holly* Ilex vomitoria ‘nana’
Dwarf Nandina Nandina domestica ‘nana’
Cenizo or Texas Sage* Leucophyllum frutescens
Abelia Abelia grandiflora
Smooth Sumac* Rhus glabra
Indigobush* Amorpha fruticosa
Aromatic Sumac* Rhus aromatic
Yucca or Spanish Dagger* Yucca species
Dwarf Loropetalum Loropetalum chinese var. rubrum
240
6. GROUND COVER
Common Name Botanical Name
Asian Jasmine Trachelospermum asiaticum
Purple Wintercreeper Euonymus fortunei ‘Coloratus’
Liriope Liriope muscari ‘Big Blue’, ‘Spicata’ or ‘Giant’
Mondo Grass Ophiopogon japonicum
Louisana Artemesia* Artemesia ludoviciana
Horseherb* Calyptocarpus
7. VINES
Common Name Botanical Name
Boston Ivy Partenocissus tricuspidata
Virginia Creeper* Partenocissus quinquefolia
Coral Honeysuckle* Lonicera sempervirens
Carolina Jessamine* Gelsemium sempervirens
Cross Vine Bignonia capreolata
Trumpet Vine Campsis radicans
8. ORNAMENTAL GRASSES AND PERENNIALS
Common Name Botanical Name
Gulf Muhly* Muhlenbergia capillaris
Lindheimer Muhly** Muhlenbergia lindheimeri
Indiangrass* Sorghastrum nutans
Mexican Feathergrass** Stipa tenuissima
Texas Lantana* Lantana horrid
Buffulo Grass* Buchloe dactyloides
Little Bluestem* Schizachyrium scoparium
Side Oats Grama* Bouteoua curtipendula
Inland Sea Oats* Chasmanthium latifolium
Switchgrass* Panicum virgatum
Frangrant or Prairie Phlox* Phlox pilosa
Scarlet Sage** Salvia coccinea
Mealy Blue Sage* Salvia farinacea
Gregg Salvia Salvia greggii
Purple Fountaingrass Pennisetum setaceum ‘Rubrum’***
Red Flowering Yucca** Hesperaloe parvifolia
Purple Three-awn Aristida purpurea
Butterflyweed* Asclepias tuberose
Calylophus* Calylophus spp.
Purple Coneflower* Echinacea pallida
Cutleaf Daisy* Engelmannia pinnatifida
Wild Ageratum* Eupatorium coelestinum
Halberleaf Hibiscus* Hibiscus laevis
Cardinal Flower* Lobelia cardinalis
Gayfeather* Liatris mucronata
Obedient Plant* Physostegia intermedia
White Milkwort* Polygala alba
***To be considered an annual
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 24108/22/2024[Division 32] EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
F. LANDFORMS
1. Use of landforms is encouraged. Safety, security, visual interest, and storm water control are
reasons to use landforms.
2. Berms, mounds and slopes should have a maximum slope of 5:1 while swales should have a
minimum slope between 2% and 5%. Landforms shall be proportionately sized to site and its
relationship to adjacent objects. Exceptions to minimum and maximum slope gradients are to be
used in areas that require mitigation of visual and physical impacts to adjacent properties or open
space. Maintainability shall always be considered during design.
3. All land forms shall be shown on the grading plan with contours and appropriate spot grades.
G. SITE ENTRY TREATMENTS
1. Entrance drives provide direct vehicular access to building entrances and parking facilities.
Entrance drives are important image setters for TCCD, and special paving, landscaping and
accent lighting are encouraged.
2. Entrance drives shall be designed to provide clear and direct access to buildings and parking
areas. Parking directly off of entrance drives shall be minimized and restricted to visitor and short
term parking.
3. Buildings and parking shall be set back a minimum of 30’ from any entrance drive.
4. Special landscape treatments should be provided at parcel and building lot entrances to define
entrances and signage areas. Adequate site distances shall be maintained in accordance with
accepted traffic standards.
H. PEDESTRIAN CIRCULATION AND PAVING
1. Pedestrian walkways are required to link buildings, drop-off zones, parking facilities, and open
spaces. Pedestrian walkway connections shall be planned and implemented to provide logical
pedestrian route between all significant facilities on the campus.
2. Walkways, plazas and courtyards are encouraged to use special paving materials such as
permeable paving, exposed aggregate concrete, integral colored or stained concrete, brick,
concrete pavers, or flagstone.
3. Special paving materials shall be selected for compatibility with the architecture and for quality,
durability, ease of maintenance, and minimal long term environmental impact. Special paving
shall NOT be set on an aggregate base. Specialty paving shall be installed on a reinforced
concrete base of an appropriate thickness for the intended use.
I. SCREENING
To maintain the visual character of the campus it will be necessary to screen unsightly functions.
Screening to be provided per local jurisdiction.
242
1. SERVICE AREAS: Loading and delivery areas should be located to the rear or sides of buildings
to minimize visibility and interaction with visitors and students. Where service areas and loading
areas cannot be integrated into the building envelope, preferred methods of screening include
landscape, gated and depressed service areas, wing walls and perimeter walls. Walls for
screening shall be constructed of the same materials as the main building. Plant material should
be selected for screening views of service areas from ground level as well as from upper floors
of adjacent buildings. Dumpsters and compactors placed independently of buildings must be
screened from public view. The height of the screen must be a minimum of six (6) inches above
the highest part of the dumpster or compactor with a minimum height of eight (8) feet. All means
of screening must be approved by TCCD.
2. EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT: All ground mounted service equipment (i.e., switch-gear, transformers,
HVAC equipment, communications pedestals, etc.) related to the building shall be located in
enclosed, screened service areas with the required minimum equipment access and maintenance
clearance.
3. PARKING: All surface parking adjacent to public or private streets shall be screened from view
of those streets by a minimum 4’ height screen. The screen can be accomplished by land forms,
evergreen plant material or a combination of the two. If plant material is used, the plants must
be mature size appropriate to site without extensive pruning to keep it in bounds. At the time of
installation, plants shall be of significant size to partially screen 50% of the parking from view and
within 3 years, 90 to 100% of the parking.
J. IRRIGATION AND WATER MANAGEMENT
1. Landscape irrigation is a tool for the successful cultivation of landscape plantings. The irrigation
system should be thought of as a landscape water management tool. The irrigation system shall
be designed to accommodate the variety of plant materials and water sources that may be used.
2. Accommodation shall be made in the irrigation design for drought tolerant and native species that
will require less frequent watering than introduced or exotic species.
3. The landscape irrigation plans shall be designed in close coordination with the planting design.
An irrigator, or qualified Landscape Architect licensed in the State of Texas shall prepare the
irrigation plans. The irrigation submittal shall include a proposed water management plan, which
describes the design approach with regard to the various plant species and the related proposed
use of the irrigation water as appropriate to site and is approved by TCCD. The following: Shall
be considered and incorporated in the design:
a. Zoned by:
1) Turf Area Type 1 - Small areas less than 8 feet in width or length, which shall be irrigated
via sub surface drip irrigation
2) Turf Area Type 2 – Moderate areas 8 feet to 25 feet in width or length which shall be
irrigated via spray heads or stream rotor heads.
3) Turf Area Type 3 – Large and open areas of turf greater than 26 feet in width or length
which shall be irrigated via rotor heads.
4) Planter Bed Areas – which shall be irrigated via surface or sub-surface irrigation.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 24308/22/2024[Division 32] EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
5) Within each category of zones described in types A through D, consideration shall be
made to slopes, aspect, shade, and plant type that affect the water needs of a given
area.
b. To limit the stock items required by TCCD, the following equipment shall be utilized in the
design:
1) Controller – TCCD exclusively uses Baseline Controls. Controllers will be Baseline 3200
seriesand Baseline Substations (conventional and two wire wiring is acceptable). The
controller shall include rain mositure sensors, rain bucket and associated bi-coders.
2) Points of connection – Any new point of connection for a project shall utilize a BERMAD
410, normally closed, master valve. Flow meter to be Master Meter Ocave Ultrasonic.
3) Pipe – PVC class 200 pipe, purple for reclaimed water shall be used. ¾” pipe is the
minimum size allowed.
4) Quick Couplers – 1” Rainbird model with purple cap located only near annual color
beds.
5) Isolating Valves – Spears ball valves in 10” round valve box with purple cover and of the
same size as the main line.
6) System Valves – Hunter ICV series with purple handle
7) Valve Boxes – Plastic with purple covers. Label all valves per TCCD instruction.
8) Rotors – Hunter I-series with nozzles identified to rates with purple cap.
9) Spray Heads – Hunter pro series with check valve, pressure compensation, and purple
caps
i. 30 psi pressure regulation for spray nozzles
ii. 40 psi pressure regulation for rotor nozzles
10) Swing Joints – Spray heads shall utilize “funny pipe” with barbed connections. Rotors
shall utilize PVC mechanical swing joints.
11) Drip Irrigation:
i. Valves – Hunter ICZ series valve / filter assemblies
ii. Drip Line – Rainbird XFSP copper shield
• Turf: .9 GPH emitters on 12” row spacing and 12” emitter spacing (12”x12”)
determined by slope, soil type and aspect.
• Beds: .9 GPH emitters in 12” row spacing and 12” emitter spacing (12”x12”)
determined by slope, soil type and aspect.
iii. Flush – Barbed manual ball valve in 6” round valve box with purple cap.
iv. Air Release – Rainbird model in 6” round valve box with purple cap.
12) Thrust Blocking: shall be shown for systems with 3” or larger main lines.
13) Glue / Primer: All other shall utilize colored primer and glue most conducive to the
application and time of year the system is installed.
END OF DIVISION
244 [Division 33] UTILITIES
Utilities33
1.01 GENERAL DESIGN GUIDELINES
A. If site design is required as a part of the project scope, for TCCD shall be consulted regarding existing
studies or master plans that have been performed and may be applicable to the project. Information
provided by TCCD is for informational purposes and shall be confirmed by the design professional.
Studies that may exist could include, but are not limited to:
1. Campus master plan / Institutional Plan
2. Traffic Impact Analysis
3. Wastewater studies or master plans
4. Water studies or master plans
5. Stormwater or flood studies
6. Reports relating to Urban Forestry
7. Tree studies (or surveys)
B. If site improvements that may affect parking, traffic generation or traffic flow are proposed as a part
of the project, the need for a traffic impact analysis shall be evaluated. If an existing traffic impact
analysis does not exist for the project, one may be required to meet the requirements of the AHJ. The
design team shall advise TCCD of the need for a new traffic impact analysis as soon as the need is
discovered.
C. Prior to the start of design on any project that includes site improvements or building expansion,
existing site conditions shall be evaluated. This evaluation shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1. Existing campus information as provided by TCCD
2. Observe existing site condition
3. FEMA flood limits
4. Zoning restrictions
5. General topography
6. Landscape Architecture discussion
7. Existing site utility plans including availability of water, wastewater and storm drainage
infrastructure to serve the site (acquire as-built drawings and locator maps from TCCD and the
AHJ, as available)
8. Availability of franchise utility service (gas, power, phone, cable, telecommunication, fiber, etc…)
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 245
9. Access and availability of various TCCD managed utility networks including telephone, fiber,
electrical, and gas, heating water, or chilled water.
10. Existing easements and rights of way
11. Site access and traffic flow
12. Need for off-site private or public utility improvements
D. If available, a pre-development meeting shall be scheduled with the AHJ prior to the start of design.
E. The need for a preliminary geotechnical report prepared by a licensed geotechnical engineer shall
be evaluated prior to the start of design. If needed, this report could include the evaluation of
existing sub-surface soil conditions as it relates to the proposed project. The architect and structural
engineer (as applicable) shall be consulted as to what will be required from the geotechnical engineer
for their design. Relating to site development, the following items shall be included in the report:
1. Pavement recommendations including subgrade preparation and compaction, pavement
thickness, and reinforcement for:
a. parking areas
b. fire lanes
c. truck drives (if applicable to project)
d. dumpster pads (if applicable to project)
2. Utility embedment and backfill requirements
3. Site grading requirements
4. Fill compaction and moisture content requirements
5. Additional information as needed for public improvements that may be required for the specific
project. Local requirements shall be met for these items.
6. Additional information as needed for structural engineer to design retaining walls, light pole
bases, monument signs, and other site structures.
7. Shallow groundwater and bedrock depths exist throughout the campus. These depths shall be
evaluated on a project specific basis.
F. If necessary, as a result of the site evaluation of FEMA flood limits or site evaluation, a civil engineer
specializing in hydraulics and hydrology shall be contracted to prepare a flood study and/or process
any revisions or amendments to existing flood maps through FEMA.
1.02 UTILITY INFRASTRUCTURE
A. All public utilities shall be designed to the standards set forth by the AHJ.New utility services should
be avoided; tie into existing utility networks/systems. Exceptions must be justified utilizing life cycle
analysis accounting for first cost, utility and maintenance recurring cost over a minimum 30-year term.
246 [Division 33] UTILITIES
B. Provide GPS coordinates for all utilities including top-of–pipe elevation before trenching is closed.
C. All piping and materials used in utility projects must be domestically manufactured.
D. Underground detectable marking tape shall be installed directly above all utility lines. Tape shall
be buried a minimum of 1’ above the top of the utility, but no deeper than the tape manufacturer’s
maximum depth. Tape shall be rated for direct bury and permanently printed with language identifying
the utility on a tape color in compliance with the American Public Works Association (APWA) color
code. Tape shall have a solid aluminum foil core making it detectable with a non-ferrous locator.
Tape is to be installed per industry standards and manufacturer’s requirements.
E. All private utilities shall use the following criteria and shall be design by the civil design engineer up
to a point of demarcation as directed by TCCD and coordinated with the building engineer. All site
storm water / flood / utilities for fire protection should be designed in accordance with FM Global Data
sheets and use FM Approved components when available.
1. Water
a. Public water mains shall be tapped and metered in accordance with the requirements of the
AHJ.
b. All water design shall be performed in accordance with previously prepared campus water
studies, if applicable.
c. Waterline size at the building face shall be determined by plumbing engineer and based
on plumbing code. The specific edition of the plumbing code that is to be used shall be in
compliance with the AHJ.
d. The civil design engineer shall research the requirements of the AHJ to determine whether
private utilities are required to be installed by a licensed plumber. If this is the case, the civil
design engineer shall note on the construction documents that the utility shall be installed by
a licensed plumber.
e. All private water lines 4” and larger shall be PVC C900, DR18, Class 150 unless otherwise
directed by TCCD.
f. Fire protection services shall be PVC C900, DR14, Class 200 and SDR21 (4” and smaller within
five feet of the building perimeter) installed in accordance with the design and specifications
of the fire protection plans which are to be prepared by a licensed fire protection engineer.
Reference plumbing and fire protection sections for additional requirements.
g. Private water lines shall meet plumbing code requirements
h. All private water lines shall have a minimum cover of 24” below finished grade with a preferred
depth of 36” cover. Any waterline designed with less than 36” cover shall receive specific
approval from TCCD.
i. All meter boxes must be located in non-traffic areas.
j. All water valves (located in both paved and unpaved areas) shall be installed with a 24”
square concrete collar at grade. The top of valve shall be placed 1” above adjacent pavement
and the collar shall match the top of valve elevation and slope to match the adjacent pavement
grade to allow for drainage away from the top of valve. In traffic areas, the pavement section
used for the concrete collar shall match the adjacent pavement section. Every valve box shall
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 247
be labelled using Berntsen stainless steel tags recessed into the concrete collar; coordinate
with TCCD for utility type, flow arrow and numbering convention.
2. Wastewater
a. Public wastewater mains shall be tapped in accordance with the requirements set forth by the
AHJ
b. The need for wastewater metering shall be evaluated on a project by project basis.
c. All wastewater design shall be prepared in accordance with previously prepared campus
studies.
d. Pipe size at building connection shall be determined by the building engineer based on
plumbing code.
e. The civil design engineer shall research the requirements of the AHJ to determine whether
private utilities are required to be installed by a licensed plumber. If this is the case, the civil
design engineer shall note on the construction documents that the utility shall be installed by
a licensed plumber.
f. Private wastewater services must meet plumbing code requirements. The specific edition of
the plumbing code that is to be used shall be in compliance with the AHJ.
g. All private wastewater pipe shall be PVC SDR-28 unless otherwise directed by TCCD.
h. All private wastewater pipe joints shall be gasketed.
i. Cleanouts shall be provided at all bends, wyes, and at a maximum spacing of 80’ along the
private wastewater alignment.
j. Double cleanouts shall be provided at a point no greater than 5’ from the face of the building
at a point where the site plumbing and building plumbing connect.
k. A manhole with minimum diameter of 48” shall be provided at any junction of three (3) or
more wastewater pipes.
l. Manholes are to be installed where rim elevation is 1” above adjacent finished grade and
have a square concrete collar that provides a minimum clear distance of 24” from the outer
rim of the manhole lid to the edge of the collar. The concrete collar elevation shall match the
manhole rim elevation and slope to match the adjacent pavement grade to allow for drainage
away from the top of manhole. In traffic areas, the pavement section used for the concrete
collar shall match the adjacent pavement section.
3. Storm Water
a. Storm water requirements set forth by the AHJ shall be followed.
b. All storm sewer design shall be prepared in accordance with previously prepared applicable
campus studies.
c. Storm sewer shall be designed to be adaptable for future development within the watershed.
d. Needs for improvements such as detention or offsite storm drain improvement shall be
248 [Division 33] UTILITIES
determined based on the requirements of the AHJ.
e. Storm drain lines may be of the following materials and installed in accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications:
1) RCP C-76, Class III
2) ADS N-12
3) Schedule 40 PVC
f. All roof drains shall be connected to an on-site storm drainage system through underground
storm drain. Exceptions can be made on a project by project basis for reasons related to
sustainability goals for the project. All exceptions must be approved by TCCD.
g. Manufacturers for area drains and inlets shall be specified by the civil design engineer. All
area drains and inlets shall be constructed of reinforced concrete and all grates shall be made
of cast iron.
h. If detention is required for the project, the pond shall be designed to where there is no
standing water in the bottom of the pond. The pond outfall shall be placed at the lowest
elevation in the pond and shall be sized to meet city requirements. A 4-foot wide pilot channel
shall be constructed at the flow line of all detention ponds with a minimum slope of 0.5% to
promote complete drainage of the pond and aid TCCD in maintenance. Detention pond side
slopes shall be designed with a minimum side slope conducive to being mowed by machine.
4. Natural Gas
a. Natural gas infrastructure shall be designed and installed per plumbing code (private) or AHJ
requirements (public/franchise).
b. Gas lines shall have minimum cover of 36”
c. Natural gas valves shall be concrete-collared and labelled (see water valve box labeling) and
shall havetracer stations located every 200 linear feet along their runs across the site.
5. Electrical Power
a. Public/franchise electrical power networks shall be designed based on the requirements set
forth by the AHJ. b.c. Natural gas valves shall be concrete-collared and labelled (see water
valve box labeling) and shall havetracer stations located every 200 linear feet along their runs
across the site.
b. Private electrical power infrastructure shall be placed in PVC conduit and concrete encased
with red-dyed 6” concrete caps over a chat bed eveloping the conduit. The number of and
size of conduits shall be determined by the design team.
c. Electrical power infrastructure shall have minimum cover of 42”.
d. Manhole and pull box spacing shall be determined by the design team. Manholes and
pullboxes shall be labelled per TCCD instruction.
6. Telecommunications
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 249
a. Public/franchise telecommunications facilities shall be designed based on the requirements
set forth by TCCD.
b. Private telecommunications infrastructure shall be placed in PVC conduits with pull box
spacing as determined by the design team.
c. Telecommunications infrastructure shall have minimum cover of 24”.
1. Chilled/Heating Water
a. Chilled and hot water distribution systems shall be designed per mechanical code
requirements. Chilled and hot water lines shall have minimum cover of 42”.
b. Pre-insulated piping systems shall be Thermocor. Piping material shall be selected
1.01 PAVEMENT
A. Design
1. All pavement shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise approved by TCCD.
a. Concrete sections shall be based on recommendations provided by the geotechnical
report prepared for the project. Alternate recommendations should be requested from the
geotechnical engineer to substitute additional pavement thickness for expensive sub-grade
preparation such as lime or cement stabilization.
2. Curbs and wheel stops
a. The curb and gutter shall be integral with the pavement and have the same compressive
strength.
b. The need for concrete wheel stops shall be evaluated where concrete curbs are not desired or
cannot be provided.
3. Pavement sections and subgrade preparation shall be based on recommendations from the
preliminary geotechnical report
4. Dumpster pads and enclosures (if required) shall be designed by a structural engineer
a. Heavy duty reinforced concrete (as recommended by geotechnical report) shall be placed
40’ in front of the dumpster pads to accommodate increased loads by the trash trucks when
loading and unloading. The heavy duty pavement shall be equal to the width of the dumpster
pad.
5. Reference landscape standards for enhanced concrete and allowable paver materials.
6. Unless otherwise specified, expansion joint spacing shall be 90’ maximum each way with no
keyways and sawed dummy joints shall be 15’ each way.
7. When there is a need to remove and replace pavement for repair or utility construction, entire
panels (to saw cut lines) shall be removed and replaced, unless otherwise directed.
250 [Division 33] UTILITIES
B. Geometry
1. Parking
a. Minimum drive lane width in parking areas shall be 24’ (for angled or head-in parking).
b. Parking geometry shall meet local off-street parking guidelines, if applicable. If no such
standards exist, geometry shall be approved by TCCD.
c. Accessible parking space count, size, and slope shall meet current accessibility requirements.
2. Speed bumps
a. Where it is determined that speed bumps are desired, they shall be cast in place.
END OF DIVISION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 108/22/2024[Appendix A]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The attached are components of this section:
1. Technical Design Guidelines, Division 07, sections 1.10-1.13.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The information contained in this Appendix represent the Owner’s preferences and policies and are
meant to supplement the Design Professional’s project specifications. This information does not relive
the Design Proffesional or Contractor of any responsibilites or from performing his/her due diligence
regarding the project. Any discrepancies between this information and the Design Professional shall
be brought up to the Owner in a timely manner.
B. This Appendix covers general requirements and information for the following:
1. Performance Requirements.
2. Submittals.
3. Quality Assurance.
4. Delivery, Storage and Handling.
5. Project Conditions.
6. Substitutions.
7. Warranty.
8. Roofing membrane.
9. Flashing materials.
10. Roof insulation.
11. Auxiliary roofing membrane materials.
12. General installation requirements.
13. Carpentry.
14. Field Quality Control.
15. Daily Waterstop / Tie-ins.
New Roof Performance RequirementsAAPPENDIX
2
16. Protecting and Cleaning.
C. The refer to Design Professional’s Specifications for related sections not covered in this Appendix or
TDG’s such as:
1. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
2. Manufactured Roof Curbs and Portals.
3. Roof Hatches.
4. Miscellaneous roof components such as euipment screen walls, intake / exhaust fans and others.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA’s “The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual” for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide and install roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not
permit the passage of water through the top layer; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally
induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure for at least the term of the warranty.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
C. Wind Up-lift Requirements: Provide a roofing system that is identical to systems that have been
successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist wind uplift pressures
calculated according to the latest version of ASCE-7. Verify that wind uplift pressures for this area is
based on a 3-second gust of 90 miles per hour.
D. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with
requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FMG’s
“Approval Guide” for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with
FMG markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. (may change depending on roof height and other
factors)
2. Hail Resistance: VSH.
3. FM 1-28 Loss Prevention Data Sheet.
4. FM 1-29 Loss Prevention Data Sheet.
5. FM 1-49 Loss Prevention Data Sheet.
E. The standards contained in this section, division and related sections are applicable for new
roofs. Roof design and work on existing roofs shall be coordinated with TCCD and shall conform
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 308/22/2024[Appendix A]
to standards required by the specific existing roof system’s manufacturer to prevent voiding the
wartranty. Roofing systems and manufacturers are to be approved by TCCD and shall be specified as
long as they are VSH rated roofs per RoofNav.
F. Other regulatory requirements:
1. Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc.(UL) rating: New Roof System shall be classified by UL 90 as a
“Class A” rated roof covering.
2. Wind Uplift: System shall meet the minimum Wind Uplift per ASCE 7 (per governing building code)
for approved assembly and specified warranty coverage.
3. Roof System Reflectance / Emittance:
a. Minimum Reflectance (3 year aged) 0.55 and Thermal Emittance (3 year aged) of 0.75; or
b. Minimum SRI (3 year aged): 64.
4. Follow local, state and federal requirements, safety standards and codes.
5. Refer to applicable building codes for roofing system installation requirements and limitations.
When conflict exists, the most restrictive document will govern.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The design professional shall outline what is required of the contractor when providing roofing
submittals in the project specifications. In addition, the following submittals shall be required:
1. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,
authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.
2. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies
with requirements specified in “Performance Requirements” Article.
3. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
4. Material manufacturer’s approval/acceptance of the specifications and details as written or noted
for this project, fastener pattern layout to meet building uplift design pressures, fasteners, related
material data sheets, and in accordance with ASCE 7.
5. Roofing System Letter - Tested Assembly: Provide a letter from the primary roofing material
manufacturer stating that the roofing system (from deck up) and (as submitted) is a tested
roofing assembly meeting the specified performance requirements for wind uplift. The letter
shall specifically include applicable fastener patterns and supporting data clearly illustrating
conformance to performance requirements for wind uplift.
6. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
4
7. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of components and complete roof system based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by the manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified
testing agency.
8. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system.
9. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
10. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
11. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer’s written and photographic inspection
report conducted each week during roof installation.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Refer to Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Have experience in roofing for a minimum of five (5) years.
2. Contractors must be Certified/Approved by the specified Primary Material Manufacturer.
3. Upon request, be able to provide list of at least 10 project names, address’s, telephone numbers
and representative’s name. Reference projects must be successful applications employing the
same system type. Submit a minimum of 100,000 sf. for review. Reference projects must be a
minimum of five (5) years old.
4. Be acceptable by Owner.
5. Be approved by design professional.
6. Has not been in Chapter 7 during the last ten (10) years.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. A qualified manufacturer that can meet the basis of design as established in Part 2 – Products
and has FMG approval for the complete roofing system.
2. Manufacturer must provide (2) project inspections each week and provide a written and
photographic report to the Owner.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved by roofing system
manufacturer.
E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by
UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing
system is a part.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 508/22/2024[Appendix A]
F. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference
at Project site. Comply with requirements for pre-installation conferences in Division 1 Section
“Preconstruction Meetings.” Review methods and procedures related to roof deck construction and
roofing system including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Meet with Owner, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer’s representative, deck Installer,
and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories
and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer’s personnel,
equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including
flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs,
and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section “Preconstruction Meetings.” Review methods and procedures related to roofing
system including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Meet with Owner, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer’s representative, and installers
whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-
mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer’s personnel,
equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including
flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs,
and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
6
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
H. Random Sampling
1. During course of work, the Owner may secure samples according to ASTM D140-93 of materials
being used from containers at job site and submit them to an independent laboratory for
comparison to specified material.
2. Should test results prove that material is not equal to specified material:
a. Contractor shall pay for all testing.
b. Roofing installed and found not to comply with the specifications shall be removed and
replaced with no change in the contract price.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with
manufacturer’s name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.
B. Storage of Materials
1. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid
material from direct sunlight.
a. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
2. Store materials marked “keep from freezing” in areas where temperatures will remain above 40
degrees Fahrenheit.
3. For insulation, remove plastic packaging shrouds. For felt rolls, slit the top of the plastic shrink-
wrap only. Cover top and sides of all stored materials with tarpaulin. Secure tarpaulin. Store
in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for handling, storing, and
protecting during installation.
4. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or other raised surfaces.
5. Do not double-stack rolls.
6. Rooftop storage: Disperse material to avoid concentrated loading. Staging of mechanical and
electrical equipment on existing roofs is not permitted. Provide temporary 1” insulation board and
3/4” plywood under materials storage on existing roofs.
7. Materials may not be stored without a canvass tarpaulin, or on direct contact with the ground
or roof surface. Do not leave unused felts and other sheet materials on the roof overnight or
when roofing work is not in progress unless protected from weather and moisture and unless
maintained at a temperature exceeding 50 degrees F (10 degrees C).
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 708/22/2024[Appendix A]
8. Should Contractor be required to quickly cover material temporarily, such as during an
unanticipated rain shower, all materials shall be stored on a raised platform covered with secured
canvas tarpaulin, top to bottom.
9. Contractor is responsible for the safekeeping of materials stored onsite.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer’s written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of
deck.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations:
1. Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to
be installed according to manufacturers’ written instructions and warranty requirements.
2. Refer to Design Professional’s specifications for additional information.
1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Reference General Conditions and Design Professional Specifications for information on Substitutions.
B. Substitutions
1. Substitutions will not be considered if:
a. Product or method to be considered does not have a minimum of (5) five years of successful
performance in roofing applications.
b. Any discrepancies in the test data, or if the tests or submittals are incomplete.
c. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
NOTE: The intention of these requirements is to establish the equality of any substitute
product or method with the standard product/method specified. Also, it will give an equal
opportunity to all contractors to bid an approved substitute product/method if any substitute is
approved.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Roofing Manufacturer’s Warranty:
1. Upon inspection and acceptance of the completed roofing project by the representative and the
primary roof system manufacturer, the roof system manufacturer shall provide a full system Quality
Assurance Warranty with the option to renew for an addition term. After acceptance of the roofing
system, the roof manufacturer shall provide an owner’s manual detailing routine maintenance
guidelines for long-term membrane protection and leak free service. Local manufactures
representative will, during the second, fifth and tenth year of this warranty, inspect and provide a
8
written Executive Summary to the owner.
a. Warranty Period: 20 years from the date of substantial completion.
b. The Manufacturer’s Warranty must include labor & material coverage against leakage on all
components; including those manufactured by others. Included are the following:
1) Base sheet and fasteners.
2) Insulation materials and adhesives.
3) All roof membrane components and adhesives.
4) All wood blocking and fastening components.
5) All perimeter flashing metal components.
6) All tapered edge and cant strips.
7) All existing or new counter flashing.
8) All surface mastics, coatings, stripping ply, etc.
9) All drain assemblies, scuppers, expansion joints, pitch pans and other components,
excluding interior plumbing.
c. Any leaks or other problems caused by substrate movement, excluding decks.
2. The warranty includes the roof design based on a Class 1-90 wind uplift rating.
3. Warranty will include hail coverage up to 3” in diameter.
4. Warranty will include (10) years of annual inspections and minor repairs by the roofing
manufacturer. Each inspection must be followed by an electronic report with photographs and
details of the work performed relating to the roof failure.
B. Special Project Warranty:
1. Submit Roofing Installer’s Warranty, on the warranty form at the end of this Section, signed by the
Installer, covering the work of this Section, including membrane roofing, base flashing, roofing
insulation, fasteners, sheet metal components, and vapor retarders, if any, for the following
warranty period. Roofing contractor shall provide a letter to the architect stating that the roofing
contractor will agree to participate in allowances and adjustments for 2 years of the warranty
period. It must be determined by the roof system manufacturer that the defects in the roofing
assembly are a result of application and workmanship errors. All defects noted during this time
period will be corrected by the roof contractor at their expense.
C. Contractor’s Warranty: Submit roofing Installer’s workmanship warranty, on a notarized written
warranty form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including membrane roofing, sheet
flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, and air and vapor retarders, and all roofing components.
1. Roof Installers Warranty Period: 5 years from the date of substantial completion.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 908/22/2024[Appendix A]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. To be specified by the design professional to comply with State procurement laws, FM Global criteria
and to meet the requirements of this appendix and project specifications.
B. All roof components including (and not limited to) insulation and fasteners shall be manufacturered by
the same roof membrane manufacturer.
2.02 ROOFING MEMBRANE
A. Per roof system, as specified by Design Proffesional, to comply with AHJ and FM Global criteria.
2.03 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. To be specified by design professional. Flashing materials shall be compatible with roof system
materials and shall be manufactured by roof membrane manufacturer.
2.04 ROOF INSULATION
A. Design Professional to specify the appropriate thickness of polyisocyanurate insulation to meet
all applicable codes. Attach to roof deck as specified by design professional to comply with
manufacturer’s specifications, AHJ and FM Global.
2.05 INSULATION COVER BOARD
A. Insulation cover board shall be 1/2” minimum, attached to insulation as specified by the design
professional to comply with manufacturer’s specifications, AHJ and FM Global.
B. Maximum insulation board size shall be 4 feet x 4 feet to ensure proper adhesion, tappered 1/4” per
foot minimum where required. Layers of insulation shall be attached to each other as specified by the
design professional to comply with manufacturer’s specifications, AHJ and FM Global.
2.06 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and
compatible with roofing.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance
provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by
manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C. Vents:
1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 526-85, sheet steel with 3.82 g/m2 (1.25 oz./sq.) galvanized coating.
a. Gage: Twenty-two (22).
10
b. Solder: ASTM B32-89, alloy grade 50A. Neutralize flux after soldering.
D. Lead Flashings:
1. ASTM B 29 79(1984), 4 lb. (1.82 kg) sheet lead.
a. Use prefabricated plumbing vent flashings with factory welded and sealed joints at all
plumbing vents.
1) Flange: 4” minimum.
b. Use a single piece of sheet lead flashing at roof drains.
1) Minimum 30” x 30”
E. Termination Bar:
1. Extruded aluminum, pre-punched 8” o.c.
F. Counter flashing, Slip flashing, Pitch pans with hood, etc.:
1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 526-85, sheet steel with 1.25 oz./sq. (3.82 g/m2) galvanized coating.
a. Gage: Twenty-four (24).
b. Solder: ASTM B32-89, alloy grade 50A. Neutralize flux after soldering.
G. Walkway Pads:
1. Factory formed, nonporous, with a slip-resisting surface texture, manufactured specifically for
adhering to roofing as a protection course for foot traffic:
a. Thickness: 1/2 inch
H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roofing system
manufacturer.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1108/22/2024[Appendix A]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. To be specified by design professional, and as per manufacturer’s recomendations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. To be specified by design professional, and as per manufacturer’s recomendations.
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The presence and activity of the manufacturer’s representative, and/or Owner’s representative shall in
no way relieve Contractor of contract responsibilities or duties.
B. Start installation of roofing membrane system in presence of roofing system manufacturer’s technical
personnel.
C. Substrate: Free of foreign particles prior to laying roof membrane.
D. Phased application: Not permitted. All plies shall be completed each day.
E. Traffic and equipment: Kept off completed plies until adhesive has set.
F. Wrapper and packaging materials: Not to be included in roofing system.
G. Wood cants: Install and secure preformed 45-degree wood cants at junctures of roofing membrane
system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees.
H. Fit plies into roof drain rims; install lead flashing and finishing plies; secure clamping collars; install
domes.
I. Extend roofing membrane to top edge of cant at wall and projection bases.
J. Cooperate with inspecting and testing agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing
roofing membrane system.
K. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing plies are not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
1. Provide cutoffs at end of each day’s work to cover exposed ply sheets and insulation with a
course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed.
2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system.
3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.04 CARPENTRY
A. Carpentry work shall be furnished and installed as specified by the Design Professional. At a
12
minimum, provide the following:
1. Wall flashings:
a. Mechanically attach wood blocking to flashing base.
b. Offset blocking layers 12 inches; weave corners. Blocking thickness: Equal to final insulation
thickness, including tapered edge.
c. Install 45 degrees and continuous wood cants (4 x 4’s) at intersections of horizontal wood
blocking and vertical flashing surfaces.
2. Metal sleeve and storm collar:
a. Mechanically attach wood blocking to deck at all storm collar locations. Minimum 2 fasteners
per section.
b. Offset blocking layers 12 inches, weave corners. Blocking thickness: Equal to final insulation
thickness, including tapered edge. Blocking width: 4 inches, nominal.
3. Piping through roof deck / Wood curb locations:
a. Mechanically attach wood blocking to deck at designated pipe locations. Minimum 2 fasteners
per section.
b. Offset blocking layers 12 inches, weave corners. Blocking thickness: Equal to final insulation
thickness, including tapered edge. Blocking width: 4 inches, nominal.
4. Install wood cants to blocking. Nail two (2) rows staggered to horizontal and vertical sub-strates.
Spacing in any row shall not exceed 24 inches.
5. Wood blocking fastening pattern:
a. Fasten all nailers and blocking with specified fasteners in pattern and amount required for
ASCE 7 uplift requirements.
3.05 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. To be specified by Design Professional, and as per manufacturer’s recomendations.
3.06 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. To be specified by Design Professional, and as per manufacturer’s recomendations.
3.07 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. To be specified by Design Professional, and as per manufacturer’s recomendations.
3.08 COATING INSTALLATION
A. To be specified by Design Professional, and as per manufacturer’s recomendations.
3.09 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1308/22/2024[Appendix A]
A. To specified by Design Professional, and as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. To be specified by design professional. Refer to Quality Assurance section on this appendix for
additional information.
B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance
of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.11 DAILY WATERSTOP/TIE-INS
A. Coordinate all work listed under this section with section 3.03 in this appendix.
B. Remove dust, dirt or debris from the top of the existing membrane.
C. Width: 18 inches.
D. Adhere 12 and 18-inch wide ply sheets from exposed deck to existing roofing with a continuous 1/16-
inch thick application of tie off mastic. Glaze cut off with surfacing mastic. Extend 18 inch wide felt 3
inches either side 12-inch felt.
E. Install “deadman” insulation filler at insulation staggers.
F. Extend roofing system at least 12 inches onto prepared area of adjacent roofing. Seal edge with 6
inch wide reinforcing membrane embedded between alternate courses of tie off mastic.
G. At beginning of next day’s work remove temporary connection by cutting felts evenly along edge of
existing roof system. Remove “deadman” insulation fillers.
3.12 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and
damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07 51 00
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 108/22/2024[Appendix B]
SECTION 27 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This document identifies the design and specification requirements for a complete and functional
communications cable plant to be performed at the new facility for Tarrant County College (TCC)’s
(insert project name and location). The facility will (Insert project description). The communications
cable plant as specified herein will support the voice, data, AV connectivity and various other low
voltage signaling and control devices.
B. The technology infrastructure will be compliant with the latest versions of the TIA/EIA 568-C Series
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards and TCC adopted cabling standards.
C. The Architectural Plans and Specifications, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions
and other requirements of Division 1, the Mechanical Plans and Specifications, the Electrical
Plans and Specifications, and the Communications Plans may apply to the work specified in the
Division 27 Sections, and shall be complied with in every respect. The Contractor shall examine all
of these documents, which make up the Contract Documents, and shall coordinate them with all
communications work on the Communications plans and in the Division 27 specifications.
D. Contract Documents: Drawings and specifications are to be used in conjunction with one another
and to supplement one another. In general the specifications determine the nature and quality of the
materials, and the drawings establish the quantities, details, and give characteristics of performance
that should be adhered to in the installation of the communications system components. If there is
an apparent conflict between the drawings and specifications, the items with the greater quantity
or quality shall be estimated upon and installed. Clarification with the Owner or their designated
representative about these items shall be made prior to bid response.
E. The Architect may at any time, by written order, make changes within the general scope of any
contract resulting from this proposal document. If such changes expand, reduce, change or modify
the scope of work, the price for the change shall be increased or decreased at the unit prices set
forth in the Unit Pricing Section, and the amount shall be deducted from, or added to, the sale price
of the system to the Owner. No costs will be added to the project without prior written approval from
the Architect.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Division 27 Sections include:
Communications - Sample SpecificationsBAPPENDIX
2
1. 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications
2. 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems
3. 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding
4. 27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways
5. 27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems
6. 27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings
7. 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling
8. 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling
9. 27 16 19 Patch Cords, Station Cords,& Cross-Connect Wire
10. 27 20 00 Data Communications Equipment
11. 27 30 00 Voice Communications Equipment
12. 27 40 00 Audio-Video Systems
13. 27 53 13 Synchronized Time Systems - Digital Clocks
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Codes and Standards (Latest issue and addenda)
1. ADA Standards for Accessible Design 28 CFR Part 36
2. U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA)
3. TCCD Telecommunications and Infrastructure Requirements
4. BICSI TDM 13th Edition
5. National Electric Code (NEC), Latest Issue
6. TIA 568-B.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard*
7. TIA 568-B.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard*
8. TIA 568-B.3 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard*
9. TIA 569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces*
10. TIA 606-A - Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructures, June 21,
2002*
11. ANSI J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building. Grounding/Bounding Requirements- Joint Standard for
Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications,
2002*
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 308/22/2024[Appendix B]
12. TIA/EIA758-A - Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard, May
2005*
13. International Standards Organization/International Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC) IS
11801, 2000*
14. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Cable Certification and Follow Up Program*
15. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)*
16. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)*
B. Acronyms and Abbreviations
1. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
2. AKA Also Known As
3. ANSI American National Standards Institute
4. AP Access Provider
5. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
6. AWG American Wire Gauge
7. BICSI Building Industry Consulting Services International
8. CATV Community Antenna Television
9. CO-OSP Customer Owned Outside Plant
10. EF Entrance Facility
11. ER Equipment Room
12. EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
13. EMI Electromagnetic Interference
14. FCC Federal Communications Commission
15. HVAC Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
16. IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
17. IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame AKA Telecommunications Room (TR)
18. ITS Information Transport System
19. ISO International Organization for Standardization
20. LAN Local Area Network
4
21. Mb/s Megabits per second
22. MC Main Cross-connect AKA Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
23. MDF Main Distribution Frame AKA main cross-connect (MC)
24. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
25. NESCÒ National Electrical Safety Code
26. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
27. RCDD Registered Communications Distribution Designer
28. SCS Structured Cabling System
29. TBB Telecommunications Bonding Backbone
30. TR Telecommunications Room AKA Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)
31. TGB Telecommunications Grounding Busbar
32. TMGB Telecommunications main grounding Busbar
33. TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
34. UL Underwriters Laboratories
35. UTP Unshielded Twisted-pair
36. WA Work Area
37. WAP Wireless access points
38. X Cross-connect
C. Definitions
1. MER - Main Equipment Room: The man room which typically contains the PBX, MDF and main
Data Communications equipment.
2. ER - Equipment Room: Any additional room, which contains switches, hubs, patch panels and
crosss-connects away from a central location to serve areas out of distance from the MER.
3. TR - Telecom Room: Any additional room which contains switches, patch panels or other
electronic devices in support of the telecommunications services and cross-connetc away from a
central location to serve areas out of distance from the MER.
4. TO - Telecommunications outlet: Point of connectivityfor voice, data, or video on the wall or in
the floor. Refer to Telecommunications Drawings and Symbol sheet(s) for quantities and types of
media at each outlet.
5. MDF - Main Distribution Frame: A termination frame for unshielded twisted pair cable,
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 508/22/2024[Appendix B]
usuallyproviding a connection field for PBX telephone ports and feeder/riser cables to TR’s. The
MDF is normally located in the MER.
6. IDF- Intermediate Distribution Frame; A termination frame for unshileded twisted pair cabling
providing a connection field for horizontal wiring from the workstation and feeder/riser cables
extended from the MER.
7. TMGB- Telecommunications Main Grounding Bushbar: The dedicated extensionof the building
grounding electrode system for the telecommunications infrastructure.
8. TGB- Telecommunications Grounding Bushbar: The grounding connection point for
telecommunications systems and equipment in the area served by an ER.
9. TBB- Telecommunications Bonding Backbone: A bonding conductor that provides direct
connection between the TGN’s and TMGB.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. The Communications Cabling Contractor, here after referred to as “Cabling Contractor”, shall
provide all materials, components, tools and labor necessary for the complete installation of all
communications work required in the contract documents and specified herein.
2. The Electrical Contractor, here after referred to as “Electrical Contractor”, shall provide materials,
components, tools and labor to complete a communications cabling pathway, electrical power
distribution and communications building grounding system as set forth in the Structured Cabling
System specifications and electrical specifications and T and E drawings.
3. Work furnished and installed by the Cabling Contractor as specified in Division 27 and as shown
in E, T, TA and TY drawings includes:
a. The overhead cable runway system (ladder rack) within the new ER;
b. Identification for Communications Systems;
c. Communications Equipment Room Fittings;
d. Communications Backbone Cabling;
e. Communications Horizontal Cabling;
f. Patch Cords, Station Cords, and Cross-Connect Wire;
g. Audio-Video Systems, unless otherwise noted.
4. Work furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor as specified in Division 27 and as shown
in E, TA and T drawings includes:
a. Underground ducts and raceways;
b. The conduits and back boxes for the work area telecommunications and AV outlets.
6
c. Installation of the TMGB in the new ER;
d. Installation of the TBB from the new ER to the new TRs;
e. Installation of the Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT) that bonds the TMGB to
the electrical power ground compliant with ANSI J STD-607 A Standards;
f. Bonding conductors from all cable tray, sleeves and conduits;
g. Electrical circuits in the telecom rooms.
5. Work furnished and installed by General Contractor.
a. The new MER/ER/TR walls shall be covered with rigidly fixed ¾” marine plywood, void free, 8
ft high, and capable of supporting attached connecting hardware. Plywood should be covered
with two coats of fire retardant paint per Section 27 05 53.
b. The new MER/ER/TR walls shall stenciled with location designation letters and rack unit
markings as noted in drawings details and labeling specifications sections.
1.05 WORK RESULTS - DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT
A. Administrative Services
1. Cabling Contractor is required to provide test results and as-built documentation/record drawing
prior to job acceptance.
2. In addition TDDC, shall be provided with red lines drawings upon 48 hours of the last cable pulled.
B. Underground Ducts and Raceways (Project Specific; sample below)
1. The permanent telecommunications pathway will consist of a combination of new and existing
utility tunnels and crawlspace connections from the ETC ER to the S Library ER transitioning
under the S. Science Building crawlspace.
2. Four 4” conduits with POLYETHYLENE TUBING or textile mesh innerduct for all Outside Plant
(OSP) pathway greater than 2” in diameter. TCCD’s prefer choice is a 2” polyethylene pathway.
Please coordinate with TCCD’s OneIT Department.
C. Grounding and Bonding (Project Specific; sample below)
1. The Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) will be in the new 1st level Equipment
Room (ER) room and a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) will connect the TMGB in
the ER to the Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) in the 2nd level Telecommunications
Room (TR). A Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT) will bond the TMGB to the
electrical power ground compliant with ANSI J STD-607 A Standards.
2. Bonding conductors from the TMGB or TGB will be installed to all communications equipment
cabinets, equipment racks, raceway, cable ladder rack, cable tray, sleeves and conduits.
3. All termination panels shall be installed with manufacturer approved grounding washers
4. Final design and specifications for the Grounding and Bonding system shall be coordinated with
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 708/22/2024[Appendix B]
the Electrical Engineer of Record.
D. Pathways for Communications Systems (Project Specific; sample below)
1. The primary horizontal cable support system will be cable tray, installed as shown in T drawings.
Cable tray will be properly grounded. Wall penetrations shall transition to properly firestopped
4” sleeves, then back to cable tray. Cable trays in exposed areas shall be enclosed such that no
cable is visible to building occupants
2. Outlets having one single cable require a single gang box connected to the primary horizontal
cable tray system via one (1) 1” conduit with pull string.
3. Outlets having two or more cables require a double gang box with a single gang reducer
connected to the primary horizontal cable tray system via one (1) 1” conduit with pull string.
4. Conduit runs may not be longer than 100ft or have more than two 90 degree bends without the
use of a properly sized junction box. Insulated throat compression fittings must be used for
communications conduit runs, with termination points having plastic or grounding bushings
installed.
5. Cable hooks may be used to transition from conduit to cable tray above ceilings tiles or in
accessible areas not visible to building occupants.
6. Riser sleeve in MER/ER/TRs must be properly installed with bushings and firestop.
E. Identification for Communications Systems
1. All labeling will be compliant the Owner standard as described in Section 27 05 53.
F. Communications Equipment Rooms (Project Specific; sample below)
1. The new communications service entrance facility will be located in the 1st level ER. The new
service entrance pathway will consist of four (4) 4” conduits from the ER to the existing Library
ER.
2. Space for new outside plant copper and fiber cable and terminating hardware will be provided in
the ER.
3. The new ER will be located on the first level of the facility and the 2nd level TR will connected to
the ER with three (3) 4” riser conduits routing through the crawl space, then up through a rise
chase to level 2..
4. Contractor shall provide each MER/ER/TR with 19” floor mounted equipment racks and or server
racks installed per T drawings. Equipment racks shall be properly bonded.
5. MER and TR Room sizing shall conform to, current at the time of installation, BICSI recommended
sizing standard based on building use and square footage served with accommodation for min.
50% future growth in rack space. Minimum Room size is 9’x10 for new construction.
8
6. MER/ER/TR should not be located adjacent to restrooms due to the risk of flooding.
7. MER/ER/TR rooms in multi-floor facilities shall be stacked.
8. No open through hole penetrations are allowed to be made from conditioned space to
unconditioned space No crawl space or roof access is permitted in MER/ER/TR.
9. No ceilings are permitted MER/TR rooms.
10. No means of liquid conveyance (water lines, sanitary or roof drain pipes, thermal, water, etc) may
pass through or directly above MER/TRs which houses network electronics.
a. Exception: Sprinklers may be installed in telecom rooms as required by NFPA Code. Sprinkler
heads must be caged.
11. Do not locate ductwork or plumbing clean outs in MER/ER/TRs
12. All walls to have 8 feet covering of A/C plywood painted front and back with off-white fire retardant
paint, as required.
13. Provide 7’ x 19” racks and patch panels as appropriate to accommodate initial infrastructure in the
area served by each room plus 50% for future growth.
14. Provide 10” vertical wire manager between racks and 6” verticals on the end of each row.
15. Security camera to be installed in all MER/ER/TR rooms overlooking the rack and patch panels.
16. Diagrams note standard layout and adjacencies and not necessarily required room size or
configuration. Cross reference with MEP.
17. MER/ER/TR Environmental and Power Requirements (Project Specific; sample below)
a. Lighting level at 50 foot candles with lighting fixtures located off set from ladder tray. Cross
reference with MEP.
b. Telecom rooms shall be air conditioned and humidity controlled. Inline cooling units may be
required for server applications, coordinate with TCCD and MEP.
c. MER/ER/TR’s air conditioning should be supported by emergency power if network attached
devices in the building will be running on emergency power.
d. MER/ER/TR convenience outlets - Provide a minimum of one fourplex isolated ground 120-volt
power outlet on each wall with a maximum of two duplex outlets per circuit. These circuits are
to be dedicated to the telecom room and are not allowed to serve any other load.
e. UPS buffered, generator backed power is mandatory for all new MER/TRs as security and life
safety systems are controlled by the network. UPS buffered power is required for all new TR
build outs. Elements supported by Telecom UPS include all rack-mounted and wall mounted
equipment housed in the ER or TRs; excluding building lighting.
f. Large format expandable UPS Cabinets are preferred and usually sized to support the
requirements of multiple stacked TRs with rooms being served by UPS fed power panels
dedicated to each ER and TR. Coordinate UPS locations and power connectivity requirements
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 908/22/2024[Appendix B]
with TCCD and MEP.
g. Equipment Rack Power - Each equipment rack shall be supplied with with a minimum of one
L5-20R Receptacles attached to the tray above each rack.
h. Server Cabinet Power - Each server cabinet shall be supplied with a minimum of one L5-20R
Receptacles and one L21-20R Receptacle attached to the tray above each cabinet.
G. Communications Outside Plant Backbone Cabling (Project Specific; sample below)
1. Fiber Backbone: Provide one 24 strand Single Mode Fiber and one 12 Strand Muilti-mode OM4
Fiber in one pathway and one 6 strand single Mode and 6 strand OM4 Multi-mode Fiber in a
separate pathway; Pathway diversity is required for Fire Alarm signal transmission. Fiber optic
cabling, not in conduit or armored, must be installed in properly rated innerduct.
H. Communications Inside Plant Backbone Cabling (Project Specific; sample below)
1. ER/TR) shall be linked as needed plus 1 spare 4” conduit and twist-to-reseal firestop sleeves for
vertical and horizontal transitions out of TR and ERs. Cable tray may be used to connect ER to
TRs in the same building, however fiber optic cabling must be armored or installed in properly
rated innerduct for protection.
2. Fiber Optics: Provide one 24 strand Single Mode Fiber and one 12 Strand Muilti-mode OM4 Fiber
in one pathway and one 6 strand single Mode and 6 strand OM4 Multi-mode Fiber in a separate
pathway; Pathway diversity is required for Fire Alarm and Access Control signal transmission.
Fiber optic cabling, not in conduit or armored, must be installed in properly rated innerduct.
I. Communications Horizontal Cabling (Project Specific; sample below)
1. All voice and data horizontal cables will consist of plenum rated, Category 6, 4 pair UTP copper
cables terminated on 48 port modular, angled patch panels with blue inserts in the MER/ER/TRs.
The maximum horizontal distance shall be 295 feet (no exception without Owner approval).
2. The telecommunications cable distribution system will be run above the finished ceiling or in the
below floor interstitial space to the nearest MER/ER/TR on the corresponding floor. Acceptable
pathway methods are conduit, cable-hooks, open cable tray or enclosed cable tray.
3. Cabling may not be visible to the public at any point outside of the ER or TRs; conduit or
enclosed cable tray are required in exposed areas.
4. All cabling pathways must be installed and supported per industry or manufacturer standard.
Field modifications of pathway elements is not permitted unless the product is designed to be
modified.
5. The minimum acceptable conduit size for telecommunication is 1”, larger conduits may be used
where applicable, however, fill ratio standards must be maintained.
6. Standard work area outlet rough-in will include one 1”min. conduit routed from accessible ceiling
to a double gang back box installed with a single gang reducer plate. The conduit termination
points shall be installed with an insulated throat fittings or bushings to protect cables during
installation.
10
7. All cabling in mechanical or electrical rooms must be installed in conduit.
8. The TCCD is standardized on Panduit Connectivity for use with General or Panduit Cable; required
part numbers are available in the Master Specification.
9. Coordinate with MEP to ensure that at least one-15/20 amp, 120 VAC, standard duplex
convenience outlet is located within 12 of all standard telecom outlets, PoE powered device
locations excluded.
J. Termination Hardware (Project Specific; sample below)
1. All cable termination hardware shall be mounted in Contractor provided and installed 19” racks.
2. Fiber backbone cabling shall terminate in, fully populated, rack mounted Fiber Panels using LC
connectors and adapters.
3. Horizontal cabling shall terminate on rack mounted Category 6 48 port angled patch panels in the
MER/ER/TRs, and on RJ45 568A Category 6 inserts at the outlet. Information outlets shall be blue
for data and gray for voice.
4. Floor poke thru devices must be specified with adapters designed to accept the specified 8P8C
jacks
K. Patch Cords, Station Cords, and X-Connect Wire (Project Specific; sample below)
1. Contractor shall provide two (2) Category 6 patch cords per horizontal cable installed.
Contractor will coordinate quantity, length, and color with TCCD OneIT
department before ordering.
2. Contractor shall provide one (1) duplex fiber optic patch cords per fiber termination; patch cords
shall be consistent with fiber type.
L. Commissioning Administration
1. Cabling Contractor shall comply with- GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS of the
technology transport system.
M. Project Meetings
1. Cabling Contractor shall attend preconstruction meetings with Project Team.
2. Cabling Contractor shall provide representation on Project Team Meeting as specified in Division 1
and by the General Contractor as required.
3. Cabling Contractor will provide ad-hoc representation on the Commissioning Team as required for
implementation of the Commissioning Plan.
N. Preconstruction Evaluation
1. Examination of buildings and site shall be the responsibility of the Cabing Contractor. Examine
conditions for compliance with Communications design specifications. Validate Communications
section is in accordance with related Contract Documents and the specified Owner’s operational
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1108/22/2024[Appendix B]
needs.
O. Construction Documentation
1. Cabling Contractor shall coordinate requirements with general provisions specified in Division 1 -
Construction Progress Documentation.
2. Cabling Contractor shall provide weekly report of inspection by project RCDD to confirm Cabling
Contractor’s work is compliant with industry and manufacturer standards.
P. Wireless Access Point Locations
1. Each cable should be installed with a 20 ft service loop at the access point end. The cables
should be terminated with 8P8C outlet in a two port surface mount plenum-grade mount. Wireless
access points are generally located in ceilings, however locating access points in ceilings higher
than 14ft is not recommended. In those locations, strong consideration should be given to a wall
mounted outlet. Wall mounted outlets for access points should be located no more than 14 ft
high.
1.06 PROPOSAL SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Division 1 and this section. All submittals shall be reviewed and stamped by the Cabling
Contractor’s project RCDD.
1. Submit a resume and copy of Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI)
Registered Communication Distribution Designer (RCDD) certificate for Cabling Contractor’s
project RCDD.
B. A list of technical product education (training) completed by the Cabling Contractor’s project
personnel.
1. All members of the installation team must be certified by the Manufacturer as having completed
the necessary training to complete their part of the installation. Submit resumes of the entire team
and completed training courses and copies of BICSI Installer certificates TE300, training course
IN100 and IN200.
2. Cable tester manufacturer or a third party certification for copper and fiber cable test technicians.
C. Price Quotation Information -
1. Itemized Unit Pricing for Labor and Material;
2. Itemized Add/Deduct Unit Pricing for Labor and Material for Pre-Cutover (200’ average length)
THREE (3) CAT 6 Drop;
3. Itemized Add/Deduct Unit Pricing for Labor and Material for Pre-Cutover (200’ average length)
FOUR (4) CAT 6 Drop;
4. Itemized Add/Deduct Unit Pricing for Labor and Material for Post-Cutover (200’ average length)
THREE (3) CAT 6 Drop;
12
5. Itemized Add/Deduct Unit Pricing for Labor and Material for Post-Cutover (200’ average length)
FOUR (4) CAT 6 Drop;
D. The Cabling Contractor shall review paragraph 1.3 of this Section; Codes and Standards - Latest issue
and addendums and state understanding and compliance or exception.
E. Product Data: For each type of product indicated below. Product data to include, but not limited to
materials, finishes, approvals, load ratings, and dimensional information.
1. Submittals shall include the manufacturers cut sheets for the following:
a. Equipment enclosures and/or racks;
b. Fiber optic and balanced twisted pair cable;
c. Patch cords and cross connect media;
d. Connectors and termination hardware;
e. Protection hardware;
f. Fire stopping materials;
g. Test equipment to be used for fiber and balanced twisted pair channels;
h. Cable tray and cable support hardware.
F. Product Data Manufactures literature sheets for all materials and equipment, including a copy
of the proposed warranty, recommended preventative maintenance and spare part inventory
recommendations. Literature containing more than one device shall be clearly marked to delineate
item(s) included in the work. Clearly indicate color or special finishes.
G. Manufacturer and Cabling Contractor statement of RoHS: Restriction of Certain Hazardous Substances
Compliance.
H. Design and Installation Certificates: Signed by local cable manufacturer’s representative certifying
that design is acceptable with cable manufacturer’s Design Engineer(s) and Cabling Contractor is
authorized by manufacturer to install registered (warranty) cabling system.
I. A minimum of five (5) representative educational facilities cabling projects must be submitted as
references to include the school’s name, school district, architect or Engineer, cost of the cabling
project and the current contact person at the school district to include phone number and email
address.
J. A minimum of five (5) representative educational facilities AV projects must be submitted as
references to include the school’s name, school district, architect or Engineer, cost of the AV project
and the current contact person at the school district to include phone number and email address.
1.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT RECORD
A. Follow Division 1 and this Section.
1. Cable Labeling Submission: Prior to cable installation, contractor shall submit floor plans
and cable labeling schedule templates to owner for approval. Floor plan template must show
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1308/22/2024[Appendix B]
horizontal cable outlet locations with space for outlet labels. Schedule Template must list Cable
Termination Location – Room Name, Room Number and Outlet location as well as provide blank
cells for Origin TR, Rack Designation, Panel Rack Unit, Termination Port Number, Switch Location
(if patched), Switch Port (if patched), and Cable ID. Within 48 Hours of final cable termination,
contractor must submit finalized floor plans and schedules with all labeling information
completed. Floor Plans shall be submitted in AutoCad and PDF format; Schedules in Excel and
PDF format.
2. Drawings: As-built documentation MUST be submitted five (5) business days PRIOR to obtaining
approval for cutover to any portion of the new cable plant system. Furnish for review and
comments, 4 complete sets of E size (30 by 42) and 4 complete sets of C size as-built drawings
along with 4 CDs containing all electronic AutoCAD 2000 or newer (DWG) files.
3. Final approved Shop Drawings: Include plan and elevation of TRs, cable pathway details, and
cable locations and cable ID#.
4. 4 sets of cable inventory data must be submitted for all copper and fiber, termination hardware
(prior to cutover to new cable plant if applicable.) Submit data in binders and electronically on
CDs in “Microsoft Excel “ format, listing products furnished, including:
a. Manufacturer’s name and part numbers.
b. Cable numbers utilizing the Owner’s cable numbering standard.
c. Location and riser assignments.
5. Manufacturer Certificates: Within 10 days of completion of the project, Cabling Contractor shall
deliver letter signed by local Structured Cabling Components representatives and Cabling
Contractor’s RCDD stating that installed cabling system complies with all requirements specified
in manufacturer’s installation guidelines and that there were no accidents, improper installation,
mishandling, misuse, damage while in transit, unauthorized alteration, unauthorized repair, failure
to follow instructions, or misuse of the structured cabling system that could adversely impact
warranty.
6. Test Reports: 4 sets of hard copies with 4 copies on CD in compliance with related Test Result
Documentation.
7. Submitted test results and other submittals that are non-compliant will be reviewed and returned
to the Cabling Contractor with comments.
8. Re-submitted test results and other submittals that are non-compliant will be reviewed and
returned to the Cabling Contractor with comments.
9. Subsequent reviews of test results and other submittals will be performed jointly by the Cabling
Contractor and the Communications Consultant and Cabling Contractor will pay Communications
Consultant’s published hourly rate during third review and thereafter.
10. Manufacturer’s warranty to the Owner. This shall include, but is not limited to: Owner’s name
and project name and address. (Within three weeks of substantial completion).
11. Within 10 days of completion of the project, Cabling Contractor shall deliver letter signed by local
SCS Manufacturers representative and Cabling Contractor’s RCDD stating that installed cabling
14
system complies with all requirements specified in installation guidelines and that there were
no accidents, improper installation, mishandling, misuse, damage while in transit, unauthorized
alteration, unauthorized repair, failure to follow instructions, or misuse with the structured cabling
system that could adversely impact warranty.
12. Within 21 days of completion of a project the communications contractor and/or the
manufacturer’s local representative will provide owner The Structured Cabling Performance
Warranty signed by the manufacturer. The warranty shall list the owner and name of the Facility
including location as the holder of the warranty.
1.08 EQUIPMENT RELOCATION AND SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Upon notice of construction completion, the selected Cabling Contractor will be responsible for
system startup services for the new telecommunication room. The Cabling Contractor shall be
responsible for ensuring the new equipment rooms, cabinets, floors and walls are clean and ready
for equipment installation. On behalf of the Owner, the Cabling Contractor shall be responsible for
coordinating with the GC and other trades to keep the ER and TRs clean and dust free at all times.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Cabling Contractor to develop and implement a full migration
project schedule detailing the responsibilities of assigned personnel, along with contingency plans,
and submit it to the Owner, or their designated representative, for approval.
C. During the transition period, Cabling Contractor shall have the necessary supervisory, technical,
and other personnel available throughout technology relocations and cutover of the telephone,
networking, and video systems. This is to ensure that technicians are on site to observe the operation
and maintenance of the equipment, and to resolve any cabling related issues during system start-up.
D. Cabling Contractor shall ensure all amenities are present prior to equipment relocation. Cabling
Contractor shall immediately contact the Owner, or their designated representative, if a required
service such as HVAC, electrical, UPS, etc., are not present.
E. Cabling Contractor shall accomplish a smooth and successful transition of operations and services
to the new telecommunication room. The transition includes the coordination, migration, testing, and
problem resolution with the system vendors.
1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. An initial planning meeting will be held with the successful bidder to clarify all requirements (systems,
services, distribution methods, etc.), identify responsibilities, and schedule the events that will
transpire during the implementation of the project. Within two (2) weeks of the initial meeting, the
Cabling Contractor shall provide a written report and project schedule to clearly document the events
and responsibilities associated with the project.
B. Cabling Contractor shall be responsible for the development and implementation of a complete
project schedule detailing the responsibilities of assigned personnel and submit it to the GC and
Owner for approval.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE - CABLING CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. Follow Division 1 and this Section.
B. Voice/Data
1. The Cabling Contractor must be a Manufacturer’s Business Partner capable of issuing a numbered
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1508/22/2024[Appendix B]
registration warranty certificate for the installed cable system.
2. The Cabling Contractor shall have been in telecommunications business continually for at least
the past 5 years.
3. A minimum of five (5) representative educational facilities projects must be submitted as
references to include the school’s name, school district, architect or Engineer, cost of the project
and the current contact person at the school district to include phone number and email address.
4. The Cabling Contractor shall possess the most recent version of the TIA/EIA 568 B Series
Telecommunications Building Wiring Standards available from Global Engineering Documents.
5. The Cabling Contractor shall possess at least one copy of BICSI Telecommunications Distribution
Methods Manual, Eleventh Edition, or newer.
6. All project managers, supervisors, lead technicians, and technicians for the Cabling Contractor
shall each possess individual certification(s) for the installation and testing of voice and data
products.
7. Supervisor or Lead Technician shall possess BICSI certificates of completion for training course
TE300.
8. Installation Technicians should possess BICSI certificates of completion for the training course
IN100 for ITS Installer Level 1 and preferably IN200 for ITS Installer Level 2.
9. Testing Technicians should possess manufacturer’s certificates of completion for the test
equipment used on the project.
10. The Cabling Contractor shall have a minimum of one (1) full time employee on staff that is a BICSI
RCDD with experience in similar projects to review and approve the design and construction
plans and inspect work and report status on a weekly basis.
11. Untrained, undocumented, or otherwise unqualified personnel are not allowed to perform any
portion of the communications infrastructure installation.
12. All personnel must be permanent employees of the telecommunications contractor, or approved
sub-contractors.
13. The Communications Vendor must be experienced in communications projects of similar size and
scope within the last (5) five years. Submit list of four (4) (minimum) installed projects of similar
magnitude completed within last five (5) years
14. 50% of data contractor installation personnel must be BICSI Certified Installer Level I or higher.
The onsite supervisor of the data contractor must be a BICSI Certified Technician. The data
contractor must have on staff a BICSI Certified RCDD. All certifications must be current. Proof of
certification must be presented.
C. Audio/Video
1. Five (5) years experience in the installation of AV distribution systems.
2. A minimum of five (5) representative educational facilities AV projects must be submitted as
references to include the school’s name, school district, architect or Engineer, cost of the project
and the contact person at the school district to include phone number.
3. Installers must have been trained and experienced in the specific splicing, terminating and testing
equipment to be used in the installation.
16
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT SCHEDULE
A. See Division 27 sections for approved product and schedules.
B. 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding
C. 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems
D. 27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways
E. 27 05 53 Identification or Communications Systems
F. 27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings
G. 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling
H. 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling
I. 27 16 19 Patch Cords, Station Cords, and Cross-Connect Wire
J. 27 40 00 Audio-Video Systems
2.02 WARRANTY
A. Within 10 days of completion of the project, Cabling Contractor shall deliver letter signed by local
SCS Manufacturers representative and Cabling Contractor’s RCDD stating that installed cabling
system complies with all requirements specified in installation guidelines and that there were
no accidents, improper installation, mishandling, misuse, damage while in transit, unauthorized
alteration, unauthorized repair, failure to follow instructions, or misuse with the structured cabling
system that could adversely impact warranty.
B. Within 21 days of completion of a project the communications contractor and/or the manufacturer’s
local representative will provide owner The Structured Cabling Performance Warranty signed by the
manufacturer. The warranty shall list the owner, name of the facility including location as the holder
of the warranty.
C. The Owner shall not be responsible for any aspect of ensuring the warranty is issued or updated. It
shall be the Contractor’s responsibility in conjunction with the Manufacturer.
D. During the warranty period, Owner may engage any (manufacturer approved) communication
contractor to perform future moves, adds and changes to the system. Owner approved contractors
shall be responsible for updating any required documentation. Owner shall not be responsible for any
aspect of updating and maintaining the warranty.
E. The Labor, Material and Performance Warranty shall cover the testing and replacement of all
structured cabling components. The structured cabling system shall be a complete certified system.
The system and all components shall be performance matched and guaranteed by the manufacturer.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1708/22/2024[Appendix B]
F. Person / Entity Covered
1. This warranty is for the sole benefit of Owner and any successor in interest to the site in which
such Registered SCS was originally installed.
2. All communications work and materials not included in the SCS components shall be warranted
by the contractor that performed the work for a minimum of three years from the date of
substantial completion.
2.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery Requirements: Follow Division 1 Requirements.
B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading
1. All material shall be shipped to the Project’s designated on-site staging area (to be determined),
or a mutually agreed upon location.
C. Acceptance at Site
1. All risk of damage or loss will remain with the Cabling Contractor until project completion and
acceptance of the installation by the Project Manager. Upon acceptance, risk of loss will pass to
the Owner. Prior to that time, the Cabling Contractor shall be solely responsible for security of all
Cabling Contractor provided project materials.
D. Storage and Protection
1. All materials and equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from
the weather, humidity, and temperature variation, dirt, and dust, or other contaminants.
2. Material will be properly packaged in original factory-fabricated type containers and protected
from damaging fumes, construction debris, and traffic until installation or job completion.
3. Any flammable materials or hazardous materials shall be kept and/or stored in suitable places
always approved by the General Contractor and outside the buildings.
2.04 PRODUCT QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials and equipment provided shall be the standard Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (COTS)
products of a manufacturer engaged in the manufactures of such products. All materials shall be
typical commercial designs that comply with the requirements specified. All materials and equipment
shall be readily available through manufacturers and/or distributors. All equipment shall be supplied
complete with any optional items required for proper installation.
B. In the event of a breach of the representations and warranties contained herein, the Cabling
Contractor, at their own expense, shall take all measures necessary to correct and make the cabling
system work in compliance with the applicable manufacturer written technical recommendations and
standards.
18
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Existing Site Conditions
1. Cable pathways and runs to individual outlets are not shown in their entirety but shall be
provided as if shown in their entirety. The Cabling Contractor shall coordinate with other trades to
determine exact routing.
B. Environmental Limitations
1. Due to the critical nature of the environment, the Cabling Contractor shall use extra effort to
provide a clean work environment, free from trash/rubbish accumulated during and after cabling
installation. Cabling Contractor shall remove all rubbish from job site daily at their own expense.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting the installation, the assigned installation supervisor shall participate in a walk-through
of the project site with the Project Manager to review the installation documentation, verify that all
construction necessary for the installation has been completed, and verify all installation methods and
cable routes.
B. Examination of buildings and site shall be the responsibility of the Cabling Contractor. Examine
conditions for compliance with requirements of other sections in which related work is specified and
determine if conditions affecting performance of the work of this Section are satisfactory. Do not
proceed with work of this Section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable
manner.
C. Verify liquid-carrying pipes are not installed in or above voice and data system equipment rooms.
D. Verify fire-rated backboards are properly installed and painted following Section 06105. Notify the
Project Manager immediately and prior to installation if the backboards are not installed or painted
properly.
E. Verify conduit, raceways, and boxes are properly installed.
F. The Cabling Contractor shall provide a complete cabling infrastructure according to the written
specifications and drawings. If the scope of work to be performed by the Cabling Contractor changes,
it shall be in writing. Cabling Contractor shall respond to these changes with a complete material list,
including pricing, labor, and taxes in writing per Division 1 requirements. Cabling Contractor shall not
proceed with additional scope of work without signed approval by the General Contractor.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Surroundings
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1908/22/2024[Appendix B]
1. Repair: Patching and repair of facilities, finishes, and equipment. Any damage to building or site
caused by Cabling Contractor, including grass, paving, curbs etc., shall be restored at Cabling
Contractor’s expense to match condition prior to damage. If necessary and requested by the
General Contractor, Cabling Contractor shall provide professional services to clean or repair
scratched/soiled finishes at their own expense.
2. Cabling Contractor shall keep all foods and liquids (water, drinks, snacks, etc.) in designated
break areas.
3. The Cabling Contractor shall obtain the Architect’s and Engineer’s written permission via the
General Contractor before proceeding with any work necessitating cutting into or through any
part of building structures such as girders, beams, concrete or tile floors, partition and/or
ceilings.
4. If it becomes necessary to cut through any wall, floor, or ceiling to install any work under this
Section of the Contract or to repair any defects that may appear up to the expiration of the
guarantee period, such cutting shall be done by the Cabling Contractor under the supervision of
the General Contractor.
5. Patching of all openings cut by the Cabling Contractor, or repairing of any damage to the work
of other trades caused by cutting or by the failure of any part of the work installed under this
Contract, shall be performed by the appropriate trade but shall be paid for by the Cabling
Contractor.
6. Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or core drills
and at such locations acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Impact-type equipment shall not be
used except where specifically approved by the Architect/Engineer.
7. All openings shall be restored to “as-new” condition under the appropriate Specification Section
for the materials involved, and shall match remaining surrounding materials and/or finishes.
8. Refer to Division 1 for additional information.
3.04 DEMOLITION / REMOVAL
A. Unless indicated otherwise, all items that must be removed due to interference with work of this
contract remain the property of the Owner, and are to be salvaged at the Owner’s discretion. Any
material to be salvaged, other than Cabling Contractor’s waste material, must be approved in writing
by the General Contractor.
3.05 FIRESTOPPING.
A. The Cabling Contractor is required to properly fire-stop any penetrations through fire barriers utilized
for the placement of telecom cabling. Provide fire resistant intumescent materials to restore fire
ratings to wall, floor, or ceiling penetrations according to local and national codes.
B. Verify the hourly rating of the barrier.
C. Select the UL Listing to match or exceed the barrier.
20
D. Pay attention to cable loads and fill procedure in the Listing.
E. Seek pre-approval from the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Inspector).
F. When installing the System, be sure not to exceed the listing limitations.
G. After installation, place information labels and take digital photographs of both sides of each
firestopped penetration in the System for future reference.
H. All openings shall be restored to “as-new” condition under the appropriate Specification Section for
the materials involved, and shall match remaining surrounding materials and/or finishes.
I. Provide fire resistant materials to restore fire ratings to all wall, floor, or ceiling penetrations used
in the distribution and installation for communications cabling system. Coordinate fire stopping
procedures and materials with General Contractor and Div.7.
J. Solutions and shop drawings/submittals for fire stop materials and systems shall be presented to the
General Contractor for written approval of materials prior to purchase and installation.
K. Materials shall be installed per manufacturer instructions, be UL listed for intended use, and meet
NEC codes for fire stopping measures.
L. The material chosen shall be distinctively colored to be clearly distinguishable from other materials,
adhere to itself, and remain resilient and pliable to allow for the removal and/or addition of
communication cables without the necessity of drilling holes in the material.
M. The fire stopping material shall maintain/establish the fire rated integrity of the wall/barrier that has
been penetrated.
N. Cabling Contractor shall coordinate with electrical contractor and ensure Communications Pathway
firestopping is properly identified and labeled. Cabling Contractor shall laminate and permanently affix
to each side of a fire wall/floor penetration, the following information:
1. Installing Cabling Contractor’s name, address and phone number.
2. Alpha-numeric unique identifier (floor/penetration - A1)
3. Name of manufacturer of fire stop system.
4. Part & model numbers of system and all components.
5. Phone numbers of manufacturer’s corporate headquarters in U.S. and local distributor’s name and
phone number.
3.06 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Cabling Contractor shall remove all excess material and debris from the site upon completion of work
each day and in a manner approved by the General Contractor’s Project Manager. See Division 1.
3.07 3.GENERAL NOTES
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2108/22/2024[Appendix B]
A. Confirm administrative labeling scheme of cabling and its numerical positions on the termination
hardware. Ensure compliance with Owner’s preferred administrative labeling standards.
3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Acceptance shall be subject to substantial completion of all work, successful post-installation testing
which yields 100% PASS rating, and receipt of full documentation as described herein.
1. All Proposal Submittals and Project Record Submittals.
2. Training to Owner’s representative on methods to add and remove fire stop barriers, add and
remove isolation conduit seals and add and remove IP 67 rated outlets.
3. Maintenance manuals specified in Div. 1 to GC and Owner regarding structured cabling system,
firestopping and conduit sealing methods and manufacturer’s recommended maintenance
instructions.
4. Cabling Contractor shall complete all punch list items within five (5) days of notification by GC.
5. All communications cabling must be tested to the applicable ANSI/TIA 568 C Standards and test
results provided to the owner for review.
6. Red lines: The contractor must have a set of field drawings on site at all times, marking all outlet
labels and pathway routes as installation progresses and provide Digital scan file with-in 24
hours.
7. As Built drawings: The contractor must produce a set of electronic as-built drawings showing
outlet labels, cabling pathway, enlarged telecom room plans, rack and wall elevations in dwg and
pdf format.
8. Cable Record Schedule: The contractor must provide an electronic spreadsheet listing the each
cable Identifier, cable length, the room name and number of origin and the room name and
number of destination.
9. All documentation should be provided on a compact disk or DVD 1 month prior to substantial
completion.
B. Cabling Contractor shall complete Closeout Checklist listing status of all submittals, maintenance
manuals, Owner training, and punch list items and deliver per Division 1.
END OF SECTION 27 05 00
22
SECTION 27 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 27 00 00 General Communications Requirements
B. 27 05 00 Common Work Results
C. 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems
D. 27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways
E. 27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems
F. 27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings
G. 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling
H. 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling
I. 27 16 19 Patch Cords, Station Cords, & Cross-Connect Wire
J. 27 20 00 Data Communications Equipment
K. 27 30 00 Voice Communications Equipment
L. 27 40 00 Audio-Video Systems
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Work covered by this Section consists of furnishing labor, equipment, supplies, materials, and testing
unless otherwise specified, and in performing the following operations recognized as necessary for
the installation, termination, and labeling of grounding and bonding infrastructure as described on the
Drawings and/or required by these specifications.
B. Provide grounding system and busbar design per ANSI/TIA 607 and BICSI Standard. Coordinate
proper grounding of TMGB with electrical system design engineer.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2308/22/2024[Appendix B]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING BUSBARS
A. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB)
1. Chatsworth #10622-012 ground busbar with Chatsworth #10622-000 busbar insulators or
equivalent.
B. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB)
1. Chatsworth #10622-012 ground busbar with Chatsworth #10622-000 busbar insulators or
equivalent.
2.02 GROUNDING JOINTS AND SPLICES
A. Grounding conductor joints/splices shall be mechanical type, copper alloy, with a minimum of
two bolts and a separate section for each conductor equal to Burndy “QPX”, OZ/Gedney “XTP” or
“PMX” or Penn-Union “VX” or copper compression type with two (2) indents equal to Burndy, T&B or
Blackburn.
B. Grounding conductor terminations (lugs) shall be single barrel, mechanical screw type, copper alloy
with machined contact surfaces equal to OZ type “SL”, T&B, or Burndy or copper compression type
with two (2) indents equal to Burndy, T&B or Blackburn.
2.03 BONDING CONDUCTORS
A. Cable Tray Bonding Conductor
1. Green #8 AWG insulated bonding jumper (12” max) with appropriate lugs or manufactured
braided copper grounding jumper equal to B-Line #CAM-GJ, T&B #BD12, OZ/Gedney type “FB” or
Mono-Systems.
B. Equipment Frame Bonding Conductor
1. Panduit #TRGK672 Telecommunications Rack Grounding Kit.
C. Bonding Conductor (BC)
1. Green insulated copper bonding conductor, size as required by NEC.
2. The BC shall be, as a minimum, the same size as the TBB.
D. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)
1. Green insulated copper conductor, minimum size of No. 6 AWG. The TBB shall be sized at 2 kcmil
per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximum size of 3/0 AWG. Insulation shall meet fire
ratings of its pathway.
24
a. Table 1
1) Sizing of the TBB
2) TBB length (ft) TBB Size (AWG)
i. Less than 13 6
ii. 14-20 4
iii. 21-26 3
iv. 27-33 2
v. 34-41 1
vi. 42-52 1/0
vii. 53-66 2/0
b. Greater than 66 3/0
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2508/22/2024[Appendix B]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION
A. Installation of the TMGB
1. Install the TMGB at the bottom of plywood backboard near the outside plant entrance conduits in
the “MDF”.
2. TMGB shall be installed so that the BC for telecommunications is as short and straight as
possible.
3. Conductor shall be installed in continuous 3/4” PVC conduit.
B. Installation of the TGB
1. Install the TGB at the bottom of plywood backboard near the copper riser terminations in each
“IDF”.
2. TGB shall be installed so that the TBB for telecommunications is as short and straight as possible.
C. Installation of the TBB
1. Install Green insulated copper grounding conductor (refer to 2.03.D for conductor size) from the
TMGB to each TGB.
D. Installation of Grounding Conductor Joints/Splices
1. Install mechanical type, copper alloy, with a minimum of two bolts and a separate section for each
conductor or copper compression type with two (2) indents.
2. Install manufactured insulating cover or heavy tape insulation over joints/splices.
E. Grounding of Cable Tray
1. Install Green #8 AWG bonding jumper (12” max) with appropriate lugs at each cable tray joint or
install manufactured braided copper grounding jumper equal to B-Line #CAM-GJ, T&B #BD12,
OZ/Gedney type “FB” or Mono-Systems.
2. Install Green #8 AWG grounding conductor with appropriate lugs from side of cable tray down to
TMGB or TGB. Drill and tap side of cable tray (for appropriate size bolt, ¼” x 20 min.), making
sure that bolt does not extend into wire management part of tray.
F. Grounding of Equipment Frame
1. Install Panduit or equivalent Telecommunications Rack Grounding Kit from equipment frame to
grounded cable tray, TMGB, or TGB.
2. All termination panels shall be installed with manufacturer approved grounding washers
END OF SECTION 27 05 26
26
SECTION 27 05 28 – PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the requirements for the Pathways for Communications Systems for new Energy
Technology Center at Tarrant County College (TCC)’s (insert project name and location)
B. Communication Pathways are defined to include, but are not limited to innerduct, conduit, pull boxes,
sleeves, cable trays, supports, accessories, associated hardware and fire stopping materials. Final
design and specifications for conduits shall be made by the Electrical Engineer of Record.
C. The primary horizontal cable support system will be a cable tray, installed as shown in T drawings.
The cable tray will be properly grounded. Wall penetrations shall transition to properly firestopped 4”
sleeves, then back to cable tray.
D. Outlets having one single cable require a single gang box connected to the primary horizontal cable
tray system via one (1) 1” conduit with pull string.
E. Outlets having two or more cables require a double gang box with a single gang reducer connected
to the primary horizontal cable tray system via one (1) 1” conduit with pull string.
F. Conduit runs may not be longer than 100’ or have more than two 90 degree bends without the use of
a properly sized junction box. Insulated throat compression fittings must be used for communications
conduit runs, with termination points having plastic or grounding bushings installed.
G. Riser sleeve in MER/ER/TRs must be properly installed with bushings and firestop.
H. Cables shall be neatly dressed along common paths with properly rated Velcro tie. Maximum number
of cables per bundle shall not exceed manufacterer speecifications.
I. Layout cable pathway runs in advance to determine space requirement along pathways, and to ensure
non-interference from other trade installations.
J. Do not support communication pathway from or lay on ceiling suspension system or use electrical,
plumbing, or other pipes for support. Communication pathway supports shall be permanently
anchored to building structure or joist. Provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the
structure to which attached, and that are suitably sized to carry the weight of the pathway and cables
to be supported. Confirm with architect and/or construction manager on installation procedures for
cable support system prior to implementation.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2708/22/2024[Appendix B]
K. Work furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor as specified in this Section and as shown in E
and T drawings includes:
1. The conduits and back boxes for the work area telecommunications outlets.
2. The floor poke through hardware.
3. Fire stopping of cable tray and conduit cable pathway
L. Work furnished and installed by the Cable Contractor as specified in this section and as shown in E
and T drawings includes:
1. The overhead cable runway system (ladder rack) within the new MDF.
2. Bonding and grounding of overhead cable runway system (ladder rack), racks and cabinets within
the MER/ER/TR.
M. The telecommunications cable distribution system will be run above the finished ceiling or in the
below floor interstitial space to the nearest MER/ER/TR on the corresponding floor. Acceptable
pathway methods are conduit, cable-hooks, open cable tray or enclosed cable tray.
N. Cabling may not be visible to the public at any point outside of the MER or TRs; conduit or enclosed
cable tray are required in exposed areas.
O. All cabling pathway must be installed and supported per industry or manufacturer standard. Field
modification of pathway elements is not permitted unless the product is designed to be modified.
P. The minimum acceptable conduit size for telecommunication use in 1”; larger conduits maybe used
where applicable, however fill ratio standards must be maintained.
Q. Standard work area outlet rough-in will include one 1”min. conduit routed from accessible ceiling to a
double gang back box installed with a single gang reducer plate. The conduit termination points shall
be installed with an insulated throat fittings or bushings to protect cables during installation.
R. All cabling in mechanical or electrical rooms must be installed in conduit.
28
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where conduit, pull boxes, cable tray and other raceway sizes are not specifically shown on contract
drawings, all communication pathways shall be sized in accordance with the requirements of BICSI
and the NEC. No conduit shall be less than 1”.
B. Conduits must be designed and installed in the most direct route possible from the
telecommunications TR to the work area.
C. All conduit ends shall have plastic bushings installed before the cable is pulled into the conduit.
D. Conduits will not be run next to hot water lines, steam pipes, or other utilities that may present a
safety hazard or cause a degradation of system performance.
E. Conduits entering the TR should be designed and located allowing for the most flexibility in the
routing and racking of cables.
F. Conduits or conduit sleeves entering through the floor of the Telecommunications Room shall
terminate four (4) inches above the finished floor.
G. All metallic telecommunications conduits entering the TR/ER, or Entrance Facility shall be bonded
together, and bonded to the Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar with a #6 AWG ground
cable.
H. All in-use and spare conduits entering the TR/ER, or Entrance Facility shall be sealed to prevent
the intrusion of water, gasses, and rodents throughout the construction project. Within five days of
releasing the conduit for the installation of cable, the conduit installation contractor shall prove
all conduits to be clean and dry.
I. All conduits and cables that penetrate fire rated walls or floors must be fire stopped.
J. All OSP conduits and innerduct, used and spare, shall be plugged with watertight plugs at both ends
to prevent the intrusion of water, gasses, and rodents throughout the construction project. All OSP
conduits shall have pull lines rated at a minimum of 90 kg (200 lb) pulling tension installed. The pull
lines must be re-pulled each time an additional cable is installed. Prior to releasing the conduit for
the installation of cables, all OSP conduits must be cleaned with a brush pulled through the conduit
at least two times in the same direction and swabbed with clean rags until the rag comes out of the
conduit clean and dry. All OSP conduits must be tested with a mandrel to prove compliance with the
sweep radius requirements throughout the conduit run. Within five days of releasing the conduit for
the installation of cable, the conduit installation contractor shall prove all conduits to be clean and
dry.
2.02 CABLE HOOK SYSTEMS
A. Use of J-hooks to support communications cabling is only permitted above suspended ceiling
areas where it is not possible for building occupant to see cable jackets. No metal J-Hooks will be
accepted. J-hooks should not be used to support more than 20 cables.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2908/22/2024[Appendix B]
2.03 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. For each communication outlet indicated, provide a complete assembly of conduit, tubing or duct with
fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, connectors, nipples, couplings, locknuts, bushings,
expansion fittings, other components and accessories as needed to form a complete system of the
same type indicated.
B. See SECTION 261100 - RACEWAYS, CONDUITS AND BOXES
C. Minimum conduit size for Telecommunications Outlets shall be one (1”) inch.
2.04 WALL AND CEILING OUTLET BOXES
A. All wall outlets shall be mounted in a minimum four (4)-inch by four (4”)-inch by two and one-half (2-
1/2”)-inch deep double gang outlet box with a single gang mud-ring.
B. Outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard
hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes,
compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of individual situations.
C. See SECTION 261100 - RACEWAYS, CONDUITS AND BOXES.
2.05 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Pull boxes used with telecommunications conduits in interior locations shall be rated NEMA- 1. Pull
boxes used in damp or wet locations such as plumbing chases or out of doors shall be rated NEMA-
3R. Pull boxes shall be installed in conduits run at an interval no greater than every 100’. A pull box
shall be installed in conduit runs whenever there are two 90°sweeps, or a total of 180°of sweeps, in a
conduit run. A pull box may not be used to change the direction of a conduit run. Any deviations from
these criteria must have prior approval from TCC NCS.
B. See SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS, CONDUITS AND BOXES
2.06 PLENUM RATED FIBER OPTIC INNERDUCT
A. All fiber shall be installed in 1 ¼” corrugated, non-metallic plenum rated innerduct.
1. Innerduct shall be UL Listed with Flame Propagation compliant with UL 2024.
2. Only manufacturer’s fittings, transition adapters, terminators and fixed bends shall be used.
B. Products
1. White or orange, plenum rated, UL Listed, flexible optical fiber/communication raceway.
2. Recognized per NEC Articles, 770 and 800 for plenum areas for optical fiber and
telecommunications cables.
30
3. Provide all fittings to form a complete integrated raceway system.
C. Fabrication
1. Footage shall be sequentially marked.
2.07 CABLE TRAY SECTIONS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide metal cable trays, of types, classes and sizes
indicated; with splice plates, bolts, nuts and washers for connecting units. Construct units with
rounded edges and smooth surfaces; in compliance with applicable standards; and with the following
additional construction features.
B. Tray Sizes shall have 4” minimum usable load depth, or as noted on the drawing.
C. Straight tray sections shall have side rails fabricated as I-Beams. All straight sections shall be
supplied in standard 10’ lengths, except where shorter lengths are permitted to facilitate tray
assembly lengths as shown on drawings.
D. Tray widths shall be 18” or as shown on drawings.
E. All fittings must have a minimum radius of 24”.
F. Splice plates shall be the bolted type made as indicated below for each tray type. The resistance
of fixed splice connections between adjacent sections of tray shall not exceed .00033 ohms. Splice
plate construction shall be such that a splice may be located anywhere within the support span
without diminishing rated loading capacity of the cable tray.
G. Cable Tray Supports: Shall be placed so that the support spans do not exceed maximum span of 5’
indicated on drawings. Supports shall be constructed from 12 gauge steel formed shape channel
members 1-5/8” by 1-5/8” with necessary hardware such as Trapeze Support Kits (9G-55XX-22SH) as
manufactured by Cooper B-Line, Inc. [or engineer approved equal]. Cable trays installed adjacent to
walls shall be supported on wall mounted brackets such as B409 as manufactured by Cooper B-Line,
Inc. [or engineer approved equal].
H. Trapeze hangers shall be supported by 1/2” (minimum) diameter rods.
I. Barrier Strips: Shall be placed as specified on drawings and be fastened into the tray with self-
drilling screws.
J. Accessories - special accessories shall be furnished as required to protect, support, and install
a cable tray system. Accessories shall consist of but are not limited to; section splice plates,
expansion plates, blind-end plates, specially designed ladder dropouts, barriers, etc.
K. Cable Tray in exposed areas is required to be enclosed; such that is it is not possible for building
occupants to see cable jackets from any publicly accessible location in the building. Cable tray
above suspended ceiling is not required to be enclosed.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3108/22/2024[Appendix B]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SUMMARY
A. Final design and specifications for the Communications Systems conduits shall be made by the
Electrical Engineer and Architect of record.
B. Conduits shall be reamed to eliminate sharp edges. Metallic conduit shall be terminated with an
insulated bushing. Refer to ANSI/TIA-606 and Section 27 05 53 for administration of the pathway
system.
C. The inside of the cable tray or wireway shall be free of burrs, sharp edges or projections that can
damage cable insulation. Abrasive supports (e.g., threaded rod) shall have the portion within
the tray is protected with a smooth, non-scratching covering so that sable can be pulled without
physical damage. When a wireway passes through a partition or wall, it shall be an unbroken
length. Installation of telecommunications cables shall not exceed the fill requirements. Openings
in fire-rated walls, floors and ceilings shall be properly firestopped. Barriers between power and
telecommunications cables shall be installed per electrical code. Cable trays and wireways shall not
be used as walkways or ladders unless specifically designed and installed for that purpose.
D. Supports should be located where practicable so that connections between sections of the tray
fall between the support point and the quarter section of the span. The support centers shall be in
accordance with the load and span for the applicable class as specified in the electrical code. A
support should be placed within 600 mm (2’) on each side of any connection to a fitting. Wireways
shall be supported on 1500 mm (5’) centers unless designed for greater lengths.
E. A minimum of 300 mm (12”) access headroom shall be provided and maintained above a cable tray.
Care shall be taken to ensure that other building components e.g., air conditioning ducts) do not
restrict access to trays or wireways.
3.02 MINIMUM CLEARANCES
A. Communication Pathway minimum clearances from:
1. Minimum of 1’ parallel, 3” crossover from power cables and conduits.
2. Minimum of 6” above ceiling tiles.
3. Minimum of 24” Hot Flues, Steam pipes, Hot water pipes and other hot surfaces.
4. Minimum of 3’ separation from electrical panel boards.
5. Minimum of 12” from fluorescent fixtures.
6. Minimum of 6’ separation from electrical motors and transformers.
7. Minimum of 2” from exposed all-thread rods.
32
3.03 FIRE STOPPING.
A. Provide fire resistant materials to restore fire ratings to all wall, floor, or ceiling penetrations used
in the distribution and installation for communications cabling system. Coordinate fire stopping
procedures and materials with General Contractor and Electrical Contractor.
B. Solutions and shop drawings/submittals for fire stop materials and systems shall be presented to the
General Contractor for written approval of materials prior to purchase and installation.
C. Materials shall be installed per manufacturer instructions, be UL listed for intended use, and meet
NEC codes for fire stopping measures.
D. The material chosen shall be distinctively colored to be clearly distinguishable from other materials,
adhere to itself, and remain resilient and pliable to allow for the removal and/or addition of
communication cables without the necessity of drilling holes in the material.
E. The fire stopping material shall maintain/establish the fire rated integrity of the wall/barrier that has
been penetrated.
END OF SECTION 27 05 28
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3308/22/2024[Appendix B]
SECTION 27 05 43 – UNDERGROUND DUCT AND RACEWAYS
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the requirements for the Underground Ducts and Raceways for the Tarrant
County College (TCC)’s (Insert Project name and location).
B. Provide all services, labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete and proper
installation of exterior telecommunications pathways as called for in these specifications and related
T, E and C drawings.
C. This section includes minimum requirements and installation methods for the following:
1. Trenching and Excavation
2. Underground Conduit Systems
3. Communications Vaults
D. The new communications service entrance facility will be in the ER in the new construction space. The
new service entrance pathway will consist of four (4) 4” conduits from the (Insert building name) ER to
the (Insert the connecting building name and location). (Insert conduit routing description)
E. To comply with fire regulations the two of the conduit pathways must be installed on north side of the
new tunnel and two conduits on the south side.
F. All 4” conduits shall be installed with three (3) 3”-3 cell fabric mesh innerducts or four (4) 1” Ribbed
high-density polyethylene ( HDEP ) with pre-installed pull tape from end to end, installed per
manufacturer guidelines.
G. Coordinate with TCCD and Fire Alarm Designer to ensure that NFPA conduit separation requirements
are met.
34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT SYSTEM
A. Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit
1. Rigid steel shall be UL 6 and ANSI C80.1 hot-dipped galvanized steel.
2. Both ends of conduits shall be threaded with factory installed thread protectors.
3. Fittings shall be threaded Type UL 6/1242 and ANSI C80.1 and C80.6 hot-dipped galvanized steel.
4. Expansion fittings shall be OZ Type “DX”, Appleton Type “XJ”, Crouse-Hinds Type “XC” or an
approved equal.
B. Multi-cell Fabric Mesh innerduct:
1. All fabric mesh ducts shall be installed per manufacturer’s requirements.
2. Only manufacturer’s fittings, transition adapters, terminators, accessories and installation kits
shall be used.
3. All fabric mesh ducts shall be populated with a measured pull tape.
4. Manufacturer: MaxCell.
C. Polyethylene Tubing
1. 1” inside to be ribbed.
2. Only manufacturer’s fittings, transition adapters, terminators, accessories and installation kits
shall be used.
3. Shall be populated with a measured pull tape.
4. Manufacturer: PETROFLEXNA Part # P100NTC-7.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3508/22/2024[Appendix B]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which the new exterior telecommunications pathways are to be
installed. Provide notification, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
B. Verify field measurements and pathway routing conditions are as shown on drawings. Provide
notification, in writing, of conditions deviating from drawings.
C. The beginning of the telecommunications pathway installation indicates Cabling Contractor
acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING:
A. Follow Civil and Electrical specifications.
B. Sequencing of work shall be coordinated with all other trades and be according to Section 01110
Sequencing of Work. Coordinate the voice and data communications work with other work in the same
area.
C. Cabling Contractor shall call appropriate utility locate service to locate any existing conduits (Power,
Gas, Telephone, and other utilities) prior to start of work.
D. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the applicable Sitework provisions within Division 2 for
voice and data communications work excavating and backfilling.
E. Coordinate excavating, trenching and backfilling Civil, Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical drawings.
Voice and Data Communications duct banks shall be independent of any other systems.
F. Schedule operation so dust and other contaminants will not interfere with other construction.
G. Refer to Civil contract documents for information regarding required depths, slope and grade and
additional information regarding trenches.
H. If any unknown and/or uncharted utilities are encountered during excavation, promptly notify
Architect/ Engineer and wait for his instructions before proceeding.
I. Trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests have been made by the Contractor and
approved by the Architect/Engineer and any local authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Backfill up to grade shall be in maximum 6” lifts with minimum 95% compaction of lifts. Refer to
Specifications within Division 2 or elsewhere in Contract Documents for additional trenching and
backfill requirements.
K. Opening and Re-closing Pavement, Landscape Areas and Lawns: Where excavation requires the
opening of existing walks, street, drives, other existing pavement or lawns, such surfaces shall be cut
as required to install new conduit and to make new connections to existing conduits. The sizes of the
cut shall be held to a minimum, consistent with the work to be accomplished. After the installation
of the new work is completed and the excavation has been backfilled and flooded, the area shall be
36
patched or replaced, using materials to match those cut out or removed.
3.03 CONDUIT SYSTEM PLACEMENT
A. Follow Civil and Electrical specifications.
B. Stub out conduits through sleeves into the new ER a minimum of 3” AFF and attach connector and
bushings with grounding lugs.
C. Install fiber mesh innerduct in new conduits and extend them three feet into the building space.
D. Plug the ends of the new conduits with watertight rubber conduit plugs, conduit caulking compound,
or conduit caps to ensure foreign matter does not enter the buildings.
3.04 CABLE ROUTING HARDWARE
A. Perform installation of routing hardware including anchoring and supports, grounding and bonding,
etc.
B. Place new ladder, pulling-in irons, cable racks, “S” rack supports in the communications vaults as
required for backbone cable routing.
C. No more than two 90-degree bends ( or a total of 180 degree ) should be designed or installed
between pulling points, a 90-degree bend should never be exceeded.
3.05 SAFETY
A. The contractor must comply with OHSA regulations for asbestos, lead, and confined spaces.
B. All applicable state, federal and local safety regulations shall be adhered to and all operations shall
be conducted in a safe manner.
C. Guard communications vault openings in compliance with National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
D. When covers of communications vaults, hand holes, or vaults are removed, the opening shall be
promptly protected with a barrier, temporary cover, or other suitable guard.
E. Test for gas in communications vaults and unventilated vaults per National Electrical Safety Code
(NESC) including, but not limited to:
1. The atmosphere shall be tested for combustible or flammable gases before entry.
2. Where combustible or flammable gases are detected, the work area shall be ventilated and made
safe before entry.
3. Forced continuous ventilation shall be provided,
4. Provision shall be made for adequate continuous supply of air. Note: The term adequate includes
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3708/22/2024[Appendix B]
evaluation of both the quantity and quality of the air.
5. Employees shall not smoke in communications vaults.
6. Where open flames must be used in communications vaults or vaults, extra precautions shall be
taken to ensure adequate ventilation.
3.06 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Mark the project drawings with notations reflecting any variations from the base specifications and
drawings including as-built conduit routing.
B. As-built shall be provided in AutoCad 2007 or newer .dwg format.
END OF SECTION 27 05 43
38
SECTION 27 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the requirements for the Identification for Communications Systems for the
Tarrant County College, (insert project name and location)
B. Work covered by this Section shall consist of furnishing labor, equipment and materials necessary for
the labeling of the telecommunications infrastructure as described on the Drawings and/or required
by these specifications.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Identification and administration work specified herein shall comply with the latest applicable
requirements of:
1. Tarrant County College (TCC)
2. ANSI/TIA - 569 Pathway and Spaces
3. ANSI/TIA - 568-B Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
4. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual.
5. UL 969.
1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ADMINISTRATION
A. Administration of the telecommunications infrastructure includes documentation of cables,
termination hardware, patching and cross-connection facilities, conduits, other cable pathways,
TRs, and other telecommunications spaces. All TCC facilities shall apply and maintain a system for
documenting and administering the telecommunications infrastructure.
B. TCCD maintains a campus wide numbering scheme for communications rooms, wallfields, racks,
equipment, patch panels and voice and data outlets. All equipment labels are shown in the Telecom
rack elevations and Security wallfield drawings.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3908/22/2024[Appendix B]
C. Telecommunications Infrastructure Records must be maintained in a computer spreadsheet, or in a
computer database. Paper records are encouraged, but are optional. A cable record is prepared for
each backbone cable. The record will show the cable name, and must describe the origin point and
destination point of the cable. The cable record will record what services and/or connections are
assigned to each cable pair or strand. An equipment record is prepared for services distributed from a
certain piece of equipment, such as a router, or a system such as the telephone system PBX.
D. TCC requires the installer to keep accurate, up-to-date Installation or Construction Drawings. At
a minimum, the Installation Drawings shall show pathway locations and routing, configuration of
telecommunications spaces including backboard and equipment rack configurations, and wiring
details including identifier assignments.
E. TCC requires the installer to provide a complete and accurate set of as-built drawings. The as-built
drawings shall record the identifiers for major infrastructure components including; the pathways,
spaces, and wiring portions of the infrastructure which may each may have separate drawings if
warranted by the complexity of the installation, or the scale of the drawings. Along with hard copies,
as-built documents shall be provided as part of closeout documents in AutoCad 2010 or newer .dwg
format.
F. Voice and data outlets and cables shall by labeled with the MER/ER/TR Number – Rack/ Wallfield
Designation – Rack Unit Location of Patch Panel – Port Number. Coordinate with TCCD.
G. Outlet numbers shall be marked by permanent means on each cable at the outlet and at the TR.
40
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LABELS
A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.
B. Shall be preprinted or computer printed type. Hand written labels are not acceptable.
C. Where insert type labels are used provide clear plastic cover over label.
D. Outside plant labels shall be totally waterproof even when submerged.
E. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Panduit
2. Brady Corporation
3. Equivalent
F. Equipment Room Copper, Fiber, and Coax Backbone Cable Labels
1. Panduit Part#LS7-75NL-1 or Brady#WML-1231-292
G. Equipment Room Copper, Fiber, and Coax Horizontal Cable Labels
1. Panduit Part#LS7-75NL-1 or Brady#WML-317-292
H. Work Area Copper, Fiber, and Coax Riser Cable Labels
1. Panduit Part#LS7-75NL-1 or Brady #WML-317-292
I. Patch Panel Labels
1. Panduit Part #LS7-38-1 or Brady #CL-111-619
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4108/22/2024[Appendix B]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 IDENTIFICATION & LABELING
A. The size, color, and contrast of all labels should be selected to ensure that the identifiers are easily
read. Labels should be visible during the installation of and normal maintenance of the infrastructure.
B. Labels should be resistant to the environmental conditions at the point of installation (such as
moisture, heat, or ultraviolet light), and should have a design life equal to or greater than that of the
labeled component.
C. All labels shall be printed or generated by a mechanical device.
3.02 TELECOMMUNICATION IDENTIFIERS
A. All voice and data outlets and patch panels shall be clearly marked using permanent means.
1. Voice and data outlets shall by labeled with: ER/TR Number – Rack/ Wallfield Designation – Rack
Unit Location of Patch Panel – Port Number. (ie. XX-A-38-01) Refer to drawings for details
2. Outlet numbers shall be marked by permanent means on each cable at the outlet and at the TR.
3.03 LABELING PROCEDURES
A. Visibility and durability
1. The size, color, and contrast of all labels should be selected to ensure that the identifiers are
easily read. Labels should be visible during the installation of and normal maintenance of the
infrastructure.
2. Labels should be resistant to the environmental conditions at the point of installation (such as
moisture, heat, or ultraviolet light), and should have a design life equal to or greater than that of
the labeled component.
3. Labels are generally of either the adhesive or insert type. All labels must be legible, resistant to
defacement, and maintain adhesion to the application surface.
4. Outside plant labels shall be totally waterproof, even when submerged.
5. Labels applied directly to a cable shall have a clear vinyl wrapping applied over the label and
around the cable to permanently affix the label.
6. Other types of labels, such as tie-on labels, may be used. However, the label must be appropriate
for the environment in which it is used, and must be used in the manner intended by the
manufacturer.
42
B. Mechanical generation
1. All cable and faceplate labels shall be printed or generated by a mechanical device.
END OF SECTION 27 05 53
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4308/22/2024[Appendix B]
SECTION 27 11 00 – COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the requirements for the Communications Equipment Room Fittings for the
Tarrant County College (TCC)’s (insert project name and location)
B. Communications Equipment Room Fittings (Insert project specific information; sample below)
1. The new communications service entrance facility will be in the 1ST level ER. The new service
entrance pathway will consist of four (4) 4” conduits from the (insert project information).
2. Space for new outside plant copper and fiber cable and terminating hardware mounted in existing
19” racks will be provided in the ER.
3. The new ER will be in room XX on the first level of the facility with (insert project information)
TR on the second floor and third; in rooms YY and ZZ. The rooms shall have the following
characteristics:
a. Size per floor plans
b. 24/7 environmental controls - 18 °C to 24 °C (64 °F to 75 °F). The humidity range should be
30% to 55% relative humidity.
c. Ceiling height a minimum of 10’. above finished floor (AFF)
d. No false ceilings
e. Light fixture height a minimum of 8.5’ AFF, with a minimum equivalent of 500 lux (50 foot
candles) measured 3’ AFF, with 30% emergency light fixtures, if available
f. Dedicated TR power panels fed from UPS distribution with generator-backed power source.
g. A minimum of one duplex isolated ground 120-volt power outlet per wall with a maximum of
two duplex outlets per circuit
h. Rack power per Telcom Details.
i. ¾ “void-free” marine plywood on each wall, 8’ high, painted with at least two coats of light
colored fire retardant paint and stenciled with Rack Unit indicators per Section 270553 and T
drawings.
44
j. A Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus Bar (TMGB) in the MDF and Telecommunications
Grounding Bus Bar (TGB) in the IDF and a Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications
(BCT) that bonds the TMGB to the electrical power ground compliant with ANSI J STD-607 A
Standards
k. Equipment racks and overhead runway (ladder rack) system per T drawings.
l. Two 4” conduits with fiber mesh innerduct from the ER to 2nd level TR.
m. Cage covered fire suppression elements.
n. A floor rating greater than 4.8 kPa (100 lbf/ft2) distributed loading
o. A floor rating greater than 8.8 kilonewton (kN) (2000 lbf) concentrated loading
p. Fully-opening, secured, access controlled doors that are at least 4 ft wide and 6.7 ft [80 in])
tall.
C. MER and TR Room sizing shall conform to BICSI recommended sizing standard based on building use
and square footage served with accommodation for min. 50% future growth in rack space. Minimum
Room size is 9’x10 for new construction.
D. MER/ER/TR should not be located adjacent to restrooms due to the risk of flooding.
E. MER/ER/TR rooms in multi-floor facilities shall be stacked.
F. No open through hole penetrations are allowed to be made from conditioned space to unconditioned
space No crawl space or roof access is permitted in MER/ER/TR.
G. No ceilings are permitted in MER/ER/TR rooms.
H. No means of liquid conveyance (water lines, sanitary or roof drain pipes, thermal, water, etc) may
pass through MER/ER/TRs. Exception: Sprinklers may be installed in telecom rooms as required by
NFPA Code. Sprinkler heads must be caged.
I. Do not locate ductwork or plumbing clean outs in MER/ER/TRs
J. Lighting level at 50 foot candles with lighting fixtures located off set from ladder tray. Cross reference
with MEP.
K. TR rooms shall be air conditioned and humidity controlled. Inline cooling units may be required for
server applications, coordinate with TCCD and MEP.
L. MER/ER/TR’s air conditioning should be supported by emergency power if network attached devices
in the building will be running on emergency power.
M. MER/ER/TR convenience outlets - Provide a minimum of one duplex isolated ground 120-volt power
outlet on each wall with a maximum of two duplex outlets per circuit. These circuits are to be
dedicated to the TR and are not allowed to serve any other load.
N. UPS buffered, generator backed power is required for all MER/ER/TRs as security and life safety
systems are controlled by the network. UPS buffered power is required for all new TR build outs.
Elements supported by Telecom UPS include all rack-mounted and wall mounted equipment housed in
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4508/22/2024[Appendix B]
the MER or TRs; excluding building lighting.
O. Large format expandable UPS Cabinets are preferred and usually sized to support the requirements of
multiple stacked TRs with rooms being served by UPS fed power panels dedicated to each MER and
TR. Coordinate UPS locations and power connectivity requirements with TCCD and MEP.
P. Equipment Rack Power - Each equipment rack shall be supplied with one L5-20R Receptacles
attached to the ladder tray above each rack.
46
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RELAY RACKS
A. Equipment racks shall be capable of accepting 19” equipment, self-supporting and manufactured from
high-strength steel or aluminum with two top brackets included for additional strength.
B. Finish color shall be black. Mounting holes shall be drilled and tapped each side at 5/8”-5/8”-1/2”
patterns compatible with EIA 1-1/4”-5/8” alternating patterns.
C. The rack shall include base flanges with mounting holes drilled through for securing the rack to the
floor. Each mounting hole must be at least 5/8” in diameter.
D. Where the rack is to be mounted to VCT flooring or bare concrete, an insulating pad must be used,
and care must be taken that anchors, used to secure the rack to the floor, do not encounter any
reinforcing steel embedded in the concrete slab.
E. Racks shall be manufactured by Panduit or APC - Part Number #CMR19X84
F. Server racks shall be manufactured by ACP – Part Number AR3100 (NetShelter SX 42U)
2.02 CABLE MANAGEMENT
A. Vertical cable management shall be double-sided and narrow or wide depending upon application
requirements. Each manager section shall have a black finish. Lockable latching sections and
protective edge guards shall be included.
1. 6” Vertical Manager for use on outside of rows: Panduit – Part Number #PRV6;
2. 6” Vertical Manager Door: Panduit – Part Number #PRD6;
3. 10” Vertical Manager for use between two racks: Panduit – Part Number #PRV10;
4. 10” Vertical Manager Door: Panduit – Part Number #PRD10;
B. Horizontal cable management shall be capable of attachment to a 19” rack, maximum 6” deep and
maximum 2.8” high. Each manager shall have a black finish. Coordinate with TCCD IT Department for
Panduit Part Numbers.
2.03 CABLE RUNWAY
A. Subject to compliance with these specifications, cable runways shall be as manufactured by Panduit,
B-Line, Chatsworth Products, Inc., or equivalent. Cable runways (ladder rack) are required within the
MER/ER/TR’s to provide a suitable pathway to route all cabling into and out of termination equipment,
mounted in equipment racks or on backboards attached to walls, and pathway spaces beyond the ER/
TR.
B. Runway: Provide UL classified cable runway and components. Such products are to be UL classified
as to their suitability as an equipment-grounding conductor. Cable runway and components are to
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4708/22/2024[Appendix B]
have rounded edges and smooth surfaces in compliance with applicable standards, and with the
following additional construction features:
1. Dimension: The cross sectional area of the side rail shall be greater than 0.20 square inches.
The height of the side rail must remain at 1-1/2”.
2. Material and Finish: All cable runways and components shall be made of tubular steel and
finished with flat black powder coat paint or gold chem film over zinc plating.
3. Construction: Cable runways are prefabricated metal structures consisting of two longitudinal
side rails connected by individual transverse members. Cable runway shall be constructed
of 1-1/2” x 3/8” x .065” rectangular steel tubing. Cross members shall be a single continuous
rectangular tube ½” x 1’ x .065” with radiused corners. Cross members shall be welded to
stringers at 9” intervals with ends finished to protect installers and cables.
4. Cable runway width shall be 12” except as otherwise shown on the Telecommunications Drawings.
5. Cross members shall be spaced every 9” at a minimum.
C. UL Classified Runway Butt-Splice Kit: Consists of 4 splice plates, U-shaped. Overall, 5” by 5/8” by
11/16” thick. Provided with 7/16” by 3/8” cutout for insertion of trimmed head bolt. Bolt measures
3/8” diameter by 2-1/2” long provided with hex nut and lock washer.
D. UL Classified Runway Junction Splice Kit: L-shaped splice angles. Overall, 2” x 2” by 1-1/2”, 3/16”
thick. Secured to cable runway by 3/8” diameter by 1-1/2” hex bolts, nuts and lock washers.
E. UL Classified 90 Degree Runway Splice Kit: Outside Clamp - Overall, 5-3/4” x ¾” by 5/8”, minimum
0.10 thick. Provided with 7/16” by 7/16” cutout for insertion of trimmed head bolt. Bolt measures 3/8”
diameter by 3-1/4” long. Provided with hex nut and lock washer. Inside Edge Clamp - Overall, 2-9/16”
x 15/16” x 5/8”, minimum 0.10 thick. Provided with 7/16” x 7/16” cutout for insertion of trimmed head
bolt.
F. UL Classified 45 Degree Runway Splice Kit: Outside Clamp - Overall, 4-7/16” x 5/8” x ¾”, minimum
0.10” thick. Provided with 7/16” x 7/16” cutout for insertion of trimmed head bolt. Bolt measures
3/8” diameter by 2-11/16” long provided with hex nut and lock washer. Inside Edge Clamp - Overall,
2-9/16” x 15/16” x 5/8” minimum 0.10” thick. Provided with 7/16” x 7/16” cutout for insertion of
trimmed head bolts.
48
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Room XXX shall be considered the ER for this project. Room YYY and ZZZ shall be considered TRs.
1. TRs are generally considered a zone serving facility. These rooms may be equipped with fiber
and copper cables, rack mounted termination blocks/patch panels, rack mounted copper and
fiber patch panel terminations, vertical and horizontal cable management systems and equipment
racks. Cable Contractor shall provide proper identifications/labeling scheme for all structured
cabling components installed in these rooms.
2. Cabling within racks and enclosures: provide adequate length of cabling. Train conductors to
termination terminal points that follow manufactures installation procedures for maintaining cable
performance specifications. Provide lacing/mounting bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining
connections, and to stop bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by
manufacturer.
3. Equipment Racks: Provide 19” wide x 7’-0” tall racks with number of vertical rack sections as
required to allow space for termination of all fiber and data/voice cabling plus mounting space
for multi-port concentrators (Hub/Switches) required to cross-connect all data jacks. Refer to T.
Drawings for rack count and location.
4. Locate/space racks and enclosures according to ANSI/EIA guidelines for front and around access.
5. Vertical wire management: double-sided vertical rack cabling sections. Reference T. Drawings
6. Entrance: Arrange and coordinate locations of distribution frames, patch panels, cross-
connections in communication rooms and racks to optimize space requirements of any service
provider requirements, telephone system and LAN equipment.
7. Provide cable runway in equipment room above all racks and up to runway/conduits/sleeve’s
entering room from corridors to form a complete runway system connecting all hardware
installations. Attach grounding lugs to each rack/cable raceway, conduit, etc. Refer to ‘T’ drawings
for details.
8. Install trays overhead along the equipment rows, leading to the cross-connects. Coordinate tray
locations with lighting, air-handling systems, and fire extinguishing systems so that fully loaded
trays will not obstruct or impede their operation. In the United States, NEC Article 392 provides
requirements for cable trays.
9. Provide horizontal cable runways. Equip each 19” rack with overhead ladder style cable runway
installed between the wall and horizontal/equipment racks. Refer to COMMUNICATIONS “T”
drawings for proposed locations and sizing of each runway. Securely attach to wall studs with
support brackets (and racks if applicable), in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
10. Provide ground lug for each 19” rack. Racks shall be grounded to wall mounted ground bus bar
using #6 AWG stranded, green jacketed, insulated copper conductor. Furnish all required bonding
material and hardware, and bond to building grounding electrode subsystem TMGB in ER. If crimp
connectors are used to bond the #6 AWG wire, follow NEC bonding procedures/specifications.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4908/22/2024[Appendix B]
11. An inert dielectric material shall separate dissimilar metals apt to corrode through electrolysis
under the environmental operating conditions specified.
END OF SECTION 27 11 00
50
SECTION 27 13 00 – COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work covered by this Section shall consist of furnishing labor, equipment, supplies, materials,
and testing unless otherwise specified, and in performing the following operations recognized
as necessary for the installation, termination, and labeling of copper backbone infrastructure as
described on the Drawings and/or required by these specifications.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 27 00 00 General Communications Requirements
B. 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems
C. 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding
D. 27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways
E. 27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems
F. 27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings
G. 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling
H. 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling
I. 27 16 19 Patch Cords, Station Cords,& Cross-Connect Wire
J. 27 20 00 Data Communications Equipment
K. K27 30 00 Voice Communications Equipment
L. 27 40 00 Audio-Video Systems
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall coordinate the work specified in this Section with the work in other parts of the
Contract document.
B. Plans in general are diagrammatic. It is the full responsibility of the Contractor to be familiar with
the location of equipment involved under the work of other trades to eliminate conflicts between the
multipair copper cable installation and the work of other trades.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 5108/22/2024[Appendix B]
C. All questions and issues with regard to coordination shall be directed to the Owner.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals for substitutions or modifications shall be made to the Owner for approval prior to start
of work. (See Section 27 0500)
B. The Cabling Contractor shall submit copper cable pulling plans for all multipair copper cables with a
pair count of 25 pairs or greater, that includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Each cable run and route.
2. Date and duration of the pull.
3. Pulling methodology and equipment setups.
4. Pulling tension calculations for each pull in the run.
5. Safety issues and precautions to be taken.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Verification: The Owner will maintain inspection personnel on the job site. It is incumbent upon the
Cabling Contractor to verify that the installation and material used has been inspected before it is
enclosed within building features, or otherwise hidden from view. The Cabling Contractor shall bear
costs associated with uncovering or exposing installations or features that have not been inspected.
B. Equipment Qualifications: The Cabling Contractor is to use equipment and rigs designed for pulling,
placement and termination of multipair copper cable; including reel trucks, mechanical mules,
sheaves, shoes, anchors etc., and equipment for drilling masonry, installing anchors, etc., to install
support and cable management hardware.
C. Cable Testing
1. Complete end-to-end test results for all copper UTP and fiber optic lines installed are required.
2. All fiber optic cable must be visually inspected and optically tested on the reel upon delivery
to the installation site. Using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), an access jumper
with like fiber, a pigtail, and a mechanical splice, all fibers shall be tested for continuity and
attenuation. Testing for continuity and attenuation on the reel must confirm factory specifications
to ensure that the fiber optic cable was not damaged during shipment. The test results must
match the results of the factory-attached tag on the reel, or the fiber shall not be used. Reel data
sheet must be provided showing test results.
3. End to end (bi-directional) test measurements shall be provided for singlemode and multimode
fibers (2 wavelengths per test is required). Test results must be submitted
4. for review as part of the installation inspection requirements. Test results shall be in paper form
and electronic form, and must contain the names and signatures of the technicians performing
52
the tests.
5. Testing shall be performed on 100% of the fibers in the completed end-to-end system. ANSI/TIA/
EIA-568-A, Annex H, provides the technical criteria and formulae to be used in fiber optic testing.
Note however, that all TCCD fiber must be tested, rated and guaranteed for Ethernet GigaSPEED
1000B-X performance. Additionally, all fiber optic cable links must pass all installation and
performance tests both recommended and mandated by the cable manufacturer.
D. Format
1. Test Results must be submitted in 2 formats. First, must be original file(s) downloaded from tester.
Second, the file must be cohesively placed in excel format with the following fields: MER/ER/TR
RM # / RM # of drop / Port # / all relevant test information in as many fields as necessary.
2. Care, with reference to the above format criteria, should be taken when recording the information
in the tester, proper consistency with port identification is required.
3. As Built drawings must be submitted with .dgn or .dwg file extensions.
E. Delivery
1. Test Results may be electronically submitted to the TCC IT Department. Contact information will
be provided after the contract is awarded and before project completion.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 5308/22/2024[Appendix B]
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PROTECTOR PANELS
A. Submit Protector Panel information for Owner approval
2.02 COPPER TERMINATION HARDWARE
A. 100 pair rack mountable 110 blocks. Panduit – Part Number: #DPA485/e88110U GY
2.03 FIBER OPTIC CABLE
A. Fiber optic cabling:
1. 9 um OS2 24 Strand Fiber OSP Fiber. Panduit Number : FSTN924
2. 50 um OM4 12 Strand Fiber OSP Fiber. Panduit Number: FOTNZ12
3. 9 um OS2 6 Strand Fiber OSP Fiber. Panduit Number : FSTN906
4. 50 um OM4 6 Strand Fiber OSP Fiber. Panduit Number: FOTNZ06
5. 24 Strand 50-micron OM3 Multimode OSP fiber. Panduit Part Number: FOTNX24
6. 6 Strand 50-micron OM3 Multimode OSP fiber. Panduit Part Number: FOTNX06
7. 12 Strand Singlemode OSP fiber. Panduit Part Number: FSTN912
8. 6 Strand Singlemode OSP fiber. Panduit Part Number: FSTN906
9. 6 Strand plenum rated single mode armored fiber from the MDF Room to the Fire Alarm
Cabinet and terminate at each end for Fire Alarm Service.
10. Should cable availability become an issue due to excessive manufacturer lead times,
approved equal fiber optic cabling manufactured by Corning may be submitted for owner
consideration. Owner must approve substitution prior to ordering or installation.
B. All fiber optic cable with loose tube construction installed underground shall be gel filled or be
constructed of appropriate waterproofing compounds.
C. All newly installed fiber optic cable shall be placed inside fiber optic innerduct.
D. Fiber optic cables shall always have minimum 20’ service loop at the terminating ends and all
approved splice points. Place service loops with large bend radii neatly bundled on walls or on the
attached to the bottom side of ladder trays in ‘figure-8’ configuration.
2.04 FIBER TERMINATION HARDWARE
54
A. 1 Rack Unit 48-port Fiber Enclosures with LC adaptors. Panduit – Part Number: Panduit # FRME1;
Multimode Fiber Adaptor Panels #FAP6WAQCLCZ; Singlemode Fiber Panels #FAP6WBUDLCZ
B. 2 Rack Unit, 72-port Fiber Enclosures with LC adaptors. Panduit – Part Number: Panduit # FRME2;
Multimode Fiber Adaptor Panels #FAP6WAQCLCZ; Singlemode Fiber Panels #FAP6WBUDLCZ
C. 4 Rack Unit 144-port Fiber Enclosures with LC adaptors. Panduit – Part Number: Panduit # FRME1;
Multimode Fiber Adaptor Panels #FAP6WAQCLCZ; Singlemode Fiber Panels #FAP6WBUDLCZ
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 5508/22/2024[Appendix B]
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. The Cabling Contractor shall submit the cable pulling plan to the Owner prior to commencement of
the operation.
B. The route of multipair copper cable installation is as described herein or as shown on the Drawings.
C. When breaking out any multipair copper cable of 50 pairs or greater for splicing or termination, the
binder groups shall have PIC color coded cable ties attached to the cable at the point of fanout from
super groups for splicing, and at the point of fanout for termination on termination blocks. (Panduit
Part Number PAN-TY PPC25X50F).
D. The Cabling Contractor shall ensure the cables are pulled into the ducts in a manner observing the
bend radii and tension restrictions of the cable.
E. The Cabling Contractor shall use appropriate shoes, guides, wheels and lubricants to prevent damage
to the cable jacket and sheath during installation.
F. Install shield bond connectors to the shields of all cables terminated at the Protector Panels.
G. The Cabling Contractor shall apply an appropriate amount of damming compound over the end of
filled copper cables in indoor or dry environments to prevent seepage of cable filling compounds
where encapsulant will not be used.
H. Prior to closure assembly in dry or indoor installations, all exposed cable pairs shall have the filling
compound thoroughly cleaned off the cable insulation using appropriate cleaning solvents.
I. All pairs spliced shall be tested and all splice-related faults cleared prior to sealing the closure
assembly.
J. All multipair copper cable pairs installed shall be tested to TIA/EIA 568A, Category 3 equivalent
performance specifications. In addition, provide loop resistance measurements in ohms and dB loss
at 1KHz, 8KHz, and 256KHz.
K. The Owner is to be notified at least 24 hours prior to testing to allow observation at the Owner’s
discretion. If the Owner confirms his intention to observe, a reasonable starting time will be agreed
upon. Should the Owner not be present at the scheduled commencement time, the Cabling Contractor
may begin testing as scheduled.
L. All test results are to be recorded and turned over to the Owner for checking.
3.02 CABLE AND TERMINATION PANEL LABELING
A. Label the installed cables in accordance with Section 27 05 53
56
3.03 CABLE SUPPORT
A. Provide cable supports and clamps to attach cables to backboards and walls.
1. Attach horizontal and vertical backbone cables at 2-foot intervals using Owner approved supports.
B. Attach cables to manhole racks using Owner approved methods
3.04 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Provide three (3) copies of E and three (3) copies of C size prints along with CADD files in .dwg or
.dgn formats showing floor plans with room numbers and actual backbone cabling and pathway
locations and labeling. The deliverable is required within 5 business days of final cable testing.
B. Red Line Drawings: Contract must kept one (1) E size set of floor plans on site during work hours with
installation progress marked and backbone cable labels noted. Contractor may be asked to produce
these drawings for examination during construction meetings or field inspections.
END OF SECTION 27 13 00
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 5708/22/2024[Appendix B]
SECTION 27 15 00 – COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the requirements for the Communications Horizontal Cabling for the TCCD
(insert project name and location).
B. All voice and data horizontal cables shall consist of plenum rated, Category 6, 4 pair UTP copper
terminated in the ER on 48 port, RJ45 568B, Category 6 patch panels. The maximum horizontal
distance shall be 295’.
C. All information outlets will be flush-type mounted into conduits and boxes. Typical outlets will be used
in the offices and consist of two voice and two data cables with 568B outlet configurations.
D. Each horizontal cable must be tested and documentation provided.
E. Cabling Contractor must keep updated redline drawings and provide as-built documentation in both
print and electronic formats.
58
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. PanGen: Panduit General
2.02 UTP COPPER CABLE
A. Category 6 Plenum Rated CMP (Color: Blue). General Cable - GENSPEED 6000 Product #7131900.
B. Category 6 Plenum Rated CMP (Color: Yellow) for security cameras. General Cable - GENSPEED 6000
Product # 7131942.
C. Category 6 Plenum Rated CMP (Color: Purple) for wireless access points General cable - GENSPEED
10G Product # 7141825.
2.03 PATCH PANELS
A. 48 port Category 6 modular angled patch panels. Panduit - Product Number: #CPPLA48WBUY
2.04 COPPER CONNECTORS
A. Category 6 modular jack inserts: Data (blue) Panduit - Product Number: #CJ688TGBU.
B. For wireless access points Category 6A modular jack inserts: Data (violet) Panduit - Product Number:
# CJ6X88TGVL.
2.05 WALL PLATES
A. 4 port plastic faceplate (Color: International White). Panduit - Product Number: # CFPE4IWY
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 5908/22/2024[Appendix B]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Follow manufacturer’s installation guidelines.
B. All data and voice cabling and terminations and termination hardware shall be TIA/EIA wiring
configuration T568B
C. The length of each individual run of horizontal cable from the administration subsystem
(Telecommunications Room) to the Telecommunication Outlet shall not exceed 270’.
D. The 4 pair UTP cable shall be Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) listed type CMP.
E. Pay strict attention to the manufacturer’s guidelines on bend radii and maximum pulling tension
during installation. Notice that the recommended minimum bend radius for a cable during installation
is typically greater than the recommended bend radius after the cable is installed. This is to minimize
tension and deformation as the cables pass around corners during installation. The maximum pull-
force guideline for 4-pair horizontal balanced twisted pair cables is 110 N (25 lb).
F. UTP Cabling:
1. Provide a service loop (for re-termination) for horizontal cables. Place at least 12” of service loop
in outlet box.
2. The horizontal distance is the cable length from the mechanical termination of the media at the
horizontal cross-connect in the TR to the telecommunications outlet/connector in the work area.
The maximum horizontal distance shall be 295’, independent of media type. The length of the
cross-connect jumpers and patch cords in the cross-connect facilities, including horizontal cross-
connects, jumpers, and patch cords that connect horizontal cabling with equipment or backbone
cabling, should not exceed 5 m (16’) in length. For each horizontal channel, the total length
allowed for cords in the work area plus patch cords or jumpers plus equipment cables or cords in
the telecommunications room shall not exceed 10 m (33’).
3. Cable and components shall be visually inspected for proper installation. Cable stress, such as
that caused by tension on suspended cable runs and tightly cinched bundles, shall be minimized.
Plenum rated Velcro ties used to bundle cables should be applied loosely to allow the Velcro tie
to slide around the cable bundle. The vector ties should not be cinched so tightly as to deform
the cable sheath. Cable placement should not deform the cable sheath.
4. Minimum bend radius: The minimum bend radius for cable will vary depending on the condition
of the cable during installation (tensile load) and after installation when the cable is at rest (no-
load).
5. The minimum bend radius, under no-load conditions, for 4-pair unshielded twisted-pair (UTP)
cable shall be four times the cable diameter.
6. Copper cable splicing or bridge tapping is unacceptable.
7. Cables should be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher. To
60
maintain the cable geometry, remove the cable sheath only as much as necessary to terminate
the cable pairs on the connecting hardware. The connecting hardware manufacturer’s instructions
for cable sheath strip-back shall be followed. When terminating Category 6 and higher cables, the
cable pair twists shall be maintained to within 13 mm (0.5 in) from the point of termination. For
best performance when terminating cable on connecting hardware, the cable pair twists should be
maintained as close as possible to the point of termination.
8. The Cable Contractor shall install 4-pair Category 6 plenum rated UTP cables from the appropriate
ER or TR to each outlet location as indicated on the telecommunications drawings
• Category 6 Plenum Rated CMP (Color: Blue). General Cable - GENSPEED 6000
Product #7131900.
• Category 6 Plenum Rated CMP (Color: Yellow). General Cable - GENSPEED
6000 Product #7131942.
• Category 6A Plenum Rated CMP (Color: Purple) for wireless access points.
General Cable - GENSPEED 6000 Product #7131942.
9. Terminate Security, AV and other special systems data cabling in their own patch panels.
3.02 SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Testing and Inspection Agency qualifications
1. Every cabling link in the installation shall be tested in accordance with the field test specifications
defined in ANSI/TIA -568-B.2-1 “Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100? Category
6 Cabling”. This document will be referred to as the “TIA Cat 6 Standard.”
2. The installed twisted-pair horizontal links shall be tested from the patch panel in the TR room to
the telecommunication wall outlet in the work area against the “Permanent Link” performance
limits specification as defined in the TIA CAT 6 Standard.
3. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an appropriate training program and have
obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests. Appropriate training programs
include but are not limited to installation certification programs provided by BICSI or the ACP
(Association of Cabling Professionals).
4. The test equipment shall comply with the accuracy requirements for level III field testers as
defined in the TIA CAT 6 Document. The tester including the appropriate interface adapter must
meet the specified accuracy requirements. The accuracy requirements for the permanent link test
configuration (baseline accuracy plus adapter contribution) are specified in Table B.2 of Annex B
of the TIA CAT 6 Standard. (Table B.3 in this TIA document specifies the accuracy requirements
for the Channel configuration.)
5. The test plug shall fall within the values specified in E.3.2.2 Modular test plug NEXT loss
requirements of the TIA CAT 6 Standard.
6. The tester shall be within the calibration period recommended by the vendor to achieve the
vendor-specified measurement accuracy.
7. The tester interface adapters must be of high quality and the cable shall not show any twisting
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 6108/22/2024[Appendix B]
or kinking resulting from coiling and storing of the tester interface adapters. To deliver optimum
accuracy, preference is given to a permanent link interface adapter for the tester that can be
calibrated to extend the reference plane of the Return Loss measurement to the permanent link
interface. The Cabling Contractor shall provide proof that the interface has been calibrated
within the period recommended by the vendor. To ensure that normal handling on the job does
not cause measurable Return Loss change, the adapter cord cable shall not be of twisted-pair
construction.
8. One hundred percent of the installed cabling links must be tested and must pass the
requirements of the standards in this section. Any failing link must be diagnosed and corrected.
The corrective action shall be followed with a new test to prove that the corrected link meets the
performance requirements. The final and passing result of the tests for all links shall be provided
in the test results documentation in accordance with the Test Result Documentation as listed
below.
B. Site Testing, Inspection and Acceptance
1. The Pass or Fail condition for the link-under-test is determined by the results of the required
individual tests. Any Fail or Fail* result yields a Fail for the link-under-test. To achieve an overall
Pass condition, the results for each individual test parameter must Pass or Pass*.
2. A Pass or Fail result for each parameter is determined by comparing the measured values with
the specified test limits for that parameter. The test result of a parameter shall be marked with
an asterisk (*) when the result is closer to the test limit than the accuracy of the field tester. The
field tester manufacturer must provide documentation as an aid to interpret results marked with
asterisks.
3. A representative of the design team shall be invited to witness field testing. The representative
shall be notified of the start date of the testing phase five business days before testing
commences.
4. At the conclusion of field testing, at a time scheduled by the owner’s representative, the owner’s
representative will select a random sample (up to 10%) of the installed links in each wiring
closet. The Cabinge Contractor, under supervision of the owner’s representative, shall test these
randomly selected links and the results are to be stored in accordance with the prescriptions in
Test Result Documentation as listed below.
5. The results obtained shall be compared to the data originally provided by the Cabling Contractor.
If any (one or more) of the sample test reports displays a failure or fail* result, the Cabling
Contractor shall resolve any conditions causing the failed test and under supervision of the
owner’s representative shall repeat 100% of the testing and the cost shall be borne by the Cabling
Contractor.
C. Performance Test Parameters
1. The test parameters for CAT 6 are defined in TIA CAT 6 standard, which refers to the ANSI/TIA
-568-B.2 standard. The test of each link shall contain all the following parameters as detailed
below. To pass the test all measurements (at each frequency in the range from 1 MHz through 250
MHz) must meet or exceed the limit value determined in the above-mentioned standard.
a. Wire Map
62
b. Length
c. Insertion Loss (Attenuation)
d. NEXT Loss
e. PSNEXT Loss
f. ELFEXT Loss, pair-to-pair
g. PSELFEXT Loss
h. Return Loss
i. ACR (Attenuation to crosstalk ratio)
j. PSACR
k. Propagation Delay
l. Delay Skew [as defined in TIA/EIA-568-B.1; Section 11.2.4.11]
D. Test Result Documentation
1. The test results information for each link shall be recorded in the memory of the field tester upon
completion of the test.
2. The test results records saved by the tester shall be transferred into a Windows™-based database
utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of these test records. A guarantee
must be made that the measurement results are transferred to the PC unaltered, i.e., “as saved
in the tester” at the end of each test and that these results cannot be modified at a later time.
Superior protection in this regard is offered by testers that transfer the numeric measurement data
from the tester to the PC in a non-printable format.
3. The database for the completed job shall be stored and delivered on CD-ROM including the
software tools required to view, inspect, and print any selection of test reports.
4. A paper copy of the test results shall be provided that lists all the links that have been tested with
the following summary information:
a. The identification of the link in accordance with the naming convention defined in the overall
system documentation.
b. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test including the NEXT Headroom (overall
worst case) number.
c. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester.
5. General Information to be provided in the electronic data base with the test results information for
each link:
a. The identification of the customer site as specified by the end-user.
b. The identification of the link in accordance with the naming convention defined in the overall
system documentation.
c. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test.
d. The name of the standard selected to execute the stored test results.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 6308/22/2024[Appendix B]
e. The cable type and the value of NVP used for length calculations.
f. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester.
g. The brand name, model and serial number of the tester.
h. The identification of the tester interface.
i. The revision of the tester software and the revision of the test standards database in the
tester.
j. The test results information must contain information on each of the required test parameters.
6. The detailed test results data to be provided in the electronic database for each tested link must
contain the following information:
a. For each of the frequency-dependent test parameters, the value measured at every frequency
during the test is stored. In this case, the PC-resident database program must be able to
process the stored results to display and print a color graph of the measured parameters.
The PC-resident software must also provide a summary numeric format in which some critical
information is provided numerically as defined by the summary results (minimum numeric test
results documentation) as outlined above for each of the test parameters.
1) Length: Identify the wire-pair with the shortest electrical length, the value of the length
rounded to the nearest 0.1 m (1’) and the test limit value.
2) Propagation delay: Identify the pair with the shortest propagation delay, the value
measured in nanoseconds (ns) and the test limit value.
3) Delay Skew: Identify the pair with the largest value for delay skew, the value calculated
in nanoseconds (ns) and the test limit value.
4) Attenuation: Minimum test results for the worst pair.
5) Return Loss: Minimum test results for the worst pair as measured from each end of the
link.
6) NEXT, ELFEXT, ACR: Minimum test results documentation as explained in Section I.B
for the worst pair combination as measured from each end of the link.
7) PSNEXT, PSELFEXT, and PSACR: Minimum test results documentation for the worst pair
as measured from each end of the link.
E. As-built Drawings
1. Provide three (1) copies of E and three (3) copies of C size prints along with CADD files in .dwg
or .dgn formats showing floor plans with room numbers and actual outlet locations and labeling.
The deliverable is required within 5 business days of final cable testing.
2. Red Line Drawings: Contract must keep one (1) E size set of floor plans on site during work hours
with installation progress marked and outlet labels noted. Contractor may be asked to produce
these drawings for examination during construction meetings or field inspections.
END OF SECTION 27 15 00
64
SECTION 27 16 19 – PATCH CORDS, STATION CORDS AND CROSS-CONNECT WIRE
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the requirements for the Patch Cords, Station Cords, and Cross-Connect Wire
for the Tarrant County College (TCC)’s South Campus Energy Technology Center (ETC) in Fort Worth,
Texas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Panduit
2.02 COPPER PATCH CABLES
A. Cabling Contractor shall provide two (2) Category 6 patch cords per horizontal cable installed shall be
blue in color and coordinate lengths and quantities with TCCD. Cabling Contractor will coordinate
quantity, lentgh, and color with TCCD OneIT department before ordering.
B. Field terminated patch cables are strictly prohibited
C. At minimum, every horizontal cabling permanent link in the installation shall meet or exceed
performance characteristics of the field test specifications defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1
“Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair Category 6 Cabling”.
2.03 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CABLES
A. Furnish and install one duplex LC Fiber optic patch cable for fiber optic termination.
B. Fiber optic patch cables types shall coincide with terminated fiber optic type (ie. Singlemode Panduit
P/N #FXE10-SXY or 50 μm Multimode Panduit P/N #FXE10-10MXY)
C. Field terminated patch cords are strictly prohibited
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 6508/22/2024[Appendix B]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PATCH CABLES
A. Cabling Contractor shall fully cooperate and coordinate with Owner’s Voice and Data Communications
Equipment providers as required to ensure proper integration and connectivity between systems.
Cabling Contractor will coordinate quantity, length, and color with TCCCD OneIT department
before ordering.
B. Care must be taken to protect the minimum bend radius of 4 times the cable diameter on all copper
patch cables
C. Cabling Contractor shall furnish labeled floor plan and excel run sheet to Owner’s Voice and Data
Communications Equipment providers two weeks prior to occupancy.
D. Cabling Contractor shall furnish and install all patch cords in conjunction with Owner’s Voice and
Data Communications Equipment providers.
E. Cabling Contractor shall provide adequate technician support when Owner’s Voice and Data
Communications Equipment providers are planning and installing new voice and data equipment
installation and connectivity.
END OF SECTION 27 16 19
66
SECTION 27 20 00 – DATA COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. SUMMARY
1. This Section specifies the requirements for the Data Communications Equipment for the Tarrant
County College (TCC)’s (Insert project name and location).
2. Data Communications Equipment
a. Due to our Enterprise Agreement (EA) with Cisco, TCCD must be the owner of any hardware
(HW) or software (SW) procured from Cisco for use at TCCD. All Cisco HW and SW should be
sold to the College throught a certified Cisco Reseller Process so that each asset is licensed
appropriately and supported via Cisco’s Technical Assistance Center (TAC).
b. The EA provides for software and hardware licenses at the time of purchase and do not need
to be purchased separately.
3. Data Communications Equipment includes customer owned routers, server, Ethernet switches,
personal computers, printers, wireless access points, etc. required to connect the (Project name)
to the rest of the campus, the internet, and the public switched telephone network (PSTN).
a. Data Communications Equipment at TCC is defined and the Ownerded by Owner unless
otherwise stated in contract.
b. Cabling Contractor shall fully cooperate with Owner as required to ensure proper integration
and connectivity between systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Cabling Contractor shall fully cooperate and coordinate with Owner as required to ensure proper
integration and connectivity between systems.
B. Cabling Contractor shall furnish labeled floor plan and excel run sheet to Owner two weeks prior to
occupancy.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 6708/22/2024[Appendix B]
C. Cabinge Contractor shall furnish and install all patch cords in conjunction with Owner. Cabling
Contractor will coordinate quantity, length, and color with TCCD OneIT department before
ordering.
D. Cabling Contractor shall provide adequate technical support to Owner during planning, installation
and connectivity of new voice and data equipment.
E. Cabling Contractor shall provide adequate technician support on first business day after data
equipment installation and connectivity.
END OF SECTION 27 20 00
68
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
SECTION 27 30 00 – VOICE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the requirements for the Voice Communications Equipment the Tarrant County
College (TCC)’s (insert project name and location).
B. Voice Communications Equipment
1. Voice Communications Equipment includes customer owned phones, faxes, etc. required to
connect the (insert project name) to the rest of the campus and the public switched telephone
network (PSTN).
2. Voice Communications Equipment at TCC is provided by Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Fully coordinate with Owner’s Voice Communications Equipment provider as required to ensure
proper integration and connectivity between systems.
B. Furnish labeled floor plan and excel run sheet to Owner’s Voice Communications Equipment provider
two weeks prior to occupancy.
C. Furnish and install all patch cords in conjunction with Owner’s Voice Communications Equipment
provider. Cabling Contractor will coordinate quantity, length, and color with TCCD OneIT
department before ordering.
D. Provide adequate technician support when Owner’s Voice Communications Equipment provider is
planning and installing new voice and data equipment installation and connectivity.
E. Provide adequate technician support for the first business day after Voice equipment installation and
connectivity.
END OF SECTION 27 30 00
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 6908/22/2024[Appendix B]
SECTION 27 40 00 - AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
Section includes: furnishing, installing, testing and documenting audio-visual systems for (insert
project name and location)
A. Audio-Visual Systems shall consist of multiple systems with various configurations per the AV Room
Type Device Schedules and the design specifications and drawings.
B. These systems include some or all the following: (Insert project specific information; sample below)
1. Wall mounted, ceiling mounted and ceiling hung speaker systems.
2. Mounting of flat screen video displays and projectors.
3. Audio input/output panels, microphones, wireless microphone systems, mixers, switchers, audio
processors and amplifiers.
4. Video input/output panels, PTZ cameras, DVD players, switchers and scalers.
5. Video conferencing codecs, microphones, cameras, mounts and cables.
6. Distance learning software, Capture devices, microphones, cameras, mounts and cables
7. Programmable audio-visual remote and automated control system and associated support devices
for controlling: audio and videos systems, etc.
8. Floor, wall and desktop connection hubs for audio, video, broadband, LAN, remote control
signaling, computer and power connections.
9. Cabling, termination, connector and pull junction boxes.
10. Commissioning, Testing and warranty.
70
1.03 OVERVIEW
A. The work detailed by these specifications and drawings has been specified to meet certain
requirements for performance. Some information, such as exact equipment models, layout,
wire routing, additional conduit and power requirements, etc. has been omitted. It shall be the
responsibility of the A/V Contractor to translate these specifications and drawings into a complete
design package containing all necessary elements for a complete turnkey installation including all
material, labor, warranties, shipping and permits.
B. General elements of the work shall consists of but not limited to:
1. Procure all permits and license required to complete this installation.
2. Submission of Part 3.14 Pricing Forms for all equipment, materials and labor.
3. Attend pre-construction/pre-submittal meeting with Owner and Consultant to review design
package for the Audio-Video Systems.
4. Prepare schedule of work.
5. Submittal preparation and processing prior to ordering equipment.
6. Attend submittal review meeting.
7. Provide materials necessary to complete the Audio-Video Systems.
8. Perform equipment pre-installation sign-off walk through with Owner and Consultant.
9. Installation of cameras and camera cabling
10. Provide all required software and licenses to the Owner.
11. A/V Contractor shall provide continuous on-site supervision of the installation technicians. On-
site supervision shall include:
a. daily supervision of the work.
b. updating work site progress drawings to reflect changes and installations details.
c. preparing weekly progress reports and attendance at site coordination meetings as directed
by the Owner and Consultant.
12. The A/V Contractor shall provide all miscellaneous hardware including cable management
devices, termination cabinets, wire and cable labeling materials, fasteners, hangers and brackets
as required.
13. The A/V contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, labor and all other incidental material,
tools, appliances and transportation as required for a complete and functional video system (VS)
as described herein and supplementary drawings.
14. Coordinate receipt of Owner furnished equipment.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 7108/22/2024[Appendix B]
15. Perform installation according to contract documents and manufacturers recommendations.
16. Protect new facilities finishes and equipment.
17. Maintain construction materials and refuse within the area of work.
18. Clean the work area at the end of each day.
19. Provide system software and programming and other materials necessary for the Audio-Video
Systems to function by standard industry practices.
20. Program Audio-Video Systems and load with user define text and specified operations per design
specifications and drawings.
21. All touch panel and internet controls must have “User interface” (Basic functionality) and Lock
able / password “Admin user interface” (Advance functionality). Coordinate all programming with
Owner and Consultant for approval.
22. Providing (2) final programming changes for all systems within the warranty period after
acceptance date.
23. Perform initial testing, programming and adjustments with written reports.
24. Make final adjustments, calibrations and programming modifications as directed by the Owner and
Consultant.
25. Demonstrate all systems for final acceptance.
26. Preparation of O&M manuals and as-built documents for Owner’s use.
27. Providing training for Owner’s staff, facility personnel and technical staff.
28. Providing warranty service for a period of one year from acceptance date.
29. Provide extended system support.
30. 6-Months prior to “Owner Move-In” date, Owner and AV Design Consultant reserve the right to
review and modify the AV systems design and specifications. The A/V Contractor shall arrange
date and task with Owner and AV Design Consultant. A/V Contractor shall not proceed with
installation (including wiring) and material procurement till Owner review is conducted. The A/V
Contractor shall provide an itemized bid outlining AV equipment, labor, and mark-up costs. The
A/V Contractor shall permit the Owner and/or AV Design Consultant to modify the AV system
design and products without incurring additional cost, fees, and mark-ups. The A/V Contractor
shall allow the Owner to exchange products of equal cost without incurring additional cost,
fees and mark-ups. Should the A/V Contractor deem product exchange and/or labor cost is
significantly higher in cost, the A/V Contractor shall provide Owner/AV Design Consultant an
itemized “Change Order Form” for review and approval. Owner/AV Design Consultant reserve the
right to deem the A/V Contractor’s “Change Order” admissible.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
72
A. AVS: Audio-Visual System.
B. OWNER: Tarrant County College (TCC) as described herein and supplementary drawings.
C. A/V CONTRACTOR: Contractor or subcontractor providing and installing the Audio-Visual System.
D. PROJECT: TCCD Energy Technology Center
E. PROVIDE: Furnish, install, commission, test and warrant.
F. WORK: Action required furnishing, installing, commissioning, testing and warranting the Audio-Visual
Systems.
G. COMPONENT: Any individual item of equipment or material which is an element of the Audio-Visual
Infrastructure System.
H. ZONE – Separate parallel signal path with independent processing and alternate program capabilities.
I. AGC: Automatic gain control.
J. CCD: Charge-coupled device.
K. CTS-D: Certified Technology Specialist-Design
L. MPEG: Moving picture experts group.
M. NTSC: National Television System Committee.
N. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
O. PoE: Power over Ethernet
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. These specialized AVS systems are designed to efficiently support the Owner’s various facilities and
activity areas in a manner, which can be proficiently managed by the staff. Work shall include the
complete turnkey installation and commissioning of these systems per the following specifications
and drawings.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. List all system components including manufacturer and model number.
2. Manufacturer’s literature sheets for all materials and equipment, including warranty information,
recommended preventative maintenance and spare part inventory recommendations. Literature
containing more than one device shall be clearly marked to delineate item(s) included in the
Work.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 7308/22/2024[Appendix B]
3. Clearly indicate color or special finishes.
4. Correlate products with 274000 Specification and use in Project.
5. A/V Contractor’s on-site CTS-D supervisor shall review, approve and sign off all submittal
documents.
B. Pricing Forms: Contractor shall submit completed pricing form that includes an itemized listing of
all equipment, materials and labor required for the installation of the system as specified herein for
Change Order pricing.
1. The listing shall contain:
a. item description
b. item model number
c. quantity
d. unit cost and extended labor
e. material and installation cost required to provide a complete and functional system
f. Note that Schematics show rooms both with and without Video Conferencing functionality;
provide itemized pricing by room for both options.
C. Programming:
1. Provide and coordinate with the Owner all possible control functionalities based on project
drawing and specifications.
2. Provide screen shots / templates and a narrative description of all “User Interfaces” and “Admin
Interfaces” functionality. A/V Contractor must have written approval of control lay-out and
functionality prior to installation of programming. Provide Owner with a full functioning control
system.
3. The A/V Contractor shall provide a certified Extron Control Specialist to perform all audio-visual
control system programming.
D. Shop Drawings:
1. A/V Contractor’s on-site CTS-D supervisor shall review, approve and sign off all shop drawings,
coordination drawings As Built Drawings documents.
2. Reproducing Contract Documents for shop drawing is not acceptable.
3. Shop drawings to include the following:
a. Drawing legend sheet describing all symbols used In the drawings.
b. Floor plans with all devices and wiring raceway depicted.
c. Wire runs with tags for type, gauge, quantities and cable identifiers.
d. System riser diagram indicating all field devices, riser paths and room designations.
74
e. Block diagram for each system showing all equipment and signal pathways.
f. Point schedules defining interconnection of all inputs and outputs for all equipment including
data connections and other systems with cable identifiers.
g. Elevations of equipment racks and teaching consoles.
h. Fabrication shop drawings for all custom components.
i. Diagrams for power, signal, control wiring and grounding.
j. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, with ceiling-mounted items including
lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings are
shown and coordinated, using input from installers of the items involved. Provide similar elevation
drawings for wall-mounted items.
F. Samples: Provide as requested for colors and texture coordination.
G. Partial submittals shall not be acceptable without prior approval by Owner.
H. No portion of the work shall commence or equipment ordered until the Owner has approved the
submittals.
I. The A/V Contractor shall not be relieved from any contract-required responsibility by the Owner’s
approval of submittals.
J. Nothing in the specification shall relieve Contractor of system package design responsibility,
including, but not limited to, all equipment furnished under this Contract. The A/V Contractor is, in
all cases, solely responsible for the performance of the delivered AVS, and for furnishing complete
system documentation for each and for every part of the system.
K. Extended AVS Support.
1. Provide pricing for AVS hardware and software support including necessary reconfiguration and
database changes for years 2 through 5.
L. Resubmitting.
1. Make corrections or changes in Submittals as required by the Consultant’s stamped instructions
and attached comments and resubmit.
2. Identify changes on resubmittals by clouding. Only indicated changes will be reviewed when
resubmitted.
3. Added drawings shall be clearly identified.
4. A/V Contractor shall be responsible for project delays caused by rejected submittals.
5. Consultant shall be compensated for additional services for submittals rejected more than twice.
The amount of such compensation shall be incorporated by change order and withheld from the
Contractor‘s Application for Payment.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 7508/22/2024[Appendix B]
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. The A/V Contractor performing the installation shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the
installation of AVS systems of similar size and scope.
2. An Infocomm CTS-D shall supervise and approve all on-site work as a recognized member of the
A/V Contractor’s installation team. All installation team members must demonstrate knowledge
and compliance with all Infocomm, TIA, UL, and NEC methods, standards and codes. Submit
resumes of the entire team and completed training courses and certifications.
3. All members of the installation team must be certified by the Manufacturer as having completed
the necessary training to complete their part of the installation.
4. Owner’s representative may make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine that
the A/V Contractor is responsive, responsible and qualified in the area of work contemplated by
the Contract. In this regard, the A/V Contractor shall furnish to the Owner such information as
requested for this purpose. Information and data may include (but not necessarily be limited to):
Date of organization and/or incorporation and number of years engaged in this business under
present firm’s names; list of major equipment owned by the company; list of principal personnel
who will be involved in the execution of this contract with the experience and qualifications of
each person.
5. A/V Contractor shall have local in-house engineering and project management capability
consistent with the requirements of this project. The Contractor shall provide a project manager
that shall be the same individual throughout the project and shall be the person responsible for
system programming, preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Training, Programs,
Schedules and Test Protocols, documentation of system testing, maintenance of record drawings
and coordination and scheduling of all labor.
6. A/V Contractor shall be or have direct relations through their subcontractors, an authorized
manufacturer’s representative for all products they furnish or install.
7. A/V Contractor shall have a local organization capable of providing maintenance and service for
the specified system. Facility shall be no more than 100 miles from Owner’s site.
8. A/V Contractor shall be capable of providing emergency service on a 24-hour, 7 days a week
basis.
9. The A/V Contractor shall provide a certified Extron Control Specialist to perform all audio-visual
control system programming.
10. All members of the audio-visual installation team shall be certified and completed the Extron AV
Associate program to perform and complete the AV installation.
B. Conflicts:
1. In the event of any conflicts between documents referenced herein and the contents of this
specification, the A/V Contractor shall notify in writing to Consultant of any such occurrences
76
before the purchasing of any equipment, materials and/or installation. The Consultant will notify
the A/V Contractor of any actions required to resolve these conflicts. Such actions may include
but are not limited to: design changes, equipment, materials and/or installation changes.
2. In any event, A/V Contractor shall not supersede specifications and standards from the latest
NFPA and NEC publications.
C. The A/V Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment and installation in compliance with the
latest applicable standards from ANSI, ASTM, FCC, IEEE, NCTA, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, REA, TIA/EIA,
and UL including but not limited to:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
2. ANSI T1.404 (DS3) and CATV Applications.
3. American Society for Testing And Materials (ASTM).
4. American with Disabilities Act (ADA).
5. EIA/TIA-569 Standard, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces.
6. EIA/TIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.
7. National Cable Television Association (NCTA).
8. NCTA-02 NCTA Recommended Practices for Measurements on Cable Television Systems.
9. National Electrical Code (NEC) (Latest revision and pertinent addendums).
a. Article 250, Grounding.
b. Article 300, Part A. Wiring Method.
c. Article 310, Conductors for General Wiring.
d. Article 800, Communication Systems.
10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications (Latest revisions and pertinent
addendums).
11. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article
100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E. NECA 1 Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 7708/22/2024[Appendix B]
A. Environmental Limitations: System components shall be equipped and rated for the environments
where installed.
B. Environmental Conditions.
1. Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical
damage or degradation of operating capability:
a. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components installed in conditioned interior
environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 36 to 122 deg F
(2 to 50 deg C) dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.
b. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non-conditioned interior
environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 0 to 122 deg F
(minus 18 to plus 50 deg C) dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.
c. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be
rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of minus 30 to plus 122 deg F (minus
34 to plus 50 deg C)] dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, condensing. Rate for
continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph
(137 km/h) and snow cover up to 24” (610 mm) thick.
1.09 PROJECT COORDINATION AND PLAN
A. A/V Contractor shall submit a project plan detailing the steps and associated timeframe to meet
the General Contractor’s schedule requirements. Project plan should include benchmarks for
items such as regular project meetings, equipment order and delivery, installations, configuration
and calibrations, testing and burn-in, training, substantial completion notification, testing and final
acceptance.
B. A/V Contractor assumes total responsibility for coordinating with building trades or other parties as
may be identified by the General Contractor.
C. Coordinate size and location of conduit systems, back boxes, and provisions for electrical power to
equipment of this Section.
D. The A/V Contractor must obtain written permission from the General Contractor prior to routing and/or
installing cable, equipment or service through the facility.
E. A/V Contractor shall prepare the installation schedule to coordinate sequencing, dependencies and
priorities of the system installation including work by other trades.
78
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Insert project specific information; sample below)
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.02 AUDIO VISUAL TYPES
A. Verify all quantities with AV drawings and Specifications. Provide all necessary elements for a
complete turnkey installation including all material, labor, programming, warranties, shipping and
permits.
B. Audio Visual Control System to be composed of approved components and software. Provide
necessary cables, connector and other components a required for the systems to function per the
drawings and specifications.
C. Coordinate with Owner to develop basis for control system GUI “look and feel” for all A/V room types.
D. Coordinate and verify all AV programming with Owner prior to installation.
2.03 AVS CONTROL SYSTEMS
(Models and count as required by schematic control requirements.)
A. Approved manufacturers
1. Extron
a. IPCP Pro255Q xi IP Link Controller
b. TLP 1225TG 12” TouchLink Touchpanel (CP, LECTURE HALL 1100)
1) Provide POE injectors as required
2) Include backbox
c. TLP Pro725
d. THINK TANK ROOMS
1) Provide (1) HDMI AAP Plate
2) Provide (1) USB AAP Plate
e. TLP Pro725 (CLASSROOMS, AND LABS)
2.04 VIDEO SWITCHER
A. Approved manufacturers
1. Extron
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 7908/22/2024[Appendix B]
a. IN 1608 xi IPCP Q MA 70 (CLASSROOMS AND LABS)
b. DTP Crosspoint 108 4K IPCP Q MA 70 Series (LECTURE HALL)
1) Provide input and output cards as shown on one-line schematics
c. (CLASSROOMS AND LABS)
2.05 TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Extron
a. DTP HDMI 230 Tx Transmitter
b. DTP HDMI 230 Rx Receiver
2.06 EXTENDERS
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Gefen
a. USB 2.0 Extend
2.07 AUDIO DSP
A. Approved Products:
1. Extron
a. ProDSP Digital Matrix Processors
2.08 AMPLIFIER
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Extron
a. XPA2001
b. MPA601
80
2.09 SPEAKERS
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Extron
a. FF220T
b. SF228T
2. JBL
a. SI 65 P/T Pendent Mount
2.10 MICROPHONES
A. Approved Products:
1. Sennheiser - Team Connect2 Mic Array
2.11 WIRELESS MICROPHONE SYSTEM
A. Approved Products:
1. Shure
a. SLXD Series
1) Provide Combiner/Splitter Kit as needed
2.12 VIDEO CONFERENCING SYSTEM
A. Approved Products:
1. Window Teams
a. Sennheiser - Team Connect2 Mic Array
b. HC100 Camera
2.13 DOCUMENT CAMERA
A. Approved Products:
1. Elmo
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8108/22/2024[Appendix B]
a. PX-105
2.14 INTERACTIVE DISPLAY
A. Approved Products:
1. Cleartouch Capacitive Touch
a. CTI-7043XE, 7065XE, 7086XE-UH20
1) Cleartouch HC100 Camera
2.15 LECTURE CAPTURE SOFTWARE
A. Approved Products:
1. Owner Provided (Future)
2.16 LECTURE CAPTURE CAMERA
A. Approved Products:
1. Owner Provided (Future)
2.17 SECURITY SURVEILLEANCE SYSTEM
A. TCC utilizes an Internet Protocol (IP) based surveillance and observation technology that leverage
data and Power over Ethernet (PoE) network switches to power cameras and transmit video data to a
cloud-based management system.
B. Pathway and cabling associated with this system is part of the TCC data network shall be designed
and installed to meet the standards established by TCCD’s Division 27 Technical Guidelines.
C. Camera placement will differ from project to project and locations should be vetted with a qualified
representative(s) from RE&F, OneIT, and the Police Department.
1. Common views may include:
a. Building Entries and Exits (Interior)
b. Building Stairwells and Staircases
c. Reception Areas
d. Financial Aid areas
e. Vendor Checkout or Payment Locations
f. Emergency Phone Locations: Interior and Exterior
82
g. Main Entrance Approaches (Exterior)
h. Vehicle Drop Off Areas (Exterior)
i. Parking Garages / Parking Lots
j. Exterior walls of buildings overlooking common traffic areas
D. Before installing a Verkada system, the network environment needs to support the following protocols
and services:
• DHCP - Cameras receive their IP address and network settings via the DHCP
protocol. They do not support static IP configurations. A DHCP server must
be present on the LAN to provide the cameras with an IP address, default
gateway, subnet mask, and DNS servers.
• DNS - Cameras use the Domain Name System to resolve Verkada URLs to
their associated IP addresses.
• HTTPS - Cameras communicating with the Verkada Command using HTTPS
over TCP port 443.
• NTP - Each camera is hardcoded with well-known NTP servers on the internet.
NTP is used to sync the camera time, so footage timestampsare correct. The
correct time is also required for HTTPS to work.
E. Verkada Technical Support will ask to trouble shoot these services when there is a network issue. The
troubleshooting process can require a packet capture of network traffic to analyze the root cause.
Note: Cable integrity is important to supply PoE and data to a camere. Cable termination,
interconnects, distance, and bends must all be considered.
Power budgeting
Each Camera requires PoE power to function. Make sure your network switch has enough PoE
power to support all the connected cameras at full power draw.
Don’t forget: Cameras use less power during the day. When cameras switch to night mode,
the IR emitters activate to illuminate the scene for better visibility. The IRs increase power draw.
If multiple cameras are connected to the same PoE switch, the PoE draw can increase
significantly at night. If the switch does not have enough power to deliver to all the cameras,
cameras will go offline. A telltale sign of your switch not having enough power is that cameras
will go offline each night around the same time as other cameras on the same switch when
entering night mode.
An easy way to spec. power on a switch is to multiply the number of cameras connected by 30
watts which is the maximum power delivered by PoE+. For example, if you had 10 cameras,
you would need to calculate this:
10 cameras x 30 watts = 300 watt PoE budget on the switch
Note: Full power draw can be found on the datasheet for your camera model. Remember
each switchport should be able to supply the maximum amount of power required by the
camera.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8308/22/2024[Appendix B]
F. Camera must be placed to avoid view obstrucytion by lighting, ductwork, arhitectural features, and
landscaping. Use of 3D modeling software to assist in predicting camera views is highly recomended.
G. Camera installation must be performed by a certified technician able to adjust/optimize camera views
to meet location requirements.
H. Camera Models, Accessories, and deliverables in the form of a spreadsheet to owner will include:
a. Licensing - which is the other number and purchase order number.
b. Model numbers
c. MAC Address
d. Serial Number
e. Cable Identifier
f. Description of location
g. Int/Ext
h. Mounting
i. An example of the details is shown below:
j. All cameras designated for Police Security purposes will have a minimum of 60-days video
storage capacity.
k. All cameras not designated for Police Security purposes will have a minimum of 30-days video
storage capacity.
l. Selected model(s) shall be reviewed with TCCD’s Police and OneIT departments prior to
ordering to insure that memory allocations are being maintained.
I. RFP #21-054 was awarded to GTS for the Verkada series of cameras. All Verkada models are available
for purchse, installation, and service in both indoor and outdoor settings.
1. Verkada models ending in “E” are for outdoor settings; all others are for interior use.
2. Each Verkada camera comes with a mount plate, a mounting template, a T10 security Torx
screwdriver, and standard hardware. Also included is a setup guide that outlines tips for a fast and
easy installation.
3. All indoor Verkada cameras use industry-standard 802.3af power over ethernet (PoE).
a. Note: The chart below reflects the maximum power draw for a particular camera model within
the normal temperature and extended temperature ranges. Cameras will use additional power
84
when the infrared (IR) LEDs are turned on during the night, so please ensure that your switch’s
PoE budget exceeds the maximum power draw for the sum of all your cameras and other
connected PoE devices.
Model
Normal
Operation
(802.3af)
Extended Temperature
Range (802.3at)
Indoor Mini
Cameras(D40, CM41, &
CM61)
6W N/A
Outdoor Mini
Cameras
(CM41-E)
12W N/A
Indoor Dome
Cameras
(CD31, CD41, CD51, & CD61)
12W N/A
Indoor Dome
Cameras (CD42,
CD52, & CD62)
11W N/A
Outdoor Dome
Cameras
(CD31-E, CD41-E,
CD51-E, CD61-E,
CD42-E, CD52-E, &
CD62-E)
12W 20W
Outdoor Fisheye
Cameras
(D80 & CF81-E)
13W 24W
Bullet Cameras
(CB51-E, CB61-E,
CB51-TE, & CB61-
TE)
12W 20W
D30 11W N/A
D50 12W 20W
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8508/22/2024[Appendix B]
The multisensor requires more power than the standard camera models as it contains four (4) video
capture elements in a single unit.
Model Without IR
(802.3at)
With IR 802.3bt) Extended Temperature Range (802.3bt
Multisensor CH-2 19.54W 27.69W 38.68W
4. Outdoor camera models can step up to 802.3at (PoE+) due to the buit-in cold weather climate
heater. Each model has a housing, integrated temperature gauge, and heater designed to be
utilized in extreme weather and temperature conditions. The specifications for outdoor use are
shown below”
Operating Temperatures
• 20°C - 50°C (-4°F - 122°F) with PoE 802.3af
• -40°C - 50°C (-40°F - 122°F) with PoE 802.3at (heater will turn on around -20°C)
Note: The CM41-E has an operating temperature of -40°C - 50°C (-40°F - 122°F) with PoE
802.3af.
Humidity
• Humidity: 90%
Power consumption and requirements
Outdoor Dome Series, and Bullet Series
• 12W - IEEE 802.3af PoE
• 20W - IEEE 802.3at PoE - Extended temperature range
Fisheye Series
• 13W - IEEE 802.3af PoE
• 24W - IEEE 802.3at PoE - Extended temperature range
5. Water Damage Prevention - instructions on preventing water damage to outdoor cameras can be
found here - Preventing water damage to outdoor cameras / Verkada Help Center
J. The datasheet for each camera can be found below and at Verkada.com/docs:
1. Dome Series Camera (PDF)
2. Mini Series Camera (PDF)
3. Fisheye Series Camera (PDF)
4. Bullet Series Camera (PDF)
86
5. Multisensor Series Camera (PDF)
K. The Camera Mounts Overview document describes which cameras can attach to which mounts as well
as which mounts can attach to other mounts.
o The following mounting accessories are available from Verkada
• Pendant Cap Mount
• Arm Mount
• Wall-mounted L-bracket
• Pole Mount
• Angle Mount
• Mini Pendant Cap Mount
• Mini Junction Box
• Corner Mount
a. Verkada cameras are considered low-voltage devices. No certification or license is
required to run the ethernet wires, but it is strongly A/V with a professional integrator.
2.18 ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM
A. Approved Products:
1. Listen Technologies
a. LS-01RF System
1) Provide (1) LT-800-072 Stationary RF Transmitter
2) Provide (12) LR-300-072 Portable Digital RF Receiver (72 MHz)
3) Provide (3) LA-317 4-Unit RF Product Charging/Carrying
4) Provide & install (1) LA-130 Remote Antenna Kit
2.19 PROJECTOR
A. Approved products:
1. Epson
a. L630U
b. BrightLink 1485FI
B. Provide lens appropriate for projector location. Ensure image fills the screen as initially designed
C. Verify proper throw distance for projector, account for screen size and field conditions.
D. All mounts must have full integrated security to prevent theft. All locks must share the same key or
have a master key. Provide end-user with 5 keys delivered to Owner during commissioning of displays
devices.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8708/22/2024[Appendix B]
E. Furman AC-215A or equivalent
2.20 PROJECTOR MOUNT
A. Approved products:
1. Chief
a. RPA Elite with keyed locking (Classrooms & Labs)
b. Chief VCM (Lecture Hall)
1) Coordinate finish with Architect
2.21 CEILING BOX FOR PROJECTOR
A. Approved products:
1. FSR
a. CB22P (Provide 1 for each projector on project)
2.22 PROJECTION SCREEN
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Da-Lite
a. 60” x 96 Contour Electrol (Classrooms & Labs)
1) Provide unistrut and althread for proper mounting installation. All mounting must
support a minimum of 5-time total weight mounting.
2) Provide quantities per drawings and schedules with the following minimum features:
i. 16 x 10 Wide format.
ii. Provide proper black drop per ceiling heights and bottom of image at 48 AFF.
iii. Seamless high contrast Matt White screen surface.
iv. Adjustable up/down limit switches.
v. Includes 3 position control switch and cover plate.
vi. Ball bearing electric motor and drive mechanism with lifetime lubricant.
vii. Dry contact closure & low voltage as required.
viii. Power requirement – 120 VAC/60Hz.
b. 100” x 160” Tensioned Advantage Deluxe Electrol (Lecture Hall)
1) Provide unistrut and althread for proper mounting installation. All mounting must
support a minimum of 5-time total weight mounting.
2) Coordinate with architect to provide access panel for screen maintenance and
88
replacement.
3) Provide quantities per drawings and schedules with the following minimum features:
i. 16 x 10 Wide format.
ii. HD Progressive 1.1 viewing surface.
iii. Provide proper black drop per ceiling heights and mounting heights. Field verify
prior to purchase. Coordinate placement and mounting height with Architect prior
to purchase.
iv. Adjustable up/down limit switches.
v. Includes 3-position control switch and cover plate.
vi. Ball bearing electric motor and drive mechanism with lifetime lubricant.
vii. Dry contact closure, low voltage and RS232 serial control.
viii. Power requirement – 120 VAC/60Hz.
2.23 FLAT SCREEN DISPLAY MOUNT
A. Approved products:
1. PeerLess
a. SmartMount Universal SF 650
1) General Contractor shall provide blocking and bracing to support 200 lbs
2.24 FLAT SCREEN DISPLAYS
A. Approved products:
1. Samsung
a. QB and QM series
2. Sony
a. Commercial Grade 24/7 Panels - BZ30J Series and BZ35J Series
B. All mounts must have full integrated security to prevent theft. All locks must share the same key or
have a master key. Provide end-user with 5 keys delivered to Owner during commissioning of displays
devices.
C. Provide (1) SurgeEx SA-82 Compact Power Conditioner for all flat screen displays on project.
2.25 CABLE CUBBY
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8908/22/2024[Appendix B]
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Extron
a. Cable Cubby 222 with US AC Module (CC)
1) Coordinate location with Architect
2.26 POWER CONDITIONER & UPS
A. Approved products:
1. APC
a. SCM450RM1U. Provide (1) at each Classroom & Lab lectern
2. Furman
a. PL8C Power Conditioner. Provide (1) at each Classroom & Lab lectern
b. P-8 Power Conditioner (Lecture Hall Rack)
3. Middle Atlantic
a. RLNK-SW715R Power Management System (Lecture Hall)
B. All AV racks and lecterns equipment must be power conditioned protected.
2.27 FLOOR BOX
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Legrand
a. Evolution 6-Gang Series
1) Provided and installed by Electrical Contractor
2) Coordinate location with Architect
2.28 LECTERN
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Spectrum
a. Doctorate (R1)
b. Media Manager V2 (R2)
c. 42” Inspiration (R3). Include side table on room entrance (door) side.
90
B. For each lectern provide:
1. Cut outs for: Display Mount, Ventilation and Keypad controller, 9-button expansion module, Extron
AAP frame
2. Keyboard and mouse drawer
3. Lockable storage drawer
4. Front and rear 19” rack rails for power conditioner, media converters, VCR, etc
5. 2RU rack mount shelf for PC
6. Removable rear access panel
7. Lockable front and rear doors
8. LittleLite Gooseneck Light
9. Custom TCC logo - Coordinate with Architect
10. Blank panel for non-used RU space
11. Shelves for equipment that is not rack mountable
12. Ventilation: A low-noise fan for forced-air cabinet ventilation
13. Power conditioner & UPS
14. 2RU rack mount drawer
15. Provide swivel/pivot display mount for annotation display
16. Provide (1) Extron SMB 103 & (1) SMB 105 for controller and AAP plates for each MediaManager
and Inspiration lectern.
17. Provide Flip-up Document camera/task shelf for each Inspiration lectern.
18. Provide document drawer for Media Manager V2.
19. Provide toe-kick option and not casters on any lecterns except Doctorate (R1).
20. Provide keyboard tray
21. Provide “overbridge” option
22. Provide retractable power reel
2.29 SMALL AV RACK
A. Approved manufacturers:
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 9108/22/2024[Appendix B]
1. Da-lite (R4)
a. Equipment Rack Cart with Keyboard shelf and 17 Rack Spaces (R4)
b. Coordinate laminate finish with Architect
c. Provide with toe-kick option (no casters)
d. Provide with slide out rack shelf
2. Middle Atlantic (R5)
a. SRSR Pull in-wall pull out rack
b. Provide rack mountable 17” LCD monitor with keyboard and mouse
B. Sized to house all equipment indicated, plus spare capacity.
C. Fill empty rack spaces with blank panels.
D. Provide 2RU rack mount drawer.
E. Ventilation: A low-noise fan for forced-air cabinet ventilation, Middle Atlantic UQFP-4DRA.
F. Service Light: At top rear of rack with an adjacent control switch.
G. Maintenance Receptacles: Duplex convenience outlets supplied independent of vertical plug strip and
located in front and bottom rear of rack.
H. Provide proper lacing bars with Velcro ties for cable management.
I. Power conditioner & UPS
J. Provide (1) Middle Atlantic RK-KB-LCD17 rackmount LCD, keyboard and touchpad for DWR wall mount
rack (R5).
2.30 LARGE AV RACK
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Middle Atlantic
a. WRK Series WRK-44-32 (R6 at Lecture Hall 1100)
1) Provide quantities per drawings and schedules with the following or equivalent features:
2) Welded CRS construction using 14-, 16- and 18-gauge material.
3) Powder coated finish.
4) Key locking front and rear door with vents.
5) 11 ga rack rails tapped with 10-32 mounting holes at standard EIA spacing that complies
with TIA/EIA-310-D.
6) Rear top and bottom KO panel
92
7) Top and bottom front and side slotted vents.
8) Sized to house all equipment indicated, plus spare capacity.
9) Fill empty rack spaces with blank panels.
10) Ventilation: A low-noise fan for forced-air cabinet ventilation.
11) UQFP-4DRA
12) Service Light: At top rear of rack with an adjacent control switch.
13) Vertical Plug Strip: Grounded receptacles, 6” (1524 mm) o.c.; the full height of rack.
14) Maintenance Receptacles: Duplex convenience outlets supplied independent of vertical
plug strip and located in front and bottom rear of rack.
15) Provide proper lacing bars with Velcro ties for cable management.
16) Provide front and rear locking doors.
17) Provide caster base.
18) Provide (1) Middle Atlantic RLNK-SW715R Power Management System
19) Provide (1) Furman P-8 Power Conditioner
2.31 A/V CONNECTION PLATES
A. Provide types, sizes and configuration per drawings and schedules with the following minimum
features:
1. Stainless steel or silver anodized aluminum.
2. Engraved legends.
3. Solder, pass thru and pig tail style connection and connectors as required
B. Approved manufacturers:
1. Extron
2.32 CABLES
A. All AV is to be provided by AV Contractor.
B. All cables will be plenum rated per NEC.
C. A/V Contractor to provide proper rated cable type per installation OSP, riser, or plenum.
D. All cabling installed underground in concrete slabs, in direct contact with the earth, locations subject
to saturation with liquids and unprotected locations exposed to weather proofing compounds and
sheathing.
E. Provide types and quantities per drawings and schedules.
F. Conductor Sizing:
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 9308/22/2024[Appendix B]
1. Insulation shall be rated for a minimum of 300 volts.
2. Wire types and minimum sizes:
a. 70 Volt Speaker Cable - 16 AWG, twisted, stranded CL2/CL2P.
b. Low Impedance Speaker Cable – minimum 12 AWG, twisted, stranded CL2/CL2P.
c. Microphone Level Cable - 22 AWG, with 22 AWG drain wire, shielded, twisted, stranded CL2/
CL2P.
d. Line Level Cable - 22 AWG, with 22 AWG drain wire, shielded, twisted, stranded CL2/CL2P.
e. Low Voltage Control Cable - 18 AWG twisted, stranded CL2/CL2P.
f. CAT-5/6 – low skew type.
G. Minimum acceptable AVS systems wiring performance standards shall be as follows:
1. Speaker cable - Per ANSI WC57 standard test.
2. CAT-5/6 - Per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-8.1 standard test & TCCD standards.
3. Fiber optic cable - Per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B standard test.
4. RS 232 - Per ANSI/ WC66 standard test.
5. Line level shielded audio cable - Per ANSI WC66 standard test.
6. Microphone level shielded audio cable - Per ANSI WC66 standard test.
7. Video coax cable - Per ANSI/TIA/EIA–TSB-67standard test.
8. Multi-conductor control cable - Per ANSI WC57 standard test.
H. Approved manufacturers:
1. Liberty
2. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies, Inc.
3. Belden Inc., Electronics Division.
4. Extron
2.33 AV PATCH CABLE
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Extron
2.34 AV PATHWAY
94
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Panduit
2. Cooper B-Line
3. Or approved equal
B. J-hooks or saddle bags shall be installed 4ft to 5ft apart. Uniform spacing should be avoided to
minimize problems with signal degradation.
C. J-hooks or saddle bags shall be supported from decking or building structure using methods
approved by the manufacturer.
D. Cable count shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommended maximum. Add separate parallel J-hook
pathway when cable count requires it.
2.35 CABLE CONNECTORS
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Liberty
2. Extron
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 9508/22/2024[Appendix B]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION MEETINGS
A. The Consultant and/or Owner will hold regular construction meetings to review the installation
schedule. It is mandatory that the A/V Contractor’s project manager attend each meeting.
3.02 SITE INSPECTION
A. Continuously verify that the site conditions agree with the Contract Documents and the AVS design.
Notify Owner’s representative immediately of conditions that affect the performance of the installed
system.
B. Coordinate any required work that is not specified in the Contract Documents.
3.03 COORDINATION
A. Adequate conduit and back boxes are provided for the specified system installation.
B. Adequate power has been provided for the specified system installation.
C. Verify mounting location of all devices with Owner prior to installation.
3.04 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all wire and cable as required for complete and
operational system.
B. All cables must be continuous runs from device location to the final point of termination. No mid run
cable splices will be allowed.
C. Make connections and splices with solderless devices that are mechanically and electrically secure in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
D. The cable installation techniques shall be such that the mechanical and communications
characteristics of the cables are not degraded at the time of installation. Any special environmental
requirements for equipment shall be specified.
E. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces, in hollow
gypsum-board partitions, and as otherwise indicated. Conceal raceways and wiring except in
unfinished spaces.
F. Distribution of the cabling will be accomplished through cable trays, J-hooks, cable runways,
conduit raceways, ducts, core holes, extended columns, false half columns and plenums. Horizontal
cable segments will be placed in cable trays and when they leave cable trays will be supported by
96
distribution rings. Where cables converge at equipment room locations, they will be supported by
cable runways and distribution rings. All cable placements shall be based on the enclosed drawings.
G. The A/V Contractor shall not place wiring in the same conduit or raceway with wire for electrical
power distribution.
H. Connectors to all devices in system shall be protected against moisture. Approval of the method
shall not relieve the A/V Contractor of full responsibility for proper application and workmanship of
the materials in the manner specifically approved. All connector threads shall be treated with an
approved silicone lubricant.
I. The A/V Contractor shall be responsible for providing approved grounds for all AVS system equipment
per the manufactures recommendations. The A/V Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring
ground continuity by properly bonding all appropriate cabling, closures, cabinets, service boxes,
and framework. All ground connections shall consist of minimum 12 AWG copper wires and shall be
supplied from an approved building ground and bonded to the main electrical ground. A/V Contractor
must notify the Owner prior to making any changes in submitted system design and/or installation.
J. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and
without exceeding manufacturer’s limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and
distribution spools.
K. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical
connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. If
manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
L. Grounding: Provide independent-signal circuit grounding per practices published by the
manufacturer.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION, LABELING AND DOCUMENTATION
A. The A/V Contractor shall label all termination devices, panels, enclosures and equipment rooms.
The A/V Contractor will mark each unit with permanently attached markings that will not impair the
equipment or present a hazard to maintenance personnel.
B. Place wire identification numbers ¼” on each end of all conductors and or connectors by using sleeve
type heat shrinkable markers. Install markers to be readable from left to right or top to bottom.
Wire numbers shall be computer printed (Brady TLS2200 with Permasleeve cable marking labels or
equivalent). Handwritten labels are not acceptable.
C. Mark all spare conductors.
D. A/V Contractor to maintain a progress set of design documents on the Project site. These documents
shall be updated daily to reflect the current condition of the work and available for review by the
Consultant and Owner when requested.
E. If changes occur prior to acceptance testing altering the documentation previously furnished. The
A/V Contractor shall formally update and reissue the relevant documentation to the Consultant and
Owner.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 9708/22/2024[Appendix B]
F. Consultant and Owner will review all documentation for accuracy and completeness and may reject
substandard submittals.
G. The A/V Contractor shall establish and maintain complete system documentation, including
documentation procedures, operational information, configuration information and drawings.
Documentation shall include the following:
1. Floor plan drawings indicating device locations, unique system point numbers with device legends
indicating manufacturers and model numbers for each device.
2. The unique system point number of a device shall identify either through the software or hardwire
connection, the specific device or group of devices associated with the unique point number in
the system.
3. Floor plan drawings indicating conduit and wire routing and junction box locations.
4. Wire routing shall include cable identification and terminal strip numbers.
5. Mounting details for all equipment and hardware.
6. Functional block diagrams for each system.
7. Wiring details showing rack elevations, equipment wiring and terminations and inter-rack wiring.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and that
interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
B. Pre-testing: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that they
comply with specified requirements.
C. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pre-testing has been successfully completed and system has
been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days’ notice of test
schedule.
D. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with
Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in all
functional modes.
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning items and retest as specified above.
F. Record test results for each piece of equipment.
G. Re-test: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
98
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Programming:
1. Owner may use AV control system 1-3 months after substantial completion / warranty period A/V
Contractor must provide the Owner (2) final programming change to any aspect of the AV control
systems including, but not limited to:
a. Touch Panels
b. Keypads
c. Functionality
d. Control
e. Lay-out
f. Added equipment
B. Speaker Systems
1. Equalize speaker systems flat from 80 Hz to 2 KHz with a 2dB per octave roll-off thereafter.
Program a high pass filter at 60Hz with 12dB per octave roll off and a low pass filter 15 KHz with
12 dB per octave roll off.
2. Use a minimum of three measurement locations in the system’s intended coverage area to
calibrate the system response.
3. Verify system gain and amplifier levels.
4. Verify speaker polarity
5. Adjust appropriate speaker delays.
6. Set and adjust limiters.
7. A/V Contractor shall provide for calibration of the system:
a. Sound analyzer (SmartLive, TEF SoundLab, Meyer’s SIM or equivalent) with trained operator
for adjusting and verifying delay timing, cabinet aim and equalization.
b. Suitable calibrated microphone.
8. The A/V Contractor shall coordinate this testing and calibration. It is anticipated that this work will
take 1 hour per classroom. It will be necessary to have a quiet room during these times.
9. A/V Contractor to record all measurements, settings, and adjustment for inclusion in the O&M
manuals.
C. Adjust limit switches on electric operated projection screens.
D. Adjust back focus on all video cameras.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 9908/22/2024[Appendix B]
E. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months following the of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting systems to suit actual occupied conditions and
to optimize performance of the installed equipment. Tasks shall include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Check cable connections.
2. Check proper operation of equipment.
3. Adjust all presets; consult Owner’s personnel.
4. Recommend changes to the AVS to improve Owner’ utilization of the system.
5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations.
3.08 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Sensitive AC voltmeter, -80 dB sensitivity, 20-30 kHz response, able to measure signal to noise ratio,
THD, electrical audio levels within the system. Note that some systems require measurements up to
100 volts and may require an external pad.
B. Sound Pressure Level Meter, ANSI Type II, with A and C weighting filters, fast or time averaged.
C. Audio Signal generator, 20-30 kHz, sine wave, pink noise.
D. Analog Video Signal Generator NTSC/PAL, plus computer patterns at all required resolutions and
refresh rates required for the systems under test. For systems with composite video, include PLUGE
pattern.
E. Digital Video Signal Generator for computer patterns for all resolutions and refresh rates required for
the systems under test, HDMI/DVI.
F. The ability to measure STI-PA (source and analyzer).
G. Infrared Thermometer.
H. Testing material with known levels (audio, video, etc.): CD’s, VHS, DVD’s, etc.
I. AC/DC Multi-Meter.
J. Cable sets, cable assemblies, adapters as required to sample and measure in-or out of circuit as
required.
3.09 STAGING TEST (PRE COMMISSIONING)
A. Sanity Check:
1. Is there any reason why this system should NOT be released for installation?
2. Is everything plumb and square, clean and blemish-free?
100
3. Prepare document report, certifying the product, performance, and practices are in compliance,
and noting any exceptions below.
4. The Staging checklist must be reviewed and signed by someone within the organization, with
the proper competencies (CTS-D or CTS-I with Testing and Verification Specialist Certification)
to attest that the system being installed has been completely staged, with the exceptions noted,
all items on the checklist have been completed, that rack elevations are as specified, that all
the equipment is new, and the system is complete and in accordance with the specification in
product, practice, and performance. Distribute accordingly.
B. All the equipment can be pulled for repairs or replacement without hindrance to cabling and or other
equipment.
C. All cables, input / output plates, devices, equipment inputs/outputs, devices and racks are identified
in a consistent, permanent, non-slipping manner, and all identification tags are visible. All labeling
has clearly legible, unambiguous identifying labels, and labels are oriented and positioned
consistently.
D. Terminations are free from stress due to gravity acting on the form.
E. Terminations have sufficient service loop, allowing a re-termination or two without having to open a
form to lay in a new cable.
F. Cable supports are used when unsupported cable lengths exceed 12” (depending on size and
stiffness of cables).
G. Screw terminals have spade or ring lugs on wires.
H. Cables have “signal separation”; that is, cables carrying voltages varying by 20 dB or more are in
different forms separated by at least 4” to prevent cross talk.
I. All unbalanced and balanced terminations agree with the equipment manufacturer’s
recommendations.
J. List all equipment in the system NOT present, and why.
K. All equipment installed. All mounts for all racks and field equipment (rack mounts, ceiling mounts,
wall mounts, loudspeaker mounts, etc.) have been verified and tested.
L. Racks are “clean” - grease markings removed, etc.
M. All blanks installed.
N. ALL equipment hooked up as per flow diagram: microphones, loudspeakers, video monitors,
projectors, PC’s, USB switchers, etc.
O. Audio Tested (all lines marked). Test with sound generator or test CD with pass/ fail result or which
device at what frequencies.
1. Balance all inputs and output
2. Proper gain structure
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10108/22/2024[Appendix B]
3. Polarity
4. Sound generator and CD
P. Video tested (all lines marked). Test with test video pattern generator with pass/ fail result.
1. When HDMI signals are included in the system, confirm that an acceptable signal is being
displayed on the monitor from each source using a HDMI generator with HDCP. All the staged
cabling should be either the actual cables and converters to be installed, or using connections
and converters that emulate the field conditions with as close to the installed cable lengths
as possible. Whenever possible, the actual display to be installed should be tested with the
cables and converters as well: 1920x1200@60, 1920x1080@60, 1280x720@60, 1366x768@60,
1024x768@60, 800x600@60, 1600x1200@60.
2. Inspect each, leaving the signal on for three minutes (no “sparklies” or other artifacts). Note: If the
signal is going to a codec, HDCP should be turned off (codecs do not support HDCP). If the signal
is going to a display, HDCP should be turned on for a complete HDMI test to verify cables and
display input.
Q. Control tested (all lines marked - emulate closures for screens, motors, etc.)
R. IP information provided by client and loaded into system, including IP address, subnet mask, gateway,
timeserver, Gatekeeper, etc.
S. Confirm IP information on all devices with a NIC card have IP address, DHCP enabled, or can
otherwise be accessed over a LAN before leaving the shop. List IP settings for each piece of
equipment on the network at the bottom of this report, or attached as a separate document.
T. Any web-based system control or monitoring features and other IP functionality of system thoroughly
tested.
U. All serial controlled equipment properly configured and communications established.
V. Confirm control system functions as design intent.
W. All programming installed (control system, DSP devices), and properly communicating with the
equipment intended. If a control specification is present, it has been thoroughly tested.
X. When system is powered down, system “up” sequence presents the system in a desirable state with
no objectionable anomalies.
Y. Thermal gradient inspected; all equipment operating within manufacturers’ guidelines.
Z. Inspect camera(s) image quality.
AA. Video – record or photograph any non-conformances, anomalies, etc.
3.10 COMMISSIONING
A. Sanity Check:
102
1. Is there any reason why this system should NOT be released for installation?
2. Is everything plumb and square, clean and blemish-free?
3. Prepare document report, certifying the product, performance, and practices comply, and
noting any exceptions below. The Commissioning Checklist must be reviewed and signed by
someone within the organization with the proper competencies (CTS-D or CTS-I with Testing and
Verification Specialist Certification) to attest that the system installed is complete, all items on the
above checklist have been completed, that rack elevations are as specified, that all equipment is
new, and that all engineering, fabrication, programming, installation, testing, and checkout is in
accordance with the specification in product, practice and performance. Distribute accordingly
B. Inspect and verify that all exceptions from the “Staging” checklist have been successfully completed.
C. Full inventory to be all new equipment, in full compliance with the specification, or as modified by
approved submission. Record test results as pass/fail, and list exceptions.
D. Record all equipment not present, and why.
E. Thermal gradient inspected; all equipment operating within manufacturers’ guidelines.
F. Cable inspection: labeling, cable dress, signal separation, cable stress, serviceability, tie wraps
too tight (none on Category cable, only Velcro ties). Cable labeling is positioned and oriented in a
consistent manner, are legible and unambiguous.
G. Confirm rack elevation and flow drawings, cable and other labels and engravings are an accurate
paper model of the furnished system, and in compliance with latest revised specifications. Record
test results as pass/fail.
H. All inputs and outputs of switchers tested are labeled.
I. All channels on amplifiers, especially on multi-channel amplifiers are tested properly labeled.
J. Record ambient noise, A-weighted, slow.
K. Produce a nominal operating level of (65) dB SPL (Sound Pressure Level) for conference speech, (60)
dB SPL for program material, “A” weighted at all listeners’ ears +/-(2) dB (“Uniformity of Coverage”)
(or at least (15) dB above the ambient noise, A-weighted, whichever is greater), with the control
system volume control indicating “normal” or default setting. Record results for each channel and
source.
L. The speech reinforcement system shall be stable (no feedback).
M. For Audio /Video conference systems, at the (65) dB SPL listening level, be able to demonstrate full
duplex operation, with no reports of echo or “speech trails” (as detected from the far end). Adjust
microphone input gain to demonstrate that “standard talker” (60 dB SPL at 1 m), positioned at
each talker position in the room, produces a “0 dB” level at the input of the mixer bus of the audio
conference DSP device. If there is local reinforcement (“mix-minus”), AGC and ALC may need to be
restricted. Record test results as pass/fail. Record level across analog telephone line. Inspect DSP
mixer telephone line levels, both transmit and receive, when normal speech is encountered in the
room.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10308/22/2024[Appendix B]
N. Equalizers shall be adjusted for best intelligibility, and in accordance with the preferred acoustic level
response curves. (For installations with equalizers) Record the “house curve” before equalization, as
well as after the equalizers have been tuned, with and without microphone input filters. If requested by
the Consultant, produce this documentation for systems without equalizers, as this test may apply to
the preamp filter settings in cases where intelligibility can be improved.
O. For wireless microphone systems, with all wireless microphones turned on, confirm that throughout
the specified operating area for the transmitter, there are no dropouts, inter-modulation interaction
between wireless systems, or RF caused artifacts.
P. Video projector, if any, must have ‘blue screen’ or ‘no image screen’ disabled, or as directed by the
user.
Q. When several displays are visible in the same space, demonstrate consistencies in colors across all of
them.
R. Confirm acceptable TV levels, and any channel presets are accurate.
S. Displays have On-Screen Displays/Menus Are Disabled, or as specified by the user.
T. Image size relative to furthest viewer ratio: (1:6) Record each, compared to recommended ratio.
U. Displays are focused, centered, and evenly illuminated and mounted at the recommended heights.
V. Display stable images, with no scaling-related visual artifacts when switching between, at a minimum,
(1024 x 768), (1280 x 1024), (1920 x 1080) and (1280 x 720) sources, and/or all those specified in the
performance criteria for this system. Record test results.
1. When HDMI signals are included in the system, confirm that an acceptable signal is being
displayed on the monitor from each source using a HDMI generator with HDCP. All the staged
cabling should be either the actual cables and converters to be installed, or using connections
and converters that emulate the field conditions with as close to the installed cable lengths
as possible. Whenever possible, the actual display to be installed should be tested with the
cables and converters as well: 1920x1200@60, 1920x1080@60, 1280x720@60, 1366x768@60,
1024x768@60, 800x600@60, 1600x1200@60.
2. Inspect each, leaving the signal on for three minutes (no “sparklies” or other artifacts). Note: If the
signal is going to a codec, HDCP should be turned off (codecs do not support HDCP). If the signal
is going to a display, HDCP should be turned on for a complete HDMI test to verify cables and
display input.
W. The Control System performs all the functions as indicated on the function list (“control system
specification”) provided, with stability, and in sync with the equipment being controlled without the
need to reset any item of equipment.
X. Any web-based system control or monitoring features, and other IP functionality of system (time
servers, system-generated e-mail, processor, etc.) thoroughly tested.
104
Y. Be serviceable. This includes accessibility to equipment to be easily pulled for repair by one person,
neatly dressed cables, bundled in forms having no excessive pressure on cables at termination points
and connectors, utilize service loops, and have each cable number in agreement with the as-built
drawings. This includes the equipment rack itself. All switches and receptacles shall be logically and
permanently labeled.
Z. Confirm all nomenclature for consistency: drawings, touch screen, wallplates, floorboxes, patch
panels, equipment, etc.
AA. Inspect camera image quality.
1. Camera presets are programmed as specified by the user.
AB. Log all test conference calls (audio and video). Log should include time, line used, number called,
success of connection, who we spoke with, success of full duplex, success of auto disconnect, level
in the room, note static or jitter/packet loss, etc. Note if auto disconnect functions as specified.
3.11 TRAINING
A. AVS training shall be provided for the operator/user and technical staff. Operator/user training shall
minimally consist of 8 ea. 1-hour sessions. Technical operation and maintenance training session
shall minimally consist of 8 ea. 1-hour session. Training sessions to be coordinated with the Owner
and scheduled throughout the 1-year warranty period.
B. The A/V Contractor shall train the Owner’s maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules
involved in operating, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of the system. This
training will be in accordance with the training as outlined in this specification. In addition to the
Training Materials provided, the contractor will also furnish Operators Manuals and Users Guides at
the time of this training
C. A complete operation and maintenance manuals and preliminary as-built drawings shall be delivered
to the Owner one week prior to the training sessions.
D. Operator/user training shall minimally consist of:
1. Provide custom system specific printed reference material for each trainee that documents and
explains in layman’s terms:
a. System block diagram.
b. Normal day-to-day operation.
c. Operator selectable features.
d. Provide a hands-on training with Q & A session.
2. Provide and review a custom, system specific, quick reference guide for the inexperienced
operator.
E. Technical Operations and Maintenance training shall consist of:
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10508/22/2024[Appendix B]
1. The technical explanation shall be sufficiently thorough that: staff personnel shall be able to make
any programming changes required, analyze malfunctions and make equipment substitutions or
bypasses necessary to maintain system operation except for the malfunctioning equipment or
circuits.
2. Provide printed reference material for each trainee that documents and explains in technical
terms:
a. System block diagram with technical features.
b. Technical operation, adjustments and programming.
c. System features and programming.
d. Review of as-built drawings.
e. Provide a hands-on training with Q & A session.
3.12 WARRANTY
A. The A/V Contractor shall warrant the system for parts and labor for one (1) year. Warranty commences
at the time of substantial project completion and acceptance by Owner. Nothing shall be construed to
limit this obligation to a shorter period.
B. Warranty service shall be rendered on-site by request of Owner to repair or replace any defective
materials, equipment, and workmanship without cost to the Owner, unless the Owner has previously
given the A/V Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.
C. The Owner shall give prompt notice of the defect(s) either verbally or in writing to A/V Contractor.
D. Perform preventative maintenance during the warranty period, which includes:
E. Cleaning and inspection of all devices every 6 months.
F. Clean and vacuum console and rack equipment every 6 months.
G. Service technician performing service / warranty work shall check-in and out with Owner for each visit.
H. Provide a written report to Owner documenting any work performed during the warranty period within
24 hours of such event. Report shall detail work performed, equipment repaired or replaced, etc.
I. Provide loner equipment that is equivalent to the malfunction equipment for any equipment not field
repairable.
J. Repair or Replacement Service.
1. Repair or replacement service during the warranty period shall be performed 7 days a week, 24
hours a day and with a 4-hour response time.
2. Emergency repair or replacement service during the warranty period shall be performed 7 days a
week, 24 hours a day and with a 1-hour response time.
106
3. If the A/V Contractor cannot restore system operation during the warranty period within 2
business days of the system failure, the Owner reserves the right to require the A/V Contractor to
provide on-site manufacturer’s service technicians at no additional cost.
4. The Owner reserves the right to expand or add to the system during the warranty period using
firm(s) other than the A/V Contractor for such expansion without affecting the A/V Contractor’s
responsibilities, provided the expansion is performed by an authorized dealer for the affected
equipment.
3.13 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Work must meet the following requirements to qualify for the Owner’s consideration of Substantial
Completion:
1. All AVS devices shall be fully installed, powered, online and fully operational.
2. All sub-system interfaces must be complete and operational.
3. All training complete.
4. Owner may utilize the system for its designed intent.
5. A/V Contractor to provide final programming A/V source code to remain property of Owner.
Provided copies of all A/V room types compiled and uncompiled source code, to Owner for
backup and future reference as part of the Final Acceptance.
B. A/V Contractor will provide a list of remaining work items and approximate completion date.
C. A/V Contractor will certify in writing that all remaining work is minor in nature and will be completed in
less than 30 days.
3.14 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. The A/V Contractor shall perform sample tests in the presence of the Consultant and Owner.
Performing the testing procedures specified herein assures that the communication cabling and
system electronics meets the performance characteristics specified.
B. All testing shall comply with EIA/TIA Standards and that of the equipment manufacturers. If testing
indicates that the performance characteristics are not met, the test shall be failed test and any other
test that may be affected by the modification and/or repair shall be rerun and verified.
C. Test equipment will be provided by the A/V Contractor to test and to certify the 100% operational
condition of all materials and equipment.
D. The A/V Contractor shall prepare and submit all test procedures and data forms for the pre-
installation, post installation and subsystem test to Owner. The test procedures shall have Owner
approval before the tests.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10708/22/2024[Appendix B]
3.15 SYSTEM CHECK OUT AND VERIFICATION
A. Verify continuity of cabling between field devices and controllers.
B. Commission all devices from field to front end.
C. A/V Contractor supplied “As Built” Drawings shall show conduit routing.
D. Review all as-built documentation and Operation and Maintenance manuals with Owner. Revise and
reissue as required.
E. Provide as-built documentation in hard copy, PDF and AutoCAD formats.
F. Demonstrate proper sequences of operation for all devices.
G. Within ten days of receipt of the final acceptance notice, the A/V Contractor and Owner’s
representatives shall schedule and perform the final inspection. When the work is found acceptable
under the contract documents and the contract is fully performed, declare the project complete.
3.16 FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF SYSTEMS
A. All deliverables listed in the plain-language narrative have been satisfactorily delivered.
B. Each area of construction completed and submitted as complete shall meet the following criteria
under testing:
1. There are no remaining punch-list items.
2. System must meet all specifications as described in these instructions.
3. Operational prints, manuals, signal logs, an as built prints must be furnished.
4. Visual testing and signal verification will be conducted at random locations to determine that
equipment performs satisfactorily.
C. All promised training of designated personnel has taken place.
D. Specifications set forth for construction of the system have been devised to insure system
compatibility and performance. Compliance to these specifications will be determined during periodic
observances of construction. Repeated failure to comply with the specification will be considered
before the initial acceptance phase of the plant commences.
E. All promised documentation has been delivered.
F. All complaints have been satisfied.
3.17 PRICING FORMS
108
A. `In addition to all other required bid forms, A/V Contractor shall prepare and present to Owner and
Owner’s representative pricing based on the requirements of 27 40 00.
B. Pricing shall include the list of equipment and labor in tabular form including; part number, item
description, unit price, number of units, extended price, and totals. The pricing shall breakdown the
material and labor in the categories.
C. A/V Contractor shall provide Service Agreement pricing levels for terms of 1, 2 and 3 years. Breakout
service pricing levels by response times of within 2 hours, 24 hours, or more than 24 hours.
END OF SECTION 27 40 00
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10908/22/2024[Appendix B]
SECTION 27 53 13 – Synchronized Time System (Digital Clocks)
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnish a complete new wireless system using BRG Precision Products Wireless Synchronized
Time System.
B. All bids shall be based on the equipment as specified herein. The specifying authority must
approve any alternate system.
(Reference SECTION 27 53 13 Clock Systems)
1.01 Section Includes
A. Transmission Systems
a. Time Master Transmitter
B. Clocks
a. Digital (AC)
1.02 Related Sections
A. Division 16 – Electrical - 120 volt grounded outlet required for transmitter.
1.03 References
A. This Technical Specification and Associated Drawings
B. BRG Precision Products Wireless Mass Notification and Synchronized Time System User
Manual.
1.04 Definitions
A. GPS: (Global Positioning System), a worldwide system that employs many satellites to
determine geographic location anywhere in the world, and which employs and transmits
accurate time linked directly to the U.S. time standard.
B. NTP: (Network Time Protocol), a standard for sending time and date information over
computer networks.
C. CDMA: (Code Division Multiple Access), a "spread spectrum" technology, allowing many
users to occupy the same time and frequency allocations in a given band/space. This is
a common method used to support the cell phone industry. This time source is typically
110
within 10 microseconds within the U.S. time standard.
D. IRIG-B – (Inter Range Instrumentation Group), a common time communication protocol
used by the missile and space industry. Typically used with internal time receivers.
E. SMPTE – (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers), a time synchronization
protocols typically used by the motion picture and television industry.
F. BRG Serial Protocol – a 35 byte ASCII protocol used to send time and other clock
information over serial communication links.
G. Wi-Fi - Wi-Fi is a wireless networking technology that allows clocks to interface with the
Internet. It allows these devices to obtain time updates over the computer network.
Network connectivity occurs through a wireless router.
1.05 System Description
A. The system shall support the distribution of accurate time to all electronic message boards
and wall clocks.
B. The system shall utilize licensed commercial business band communications not accessible
to the general public.
C. The radio transmitter shall be synchronized with the U.S. time standard and shall continually
synchronize secondary clocks and/or message displays throughout the facility. The
transmitter clock shall be accurate to 0.2 seconds per day with loss of synchronization with
the U.S. time standard.
D. The system shall synchronize all clocks to each other without the use of hard wiring
between devices. Clocks shall automatically adjust for Daylight Saving Time. The Daylight
Saving Rules may be reconfigured to any new rule without a software or hardware update.
The table-lookup method is not acceptable for implementing Daylight Saving Time
changes.
I. The system shall include an internal clock reference so that failure of the primary time
receiver shall not cause the clocks to fail in indicating time.
J. Digital clocks require external power.
K. All wireless master transmitter configurations shall include an Ethernet or serial interface for
the purpose of controlling the clock
L. The system shall support remote diagnostics which includes reading system configuration
parameters and reconfiguring the system from a wide area network connection.
M. The system must support optional signal boosters and repeaters to distribute the signal to
otherwise weak signal areas.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 11108/22/2024[Appendix B]
N. The control software and signal monitor software shall create an activity log that includes
time and date stamps of activity.
O. The system includes a software interface to other alerting systems and equipment using
RSS (0.9x/2.0), ATOM (0.3) or RDF (1.0) protocols.
1.06 1.6 Regulatory Requirements
A. Equipment and components furnished shall be of manufacturer’s latest model.
B. Transmitter(s) and receiver(s) shall comply with all applicable FCC rules.
C. System shall be installed in compliance with local and state authorities having jurisdiction.
D. FCC license submittal service shall be made available for non-government installations for
a nominal fee upon request. Canadian installations will utilize Industry Canada application
services or Canadian license application consultants.
1.07 Submittals
A. Product Data: Submit complete catalog data for each component, describing physical
characteristics and method of installation. Submit brochure showing available product
combinations, colors and finishes of clocks.
B. Operating License: Submit evidence of application for operating license or
that the application has been filed prior to transferring ownership to the customer, or notify
the customer of the FCC license number. The customer may operate the master clock
transmitter under the control of the manufacture, using the manufacturer’s license, prior to
transferring ownership.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit complete installation, set-up and maintenance
instructions.
D. Manufacturer will assist Owner in determining the optimum location for the transmitter(s).
1.08 Substitutions
A. Proposed substitutions, to be considered, shall be manufactured of equivalent materials that
meet or exceed specified requirements of this Section.
B. Proposed substitutions shall be identified not less than 10 days prior to bid date.
C. Other systems requiring wiring and/or conduit between the master transmitter and
secondary devices will not be accepted.
D. Other systems using wireless technology in an unlicensed frequency range will not be
112
accepted.
E. Other systems using wireless technology where the license is held by any party other than
the end user, except for the purpose of demonstrating the system, will not be accepted.
1.09 Quality Assurance
A. Permits: Obtain operating license for the transmitter from the FCC.
B. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing commercial time system
products with a minimum of 10 continuous years of documented experience including
extensive experience producing GPS, Ethernet NTP, CDMA, IRIG-B, SMPTE wireless
synchronized time systems, including
10 years of experience producing radio synchronized time systems.
2. Installer: Company with documented experience in the installation of commercial
time and communication systems.
C. Prior to installation, a site survey must be performed to determine proper transmitter
placement. The survey must be performed by the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s
authorized representative.
1.10 Delivery Storage and Handling
A. Deliver all components to the site in the manufacturer's original packaging. Packaging shall
contain manufacturer's product identification number, and other related information.
B. Store equipment in finished building, unopened containers until ready for installation.
1.11 Project Site Conditions
A. Clocks shall not be installed until painting and other finish work in each room is complete.
B. Coordinate installation of GPS receiver for access to the roof or exterior side wall so that the
bracket and related fasteners are watertight. Ethernet NTP, CDMA, IRIG-B, SMPTE time
receivers and indoor GPS antennas shall not require external antennas.
1.12 System Startup
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 11308/22/2024[Appendix B]
A. At completion of installation and prior to final acceptance, turn on the equipment; ensure
that all equipment is operating properly, and that all clocks are functioning.
1.13 1.13 Warranty
A. Manufacturer will provide a 2 year warranty on the transmitter. Manufacturer will offer an
optional 5 year extended warranty on the master clock. All other components will have a 2
year warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturer
A. Wireless mass notification and synchronized clock system shall be manufactured by BRG Precision
Products, Inc., 600 N. River, Derby, KS 67037, 800-295-0220, www.brgprecision.com
2.02 Sequence of Operation
A. Transmitter Operation: When power is first applied to the transmitter, it performs a self
test. It then checks for various previously configured parameters stored in non-volatile
memory. The transmitter displays the current time. The transmitter then attempts to lock
onto the correct time from the U.S. Government. Any one of several methods may be
used as specified to obtain time lock including Ethernet NTP (computer network), CDMA
(cell towers), IRIG-B (missile and space), SMPTE (motion picture and television), or GPS
(military) time receivers. The Owner shall select one time receiver type to be used during
the planning phase and prior to shipment. Once the transmitter locks onto the accurate
time, it sets its internal clock to that time. The transmitter will transmit its internal time
every ten minutes to digital clocks. The transmitter updates its internal clock every time it
receives valid time data from the time receiver.
2.03 Equipment
A. General: The master transmitter shall include a time display, radio transmitter, owner
specified time receiver, indicating clocks, and all accessories for complete operation.
B. Ethernet NTP Time Receiver:
1. The Network Time Protocol (NTP) shall be used to obtain the correct time from a
computer network.
2. The NTP time receiver shall be able to obtain the correct time from either an Owner
supplied network time server or from public U.S. Government time servers.
3. An RJ-45 Ethernet jack shall be available at the back of clock for connecting to the
114
Ethernet network cable.
4. Standard 10-100 BASE-T half-duplex Ethernet shall be supported
5. Shall include a standard 10-100 BASE-T half-duplex Ethernet connection to support
clock control and alarm configuration.
6. Shall include a Windows alarm configuration and control software.
C. Transmitter: BRG Precision Products model RSxxx, consisting of wireless
transmitter with the specified time receiver, an internal surge suppressor and battery
backup. Unit shall obtain the correct U.S. Standard time using the specified time receiver.
The master clock shall periodically transmit the time to all clocks in the system.
1. Transmission:
a. Frequency: 406 - 470 MHz.
b. Radio technology: FM
c. Channel bandwidth: 11 kHz maximum (narrow band)
d. Operating range: 32 degree F to 158 degrees F (0 degrees C. to 70
degrees C).
2. Transmitter:
a. Transmission Power: 25 watt maximum
b. Transmitter clock power requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz
3. Master transmitter shall have the following owner configurable parameters:
a. Time zone adjustment for all time zones in the world, including: Eastern, Central,
Mountain, Pacific, Alaska, and Hawaii.
b. Automatic Daylight Saving Time support for both old and new U.S. rules.
c. The Daylight Saving Rules may be reconfigured by the user to any new rule
without a software or hardware update.
e. 12-hour or 24-hour display.
f. The master transmitter shall have 70 user configurable display formats.
g. The master transmitter shall have a visual synchronization status indicator.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 11508/22/2024[Appendix B]
h. The master transmitter shall be configurable to send sync status to signal status
monitors.
4. Transmitter housing shall be black metal case: 11.12 inches high (285mm) by 20.5
inches wide (520mm) by 20 inches deep (500mm).
5. Antenna shall be indoor or outdoor type as required for complete coverage.
6. Transmitter housing shall incorporate a display which shall include the following:
a. The transmitter clock shall include an LED 2.5” hours and minutes and 1.8”
seconds time display.
b. AM and PM indicator if 12-hour time display is set
c. Time synchronization status indicator
d. 70 Owner selectable display formats
7. The master transmitter shall contain an internal clock such that failure of reception
from the time receiver will not disable the operation of the clocks.
8. The transmitter clock shall be accurate to 0.2 seconds per day during loss of time
synchronization.
9. The transmitter clock shall include alarm capabilities
a. The transmitter clock shall include up to 99 alarm settings
b. The transmitter clock shall include day-of-the-week alarm settings.
c. The transmitter clock shall include a method of configuring the alarm settings
using button on the transmitter clock without any other control methods or
software.
d. The transmitter clock shall include alarm duration control.
e. The master transmitter shall include an alarm latching feature that allows an
indefinite period between the time an alarm is turned on and when it is turned
off.
f. The master transmitter shall include a standard Ethernet interface for control,
configuration and time synchronization.
10. Power supply (internal)
Input: 120 volt AC 50/60 Hz, 0.5 amp.
12 ft (3.6m) power cord with U.S. type 3 prong grounded plug
116
11. Surge/Battery Backup
Input: 120 volt AC 50/60 Hz, 0.5 amp.
Output: 120 volt AC, 2000VA
12. The transmitter shall support remote diagnostics which includes reading system
configuration parameters and reconfiguring the system from a remote location on
the network.
13. The transmitter clock shall include the ability to read the forward and reverse RF
power and the transmitter and from a remote location.
14. The transmitter shall include a Windows based PC configured as a
control station.
D. Digital Clocks: BRG Precision Products model TCCD1, 4 inch (101.6mm), 7 segment LED
display. Clocks shall have ABS enclosure and acrylic lens. Single sided dimensions
(without ceiling or wall end bracket): 12 inches wide, 6 inches high, 2 3/8 inches deep.
Refer tp pages 116 and 117 at the end of this section for more addityional specifications.
1. Digital clocks must be able to receive synchronized time signals from both BRG
Precision Products UHF transmitters and the Wi-Fi wireless network .
2. LED digital clocks shall have user changeable display color.
3. Digital clocks must have time and date option.
4. Digital clocks shall be capable of automatically adjusting for Daylight Savings Time.
5. Digital clocks must have 70 or more owner selectable display formats.
6. Digital clocks shall display either 12 or 24 hour time.
7. Digital clocks shall have adjustable display intensity.
8. Digital clocks shall have a synchronization status indicator.
9. Digital clocks must be viewable from 150 feet (45.7m)
10. Power Supply: 120 VAC, 50-60 cycle. (24 volt models available)
11. Digital clock shall be capable of activating automatic countdown timer triggered by
alarm transmission.
12. Digital clocks must store all user configurable parameters twice in Flash memory.
13. Digital clocks must include internal capacitor backup and will not use batteries to
maintain time when power is lost.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 11708/22/2024[Appendix B]
14. Supports the Network Time Protocol (NTP) to obtain time updates using Wi-Fi.
15. Supports the BRG time protocol to obtain time updates using UHF wireless
communications.
E. Wireless Master Clock Performance Monitor:
1. The Wireless Master Transmitter Performance Monitor system shall include a receiver
for monitoring the master clock’s time transmissions and for receiving performance
data from the master clock. This receiver connects to any PC running the Windows
operating system.
2. The Wireless Master Transmitter Performance Monitor system shall include PC
control software.
a. The Wireless Master Transmitter Performance Monitor software must operate in
the background.
b. The Wireless Master Transmitter Performance Monitor software must
automatically alert the PC user is the master transmitter fails to transmit for more
than one hour.
c. The Wireless Master Transmitter Performance Monitor software must
automatically alert the PC user if the master transmitter has lost synchronization
with the U.S. time standard.
d. The Wireless Master Transmitter Performance Monitor software must provide the
date and time of the last time transmission.
e. The Wireless Master Transmitter Performance Monitor software must provide
details about the nature of the master transmitter problem.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Examination
A. Verify that construction is complete in spaces to receive equipment and that rooms are clean
and dry.
B. Verify that 120 volt electrical outlet is located within 10 feet (3m) of location of transmitter
clock and the outlet is operational and properly grounded.
3.02 Adjusting
A. Prior to final acceptance, inspect each clock, adjust as required, and replace parts which are
found defective.
118
3.03 Cleaning
A. Prior to final acceptance, clean exposed surfaces of clocks, using cleaning methods
recommended by clock manufacturer. Remove temporary labels from clock faces. Do not
remove labels from backs of clocks.
3.04 Demonstration
A. Provide training to Owner's representative on setting and adjusting clocks, replacing
batteries and routine maintenance. The manufacturer may utilize toll-free telephone training.
3.05 Protection
A. Protect finished installation until final acceptance of the project.
3.06 Testing
A. All devices must be tested at their operational location under normal operational conditions
to assure reception of signal.
END OF SECTION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 11908/22/2024[Appendix B]
120
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 108/22/2024[Appendix C]
SECTION 28 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section, Requirements for Electronic Safety and Security Installations, applies to all sections of
Division 28.
B. Furnish and install electronic safety and security cabling, systems, equipment and accessories in
accordance with the specifications and drawings. Provide all programming and licenses as required
to integrate new building elements into the existing electronic access control and surveillance
systems.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Adherence to, and compliance with, the codes and standards referenced, and the TCC unique
requirements and design solutions identified in the manual, is mandatory. Requests to deviate from
the industry standards and design solutions prescribed in these guidelines may be submitted, on a
case-by-case basis, in accordance with the instructions in the Policy and Procedures section of these
guidelines. No deviation from the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) will be allowed.
1.03 CODES, STANDARDS, REFERENCES, AND APPLICABILITY
A. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, NFPA 70.
1. The National Fire Protection Association has acted as the sponsor of the National Electrical Code
(NEC) since 1911. The original Code was developed in 1897 as a result of the united efforts of
various insurance, electrical, architectural, and allied interests. The purpose of the NEC is the
practical safeguarding of persons and property from hazards arising from the use of electricity.
The NEC provides the minimum code requirements for electrical safety. In security distribution
design, the NEC must be used in concert with the ANSI/EIA/TIA standards identified below, which
are intended to insure the performance of the security infrastructure.
B. ANSI/TIA/EIA STANDARDS
1. The Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industry Association (TIA/EIA)
Electronic Safety and Security - Sample SpecificationsCAPPENDIX
2
engineering standards and publications are designed to serve the public interest through
eliminating misunderstandings between manufacturers and purchasers. The standards facilitate
interchangeability and improvement of products, and assist the purchaser in selecting and
obtaining the proper product for his or her particular need.
C. CABLING STANDARD, ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 (SERIES)
1. The ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (series) is the Commercial Building Cabling Standard. This standard
defines a generic security wiring system for commercial buildings that will support a multi-
product, multi-vendor environment. It also provides direction for the design of security cabling
products for commercial enterprise.
a. The purpose of the standard is to enable planning and installation of building wiring with little
knowledge of the security products that subsequently will be installed. Installation of wiring
systems during building construction or renovation is significantly less expensive and less
disruptive than after the building is occupied. TIA/EIA-568-A establishes performance and
technical criteria for various wiring system configurations for interfacing and connecting their
respective elements.
D. PATHWAYS AND SPACES, ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B (SERIES).
1. The ANSI/EIA/TIA-569-B (series) is the Commercial Building Standard for Pathways and Spaces.
This standard will be followed for all low voltage systems in all TCC buildings. This standard
encompasses security considerations both within and between buildings, and recognizes three
fundamental concepts:
a. Buildings are dynamic. Over the life of a building, or campus, remodeling is more the rule than
the exception. The standard recognizes that changes will take place.
b. Building security systems and media are dynamic. Over the life of a building, or campus, both
security equipment and cabling change dramatically. The standard recognizes this fact by
being as independent as possible from specific vendor equipment and media.
c. Security is more than just locks and cameras. Security also encompasses many building
systems including environmental controls, fire alarms and emergency
d. paging.
e. In order to have a building, or campus, successfully designed, constructed, and provisioned
for security, it is imperative that the security design be incorporated during the preliminary
architectural design phase. To accomplish this, the architect must work closely with the
designated Security & IT staff members. Through the TCC facilities planning and construction
office.
E. E.GROUNDING AND BONDING, ANSI/TIA-607-A (SERIES)
1. The ANSI/TIA-607-A (series) (also known as ANSI J-STD-607-A) is the Commercial Building
Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Security. The National Electrical Code (NEC) provides
grounding, bonding, and electrical protection requirements to ensure life safety. Modern security
systems require an effective grounding infrastructure to insure optimum performance of the wide
variety of electronic security systems that may be used throughout the life of a building. The
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 308/22/2024[Appendix C]
grounding and bonding requirements of this standard are additional technical requirements for
security that are beyond the scope of the NEC. These standards are intended to work in concert
with the cabling topology specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B, and installed in the pathways and
spaces designed in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B.
F. AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA)
1. The Americans with Disabilities Act defines accessible design considerations such as
spacing between equipment, room layouts mounting heights and device and communications
requirements applicable to Electronic Safety and Security designs and installations. It also
contains regulations concerning alarms and signage.
G. OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA)
1. Through the Occupational Safety and Health Administration the federal government enforces the
safety aspects of codes and standards that apply to employee working conditions. Guidelines for
good practice when installing electronic safety and security systems are defined in the following
documents:
a. 29CFR1910, Title 29, Labor-Part 1910 OSHA Standards.
1) 29CFR1926, Tit6le 29, Labor-Part 1926 Safety & Health Regulations for Construction.
2) Individual states may have their own occupational safety divisions. Most states or
localities accept certification of electrical products by a national testing laboratory as
evidence that products and materials are safe for use in that jurisdiction.
H. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)
1. In the United States the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) typically requires UL testing and
certification on electrical equipment. Some of the applicable standards are as shown below:
a. UL 294 (1999) Standard for Access Control System Units. UL 639 (1997) Standard for
Intrusion-Detection Units.
I. THE BICSI ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY DESIGN REFERENCE MANUAL
1. The Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc. (BICSI) is an information technology
association whose mission is to provide state-of-the-art information technology and security
knowledge to the industry, resulting in good service to the end user. BICSI develops and
publishes the Electronic Safety and Security Design Reference Manual (ESSDRM). The ESSDRM
is not a code or standard. The ESSDRM is an extensive volume of information on the various
aspects of security systems and security distribution.
a. The ESSDRM provides discussions and examples of various engineering methods and design
solutions that can be selected and employed in order to meet the requirements of the NFPA
and ANSI/TIA/EIA standards. Designers and installers are encouraged to use the ESSDRM as
an engineering tool, within the constraints of the unique requirements of the TCCD Security
Infrastructure Standards.
4
1.04 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
A. References to industry and trade association standards and codes are minimum installation
requirement standards.
B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements are
greater than those specified in the above standards.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of the
manufacturer’s principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and shall
have manufactured the item for at least three years.
B. Product Qualification:
1. Manufacturer’s product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of similar
size and type as this project, for approximately three years.
2. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations where
the products have been in operation before approval.
C. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the
manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within four hours of receipt of
notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.
1.06 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged
in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be available.
B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be the product
of a single manufacturer.
C. Equipment Assemblies and Components:
1. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.
2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall assume
complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.
3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended
service.
4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
D. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 508/22/2024[Appendix C]
E. When Factory Testing Is Specified:
1. The Owner shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The contractor shall notify TCCD
through the Construction Manager a minimum of 15 working days prior to the manufacturers
making the factory tests.
2. Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the Resident
Engineer prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests.
3. When equipment fails to meet factory test and re-inspection is required, the contractor shall be
liable for all additional expenses, including expenses of the Government.
1.07 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Where variations from the contract requirements are requested in accordance with Section 00 72 00,
GENERAL CONDITIONS and Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES,
the connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions or changes
to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation
methods.
1.08 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage,
dirt, moisture, cold and rain:
1. During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices, and
other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum cleaned both
inside and outside before testing and operating and repainting if required.
2. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Resident Engineer, placed in first class
operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.
3. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl
or equal.
4. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and
workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.
1.09 WORK PERFORMANCE
A. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.
B. For work on existing stations, arrange, phase and perform work to assure electronic safety and
security service for other buildings at all times. Refer to Article OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS
under Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
6
C. New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly and carefully. Disturbed or
damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions, as required by Section 01 00 00,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
D. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interferences. See Section
00 72 00, GENERAL CONDITIONS.
1.10 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.
B. Inaccessible Equipment:
1. Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently
accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as
directed at no additional cost to the Government.
2. “Conveniently accessible” is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of
ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to,
motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.
1.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and maintenance of
equipment.
B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering, a
minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws. Nameplates that are furnished by
manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of identification is herein specified,
are exceptions.
1.12 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
B. The Government’s approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to the job
site. Delivery, storage or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior approval will not
be permitted at the job site.
C. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other data
necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with
specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify
equipment being submitted.
D. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item
or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be
considered for approval.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 708/22/2024[Appendix C]
1. Mark the submittals, “SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________”.
2. Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and paragraph
numbers.
3. Submit each section separately.
E. The submittals shall include the following:
1. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer’s
name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings,
pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.
2. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems, control
system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on wiring
diagrams.
3. Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment
manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.
F. Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
1. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment specified in
the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders, (manufacturer’s standard
binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical
section but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish
the remaining manuals prior to contract completion.
2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words “MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION
MANUAL,” the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of Contractor, and
contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each
subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for the system or
equipment.
3. Provide a “Table of Contents” and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with
tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and
easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.
4. The manuals shall include:
a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed
operation and control of the equipment.
b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.
c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
d. Installation and maintenance instructions.
e. Safety precautions.
f. Diagrams and illustrations.
g. Testing methods.
8
h. Performance data.
i. Pictorial “exploded” parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of
special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare
parts, and name of servicing organization.
j. Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment,
including addresses and certified qualifications.
k. As-built documentation of wiring and control diagrams, device locations and cable routing in
AutoCad .dwg format.
G. Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings.
H. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with one sample of each of the
following:
1. A 300 mm (12 inch) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the
coils of reels from which the samples were taken.
2. Each type of conduit and pathway coupling, bushing and termination fitting.
3. Conduit hangers, clamps and supports.
4. Duct sealing compound.
1.13 SINGULAR NUMBER
A. Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular number
(e.g., “the switch”), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required
to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.
1.14 TRAINING
A. Training shall be provided in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS.
B. Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each associated
specification.
C. A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by the Resident
Engineer at least 30 days prior to the planned training.
END OF SECTION 28 05 00
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 908/22/2024[Appendix C]
SECTION 28 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 GROUNDING, BONDING, AND ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
A. Per ANSI J-STD 607-, a 4/0 bare stranded conductor cable shall be provided from the security room
to the building main electrical service ground electrode. A Telecommunications Main Grounding
Busbar (TMGB) shall be installed in the security room. All metallic conduits entering the security
room all equipment racks in the security room and all exposed non-current carrying metal parts of
security equipment in the security room must be bonded to the TMGB. The TR’s shall be bonded to
the TMGB busbar in the ER via 4/0 backbones and contain a Telecommunications Ground Busbar
(TGB) for bonding of all ladder tray, racks and cabinets via minimum 6-AWG insulated stranded
boning conductor.
B. Adhere to all manufacturers’ specific grounding and bonding requirements.
10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TELECOMMUNICATIONS BUSBARS
A. Material: Copper, ¼” thick (aluminum not permitted).
B. Pre-drilled
1. 3/8” Diameter.
2. Hole spacing per ANSI Joint Standard J-STD-607-A.
3. Hole pattern shall accommodate two hole lugs.
C. Busbars shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
D. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB)
1. Chatsworth #10622-012 ground busbar with Chatsworth #10622-000 busbar insulators or
equivalent, 20”x4” minimum.
E. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB)
1. Chatsworth #10622-012 ground busbar with Chatsworth #10622-000 busbar insulators or
equivalent, 12”x2” minimum.
2.02 GROUNDING JOINTS/SPLICES
A. Grounding conductor joints/splices shall be mechanical type, copper alloy, with a minimum of
two bolts and a separate section for each conductor equal to Burndy “QPX”, OZ/Gedney “XTP” or
“PMX” or Penn-Union “VX” or copper compression type with two (2) indents equal to Burndy, T&B or
Blackburn.
B. Grounding conductor terminations (lugs) shall be single barrel, mechanical screw type, copper alloy
with machined contact surfaces equal to OZ type “SL”, T&B, or Burndy or copper compression type
with two (2) indents equal to Burndy, T&B or Blackburn.
2.03 BONDING CONDUCTORS
A. Material: Stranded copper (aluminum not permitted).
B. Cable Tray Bonding Conductor: Green #8 AWG insulated bonding jumper (12” max) with appropriate
lugs or manufactured braided copper grounding jumper equal to B-Line #CAM-GJ, T&B #BD12, OZ/
Gedney type “FB” or Mono-Systems.
C. Equipment Frame Bonding Conductor; Panduit #TRGK672 Telecommunications Rack Grounding Kit.
D. Bonding Conductor (BC): Green insulated copper bonding conductor, size as required by NEC.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1108/22/2024[Appendix C]
E. The BC shall be, as a minimum, the same size as the TBB.
F. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB): Green insulated copper conductor, minimum size of
No. 6 AWG.
G. The TBB shall be sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximum size of 3/0
AWG. Insulation shall meet fire ratings of its pathway.
Table 1
Sizing of the TBB
TBB length (ft) TBB Size (AWG)
Less than 13 6
14-20 4
21-26 3
27-33 2
34-41 1
42-52 1/0
53-66 2/0
Greater than 66 3/0
12
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Provide the required elements and associated hardware necessary to provide a complete
Telecommunications Grounding Infrastructure as specified.
C. TMGB
1. Locate the TMGB at the bottom of plywood backboard near the outside plant entrance conduits in
the “MDF”.
2. TMGB shall be installed so that the BC for telecommunications is as short and straight as
possible.
3. Conductor shall be installed in continuous 3/4” PVC conduit.
D. TGB
1. Locate the TGB at the bottom of plywood backboard near the copper riser terminations in each
“IDF”.
2. TGB shall be installed so that the TBB for telecommunications is as short and straight as possible.
E. TBB
1. Install Green insulated copper grounding conductor (refer to 2.03.D for conductor size) from the
TMGB to each TGB.
F. Grounding Conductor Joints/Splices
1. Install mechanical type, copper alloy, with a minimum of two bolts and a separate section for each
conductor or copper compression type with two (2) indents.
2. Install manufactured insulating cover or heavy tape insulation over joints/splices.
G. Grounding of Cable Tray
1. Install Green #8 AWG bonding jumper (12” max) with appropriate lugs at each cable tray joint or
install manufactured braided copper grounding jumper equal to B-Line #CAM-GJ, T&B #BD12,
OZ/Gedney type “FB” or Mono-Systems.
2. Install Green #8 AWG grounding conductor with appropriate lugs from side of cable tray down to
TMGB or TGB. Drill and tap side of cable tray (for appropriate size bolt, ¼” x 20 min.), making
sure that bolt does not extend into wire management part of tray.
H. Grounding of Equipment Frame
1. Install Panduit or equivalent Telecommunications Rack Grounding Kit from equipment frame to
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1308/22/2024[Appendix C]
grounded cable tray, TMGB, or TGB.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system connections and conductors for proper installation and
tightness.
3.03 DOCUMENTATION
A. Provide documentation of actual locations of grounding electrodes, busbars and backbone grounding
conductors.
END OF SECTION 28 05 26
14
SECTION 28 05 28 – PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 INSIDE PLANT CONDUIT
A. Security conduit must be properly designed and installed. The design and installation practices for
security conduit have some unique requirements beyond those normally seen in standard electrical
conduit. The following items are required to be included in the design and installation of interior
security conduit:
1. Conduits must be designed and installed in the most direct route possible from the security room
to the device location.
2. The maximum length of LAN copper horizontal distribution cable is 90 meters (295 ft) from the
device location to the TR or security room termination point, no exceptions. This applies in
particular to IP based CCTV cameras or IP based card readers. Where this length would be
exceeded the designer will need to add media converters or additional TR’s as required.
3. Security cabling is always installed in a home-run fashion with individual cables running from the
device location all the way to the security room. Splices in horizontal distribution cable are not
allowed.
4. Factory-manufactured sweeps which meet ANSI/TIA569-A bend radius requirements shall be
used for all security conduit. The bend radius of the sweeps must be a minimum of 10- times the
internal conduit diameter. Bending conduit in the field using manual or mechanical methods is not
acceptable. Standard electrical elbows shall not be used. This sweep radius is necessary to insure
that the conduits can accept future cabling. All horizontal conduit will be tested by the conduit
installation contractor with a mandrel to prove compliance with the sweep radius requirements
throughout the conduit run
5. Each security back box shall have an individual conduit routing to the security room, or to the pull
box or pulling point, connecting to a major cable pathway routing to the security room. Box shall
be located in serviceable space. Looping, or “daisy-chaining,” of conduits between outlet boxes is
not allowed.
6. All conduit ends shall have plastic bushings installed before the cable is pulled into the conduit.
7. Conduits will not be run next to hot water lines, steam pipes, or other utilities that may present a
safety hazard or cause a degradation of system performance.
8. Conduits entering the Security Room should be designed and located allowing for the most
flexibility in the routing and racking of cables.
9. Conduits or conduit sleeves entering through the floor of the Security Room shall terminate four
(4) inches above the finished floor.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1508/22/2024[Appendix C]
10. All metallic security conduits entering the Security Room, Equipment Room, or Entrance Facility
shall be bonded together, and bonded to the Main Grounding Busbar with a #6 AWG ground
cable.
11. All in-use and spare conduits entering the Security Room, Equipment Room, or Entrance Facility
shall be sealed to prevent the intrusion of water, gasses, and rodents throughout the construction
project. Within five days of releasing the conduit for the installation of cable, the conduit
installation contractor shall prove all conduits to be clean and dry.
12. All conduits and cables that penetrate fire rated walls or floors must be fire stopped.
13. All OSP conduits and inner-duct, used and spare, shall be plugged with watertight plugs at
both ends to prevent the intrusion of water, gasses, and rodents throughout the construction
project. All OSP conduits shall have pull lines rated at a minimum of 90 kg (200 lb) pulling
tension installed. The pull lines must be re-pulled each time an additional cable is installed. Prior
to releasing the conduit for the installation of cables, all OSP conduits must be cleaned with
a brush pulled through the conduit at least two times in the same direction and swabbed with
clean rags until the rag comes out of the conduit clean and dry. All OSP conduits must be tested
with a mandrel to prove compliance with the sweep radius requirements throughout the conduit
run. Within five days of releasing the conduit for the installation of cable, the conduit installation
contractor shall prove all conduits to be clean and dry.
16
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INSIDE PLANT PULLBOXES
A. Pull boxes used with security conduits in interior locations shall be rated NEMA-1. Pull boxes used in
damp or wet locations such as plumbing chases or out of doors shall be rated NEMA-3R. Pull boxes
shall be installed in conduits at an interval no greater than every 100 feet. A pull box shall be installed
in conduit runs whenever there are two 90°sweeps, or a total of 180°of sweeps, in a conduit run. Any
deviations from these criteria must have prior approval from TCCD Facilities Construction.
2.02 CABLE PATHWAYS AND SUPPORT STRUCTURES
A. The Inside Plant (ISP) security substructure are the cable pathways and support structures necessary
for routing security cabling between security rooms, and from the security room to the device location.
There are numerous different products and methods that can be employed to build the substructure.
Some of these methods include: Enclosed conduit system, Open or enclosed cable trays, Routing
above a false ceiling using cable supports, and in-slab floor ducts. Security cable pathways shall
be separate from IT pathways whenever and where ever possible, if it is necessary to route security
cabling in the same cable pathway as IT cables a metallic divider must be installed between the
cables.
1. The conduit system shall be routed inside ceilings, floors, and walls to the greatest extent
possible. Surface mounted conduit shall be used only when there is no other route to provide
service to the desired location.
2. For the main floor in, “slab on grade constructed buildings”, conduit will route in walls and
ceilings not in or under the slab. If this design is not possible, an alternate must be presented and
approved following the “Approval for Alternate Design Solutions” process detailed in section 27
01 00. If an under slab route solution is approved, the conduit must be installed with at least 1” of
concrete encasement around all sides of the conduit.
3. All device locations shall have a minimum ¾” conduit. Increase the conduit size as necessary for
the quantity of cables to be installed. Cable fill shall not exceed 40% and plan on 25% growth.
4. Security cable and conduit shall maintain the minimum separation distance from power as listed
below.
5. For power systems operating at 480V or greater, maintain a minimum separation distance of 3 m
(10 ft) from all security cabling. Pathways should cross perpendicular to electrical power cables or
conduits.
6. For large electrical motors or transformers, maintain a minimum separation distance of 1.2 m (4 ft)
from all security cabling
7. For lightning protection system conductors (NEC 800-13), maintain a minimum separation
distance of 1.8 m (6 ft) from all security cabling
8. For power systems operating at less than 480V, including all conduit and cables used for
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1708/22/2024[Appendix C]
electrical power distribution, maintain a minimum separation distance of 0.6 m (2 ft) from all
security cabling. Pathways should cross perpendicular to electrical power cables or conduits.
9. For fluorescent lighting, maintain a minimum separation distance of 12 cm (5 in) from all security
cabling. Pathways should cross at right angles to fluorescent lighting.
10. For branch circuits (secondary) power (120/240V, 20A) where electric light or power circuits
coexist with security cabling, maintain a minimum separation distance of 0.50 mm (2 in).
18
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SUMMARY
A. Final design and specifications for the Communications Systems conduits shall be made by the
Electrical Engineer and Architect of Record.
B. Conduits shall be reamed to eliminate sharp edges. Metallic conduit shall be terminated with an
insulated bushing. Refer to ANSI/TIA-606 and Section 27 05 53 for Administration of the Pathway
system.
C. Openings in fire-rated walls, floors and ceilings shall be properly firestopped.
D. Layout cable runs in advance to determine quantities of cable to be installed along pathways, and to
ensure non-interference from other trade installations.
E. Do not support cables from, or on, ceiling suspension system or use electrical, plumbing, or other
pipes for support. Cable supports shall be permanently anchored to building structure or joist. Provide
attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached, and that are suitably
sized to carry the weight of the cables to be supported. Confirm with Architect and/or Construction
Manager on installation procedures for cable support system prior to implementation.
3.02 FIRE STOPPING
A. Provide fire resistant materials to restore fire ratings to all wall, floor, or ceiling penetrations used
in the distribution and installation for communications cabling system. Coordinate fire stopping
procedures and materials with General Contractor and Electrical Contractor.
B. Solutions and shop drawings/submittals for fire stop materials and systems shall be presented to the
General Contractor for written approval of materials prior to purchase and installation.
C. Materials shall be installed per manufacturer instructions, be UL listed for intended use, and meet
NEC codes for fire stopping measures.
D. The material chosen shall be distinctively colored to be clearly distinguishable from other materials,
adhere to itself, and remain resilient and pliable to allow for the removal and/or addition of
communication cables without the necessity of drilling holes in the material.
E. The fire stopping material shall maintain/establish the fire rated integrity of the wall/barrier that has
been penetrated.
END OF SECTION 28 05 28
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1908/22/2024[Appendix C]
SECTION 28 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECURITY ADMINISTRATION
A. Administration of the security infrastructure includes documentation of cables, termination hardware,
cross- connection facilities, conduits, other cable pathways, security rooms, and other security
spaces. All TCC facilities shall apply and maintain a system for documenting and administering the
security infrastructure.
1. In order to create a consistent environment, TCC maintains a campus wide numbering scheme
for security devices and cable connectivity.
a. All security devices and cables shall be clearly marked using permanent means. The
designation scheme must be consistent with the scheme in use on the campus where the
work is being performed. The scheme shall be approved by TCC Facilities & IT prior to use.
1) Each individual cable shall be clearly marked on both ends.
2) Multi conductor cables shall have each conductor clearly marked
1.02 RECORDS
A. A record is a collection of information about or related to a specific element of the security
infrastructure. Records must be maintained in a computer spreadsheet, or in a computer database.
Paper records are encouraged, but are optional. A cable record is prepared for each cable. The
record will show the cable name, and must describe the origin point and destination point of the
cable. The cable record will record what services and/or connections are assigned to each conductor
or strand. An equipment record is prepared for services distributed from a certain piece of equipment,
such as a router, or a system such as data gathering panel.
1.03 DRAWINGS
A. Drawings are used to illustrate different stages of security infrastructure planning, installation, and
administration.
B. Installation or Construction Drawings
1. Installation or construction drawings are the plans that show the installer how the infrastructure
is to be installed. The quality of the installation can be directly impacted by the level of detail in
the installation drawings and written specifications. Installation drawings for TCC projects shall,
at a minimum, show pathway locations and routing, configuration of security spaces including
backboard and equipment rack configurations, and wiring details including identifier assignments.
C. As-built Drawings
20
1. The as-built drawings graphically document the installed security infrastructure through floor plan,
elevation, and detail drawings. In many cases, these drawings will differ from the installation
2. drawings because of changes made during construction and specific site conditions. In the
as-built drawings, the identifiers for major infrastructure components must be recorded. The
pathways, spaces, and wiring portions of the infrastructure each may have separate drawings if
warranted by the complexity of the installation, or the scale of the drawings. As-built drawings are
a vital component of the security administration system, and must be kept current as adds, moves,
and changes take place. TCC requires the installer to provide a complete and accurate set of as-
built drawings.
1.04 LABELING
A. To be consistent with ANSI/TIA standards and industry practices, it is important that labeling be
applied to all security infrastructure components. Labeling with the unique identifier will identify a
particular component.
B. Labels are generally of either the adhesive or insert type. All labels must be legible, resistant to
defacement, and maintain adhesion to the application surface.
1. Outside plant labels shall be totally waterproof, even when submerged.
2. All labels shall be machine printed.
3. Labels applied directly to a cable shall have a clear vinyl wrapping applied over the label and
around the cable to permanently affix the label.
4. Other types of labels, such as tie-on labels, may be used. However, the label must be appropriate
for the environment in which it is used, and must be used in the manner intended by the
manufacturer.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2108/22/2024[Appendix C]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LABELS
A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.
B. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Brady Corporation
2. Panduit
3. Equivalent
2.02 LABELS
A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.
B. Shall be preprinted or computer printed type. Hand written labels are not acceptable.
C. Where insert type labels are used provide clear plastic cover over label.
D. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Brady Corporation
2. Panduit
3. Equivalent
E. Equipment Room Copper, Fiber, and Coax Backbone Cable Labels
1. Brady part #WML-1231-292 or Panduit #LS7-75NL-1
F. Equipment Room Copper, Fiber, and Coax Horizontal Cable Labels
1. Brady part #WML-317-292 or Panduit #LS7-75NL-1
G. G.Work Area Copper, Fiber, and Coax Riser Cable Labels
1. Brady part #WML-317-292 or Panduit #LS7-75NL-1
H. Patch Panel Labels
1. Brady part #CL-111-619 or Panduit #LS7-38-1
22
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 IDENTIFICATION and LABELING
A. All labeling will be compliant with ANSI/TIA 606-A - Administration Standard for Commercial
Telecommunications Infrastructures and comply with TCC Labeling Standards.
B. All labeling must be coordinated with TCC prior to start date.
C. The size, color, and contrast of all labels should be selected to ensure that the identifiers are easily
read. Labels should be visible during the installation of and normal maintenance of the infrastructure.
D. Labels should be resistant to the environmental conditions at the point of installation (such as
moisture, heat, or ultraviolet light), and should have a design life equal to or greater than that of the
labeled component.
E. All labels shall be printed or generated by a mechanical device.
END OF SECTION 28 05 53
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2308/22/2024[Appendix C]
SECTION 28 06 00 – TESTING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DELIVERABLES
A. It is essential for TCC Facilities Services to receive all test results and as- built drawings prior to
job acceptance. The test results must adhere to the following specifications, formats and delivery
conditions:
1. Specifications
a. Complete end-to-end test results for all copper STP,UTP and fiber optic cables installed are
required.
1) All fiber optic cable must be visually inspected and optically tested on the reel upon
delivery to the installation site. Using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR),
an access jumper with like fiber, a pigtail, and a mechanical splice, all fibers shall be
tested for continuity and attenuation. Testing for continuity and attenuation on the reel
must confirm factory specifications to ensure that the fiber optic cable was not damaged
during shipment. The test results must match the results of the factory-attached tag on
the reel, or the fiber shall not be used. Reel data sheet must be provided showing test
results.
2) End to end (bi-directional) test measurements shall be provided for single mode and
multimode fibers (2 wave lengths per test are required). Test results must be submitted
for review as part of the installation inspection requirements. Test results shall be in
paper form and electronic form, and must contain the names and signatures of the
technicians performing the tests.
3) Testing shall be performed on 100% of the fibers in the completed end-to-end system.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A, Annex H, provides the technical criteria and formulae to be used
in fiber optic testing. Note however, that all TCCD fiber must be tested, rated and
guaranteed for Ethernet GigaSPEED 1000B-X performance. Additionally, all fiber optic
cable links must pass all installation and performance tests both recommended and
mandated by the cable manufacturer.
4) 100% of all pairs of copper cables shall be tested for continuity and wire-map.
2. Format
a. Test Results must be submitted in both hard and soft copy in a format previously agreed to by
the client.
b. As Built drawings must be submitted with .dgn or .dwg file extensions.
3. Delivery
a. Test Results must be both hard copy and electronically submitted to the TCCD Facilities
Department. Contact information will be provided after contract is awarded and before project
completion.
24
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Field Test Reports: Upon completion and testing of the installed system, test reports shall be
submitted in booklet form and electronic media showing all field tests performed on, and adjustments
made to each/any component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified
performance criteria. Indicate and interpret test results in written form and verbally to owner/4b
Technology for compliance with performance requirements at a pre-scheduled meeting.
1. Specific test and verification requirements by demonstration or test are as follows. Owner
reserves the right to witness any and all tests.
a. Following factory assembly and delivery, the security subcontractor shall individually test each
component and sensor and verify the proper functioning of each component within a particular
sub-system.
b. Following installation, individually test each component and sensor and verify the proper
functioning of each component within a particular sub-system. Similarly test each sub-system
until all detection zones, alarm assessment components, alarm reporting and display, and
access control functions have been verified. Prior to final functional and operational tests of
the system correct any deficiencies. After sub-system verification is complete, test the entire
system to assure that all elements are compatible and function properly as a complete system.
c. Upon completion of the above outlined tests conduct a formal test to be known as the “System
Operational Test”, in which all components and sub-systems of the security system are
demonstrated to operate together as a system. This test is to be performed over a continuous
seventy-two (72) hour period. A formal test plan and test procedures for each portion of the
test shall be prepared by the security subcontractor and submitted to the Owner/Architect
for approval. The subcontractor must demonstrate that the security system components and
sub-systems meet specification requirements in the “As-Installed” operating environment
during the “System Operational Test”. While no formal environmental testing is required,
temperature, humidity and other environmental parameters should be measured and recorded.
Include this data in the test report document for the “System Operational Test.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.
3.03 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Include services of technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, system testing,
and to train TCC personnel.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2508/22/2024[Appendix C]
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required response to each. To be verified in the
presence of TCCD Staff, using commissioning form below as a model:
YES NO N/A
DOOR OPENS ON VALID READ
DOOR ALARMS ON INVALID READ
DOOR FORCED OPEN. IF CAMERA AT
LOCATION, VIDEO POPS UP ON ALARM
NO ALARM ON REX
REX BUILT INTO HANDLE / CRASHBAR
DOOR HELD OPEN PRE-ALARM
ALL ALARMS DISPLAY CORRECTLY IN
DISPATCH CENTER
DOOR LABELED CORRECTLY ON MAP
ENCLOSURE LABELED ON INSIDE WITH
CIRCUIT BREAKER AND PANEL #
ALL WIRE LABELED CORRECTLY PER DOOR
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY
FIRE ALARM CONNECTIVITY
TAMPER SWITCH ON ENCLOSURE
BEST LOCK CYLINDER ON ENCLOSURE WITH
POLICE SECURITY KEY CORE
PANELS ON EMERGENCY POWER WITH
BATTERY BACKUP
DATE_________________________________________________ TCCD STAFF__________________________________________________
TIME_________________________________________________
Building______________________________________________ Security Contractor____________________________________________
DOOR # / NAME______________________________________
General Contractor____________________________________________
END OF SECTION 28 06 00
NOTES
26
SECTION 28 13 00 - ACCESS CONTROL
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Security access devices.
B. Access control panel.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
B. Section 14 2010 - Passenger Elevators.
C. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 V and Less).
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association.
1.04 ACCESS CONTROL
A. All access control and intrusion detection components shall be the most current model or version
available and shall be compatible and interoperable with other installed systems such as digital
video management, fire alarm, and building environmental control systems. The system shall be
an IP based open architecture type system that facilitates monitoring from numerous workstations
throughout the system. The system shall provide interface with client workstations in police offices on
each individual campus and with the police dispatch center located on the Northeast campus.
B. The Access Control system consists of sub-systems such as Access Control and Intrusion Detection
servers, workstations and software, data gathering panels, LAN interface cards, card readers, door
position sensors and request to exit devices. The system shall allow for controlled entrances to
be programmed to lock and unlock on a predetermined schedule. The security integrator shall
coordinate with campus personnel to ascertain the desired door scheduling and program the system
to meet the schedule. Each time an entry is made with a valid credential the system shall record
and store that information on the server to provide an audit trail of when a door was opened (date
and time), who’s credential was presented for access (users name and card number). The system
shall also record and store the date and time of each alarm occurrence of a door being opened
without presentation of a valid credential or when a door remains open for longer than a preset
time programmed in the software. This information shall be continuously displayed on server and
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2708/22/2024[Appendix C]
workstation monitors and shall be recallable and printable from these stations. It is the responsibility
of the security integrator to verify proper operation of devices and systems prior to final acceptance.
1. The card readers shall be proximity readers and be programmable from a server or workstation
equipped with the security software. Card readers shall work such that upon presentation of a
valid ACID keycard, the unique card data shall be transmitted to an associated control panel
where the data is compared to an authorized user database and access is approved or rejected
accordingly. A valid authorization will activate operation of the electric lock and shunt the door
status switch. The alarm shunt will not affect supervision of the detection circuit.
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Security Access System: Control access to building using encoded cards.
1. Exterior Doors: Control access into building.
2. Interior Doors: Control access into all rooms.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide system wiring diagram showing each device and wiring connection required.
C. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
D. Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections.
E. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access authorization equipment.
G. Operation Data: Operating instructions.
H. Maintenance Data: Maintenance and repair procedures.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles
of Project.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience and MUST be a Lenel Value Added Reseller (VAR).
28
D. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and indicated.
1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of security access system for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2908/22/2024[Appendix C]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Security Access System:
1. Lenel / Facility Commander WinX.
2. Provide licenses and programming as required to integrate new building elements into the
existing campus Facility Commander Security suite.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Security Access Control Panel:
1. Product: GE ACUXL16- XL or XL Plus
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Encoded Card Readers:
1. Product: Ingersoll Rand Technologies aptiQ Series
a. Standard Reader: MT15
b. Mullion Reader: MT11
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
C. Encoded Card Controllers:
1. Product: Lenel RRE04-E1L Remote Reader Electronics Modules.
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
D. Encoded Cards:
1. Provided by TCC.
E. Electric Locks:
1. Refer to door hardware specification section.
F. System Cable:
1. Product: Panduit.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
3. Cable outer jacket shall be yellow in color.
30
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Use 16 AWG minimum size conductors for detection and signal circuit conductors. Install wiring in
conduit.
C. Make conduit and wiring connections to door hardware devices furnished and installed under Section
08 7100.
3.02 DEVICE POSITIONING
A. Card readers shall be installed at an ADA compliant height of 44” above grade. The door position
sensors shall be concealed, flush mounted units, mounted in top of the door frame approximately 4to
6 inches from the opening edge of the door.
3.03 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Field Test Reports: Upon completion and testing of the installed system, test reports shall be
submitted in booklet form and electronic media showing all field tests performed on, and adjustments
made to each/any component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified
performance criteria. Indicate and interpret test results in written form and verbally to owner/4b
Technology for compliance with performance requirements at a pre-scheduled meeting.
1. Specific test and verification requirements by demonstration or test are as follows. Owner
reserves the right to witness any and all tests.
a. Following factory assembly and delivery, the security subcontractor shall individually test each
component and sensor and verify the proper functioning of each component within a particular
sub-system.
b. Following installation, individually test each component and sensor and verify the proper
functioning of each component within a particular sub-system. Similarly test each sub-system
until all detection zones, alarm assessment components, alarm reporting and display, and
access control functions have been verified. Prior to final functional and operational tests of
the system correct any deficiencies. After sub-system verification is complete, test the entire
system to assure that all elements are compatible and function properly as a complete system.
c. Upon completion of the above outlined tests conduct a formal test to be known as the “System
Operational Test”, in which all components and sub-systems of the security system are
demonstrated to operate together as a system. This test is to be performed over a continuous
seventy-two (72) hour period. A formal test plan and test procedures for each portion of the
test shall be prepared by the security subcontractor and submitted to the Owner/Architect
for approval. The subcontractor must demonstrate that the security system components and
sub-systems meet specification requirements in the “As-Installed” operating environment
during the “System Operational Test”. While no formal environmental testing is required,
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3108/22/2024[Appendix C]
temperature, humidity and other environmental parameters should be measured and
recorded. Include this data in the test report document for the “System Operational Test.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.
3.05 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Include services of technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, system
testing, and to train TCCD personnel.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required response to each.
B. Provide 8 hours of instruction each for two persons.
1. Conduct instruction at project site with manufacturer’s representative.
2. Include travel and living expenses for TCCD personnel.
END OF SECTION 28 13 00
32
SECTION 28 23 00 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cameras.
B. Control equipment.
C. Cable and accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 28 1600 - Intrusion Detection.
B. Section 28 1300 - Access Control.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (Project Specific; sample below)
A. The TCC video surveillance system is an Internet Protocol (IP) camera based system that runs off
of signal and low voltage power generated by a Power over Ethernet (PoE) data network switch and
using signals transmitted over Local and Wide Area Network cable.
B. All cabling used for camera image transmission is the same type used for high end data networks,
Category 6 Unshielded Twisted Pair copper. Communications specifications sections should be
adhered to for installation of Category 6 cabling.
C. Indoor cameras will be powered by OFOI PoE network equipment. All outdoor cameras will be
powered by rack-mounted CFCI mid-span injectors which will be patched into OFOI network
equipment.
D. Camera data in recorded on viewed from an existing central storage device.
E. Video Storage will be provided by Owner but configured by Owner.
F. Camera software licenses may be required to add additional camera to the existing system.
G. Camera Types;
1. ID: Indoor Dome – For use in drop ceiling applications: drop ceiling kit required.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3308/22/2024[Appendix C]
2. VRD: Vandal Resistant Dome – For indoor use only.
3. OED: Outdoor Enclosure Dome – For outdoor use only
4. IT: MDF Room Camera – For use in TR only
5. PTZ: Outdoor Pan-tilt-zoom Camera – For use with Call Stanchion: Power injector required.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements, including system
wiring diagram.
C. Product Data: Provide showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements for each
component.
D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of cameras and routing of television cable.
F. Operation Data: Instructions for starting and operating system.
G. Maintenance Data: Routine trouble shooting procedures.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles
of Project.
C. Supplier Qualifications: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three years
documented experience.
D. Installer Qualifications: Authorized installer of specified manufacturer with service facilities within 100
miles of Project.
E. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and indicated.
1.07 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of television system for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPONENTS (Project Specific; sample below)
A. All cameras shall be from Verkada, Inc.
2.02 LICENSING
A. Verkada’s web software is called Command. This is the platform used to interact with and monitor all
Verkada devices.
B. An organization is the structure of users and devices within Command and one is created automatically
when a new account is made.
C. Licenses must be claimed in Command to be valid. To claim your license, enter your license key (found
in your Verkada order email) on the License Manager page. Whenever you add new devices to Command,
you must also remember to claim your license for those devices.
D. Command licenses may be purchased in 1, 3, 5, or 10-year lenghts. Verkada licenses are automatically
activated on the day the order is shipped.
E. Verkada licensing is applied for each Command organization, and the licenses co-term to a single
date. This means that all the licenses in an organization are combined, and the expiration date for the
organization is the weighted average of all the individual licenses.
F. If you don’t claim your licenses when adding new devices or products - or renew your licenses when they
expire - you will lose access to most of your Command functionality after a 30 days grace period.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Main Video Cable: Category 6
1. Product: General Cable.
2. Per Division 27 Specifications.
B. Camera Licenses: Provide Camera Licenses for each unit installed.
1. Product: Verkada device license - Five (5) year maintenance license.
2. Dome Series Datasheets - https://docs.verkada.com/docs/video-security-dome-series-datasheet.pdf.
3. Bullet Series Datasheets - https://docs.verkada.com/docs/video-security-bullet-series-datasheet.pdf.
4. Fisheye Series Datasheets - https://docs.verkada.com/docs/video-security-fisheye-series-datasheet.
pdf.
5. Mini Series Datasheets - https://docs.verkada.com/video-security-mini-series-datasheet.pdf.
6. Installation guides - https://help.verkada.com/en/articles/1411275-installation-of-your-verkada-
cameras.
7. Camera Mounts - https://docs.verkada.com/docs/accessories-overview.pdf.
8. Intercom-Door Activation - https://help.verkada.com/en/articles/6932919-wiring-an-intercom.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3508/22/2024[Appendix C]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. N/A
3.03 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide the services of manufacturer’s technical representative to prepare and start systems and
supervise final wiring connections and system adjustments.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust camera views as required by Owner.
END OF SECTION 28 23 00
36
SECTION 28 26 00 - ELECTRONIC PERSONAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS
(Designer to modify specification to meet Project requirements – deviations from listed part numbers requires
prior approval from TCCD)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
A. Functional Requirements
1. The Emergency Communication System (ECS) shall consist of a one button hands-free direct dial
communications unit or Call Box (CB).
2. Each CB shall be equipped with a red push button labeled POLICE, programmed to dial the
campus police 911 line for emergencies. .
3. The call boxes shall have a stainless steel faceplate and an LED that illuminates when the call
box is answered, for the hearing impaired. It will also be fitted with a vandal resistant speaker
grill. The Call Box shall be designed for flush mounting in a back box in wall. A separate blue
strobe light shall be wall mounted above the call box as a location identifier. The blue light shall
be normally illuminated for unit visibility. Pressing the POLICE button will cause the blue light to
flash for the duration of the call. Only when the called party terminates the call will the light stop
flashing.
4. Each CB shall be assign an IP address by the owner to allow the individual telephone unit to
be uniquely identified by the answering party. Actual programming shall be determined by the
Owner.
5. Each push button shall be provided with a momentary contact, normally open dry contact that
shall be wired to an access control panel alarm input to facilitate camera selection through the
ACID / DVMS integration.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3708/22/2024[Appendix C]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS LIST
A. Interior Call Box
1. PREFFERED: Surface Mount Z0485 with S-550 Combo Strobe and associated mounted kit.
2. Flush mount Z0459 with S-550 Combo Strobe and associated mounting kit.
B. Exterior Call Box
1. PREFERRED: Bollard mount Z0457 with OCM fiber.
2. Wall Mount Z0485 with S-550 Combo Strobe and associated mounting kit (as required).
2.02 COMPLIANCE
A. CSA Certified to UL Standard 60950.
2.03 WARRANTY
A. Equipment shall be warranted against any defects in material and workmanship, under normal use,
for a period of twelve months from date of installation. In the event system is found by manufacturer
to be defective within the warranty period, manufacturer shall repair and/or replace any defective
parts, provided the equipment is returned to manufacturer.
38
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install product according to manufacturer recommendations.
B. Coordinate with Telecommunications and Camera installers to ensure connectivity to telephone and
camera systems.
C. Coordinate with Electrical to provide power for CB and strobe.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.
3.03 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Include services of technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, system testing,
and to train TCC personnel.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required response to each.
END OF SECTION 28 26 00
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Topics
Introduction to TCCD
BIM Standards
Consultant Deliverables
Process & Quality of Deliverables
BIM(s)
Revit Specific Standard
Revit Platform Standard
Revit Architecture Standard
Revit MEP Standard
Revit Structure Standard
COBie/Commissioning
Electronic File
Management
BIM File Transmission
Plotting & Plot File
Management
Archiving & Recovery
Management
Master Drawing Updates
Revit Best Practices
(Recommended)
BIM Standards Manual for TCCD Facility Drawings
Updated: April 1, 2016
D2
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled
1
TOC of the BIM Standards Manual
1.0 - Introduction to TCCD BIM Standards ........................................................................................ 2 2.0 - Consultant Deliverables ................................................................................................................ 7 3.0 - Process & Quality of Deliverables ............................................................................................. 11 4.0 – Building Information Models (BIM) ........................................................................................ 14 5.0 - Revit Specific Standards .............................................................................................................. 30 6.0 - Revit Platform Standard .............................................................................................................. 38 7.0 - Revit Architecture Standard....................................................................................................... 75 8.0 - Revit MEP Standard ..................................................................................................................... 80 9.0 - Revit Structure Standard ............................................................................................................ 86 10.0 - COBie/ Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 87 11.0 - Electronic File Management .................................................................................................... 88 12.0 - BIM File Transmission .............................................................................................................. 95 13.0 - Plotting & Plot File Management ............................................................................................ 96 14.0 - Archiving & Recovery Management ....................................................................................... 98 15.0 - Master Drawing Updates Process ........................................................................................ 100 16.0 - Revit Best Practices (Recommended) ................................................................................ 103
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled
2
1.0 -Introduction to TCCD BIM Standards
1.1 TCCD BIM Standard Mission Statement The mission of the Facilities Department at Tarrant County College District is to successfully integrate district facilities. In delivering the mission, the Facilities Department’s number one goal is to provide for a safe, healthy and comfortable building environment for TCCD employees and the many thousands of students and visitors in TCCD buildings daily. By adhering to the below outlined BIM Standards it allows TCCD to develop and maintain graphic and related information which users can manage, operate, maintain and improve the facilities, grounds, and related infrastructure systems of TCCD.
1.2 Overview In general, the TCCD Building Information Model (BIM) Standards shall be followed by all Consultants engaged by TCCD to provide a Project’s design in BIM. This Standard describes the processes, procedures, and requirements that shall be followed for the preparation and submission of BIM(s) for TCCD Projects (new building and additions), as well as to produce, release, and receive data in a consistent format so to maintain an efficient exchange of data between disciplines and the compatibility of each disciplines’ Model(s). In order to achieve this goal, TCCD has chosen to utilize several “Autodesk” products. Therefore, terminology and references that are unique to the “Autodesk” based software applications are utilized throughout these Standards.
1.3 Design Although a Building Information Model that facilitates the design process and analysis of a Project will be the Design Team’s building block for the development of Contract Documents (Drawings), at this time a Building Information Model is not intended for construction purposes. 1.The Building Information Model shall be referred to throughout the design phase and construction phase of a Project as a Design Intent Building Information Model. 2.In order to ensure that portions of the Contract Documents (Drawings) that are derived from a Design Intent Building Information Model are correct, all Extracted Drawings shall contain the necessary Level of Development (LOD); data and information required for the development of the Contract Documents (Drawings) and required analyses. 3.Being that the Design Intent Building Information Model is not meant for construction purposes, it shall not be made a part of the Contract Documents.
D4
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled
3
1.4 Construction As indicated above, the Design Intent Building Information Model is not meant for construction purposes. In addition, it is not meant to imply means and methods of construction, and will not be made part of the Contract Documents. However, the Design Intent Building Information Model may be shared by TCCD with a contractor that is awarded a contract for the construction of a project for their convenience so that they may, if they so elect, utilize the Design Intent Building Information Model to develop a Building Information Model of their own, which they may choose to use for:
Estimating
Fabrication
Construction Sequencing
Scheduling Analysis Trade Coordination
Etc. Although it shall be understood by all parties that the Contract Documents are complete, the contractor will be required to agree that the Design Intent Building Information Model, which may be shared by TCCD with the contractor for their convenience, is not complete and shall not be relied upon by a contractor for the execution of the work.
1.5 Close-out/ As-Built Documents As-Built Models are Design Intent Models that have been updated throughout the construction process. These changes and updates have been communicated from the contractor to the Design Team through the comments, annotations, and mark-ups from the As-Built Documents. These typically, but not always, are discipline specific models. For all BIM projects, As-Built models following below outlined TCCD BIM Standards for each discipline must be submitted by the contractor. Contractors are to produce and submit a COBie (Construction Operations Building Information Exchange) spreadsheet that records installed equipment data (see COBie section of the Standards for more detailed requirements). All contractor As-Built deliverables will be submitted to TCCD for review and approval prior to the submittal of the contractor's final payment application. If review of the preliminary As-Built drawings/BIM(s) reveals errors and/or omissions, the drawings/BIM(s) will be returned to the contractor for corrections. The contractor shall make all corrections and return the drawings to TCCD within ten (10) calendar days of receipt. If more than two reviews are required, TCCD will be compensated by the contractor.
1.6 Contractor’s Use of Digital Data All BIM(s) and other BIM related electronic files and data that are to be provided for the convenience of a contractor shall always be through TCCD and shall never be directly between the consultant and a contractor and/or sub-contractor. TCCD will only provide a
Design Intent Building Information Model and BIM related electronic files and data to a contractor after the contractor has requested such, in writing, from and as required by TCCD.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 4
When a BIM Model and/or other BIM related electronic files and data are requested by a contractor from TCCD and TCCD agrees to provide the model, the contractor shall be required to sign a “Terms of Electronic File Transfer” document that has been prepared by TCCD, which amongst other things, establishes as fact that the BIM(s) and other BIM electronic files are not intended as an end product and do not constitute a part of the Contract Documents, see Appendix E. In light of the fact that BIM(s) and other BIM related electronic files are not to be relied upon by a contractor and are not part of a set of Contract Documents: 1.The Design Team shall not respond to any questions specifically related to the content within a BIM Model or other BIM related electronic files from any entity that pertains to the execution of the work described within a set of Contract Documents, which are the basis of a contract between TCCD and a contractor. 2.Notwithstanding the above, the Design Team shall respond to any and all questions, from TCCD, which pertain to the services required by these guidelines and Standards.
1.7 Ownership The consultant and its sub-consultants shall assign to TCCD all of their rights, title and interest, including all copyrights, copyright registrations, copyright applications, renewals, extensions and all other proprietary or ownership rights, in all Drawings and Building Information Models. This includes, but shall not be limited to, information, electronic files, data provided by TCCD, “Revit” Families (system-based and/or component-based) and any other content submitted as part of the BIM Model. All of the above shall become the property of TCCD at the conclusion of the Project, or termination of the services of the consultant, whichever is earlier, and when requested by TCCD in writing shall be delivered to the TCCD clearly marked, identified, and in good order.
1.8 Model Requirements All BIM(s) shall be developed in accordance with the most current version of TCCD BIM Standards and shall be compatible with the current version of the BIM application currently in use by the TCCD at the time an agreement had been reached and agreed upon, in writing, between the consultant and TCCD. In addition, all Models shall be provided to TCCD as per the latest version of Autodesk Revit software.
1.9 Versioning of the Standard The BIM Standard will be reviewed, and updated where deemed necessary, as a planned annual effort. Updates to individual modules, or new sections, may be issued at any time when significant changes are needed. The BIM Standards Manual will clearly reflect the revision number and date within the footer of each section.
D6
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 5
1.10 Printed Copies Uncontrolled Printed Copies of this manual and sections are “uncontrolled” as noted in the footer of each page of the BIM Standards Manual, meaning there is no attempt made to systematically update printed version of the standard. The online BIM Standards Manual found on the TCCD Website is considered the “official” version and should be used to avoid potential reference to out-of-date printed copies.
1.11 BIM Standards Orientation & Training BCAD will provide staff training and on-going support regarding the development, maintenance and implementation of TCCD BIM standards as needed. Should you or any of your team members require such training and support, contact your project manager for further direction.
1.12 Note to the Consulting Firms TCCD consultant contracts and design guidelines may reference this document. Each of the following sections contains the most essential criteria for developing Building Information Models (BIM’s). Refer to “Consultant Deliverables” section for specific requirements. Refer questions to the Facilities Department at TCCD.
1.13 Note to Users These Standards are to be followed by TCCD Revit users as well as all outside consultants providing Revit Models to TCCD. The BIM Standards will be reviewed annually. Recommendations will be considered during the review. BIM Standard deviations will only be accepted in project models with prior approval of TCCD.
1.14 Basis of TCCD BIM Standard The TCCD BIM Standards are based on the U.S. National BIM Standards (NBIMS-US™ V3) version 3 and National CAD Standards (NCS), Version 6. Modifications and refinements have been made to align these BIM Standards with TCCD’s facility documentation needs. In instances where there are differences between the TCCD BIM Standard and the NBIMS-US, the TCCD BIM Standard shall control. For items not covered in the TCCD BIM Standard, refer to the NBIMS-US for general guidance and consult with your BIM manager. TCCD encourages employees and consultants to refer to the NBIMS-US as an additional resource. TCCD BIM Standards has also referenced additional standards published by:
New York City School Construction Authority
General Services Administration
The American Institute of Architects
AEC (UK) BIM Technology Protocol
Australia & New Zealand Revit Standards
Army Corps of Engineers
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 6
1.15 Definitions The TCCD BIM Standards generally follow NBIMS-US and Autodesk terminology, some of which may not be familiar to all Revit users. This will be especially true of the terms used to describe different categories of electronic files used in creating Revit Models. Please refer to NBIMS-US, your BIM manager, or the Autodesk Help page for any definitions as needed.
1.16 Is this a Revit Standard? Yes, since Revit is the primary Building Information Modeling (BIM) platform of TCCD, the BIM Standards Manual is written in this context. In that sense, the Manual will refer to settings in Revit and uses the “language” of Revit. This Standard will also reference additional tools or software to be used in conjunction with Revit. Those include, but are not limited to:
COBie Toolkit
Navisworks Manage
Excel
Etc.
D8
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 7
2.0 -Consultant Deliverables
2.1Overview TCCD’s goal with these Standards is to create Facility Drawings and Models that are consistent in appearance and which integrate the required flexibility to meet the fluid and expanding needs of TCCD. We believe these standards are comprehensive and practical … and we invite our consultants to utilize them in their entirety. It is however, not TCCD’s intention to add undue burden on the consultants with these standards. TCCD understands their consultants may have spent considerable effort and expense in developing their own in-house standards and production methods. In defining the “Consultant Deliverables”, TCCD has attempted a compromise … one that provides TCCD with the structure and flexibility needed with the drawings and models, yet still allows the consultant to maintain most of their production methods.
2.2Consultant Final Deliverables Below is a Checklist for Consultant Final Deliverables:
1.Introduction to TCCD BIM Standards a.All BIM Models shall be developed in accordance with the most current version of TCCD BIM Standards
2.Consultant Deliverables a.TCCD Consultants will be required to follow ALL of the items outlined in this section.
b.TCCD Consultants are encouraged, but NOT required to follow the best practices described in this document or the requirements NOT outlined in section 2 – Consultant Deliverables.
3.Process & Quality of Deliverables
a.General quality of the deliverables will be adhered to by the consultants as described in section 3 - Process & Quality of Deliverables.
4.Building Information Models (BIM) a.Consultants will adhere to the Level of Development (LOD) Definitions as described in section 4.2 Level of Development/ Model Content. b.Consultants will adhere to the Model LOD requirements for each design phase as described in section 4.3 Design Phases. c.Consultants will ensure that models are coordinated between all trades and will submit a Coordination & Clash Detection report as described in section 4.4
Coordination & Clash Detection.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 8
5.Revit Specific Standards a.Consultants will use the Revit version and build # specified by TCCD at the time of contract agreement. b.Consultants are required to submit their version of the Central File with all worksets preserved when exchanging information with TCCD. c.Consultants will use the TCCD Provided Title Block and Cover Sheet d.Title Blocks: Use of TCCD Title Block is REQUIRED. Title Blocks for all acceptable sheet sizes are available for download. See section 5.6 Cover Page & Title Block for more detailed information. e.Cover Sheet: Use of TCCD Cover Sheet is REQUIRED. Consultant Cover Sheet for all acceptable sheet sizes are available for download. See section 5.6 Cover Page & Title Block for more detailed information. f.View Titles: Consultants are required to use TCCD standard View Titles for all drawings. .See section 5.8 View Titles for more detailed information. g.Room Tags: While consultants are encouraged to use TCCD Room Tags, they are not required to. However, custom parameters established by TCCD MUST be associated with each room/ space and properly filled out. Consultant Room Tags MUST match TCCD Font styles and general appearance. h.Schedules: TCCD uses a few for the purposes of TCCD facility master drawings and models. These schedules MUST be present in ALL models. Required schedules include (see section 5.10 Schedules for more information):
*Occupancy Loads - IBC 2012
*Occupancy Schedule
*Space Use Code Table
ROOM SCHEDULE
SHEET INDEX
6.Revit Specific Standards a.Project Base Point: Consultants CAN use campus wide project base point established by the civil engineer for the duration of the project. At the final project closeout stage, however, consultants are required to relocate project to the base point as described above. TCCD Parameters: Adding TCCD Shared Parameters is REQUIRED. Refer to the appendices for a complete list or the TCCD Shared Parameter text file can be downloaded with the standards. b.Annotation Settings: TCCD consultants WILL follow text, leader and dimension Settings as described in sections 6.7 through 6.11. c.Line Weights, Line Styles, Line Patterns & Fill Patterns: TCCD recommends that their consultants use settings as described in sections 6.15 through 6.15, but TCCD will accept consultants preferred settings as long as they are organized
D10
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 9
and drawings present an appropriate range of line weights and line patterns to clearly convey the design intent.
d.Shared Parameters: i.Consultants are REQUIRED to include all of TCCD custom parameters into their models. See appendix G for a complete list of said parameters and their settings. ii.Parameter managements and naming system will be followed as described in section 6.17 Shared Parameters. e.Worksharing:C will follow recommendations and best practices regarding workshared models and model maintenance as described in section 6.18 Worksharing. f.Naming Convention: All models and any other reference files turned over by TCCD consultant to TCCD WILL follow the naming guidelines outlined in section 6.19 Naming Convention. i.Acceptable exception is Revit families loaded into the models. TCCD will accept consultant established naming convention for their families, as long as family names are coherent, concise, and representative of a family (avoid coded family names or lengthy and disorganized names that might come with 3rd party developed content). g.Project Browser: Consultants can use their in-house standard view naming and project browser organization. However, the following must be included in the consultant models: i.All of the TCCD view and sheet related parameters must be defined and properly filled out in the consultant models (see section 6.20 Project Browser and appendix G for more detailed information). ii.Drawing sheets MUST follow sheet naming convention as described in section 6.20 Project Browser. iii.Both MSI as well as Revit Sheet List Schedule must be generated, maintained, and turned over to TCCD and with each submission as described in section 6.20 Project Browser.
7.Revit Architecture Standard a.Consultants will follow wall naming convention as well as object style settings for the Walls, Common Edges, and Hidden Lines as described in section 7.2 Walls. b.While Space Use Plan is not a requirement for the consultant, associated room parameters must be defined and filled out as per section 7.5 Space Use Plans.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D1108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 10
8.Revit MEP Standard a.Consultants will adhere to the standards as described in section 8.0 Revit MEP
Standards.
9.Revit Structure Standard a.Consultants will adhere to the standards as described in section 9.0 Revit
Structure Standards.
10.COBie/ Commissioning a.Consultants will adhere to the standards as described in section 10.0 COBie/ Commissioning.
11.Electronic File Management a.As project milestones are submitted to TCCD, consultants will turn in organized and clean directories of files as described in section 11.0 Electronic File Management.
12.BIM File Transmission a.Consultants will adhere to the standards as described in section 12.0 BIM File Transmission.
13.Plotting & Plot File Management
a.This section if for TCCD in-house design teams only.
14.Archiving & Recovery Management a.This section if for TCCD in-house design teams only.
15.Master Drawing Updates Process a.This section if for TCCD in-house design teams only.
16.Revit Best Practices (Recommended) a.Consultants will adhere to Revit best practices and turn over clean and well maintained models as well as any other files. b.Consultants will use their in-house standards to perform project coordination and clash detection. Only coordinated models will be submitted to TCCD at each design phase. Coordination report will be attached with the models. Upon completion of the Services required, TCCD will perform an assessment of a project’s BIM/Revit Model(s) so that it may assess the Design Team’s compliance with the TCCD’s BIM Standards and the effectiveness of the Design Team’s required “Quality Control Program”. Upon the TCCD’s completion of a BIM/Revit Model’s quality assessment, TCCD will provide the Design Team with a copy of the “Quality Assessment Report” for appropriate action which shall include, but not be limited to, bringing a project’s BIM/Revit Model(s) into full compliance with the TCCD’s BIM Standards.
D12
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 11
3.0 -Process & Quality of Deliverables
3.1 BIM Implementation Plan The information contained within these Standards is the basis for the implementation of Building Information Management design by TCCD. The implementation of policies and protocols not provided by TCCD for the implementation of a successful design through Building Information Modeling, such as, but not limited to; Electronic Communication Protocols, BIM Information/Data Exchange, Permission Files and the roles, responsibilities and staffing requirements for each member of the Design Team, is the responsibility of the consultant.
3.2 Model Quality In addition to adhering to TCCD Standards, each member of the Design Team shall establish their own modeling quality control guidelines and exchange protocols. Good BIM practices include, but are not limited to:
The Use of elements and component objects that embed the best practices of the firm
The Maintenance of parametric linkages within the model at all times
In the absence of TCCD Standards, use Industry Standard nomenclature for objects and spaces
Use appropriate and interoperable viewing, checking, and output file formats TCCD requires that all Revit Models shall be developed using object-based elements only, such as columns, beams, walls, doors, windows, etc. along with their associated parametric information. This will stream down the Revit processes from design all the way down to construction and then operations. It is essential that the Design Team tailor its “Quality Control Program”, which is required by the TCCD Architectural and Engineering Contract for Consultant Services, to ensure the overall quality of the Contract Documents and BIM Model(s). The required BIM “Quality Control Program” shall, at a minimum, include the following checks to ensure quality:
Collaboration Procedures o Ensure coordination, communication and exchange protocols
Visual Check
o Ensure that there are no unintended model components
Interference Check
o Detect conflicts in the model and/or models where building elements are clashing
Standards Check o Ensure that TCCD BIM Standards have been followed (fonts, dimensions, etc.)
Element Validation Check
o Ensure that the data set has no undefined or incorrectly defined elements
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D1308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 12
The Design Team is encouraged to use electronic project collaboration tools such as document management and file sharing sites, reviewing tools, project communication websites, web meetings, and videoconferencing.
3.3 Quality Assessment Report Upon completion of the Services required, TCCD will perform an assessment of a project’s BIM/Revit Model(s) so that it may assess the Design Team’s compliance with the TCCD’s BIM Standards and the effectiveness of the Design Team’s required “Quality Control Program”. The focus of the TCCD’s “Quality Assessment Report” will include, but will not be limited to, the following:
Section 1
Required models have been provided, including appropriate level of detail and content of models.
Schedules are populated from models
Interferences and conflicts (clashes) between building elements have been mitigated
Section 2
Compliance with technical criteria
Adherence to predetermined standards (See section 2 “Consultant Deliverables” for a detailed list of consultant requirements)
Proper utilization of parametric data exchange between disciplines Upon the TCCD’s completion of a BIM/Revit Model’s quality assessment, TCCD will provide the Design Team with a copy of the “Quality Assessment Report” for appropriate action which shall include, but not be limited to, bringing a project’s BIM/Revit Model(s) into full compliance with the TCCD’s BIM Standards.
3.4 Contract Document Quality As described previously, the Design Intent Building Information Model will not be made part of the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents (Drawings) shall be the 2-dimensional (2-D) Drawings. 1.The aforementioned 2-D Drawings shall be the basis for the bid and award of a contract for the execution of the Work. 2.Unless specified otherwise herein, all required Drawings, including, but not limited to; plans, details, sections, elevations, schedules, diagrams, as described by the TCCD “Design & Construction Standards”, shall be provided in 2-D and the level of development and information provided shall be sufficient for the execution of the work.
D14
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 13
a.2-D Drawings should be Extracted from a BIM Model and/or Models and made a part of the Contract Documents (Drawings), provided that each 2-D Extraction of a referenced BIM Model provides the level of development and information that is necessary for the execution of the work. 3.Building Elements that are not included in a Model and are necessary for the execution of the Work shall be included in the Contract Documents (Drawings).
3.5 Submission Schedules and Required Deliverables 1.The Level of Detail required of a Model shall reflect the data and information required by each Design Phase and as described within this Section and Section 3 - BIM(s), so to illustrate all Building Elements that are required to be modeled and/or that are necessary for the performance of required reports, analyses and so to illustrate the design intent of the work. 2.In addition to the hardcopy and electronic deliverables that are required by the TCCD Architectural and Engineering Contract for Consultant Services, the following shall be submitted to TCCD for each Design Submission Phase and/or Sub-Phase a.A PDF set of all drawings/ sheets b.Electronic copies of all models c.Hardcopy and electronic copy of all required analyses, estimates and reports
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D1508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 14
4.0 –Building Information Models (BIM)
4.1 General BIM(s) are required for all Phases of design and certain Building Elements/Systems are required to be modeled for the successful execution of a Design Intent BIM Model. 1.Section 3.3 identifies Models that are required, at a minimum, for Architectural, Structural, HVAC Systems, Electrical Systems; and Plumbing/Drainage and Fire Protection Systems. a.In order to facilitate the development of Building Elements that need to be modeled, the TCCD has developed a library of standard TCCD Families for the use of Architects and Engineers that are preparing Contract Documents (Drawings) for the TCCD. b.The Design Team shall use Building Elements that are provided by TCCD. c.The Design Team may use modeled Building Elements that are not available in the TCCD Standard Library of BIM Families such as those that are provided by Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”), Manufacturers and/or created by the Design Team, provided that the amount of data and/or parameters of such models do not incorporate unnecessary information, data and/or graphics.
4.2 Level of Development/Model Content The Model Level of Development describes the degree to which the element’s geometry and attached information has been thought through – the degree to which project team members may rely on the information when using the model. The Level of Development is accumulative and should progress from Level to Level. 1.At a minimum, all required Models shall be detailed to the Level of Development required by each Design Phase and/or Sub-Phase. 2.BIM(s) shall be created that include all geometry, physical characteristics, information and data necessary so to describe and facilitate the design, intended construction, and cost estimating of a project as necessary to meet the requirements, as described herein, for each Design Phase and/or Sub-Phase of a project. In addition, all drawings, simulations, and services required for analysis, and review shall be extractions from the Model(s). 3.Required Modeled Building Elements need not illustrate/depict individual parts that are required for the assembly and/or the manufacture of the Modeled Building Element. The intent of a required Modeled Building Element is to provide overall size, shape, clearances, information, data, and the orientation of a Modeled Building Element for its installation and coordination with other required work, as well as for the population of required Schedules. 4.Although Building Elements that may be found in the TCCD Standard Library of BIM Families shall be used when required by the following Levels of Development, the Design Team may elect to use these Building Element Models when a model is required, at a level of lesser detail, during any Design Phase and/or Sub-Phase.
D16
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 15
5.The following “Level of Development Key” shall be followed by the Design Team when providing Models for the different phases. Note that the following images illustrate the expected amount of graphical information to comply with the indicated level of development, with a wall slab-assembly used as an example. The tables illustrate the amount of data/information to be included if one were to extract a schedule or perform an analysis at the indicated level of development. 6.When in doubt, users should opt for less 3D geometry, rather than more, as the efficiency of the BIM is largely defined by the performance of the components contained within.
LOD 100: LOD 100 elements are not geometric representations. Examples are information attached to other model elements or symbols showing the existence of a component but not its shape, size, or precise location. Any information derived from LOD 100 elements must be considered approximate. Example: Solid mass model representing overall building volume; or, schematic wall elements that are not distinguishable by type or material. Assembly depth/thickness and locations are still flexible.
LOD 200: The Model Element is graphically represented within the Model as a generic system, object, or assembly with approximate quantities, size, shape, location, and orientation. Non-graphic information may also be attached to the Model Element. At this LOD elements are generic placeholders. They may be recognizable as the components they represent, or they may be volumes for space reservation. Any information derived from LOD 200 elements must be considered approximate. Example: Generic wall objects separated by type of material (e.g. brick wall vs. terracotta). Approximate overall wall thickness represented by a single assembly. Layouts and locations still flexible
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D1708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 16
LOD 300: The Model Element is graphically represented within the Model as a specific system, object or assembly in terms of quantity, size, shape, location, and orientation. Non-graphic information may also be attached to the Model Element. The quantity, size, shape, location, and orientation of the element as designed can be measured directly from the model without referring to non-modeled information such as notes or dimension call-outs. Example: Composite model assembly with specific overall thickness that accounts for veneer, structure, insulation, air space, and interior skin specified for the wall system. (Refer to LOD350 and LOD400 for individually modeled elements) Penetrations are modeled to nominal dimensions for major wall openings such as windows, doors, and large mechanical elements. Required non-graphic information associated with model elements includes: Wall Types, Materials
LOD 350: The Model Element is graphically represented within the Model as a specific system, object, or assembly in terms of quantity, size, shape, location, orientation, and interfaces with other building systems. Non-graphic information may also be attached to the Model Element. Parts necessary for coordination of the element with nearby or attached elements are modeled. These parts will include such items as supports and connections. The quantity, size, shape, location, and orientation of the element as designed can be measured directly from the model without referring to non-modeled information such as notes or dimension call-outs. Example: Cold formed metal framing is developed with sufficient elements to support detailed interface coordination with other systems such as MEP. Image notes: 1.Elements in red are critical wall support elements that cannot be easily cut for coordination of MEP opening through the walls. 2.Diagonal bracing (kickers) that may be in the above ceiling space are modeled for coordination with other building content such as MEP passing along the wall in the above ceiling spaces. 3.Infill cold formed metal framing modeling (Orange) may be omitted at this LOD if deemed so but the project team. Cladding and sheathing are not shown for clarity in this image.
D18
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 17
LOD 400: The Model Element is graphically represented within the Model as a specific system, object or assembly in terms of size, shape, location, quantity, and orientation with detailing, fabrication, assembly, and installation information. Non-graphic information may also be attached to the Model Element. An LOD 400 element is modeled at sufficient detail and accuracy for fabrication of the represented component. The quantity, size, shape, location, and orientation of the element as designed can be measured directly from the model without referring to non-modeled information such as notes or dimension call-outs. Example: Cold formed metal framing is developed with sufficient elements that support the fabrication of the CFMF system. Image notes: 1.Connection content is development in the wall elements. This includes but is not limited to fasteners, clips, and other related hardware.
LOD 500: The Model Element is a field verified representation in terms of size, shape, location, quantity, and orientation. Non-graphic information may also be attached to the Model Elements. This model can be field modified LOD 300, 350, or 400 model.
Additional LOD Examples:
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D1908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 18
4.3 Design Phases The Design Team shall model required Building Elements and provide all analyses and reports required by the following Sections for each Design Phase and/or Sub-Phase of a project. It is understood that during early project design stages, Revit “Design Options” feature might be used by the design teams. It is acceptable to submit models with the design options in the model, except for the final As-built documentation. As-built documentation is to reflect design option selected and installed.
Pre-Schematic Design Intent Models The objective of the Pre-Schematic Design Model(s) is to establish conceptual design parameters. In general, the Model(s) shall depict the visual concept and general layout of the project including all space requirements. At minimum this phase must meet LOD 100. 1.The Design Team shall provide an Architectural Massing Model(s) that incorporates all information required to demonstrate the overall concept of each design scheme. 2.The Design Team shall extract square foot information using BIM Authoring Software and other BIM integrated tools to support comparative costs analysis of each design scheme. Outputs shall be converted to spreadsheets and submitted as part of the design solution justification at the end of each Design Phase and/or Sub-Phase. 3.Below shown LOD Table defines the minimum Level of Development to be provided for each modeled Building Element:
Schematic Design Intent Models The objective of the Schematic Design Model(s) is to provide spatial design(s) based on input from the Pre-Schematic Design Phase and establish the initial design of architectural, structural and major mechanical (HVAC Equipment) Building Elements. Therefore, the Architectural model(s) shall depict the general design and layout of the building structure, be coordinated with major mechanical Building Elements, and act as the baseline for the further development of all Structural and MEP Models. The Design Team shall provide Architectural Massing Models that incorporates all information required to demonstrate the overall conceptual design of each design scheme.
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD350 LOD400 LOD50000000 - Architectural Model ----------00000 - Building Elevations ----------00000 - Building Sections ----------00000 - Site Plans ----------00000 - Zoning Envelope ----------
OTHER
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
ARCHITECTURAL MASSING MODEL
SITEWORK
MODEL LOD - PRE-SCHEMATIC DESIGN INTENT MODELS
CATEGORY/BUILDING ELEMENT
D20
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 19
1.The Design Team shall provide Architectural Massing Models that incorporates all information required to demonstrate the overall conceptual design of each design scheme. In addition to the above, the Architectural Massing Model shall be conducive to conceptual cost estimating. 2.The consultant shall use BIM Authoring software or other analysis tools to compare and validate the approved Educational Program of Requirements with each design scheme when required by a Design Phase and/or Sub-Phase. When determining and calculating square footage for a project, the consultant shall follow the criteria set forth within TCCD Design Requirements for square footage calculations & building efficiency. 3.The Design Team shall extract square foot information using BIM Authoring Software and other BIM integrated tools to support comparative costs analysis of each design scheme. Outputs shall be converted to spreadsheets and submitted as part of the design solution justification at the end of each Design Phase and/or Sub-Phase. 4.The Consultant shall provide an independent 3-D Model for each design scheme, when required by a Design Phase and/or Sub-Phase, so that the Architectural massing of a proposed building can be visualized in context with adjacent properties and structures so that key participants within the TCCD may quickly comprehend complex spatial conditions as well as zoning setbacks and height requirements. In addition, the 3-D Model shall demonstrate whether or not a building’s design (bulk, volume and massing), for each design scheme, complies with applicable Zoning Regulations. a.All 3-D Zoning Models shall depict proposed conditions as well as as-of-right conditions. 5.Below shown LOD Table defines the minimum Level of Development to be provided for each modeled Building Element:
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD350 LOD400 LOD50000000 - Architectural Model ----------00000 - Building Elevations ----------00000 - Building Sections ----------00000 - Site Plans ----------00000 - Zoning Envelope ----------
OTHER
MODEL LOD - SCHEMATIC DESIGN INTENT MODELS
CATEGORY/BUILDING ELEMENT LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
ARCHITECTURAL MASSING MODEL
SITEWORK
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D2108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 20
Design Development Design Intent Models The objective of the Design Development Model is to provide spatial design, based on the Schematic Design Model that has been approved by TCCD, and establish the initial design for building systems and attributes including architectural, structural, and MEP so to identify initial coordination issues between all building systems. Therefore, the architectural Model shall show the general design and layout of the building and act as the baseline for all other subsystem designs, such as MEP and Structural Models. The subsystem designs shall be used to demonstrate the initial selection and layout of building components.
Contract Document Design Intent Models The Design Team shall continue development of their Building Information Model. Parametric links shall be maintained within the Models to enable automatic generation of all plans, sections, elevations, schedules and 3D views. All information needed to describe the detailed design shall be graphically or alphanumerically included in and derived from these models. 1.At a minimum, the Building Elements described within this Section for Architectural, Structural, HVAC, Electrical, Plumbing/Drainage and Fire Protection Systems, etc. shall be modeled by the Design Team so to describe and facilitate the design, intended construction, and cost estimating. 2.The Consultant shall use BIM Authoring software or other analysis tools to compare and validate the approved Educational Program of Requirements with each design scheme when required by a Design Phase and/or Sub-Phase. When determining and calculating square footage for a project, the consultant shall follow the criteria set forth within TCCD Design Requirements for square footage calculations & building efficiency. 3.When and where appropriate, the Design Team is encouraged to extract quantity takeoff information and data using BIM Authoring Software and other BIM integrated tools to support and validate required cost estimates. 4.The Consultant shall provide an independent 3-D Model for each design scheme, when required by a Design Phase and/or Sub-Phase, so that the architectural massing of a proposed building can be visualized in context with adjacent properties and structures so that key participants within TCCD may quickly comprehend complex spatial conditions as well as zoning setbacks and height requirements. In addition, the 3-D Model shall demonstrate whether or not a building’s design (bulk, volume and massing), for each design scheme, complies with applicable Zoning Regulations. a.All 3-D Zoning Models shall depict proposed conditions as well as as-of-right conditions. 5.Appendix A for Notes for each required building element that is to be modeled.
D22
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 21
6.Below LOD Tables defines the minimum Level of Development to be provided for each modeled Building Element:
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD100 LOD200 LOD30000000 - Site Plans --------02200- Earthwork 02200a - Earthwork (Flow-Through Turf AF) 02200b - Earthwork (Float Drain Turf or Natural Grass AF) 02215 - Controlled Low Strength Material 02511 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving --------02512 - Porous Asphalt Paving and Aggregate Base --------02513 - Sidewalk and Street Paving --------02515 - Unit Pavers --------02516 - Exposed Porous Asphalt Paving and Aggregate Base --------02531 - Resilient Surfacing 02532 - Resilient Surfacing - Porous Base 02533 - Colored Athletic Wearing Surface 02541 - Synthetic Turf - TPE Infill --------02580 - Track/Court/Playground Markings02711 - Wall Subdrainage Systems --------02721 - Trench Drains --------02722 - Precast Concrete Basins and Manholes --------02723 - Storm Drainage Systems --------02724 - Underdrain System for Porous Asphalt Paving --------02725 - Underdrain System for Skinned Areas --------02831 - Chain Link Fences and Gates --------02860 - Early Childhood Playground Equipment --------02862 - Outdoor Game Equipment --------02870 - Site and Street Furnishings --------02900 - Landscaping --------10350 - Flagpole (Site)--------16420 - Transformer Vaults --------00000 - Canopies, Overhangs and Exterior Sun Control Elements --------04200 - Exterior Unit Masonry Walls and Parapets --------04270 - Glass Unit Masonry --------04420 - Exterior Cut Stone --------04435 - Cast Stone --------04700 - Simulated Masonry --------07115 - Sheet Membrane Waterproofing for Foundations 07120 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing for Plaza Decks 07147 - Crystalline Waterproofing 07150 - Chemical Resin Injection Grouting 07160 - Bituminous Damproofing SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
BUILDING ENVELOPE/FOUNDATION & SUPERSTRUCTURE
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
SITEWORK
DD & CD DESIGN INTENT MODELS
ARCHITECTURAL
DESIGN DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
CONTRACT DOCUMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
CATEGORY/
BUILDING ELEMENT
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D2308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 22
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD100 LOD200 LOD30007211 - Perimeter Foundation Insulation --------07212 - Miscellaneous Building Insulation --------07272 - Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier, Vapor Retarding07314 - Slate Shingles --------07321 - Clay Tile Roofing --------07553 - Hybrid Built-Up/SBS Modified Bituminous Roofing --------07560 - Fluid-Applied Protected Membrane Roofing --------07561 - Fluid-Applied Protected Membrane Roofing --------07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal07610 - Sheet Metal Roofing --------07720 - Roof Accessories --------08110 - Steel Doors and Frames --------08220 - Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Doors --------08330 - Coiling Doors, Grilles and Shutters --------08510 - Steel Windows - Projected, Casement, Pivoted, Hung --------08522 - Aluminum Double-Hung Windows --------08524 - Aluminum Projected Windows --------08621 – Fiberglass Sandwich Panel Skylights --------08662 - Security Screens and Barriers --------08730 - Thresholds, Weatherstripping and Seals08920 - Aluminum Curtain Walls --------00000 - Sun Control Building Elements --------04200 - Unit Masonry Partitions and Walls --------05170 - Support System for Suspended Ceilings07110 - Sheet Membrane Waterproofing 07212 - Miscellaneous Building Insulation --------08110 - Steel Doors and Frames --------08210 - Wood Doors --------08305 - Access Doors --------08330 - Coiling Doors, Grilles and Shutters --------08800 - Miscellaneous Glazing 09205 - Furring and Lathing 09210 - Plaster 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies (interior metal stud partitions)--------09310 - Ceramic Tile09410 - Terrazzo Floors --------09510 - Acoustical Ceilings and Soffits --------09590 - Wood Flooring --------09626 - Resilient Athletic Flooring --------09650 - Resilient Flooring --------09670 – Vinyl Sheet Athletic Flooring --------09675 – Fluid-Applied Equipment Room Flooring --------09680 - Carpet --------09685 – Tile Carpet --------09705 - Resinous Flooring --------
BUILDING ENVELOPE/FOUNDATION & SUPERSTRUCTURE
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
INTERIOR WALLS, PARTITIONS, FINISHES AND OTHER ASSEMBLIES
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
DD & CD DESIGN INTENT MODELS
ARCHITECTURAL
CATEGORY/
BUILDING ELEMENT
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
CONTRACT DOCUMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
D24
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 23
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD100 LOD200 LOD30006410 - Custom Casework --------10100 - Visual Display Boards --------10151 - Toilet Compartments --------10160 - Factory Painted Steel Toilet partitions --------10185 - Plastic Shower and Dressing Compartments --------10214 - Stationary Metal Wall Louvers --------10270 - Access Flooring --------10350 - Flagpole (Building)--------10400 - Identifying Devices --------10415 - Bulletin and Display Boards, Display Cases and Cabinets --------10505 - Metal Lockers --------10522 - Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets --------10605 - Wire Mesh Work --------10652 - Electrically Operated Folding Panel Partitions --------10653 - Manually Operated Folding Panel Partitions --------10655 - Accordion Folding Partitions --------10675 - Metal Storage Shelving --------10720 - Window Guards (Interior and Exterior)--------10810 - Toilet and Bath Accessories --------10830 - Mirrors --------10840 - Grab Bars --------11050 - Library Equipment --------11061 - Auditorium Curtains and Projection Screens --------11172 - Waste Handling Equipment --------11400 - Food Service Equipment --------11450 - Domestic Type Equipment --------11452 - Culinary Arts Lab Equipment --------11460 - Unit Kitchens --------11480 - Gymnasium Equipment --------11500 - Shop Equipment --------11600 - Laboratory Equipment --------12302 - Manufactured Wood Casework --------12345 - Soapstone --------12485 - Foot Grilles --------12501 - Chain and Clutch Operated Window Shades --------12545 - Draperies --------12710 - Fixed Audience Seating --------12761 - Wood Bleachers --------13031 - Walk-in Trash Refrigerators --------13120 - Steel Bleachers --------14120 - Electric Dumbwaiters --------14210 – MRL Traction Passenger Elevators --------14211 - Geared Traction Passenger Elevators --------14240 - Direct-Acting Hydraulic Passenger Elevators --------
SPECIALTIES/EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS & SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
CONVEYING SYSTEMS
DD & CD DESIGN INTENT MODELS
ARCHITECTURAL
CATEGORY/
BUILDING ELEMENT
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
CONTRACT DOCUMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D2508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 24
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD100 LOD200 LOD30014241 – Holeless Direct-Acting Hydraulic Passenger Elevators --------14250 - Dual-Jack Roped Hydraulic Passenger Elevators --------14315 - Hydraulic Sidewalk Elevators --------14316 - Geared Traction Sidewalk Elevators --------14420 - Hydraulic Vertical Wheelchair Lifts --------14421 – Indoor Inclined Wheelchair Lifts --------14510 - Escalators --------02221 - Sub-Slab Depressurization System03300 - Ramps --------05500 - Metal Fabrications --------05580 - Sheet Metal Fabrications --------05700 - Ornamental Metal --------05710 - Steel Stairs --------05810 - Prefabricated Expansion Joint Covers 07270 - Firestopping/Smoke Seals 07900 - Joint Sealers 08710 - Finish Hardware
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
CONVEYING SYSTEMS
OTHER
DD & CD DESIGN INTENT MODELS
ARCHITECTURAL
CATEGORY/
BUILDING ELEMENT
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN DEVELOPMENT CONTRACT DOCUMENT
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD100 LOD200 LOD30002360 - Piles --------03300 - Caissons --------03300 - Footings --------03300 - Grade Beams --------03300 - Piers --------03300 - Pile/Caisson Caps --------03300 - Slabs --------03300 - Strap Beams and Tie Beams --------03300 - Pits and Property Line Boxes --------03300 - Underground Tanks --------03300 - Walls --------03300 - Concrete Parapets --------05120 - Beams --------05120 - Built-up Girders --------05120 - Columns --------05120 - Gusset Plates 05120 - Lateral Bracing --------
FRAMING SYSTEMS
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
FOUNDATION SYSTEMS
DD & CD DESIGN INTENT MODELS
STRUCTURAL
CATEGORY/
BUILDING ELEMENT
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
CONTRACT DOCUMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
D26
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 25
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD100 LOD200 LOD30005120 - Trusses --------05230 - Steel Joists Girders --------05300 - Superstructure Slabs (metal deck)03300 - Concrete Curbs --------03300 - Concrete Stairs --------05120 - Dunnage --------07250 - Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials --------07260 - Intumescent Fireproofing --------08920 - Aluminum Curtain Walls --------03300 - Footings --------03300 - Retaining Walls --------03300 - Handball Walls --------03300 - Stairs and Ramps --------00000 - Other --------
MISCELLANEOUS
SITEWORK
SEE APPENDIX A SEE APPENDIX A
DD & CD DESIGN INTENT MODELS
STRUCTURAL
CATEGORY/
BUILDING ELEMENT
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
CONTRACT DOCUMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
FRAMING SYSTEMS
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD100 LOD200 LOD30015514 - Duct Insulation ----------15575 - Boiler Flue (Chimney)--------15891 - Duct Silencers ----------15891 - Ductwork (Supply, Exhaust and Return) --------15910 – Duct Access Doors and Accessories ----------15915 - Dampers, Actuators and Ductwork Components ----------15940 – Duct Air Outlet/Inlets --------15513 - Equipment Insulation ----------15515 - Air Separators ----------15515 - Expansion Tanks ----------15517 - Chemical Feed Units ----------15540 - Chilled Water Pumps --------15540 - Condensate Pumps ----------15540 - Hot Water Pumps --------15565 - Hot Water Condensing Boilers --------15590 - Fuel Oil Duplex Pumps --------15590 - Fuel Oil Storage Tanks --------15590 - Emergency Generator Systems (Fill Boxes)--------
DUCTWORK
EQUIPMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS
DD & CD DESIGN INTENT MODELS
HVAC
CATEGORY/
BUILDING ELEMENT
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
CONTRACT DOCUMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D2708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 26
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD100 LOD200 LOD30015590 - Fuel Storage Equipment (Fill Boxes)--------15660 - Roof-top Package Chillers --------15670 - Heat Exchangers --------15783 - Split AC/HP Indoor and Outdoor Units --------15835 - Convectors --------15835 - Fin Tube Radiation with Enclosure ----------15836 - Cabinet Heaters --------15836 - Unit Heaters --------15838 - Fan Coil Units --------15852 - Air handling Units Located within Interior of the Building --------15853 - Custom Packaged Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units --------15854 - Custom Packaged Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units --------15860 - Centrifugal Fans --------15880 - Sub-Slab Depressurization System 15930 - VAV Boxes --------15931 - Fan Powered Variable Air Volume (VAV) Terminal Units --------15932 - Chilled Beam Units --------15933 - DOAS RTU’s --------15934 - Non-DOAS RTU’s --------15970 - Temperature Controls --------15510 - Chilled Water --------15510 - Condensate Drain --------15510 - Fuel Oil Fill, Vent, Supply and Return --------15510 - Hot Water --------15510 - Refrigerant --------15511 - Isolation and Balancing Valves --------15512 - Piping Insulation --------15970 - Control Valves --------
PIPING
SEE APPENDIX A, SECT. C SEE APPENDIX A, SECT. C
DD & CD DESIGN INTENT MODELS
HVAC
CATEGORY/
BUILDING ELEMENT
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN DEVELOPMENTDESIGN INTENT MODEL CONTRACT DOCUMENTDESIGN INTENT MODEL
EQUIPMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD100 LOD200 LOD30015415 - Centralized Acid Neutralization System --------15415 - Grease Interceptors --------15415 - Individual Acid Neutralization System ----------15416 - Gas Booster Pumps --------15416 - Gas Meters and Sub-meters --------15417 - Backflow Prevention Devices --------15417 - Water Meters and Remote Readers --------15451 - Water Heater --------15453 - Compressed Air Pumps --------15453 - Control Panels --------
CATEGORY/
BUILDING ELEMENT
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN DEVELOPMENTDESIGN INTENT MODEL CONTRACT DOCUMENTDESIGN INTENT MODEL
EQUIPMENT
DD & CD DESIGN INTENT MODELS
PLUMBING/DRAINAGE AND FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
D28
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 27
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD100 LOD200 LOD30015453 - Domestic Water Booster Pumps --------15453 - Sewer Ejector Pumps --------15453 - Sump Pumps --------15453 - Tanks --------15453 - Vacuum Pumps --------15453 - Hot Water Circulating Pumps --------15453 - Tanks --------15453 - Vacuum Pumps --------15453 - Hot Water Circulating Pumps --------15415 - Drains --------15415 - Roof Drains --------15440 - Bath Tubs --------15440 - Cuspidors --------15440 - Drinking Fountains --------15440 - Electric Water Coolers --------15440 - Lavatories --------15440 - Mop Sink Basins --------15440 - Showers --------15440 - Sinks --------15440 - Urinals --------15440 - Wash Fountains --------15440 - Water Closets --------15440 - Mixing Valves --------15440 - Sediment Traps --------15330 - Sprinkler System ----------15332 - Combination Wet Standpipe/Sprinkler System ----------15333 - Fire Pumps --------15410 - Acid Vent and Waste Piping --------15410 - Clean-outs --------15410 - Compressed Air/Vacuum Piping --------15410 - Sanitary, Waste and Soil Vent Stacks and Vent Lines --------15410 - Soil, Waste and Vent Lines --------15410 - Storm Water --------15412 - Service Head Valves --------15412 - Fire/Sprinkler Service Head Valves --------15412 - Valves --------15413 - Insulation --------15415 - Backwater Valves --------15415 - House Traps --------15416 - Gas Piping System --------15417 - Cold Water Piping --------15417 - Wall Hydrants --------15418 - Hot Water Piping --------15440 - Mixing Valves --------15440 - Sediment Traps --------
EQUIPMENT
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
PIPING
DD & CD DESIGN INTENT MODELS
PLUMBING/DRAINAGE AND FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
CATEGORY/
BUILDING ELEMENT
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
CONTRACT DOCUMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
EQUIPMENT
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D2908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 28
LOD100 LOD200 LOD300 LOD100 LOD200 LOD30016140 - Wiring Devices/Lighting Switching --------16145 - Lighting Control Devices --------16470 - Panelboards/Emergency Lighting Panel --------16500 - Interior Building Lighting --------16520 - Emergency Exit Lighting --------16471 - Auditorium and Television Studio Dimming Systems --------16670 - Lightning Protection System --------16701 - Auxiliary Signal System --------16720 - Fire Detection & Alarm System w/Central Office Connection --------16721 - City Fire Alarm System --------16723 - Fire Detection and Alarm Systems --------16724 - Intrusion Alarm System --------16725 - Telephone Cabling System --------16727 - Data Cabling Systems --------16728 - Fiber Optic Cabling System --------16770 - Sound, Intercom and Teacher Activated Security System --------16771 - Projection and Interactive Whiteboard Systems ---------16780 - Television Cabling System --------16783 - Internet Protocol Digital Video Surveillance Cabling System --------16791 - Self-Corrective Clock System --------16792 - Wireless Clock System --------16726 - Intercom System for Holding Areas and Elevators --------16130 - Conduits and Piping --------16140 - Wiring Devices/Receptacles --------16231 - Emergency Generator --------16420 - Service Switch --------16425 - Switchboards --------16441 - Enclosed Switches --------16450 - Grounding Bus Bars --------16470 - Power Panels --------16472 - Science Laboratory Power Units --------16480 - Motors, Motor Control Centers, Starters & Control Equip. --------16420 - Property Line Box --------16530 - Site/Security Lighting --------
LIGHTING
LOW VOLTAGE AND DATA SYSTEMS
POWER, CONDUITS AND PIPES
SITEWORK
DD & CD DESIGN INTENT MODELS
ELECTRICAL
CATEGORY/
BUILDING ELEMENT
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
CONTRACT DOCUMENT
DESIGN INTENT MODEL
D30
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 29
Pre-Schematic Design Intent Models Upon the conclusion of the Bidding and Award Phase, the Consultant shall ensure that all Addenda to the Contract Documents (Drawings) that affect the Design Intent BIM Model(s) are incorporated into the Design Intent BIM Model(s) before they are provided to TCCD for its information and use. 1.The Design Intent BIM Model(s) shall not be combined into a Composite Model, but instead remain as distinct Component Models, as provided by each member of the Design Team. 2.The Consultant shall ensure that all Models, which are affected by Addenda to the Drawings, have been quality controlled, coordinated and executed as per these BIM Standards. 3.Upon receipt of written notification from TCCD, the Consultant shall submit electronic files, to TCCD within twenty-one (21) calendar days.
4.4 Coordination & Clash Detection Upon receipt of TCCD’s written notification of acceptance of the Design Phase - Contract Documents (100% Contract Documents), the consultant shall submit an electronic copy of the required Coordination/Clash Detection Report (“Navisworks”) to TCCD with the final submission of Contract Documents for bid and award. All conflicts and interferences identified within the Model and/or Models, which would adversely affect the Work described within the Contract Documents (Drawings), shall be rectified prior to the final submission of Contract Documents to TCCD for bid and award. 1.At a minimum, the Design Team shall use automated conflict checking software (“Navisworks”) to identify coordination issues within and between the Models that would adversely affect the execution of the Work required by the Contract Documents (Drawings) during and at the conclusion of Design Phase - Contract Documents (100%). 2.The Design Team shall, at a minimum, use the “Interference Check Tool” within “Revit” on a routine basis during and at the conclusion of each Design Phase and/or Sub-Phase, and as per their approved “Quality Control Program.”
NOTE: At this time, TCCD understands that the 3-D modeling of certain building elements (e.g.: multiple horizontal pipes and conduits that for coordination purposes would be vertically stacked) does not facilitate TCCD’s need for the printing of Contract Documents in 2-D. Hence, coordination conflicts and interferences created by the need to organize models to facilitate 2-D printing will be accepted within models provided that each conflict and/or interference that has been created within a model, to facilitate 2-D printing, is appropriately noted and documented within the required Coordination/Clash Detection Report (“Navisworks”) that is to be submitted to TCCD. TCCD does not dictate a specific “Clash Detection Reporting” format, therefore consultants can utilize their own reporting format, as long as the information is organized and presented in a logical and easy to follow manner.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D3108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 30
5.0 -Revit Specific Standards
5.1 General This Section of the TCCD BIM Standards for Consultants establishes the technical criteria required to develop a project using Revit for TCCD. This standard will consist of (4) distinct modules:
Revit Platform Standard – pertains to all Revit platforms (Architecture, Structure, and MEP) and addresses general settings applicable to all trades, such as Project Browser, Line Styles, Text Styles, etc.
Revit Architecture Standard – addresses Architectural modeling requirements using Revit Architecture.
Revit Structure Standard - addresses Structural modeling requirements using Revit Structure.
Revit MEP Standard - addresses Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection systems modeling requirements using Revit MEP. To ensure that TCCD Revit Standards are clearly understood, the following nomenclature is used throughout this document:
When referring to tools launched from the Ribbon Tab, BOLD-FACE UPPER CASE text is used to describe the Ribbon Tab, and Bold-Faced Title Case Italicized text to describe the Ribbon Panel and Title Case Italicized text is used to describe the Tool.
Example: To make the required modifications, go to the ANNOTATE Ribbon Tab, Text Panel and click on the Check Spelling tool.
When referring to tools launched from the Project Browser, UPPER CASE ITALICIZED text is used to describe the View Type and Title Case Italicized text is used to describe the command.
Example: In the Project Browser, right-click on top of REVIT LINKS header and select Manage Links option.
D32
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 31
When referring to Dialog Boxes, UPPER CASE text is used. For Tabs within a Dialog Box, Title Case Italicized text is used. Any references to a Pull-Down Menu, a Check Box, an Option Button, a Text Box, or a Drop Down list within a Dialog Box will be marked with a red rectangle. Referenced titles will be identified between quotes ("") using “Title Case Italicized” text and followed by a brief explanation.
Example: Within the OPTIONS Dialog Box, select the General tab and make the necessary changes as shown in the image to the right Under “Notifications”. Under “View Options”, ensure that the “Coordination” option is selected.
When referring to pull-down menus, UPPER CASE
ITALICIZED text is used to describe the menu option and Title Case Italicized text is used to describe the command.
Example: Go to the COLUMN pull-down menu and select Column: ‘Architectural’
When referring to tools launched from the Application Menu, they will be referred to as buttons and Title Case Italicized text is used to describe them.
Example: To export files as NWC go to the APPLICATION Menu in the upper left hand corner of your screen and select the Export button followed by the NWC button.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D3308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 32
When referring to folders, bolded text to is used to describe the folder location, and
italicized bolded text refers to user/firm defined folder location.
Example: The local version of the Revit central file is saved on the user’s workstation under the following folder:
C:\Users\username\Documents\A-FP-MASTER-SACT_username.rvt
5.2 TCCD Revit Standards Version TCCD will be constantly looking for ways to improve their Revit practice; therefore, the TCCD BIM Standards along with the Support Files will be reviewed on a regular basis. To that extent, there is included a parameter named
TCCD – BIM STANDARDS REV as shown in the image to the right that can be found within the Project
Properties. When TCCD reviews and/or modifies information within their different discipline’s templates, this parameter will be updated to reflect the new revision and date, the updated information will be posted on the TCCD WEB Site.
NOTE: We strongly encourage Consultants to check the TCCD WEB Site on the regular basis to see if updates have been posted.
5.3 Software Requirements TCCD has adopted Autodesk Revit as its standard BIM software.
Autodesk Revit Architecture
Autodesk Revit MEP
Autodesk Revit Structure
NOTE: Based on the non-backwards compatibility of the Revit-based applications, verify which version of the application is currently being used by the TCCD for the duration of the project. Consultants will be required to use Revit version and build # specified by TCCD at the time of contract agreement.
D34
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 33
In addition to the Revit-based applications, TCCD has adopted the following software for its BIM effort (software version will be specified by TCCD at the time of contract agreement):
Autodesk Navisworks Manage
Autodesk Ecotect Analysis
Autodesk 3D MAX Design
Autodesk Design Review
5.4 Digital Submission Requirements All submitted electronic files must be compatible with the version of the Autodesk Revit software currently being used by TCCD and must conform and comply with the latest version of these TCCD BIM Standards. Consultants are required to submit their version of the Central File with all worksets preserved when exchanging information with TCCD. The frequency with which this information will be shared between in-house staff and outside designers may vary from project to project. Please coordinate with the Project’s Model Manager.
5.5 TCCD Revit Support Files TCCD Revit Standards Library includes a series of support files:
5.6 Cover Page & Title Block TCCD provides standard Title Blocks and Cover Sheets for all common sheet sizes. 24x36 vertical Title Block is the Tarrant County College District’s preferred standard and should be used on all projects unless another size or orientation title block is required due to the nature of the project. The title block family can be downloaded with TCCD Standard Family Library or accessed through the use of TCCD standard Revit templates.
FOLDER DESCRIPTIONContentContains TCCD specific content that has or has not been already loaded within the different Discipline Templates. Shared Parameters Includes TCCD custom Shared Parameters files (see Appendix G). Templates Includes the discipline-specific template files for the Architectural, Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing (Drainage and Fire Protection), and Structural disciplines.Title Blocks Includes Standard Title Sheets and Title Blocks for projects for sizes 8.5x11, 11x17, 12x18, 24x36, 30x42 and 36x48.
TCCD REVIT SUPPORT FILES
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D3508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 34
Title block contains a number of custom parameters and those can be found in the TCCD Parameters file or in the template files. All applicable fields in the Title Block, Project Information, and Sheet View properties MUST be filled out. Project specific information, including consultants involved, will be filled out under the Project Information. Sheet specific information, such as sheet name, number, document phase, discipline header, etc. will be filled out under the sheet view properties. Refer to Appendix F for detailed explanation of Title Block specific parametric data. To establish TCCD brand and unified look of drawing set produced by the different consultants, TCCD requires that all consultants’ use TCCD issued Title Blocks as well as TCCD issued Cover Sheets.
Cover Sheets for Consultants Family Named TCCD-G-ANNO-TTBK-CVER_CONSULT.rfa is to be use by all the consultants generating drawing for TCCD projects. Project specific parameters must be populated in the Project Information section. Space below the horizontal line is reserved for the use of consultants. It can be used for project renderings, images, or maps. Items such as legends, abbreviations, sheet list, etc. will be placed on the subsequent sheet with a standard Title Block.
D36
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 35
Cover Sheets for TCCD In-House Design Team Family Named TCCD-G-ANNO-TTBK-CVER_INHOUSE.rfa is to be used by all TCCD in-house projects. Project specific parameters must be populated in the Project Information section. Space below the horizontal line is reserved for the campus map (family named TCCD-G-ANNO-FWMAP-COVER.rfa must be inserted and type selected based on the campus) and additional TCCD governing body information. Items such as legends, abbreviations, sheet list, etc. will be placed on the subsequent sheet with a standard Title Block.
5.7North Arrow TCCD provides a standard north arrow. It has two distinct visibility states:
Architectural
Engineering These North Arrows are for TCCD facility master drawings. North arrow will be placed on every plan view on the sheet next to the drawing title as shown below in the section 5.8 View Titles.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D3708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 36
5.8View Titles To establish TCCD brand and unified look of drawing set produced by the different consultants, TCCD requires that all consultants as well as in-house design teams use TCCD issued drawing titles. Drawing titles are set up in such way that allows for a total of (3) line titles. This option is controlled via viewport types. In order for the drawing titles to function properly, custom parameters are created for the drawing title entries
5.9Room Tag Every space in TCCD facilities will have a room identifying tag on the drawings. TCCD-G-ANNO-ROOM-TAG family has been designed in such way as to capture critical information that TCCD staff needs to manage. All applicable fields of both visible and invisible parameters must be filled in for every room. For MEP Projects, consultants will use identical Space Tag.
While consultants are encouraged to use TCCD Room tags, they are not required to. As long as the custom parameters established by TCCD are associated with each room/ space and properly filled out, consultants can use their own room tags. Consultant room tags however, must match TCCD Font styles. Space type definition is controlled and to be filled out based on the definitions listed in the Appendix H.
D38
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 37
5.10 Schedules Typical Schedules are developed and placed in TCCD Revit templates. These schedules reflect general guidelines issued by the National CAD Standards. See Appendix J for some Typical Schedules. TCCD in-house design teams will use TCCD developed schedules in their projects. For general schedules such as Door, Window, Plumbing Fixtures, etc. consultants can use their own in-house developed schedules to best convey project design intent. TCCD has created a few schedules that apply to standard TCCD Room Schedule. These schedules are there for the purposes of TCCD facility master drawings and models. Even if consultants choose not to use those schedules, they MUST be present in ALL models. These schedules include:
*Occupancy Loads - IBC 2012 o Schedule of keys based on the IBC-2012 table 1004.1.1 Maximum Floor Area Allowances per Occupant (see Appendix K).
*Occupancy Schedule
o A working schedule which tracks space square footages, calculates allowable occupancy based on the occupancy type, and lists space use as per Texas Higher Education Coordinating Board Space Use Codes
*Space Use Code Table
o Schedule of keys as per Texas Higher Education Coordinating Board Space Use Codes (see Appendix H).
ROOM SCHEDULE o Schedule which is reporting a summary of the working *Occupancy Schedule. This schedule is placed on facility master drawing and used to track facility specific use and occupancy data. o Consultants MUST leave this schedule fully populated in their models and MUST NOT modify it in any way. o If a different room schedule is needed to properly convey project design intent, consultants can create additional Room Schedules as needed.
SHEET INDEX
o Organized for all trades and will only display Record Drawings sheets (will be used after completion of the project and is not to be altered by the consultants)
5.11 TCCD Standard Family Library There are a number of additional typical families developed for the use in TCCD drawings for all trades. This library will be continually evolved so please request updated library before starting a new project. Refer to Appendix I for the additional family definitions.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D3908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 38
6.0 -Revit Platform Standard
6.1 Options
General Note to Consultants:
These user-interface and file access settings are
for TCCD in-house design teams. Consultants
can choose to follow below outlines settings or
they can use their own in-house CUI settings. To make the required modifications, go to the APPLICATION menu and select the Options button. This will open the OPTIONS Dialog Box as shown in following images. Select the General option and make the necessary changes as shown in the image to the right. Unlike AutoCAD, the Revit-based applications do not have an auto-save feature. The “Notifications” settings will only remind users to save the local and central versions of their 3D Models. It is critical that user saves as often as possible. The “Username” should match your PC “login name” or your Autodesk Subscription Center user name and should never be changed. Worksets rights are set upon this value.
NOTE: Changing the username in the middle of the project will break the synchronization established between the Central File and the Local File, restricting the user’s access to the Worksets and increasing the chances of corrupting the Project.
File Locations Select the File Locations tab and verify that under the “Default Template File” the discipline-specific template is selected; that under the “Default Path for User Files” the appropriate
D40
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 39
folder as designated by the System Administrator or CAD/BIM Manager is selected; and that under the “Default Path for Family Template Files” the appropriate folder where the TCCD Revit Library has been downloaded and shared is selected. All TCCD workstations should be configured to access these files as indicated. If it is different than described here, please contact your BIM Manager.
NOTE: Consultants should copy these files to the appropriate directories. Contact your System Administrator or CAD/BIM Manager for proper use.
6.2 Templates All Revit projects must be created using one of the templates provided with the TCCD Revit Standards, which are:
TCCD General Template_2016.rte
TCCD Architectural Template_2016.rte
TCCD Structural Template_2016.rte
TCCD Electrical Template_2016.rte
TCCD Mechanical and Plumbing Template_2016.rte To promote consistency in the Contract Set as well as to prevent the use of un-licensed fonts, all TCCD Text Styles, Dimension Styles, Leaders, Tags and Content have been defined using the Arial family fonts. All of the template settings and TCCD Modeling requirements are described in more detail below.
6.3 Model Categories For the purposes of establishing unit and precision settings, model types are broken into three categories as follows:
Category Types of Work Included Survey Land Surveys, Plats, Property Deeds Site Work Civil, Landscape, and Site Utilities drawings for wholly site related documentation Building Architectural, Structural, and MEP&F drawings Within TCCD Facility Models all three types may be employed. For example, TCCD South Campus might have grounds topographical model, site utilities models, and building models. The building models may include architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, and fire protection as-built conditions models.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D4108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 40
6.4 Units & Precision Imperial units are the standard system of measurement for TCCD models unless S.I. (International System of Units) units are specified by the reviewing agency, or an industry standard for the type of work being performed.
NOTE: Rounding Precision only affects how Revit displays object properties and measurements (not dimensions). See the 6.11 Dimension Styles section for guidance on dimensioning unit settings, which are distinct from drawing unit settings. For discipline specific units setting see discipline specific Revit Architecture, Revit Structure, and/or Revit MEP sections in this document.
6.5 Precision Settings Model “Length Precision” settings are not intended to establish or imply a required degree of field or construction precision. For example, four decimals of precision (0.000) for a site utilities drawing does not indicate that three decimals of utilities placement as-built information accuracy is expected or required. Dimensioning precision is completely independent of drawing precision. Dimensioning precision, unlike drawing precision, is
Units Units Format Rounding Unit Symbol Additional options
Length Feet and fractional inches To Nearest 1/128"* Suppress 0 feet* Use Digit Grouping* Suppress Spaces
Area Square feet 3 decimal places SF * Suppress trailing 0's* Use Digit Grouping
Volume Cubic feet 3 decimal places CF * Suppress trailing 0's* Use Digit Grouping
Angle Decimal degree 3 decimal places °* Suppress trailing 0's* Use Digit Grouping
Slope 1 : Ration 1 decimal place 1:00 * Suppress trailing 0's* Use Digit Grouping
Current Currency 2 decimal places $* Use Digit Grouping
Mass Density Pounds per cubic foot 3 decimal places lb/ft3 * Suppress trailing 0's* Use Digit Grouping
Architectural Units
Units Units Format Rounding Unit Symbol Additional options
Length Decimal feet 3 decimal places '* Suppress 0 feet* Use Digit Grouping
Civil Units
* Remainder setting are same as Architectural Units
Units Units Format Rounding Unit Symbol Additional options
Length Fractional inches To Nearest 1/128"* Use Digit Grouping
* Remainder setting are same as Architectural Units
Fractional Units
D42
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 41
generally related to the expected degree of construction precision, which will be discussed in 6.11 Dimension Styles section.
6.6 Drawing Origin
Project Base Point Draw building model so that the lower left intersection of the outermost column/building lines that remain constant on most floors are placed at 0, 0, 0 – Revit Project Base Point. This ensures that all projects follow the "2 Mile Rule," where any elements modeled must be within a one-mile radius (2-mile diameter) of this point. In order to ensure the proper insertion of Revit Links and the stacking of floor plans, the origin point for an entire building or site must be consistent between models. Once the origin is established, it should not be changed. Architectural model should define the coordinates and the rest of the models liked into the architectural model (i.e. structural, MEP, etc.) will acquire shared coordinates from the Architectural model.
Note to TCCD Consultants: Drawing Origin point at the lower left intersection of the outermost column/building lines is established for TCCD Master Facility model management purposes and will remain consistent. Consultants CAN use campus wide project base point established by the civil engineer for the duration of the project. At the final project closeout stage, however, consultants are required to relocate project to the base point as described above.
Relocating Project Base Point If your model or someone else’s model was created with improperly located Project Base Point, that point can be relocated:
To turn on the visibility of the Project Base Point and
Survey Point in a view: Click VIEW tab Graphics panel (Visibility/Graphics). On the Model Categories tab of the VISIBILITY/GRAPHICS dialog, scroll down to “Site”, and expand it. To display the project base point survey point, select Project Base
Point and Survey Point.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D4308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 42
Make sure that both Project Base Point and Survey Point remain pinned.
Relocate Project Base Point by going to MANAGE Ribbon Tab, Project Location Panel and expanding POSITION pull-down menu. Select Relocate Project.
You use the tool just like the Move tool. o Select Destination point first
Move the project graphically in the view
Project Base Point Example (SACT Building):
D44
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 43
6.7 Text Settings The use of Arial family fonts for the TCCD standard has been selected. Follow these rules when using these fonts:
Use a width factor of 0.8 (except for Arial Narrow) on all text styles, but most importantly in general notes, tags, and dimensions.
To get italics, apply italics option in the text editor as needed, NOT in the Font Style.
To accentuate items of critical importance, use bold option in the text editor, NOT in the Font Style. Underline in the text editor can also be used.
Some additional text and label styles were defined to be used within TCCD standard families and parameters. If you have any questions regarding the use of these text and label styles, contact your CAD/BIM manager.
6.8 Leaders All callout type annotation shall be made using the TCCD text and label styles with appropriate leader settings described below. Rules of good drafting, such as having the same length for all lines of text whenever possible and not crossing leader lines, should be followed on all drawings. Both right and left justified text can be used in the drawings, with left justified being preferred. Regardless, the left justification or right justification should be consistent on the entire drawing set. Key settings are listed below:
Text – Revit text, ALL CAPS, Arial, at 3/32” text height (Use TCCD_Standard text style).
Justification – Right/top justify if leader on right and left/top justify if leader on left (see example below).
Leader – There should be ½ text height (1/64”) between text and landing line of leader as this also defines text border. The leader line should always be straight, not splines (area callout is the exception).
Terminator – Size shall be 3/32”. The default terminator type is a Filled Arrow 20 Degree. However, other terminator types are discussed in the subsection titled “Leader Terminator Types”.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D4508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 44
To modify Revit Arrowhead settings go to MANAGE Ribbon Tab and expand ADDITIONAL SETTINGS pull-down menu.
Leader Terminator Types It is important for the drawings to convey information in a clear, consistent, and effective manner. To accomplish that, TCCD standard requires the use of different leader terminations when calling out objects on the drawings. The standard terminator types are described and pictured here:
Arrow Filled 20 Degree – This is the most common type of arrowhead and should be used for pointing to a general location of an object, such as top of wall. End of arrowhead should touch the object.
Open Dot – Use this type for identifying a small object such as rebar in section view (in fact, this will almost exclusively apply to rebar).
Filled Dot – Use this type for adding notes to the dimension string.
None – Use this type for pointing to a particular location on an object such as a box highlighting a section that is detailed elsewhere or calling attention to a revision cloud with a note.
Diagonal – Use this type for pointing to an object or region but not a specific location on the object or region.
Loop – Use this type for identifying conduits, pipes, horizontal rebar, etc.
Elevation Target – Use this type for identifying elevation points where tag may not be a suitable option (e.g. top of wall, grade spot elevation, etc).
D46
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 45
Leader Use Example:
The following Text/ Leader Styles have been defined within the Templates as follows:
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D4708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 46
Modifying placed text/ leaders are subject to the following rules:
Do not modify TCCD Text Type definitions.
When using tags, follow same Leader guidelines as described above. -Room Tag will use Filled Dot Leader Terminator
Additional settings for Transparent or Boxed Text types can be created as needed.
6.9 Text Orientation Text and dimension text should always read left to right and bottom to top. When text is oriented at an angle between horizontal and vertical the following guide should be used in determining text orientation. Notice as text approaches vertical orientation, as in the top left and bottom right quadrants below; it is read top to bottom.
6.10 Dimensioning Use associative dimensioning whenever possible.
Never force or override dimensions (do not manually enter 10’-6” as a dimension if the drafted distance is actually 10’-6 ½”). o The exception to this might be a detail that was not drawn to scale. In this case the dimension would read NTS.
Dimension precision is independent of drawing precision, which is covered in the Units and Precision module.
6.11 Dimension Styles The overall objective with dimensioning is for all dimensions of a similar type to have a uniform appearance in terms of arrowheads or ticks, offsets, text height, and other dimension settings. To accomplish this objective, TCCD has developed common dimension types to achieve dimensioning consistency throughout all drawings. TCCD dimensions should be used for all dimensioning. Revit dimension types are provided for decimal, architectural, and fractional formats:
Modifying placed dimensions are subject to the following rules:
Do not modify TCCD Dimension Type definitions.
Additional settings for Transparent or Boxed Text types can be created as needed.
See Appendix B for complete list of the dimension type settings.
D48
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 47
Dimension Style Use by Drawing Category As described in the Units and Precision module, drawings are broken into three categories; Building, Site Work, and Survey. For Building work, which encompasses Architectural, Structural, and MEP drawings, dimension styles with “Inch” units and “Tick” terminators should be used. For Survey and Site work drawings, dimension styles with “Feet” units and
“Arrow” terminators should be used.
Architectural Example
Civil Example
Survey Example
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D4908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 48
6.12 Line Weights Ten Line Weights have been provided for Annotation Objects and for Model Objects, which have been defined at the 1/8”=1’-0” Scale and increases and decreases in 25% increments and decrements from the previous scale. For the exact Line weight setting in Revit Environment, see Appendix C.
6.13 Line Styles TCCD Revit Line Styles consist of a combination of Revit default line styles and TCCD generated line styles. Line Styles and their settings are defined below. To differentiate between the Revit system, TCCD custom, and consultant added lines, the below outlined convention should be followed:
Revit system line styles – Capitalize Each Word (Default and generated by Revit, cannot be deleted or renamed) o E.g. Hidden Lines, Wide Lines…
TCCD custom line styles – ALL UPPER CASE LETTERS (included in the TCCD Revit Templates)
o E.g. CENTER2, G-DETL-1…
Consultant generated line styles – Prefix with consultant company name (Abbreviated), underscore and ALL UPPER CASE LETTERS for the line style name.
o E.g. XYZ_PROPERTY LINE, XYZ_INSULATION…
Model
(1/8"=1'-0")Annotation Perspective10.0020"0.0020"0.0059"Color 9 Do not Alter20.0035"0.0035"0.0059"Color 8 Do not Alter30.0039"0.0039"0.0059"White Do not Alter40.0059"0.0059"0.0059"Magenta Do not Alter50.0079"0.0079"0.0059"Blue Do not Alter60.0118"0.0118"0.0059"Cyan Do not Alter70.0157"0.0157"0.0059"Green Do not Alter80.0197"0.0197"0.0059"Yellow Do not Alter90.0276"0.0276"0.0059"Red Do not Alter100.0500"0.0500"0.0059"--Do not Alter110.0059"0.0059"0.0059"Magenta Can be user Re-Defined120.0059"0.0059"0.0059"Magenta Can be user Re-Defined130.0059"0.0059"0.0059"Magenta Can be user Re-Defined140.0059"0.0059"0.0059"Magenta Can be user Re-Defined150.0059"0.0059"0.0059"Magenta Can be user Re-Defined160.0059"0.0059"0.0059"Magenta Can be user Re-Defined
Note: Ten Line Weights have been provided for Model Objects, which have been defined at the 1/8”=1’-0" Scale and increases and decreases in 25% increments and decrements from the previous scale.
LINE WEIGHTS
WidthRevit
Pen #
AutoCAD
Equivalent Comments
D50
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 49
Table below shows Line Styles generated by Revit and TCCD, and which are included in TCCD Templates:
Category Line Weight Line Color Line PatternG-DETL-1 1 Black SolidG-DETL-2 2 Black SolidG-DETL-3 3 Black SolidG-DETL-4 4 Black SolidG-DETL-5 5 Black SolidG-DETL-6 6 Black SolidG-DETL-7 7 Black SolidG-DETL-8 8 Black SolidG-DETL-9 9 Black SolidG-DETL-10 10 Black SolidG-DETL-CTRL 2 Black CenterG-DETL-CTRL2 2 Black Center2G-DETL-HIDD 2 Black HiddenG-DETL-HIDD2 2 Black Hidden2G-DETL-PHAN 4 Black Double dashG-DETL-PHAN2 4 Black Double dash2G-DETL-BLK80%1 RGB 050-050-050 SolidG-DETL-BLK60%1 RGB 100-100-100 SolidG-DETL-BLK40%1 RGB 150-150-150 SolidG-DETL-BLK20%1 RGB 200-200-200 Solid<Area Boundary>5 Green Solid<Beyond>1 RGB 100-100-100 Solid<Centerline>2 Black Center<Demolished>2 Black Hidden<Fabric Envelope>1 RGB 127-127-127 Hidden<Fabric Sheet>1 RGB 064-064-064 Solid<Hidden>2 Black Hidden2<Overhead>2 Black Hidden2<Room Separation>1 Black<Sketch>3 Magenta<Space Separation>1 BlackAxis of Rotation 4 Yellow CenterHidden Lines 2 Black Hidden2Lines3BlackSolidMedium Lines 5 Black SolidThin Lines 1 Black SolidWide Lines 8 Black Solid
TCCD Standard Line Styles
Note: 1. Revit Standard Line Styles cannot be deleted or renamed. 2. NONE of TCCD Line Styles are to be modified or renamed in any way3. If additional line styles are needed, TCCD guidelines MUST be followed
LINE WEIGHTS
Revit Standard Line Styles
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D5108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 50
6.14 Line Patterns To ensure consistent look of printed sheets generated from Revit Models and across all disciplines, TCCD template modified some of the Revit Standard line patterns. These line patterns are referenced in the line style definitions discussed in the above section. Table below displays the pattern setting for all modified Line patterns:
Type/
Value
Type/
Value
Type/
Value
Type/
Value
Type/
Value
Type/
ValueDashSpaceDashSpace1/8"3/32"7/16"3/32"Dash Space Dash Space1/16"3/64"7/32"3/64"Dash Space Dash Space Dash Space7/16"3/32"1/8"3/32"1/8"3/32"Dash Space Dash Space Dash Space5/32"3/64"1/16"3/64"1/16"3/64"Dash Space Dash Space1/2"1/8"1/8"1/8"Dash Space1/8"3/32"Dash Space1/16"3/64"
Grid LineHiddenHidden2
Pattern
LINE PATTERNS
Name
CenterCenter2Double dashDouble dash2
D52
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 51
6.15 Fill Patterns Additional Fill patterns were generated and/or imported from AutoCAD. These Patterns are available in TCCD Templates:
ACAD - StoneACAD - Texture
FILL PATTERNS
ACAD - Wood
ACAD - Plywood HorizontalACAD - Plywood VerticalACAD - Shingle
ACAD - MortarACAD - Particle BoardACAD - Plywood
ACAD - Masonry BrickACAD - Masonry Brick SoldierACAD - Masonry Concrete Small
ACAD - Horizontal 1/8"ACAD - Masonry - ConcreteACAD - Masonry - Concrete Block
ACAD - Gravel MedACAD - GroutACAD - Grout Light
ACAD - Grating (N-S)ACAD - Grating (Section)ACAD - Gravel
ACAD - FS - Fire and Smoke (1-hr)ACAD - F - Shaft (2-hr)
Name PatternACAD - Fiberglass Semi-RigidACAD - Grating (E-W)
ACAD - FS - Smoke (0-hr)ACAD - FS - Fire and Smoke (2-hr)
ACAD - Diagonal UpACAD - Diagonal Down
Pattern
ACAD - F- Fire (2-hr)
ACAD - EarthACAD - EIFSACAD - Diagonal up-Small2
ACAD - F - Fire (1-hr)ACAD - Earth Small2ACAD - Earth Small
ACAD - F - Shaft (1-hr)ACAD - F - Fire (4-hr)ACAD - F - Fire (3-hr)
ACAD - Diagonal Crosshatch -Small
ACAD - ConcreteACAD - Concrete2ACAD - Crosshatch - Small AlignACAD - Dash
NameACAD - Gypsum-Plaster LightACAD - Sand Dense Light
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D5308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 52
Fill Regions (opaque and transparent) have been provided as follows:
Halftone: Halftone/Underlay has been set to 65%.
6.16 Phases Phases can be created to match the project phases as necessary. The Project Lead is responsible for coordinating how many Phases the Project might have. Phase Status for Existing, Demolished, New and Temporary have been set as shown in the image below:
Solid Black 100%Opaque RGB 0-0-0Solid Black 80%Opaque RGB 050-050-050Solid Black 60%Opaque RGB 100-100-100Solid Black 60% - Trans Transparent RGB 100-100-100Solid Black 40%Opaque RGB 150-150-150Solid Black 40% - Trans Transparent RGB 150-150-150Solid Black 20%Opaque RGB 200-200-200Solid Black 20% - Trans Transparent RGB 200-200-200
SOLID FILL REGIONS
Name Background Color Pattern
D54
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 53
6.17 Shared Parameters The Revit-based applications enable the creation of custom fields to be shared within a project through a function named “Shared Parameters”. To add TCCD required parameters, go to the MANAGE Ribbon Tab and select Shared Parameters. This will open the EDIT SHARED PARAMETERS Dialog Box as shown in the image below.
To select the file, click on the “Browse” button and navigate to the following folder:
Firm_designated_Path\”Version of Revit”\Shared Parameters\
o (Please note that the TCCD Revit Support Files needs to be downloaded,
extracted and placed on the network)
Then select “TCCD_Shared Parameters.txt” and click on the “OK” button. TCCD Shared Parameters file addresses information within the Title Blocks (Standard Title Sheets), Room Tags, Project Information, and some Mechanical and Electrical components. These parameters will be continuously reviewed and added to. To differentiate between Revit system, TCCD custom, and consultant added parameters, the below outlined convention should be followed:
Revit system parameters – Capitalize Each Word (Default and generated by Revit) o E.g. Discipline, Door Swing, Wall Finish…
TCCD custom parameters – ALL UPPER CASE LETTERS (included in the TCCD Revit Templates as well as in the TCCD_Shared Parameters.txt file)
o E.g. CAMPUS, DESCRIPTION, ISSUE DATE…
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D5508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 54
Consultant parameters – Prefix with Consultant Company name (Abbreviated), underscore and ALL UPPER CASE LETTERS for the parameter name.
o A single parameters .txt file will be included and submitted with the model.
o Name .txt file as: XYZ_Shared Parameters.txt (Where XYZ is abbreviated consultant company name)
o E.g. XYZ_CAMPUS, XYZ_DESCRIPTION, XYZ_ISSUE DATE…
NOTES:
The Autodesk Revit Products can reference only one shared parameter file at a time, so make sure this is the default file when working on TCCD projects.
See Appendix G for a list of TCCD Parameters and their setting.
6.18 Worksharing When the project size and complexity necessitates, TCCD encourages the use of Work Sharing and Central Models. Work Sharing allows for multiple team members to work on the same model simultaneously. Each discipline’s Central File folder has a series of standardized sub-folders that will contain various groups of design data. The image to the right illustrates the Central File standardized sub-folders using the Architectural Folder as an example. The Central File will be saved on the Discipline’s “0 – Model” Folder. Backup folder is generated by Revit automatically and should NOT be renamed, moved, or deleted under any circumstances for any “Living Model”.
D56
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 55
Whenever possible, a decision to make a model a workshared model should be made BEFORE a model is started. You cannot initiate worksharing/worksets in a template file. Once a new project has been started from a template worksharing may be enabled. It is critical that all of the elements placed in the model are assigned to the correct workset. Worksets will be established based on the project needs and will be the responsibility of the Project and/or BIM Manager. Suggestions for common workset organizational principles:
Revit Links - make a workset or worksets to contain Revit links so that the project can be opened more easily using the selective open tool. You may want a link for Structure, MEP, and Site, for example.
AutoCAD Links – create worksets to contain AutoCAD links so that the project can be opened more easily using the selective open tool.
Shell vs Core - in larger projects this can provide a logical way of making the project more manageable.
Furniture - NIC objects like furniture might also be a good candidate for a separate workset. Keeping the central file healthy is critical to keeping the project running smoothly and to avoid causing file corruption. Below are the best practices that need to be done routinely on the central file to keep it clean. How often is going to depend on how active the project is. The more active the project is, the more often it should be maintained.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D5708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 56
1.Open the Central File, clearing the option to create a Local File and enabling the option to Audit the file. 2.Avoid using in-place families or detail groups. Use families or detail components whenever possible as in-place families and detail groups are damaging to the model, especially when they are repeated throughout the model. 3.Use the Purge Unused tool from the MANAGE tab, Settings panel of the ribbon to remove any unused and unnecessary content from the file. Be careful not to remove content simply because it is unused; make sure that the content you are purging is not needed. In particular, look for in-place Families and Group definitions that are no longer being referenced. 4.Save the Central File using the option to “Compact the Central File” as shown in Figure below:
5.Specify the maximum number of backups to keep on disk. Be careful setting this number too small, as you will be limiting the number of file versions to choose from in the event that you need to recover a corrupt project. 6.Once the new Central File has been saved, users will need to create new Local Files. Always create a new Local File whenever the project is opened for editing (append a time stamp to an existing Local File). Creating new Local Files as frequently as possible is a good way to manage file size and maintain stability. 7.Ensure that all user-created worksets and borrowed elements are relinquished before saving. 8.It is recommended (especially on large projects) that an entire Central Model is re-created periodically by detaching the file from central (preserving all worksets) and re-saving it as a new central file (you can override the old one).
D58
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 57
6.19 Naming Convention All electronic project information should be named following the TCCD BIM Standards naming conventions.
Folder Naming Convention If sub-folders are needed, they can be created under the predefined Project Folder Structure and they should follow the Folder Naming Convention. The folders should be named beginning with a four-digit year, a two-digit month, and a two-digit day followed by an optional User Description. The folder should take the form of:
File Naming Convention – Central Files All electronic files should be named following the File Naming Convention, including Revit files (RVT), Plotsheet files (DWF), Revit Family files (RFA), AutoCAD files (DWG), Image files (JPG), Animation files (AVI), Microsoft Office files(DOC, XLS, HTML), NavisWorks files (NWF, NWC), and Analysis files (multiple formats). Revit is unique as compared to AutoCAD drawings set, in the sense that both Model and Sheet views are in the same file. Therefore Revit Model naming convention will be similar to that of an AutoCAD Sheet Set Naming Convention.
Facility Master Models:
Examples: SACT-ARCH-MASTER-CENTRAL-2016.rvt SACT-HVAC-MASTER-2016.rvt * “CENTRAL” should only be appended to work shared models.
All Other Projects:
Examples: 20028-ALLT-TRTR_MATH_EMPORIUM-2016.rvt 20154-FIRE-PANEL_UPGRADES-CENTRAL-2016.rvt * Only an underscore (_) character may be used when word separation is desired in “Description” field. Do not use dashes (-) or spaces.
XXXX -XXXX -MASTER -CENTRAL*-2016BUILDING ID (4) CHARACTER TRADEDESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION CENTRAL MODEL(WORKSHARED MODEL)VERSION
NNNNN -XXXX -XXX_XXX -CENTRAL*-2016TCCD PROJECT NUMBER (4) CHARACTER TRADEDESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION CENTRAL MODEL(WORKSHARED MODEL)VERSION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D5908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 58
Local Files The Local File should be a copy of the Central File, which is done through the Revit application, and should be named with the prefix per above followed by the user name. As the Central File, once defined, the Local File name shall not change through the life of the project. After saving the Local File, Revit creates a folder named “YOUR FILE NAME_backup”. Neither this folder nor the files contained within it should be moved, renamed, or deleted.
Revit Family Files Family files should be named beginning with the Functional Type followed by the Subtype, the Manufacturer Name, and two optional User Description fields. The filename should take the form of:
Capitalize the leading letters in each portion of the family name.
Keep file names as short as possible because they need to display in the Type Selector.
Do not use spaces between words in the file names. To separate words, use the underscore “_” character.
Create a Type Catalog for Family files that contain five or more types. Refer to Section below - Type Catalog Convention.
Examples:
Window-Double_Hung-Andersen-400_Series_Archtop-2016.rfa
AHU-Vertical_Packaged-Sierra-Roof_Top-2016.rfa
Framing-Wood-Lumber-2016.rfa
Foundation-Concrete-Rectangular-2016.rfa
Family Types Types within a Family file should indicate the key differences or variations between the different Family options. Depending on the Family Component, the Type names might take one of the following forms: <Model> or <Series Number> <Value> or <Capacity> <Width>x<Depth>x<Height>
Do not include the Family Name in the Type Name.
Type Names should mirror actual usage.
Capitalize the leading letters in each portion of the Type Name (when applicable).
When Types are named by size, use dimensions only.
XXXXX -XXXXX -XXXXXXXX -XXXXXXX -2016FUNCTIONAL FAMILY TYPE FAMILYSUB-TYPE MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION 1/DESCRIPTION 2(OPTIONAL)VERSION
D60
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 59
Keep file names as short as possible because they need to display the Type Selector.
Do not use spaces between words in the Type Names. To separate words, use the underscore “_” character.
Create a Type Catalog for Family files that contain five or more types. Refer to Section - Type Catalog Convention.
Examples:
Window-Double_Hung-Andersen-400_Series_Archtop-2016.rfa
o WA1832
o WA2032
AHU-Vertical_Packaged-Sierra-Roof_Top-2016.rfa
o 2400_CFM
o 3000_CFM
Framing-Wood-Lumber-2016.rfa o 6”x8” o 6”x10”
Foundation-Concrete-Rectangular-2016.rfa
o 16”x32”x8”
o 20”x36”x10”
Type Catalog Convention Create a Type Catalog for Family files that contain five or more types or when the Family file exceeds 500 KB of memory. Name the Type Catalog file (.TXT) with the same name as the Family file (.RFA) that it supports.
If a Type Catalog is used, no predefined Types should exist in the Family file.
Do not include the Family Name in the Type Name.
Type Names should mirror actual usage.
Capitalize the leading letters in each portion of the Type Name (when applicable).
When Types are named by size, use dimensions only.
Keep file names as short as possible because they need to display in the Type Selector.
Do not use spaces between words in the Type names. To separate words, use the underscore “_” character.
Examples:
Window-Double_Hung-Andersen-400_Series_Archtop-2016.rfa
o Window_Double_Hung_Andersen_400_Series_Archtop.txt
A HU-Vertical_Packaged-Sierra-Roof_Top-2016.rfa o Air_Handling_Unit_Vertical_Packaged_Sierra_Roof_Top.txt
F raming-Wood-Lumber-2016.rfa
o Framing_Wood_Lumber.txt
Foundation-Concrete-Rectangular-2016.rfa
o Foundation_Concrete_Rectangular.txt
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D6108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 60
CODE DISCIPLINECover Sheet
G General
H Hazardous Materials
V Survey / Mapping
B Geotechnical
C Civil/ Site
U Site Utilities
S Structural
L Life Safety
A Architectural
K Space Tracking
I Interiors
Q Equipment
F Fire Protection
P Plumbing
D Process
M Mechanical
E Electrical
W Distributed Energy
T Telecommunications
R Resource
X Other Disciplines
Z Contractor / Shop Drawings
O Operations
LEVEL 1 DISCIPLINE DESIGNATOR
Bitmap Files Bitmap files used to define Materials within Revit should match the corresponding Materials they represent and should be in .JPG format.
Examples
Paint_Sherwin_Williams_SW6034_Arresting_Auburn
o Paint_Sherwin_Williams_SW6034_Arresting_Auburn.jpg
Glass_Pilkington_Evergreen_3/16”_Uncoated_Insulated o Glass_Pilkington_Evergreen_3/16”_Uncoated_Insulated.jpg
AutoCAD Files AutoCAD files linked to the Revit Model should be named based on TCCD AutoCAD Standards, Model File naming convention: All model files shall be named in accordance with the following convention
* Only an underscore (_) character may be used when word separation is desired in “Description” field. Do not use dashes (-) or spaces. Discipline designators are shown in the table to the left. The “Model File Type” table lists acceptable drawing type codes.
Examples:
A-FP-MASTER-02-TRWF.DWG - Architectural – Floor Plan – Master - 2nd Floor – Trinity River West Fork
C-UP-MASTER_WTR-WFSC.dwg - Civil – Utility Plan – Master Water – Northwest Fire Service Training Center
D62
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 61
Only AutoCAD files in DWG format should be linked into the Revit Model.
Note: ensure that AutoCAD files linked are well maintained (purged of all unnecessary information, audited and all errors corrected prior to linking).
Image Files All Image files shall be named in accordance with the following convention:
* Only an underscore (_) character may be used when word separation is desired in “Description” field. Do not use dashes (-) or spaces.
Examples: A-3D-02-TRWF-20028_LOBBY.jpg M-DG-SACT-RISER_SCHEM.jpg * Only Image files in JPG format should be linked into, or created from, the Revit Model.
CODE DESCRIPTION DISCIPLINE CODE DESCRIPTION DISCIPLINE* -CS Cover Sheet I-CP Ceiling Plan* -FP Floor Plan I-EP Enlarged Plans* -SP Site Plan I-FN Finish Plans* -DP Demolition Plan I-FR Furnishings Plan* -QP Equipment Plan C-ER Environmental Plan* -XP Existing Plan C-GD Grading Plan* -EL Elevation C-SV Survey* -SC Section C-RP Roads/ Topographic Plan* -DT Detail C-UT Utility Plan* -SH Schedules C-PF Profile Plan* -3D Isometric/3D M-CT Control Plan* -DG Diagrams M-HP HVAC Plan* -IM Images (aerials, etc.)M-PP Piping Plan* -KP Key Plan E-CM Communications Plan* -NT Notes E-GP Grounding Plan* -QP Equipment Plan E-LP Lighting Plan* -ZZ Exhibits & Figures E-PW Power PlanA -CP Ceiling Plan P-PP Plumbing Plan PlumbingA -EP Enlarged Plans S-FN Foundations PlanA-FN Finish Plans S-FR Framing PlanA-FR Furnishings Plan F-KP Sprinkler Plan Fire ProtectionA-RP Roof Plan L-VP Evacuation PlanL-LS Life Safety PlanT-DP Data PlanT-TP Telephone
MODEL FILE TYPES
Drawing Type Codes that apply to all disciplines (where *- represents any discipline code)
Architectural
Interiors
Civil
Mechanical
Electrical
Structural
Life SafetyTelecommunications
X --NN -XXXX -XXXX_XXX .JPGDISCIPLINEDESIGNATORFLOOR NUMBER BUILDING ID DESCRIPTION(OPTIONAL)FILE EXTENSION
-
-
XXMODEL FILE TYPE CODEREQUIRED FIELDOPTIONAL FIELD
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D6308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 62
Animation Files All Animation files shall be named in accordance with the following convention:
* Only an underscore (_) character may be used when word separation is desired in “Description” field. Do not use dashes (-) or spaces.
Example: 20028_ARCH_01_WalkthroughExterior.avi * Only animation files in AVI format should be created from the Revit Model.
Microsoft Office Files All Microsoft Office (.docx, .xlsx, .html, etc.) files shall be named in accordance with the following convention:
Example: G-SH-MSHT_INDEX.xlsx K-SH-OCC_SQFT.xlsx * Only Microsoft Office Word, Excel and Hyper Text Markup Language files, in DOC, XLS and HTML format, respectively, shall be created from the Revit Models.
NavisWorks Cahe Files All NavisWorks Cache (.nwc) files shall be named in accordance with the following convention:
* Only an underscore (_) character may be used when word separation is desired in “Description” field. Do not use dashes (-) or spaces.
X --NN -XXXX -XXXX_XXX.AVIDISCIPLINEDESIGNATORFLOOR NUMBER BUILDING ID DESCRIPTION(OPTIONAL)FILE EXTENSION
-
-
XXMODEL FILE TYPE CODEREQUIRED FIELDOPTIONAL FIELD
X --NN -XXXX -XXXX_XXX .NWCDISCIPLINEDESIGNATORFLOOR NUMBER BUILDING ID DESCRIPTION(OPTIONAL)FILE EXTENSION
-
-
XXMODEL FILE TYPE CODEREQUIRED FIELDOPTIONAL FIELD
D64
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 63
Examples: M-HP-03-TRWF-3D_SUPP_DUCT.nwc A-FP-01-SACT-3D_EXT_WALLS.nwc * NavisWorks Cache Files in NWC format stores the project model geometry.
NavisWorks Master File NavisWorks Master Files (.nwf) created by assembling the Discipline specific NavisWorks Cache files from NavisWorks Manage shall be named in accordance with the following convention:
* Only an underscore (_) character may be used when word separation is desired in “Description” field. Do not use dashes (-) or spaces.
Examples: COORD-ALL-TRWF-3D_COMPOSITE.nwc COORD-01-SACT-3D_COMPOSITE.nwc * NavisWorks Master files in NWF format stores the links to the appended NWC files, but no project model geometry.
Analysis Files Multiple applications will be used to perform different types of analysis within the different Revit Models. Analysis files shall be named in accordance with the following convention:
* Regardless of the application used to perform the analysis within the Revit-based applications, the results of such applications shall be brought back into the Revit 3D Model. This will ensure that the Revit 3D Model has the latest and most current information.
6.20 Project Browser The Project Browser shows a logical hierarchy for all views, schedules, sheets, groups, and other parts of the current project. Project browser organization in a logical and consistent
COORD -NN -XXXX -XXXX_XXX .NWFDISCIPLINEDESIGNATORFLOOR NUMBER BUILDING ID DESCRIPTION(OPTIONAL)FILE EXTENSION
-
-
REQUIRED FIELDOPTIONAL FIELD
X -NN -XXXX -XXXX_XXX .xxxFLOOR NUMBER BUILDING ID DESCRIPTION(OPTIONAL)FILE EXTENSION
-
-
REQUIRED FIELDOPTIONAL FIELD
DISCIPLINEDESIGNATOR
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D6508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 64
manner is critical. Any team member involved with the project should be able to launch any project in Revit and be able to navigate it with easy, identifying pertinent views and sheets.
Views Naming Convention Views within the Project Browser shall be named beginning with the View Type Code, followed by a Level/Sequence Number and an optional User Description. The Views should take the form of: Asterisk (*) will prefix the view name when this view is used for reference or as a working view only. All views to be used on the sheets will begin with View Type Code and the floor/ sequence. View type codes are listed below:
CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTIONGNStarting View RP Roof Plan AX Auxiliary Power Plan RR Reports CM Communication Plan 3D 3D Views SC Sections CO Corrosion Protection Plan AP Area Plans SH Schedules EC Energy Code Compliance BS Building Sections SP Site Plan GP Grounding Plan CP Ceiling Plans VL View List LP Lighting Plan CS Construction Staging or Sequence WT Walkthroughs LT Lighting Protection Plan DL Drawing List X Other PW Power Plan DM Demolition Plan XP Existing Plan WD Wiring Diagram Plan DR Drafting Views ZZ Exhibits & FiguresDSDetail Sections FPP Fire Protection Plan DV Detail Views FN Finish Plan FS Fire Suppression Plan EE Exterior Elevations FU Furniture Plan KP Sprinkler Plan EP Enlarged Plans SG Signage Plan PL Plumbing Plan FE Framing Elevation SD Standpipe Plan FP Floor Plans ER Environmental Plan SI Specialty Piping Plan IE Interior Elevations GD Grading PlanIMImagesPFProfile Plan CF Concrete Framing Plan KL Keynote Legend RT Roads/ Topographic Plan DP Decking Plan KY Key Plan SV Survey FD Foundation Plan L Landscape Plan UT Utility Plan FR Framing Plan LC Location Plan GC Graphical Column Schedule LG Legends CC Control Schematic Plan JL Joist Girder Load Diagram LS Life Safety CD Communication System Plan PP Precast Panel Plan MT Material Takeoff CT Control Plan RE Reinforcement Plan NT Notes HP HVAC Ductwork Plan SF Stair Framing Plan ON One Line Diagram Plan MD Machine Design Plan ST Steel Framing Plan QP Equipment Plan MH Material Handling Plan TB Truss Bracing Plan RD Riser Diagram PI Piping Plan WG Wind Girt Plan XB X Bracing Plan
ALL TRADES ELECTRICAL
PLUMBING
VIEW TYPE CODES
GENERAL
ALL TRADES
CIVIL
ARCHITECTURAL
MECHANICAL
STRUCTURAL
*XXNN _XXXX XXXDESCRIPTION(OPTIONAL)
*- WORKING & REFERENCE VIEWS
VIEW TYPE CODE+ SEQUENCE
- OPTIONAL FIELD- REQUIRED FIELD
D66
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 65
The image below shows the Floor Plans Views within the Project Browser organized by its View Use followed by a Family, a Discipline, and a View Type Code, Sequence Number and a Description. See sections Project Browser Organization – Views and Project Browser Organization – Sheets for more detailed browser organization information.
Example 1: Architectural Floor Plans should be named as follows (it is strongly recommended to include scale in Plan Descriptions):
FP01_First Floor 1/8”
FP02_Second Floor 1/8”
FP03_Third Floor 1/8”
Example 2: Mechanical Ceiling Plans should be named as follows (Description format in up to the Project Lead/ BIM Manager):
CP04_1st Floor Ductwork Plan 1/16”
CP05_2nd Floor Ductwork Plan 1/16”
CP06_Penthouse Ductwork Plan 1/16”
Example 3: Structural Analytical Working View Plans should be named as follows:
*FP07_Snow Load
*FP08_Bracing
*FP09_Wind Load
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D6708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 66
Sheet Naming Convention Following the cover sheet, sheets should be organized into subsets as per below image:
TCCD Sheet numbering Syntax follows NCS recommendations with some modification for the Facility Master Drawings and includes the following components:
The discipline designator, consisting of one alphabetical character and a hyphen or two alphabetical characters and a hyphen.
The sheet type designator, consisting of one numerical character.
The sheet sequence number, consisting of two numerical characters. Sheet numbering refers to the sheet designation labeled in a specified spot within the title block that uniquely identifies the sheet. Sheets are drawings that are part of the contract document set and the sheet number is therefore quite important for organizing the drawing set and for referencing between drawings. An example of sheet numbering is shown below.
D68
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 67
The syntax for assigning sheet numbers is shown below: Examples:
A-102 – Architectural Plan, Second Floor
A-105 – Fifth Floor Architectural Master Plan
S-220 – Structural Framing elevations
P-602 – Plumbing Riser Diagrams Note the cover sheet does not have a Discipline Designator, or Sheet Type Designator. The sheet number is simply “Cover.” Each section of the Sheet Numbering Syntax, specifically Discipline Designator and Sheet Sequence Designator are explained in the sub-sections below.
Discipline Designator The Discipline Designator creates the primary “sort order” of the drawing set. Sheets are grouped by discipline and disciplines are ordered in a logical fashion, according to NCS.
Sheet number A-102 (Architectural Plan, 2nd Floor)
X -NNLEVEL 1DISCIPLINEDESIGNATOR SHEET SEQUENCE DESIGNATOR
NSHEET TYPE DESIGNATOR
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D6908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 68
CODE DISCIPLINECover Sheet
G General
H Hazardous Materials
V Survey / Mapping
B Geotechnical
C Civil/ Site
U Site Utilities
S Structural
L Life Safety
A Architectural
K Space Tracking
I Interiors
Q Equipment
F Fire Protection
P Plumbing
D Process
M Mechanical
E Electrical
W Distributed Energy
T Telecommunications
R Resource
X Other Disciplines
Z Contractor / Shop Drawings
O Operations
LEVEL 1 DISCIPLINE DESIGNATOR
Discipline Designator Table in order of drawing set, rather than alphabetical: The primary organizer of drawing sets is disciplines. The order that the disciplines appear in the drawing set generally follows the order in which a project is built, starting with site related disciplines (geotechnical, civil, landscape, hazardous materials, etc.), then to overall building/facility related disciplines (architectural, structural, interiors), then to building/facility systems (mechanical, electrical, plumbing, etc.), and finally to construction and maintenance with shop drawings and operations.
Sheet Type Designator The Sheet Type Designator is a single digit that indicates the “type” of information presented on the sheet such as plan, elevation, schedule, etc. If multiple types of information are presented on a sheet, select the dominant one from this table. The practice of putting multiple information types on a sheet is encouraged to avoid creating a separate sheet for a minimal amount of information.
DESIGNATION SHEET #'s DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
0 001-099 General Symbols legend, notes, etc.
1 101-199 Plans Horizontal views
2 201-299 Elevations Vertical views
3 301-399 Sections Sectional views, wall sections
4 401-499 Large-Scale Views Enlarged plan, elevation views, stair sections, or other sections that are not considered details
5 501-599 Details Plan, section, and typical details
6 601-699
Schedules and Diagrams Door schedules, equipment schedules, plantingschedules, electrical one-line diagrams, etc.
7 701-799 User Defined
8 801-899 User Defined
9 901-999 3D Presentations Isometrics, perspectives, photographs
SHEET TYPE DESIGNATOR
TCCD does not have any types defined, but reserved the option to do so in the future TCCD AutoCAD Standard revisions
D70
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 69
Mixed Sheet Types It is common for elements of sheets to be of mixed “Sheet Types.” For example, details or elevations are often included as part of plan sheets. This is perfectly acceptable as long as:
The primary element of the sheet controls the Sheet Type Designator.
The sheet title in the title block is descriptive enough to indicate the nature of the drawing, such as “Storm Drainage Plan and Details” for storm drainage plans that includes details.
Sheet Sequence Designator Because of the wide variety of projects within TCCD, the practice of using the Sheet Sequence Designator is thoroughly controlled by the standard. Sheet Number Blocking – For large facility drawing sets such as those for TCCD, it is useful to do Sheet Number Blocking, which may be defined as using the Sheet Sequence Designator to block out ranges for different types of drawings within a Sheet Type. A master floor plan example is grouping Plans (Sheet Type 1) by designating that sheet numbers in the range A-100 to A-109 are reserved for existing condition plans, A-110 to A-
A-102 (uses a “Plan” sheet type designator)
SECOND FLOOR ARCHITECTURAL PLAN & DETAILS (Title indicates that drawings is of “mixed” type)
DETAIL 1
DETAIL 2
PLAN 1
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D7108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 70
119 are reserved for reflected ceiling plans, sheet numbers in the range A-120 to A-129 are reserved for finish plans, etc. Gaps in Sheet Sequence Number – Using the above approach to group types of sheets will create gaps between sheet sequence numbers. However, if TCCD standard is properly followed, there should be very few sheets that need renumbering when sheets are added or deleted. This is critical because most revision comments are based on sheet number. It is not necessary to designate sheet numbers as “Not Used” on the cover sheet. As long as all used sheets are listed on the cover sheet, the order of the plan set should be obvious. 00 vs. 01 – The use of Sheet Sequence Designator ending in zero (0), such as A-100, A-110, A-120 etc. should be reserved for cases where a general or overall sheet, like a key plan or notes, precedes a series of other sheets. A master plan example is an Overall Campus Plan (A-110) preceding 5 sheets that are separate building plans on that campus (A-111 to A-115). Otherwise, 01 should be the first Sheet Sequence Designator.
Sheet Set Sequencing Sheet sets are ordered first by the Discipline Designator (see the Discipline Designator table for order) and then by the three digit number that is composed of the Sheet Type Designator and Sheet Sequence Designator. When sheets are placed in numerical order, this numbering system will group sheets by Sheet Type such as Cover Sheet, General, Plans, Elevations, Sections, etc. The Discipline Designator Table is taken directly from NCS (with the exception of "U" for Site Utilities and “K” for Space Tracking) and lays out the order that discipline specific drawings should fall within a plan set.
Sheet Index Lists BIM designers and technicians must recognize that projects have team members without access to Revit, but who routinely review, utilize, and/or provide design input to sheets in the project sheet set. It is considered a “best practice” to maintain a sheet list outside of the Revit environment that reflects the sheets for all disciplines (existing and planned) in the Revit environment. This is the function of the Master Sheet Index (MSI). All facility drawings as well as new projects with contract drawings are advised to maintain a Master Sheet Index (MSI) that is stored under the “3 – Misc” folder of the project folder. The filename should be G-SH-MSHT_INDEX.xlsx. In the case of multiple or distinct final packages, the description field of the filename can be modified to reflect the respective package. The MSI should be maintained by the project team member responsible for the BIM(s) on the project (project BIM coordinator). Master Sheet List should be generated for each BIM Model and that list can be then exported to TXT and XLS formats to stream line the process and avoid errors between the two lists.
D72
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 71
Minimum Required Master Sheet Index Info All master sheet indexes must at minimum, include the following information:
Header information:
o Project Number, Name, and Manager
o Campus
o Building Name and ID
o File Name
o Date last updated
o Latest Revision Number
List Information
o Sheet Index
Sheet Numbers
Sheet Titles
o Completion date (must be included once issued for construction, if applicable)
o Comment column for coordination notes and to indicate ‘placeholder’ drawings (i.e. drawings that are planned but not yet assembled)
Using the MSI in the Plan Sets Revit Schedule (Sheet List) must be generated within Revit and must reflect the MSI. This sheet list will be used / shown as the sheet index in the plans.
Sheet Names Revit Sheet Names within the Project Browser display both – Sheet Number and Sheet Title.
Project Browser Organization – Views The Project Browser for Views is organized in the following order:
VIEW USE (Custom TCCD Shared Parameter)
Family (Revit Native Parameter)
Discipline (Revit Native Parameter)
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D7308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 72
Sorted by:
View Name (In the ascending order)
For proper browser organization, each view MUST have corresponding Instance Properties filled out:
Discipline
o See Discipline Designator Table
VIEW USE
o Construction Documents o Coordination o Reference Only o Working o Coordination o Record Drawings o *User Defined
Project Browser Organization – Sheets The Project Browser for Sheets is organized in the following order:
D74
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 73
DOCUMENT PHASE (Custom TCCD Shared Parameter)
DISCIPLINE HEADER (Custom TCCD Shared Parameter) Sorted by:
Sheet Number (In the ascending order) For proper browser organization, each sheet MUST have corresponding Instance Properties filled out:
DISCIPLINE HEADER
o 001 General
o 002 Hazardous
o 003 Civil
o 004 Site Utilities
o 005 Structural
o 006 Life Safety
o 007 Architectural
o 008 Space Tracking
o 009 Interiors
o 010 Fire Protection
o 011 Plumbing
o 012 Mechanical
o 013 Electrical
o 014 Telecommunications
VIEW USE
o 01 Construction Documents
o 02 Bidding
o 03 Construction
o 04 Presentation
o 05 As-Built
o 06 Record Drawings
o 07 Coordination
SHEET INDEX ORDER – Corresponds to the Sheet DISCIPLINE HEADER number and is used in Sheet List sorting.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D7508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 74
6.21 Shared Families Host Model Guidelines The following are recommendations for which model should host a family that is shared by multiple disciplines. Note that some projects may not have the model that is listed to host the family, in which case that family can be placed in whichever model is most appropriate for that project.
FAMILY HOST MODELLadders, Stairs, and Railings Architectural Hoists and Bridge Cranes Structural Louvers Architectural Roof Drains Architectural Pipe Supports Process Piping Equipment Pads Structural Pre-Engineered Building Framing Structural Access Panels Mechanical Light Fixtures Electrical Plumbing Fixtures Architectural
D76
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 75
7.0 -Revit Architecture Standard
7.1General This Section of the TCCD BIM Standards for consultants establishes the criteria for some common architectural elements in the models.
7.2 Walls
Naming Convention Considering that projects might contain a variety of walls with many layers, a standard wall type naming convention and tags are established by TCCD. This will allow for a controlled type name length and user friendly sorting in the type selector for an efficient selection and modeling. Some standard material abbreviations have been defined below, but additional ones can be created based on the individual project needs.
Note: A larger table is included in the Appendix D for your reference.
(FIELD 1 )____FIELD 2 ____FIELD 3 ____FIELD 4 (FIELD 5 /FIELD 6 /FIELD 7 /FIELD 8 )FIELD 9
SMOKE/FIRE
RATING
TOTAL
THICKNESS
(EX11.1 )____EX ____BL ____NR (4"BR /6"BL+2"RI /.875"FU+.5"GB /____)12.625"
BL - BlockBR - Brick
CO - ConcreteEX - Existing WallFU - Furring
GL - Glass Curtainwall
GB - Glass BlockMT - Metal Studs
S - Special - User DefinedTU - Tilt Up Concrete Wall
TP - Toilet PartitionWS - Wood Studs
IC - ICF Concrete Wall
IN - InteriorEX - Exterior
RT - RetainingFD - Foundation
Wall tag consists of:* FIELD 2 (use)* FIELD 8 (total thickness)* Period* Sequence number
WALL TYPE NAMING & TAGS
Examples: (EX11.1)-EX-BL-NR-(4"BR/6"BL+2"RI/.875"FU+.5"GB/-)12.625" - Exterior wall - 5.625" Block, 2" Rigid Insulations, 3.625" Brick, 0.5" Gypsum Board on 7/8" Furring Strips (IN5.4)-IN-MT-NR(-/3.625"/.625CB/CT)5" - Interior wall - 3.625" Metal with 0.625" Cement Board and Ceramic Tile on one side only.
INTERIOR
MATERIAL
FINISH
MATERIAL
List materials ONLY if they affect overall wall thickness significantly (i.e. ceramic tile, but not paint). When no material is provided, include a '__' (hyphen).
AWP - Acoustical Wall Panel
AWT - Acoustical Wall TreatmentCPT - Carpet
CT - Ceramic Tile
FWC - Fabric Wall Covering
SSP - Stainless Steel PanelTER - Terrazzo Tile
VP - Veneer Plaster
VWC - Vinyl Wall Covering
List only primary substrate holding up finish material such as .62"BG, or .5"CB. When no material is provided, include a '__' (hyphen).
GB - Gypsum Board
CB - Cement Board
LH - LathZ - "Z" Clips
HT - Hat Channel
Describe core using nominal size designation (i.e. 2x4, 3 5/8", 4" 12", etc.).Since the material is already listed in Field 3, it is not necessary to repeat unless multiple materials are used. If multiple materials are used in core, separate with '+' (plus) and use materials designation for each material
RI - Rigid Insulation
BI - Batt Insulation
FP - Fire Proofing
Including ALL materials in a wall style, as reported by Revit Type Properties
Only outermost materials are listed. Include size (nominal) & material from schedule. When no material is provided, include a '__' (hyphen)
SD - Siding
ST - Stucco
EFIS - Exterior Insulation & Finish System
CORE SIZE
(MAT1, MAT2…)WALL TAG USE SUPPORT TYPE EXTERIOR
MATERIAL
NR - No Rating
S - Smoke
F1 - 1Hour Fire
F2 - 2 Hour FireF3 - 3 Hour Fire
SF1 - 1 Hour Smoke/ FireSF2 - 2 Hour Smoke/ Fire
SF3 - 3 Hour Smoke/ Fire
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D7708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 76
Display Settings For a proper wall display for both electronic file and printed sheets, walls should have the following line weight setting assigned (this should be done globally under the MANAGE tab, Setting Panel, Object Styles dialog box):
Facility Models (Record Models) generated based on the field surveys will be displayed using coarse setting indicating walls as two lines of a specified thickness. In some cases, where known, masonry wall may display coarse hatch indicating the materials. Most of the existing conditions models will be generated using generic wall styles.
Fire Rated Walls Fire rated walls will be designated within the wall styles and named appropriately as per above wall naming convention. Here shown patterns will be assigned to display in plan views as needed. These patterns will apply to all fire rated walls in the model. Pattern can be assigned as either or both – as a Custom Material Definition as well as a Coarse Scale Fill Pattern. This will ensure that the fire rated walls are visible and easily identifiable for all trades.
D78
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 77
Facility Master models only: Life Safety sheets are generated for all floor plan. These floor plans will contain NFPA developed fire and smoke rated wall designations. A detail component (Line_Based_Fire_Rated_Partition.rfa) will be added to those walls as needed:
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D7908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 78
7.3 Doors For a proper door display for both electronic file and printed sheets, doors should have the following line weight setting assigned (this should be done globally under the MANAGE tab, Setting Panel, Object Styles dialog box):
In addition, door frames will not be displayed in Facility Master Models.
7.4 Plans and Elevations TCCD encourages both outside consultants as well in-house design teams to prepare models and drawings that “speak” and convey the design intent in a clear and easy to interpret manner. Methods such as using solid/ halftone patterns to highlight columns or bearing structural walls, assigning shadows to the elevations, employing a variety of line styles and line weight, even using color as needed. Designers should be aware of software limitations, however, such as having to use raster processing for shadows thus reducing the line work quality. Any of the methods used should be carefully considered and only adopted if it improves the presentation and documentation of the design intent.
7.5Space Use Plans All of TCCD existing buildings as well as new projects will have a Revit model. TCCD will use these models throughout the lifetime of the building as a facility management tool. Each facility master model will have a color coded Space Use Plan generated. This plan is generated in accordance with the Texas Higher Education Coordinating Board Space Use Codes (see Appendix H). A Schedule of Keys listing appropriate Space Use Codes as well as the Definitions has been generated and will be included with TCCD template. Consultants are not required to generate such plan, but they are require to fill in the appropriate Room parameters Based on the information provided in the Appendix H.
D80
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 79
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D8108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 80
8.0 -Revit MEP Standard
8.1General Settings Most of the Revit MEP settings, especially regarding calculations and analysis options and units, will be the responsibility of the design teams working on the project. However, to promote consistency between projects, TCCD outlines some critical Mechanical and Electrical Settings required for all TCCD projects.
Mechanical Settings
Duct Settings should be matched per below image:
Pipe Settings should be matched per below image:
D82
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 81
Electrical Settings
Electrical Settings should be matched per below image:
8.2Systems Categories in Revit tend to be very general and do not distinguish between similar objects made of different material or that have different uses. For example, Revit doesn’t graphically distinguish between a pipe used for domestic cold water and one used for liquid refrigerant without the use of Systems. Therefore, Systems are being provided within the Mechanical and Plumbing Templates to address this issue. Systems have been defined within TCCD Templates for objects such as ducts and pipes and will address the issue described above for the following sub-disciplines:
Mechanical Equipment
HVAC
Plumbing
Fire Protection All TTCD Systems have been associated to work with the View Templates, therefore different systems will show different colors once the View Templates are applied.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D8308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 82
Mechanical Systems:
Fire Protection Systems:
SYSTEM NAME ABBREVIATION COLORExhaustEAMagenta(255-000-255) Return RA Blue(000-000-255) Supply SA Green(000-255-000) Boiler_Blow_Down BBD Purple(128-064-128) Chilled_Glycol_Solution_Drain CHGD Orange(255-128-000) Chilled_Glycol_Solution_Makeup CHGM Yellow(255-255-000) Chilled_Glycol_Solution_Return CHGR Green(000-255-000) Chilled_Glycol_Solution_Supply CHGS Green(000-255-000) Chilled_Water_Drain CHWD Green(000-255-000) Chilled_Water_Makeup CHWM Yellow(255-255-000) Chilled_Water_Return CHWR Green(000-255-000) Chilled_Water_Supply CHWS Green(000-255-000) Condenser_Water_Drain CWD Green(000-255-000) Condenser_Water_Makeup CWM Yellow(255-255-000) Condenser_Water_Return CWR Green(000-255-000) Condenser_Water_Supply CWS Green(000-255-000) Hot_Glycol_Solution_Drain HGD Green(000-255-000) Hot_Glycol_Solution_Makeup HGM Yellow(255-255-000) Hot_Glycol_Solution_Return HGR Green(000-255-000) Hot_Glycol_Solution_Supply HGS Green(000-255-000) Hot_Water_Drain HWD Orange(255-128-000) Hot_Water_Makeup HWM Yellow(255-255-000) Hot_Water_Return HWR Magenta(255-000-255) Hot_Water_Supply HWDS Magenta(255-000-255)Refrigerant_Discharge RD Green(000-255-000) Refrigerant_Drain RD Magenta(255-000-255) Refrigerant_Liquid RL Magenta(255-000-255) Refrigerant_Suction RS Magenta(255-000-255)
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
SYSTEM NAME ABREVIATION COLOR FP_Deluge SPDL Red (255-000-000) FP_Drainage SPDR Cyan (000-255-255) FP_Dry_Stand_Pipe FSPD Red (255-000-000) FP_Wet_Sprinkler SP Green (000-255-000) FP_Wet_Stand_Pipe FSPW Red (255-000-000)
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
D84
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 83
Plumbing Systems:
8.3 Filters Similar to systems, Filters provide help to graphically distinguish objects made of different material or that have different uses, but do not support systems. For example, Revit doesn’t graphically distinguish between a conduit used for power and one used for Fiber Optic without the use of Filters. Therefore, Filters are being provided within the Electrical Template to address this issue. Some filters have been defined within TCCD Templates for objects such as conduits and will address the issue described above for the following sub-disciplines:
Power
Telecommunications Custom parameters named ABBREVIATION have been created and associated with all the Electrical elements to allow user input. Filters are case-sensitive, which means that the parameter needs to match exactly with the tables provided below in order to work.
View Settings All MEP&F views will be set to detail level Medium, which will display all of HVAC ductwork as two-line drawings and piping and conduits as a single line drawings.
SYSTEM NAME ABREVIATION COLOR PB_Acid_Vent AV Brown(128-064-064) PB_Acid_Waste AW Brown(128-064-064) PB_Cold_Water CW Blue(000-000-255) PB_Combined_Water COM Blue(000-000-255) PB_Fire_Service F Blue(000-000-255) PB_Gas_7 G7 Yellow(255-255-000) PB_Gas_14 G14 Yellow(255-255-000) PB_Gas_Pipe_Vent GPV Yellow(255-255-000) PB_Hot_Water_105 HW105 Orange(255-128-000) PB_Hot_Water_140 HW140 Red(255-000-000) PB_Hot_Water_Circulating_105 HWC105 Orange(255-128-000) PB_Hot_Water_Circulating_140 HWC140 Red(255-000-000) Sanitary_Vent SV Green(000-255-000) Sanitary_Waste SW Green(000-255-000) Sanitary_Waste_Underground SW Green(000-255-000) Storm_Drainage ST Gray(192-192-192) Storm_Drainage_Underground ST Gray(192-192-192)
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D8508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 84
Power
Telecommunications
FILTER NAME ABBREVIATION COLORPower - Emergency Lighting Cable EL Orange(255-128-000) Power - Emergency Lighting Conduit/Cable Tray EL Orange(255-128-000) Power - Emergency Lighting Equipment EL Brown(128-064-064) Power - Grounding Cable G Orange(255-128-000) Power - Grounding Conduit/Cable Tray G Orange(255-128-000) Power - Grounding Equipment G Brown(128-064-064) Power - Lighting Cable L Cyan(000-255-255) Power - Lighting Conduit/Cable Tray L Cyan(000-255-255) Power - Lighting Fixtures L Cyan(000-255-255) Power - Lightning Cable LN Cyan(000-255-255) Power - Lightning Conduit/Cable Tray LN Cyan(000-255-255) Power - Lightning Equipment LN Cyan(000-255-255) Power - Power Cable P Orange(255-128-000) Power - Power Conduit/Cable Tray P Orange(255-128-000) Power - Power Equipment P Orange(255-128-000)
POWER SYSTEMS
FILTER NAME ABREVIATION COLOR Telecommunications - Cable TV Cable TV Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Cable TV Conduit/Cable Tray TV Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Cable TV Equipment TV Brown(128-064-064) Telecommunications - Data Cable D Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Data Conduit/Cable Tray) D Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Data Equipment D Brown (128-064-064)Telecommunications - Fire Alarm Cable FA Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Fire Alarm Conduit/Cable Tray FA Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Fire Alarm Equipment FA Brown(128-064-064) Telecommunications - IPDVS Cable IPDVS Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - IPDVS Conduit/Cable Tray IPDVS Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - IPDVS Equipment IPDVS Brown(128-064-064) Telecommunications - Phone Cable PA Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Phone Conduit/Cable Tray PA Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Phone Equipment PA Brown(128-064-064) Telecommunications - Projection Cable PR Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Projection Conduit/Cable Tray PR Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Projection Equipment PR Brown(128-064-064) Telecommunications - Public Address & Clock Cable PA Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Public Address & Clock Conduit/Cable Tray PA Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Public Address & Clock Equipment PA Brown(128-064-064) Telecommunications - Rescue Intercom Cable RI Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Rescue Intercom Conduit/Cable Tray RI Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Rescue Intercom Equipment RI Brown(128-064-064) Telecommunications - Security Cable S Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Security Conduit/Cable Tray S Orange(255-128-000) Telecommunications - Security Equipment S Brown(128-064-064
TELECOMMINICATIONS SYSTEMS
D86
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 85
8.4Additional Parameters For TCCD facility master models, some additional information will be tracked regarding Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection Systems. This information will manage by TCCD facility maintenance staff using Parameters associated with model elements (see Appendix G for a list of parameters and their settings):
EQUIPMENT FRAME WIDTH
EQUIPMENT FRAME HEIGHT
EQUIPMENT FRAME DEPTH
DATE INSTALLED
DATE REPAIRED
DATE TESTED
CIRCUIT NO
8.5HVAC Zones All of TCCD existing buildings as well as new projects will have a Revit model. TCCD will use these models throughout the life time of the building as a facility management tool. Each facility master model will have a color coded HVAC Zone Plan generated. This plan is generated for TCCD facility maintenance staff. Consultants are not required to generate such plan, but they are required to define all of the HVAC zones within the model and label them accordingly.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D8708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 86
9.0 -Revit Structure Standard
9.1General Settings Most of the Revit Structural settings, especially regarding calculations and analysis options, will be the responsibility of the design teams working on the project. However, to promote consistency between projects, TCCD outlines some critical Structural Settings required for all TCCD projects. Symbolic representation will be set per below:
D88
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 87
10.0 -COBie/Commissioning
10.1 General Guidelines TCCD has adopted COBie as the methodology to electronically transfer building information after construction is complete for facilities management. The COBie spreadsheet is part of the U.S. National Building Information Model Standard (NBIMS). Third-party utilities facilitate the automatic creation and transfer of some data between BIM and a COBie spreadsheet via IFC files as an intermediate stage, and some BIM software may include creation of and data transfer to the spreadsheet directly without making use of intermediate IFC files. Where possible, automatic means should be used to create and fill in the COBie spreadsheet. While the actual methodology used by individual consultants is up to the consultants, TCCD strongly recommends using COBie Extension for Revit available for download on Autodesk’s web site.
The Consultant Team shall inquire with their BIM software vendor(s) for the most current COBie utilities. However, the completed COBie worksheets will also contain some information that is entered manually into the electric file, either because the information currently cannot be conveniently extracted from the BIM or because it does not reside in the BIM (i.e. team contact information, zone assignment to spaces, etc.) The design/construction team is encouraged to provide as much information in COBie as is known at the time of the deliverable.
The consultant team(s) shall submit the most current version of the COBie spreadsheet with other required deliverables at each project phase.
With CD deliverables, the COBie Type and Component worksheets are required. These fields provide component name, description, and creation date.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D8908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 88
11.0 -Electronic File Management
11.1 Overview An AutoCAD or Revit file is an electronic file that represents one or more sheets in the project drawing set (sheet files), “component" drawings, or data files (model files, schedule files, details files) that are referenced into the sheet files. TCCD file structure is organized to facilitate proper management of the Master Facility Drawings and keep them separated from the on-going projects. Later described workflow allows for efficient updates to facility master drawings based on any completed projects. Folder structure screen shots shown throughout this section indicate the standard file management practices, but do not show an entire folder structure.
0 – Master Facility Drawings This is where the Master Facility drawings and models will be stored. Drawings and Models will be in a read only format (write-protected) and used as a reference and for information reporting purposes.
1 – Current Projects – In-House Contains active projects generated at TCCD by TCCD design team.
2 – Current Projects – Consultants Contains active projects generated by the outside consultant teams.
3 – Completed Projects – Add To Masters Contains complete project close-out documentation, including final as-built drawings and models, generated by either TCCD in-house teams or outside consultants; that are to be incorporated into the Master Facility Drawings and databased for archival information.
4 – Record Drawings Contains all of the existing drawings TCCD has for all facilities and sites in DWG, PDF, TIFF, JPG and other formats. These files are databased and searchable. They should only be used as historical reference documents.
D90
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 89
11.2 Sheet Files Sheet File is the NCS term for the electronic files that represent the sheets that will be printed as part of your project drawing set, or contract drawings. In AutoCAD, Sheet Files generally include a sheet border in paper space, various paper space symbols and annotations, and typically include viewports to drawing information in model space where drawing objects and one or more model files may reside. For Revit projects, PDF and native file formats of the most current sheets shall be maintained in this folder and organized with sheet file naming outlined in File Naming and Numbering of the Standards.
Creating Subfolders under Sheet Files As a general rule, subfolders should only be created to segregate drawings by discipline as is shown above. For Current Projects, the discipline subfolders can be omitted if project size and scope does not warrant discipline subfolders.
11.3 Model Files The “2 – Model Files” folder includes all file types used to assemble the sheet files that make up the project drawing set. Primarily it will consist of Revit Models, any AutoCAD links, Image Links, Tables, etc. All files in the “2 – Model Files” folder should be current files. Do not "clutter" the “2 – Model Files” folder with different versions of files as this ultimately leads to confusion and errors. For work shared models, “1 – Central Files” folder will be created.
Creating Subfolders under Model Files As a general rule, subfolders should only be created to segregate drawings by discipline as is shown above. For Current Projects, the discipline subfolders can be omitted if project size and scope does not warrant discipline subfolders.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D9108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 90
11.4 Miscellaneous Files Miscellaneous files are files that are referenced into Model or Sheet files (such as schedules, Maps, Logos, etc.) or information retrieved from the Master Drawings (square footage calculations, occupancy information, fire/ smoke damper attributes extracted into a spreadsheet, etc.) Miscellaneous file naming convention should adhere to the above described file naming convention for an appropriate file type.
11.5 Master Facility Drawings “Master Facility Drawings” directory is organized based on the following Hierarchy:
Campus o Building
Sheet Files
Discipline
Model Files
Discipline
Misc. Files All of the Drawings in the Facility Master Drawings directory will be for reference and reporting only.
NO new design work should ever be done on these files. Only after projects are complete and a set of final as-built drawings and models have been provided to TCCD, TCCD Facilities Department staff will incorporate the latest information into the Facility master drawings and models.
D92
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 91
11.6 Current Projects –In-House “Current Project – In-House” directory is organized based on the following Hierarchy:
Campus o Project
Sheet Files
Discipline
Model Files
Discipline
Misc. Files
Conceptual
Publish
Support Files
Survey All of the projects being developed by TCCD in-house design, construction, and maintenance teams will be stored in this folder for the duration of the project. “Sheet Files”, “Model Files”, and “Misc.” folders will serve the same purpose and follow same standards as described in the preceding sections 10.2 through 10.4.
Projects Projects folder naming convention will follow currently established e-Builder format.
e-Builder automatically assigns project number and the Project Manager will assign the project name.
Conceptual The Conceptual folder is intended as the storage location for model files and sheet files that only pertain to the conceptual phase of a project. The file naming convention is the same as the model and sheet files described in this standard. Subfolders may be created as needed. Serious consideration, as well as data validation should be taken before copying any conceptual data into the “Model Files” folder for use in design.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D9308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 92
Publish When drawings are published, such as to a printer/plotter “hardcopy” or DWF/PDF/PLT “digital” format, they represent the status of the drawing at the time they are published, essentially creating a picture or snapshot in time of a drawing. The published drawing loses continuity with the active drawing immediately after it is published as it has no ability to keep pace with the changes in the drawings, until the next time it is published. To the design team, the value has a short time span, but to the client or a reviewing agency, it is valuable because it is a snapshot at a particular milestone on a project. To that end, the Publish folder is intended as a temporary holding location for published drawings and BIM(s) in a DWF, DWG, IFC or PDF format. The published drawings either proceed to the printer/plotter for “hardcopy” distribution or to the Deliverables folder as part of a “digital” deliverable package to the client. In either case, the Publish folder should be cleared of all files after the project is complete.
Support Files Support files are all the files that are created and saved over the course of a project that neither get submitted to a client nor referenced to a file. This folder is also to store data as it is being assembled for use in the “Model Files”, “Sheet Files”, and “Misc” folders (the folders containing the drawings that make up the project drawing set). Use of this folder will prevent two things that often affect project BIM work from occurring:
It will keep the "production folders" (Model Files, Sheet Files, and Misc) clear of multiple versions and "junk" files, which often lead to confusion and misuse of files.
It provides a specific location to store temporary files so they are not stored on local drives or in other network folders. When folders and files in the “Support Files” folder are no longer needed, they should be deleted.
Survey The Survey folders contain Field Survey related files generated by TCCD staff and/ or outside consultants. This folder will contain documents such as field surveys for any trade, civil/ site survey information, raw point clouds generated via 3D scanner, photos, etc. Users can generate sub-folders as needed to organize different types of field information, but should use logical and easy to follow names (such as “Photos”, “Point Clouds”, “Field Notes”, etc.)
D94
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 93
11.7 Current Projects – Consultant Projects developed by outside consultants will follow the same file storage format as the in-house projects. Any documentation received from the consultants will be placed in an appropriate folder for the project duration. Final close-out documents will be databased, incorporated into the Master Drawings and moved to the Record Drawings folder. It is the responsibility of TCCD consultants to turn over their project documentation in an appropriate format and file organization.
11.8 Completed Projects – Add To Masters This is a temporary file storage location for recently complete projects. It contains complete project close-out documentation, including final as-built drawings, generated by either TCCD in-house teams or outside consultants. Once the complete project information is incorporated into the Master Facility Drawings and the rest of the documents are databased, the entire project MUST be moved to the “4 – Record Drawings” folder. Maintenance of this folder should take place bi-annually.
11.9 Record Drawings Contains all of the existing drawings and models TCCD has for all facilities and sites in DWG, RVT, NWC, PDF, TIFF, JPG and other formats. These files have been sorted for duplicates, organized, databased and indexed to be searchable based on a number of project parameters. They should only be used as a historical reference document and are in a “Read-Only” format.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D9508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 94
11.10 Maintenance Expectations All individuals working on TCCD projects are expected to take measures to keep project folders "clean." The project CAD/BIM lead is responsible for occasionally auditing the CAD/BIM folders to ensure that this standard is being followed and that good file management practice is being employed. A few things to keep in mind: •Keep folders free of “junk”, “old”, or “erase me” files.
The “Model Files” folder and the “Sheet Files” folder should only contain current files that can be reliably used on the project. There should be no confusion as to file "versioning" because multiple versions should not exist in these folders. Use the “Support Files” folder as described herein for versioning, assembly and "experimenting", and short term archiving.
All drawings/ models shall be purged of empty, unused, or non-essential drawing data.
D96
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 95
12.0 -BIM File Transmission
12.1 Definition of BIM Files Electronic BIM Files, herein simply referred to as “BIM files” are defined as Revit, Navisworks, IFC, DWG, PDF and any other BIM application files.
12.2 Distribution of BIM Files 1.Unless electronic BIM file distribution is explicitly defined by the contract, no BIM files may be distributed to outside parties unless the policy defined herein is followed. 2.All electronic file transfers shall include a copy of the standard TCCD Terms of Electronic File Transfer (TEFT) with the transmittal. This is available on the TCCD web page (see Appendix E for a standard TEFT Form). 3.When sending the files by email or notifying the recipient of a download site by email include the TEFT at the bottom of the email or as an attachment in PDF format. 4.The electronic files should be prepared by transmittal such that all necessary data files, font files, plot settings, x-refs, links, etc. are included and appropriately structured. The transmittal should include adequate documentation to explain the contents of the electronic files. The standard policy for preparation of electronic documents for transmittal is to utilize the “win-zip” feature.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D9708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 96
13.0 -Plotting & Plot File Management
13.1 Plot File Definitions and Categories When the term "plot file" is used herein, it refers to the file that is created from a model file (.RVT, .DWF, PDF, etc.) that will be sent to a plotter to produce a paper copy of the drawing file. The following three (3) categories of plot files are defined for the purposes of describing the standards for creating, naming, and organizing plot files: 1.Check Plots - are run for BIM operator review, informal review or for other team members. Check plots are not associated with a formal milestone review or review submittal. 2.Milestone Review Plots - are run for established project milestones or internal review prior to project milestones. Project milestones include review milestones but not the final deliverable and are typically submitted to clients, client representatives, or review agencies. Milestone review plots are often submitted to obtain permits or approvals. 3.Final Deliverable Plots - are run for submittal of final drawings to clients, client representatives, or review agencies. Final Deliverables include: a.Bid Sets b.Construction Sets c.Supplemental Drawings d.Record Drawings
Plot File Formats The most common types of plot files are Design Web Format (DWF) and Portable Document Format (PDF) files. The TCCD standard is to produce plot files in PDF format whenever possible. While the requirements for naming and storing the two categories of plot files described above differ, all should be produced in the same plot file format as the final deliverable will be plotted in (preferably PDF) to ensure that drawings plotted for review are consistent with final deliverables.
13.2 Plot File Naming and Management All plot files, whether used for checking a drawing/set or a deliverable drawing/set, shall be kept in the "Publish" folder. The individual plot files shall match the name of the plotted drawing. For deliverable sets, a merged single-page PDF version of the sets shall be created and moved under the
D98
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 97
"Deliverables" folder. This way the project team has access to the package, as delivered, and no duplicate plot files exist under the “Publish” folder. The relationship between the “Publish” folder and the “Deliverables” folder is illustrated in the preceding image.
13.3 Plotting In order to produce consistent plots, the selections shown below should be made when plotting sheet files.
Print Dialog Setting • Printer – use any (i.e. Bluebeam, Acrobat) PDF generator as a default. • File – select the option of
“Combine multiple selected
views/sheets into a single file” as default. Unless specifically requested to generate individual PDF files for each sheet. • Print Range – Will vary based on the user needs.
Print Setup dialog Settings • Name – Name Print setup options based on the sheet size and other distinctive identifiers (i.e. color).
Paper – Varies based on the project/ sheet needs.
Hidden Line Views – choose vector processing by default, unless rendering and color images are being printed, then use Rater processing.
Colors – Choose Black Lines by default, unless rendering and color images are being printed, then use Rater processing.
Other settings – match settings as shown in the image on the right.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D9908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 98
14.0 -Archiving & Recovery Management
14.1 General For any archiving or archive retrieval needs contact Al Clark - Assistant Director Records Management/Construction AEC Repository at TCCD. For any lost file recovery and backup file retrieval needs for stand-alone Revit Models contact the Network Administrator at TCCD. Perform the following steps to recover a Central (work shared) Revit Model: For workshared projects, Revit automatically creates a backup folder. This folder should NOT be moved, renamed, or deleted UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES while the project is active and functioning properly.
If Central model recovery is needed, do the following: 1.Copy the backup folder to a location without the central file (this step is critical to prevent the corruption in the project from stopping the recovery). 2.Start Revit 3.Open the software, from the ribbon go to the COLLABORATE tab then to Restore Backup. 4.Revit will ask you whether to recover the .rvt file from the backups. Click “Yes”. 5.Navigate to where the central file is stored. You will see a folder with the central files name_backup. 6.Click once on the backup folder then click the Open button. 7.You will now get a list of times when the backup was saved periodically throughout the day. 8.Click “Save As” and navigate to a location to save the recovered file, and verify you are able to open it successfully. If you are not, you may need to go through steps 1-7 to find an older saved backup file. If you cannot find a backup copy that will open you will need to gather this information and send it into your Support:
A copy of the project file and any linked file(s).
Journal files from each of the machines accessing the project. If possible, send three days worth of data prior to the issue. See the following link for information on how to obtain journal files:
D100
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 99
o https://knowledge.autodesk.com/support/revit-products/troubleshooting/caas/sfdcarticles/sfdcarticles/Location-of-journal-files.html
A copy of the Application, System, and Security Windows Event logs from the machines accessing this project. See the following link for information on how to obtain the Windows Event logs:
o https://knowledge.autodesk.com/support/autocad/troubleshooting/caas/sfdcarticles/sfdcarticles/Obtaining-Windows-Event-logs-for-diagnostics-and-troubleshooting.html
A copy of the computers System Information file (NFO). See the following link for information on how to create an NFO file:
o https://knowledge.autodesk.com/support/autocad/troubleshooting/caas/sfdcarticles/sfdcarticles/Obtaining-a-System-Information-file-NFO-for-diagnostics-and-troubleshooting.html
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D10108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 100
15.0 -Master Drawing Updates Process
15.1 Overview This section outlines the workflow for updating Facility Master Drawings with new project information.
D102
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 101
15.2 TCCD Master Facility Drawing/ Model Update Process TCCD will hold the latest Master Facility Drawings and Models (will be referred to as Master Documents in this section) based on the Electronic File Management procedures outlined in the preceding sections. No design work will be done on the Master Drawings directly. For new work, copies of the Master Drawings will be acquired by the project manager to use as a reference.
Following is the folder structure for managing files for new work;
On TCCD Server
0 - Master Facility Drawings: This is where all Facility Master Plans and Models are stored.
1 - Current Projects – In House: The TCCD Project Manager obtains a copy of the relative Master Documents for use by the in-house design staff. Progress drawings and models are stored in this folder.
2 - Current Projects – Consultants: The TCCD Project Manager obtains a copy of the relative Master Documents and for use by the outside Consultants. Progress drawings and models are stored in this folder.
3 - Completed Projects – Add to Masters: When the project is complete, the TCCD Project Manager moves the final project files to this folder. A copy of these files as well as a copy of the relevant Master Documents is also placed on Buzzsaw to the same named folder. TCCD or B-CAD will use these for updating the Master Plans and Models.
On BUZZSAW – Under Folder “1 – From TCCD”
a – Master Plans – To Be Updated: When the project is complete, the TCCD Project Manager places a copy of the relevant Master Plans and Models in this folder.
b – Master Database – To Be Updated: When the project is complete, the TCCD Project Manager places a copy of the Master Drawing Database in this folder.
c – Completed Project – Add to Masters: When the project is complete, the TCCD Project Manager places a copy of the final project files to this folder.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D10308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 102
On BUZZSAW – Under Folder “2 – From B-CAD”
a – Updated Master Plans: B-CAD will update the Master Plans and Models based on the final project files. All TCCD Standards will be followed.
b – Updated Master Drawing Database: B-CAD will update the Master Drawing Database to include all final Design Drawings. All TCCD Standards will be followed.
Final Step: The TCCD Project Manager downloads the updated Master Plans and Master Drawing Database from Buzzsaw and updates the Masters on TCCD Server.
D104
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 103
16.0 -Revit Best Practices (Recommended)
16.1 Best Practices The following sections describe application-specific best practices as well as procedures used on all TCCD Revit projects. The following characteristics of a Revit Model can affect performance:
Complex Geometry
Multiple Parametric Relations
Multiple Constraints
Linked Files
Restarting Revit The Revit-based applications maintain model data in memory and hard disk caches to increase performance against repeated data access. Revit platform performance may benefit from a workstation restart once or twice a day, and especially before triggering the following memory-intensive tasks:
Printing
Rendering
Exporting
Compacting Central and Local Files Compacting the Central and Local files reduces file sizes when saving Workset-enabled files. During a normal save, Revit-based applications only write new and changed elements to the existing files. This can cause files to become large, but it increases the speed of the Save operation. The compacting process rewrites the entire file and removes obsolete parts to save space. Because it takes more time than a normal save, use the compact option when the workflow can be interrupted.
Design Options Preserve Design Options only as long as they are useful to the project. Even though options may not be active and visible when changes are made within the main model, all Design Options will update to maintain the model’s consistency. Consider whether options should be preserved long-term in separate models that can be linked as needed.
AutoCAD Files
Minimize the number of linked DWG files.
Make sure linked DWG files are “Clean” of any unnecessary graphics, model space debris, are fully purged and audited.
Do NOT import DWG files into Revit. Any Typical details that exist in AutoCAD should be re-created using Revit native drafting elements.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D10508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 104
Avoid importing AutoCAD Drawings, especially unnecessary data like hatching or line-work such as construction lines. Delete unnecessary parts and layers of the DWG file within AutoCAD and link if possible (rather than import) only the cleaned, smaller DWG.
Avoid exploding the geometry imported from DWG files. The exploding operation within a Revit-based application can change a DWG from a single-managed element to hundreds or thousands of additional elements depending on the number of entities in the imported DWG. This significantly affects the size and functionality of Revit Model.
Only link essential DWG files into necessary views.
DWG files shall be saved using the World Coordinates System (WCS) before they are linked into Revit in order to be correctly aligned.
Linked files should not contain External References.
Elements within the DWG cannot be more than 2 miles apart from each other.
In order to control the AutoCAD Lineweight from Revit, the Lineweight column within the Layer Properties Manager Dialog Box should be set to Default.
Importing and Linking Files
Unload links of all types if not used.
Temporarily unload worksets for links that are not needed in the view and reload them as required to limit memory resources necessary to open a project file.
Views
Use “Wireframe” or “Shading” display modes when working in linked file environment. “Wireframe” and “Shading” modes can be three times faster than “Hidden Line” or “Shading with Edges” modes.
Zoom in to speed up drawing and snapping.
Clear the “Snap to Remote Objects” setting in the snap dialog if you have a very dense view and snap lines appear to be shooting off in all directions.
Close unnecessary windows.
Turn off shadows in views where they are unnecessary.
Modeling
Until component types are determined, use the generic version of elements such as walls, doors, windows, slabs and roofs, which incorporate less geometry.
Break up large models into 150MB-200MB each.
Regularly review and fix warnings by going to the MODIFY Ribbon Tab and clicking on the Warnings option located under the INQUIRY Panel.
When saving before closing a file, keep only a simple Drafting View open to accelerate saving and subsequent opening of the file (such as “Starting View”).
It is recommended that 3D views should be closed when saving to Central, since the Revit-based applications will regenerate this complex view as part of the save process.
Save to Central several times a day.
D106
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 105
Reload Latest several times a day.
Relinquish your Workset(s) & borrowed elements at the end of the day.
Third-Party Applications TCCD recognizes that there are multiple third-party applications currently available on the market that are able to run simulations and/or analysis within the Revit-based applications. However, regardless of the software used to run simulations and/or analysis within the Revit-based applications, the results must be brought back into the Revit 3D Model. This will ensure that the Revit 3D Model has the latest and most current information.
Worksets When working with Worksets, users must follow these steps to ensure changes are saved to both the Local and the Central versions of the Revit 3D Model file, as well as relinquishing previously owned Worksets.
Synchronize with Central
Save to Local
Relinquish All Mine
Project Templates Project Templates provide initial conditions and predefined settings for a project, such as generic project information, unit settings, predefined views, and plotting settings.
Using the TCCD Templates All Revit projects should be created using one of the templates provided in the TCCD Revit Support Files, which are:
2016 TCCD Architectural Template.rte
2016 TCCD General Template.rte
2016 TCCD Electrical Template.rte
2016 TCCD Mechanical and Plumbing Template.rte
2016 TCCD Structural Template.rte
16.2 View Templates View Templates are a collection of View Properties, such as the Discipline, the Sub-Discipline, the View Scale, the Detail Level, and Overrides of Model and Annotation Objects that are common for a View Type, such, a Plan View, an Elevation View a 3D View, etc. Some View Templates are provided within the MEP Templates to address the issued described within the
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D10708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 106
Systems and Filters Sections. Below are additional view templates and their recommended naming convention.
NOTE: View Templates have been associated with their respective Project Browser Category, so when applying a View Template to a specific View this will automatically move to the right Category. To apply a View Template to a View, go to the VIEW Ribbon and under the GRAPHICS Panel click on the View Templates Pulldown Menu and select the Apply Template to Current View Tool.
Mechanical Equipment View Templates
EQ - 2D_B&W
EQ - 2D_RGB
EQ - 3D_B&W
EQ - 3D_RGB
EQ - Equipment Plan_B&W
EQ - Equipment Plan_RGB
HVAC View Templates
HVAC - 2D_B&W
HVAC - 2D_RGB
HVAC - 3D_B&W
HVAC - 3D_RGB
HVAC - Boiler BlowDown Plan_B&W
HVAC - Boiler BlowDown Plan_RGB
HVAC - Chilled Glycol Solution Plan_B&W
HVAC - Chilled Glycol Solution Plan_RGB
HVAC - Chilled Water Plan_B&W
HVAC - Chilled Water Plan_RGB
HVAC - Condenser Water Plan_B&W
HVAC - Condenser Water Plan_RGB
HVAC - Duct Plan_B&W
HVAC - Duct Plan_RGB
HVAC - Hot Glycol Solution Plan_B&W
HVAC - Hot Glycol Solution Plan_RGB
HVAC - Hot Water Plan_B&W
HVAC - Hot Water Plan_RGB
HVAC - Refrigerant Plan_B&W
HVAC - Refrigerant Plan_RGB
Fire Protection View Templates
FP - 2D_B&W
D108
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 107
FP - 2D_RGB
FP - 3D_B&W
FP - 3D_RGB
FP - Fire protection Plan_B&W
FP - Fire protection Plan _RGB
Plumbing View Templates
PB - 2D_B&W
PB - 2D_RGB
PB - 3D_B&W
PB - 3D_RGB
PB - Acid Plan_B&W
PB - Acid Plan_RGB
PB - Cold Water Plan_B&W
PB - Cold Water Plan_RGB
PB - Combined Plan_B&W
PB - Combined Plan_RGB
PB - Fire Service Plan_B&W
PB - Fire Service Plan_RGB
PB - Gas Plan_B&W
PB - Gas Plan_RGB
PB - Hot Water Plan_B&W
PB - Hot Water Plan_RGB
PB - Sanitary Plan_B&W
PB - Sanitary Plan_RGB
PB - Storm Plan_B&W
PB - Storm Plan_RGB
Power View Templates
PW - 2D_B&W
PW - 2D_RGB
PW - 3D_B&W
PW - 3D_RGB
PW - Emergency Lighting Plan_B&W
PW - Emergency Lighting Plan_RGB
PW - Grounding Plan_B&W
PW - Grounding Plan_RGB
PW - Lighting Plan_B&W
PW - Lighting Plan_RGB
PW - Lightning Plan_B&W
PW - Lightning Plan_RGB
PW - Power Plan_B&W
PW - Power Plan_RGB
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D10908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 108
Telecommunications View Templates
TC - 2D_B&W
TC - 2D_RGB
TC - 3D_B&W
TC - 3D_RGB
TC - Cable TV Plan_B&W
TC - Cable TV Plan_RGB
TC - Data Plan_B&W
TC - Data Plan_RGB
TC - Fire Alarm Plan_B&W
TC - Fire Alarm Plan_RGB
TC - IPDVS_B&W
TC - IPDVS_RGB
TC - Phone Plan_B&W
TC - Phone Plan_RGB
TC - Projection Plan_B&W
TC - Projection Plan_RGB
TC - Public Address & Clock Plan_B&W
TC - Public Address & Clock Plan_RGB
TC - Rescue Intercom Plan_B&W
TC - Rescue Intercom Plan_RGB
TC - Security Plan_B&W
TC - Security Plan_RGB
16.3 Levels and Plan Views The Revit-based applications create a relationship between the Level and the First Floor Plan and Ceiling Plan, so when the Level Name is changed, the associated name for the Floor Plan and the Ceiling Plan updates automatically. Users will be given the option to rename the corresponding Level Views (Floor Plan and Ceiling Plan) if the Level Name is changed. If so, the relationship between both will be broken. It is crucial to maintain this name relationship between the Level and the Floor Plans. Plan Views should be created by making a copy of any of the existing Floor Plans and/or Reflected Ceiling Plans Views Category by using the tools on the VIEW Ribbon. Under the CREATE Panel, expand the Duplicate View Pull Down Menu to select the Duplicate View Option as shown in the image to the right.
D110
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 109
By default, the new Floor Plan and/or Ceiling Plan will be placed under a Category named “???”. To associate the new View to the right Category, either change the Properties as previously discussed (Project Browser Organization section) of the View or apply a View Template.
Views Views, such as elevations, sections, callouts, 3D, etc. will be created within the Revit Models as the project evolves. By default, all these types of Views will be placed under a Category named “???”, as shown in the image to the right.
16.4 Copy/Monitor The Copy/Monitor tool helps to monitor and coordinate changes between teams from different disciplines, which reduce mistakes and expensive rework. The copy functionality copies grids, levels, columns, walls, and floors from a linked project into a host project. You can modify these copied elements, which are automatically related to the original elements. The monitoring functionality sets and maintains relationships for those elements in the host or linked project. To start the Copy/Monitor Tool, go to the
COLLABORATE Ribbon Tab and click on the
Copy/Monitor located under the Coordinate Panel and then select the Select Link option. The first step when using the Copy/Monitor Tool is to select Options as shown in the image to the right. This will open the COPY/MONITOR OPTIONS Dialog Box. Make “Categories and Types to copy” setting adjustments as necessary.
16.5 Creating Sheets Creating Contract Documents in “Revit” is accomplished through sheets, in which Views have been added. Sheets have been preconfigured to work in conjunction with the discipline templates file and with the shared parameters file. It is strongly recommended to use TCCD Templates to make sure that ALL of the shared parameters are defined appropriately.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D11108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 110
16.6 Project Information Project Information is data that remains the same on all sheets of a project, such as the Facility Code, Project Name, Design Manager, Project Number, Total Sheet Number, Project Address, Project Issue Date, Submission Status, etc. To make the required modifications, go to the MANAGE Ribbon Tab and click on the Project Information Tool located under the Project Settings Panel. The image on the right illustrates the Project Information Dialog Box. All shared parameters generated by TCCD are Capitalized.
NOTE: The Revit-based applications will update all sheet views based on the information provided here.
16.7 Loading the Cover Sheet and Title Sheets The TCCD Cover Sheets and Border Sheets typical sizes are 24x36, 30x42 and 36x48 with vertical title block orientation. Verify the sheet size with the project requirements for any deviation at project kick-off. Other sheet sizes and orientations are also available if required. The Cover Sheet and Title Sheets can be loaded using one of the following methods:
In the VIEW Ribbon Tab, select the New Sheet Tool located under the Sheet
Composition Panel.
In the Project Browser, right-click on top of SHEETS and then select New Sheet. Either of these methods will display the SELECT A TITLEBLOCK Dialog Box.
D112
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 111
Click on the “Load” button to import the title blocks provided with the TCCD Revit Standards and then click “OK.” If TCCD Drawings Templates are used, 24x36 Title Block will already be loaded into the project.
NOTE: Once the Cover Sheet and Title Sheets are loaded, they will get populated with the Project Information provided in project properties described above.
16.8 Drawing Information Drawing Information is data relating to an individual sheet of the Border Sheets in a project. All the available Cover Sheet Information fields are listed under the Identity Data and Title Text Parameter columns. To update the Drawing Information of a sheet, use either one of the following methods:
Enter the information directly on a sheet by clicking on the text placeholder within the sheet and update the text as desired.
Click in an empty space in a sheet view and this will open the Sheet INSTANCE PROPERTIES Dialog Box. Change the values as needed. It is strongly recommended to use TCCD Templates to make sure that ALL of the shared parameters are defined appropriately.
16.9 Purge Unused The Purge Unused command unloads any unused Families and Family Types along with Groups and Styles, reducing the file size of the Revit Model file. To purge the Revit Model, go to the MANAGE Ribbon Tab and click on the Purge Unused Tool located under the PROJECT SETTINGS Panel. This will open the PURGE UNUSED Dialog Box as shown in the image on the right. Expand the desired category and click on the “OK” button.
NOTE: The Model Manager and Model Leader are responsible for purging their discipline’s Revit Model before each submittal milestone.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D11308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 112
16.10 Interference Check The Interference Check Tool should be used during the design process to coordinate major building elements and systems allowing the identification of interferences earlier in the design process. This tool can be used to find single-discipline or cross-discipline interferences, enabling effective identification, inspection and/or reporting of any interference.
Single-Discipline Interference Check The Single-Discipline Interference Check will be performed by all Model Leaders using the Interference Check tool within Revit. To start the Interference Check Tool, go to the COLLABORATE Ribbon Tab and click on the Interference Check located under the COORDINATE Panel and then select the Run
Interference Check option. This will open the INTERFERENCE CHECK Dialog Box. For Single-Discipline Interference Check, the “Categories From” option in the upper portion of both panes should be set to “Current Project.”
D114
Tarrant County College District BIM Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 113
16.11 Cross-Discipline Interference Check The Model Manager is responsible for setting up Inter-Disciplinary Interference Check Sessions as often as the project requires. The Cross-Discipline Interference Check will be performed by the Model Manager using Autodesk NavisWorks. Each Model Leader is responsible for creating a NavisWorks file out of their Revit Models. To create a NavisWorks file out of the Revit Model; go to the ADD-INS Ribbon Tab and click on the External Tools located under the EXTERNAL Panel as shown in the image to the right, and then select the NavisWorks 2016.
NOTE: When exporting the Revit Model using the External Tools, only the current discipline model gets exported. Therefore, all links attached are discarded. Consultants will use their in-house standards to perform project coordination and clash detection. Only coordinated models will be submitted to TCCD at each design phase. Coordination report will be attached with the models.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D11508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled i
Appendix A
Contract Document Design Intent Models Notes for each required building element that is to be modeled. A.Architectural General Notes 1.Modeled Building Elements that are developed from the use of a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall include all intrinsic default data, parameters and information provided by such Models that are necessary for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. a.All intrinsic default data, parameters and information contained within a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall be checked and revised, as necessary, to comply with all requirements, guides, standards, etc. that are identified within the Contract. 2.Modeled Building Elements that are not developed from the use of a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall include all data, parameters and information that is necessary for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 3.All “types” of required Building Elements shall be modeled. For example, there are numerous “types” and “shapes” of windows and doors. Therefore, each “type” and “shape” shall be modeled with the necessary intelligence for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 4.All component elements of an associated Building Element/System that are not individually modeled shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System. 5.The Architect shall coordinate the locations of all Architectural Building Elements that require electrical, data, plumbing or other mechanical systems with the responsible Engineer. 6.Column grids shall be modeled by the Architect. 7.The Architect shall set all building elevations; roof elevations and pitch, top of parapet elevations, slab elevations, foundation wall brick shelf elevations, and slab depressions. In addition, the Architect shall locate, dimension and set all slab edges and slab openings. a.Although all slab openings shall be modeled, slab openings for multiple pipes and/or conduits that have a single outside dimension less than 12-inches are not required to be modeled. 8.The Architect and/or Civil Engineer shall locate all Building Elements that are to be modeled by a Structural Engineer and set all required elevations for the proper design of such models. 9.During the Design Development Phase, the locations and size of all shafts and chases for the coordination and installation of ductwork, pipes and conduits shall be coordinated with other disciplines and modeled at “Level of Development” – LOD200.
D116
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled ii
10.Schedules shall include all Schedules and Tables that are required, either by TCCD Standards and/or Industry Standards within a set of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 11.Provide door, window, hardware, flooring, wall finishes, ceiling, and signage schedules, which are extracted from the model, that indicate the type, materials and finishes used for such building elements. 12.Clearance Zones for access areas, door swings, service space requirements, gauge reading, and other operational clearances shall be modeled as part of all equipment and checked for conflicts with other elements. These clearance zones shall be modeled as transparent or invisible solids within the object. 13.Although all expansion joints and control joints shall be in the model, they need not be modeled. All expansion and control joints can be indicated as 2D line elements on plan/ elevation/ section views. 14.All spaces shall be modeled and all Floor Plans shall include interior partitions/walls and exterior walls. The Model shall include spaces defining accurate net square footage and net volume, and holding data for the room finish schedule; including room names and numbers. Include Programmatic Information provided by TCCD to verify design space against programmed space, using this information to validate area quantities. 15.Spaces required for equipment, utilities and services such as, but not limited to the following, shall be coordinated with other disciplines and modeled accordingly:
Central Acid Neutralization Tank Room
Mechanical (HVAC) Equipment Rooms
Telecommunication (MDF) Room
Fire Pump Room
Sewerage Ejector Room
Telecommunication (IDF) Closets
Fuel Tank Room
Elevator Machine Room
Electrical Closets
Gas Meter Room (or) Gas Rig Location
Water Meter Room
Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) Room
Local RPZ Room
Electric Service Room
Transformer Vault/Property Line Box
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D11708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled iii
SITEWORK
00000 - Site PlansThe Site Plan Model, which shall be a Composite Model of all Architectural/Civil, Structural, and MEP Models that are necessary for the coordination of all sitework shall include, but shall not be limited to, all paving, grades, landscaping, contours, swales, sidewalks, streets, roadbeds, sidewalk vaults, curbs, retaining walls, pavements, stairs, steps, ramps, playground furnishing, equipment and structures, sidewalk furnishings, fences and gates, manholes, hydrants, underground structures, site lighting, piping, drains, steam lines, conduits for required utilities and services and other new and/or existing physical improvements to the property as well as other adjacent structures within 50-feet of the property shall be modeled.
02200- Earthwork Earthwork, which is required by this specification section, is not required to be modeled.
02200a - Earthwork (Flow-Through Turf AF) Earthwork, which is required by this specification section, is not required to be modeled.
02200b - Earthwork (Float Drain Turf or Natural Grass AF) Earthwork, which is required by this specification section, is not required to be modeled.
02215 - Controlled Low Strength Material Controlled low strength material work, which is required by this specification section, is not required to be modeled.
02511 - Asphaltic Concrete PavingAll asphaltic concrete paving and sub-surface component elements shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System.
02512 - Porous Asphalt Paving and Aggregate BaseAll porous asphalt paving and sub-surface component elements shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System.
02513 - Sidewalk and Street PavingAll sidewalks, and street paving and sub-surface component elements shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System.
02515 - Unit PaversAll unit pavers and sub-surface component elements shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System.
02516 - Exposed Porous Asphalt Paving and Aggregate BaseAll exposed porous asphalt paving and sub-surface component elements shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System.
02531 - Resilient Surfacing All resilient surfaces shall be a component element that is indicated as an object property within a dataset of the associated Building Element/System, (i.e.: asphaltic concrete paving).
02532 - Resilient Surfacing - Porous Base All resilient surfaces shall be a component element that is indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System, (i.e.: porous asphalt paving).
02533 - Colored Athletic Wearing Surface All colored athletic wearing surfaces shall be a component element that is indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System, (i.e.: asphaltic concrete paving).
02541 - Synthetic Turf - TPE InfillAll synthetic turf – TPE infill and sub-surface component elements shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System.
02580 - Track/Court/Playground MarkingsAlthough all track, court and playground markings shall be in the model, they need not be modeled.
02711 - Wall Subdrainage Systems- Regardless of size, all perforated piping, non-perforated piping, and fittings shall be modeled.- All prefabricated drainage panels shall be a component element that is indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/ System, (i.e.: foundation walls).
D118
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled iv
SITEWORK
02721 - Trench DrainsAll trench drains, catch basin units and grates shall be modeled.
02722 - Precast Concrete Basins and ManholesAll precast concrete catch basin, detention basin, manholes, frames and covers shall be modeled.
02723 - Storm Drainage SystemsAll storm drainage piping and fittings, regardless of size, shall be modeled.
02724 - Underdrain System for Porous Asphalt PavingAll perforated under drain piping and non-perforated collector piping and fittings, regardless of size, shall be modeled.
02725 - Underdrain System for Skinned AreasAll piping and fittings, regardless of size, shall be modeled.
02831 - Chain Link Fences and GatesAll chain link fences posts, rails, pipes, shall be modeled. (All fence fabric shall modeled as a generic assembly.)
02860 - Early Childhood Playground Equipment- All early childhood playground equipment shall be modeled. - Safety surfacing shall be a component element that is indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System, (i.e.: asphaltic concrete paving).
02862 - Outdoor Game EquipmentAll outdoor game equipment shall be modeled.
02870 - Site and Street FurnishingsAll benches and bicycle racks shall be modeled.
02900 - Landscaping- All trees with a 3.5-inch caliper or greater and tree pits shall be modeled. - All shrubs, ground cover, sod, grass, etc., shall be modeled.
10350 - Flagpole (Site)All flagpoles shall be modeled.
16420 - Transformer Vaults
All Transformer vaults shall be modeled.
BUILDING ENVELOPE/FOUNDATION & SUPERSTRUCTURE
00000 - Canopies, Overhangs and Exterior Sun Control ElementsAll canopies, overhangs and exterior sun control building elements shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System.
04200 - Exterior Unit Masonry Walls and Parapets- All exterior masonry wall types shall be modeled shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All characteristics such as to thermal, acoustical and fire ratings; and component elements such as typical masonry units, interior gypsum board assemblies, rigid insulation, and cavities shall be indicated as an object property within a data set for each wall type.
04270 - Glass Unit MasonryAll glass unit masonry that is not a component element, which is indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System, shall be modeled to the same Level of Development of a similar Building Element/System.
04420 - Exterior Cut StoneAll exterior cut stone that is not a component element, which is indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System, shall be modeled to the same Level of Development of a similar Building Element/System.
04435 - Cast StoneAll cast stone that is not a component element, which is indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System, shall be modeled to the same Level of Development of a similar Building Element/System.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D11908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled v
BUILDING ENVELOPE/FOUNDATION & SUPERSTRUCTURE
04700 - Simulated MasonryAll simulated masonry that is not a component element, which is indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System, shall be modeled to the same Level of Development of a similar Building Element/System.
07115 - Sheet Membrane Waterproofing for Foundations All sheet membrane waterproofing for foundations shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System.
07120 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing for Plaza Decks All fluid-applied waterproofing for plaza decks shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System.
07147 - Crystalline Waterproofing All crystalline waterproofing shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System.
07150 - Chemical Resin Injection Grouting Chemical resin injection grouting, which is required by this specification section, is not required to be modeled.
07160 - Bituminous Damproofing All bituminous dampproofing shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System.
07211 - Perimeter Foundation InsulationAll perimeter foundation insulation that is not a component element, which is indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System, shall be modeled to the same Level of Development of a similar Building Element/System.
07212 - Miscellaneous Building InsulationAll miscellaneous building insulation that is not a component element, which is indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System, shall be modeled to the same Level of Development of a similar Building Element/System.
07272 - Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier, Vapor RetardingAll fluid-applied membrane air barriers and vapor retarding shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System.
07314 - Slate ShinglesAll slate shingles that are not a component element, which is indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System, shall be modeled to the same Level of Development of a similar Building Element/System.
07321 - Clay Tile RoofingAll clay tile roofing that is not a component element, which is indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System, shall be modeled to the same Level of Development of a similar Building Element/System.
07553 - Hybrid Built-Up/SBS Modified Bituminous Roofing- All hybrid built-up/SBS modified bituminous roofing systems shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All component elements that are not modeled shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System.
07560 - Fluid-Applied Protected Membrane Roofing- All fluid-applied protected membrane roofing systems shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All component elements that are not modeled shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System.
07561 - Fluid-Applied Protected Membrane Roofing- All fluid-applied protected membrane roofing (planted type I) systems shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All component elements that are not modeled shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System.
D120
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled vi
BUILDING ENVELOPE/FOUNDATION & SUPERSTRUCTURE
07600 - Flashing and Sheet MetalAlthough all flashing and sheet metal shall be in the model, they need not be modeled.
07610 - Sheet Metal RoofingAll sheet metal roofs shall be modeled.
07720 - Roof AccessoriesAll roof accessories such as hatches and vents shall be modeled.
08110 - Steel Doors and FramesAll steel doors and door frames shall be modeled.
08220 - Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester DoorsAll fiberglass reinforced polyester doors and steel door frames shall be modeled.
08330 - Coiling Doors, Grilles and ShuttersAll coiling doors, grilles and shutters shall be modeled.
08510 - Steel Windows - Projected, Casement, Pivoted, HungAll steel windows shall be modeled.
08522 - Aluminum Double-Hung WindowsAll aluminum double-hung windows shall be modeled.
08524 - Aluminum Projected WindowsAll aluminum projected windows shall be modeled.
08621 – Fiberglass Sandwich Panel SkylightsAll fiberglass sandwich panel skylights shall be modeled.
08662 - Security Screens and BarriersAll security screens and security barriers shall be modeled.
08730 - Thresholds, Weatherstripping and SealsAll thresholds shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System.
08920 - Aluminum Curtain Walls- All aluminum curtain wall type models shall include glazing and profiles of vertical and horizontal extrusions. - All characteristics such as, but not limited to thermal, acoustical and fire ratings shall be indicated as an object property within a data set for each curtain wall type.
INTERIOR WALLS, PARTITIONS, FINISHES AND OTHER ASSEMBLIES
00000 - Sun Control Building Elements All sun control building elements shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System.
04200 - Unit Masonry Partitions and Walls- All interior masonry wall types shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All characteristics such as to thermal, acoustical and fire ratings; and component elements such as typical masonry units, interior gypsum board assemblies, rigid insulation, and cavities shall be indicated as an object property within a data set for each wall type. - All bond beams shall be modeled.
05170 - Support System for Suspended CeilingsSupport systems for suspended ceiling work, which is required by this specification section, is not required to be modeled.
07110 - Sheet Membrane Waterproofing All sheet membrane waterproofing shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System.
07212 - Miscellaneous Building InsulationAll miscellaneous building insulation that is not a component element, which is indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System, shall be modeled to the same Level of Detail of a similar Building Element/System.
08110 - Steel Doors and FramesAll steel doors and door frames shall be modeled.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D12108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled vii
INTERIOR WALLS, PARTITIONS, FINISHES AND OTHER ASSEMBLIES
08210 - Wood DoorsAll wood doors and steel door frames shall be modeled.
08305 - Access DoorsAll access doors shall be modeled.
08330 - Coiling Doors, Grilles and ShuttersAll coiling doors, grilles and shutters shall be modeled.
08800 - Miscellaneous Glazing All miscellaneous glazing types shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System.
09205 - Furring and Lathing All furring and lathing shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System.
09210 - Plaster All plaster shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System.
09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies (interior metal stud partitions)- All gypsum board assemblies (interior metal stud partitions) shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All characteristics such as, but not limited to thermal, acoustical and fire ratings; and component elements such as metal studs, insulation, gypsum board, and finish materials (i.e.: paint, tile, soapstone, wall bases, integral cove bases, etc.) shall be indicated as object properties within the data set of each gypsum board assembly type.
09310 - Ceramic TileAll ceramic tiles shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System.
09410 - Terrazzo Floors- All terrazzo floors shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All component elements such as flooring material, underbed material and isolation membranes shall be indicated as an object property within each model. (Although all divider strips and control joints shall be in the model, they need not be modeled.)
09510 - Acoustical Ceilings and SoffitsAll acoustical ceilings, soffits, fascias and window pockets shall be modeled.
09590 - Wood Flooring- All wood floors shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All component elements such as flooring material, vapor barrier, resilient underlayment, and subfloor panels shall be indicated as an object property within each model.
09626 - Resilient Athletic Flooring- All resilient athletic floors shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All component elements such as flooring material and base mats shall be indicated as an object property within each model.
09650 - Resilient Flooring- All vinyl composition tile flooring, solid vinyl sheet flooring, and slip retardant vinyl sheet flooring shall each be modeled as a single Building Element/ System. - All component elements such as flooring material and underlayment materials shall be indicated as an object property within each model.
09670 – Vinyl Sheet Athletic Flooring- All vinyl sheet athletic floors shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All component elements such as flooring material and base mats shall be indicated as an object property within each model.
09675 – Fluid-Applied Equipment Room FlooringAll fluid-applied equipment room flooring shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System.
D122
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled viii
INTERIOR WALLS, PARTITIONS, FINISHES AND OTHER ASSEMBLIES
09680 - Carpet- All carpet models shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All component elements such as flooring material and underlayment materials shall be indicated as an object property within each model.
09685 – Tile Carpet- All carpet models shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All component elements such as flooring material and underlayment materials shall be indicated as an object property within each model.
09705 - Resinous Flooring
All resinous floors shall be modeled.
SPECIALTIES/EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS & SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
06410 - Custom CaseworkAll custom casework shall be modeled.
10100 - Visual Display Boards- All chalkboard, markerboard and tackboards shall be modeled. - All horizontal sliding marker boards shall be modeled.
10151 - Toilet Compartments- All floor-mounted solid phenolic toilet compartments and privacy screens shall be modeled. - All overhead bracing and pilasters shall be modeled.
10160 - Factory Painted Steel Toilet partitions- All floor-mounted factory-painted steel toilet partitions shall be modeled. - All overhead bracing and pilasters shall be modeled.
10185 - Plastic Shower and Dressing Compartments- All floor-mounted plastic shower and shower compartment shall be modeled. - All overhead bracing and pilasters shall be modeled.
10214 - Stationary Metal Wall LouversAll stationary metal louvers shall be modeled.
10270 - Access Flooring- All access floor system shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All component elements such as flooring material and modular panels shall be indicated as an object property within each model.
10350 - Flagpole (Building)All flagpoles shall be modeled.
10400 - Identifying Devices- All identifying devices such as tablets, plaques, seals, and signage shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. - All characteristics such as, but not limited to, sign type, materials, finishes, color, and dimensions shall be indicated as object properties within the data set of each identifying devise.
10415 - Bulletin and Display Boards, Display Cases and CabinetsAll bulletin board, display board, display cabinet and display cases shall be modeled.
10505 - Metal Lockers- All metal lockers, bases and sloping tops (where applicable), shall be modeled. - All locker room bench models shall include bench planks and pedestals.
10522 - Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets- All fire extinguishers, fire blankets, and cabinets shall be modeled. - All characteristics such as fire extinguisher type (i.e.: water, dry chemical, etc.), cabinet type (i.e.: fire rated, etc.), and blanket shall be indicated as object properties within the data set of each model.
10605 - Wire Mesh WorkAll wire mesh work shall be modeled as a generic assembly.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D12308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled ix
SPECIALTIES/EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS & SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
10652 - Electrically Operated Folding Panel PartitionsAll electrically operated folding panel partitions shall be modeled as a generic assembly.
10653 - Manually Operated Folding Panel PartitionsAll manually operated folding panel partitions shall be modeled as a generic assembly.
10655 - Accordion Folding PartitionsAll accordion folding partitions shall be modeled as a generic assembly.
10675 - Metal Storage ShelvingAll metal storage shelving shall be modeled as a generic assembly.
10720 - Window Guards (Interior and Exterior)All interior and exterior wire or expanded metal window guards shall be modeled as a generic assembly.
10810 - Toilet and Bath AccessoriesAll toilet and bath accessories shall be modeled as a generic assembly.
10830 - MirrorsAll mirrors shall be modeled as a generic assembly.
10840 - Grab BarsAll grab bars shall be modeled as a generic assembly.
11050 - Library EquipmentAll fixed equipment and auxiliary devices that require electrical power shall be modeled.
11061 - Auditorium Curtains and Projection Screens- All proscenium curtains, platform curtains (cycloramas, border and act curtains), valances, auditorium window curtains, and projection screens shall be modeled. - All characteristics such as flame resistance ratings and required certifications shall be indicated as object properties within the data set of each fire safety proscenium curtain model.
11172 - Waste Handling EquipmentAll vertical trash compactor units and self-contained horizontal compactor units shall be modeled.
11400 - Food Service EquipmentAll food service equipment shall be modeled.
11450 - Domestic Type EquipmentAll domestic type equipment and appliances shall be modeled.
11452 - Culinary Arts Lab EquipmentAll culinary arts lab equipment shall be modeled.
11460 - Unit KitchensAll unit kitchens and components (cabinets, microwaves and range hoods) shall be modeled.
11480 - Gymnasium Equipment- All fixed gymnasium equipment shall be modeled. - All component elements for the installation of temporary gymnasium equipment such as floor sleeves shall be modeled.
11500 - Shop EquipmentAll Shop Equipment shall be modeled.
11600 - Laboratory EquipmentAll tables, cabinets, tops, shelving, fixtures and equipment in science laboratories, science demonstration rooms and science preparation rooms shall be modeled.
12302 - Manufactured Wood CaseworkAll manufactured casework shall be modeled
12345 - SoapstoneAll soapstone that is not a component element, which is indicated as an object property within a data set of an associated Building Element/System, shall be modeled to the same Level of Detail of a similar Building Element/System.
D124
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled x
SPECIALTIES/EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS & SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
12485 - Foot GrillesAll foot grilles shall be modeled.
12501 - Chain and Clutch Operated Window ShadesAll chain and clutch operated window shades shall be modeled as a generic assembly.
12545 - DraperiesAll drapery models shall be modeled as a generic assembly.
12710 - Fixed Audience SeatingAll fixed audience seating (opera chairs) and aisle standards shall be modeled.
12761 - Wood BleachersAll telescoping and fixed bleachers shall be modeled.
13031 - Walk-in Trash RefrigeratorsAll prefabricated walk-in refrigerator units and refrigeration units shall be modeled.
13120 - Steel Bleachers- All steel bleachers shall be modeled. - All press boxes shall be modeled.
CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14120 - Electric DumbwaitersAll electric dumbwaiters shall be modeled.
14210 – MRL Traction Passenger ElevatorsAll MRL traction elevators shall be modeled.
14211 - Geared Traction Passenger ElevatorsAll geared traction elevators shall be modeled.
14240 - Direct-Acting Hydraulic Passenger ElevatorsAll direct-acting hydraulic passenger elevators shall be modeled.
14241 – Holeless Direct-Acting Hydraulic Passenger ElevatorsAll holeless direct-acting hydraulic passenger elevators shall be modeled.
14250 - Dual-Jack Roped Hydraulic Passenger ElevatorsAll dual-jack roped hydraulic passenger elevators shall be modeled.
14315 - Hydraulic Sidewalk ElevatorsAll hydraulic sidewalk elevators shall be modeled.
14316 - Geared Traction Sidewalk ElevatorsAll geared traction sidewalk elevators shall be modeled.
14420 - Hydraulic Vertical Wheelchair LiftsAll hydraulic vertical wheelchair lifts shall be modeled.
14421 – Indoor Inclined Wheelchair LiftsAll indoor inclined wheelchair lifts shall be modeled.
14510 - EscalatorsAll escalators shall be modeled.
OTHER
02221 - Sub-Slab Depressurization SystemSub-Slab Depressurization System Work that is required by this specification section is not required to be modeled.
03300 - RampsAll ramps shall be modeled.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D12508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xi
B.Structural General Notes 1.Modeled Building Elements that are developed from the use of a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall include all intrinsic default data, parameters and information provided by such models that are necessary for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. a.All intrinsic default data, parameters and information contained within a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall be checked and revised, as necessary, to comply with all requirements, guides, standards, etc. that are identified within the contract. 2.Modeled Building Elements that are not developed from the use of a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall include all data, parameters and information that is necessary for the proper coordination of the Design Intent
OTHER
05500 - Metal FabricationsFabricated and miscellaneous metal models shall include: Steel pipe railings and handrails Valve operation platforms Steel ladders Fuel oil tank chamber platforms and ladders Rooftop equipment service access platforms and ladders Ladder safety cages
05580 - Sheet Metal FabricationsSheet metal fabrication models shall include chase bucks, metal closure pieces at window mullions where partitions butt against mullions, expansion joints, and metal window stools.
05700 - Ornamental MetalOrnamental metal models shall include: Trap Pit Doors Subway Type Grating Aluminum Railings Iron Fences and Railings Bicycle Racks
05710 - Steel StairsAll steel stairs, landings, platforms and handrails shall be modeled.
05810 - Prefabricated Expansion Joint Covers Although all interior and exterior prefabricated expansion joint covers for roofs, ceilings, walls, floors, soffits, and fascias shall be in the model, they need not be modeled.
07270 - Firestopping/Smoke Seals Firestopping and smoke seal work, which is required by this specification section, is not required to be modeled.
07900 - Joint Sealers Joint sealant work, which is required by this specification section, is not required to be modeled.
08710 - Finish Hardware All finish hardware shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of the associated Building Element/System, (i.e.: doors, etc.)
D126
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xii
BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 3.Schedules shall include all Schedules and Tables that are required, either by TCCD Standards and/or Industry Standards within a set of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 4.All “types” of required Building Elements shall be modeled. For example, there are numerous “types” of structural steel and “shapes”. Therefore, each type (“beams, columns, piles, etc.”) and shape (“wide flange, tube, etc.”) shall be modeled with the necessary intelligence for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 5.Unless otherwise indicated reinforcement such as, but not limited to, rebar, inserts, dowels and anchors are not required to be modeled. 6.Unless otherwise indicated pour stops and slab/deck edge angles are not required to be modeled. 7.Unless otherwise indicated stiffeners and stabilizers are not required to be modeled. 8.Unless otherwise indicated miscellaneous isolated kickers and top of wall/partition braces are not required to be modeled. 9.Unless otherwise indicated bar joist bridging is not required to be modeled. 10.Unless otherwise indicated structural steel bolts and welds are not required to be modeled. 11.Unless otherwise indicated structural support angles less than 3-feet in length are not required to be modeled.
FOUNDATION SYSTEMS
02360 - PilesAll piles shall be modeled to a depth of 5-feet below the bottom of the pile cap for information purposes only.
03300 - CaissonsAll caissons shall be modeled to a depth of 5-feet below the bottom of the pile cap for information purposes only.
03300 - FootingsAll footings such as mat and spread footings shall be modeled.
03300 - Grade BeamsAll grade beams shall be modeled.
03300 - Piers All piers shall be modeled.
03300 - Pile/Caisson Caps All pile and caisson caps shall be modeled.
03300 - Slabs All framed slabs and slabs on grade shall be modeled.
03300 - Strap Beams and Tie BeamsAll strap beams and tie beams shall be modeled.
03300 - Pits and Property Line BoxesAll property line boxes, pits, and sub-slab pits for sub-slab depressurization systems shall be modeled.
03300 - Underground Tanks All underground tanks shall be modeled.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D12708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xiii
FOUNDATION SYSTEMS
03300 - Walls - All foundation walls shall be modeled. - All foundation wall corbels shall be modeled. - All foundation wall penetrations that have a single outside dimension of 12-inches or greater shall be modeled.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
05120 - Beams All beams shall be modeled.
05120 - Built-up GirdersAll built-up girders shall be modeled.
05120 - Columns - All columns shall be modeled with the correct orientation. - Columns shall be modeled to both actual top and bottom elevations.
05120 - Gusset Plates Gusset plates are not required to be modeled.
05120 - Lateral BracingAll lateral braces shall be modeled.
05120 - Trusses All trusses shall be modeled.
05230 - Steel Joists Girders All steel joist girders shall be modeled.
05300 - Superstructure Slabs (metal deck)All superstructure slabs shall be modeled.
MISCELLANEOUS
03300 - Concrete ParapetsAll concrete parapets shall be modeled.
03300 - Concrete Curbs - All concrete curbs that support major mechanical equipment such as Chillers and RTU Units shall be modeled. - All concrete curbs on roofs that support equipment such as, but not limited to, play equipment and outdoor game equipment shall be modeled.
03300 - Concrete StairsAll concrete stairs shall be modeled.
05120 - Dunnage All steel dunnage that supports and/or provides access to major mechanical equipment such as Chillers and RTU Units shall be modeled.
07250 - Sprayed Fire-Resistive MaterialsAll sprayed fire-resistive materials shall be modeled.
07260 - Intumescent Fireproofing All intumescent fireproofing shall be modeled.
08920 - Aluminum Curtain WallsAll structural steel support framing for curtain wall installations shall be modeled.
SITEWORK
03300 - Footings All concrete footings for site related installations such as, but not limited to, bleachers, flagpoles, chain link fences and gates, early childhood playground equipment, outdoor game equipment, handball walls, site furnishings and street furnishings shall be modeled.
03300 - Retaining Walls All retaining walls shall be modeled.
D128
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xiv
C.HVAC General Notes 1.Modeled Building Elements that are developed from the use of a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall include all intrinsic default data, parameters and information provided by such models that are necessary for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. a.All intrinsic default data, parameters and information contained within a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall be checked and revised, as necessary, to comply with all requirements, guides, standards, etc. that are identified within the contract. 2.Modeled Building Elements that are not developed from the use of a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall include all data, parameters and information that is necessary for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 3.The HVAC Engineer shall coordinate the locations of all modeled building elements that require power or low voltage with the Electrical Engineer. The HVAC Engineer shall coordinate the locations of all smoke detectors for ductwork and dampers with the Electrical Engineer. 4.Schedules shall include all Schedules and Tables that are required, either by TCCD Standards and/or Industry Standards within a set of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 5.Existing underground utility lines that are within or adjacent to the property shall be modeled to the same Level of Detail of a similar Building Element/System. 6.All “types” of required Building Elements shall be modeled. For example, there are numerous types of “pumps”. Therefore, each type of “pump” shall be modeled with the necessary intelligence for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 7.Although connections to all equipment shall be made, hook-up detailing for all equipment is not required to be modeled. 8.Hangers and supports are not required to be modeled. 9.Building Elements shall not be modeled as 3-D Solids.
SITEWORK
03300 - Handball Walls All handball walls shall be modeled.
03300 - Stairs and Ramps All concrete stairs and ramps shall be modeled.
00000 - OtherIn addition to the models referenced herein, any Building Element that requires its design to be performed by a Structural Engineer shall be modeled.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D12908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xv
10.Clearance Zones for access areas, door swings, service space requirements, gauge reading, and other operational clearances shall be modeled as part of all equipment and checked for conflicts with other elements during the Contract Documents Phase. These clearance zones shall be modeled as transparent or invisible solids within the object.
DUCTWORK
15514 - Duct Insulation All ductwork insulation shall be modeled.
15575 - Boiler Flue (Chimney)All flues shall be modeled.
15891 - Duct Silencers All duct silencers shall be modeled.
15891 - Ductwork (Supply, Return and Exhaust) All supply, return, and exhaust ducts shall be modeled.
15910 – Duct Access Doors and Accessories- All access doors for dampers, specialty service valves and cleanouts shall be modeled. - All ductwork accessories such as turning vanes, and duct liners shall be modeled.
15915 - Dampers, Actuators and Ductwork ComponentsAll dampers such as Combination Fire Smoke dampers, combustion air intake dampers, fire dampers, multi-blade dampers, smoke dampers, volume dampers, and damper actuators shall be modeled.
15940 – Duct Air Outlet/Inlets - All ductwork air outlets and inlets such as diffusers, registers, and grilles shall be modeled. - All ductwork connections to architectural louvers shall be modeled.
EQUIPMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS
15513 - Equipment InsulationAll equipment insulation shall be modeled.
15515 - Air Separators All air separators shall be modeled.
15515 - Expansion TanksAll expansion tanks shall be modeled.
15517 - Chemical Feed Units All chemical feed units shall be modeled.
15540 - Chilled Water Pumps All chilled water pumps shall be modeled.
15540 - Condensate Pumps All condensate pumps shall be modeled.
15540 - Hot Water Pumps All hot water pumps shall be modeled.
15565 - Hot Water Boilers All boiler accessories such as dampers, control panels, gas leak detection panels and sensors, and break glass stations shall be modeled.
15590 - Fuel Oil Duplex Pumps All fuel oil duplex pumps shall be modeled.
15590 - Fuel Oil Storage Tanks All fuel oil storage tanks shall be modeled.
15590 - Emergency Generator Systems (Fill Boxes)All fill boxes shall be modeled.
D130
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xvi
EQUIPMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS
15590 - Fuel Storage Equipment (Fill Boxes)All fill boxes shall be modeled.
15660 - Roof-top Package ChillersAll roof-top package chillers shall be modeled.
15670 - Heat ExchangersAll heat exchangers shall be modeled.
15783 - Split AC/HP Indoor and Outdoor UnitsAll split AC/HP indoor and outdoor units shall be modeled.
15835 - Convectors All convectors shall be modeled.
15835 - Fin Tube Radiation with EnclosureAll fin tube radiation and enclosures shall be modeled.
15836 - Cabinet HeatersAll cabinet heaters shall be modeled.
15836 - Unit Heaters All unit heaters shall be modeled.
15838 - Fan Coil UnitsAll fan coil units, outside air intake boxes and ductwork connections shall be modeled.
15852 - Air handling Units Located within Interior of the BuildingAll air handling units located within the interior of the building and ductwork connections shall be modeled.
15853 - Packaged Rooftop Heating and Cooling UnitsAll rooftop heating and cooling units and ductwork connections shall be modeled.
15860 - Centrifugal FansAll centrifugal fans shall be modeled.
15880 - Sub-Slab Depressurization System All fans that are required by this specification section are not required to be modeled.
15930 - VAV BoxesAll VAV boxes and control boxes shall be modeled.
15931 - Fan Powered Variable Air Volume (VAV) Terminal UnitsAll fan powered variable air volume (VA) terminal units and control boxes shall be modeled.
15932 - Chilled Beam Units All chilled beam units shall be modeled.
15933 - RTU’s All RTU units shall be modeled.
15970 - Temperature Controls All temperature control components such as sensors, thermostats, routers, and panels that are necessary for coordination, installation and operation shall be modeled.
PIPING
15510 - Chilled Water Chilled water piping and fittings shall be modeled.
15510 - Condensate Drain Condensate drain piping and fittings shall be modeled.
15510 - Fuel Oil Fill, Vent, Supply and Return Fuel oil fill and vent, supply and return piping and fittings shall be modeled.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D13108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xvii
D.Electrical General Notes 1.Modeled Building Elements that are developed from the use of a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall include all intrinsic default data, parameters and information provided by such models that are necessary for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. a.All intrinsic default data, parameters and information contained within a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall be checked and revised, as necessary, to comply with all requirements, guides, standards, etc. that are identified within the contract. 2.Modeled Building Elements that are not developed from the use of a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall include all data, parameters and information that is necessary for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 3.Schedules shall include all Schedules and Tables that are required, either by TCCD Standards and/or Industry Standards within a set of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 4.All “types” of required Building Elements shall be modeled. For example, there are numerous types of “lighting fixtures”. Therefore, each type of “lighting fixture” shall be modeled with the necessary intelligence for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 5.Unless otherwise indicated, all electrical and low voltage Building Elements that are necessary for the operation of any equipment and/or system shall be modeled. 6.Wiring shall be excluded from all models. 7.Hangers and supports are not required to be modeled. 8.Building Elements shall not be modeled as 3-D Solids. 9.All feeders, conduits and pipes that have an outside diameter that is less than 2-inches are not required to be modeled.
PIPING
15510 - Hot WaterHot water piping and fittings shall be modeled.
15510 - RefrigerantRefrigerant piping and fittings shall be modeled.
15511 - Isolation and Balancing ValvesAll balancing valves and isolation valves 4-inches in outside diameter or greater, connecting piping and fittings shall be modeled.
15512 - Piping Insulation Piping insulation shall be modeled when a modeled pipe requires insulation.
15970 - Control ValvesAll balancing valves and isolation valves 4-inches in outside diameter or greater, connecting piping and fittings shall be modeled.
D132
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xviii
10.Clearance Zones for access areas, door swings, service space requirements, gauge reading, and other operational clearances shall be modeled as part of all equipment and checked for conflicts with other elements during the Contract Document Design Phase. These clearance zones shall be modeled as transparent or invisible solids within the object.
LIGHTING
16140 - Wiring Devices/Lighting Switching All light switch boxes and wall plates shall be modeled. During the Design Development Phase, whenever light switching is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require lighting switching Models.
16145 - Lighting Control Devices All control panels and sensors shall be modeled. During the Design Development Phase, whenever lighting control devices are required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require lighting control device Models.
16470 - Panelboards/Emergency Lighting Panel All emergency lighting panels shall be modeled. During the Design Development Phase, whenever emergency lighting panels are required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require emergency lighting panel Models.
16500 - Interior Building LightingAll interior building lighting models shall include all lighting fixture types, frames, and trim rings shall be modeled. During the Design Development Phase, whenever lighting is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require lighting Models.
16520 - Emergency Exit LightingAll emergency exit lighting and lighting fixtures shall be modeled. During the Design Development Phase, whenever exit lighting is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require exit lighting Models.
LOW VOLTAGE AND DATA SYSTEMS
16471 - Auditorium and Television Studio Dimming Systems All auditorium and television studio dimming system models shall include dimmer racks, control consoles, remote control receptacles, stage manager panels (SMP), and pipe grids. During the Design Development Phase, all Auditorium and Television Studio Dimming Systems shall be modeled.
16670 - Lightning Protection SystemAll lightning protection system models shall include all air terminals, roof penetrations, grounding and grounding terminations, and surge protection devices.
16701 - Auxiliary Signal SystemAll auxiliary signal system models shall include monitors (indicating panels), pushbuttons, pushbutton stations and bells. During the Design Development Phase (IC), whenever an Auxiliary Signal System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require Auxiliary Signal System Models.
16720 - Fire Detection & Alarm System w/Central Office Connection All fire alarm detection system models shall include control panels, pull stations, detectors, switch boxes, notification devices, electromagnetic control devices, and alarms. During the Design Development Phase, whenever a Fire Alarm Detection System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require Fire Alarm Detection System Models.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D13308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xix
LOW VOLTAGE AND DATA SYSTEMS
16721 - City Fire Alarm System - All city fire alarm detection system models shall include a service entrance junction box, pull box, and city fire alarm signal box that are within the building. During the Design Development Phase, whenever a City Fire Alarm Detection System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require City Fire Alarm Detection System Models. - All city fire alarm detection system models shall include ducts, manholes, poles, terminal blocks that are outside the building.
16723 - Fire Detection and Alarm SystemsAll fire alarm detection and alarm system models shall include control panels, pull stations, detectors, switch boxes, notification devices, electromagnetic control devices, and alarms. During the Design Development Phase, whenever a Fire Alarm Detection and Alarm System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require City Fire Alarm Detection and Alarm System Models.
16724 - Intrusion Alarm SystemAll intrusion alarm system models shall include control panels, back boxes, sirens, strobes, detectors, door contacts, switches, and alarms. During the Design Development Phase, whenever an Intrusion Alarm System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require Intrusion Alarm System Models.
16725 - Telephone Cabling SystemAll telephone cabling system models shall include lock boxes, intermediate distribution frames (IDF), main distribution frames (MDF), jack boxes, and cable trays. During the Design Development Phase (IC), whenever a Telephone Cabling System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require Telephone Cabling System Models.
16727 - Data Cabling SystemsAll data cabling system models shall include all local distribution frame (LDF) data racks, data racks, and cable trays. During the Design Development Phase (IC), whenever a Data Cabling System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require Data Cabling System Models.
16728 - Fiber Optic Cabling System All Fiber Optic cabling system models shall include all local distribution frame (LDF) data racks, and cable trays. During the Design Development Phase (IC), whenever a Fiber Optic Cabling System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require Data Cabling System Models.
16770 - Sound, Intercom and Teacher Activated Security System All sound, intercom and teacher activated security system models shall include all central and local control sound racks; administrative control stations (ACS), loudspeakers, privacy call-in switch boxes and conduits. During the Design Development Phase (IC), whenever a Sound, Intercom and Teacher Activated Security System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require Sound, Intercom and Teacher Activated Security System Models.
16771 - Projection and Interactive Whiteboard SystemsAll projection and interactive whiteboard system models shall be modeled. During the Design Development Phase, whenever a Projection and Interactive Whiteboard System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require Projection and Interactive Whiteboard System Models.
16780 - Television Cabling SystemTelevision Cabling System models shall include all outlet boxes and cable trays. During the Design Development Phase, whenever a Television Cabling System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require Television Cabling System Models.
D134
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xx
LOW VOLTAGE AND DATA SYSTEMS
16783 - Internet Protocol Digital Video Surveillance Cabling System All internet protocol digital video surveillance cabling system models shall include all internal and external cameras, viewing station consoles, equipment racks, cabinets, and cable trays. During the Design Development Phase, whenever an Internet Protocol Digital Video Surveillance Cabling System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require Internet Protocol Digital Video Surveillance Cabling System Models.
16791 - Self-Corrective Clock System All self-corrective clock system models shall include all master program clocks (where applicable), secondary clocks, and conduits. During the Design Development Phase, whenever a Self-Corrective Clock System is required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require Self-Corrective Clock System Models.
16792 - Wireless Clock SystemAll wireless clock system models shall include all global positioning system (GPS) receivers and analog clocks. During the Design Development Phase, whenever a Wireless Clock System is required, only one room and/ or space for each room type/name require Wireless Clock System Models.
16726 - Intercom System for Holding Areas and Elevators All holding areas and elevators intercom systems models shall include all master and staff stations, audible and visual signaling devices, and intercom cabinets. During the Design Development Phase, whenever a Holding Areas and/or Elevator Intercom System model is required, all holding areas and elevators that require an intercom system shall be modeled.
POWER, CONDUITS AND PIPES
16130 - Conduits and Piping Feeders, conduits, pipes and fittings with an outside diameter of 2-inches or greater shall be modeled.
16140 - Wiring Devices/ReceptaclesAll receptacle boxes and wall plates shall be modeled. During the Design Development Phase, whenever Receptacles are required, only one room and/or space for each room type/name require Receptacles shall be modeled.
16231 - Emergency Generator All emergency generators shall include automatic transfer switches.
16420 - Service Switch All service switches, cabinets, service end boxes, property line splice boxes, end boxes, meter pans, meter blocks, current transformer cabinets and other equipment in connection with service entrance shall be modeled.
16425 - SwitchboardsAll switchboards pull boxes, meters, and overcurrent protection devices shall be modeled.
16441 - Enclosed Switches All service switches and enclosures shall be modeled.
16450 - Grounding Bus Bars Grounding bus bar models shall include building bus bars, and telecommunication room bus bars.
16470 - Power Panels All panel boards, boxes and cabinets shall be modeled.
16472 - Science Laboratory Power Units All demonstration units, power units, and meter units shall be modeled.
16480 - Motors, Motor Control Centers, Starters & Control Equip. All motors, motor control centers, switch boxes, and starters shall be modeled.
SITEWORK
16420 - Property Line BoxAll property line boxes shall be modeled.
16530 - Site/Security Lighting
All security lighting shall be modeled.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D13508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxi
E.Plumbing/ Drainage and Fire Protection Systems General Notes 1.Modeled Building Elements that are developed from the use of a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall include all intrinsic default data, parameters and information provided by such models that are necessary for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. a.All intrinsic default data, parameters and information contained within a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall be checked and revised, as necessary, to comply with all requirements, guides, standards, etc. that are identified within the contract. 2.Modeled Building Elements that are not developed from the use of a Content Provider’s (i.e.: “Revit”) or Manufacturer’s Model shall include all data, parameters and information that is necessary for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 3.The Plumbing/Drainage and Fire Protection Engineer shall coordinate the locations of all modeled Building Elements that require power or low voltage with the Electrical Engineer. 4.Schedules shall include all Schedules and Tables that are required, either by TCCD Standards and/or Industry Standards within a set of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 5.All “types” of required Building Elements shall be modeled. For example, there are numerous types of “sinks”. Therefore, each type of “sink” shall be modeled with the necessary intelligence for the proper coordination of the Design Intent BIM Model and the development of Contract Documents for the execution of the work. 6.Although connections to all equipment shall be made, hook-up detailing for all equipment is not required to be modeled. 7.Hangers and supports are not required to be modeled. 8.Building Elements shall not be modeled as 3-D Solids. 9.Clearance Zones for access areas, door swings, service space requirements, gauge reading, and other operational clearances shall be modeled as part of all equipment and checked for conflicts with other elements during the Contract Documents Design Phase. These clearance zones shall be modeled as invisible solids within the object.
EQUIPMENT
15415 - Centralized Acid Neutralization SystemAll tanks shall be modeled. During the Design Development Phase, acid neutralizing tubes for boilers may be excluded from the Model.
15415 - Grease InterceptorsAll grease interceptors shall be modeled.
15415 - Individual Acid Neutralization SystemAll tanks shall be modeled.
D136
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxii
EQUIPMENT
15416 - Gas Booster Pumps All gas booster pumps shall be modeled.
15416 - Gas Meters and Sub-metersAll gas meters and sub-meters shall be modeled. During the Design Development Phase, sub-meter models may be excluded from the Model.
15417 - Backflow Prevention DevicesAll backflow prevention devices such as, but not limited to, RPZ, DCV, DDCV devices shall be modeled.
15417 - Water Meters and Remote Readers All water meters and remote meters shall be modeled. During the Design Development Phase, remote meters may be excluded from the Model.
15451 - Water Heater All water heaters shall be modeled.
15453 - Compressed Air Pumps All compressed air pumps shall be modeled. Portable compressed air pumps may be excluded from the Model.
15453 - Control Panels Control panel models shall be provided for all equipment and/or systems that require such panels.
15453 - Domestic Water Booster Pumps All domestic water booster pumps shall be modeled.
15453 - Sewer Ejector PumpsAll sewer ejector pumps shall be modeled.
15453 - Sump PumpsAll sump pumps shall be modeled.
15453 - Tanks All tanks shall be modeled.
15453 - Vacuum Pumps All vacuum pumps shall be modeled. Portable vacuum pumps may be excluded from the Model.
15453 - Hot Water Circulating Pumps All hot water circulating pumps shall be modeled.
15415 - Drains - All drains shall be modeled. - When required, primers for drains shall be modeled. During the Design Development Phase, primers may be excluded from the Model.
15415 - Roof Drains All roof drains shall be modeled.
15440 - Bath TubsAll bath tubs shall be modeled.
15440 - CuspidorsAll cuspidors shall be modeled.
15440 - Drinking FountainsAll drinking fountains shall be modeled.
15440 - Electric Water CoolersAll electric water coolers shall be modeled.
15440 - Lavatories All lavatories shall be modeled.
15440 - Mop Sink Basins All mop sink basins shall be modeled.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D13708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxiii
EQUIPMENT
15440 - Showers All showers shall be modeled.
15440 - Sinks All sinks shall be modeled.
15440 - Urinals All urinals shall be modeled.
15440 - Wash Fountains All wash fountains shall be modeled.
15440 - Water Closets- All water closets shall be modeled. - When required, chair carriers shall be modeled with water closets.
15440 - Mixing Valves Regardless of size, all mixing valves for house tempering, safety showers and eyewashes shall be modeled.
15440 - Sediment TrapsAll sediment traps shall be modeled.
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
15330 - Sprinkler SystemSprinkler System models shall include all piping (regardless of size), branches, sprinkler heads, fittings, flow switches, and valves.
15332 - Combination Wet Standpipe/Sprinkler System Combination Wet Standpipe/Sprinkler System models shall include all piping (regardless of size), branches, sprinkler heads, fittings, valves, flow switches control panels, siamese connections, roof manifolds, hose valves and caps, hose valve cabinets, fire hose and nozzles and lobby hose cabinets.
15333 - Fire PumpsFire pump models shall include the fire pump, jockey pump, controller, test header, and flow meter.
PIPING
15410 - Acid Vent and Waste PipingAcid vent and waste piping and fittings shall be modeled.
15410 - Clean-outsClean-outs shall be modeled with access panels, plugs and caps.
15410 - Compressed Air/Vacuum PipingCompressed air/vacuum piping and fittings shall be modeled.
15410 - Sanitary, Waste and Soil Vent Stacks and Vent Lines Sanitary, waste and soil vent stacks and fittings shall be modeled.
15410 - Storm Water Storm water piping and fittings shall be modeled.
15412 - ValvesUnless otherwise indicated, all valves with an outside diameter of 4-inches or greater shall be modeled.
15413 - Insulation Piping insulation shall be modeled when a modeled pipe requires insulation.
15415 - Backwater ValvesRegardless of size, all backwater valves shall be modeled.
15415 - House TrapsAll house traps shall be modeled.
15416 - Gas Piping System- Gas piping, vent piping, connecting fittings, safety shut-off valves, service head valves, master gas control valves, plug valves, and control panels shall be modeled. - All double-pipe conditions (piping conditions where a pipe is inside another pipe) shall be modeled as a single Building Element/System. (Characteristics of the inner pipe shall be indicated as an object property within a data set of all such models.)
D138
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxiv
PIPING
15417 - Cold Water PipingAll cold water piping and fittings shall be modeled.
15417 - Wall HydrantsAll wall hydrants shall be modeled.
15418 - Hot Water PipingAll hot water piping and fittings shall be modeled.
15440 - Mixing ValvesRegardless of size, all mixing valves shall be modeled.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D13908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxv
Appendix B
A.Architectural Feet and Inches (TCCD_Standard_Arch)
D140
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxvi
B.Civil Decimal Feet (TCCD_Standard_Civil)
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D14108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxvii
C.Fractional Inches(TCCD_Survey)
D142
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxviii
Appendix C
A.Model Line Weights
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D14308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxix
B.Perspective Line Weights
D144
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxx
C.Annotation Line Weights
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D14508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxi
Appendix D
(
FI
E
L
D
1
)
__
_
_
FI
E
L
D
2
__
_
_
FI
E
L
D
3
__
_
_
FI
E
L
D
4
(
FI
E
L
D
5
/
FI
E
L
D
6
/
FI
E
L
D
7
/
FI
E
L
D
8
)
FI
E
L
D
9
SM
O
K
E
/
F
I
R
E
RA
T
I
N
G
TO
T
A
L
TH
I
C
K
N
E
S
S
(
EX
1
1
.
1
)
__
_
_
EX
__
_
_
BL
__
_
_
NR
(
4"
B
R
/
6"
B
L
+
2
"
R
I
/
.8
7
5
"
F
U
+
.
5
"
G
B
/
__
_
_
)
12
.
6
2
5
"
BL
-
B
l
o
c
k
BR
-
B
r
i
c
k
CO
-
C
o
n
c
r
e
t
e
EX
- E
x
i
s
t
i
n
g
W
a
l
l
FU
-
F
u
r
r
i
n
g
GL
-
G
l
a
s
s
C
u
r
t
a
i
n
w
a
l
l
GB
-
G
l
a
s
s
B
l
o
c
k
MT
-
M
e
t
a
l
S
t
u
d
s
S
-
S
p
e
c
i
a
l
-
U
s
e
r
De
f
i
n
e
d
TU
-
T
i
l
t
U
p
C
o
n
c
r
e
t
e
Wa
l
l
TP
-
T
o
i
l
e
t
P
a
r
t
i
t
i
o
n
WS
-
W
o
o
d
S
t
u
d
s
IC
-
I
C
F
C
o
n
c
r
e
t
e
W
a
l
l
IN
-
I
n
t
e
r
i
o
r
EX
-
E
x
t
e
r
i
o
r
RT
-
R
e
t
a
i
n
i
n
g
FD
-
F
o
u
n
d
a
t
i
o
n
Wa
l
l
t
a
g
co
n
s
i
s
t
s
o
f
:
*
F
I
E
L
D
2
(
u
s
e
)
*
F
I
E
L
D
8
(
t
o
t
a
l
th
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
)
*
P
e
r
i
o
d
*
S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
nu
m
b
e
r
WA
L
L
T
Y
P
E
N
A
M
I
N
G
&
T
A
G
S
Ex
a
m
p
l
e
s
:
(
E
X
1
1
.
1
)
-
E
X
-
B
L
-
N
R
-
(
4
"
B
R
/
6
"
B
L
+
2
"
R
I
/
.
8
7
5
"
F
U
+
.
5
"
G
B
/
-
)
1
2
.
6
2
5
"
-
E
x
t
e
r
i
o
r
w
a
l
l
-
5
.
6
2
5
"
B
l
o
c
k
,
2
"
R
i
g
i
d
I
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
,
3
.
6
2
5
"
B
r
i
c
k
,
0
.
5
"
G
y
p
s
u
m
B
o
a
r
d
o
n
7
/
8
"
F
u
r
r
i
n
g
S
t
r
i
p
s
(
I
N
5
.
4
)
-
I
N
-
M
T
-
N
R
(
-
/
3
.
6
2
5
"
/
.
6
2
5
C
B
/
C
T
)
5
"
-
I
n
t
e
r
i
o
r
w
a
l
l
-
3
.
6
2
5
"
M
e
t
a
l
w
i
t
h
0
.
6
2
5
"
C
e
m
e
n
t
B
o
a
r
d
a
n
d
C
e
r
a
m
i
c
T
i
l
e
o
n
o
n
e
s
i
d
e
o
n
l
y
.
IN
T
E
R
I
O
R
MA
T
E
R
I
A
L
FI
N
I
S
H
MA
T
E
R
I
A
L
Li
s
t
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
s
O
N
L
Y
i
f
th
e
y
a
f
f
e
c
t
o
v
e
r
a
l
l
w
a
l
l
th
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
s
i
g
n
i
f
i
c
a
n
t
l
y
(i
.
e
.
c
e
r
a
m
i
c
t
i
l
e
,
b
u
t
no
t
p
a
i
n
t
)
.
Wh
e
n
n
o
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
i
s
pr
o
v
i
d
e
d
,
i
n
c
l
u
d
e
a
'
_
_
'
(h
y
p
h
e
n
)
.
AW
P
-
A
c
o
u
s
t
i
c
a
l
W
a
l
l
Pa
n
e
l
AW
T
-
A
c
o
u
s
t
i
c
a
l
W
a
l
l
Tr
e
a
t
m
e
n
t
CP
T
-
C
a
r
p
e
t
CT
-
C
e
r
a
m
i
c
T
i
l
e
FW
C
-
F
a
b
r
i
c
W
a
l
l
Co
v
e
r
i
n
g
SS
P
-
S
t
a
i
n
l
e
s
s
S
t
e
e
l
Pa
n
e
l
TE
R
-
T
e
r
r
a
z
z
o
T
i
l
e
VP
-
V
e
n
e
e
r
P
l
a
s
t
e
r
VW
C
-
V
i
n
y
l
W
a
l
l
Co
v
e
r
i
n
g
Li
s
t
o
n
l
y
p
r
i
m
a
r
y
su
b
s
t
r
a
t
e
h
o
l
d
i
n
g
u
p
fi
n
i
s
h
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
s
u
c
h
as
.
6
2
"
B
G
,
o
r
.
5
"
C
B
.
Wh
e
n
n
o
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
i
s
pr
o
v
i
d
e
d
,
i
n
c
l
u
d
e
a
'__'
(
h
y
p
h
e
n
)
.
GB
-
G
y
p
s
u
m
B
o
a
r
d
CB
-
C
e
m
e
n
t
B
o
a
r
d
LH
-
L
a
t
h
Z -
"
Z
"
C
l
i
p
s
HT
-
H
a
t
C
h
a
n
n
e
l
De
s
c
r
i
b
e
c
o
r
e
u
s
i
n
g
no
m
i
n
a
l
s
i
z
e
de
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n
(
i
.
e
.
2
x
4
,
3
5/
8
"
,
4
"
1
2
"
,
e
t
c
.
)
.
Si
n
c
e
t
h
e
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
i
s
al
r
e
a
d
y
l
i
s
t
e
d
i
n
F
i
e
l
d
3,
i
t
i
s
n
o
t
n
e
c
e
s
s
a
r
y
to
r
e
p
e
a
t
u
n
l
e
s
s
mu
l
t
i
p
l
e
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
s
a
r
e
us
e
d
.
I
f
m
u
l
t
i
p
l
e
ma
t
e
r
i
a
l
s
a
r
e
u
s
e
d
i
n
co
r
e
,
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e
w
i
t
h
'
+
'
(p
l
u
s
)
a
n
d
u
s
e
ma
t
e
r
i
a
l
s
d
e
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n
fo
r
e
a
c
h
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
RI
-
R
i
g
i
d
I
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
BI
-
B
a
t
t
I
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
FP
-
F
i
r
e
P
r
o
o
f
i
n
g
In
c
l
u
d
i
n
g
A
L
L
ma
t
e
r
i
a
l
s
i
n
a
wa
l
l
s
t
y
l
e
,
a
s
re
p
o
r
t
e
d
b
y
Re
v
i
t
T
y
p
e
Pr
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s
On
l
y
o
u
t
e
r
m
o
s
t
ma
t
e
r
i
a
l
s
a
r
e
li
s
t
e
d
.
I
n
c
l
u
d
e
si
z
e
(
n
o
m
i
n
a
l
)
&
ma
t
e
r
i
a
l
f
r
o
m
sc
h
e
d
u
l
e
.
Wh
e
n
n
o
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
is
p
r
o
v
i
d
e
d
,
in
c
l
u
d
e
a
'
__
'
(h
y
p
h
e
n
)
SD
-
S
i
d
i
n
g
ST
-
S
t
u
c
c
o
EF
I
S
-
E
x
t
e
r
i
o
r
In
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
&
Fi
n
i
s
h
S
y
s
t
e
m
CO
R
E
S
I
Z
E
(M
A
T
1
,
M
A
T
2
…
)
WA
L
L
T
A
G
US
E
SU
P
P
O
R
T
T
Y
P
E
EX
T
E
R
I
O
R
MA
T
E
R
I
A
L
NR
-
N
o
R
a
t
i
n
g
S -
S
m
o
k
e
F1
-
1
H
o
u
r
F
i
r
e
F2
-
2
H
o
u
r
F
i
r
e
F3
-
3
H
o
u
r
F
i
r
e
SF
1
-
1
H
o
u
r
Sm
o
k
e
/
F
i
r
e
SF
2
-
2
H
o
u
r
Sm
o
k
e
/
F
i
r
e
SF
3
-
3
H
o
u
r
Sm
o
k
e
/
F
i
r
e
D146
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxii
Appendix E
Attached is a “Terms of Electronic File Transfer” (TEFT) for TCCD vendors. (TEFT is also available for download on TCCD web page as a separate document).
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D14708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxiii
D148
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxiv
Appendix F
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D14908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxv
NAME TYPE/
INSTANCE DISCIPLINE TYPE OF
PARAMETER
GROUP
UNDER CATEGORY VALUES
COPYRIGHT Instance Common Text Identity Data Project InformationTCCD - BIM STANDARDS REV Instance Common Text Identity Data Project InformationBUILDING ID Instance Common Text Identity Data Project Information, SheetsBUILDING LEGACY NAME Instance Common Text Identity Data Project Information, SheetsBUILDING NAME Instance Common Text Identity Data Project InformationCAMPUS NAME Instance Common Text Identity Data Project InformationCONTRACT NO Instance Common Text Identity Data Project InformationCONTRACTOR NAME Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONTRACTOR ADDRESS Instance Common Text Other Project Information
BOARD OF TRUSTEES Instance Common Multiline Text General Project InformationCHANCELLORInstanceCommonMultiline Text General Project InformationVC REAL ESTATE & FACILITIES Instance Common Multiline Text General Project InformationAVC REAL ESTATE & FACILITIES Instance Common Multiline Text General Project InformationDIR OF SYS INFR, UTILITY & ENERGY NGNT Instance Common Multiline Text General Project InformationDIROF OPERATIONAL INFR Instance Common Multiline Text General Project InformationDIR OF FACILITIES OPERATIONS Instance Common Multiline Text General Project InformationDIR OF FACILITIES PLANNING & DEV Instance Common Multiline Text General Project InformationSR MNGR OF ARCHITECTURAL SERVICES Instance Common Multiline Text General Project Information
DESIGN FIRM NAME Instance Common Text Other Project InformationDESIGN FIRM TRADE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationDESIGN FIRM ADDRESS Instance Common Text Other Project InformationDESIGN FIRM CITY ST ZIP Instance Common Text Other Project InformationDESIGN FIRM EMAIL Instance Common Text Other Project InformationDESIGN FIRM PHONE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationDESIGN FIRM WEB Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 1 NAME Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 1 TRADE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 1 ADDRESS Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 1 CITY ST ZIP Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 1 EMAIL Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 1 PHONE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 1 WEB Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 2 NAME Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 2 TRADE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 2 ADDRESS Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 2 CITY ST ZIP Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 2 EMAIL Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 2 PHONE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 2 WEB Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 3 NAME Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 3 TRADE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 3 ADDRESS Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 3 CITY ST ZIP Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 3 EMAIL Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 3 PHONE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 3 WEB Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 4 NAME Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 4 TRADE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 4 ADDRESS Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 4 CITY ST ZIP Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 4 EMAIL Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 4 PHONE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 4 WEB Instance Common Text Other Project Information
PROJECT INFORMATION
CONSULTANTS
COVER SHEET
PARAMETER PROPERTIES
Appendix G
D150
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxvi
NAME TYPE/
INSTANCE DISCIPLINE TYPE OF
PARAMETER
GROUP
UNDER CATEGORY VALUES CONSULTANT 5 NAME Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 5 TRADE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 5 ADDRESS Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 5 CITY ST ZIP Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 5 EMAIL Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 5 PHONE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 5 WEB Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 6 NAME Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 6 TRADE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 6 ADDRESS Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 6 CITY ST ZIP Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 6 EMAIL Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 6 PHONE Instance Common Text Other Project InformationCONSULTANT 6 WEB Instance Common Text Other Project Information
VIEW NAME LINE 1 Instance Common Text Text ViewsVIEW NAME LINE 2 Instance Common Text Text ViewsVIEW NAME LINE 3 Instance Common Text Text ViewsTRADEInstanceCommonTextGeneralSheetsBUILDING FLOOR Instance Common Text General SheetsSHEET COUNT Instance Common Number General SheetsTOTAL SHEETS Instance Common Number General Project Information
VIEW USE Instance Common Text Identity Data Views Construction Documents, Coordination, Reference Only, Working, Coordination, Record Drawings
DISCIPLINE HEADER Instance Common Text Identity Data Sheets
001 General, 002 Hazardous, 003 Civil, 004 Site Utilities, 005 Structural, 006 Life Safety, 007 Architectural, 008 Space Tracking, 009 Interiors, 010 Fire Protection, 011 Plumbing, 012 Mechanical 013 Electrical, 014 TelecommunicationsDOCUMENT PHASE Instance Common Text Identity Data Sheets 01 Construction Documents, 02 Bidding, 03 Construction, 04 Presentation, 05 AS-Built, 06 Record Drawings, 07 CoordinationSHEET INDEX ORDER Instance Common Number Identity Data SheetsDOCUMENT PHASE - COVER Instance Common Text Identity Data Project Information 01 Construction Documents, 02 Bidding, 03 Construction, 04 Presentation, 05 AS-Built, 06 Record Drawings, 07 Coordination
SPACE CLASSIFICATION Instance Common Text Identity Data Rooms, SpacesLOUVER HEIGHT Instance Common Length Other DoorLOUVER WIDTH Instance Common Length Other DoorGLAZING TYPE Instance Common Text Other Door, WindowHEAD DETAIL Instance Common Text Other Door, WindowJAMB DETAIL Instance Common Text Other Door, WindowSILL DETAIL Instance Common Text Other Door, WindowMATERIALTypeCommonMaterialMaterials and Finishes WindowFIRE RATING Type Common Text Other WindowHORIZONTAL MULLION Type Common Text Other WindowVERTICAL MULLION Type Common Text Other WindowWALL FINISH - NORTH Instance Common Material Materials and Finishes Rooms, SpacesWALL FINISH - SOUTH Instance Common Material Materials and Finishes Rooms, SpacesWALL FINISH - EAST Instance Common Material Materials and Finishes Rooms, SpacesWALL FINISH - WEST Instance Common Material Materials and Finishes Rooms, SpacesFINISH NOTES Instance Common Text Other Rooms, SpacesSPACE USE CODE Instance Common Text Identity Data Rooms, SpacesSPACE USE NAME Instance Common Text Identity Data Rooms, Spaces
PROJECT BROWSER
ARCHITECTURAL
SHEETS/ VIEWS
PARAMETER PROPERTIES
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D15108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxvii
NAME TYPE/
INSTANCE DISCIPLINE TYPE OF
PARAMETER
GROUP
UNDER CATEGORY VALUES
ABBREVIATION Instance Common Text Identity Data Conduits, Conduit Fittings, Conduit Runs, Cable Trays, Cable Tray Fittings, Cable Tray RunsEQUIPMENT FRAME WIDTH Type Common Length Dimensions Electrical Equipment, Generic Models, Mechanical Equipment, Specialty EquipmentEQUIPMENT FRAME HEIGHT Type Common Length Dimensions Electrical Equipment, Generic Models, Mechanical Equipment, Specialty EquipmentEQUIPMENT FRAME DEPTH Type Common Length Dimensions Electrical Equipment, Generic Models, Mechanical Equipment, Specialty EquipmentDATE INSTALLED Instance Common Text GeneralDATE REPAIRED Instance Common Text GeneralDATE TESTED Instance Common Text GeneralCIRCUIT NO Instance Common Text Electrical - Circuiting Communication DevicesFA COLOR Instance Common Text Identity Data Fire Alarm Devices Red, White
Air Terminals, Communication Devices, Data Devices, Duct Accessories, Electrical Equipment, Electrical Fixtures, Fire Alarm Devices, Generic Models, Lighting Devices, Mechanical Equipment, Security Devices, Specialty Equipment
STRUCTURAL
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/ PLUMBING/FIRE
PARAMETER PROPERTIES
D152
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxviii
Appendix H
110 Classroom 610 Assembly 910 Sleep/Study without Toilet/Bath
115 Classroom Service 615 Assembly Service 919 Toilet/Bath
620 Exhibition 920 Sleep/Study with Toilet/Bath
210 Class Laboratory 625 Exhibition Service 935 Sleep/Study Service
215 Class Laboratory Service 630 Food Facility 950 Apartment
220 Special Class Open Laboratory 635 Food Facility Service 955 Apartment Service
225 Special Class Open Laboratory Service 640 Day Care 970 House
230 Individual Study Laboratory 645 Day Care Service
235 Individual Study Laboratory Service 650 Lounge
250 Research/Non-Class Laboratory 655 Lounge Service
255 Research/Non-Class Laboratory Service 660 Merchandising 50 Inactive Area
665 Merchandising Service 60 Alteration or Conversion Area
310 Office 670 Recreation 70 Unfinished Area
315 Office Service 675 Recreation Service
350 Conference Room 680 Meeting Room
355 Conference Room Service 685 Meeting Room Service
690 Locker Room M10 Men’s Public Rest Rooms
410 Reading/Study Room U10 Unisex Restroom
420 Stack 710 Central Computer/Tele-communication W10 Women’s Public Rest Rooms
430 Open-Stack Study Room 715 Central Computer/Telephone communication Service WWW Circulation Area
440 Processing Room 720 Shop W01 Bridge/Tunnel
455 Study Service 725 Shop Service W02 Elevator
730 Central Storage W03 Escalator
510 Armory 735 Central Storage Service W04 Loading Dock
515 Armory Service 740 Vehicle Storage Facility W05 Lobby
520 Athletic or Physical Education 745 Vehicle Storage Facility Service W06 Public Corridor
523 Athletic Facilities Spectator Seating 750 Central Food Store Service W07 Stairway
525 Athletic or Physical Education Service 755 Central Food Store Service Support XXX Building Service Area
530 Media Production 760 Hazardous Materials Storage X01 Custodial Supply Closet
535 Media Production Service 770 Hazardous Waste Storage X02 Janitor Room
540 Clinic (Non-Health Professions) 775 Hazardous Waste Service X03 Public Rest Room
545 Clinic Service (Non-Health Professions) Health Care Facilities X04 Trash Room
550 Demonstration 810 Patient Bedroom YYY Mechanical Area
555 Demonstration Service 815 Patient Bedroom Service Y01 Central Utility Plant
560 Field Building 820 Patient Bath Y02 Fuel Room
570 Animal Quarters Facilities 830 Nurse Station Y03 Shaft
575 Animal Quarters Facilities Service 835 Nurse Station Service Y04 Trash Room
580 Greenhouse 840 Surgery ZZZ Structural Area
585 Greenhouse Service 845 Surgery Service
590 Other (All Purpose) 850 Treatment/Examination Clinic
855 Treatment/Examination Clinic Service
860 Diagnostic Support Service Laboratory
865 Diagnostic Support Service Laboratory Service Support
870 Health Care Central Supplies
880 Public Waiting
890 Staff On-Call Facility
895 Staff On-Call Facility Service
TEXAS HIGHER EDUCATION COORDINATING BOARD SPACE USE CODES
Classroom Facilities
Laboratory Facilities
Office Facilities
Study Facilities
Unclassified Areas
(Use only with Nonassigned
Functional Category Codes)
Non-Assignable Areas
(Use with Nonassigned Functional
Category Codes)
General Use Facilities
Supporting Facilities
Residential Facilities
Special Use Facilities
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D15308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxix
Appendix I
* This list is incomplete and will continue to evolve
D154
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xl
Appendix J
Shown below are some of the examples of schedules to be used on TCCD projects. Theses schedules are based on National CAD Standards V6.0. For any schedules not shown here, please refer to the NCS V6.0 for additional guidelines.
DOOR SCHEDULE
WINDOW SCHEDULE
W HT THK W HT HEAD JAMB SILLMATLMATL
DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME
FIRE RATING
LABEL
HARDWARE
NOTESMARK
SIZE
ELEL GLZ
DETAIL
SET NO KEYSIDE
RM NOGLZ
LOUVER
WIDTH HEIGH
T HEAD JAMB SILL HORIZ
MULL
VERT
MULL
TYPE MATL
WINDOW SCHEDULE
GLZ FIRE
RATING
DETAIL
NOTESMARK
SIZE
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D15508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xli
LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE
PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
DIFFUSER, REGISTER & GRILLE SCHEDULE
TYPE TYPE WATTS MOUNTINGDESCRIPTIONMARK
LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
NOTES
LAMPS
LENS FINISH
CW HW WASTE VENT
SUPPLY
FITTING
SUPPLY
PIPE(S)DRAIN TRAP CONNECTIONS NOTES
PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
MARK DESCRIPTION MFR MODEL
SPLY RET EXH DAMPERMFRTYPEUSEMTGPANEL SIZE NECK SIZE PATTERNFINISH NOTESMODELMAX m3/s (CFM)
DIFFUSER, REGISTER, AND GRILLE SCHEDULE
MARK
D156
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xlii
ROOM SCHEDULE (TCCD Facilities & Maintenance Use Only) – SACT example shown
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES D15708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 1, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xliii
Appendix K
OCCUPANCY TYPE AREA PEROCCUPANT OCCUPANCYGROSS OR NET<Circulation><Public Toilet Rooms><Shaft>Accessory storage areas 300 SF GrossAgricultural building 300 SF GrossAircraft hangars 500 SF GrossAirport terminal baggage claim 20 SF GrossAirport terminal baggage handling 300 SF GrossAirport terminal concourse 100 SF GrossAirport terminal waiting areas 15 SF GrossAssembly (chairs only, not fixed)7 SF NetAssembly (gaming floors)11 SF GrossAssembly (standing space)5 SF NetAssembly (tables and chairs)15 SF NetBowling centers - additional areas 7 SF NetBusiness areas 100 SF GrossClassroom area 20 SF NetCourtrooms-other than fixed seating areas 40 SF NetDay care 35 SF NetDormitories50 SF GrossEducational - classroom area 20 SF NetEducational - shops and other vocational room areas 50 SF NetExercise rooms 50 SF GrossH-5 Fabrication and manufacturing areas 200 SF GrossIndustrial areas 100 SF GrossInstitutional areas - inpatient treatment areas 240 SF GrossInstitutional areas - outpatient areas 100 SF GrossInstitutional areas - sleeping areas 120 SF GrossKitchens, commercial 200 SF GrossLaboratory - educational 50 SF NetLaboratory - non-educational 100 SF NetLaboratory - suite 200 SF GrossLibrary - reading rooms 50 SF NetLibrary - stack area 100 SF GrossLocker rooms 50 SF GrossMechanical equipment room 300 SF GrossMercantile - areas on other floors 60 SF GrossParking garages 200 SF GrossShops and other vocational room areas 50 SF NetWarehouses500 SF Gross
*OCCUPANCY LOADS - IBC 2012
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Topics
Introduction to TCCD
Drawing Standards
Consultant
Deliverables
Units & Precision
Coordinates &
Orientation
Layers
Annotation
Schedules & Tables
Inserted & Drawn
Objects
Sheet Number &
Sequence
Electronic File Management
AutoCAD File Transmission
Plotting & Plot File Management
Archiving & Recovery Management
Master Drawing
Updates
AutoCAD Standards
Manual for TCCD Facility Drawings
Updated:
April 21, 2016
2
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 1
1.0 - Introduction to TCCD AutoCAD Standards ......................................................................................................... 2 2.0 - Consultant Deliverables ........................................................................................................................................... 5 3.0 - Units & Precision ........................................................................................................................................................... 8 4.0 - Coordinates & Orientation ....................................................................................................................................... 10 5.0 - Layers ............................................................................................................................................................................... 14 6.0 - Annotation ...................................................................................................................................................................... 28 7.0 - Schedules & Tables ..................................................................................................................................................... 35 8.0 - Inserted & Drawn Objects ........................................................................................................................................ 38 9.0 - Sheet Numbers & Sequence .................................................................................................................................... 46 10.0 - Electronic File Management ................................................................................................................................. 52 11.0 - AutoCAD File Transmission .................................................................................................................................. 61 12.0 – Plotting & Plot File Management ....................................................................................................................... 62 13.0 - Archiving & Recovery Management .................................................................................................................. 64 14.0 - Master Drawing Updates Process ...................................................................................................................... 65
Appendix A ................................................................................................................................................................................... i Appendix B ................................................................................................................................................................................ iv Appendix C ................................................................................................................................................................................ xi Appendix D .......................................................................................................................................................................... xxvii Appendix E ......................................................................................................................................................................... xxviii Appendix F............................................................................................................................................................................. xxix Appendix G ............................................................................................................................................................................ xxxi Appendix H .......................................................................................................................................................................... xxxii Appendix I........................................................................................................................................................................... xxxiii Appendix J ........................................................................................................................................................................... xxxvi Appendix K ....................................................................................................................................................................... xxxviii
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 2
The mission of the Facilities Department at TCCD is to successfully integrate district facilities. In delivering the mission, the Facilities Department’s number one goal is to provide for safe, healthy and comfortable building environment for TCCD employees and the many thousands of students and visitors in TCCD buildings daily. By adhering to the below outlined AutoCAD Standards it allows TCCD to develop and maintain graphic and related information which users can manage, operate, maintain and improve the facilities, grounds, and related infrastructure systems of the TCCD.
The purpose of this document is to serve as a specification for producing and delivering AutoCAD drawings for TCCD Facilities Department. These requirements must be followed and met by in-house staff and outside consulting firms and their sub consulting firms. The drawings shall be re-submitted after all requirements have been met and before a project can be closed out and final payment is received from TCCD. All specified materials must be submitted electronically to the TCCD Facilities Department for approval in accordance with production standards and special instructions described throughout this document. A copy of the AutoCAD Standard Checklist found in this document (Section 2.0 and Appendix D) must be signed and submitted with the AutoCAD drawings being delivered during any phase (Predesign Phase, Schematic Design Phase, Design & Development Phase, Bid Set, Construction Document Phase, Addenda and As-builts, and Record Document Phase) of the project. By signing and submitting the AutoCAD Standard Checklist the vendor (architect, engineer, contractor, etc.) is assuring all materials submitted meet the required standards and guidelines set forth in this document. These standards are issued to promote the development of AutoCAD drawings suitable for use in the TCCD AutoCAD environment. Consistency and compatibility with existing TCCD AutoCAD documents can only be achieved when these standards are strictly adhered to. Electronic drawings produced and submitted in accordance with these standards have significantly greater value to the college, Architects, Engineers and Contractors delivering AutoCAD documentation to TCCD.
TCCD consultant contracts and design guidelines may reference this document. Each of the following sections contains the most essential criteria for developing AutoCAD drawings for use in the TCCD AutoCAD environment. Refer to “Consultant Deliverables” section for specific requirements. Refer questions to the Facilities Department at TCCD.
4
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 3
These standards are to be followed by TCCD AutoCAD users as well as all outside consultants providing AutoCAD drawings to TCCD. The AutoCAD standards will be reviewed annually. Recommendations will be considered during the review. Drawing standard deviations will only be accepted in project drawings with prior approval of TCCD. TCCD AutoCAD Standards are based on the U.S. National CAD Standards (NCS), Version 6. Modifications and refinements have been made to align these AutoCAD standards with TCCD’s facility documentation needs. In instances where there are differences between the TCCD AutoCAD Standard and the NCS standard, the TCCD AutoCAD Standard shall control. For items not covered in the TCCD AutoCAD Standard, refer to the NCS standard for general guidance and consult with your AutoCAD manager. TCCD encourages employees and consultants to refer to the NCS as an additional resource. The NCS consists of:
AutoCAD Layer Guidelines, published by the American Institute of Architects (AIA)
Uniform Drawing Systems (UDS) Modules 1-8, published by the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI)
Plotting Guidelines, published by the Tri-Services and U.S. Coast Guard TCCD is a subscribing member of NCS and has an enterprise license for use of the National AutoCAD Standards document.
TCCD AutoCAD Standards generally follow NCS terminology, some of which may not be familiar to all AutoCAD users. This will be especially true of the terms used to describe different categories of electronic files used in creating AutoCAD drawings. Please refer to NCS, your CAD manager, or the Autodesk Help page for any definitions as needed.
No, but since AutoCAD is the primary Computer Aided Drawing (CAD) platform of TCCD, the AutoCAD Standards Manual is written in this context. In that sense, the manual will refer to settings in AutoCAD and uses the “language” of AutoCAD. However, this does not mean that these standards do not apply to users of MicroStation, TerraModel, or other “non-Autodesk” drafting packages. It is assumed that in most cases users of other platforms are also familiar with AutoCAD and can therefore make the appropriate adjustments to apply the intent of the standard within other AutoCAD platforms. For those users that may not be familiar with AutoCAD, please coordinate with your AutoCAD-knowledgeable associates to understand portions of the standard that may elude you.
The term “Vertical Applications” refers to applications such as Land Desktop (LDT), Civil 3D (C3D), Architectural Desktop (ADT) now known as AutoCAD Architecture, and
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 4
AutoCAD MEP (MEP) that run “on top” of AutoCAD. It is not practical to produce and maintain an AutoCAD standard that addresses all of the nuances and requirements of vertical applications. However, it does consider some of the predominant vertical applications that are central to efficient drawing production such as AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP. It is important to understand that the standard does not discourage you from taking advantage of features of vertical applications that are not addressed here. The use of product features that support the mission of the TCCD AutoCAD Standards is encouraged.
The AutoCAD standard will be reviewed, and updated where deemed necessary, as a planned annual effort. Updates to individual modules, or new sections, may be issued at any time when significant changes are needed. The AutoCAD Standards Manual will clearly reflect the revision number and date within the footer of each section.
Printed Copies of this manual and sections are “uncontrolled” as noted in the footer of each page of the AutoCAD Standards Manual, meaning there is no attempt made to systematically update printed version of the standard. The online AutoCAD Standards Manual found on the TCCD Website is considered the “official” version and should be used to avoid potential reference to out-of-date printed copies.
BCAD will provide staff training and on-going support regarding the development, maintenance and implementation of TCCD AutoCAD standards as needed. Should you or any of your team members require such training and support, contact your project manager for further direction.
6
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 5
TCCD’s goal with these Standards is to create Facility Drawings that are consistent in appearance and which integrate the required flexibility to meet the fluid and expanding needs of TCCD. We believe these Standards are comprehensive and practical … and we invite our Consultants to utilize them in their entirety. It is however, not TCCD’s intention to add undue burden on the Consultants with these Standards. TCCD understands their Consultants may have spent considerable effort and expense in developing their own in-house standards and production methods. In defining the “Consultant Deliverables”, TCCD has attempted a compromise … one that provides TCCD with the structure and flexibility needed with the drawings, yet still allows the Consultant to maintain most of their production methods.
Below is a Checklist for Consultant Final Deliverables:
1. Introduction to TCCD AutoCAD Standards a. All AutoCAD drawings shall be developed in accordance with the most current version of TCCD BIM Standards.
2. Consultant Deliverables a. TCCD Consultants will be required to follow ALL of the items outlined in this section.
b. TCCD Consultants are encouraged, but NOT required to follow the best practices described in this document or the requirements NOT outlined in section 2.0 – Consultant Deliverables.
3. Units & Precision
a. Units & precision requirements of all drawings will be adhered to as described in section 3.2 Units & Precision.
4. Coordinates & Orientation a. Consultants CAN use campus wide project base point established by the civil engineer for the duration of the project. At the final project closeout stage, however, consultants are required to relocate project insertion point of model drawings to the base point as described in the section 4.1 Drawing
Origin.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 6
5. Layers a. Overview:
All drawn objects MUST be properly layered.
No objects should be placed on Layer 0.
Blocks should be created on Layer 0. b. Layer Name Format: AIA layer naming convention should be adhered to. All layers MUST have logical names (i.e. avoid layers such as “1”, “2”, “3”, “Mike”, “Mikes Work”, “T”, “delete”, etc.). c. Layer Properties: Consultants can use their own in-house layer properties, but must provide TCCD with all applicable plot style tables (ctb files). d. Line Types: i. Consultants will adhere to the standards as described in section 5.10 Line
Types. ii. Consultants may use their own line styles if necessary to clearly convey the design intent, but must provide TCCD with all appropriate line type definitions, named as LTYPES_ProjectName.txt. iii. Only one txt file should be submitted per project. e. Shape Files (shp): i. Shape files should be avoided whenever possible, especially within line type definitions. ii. If shape files must be used to clearly convey design intent, consultants must provide TCCD with all appropriate shape file definitions in a zipped folder, named as SHAPE_ProjectName.zip. iii. Only one zip file should be submitted per project.
6. Annotation a. Consultants WILL adhere to the text (Mtext), leader (multi-leader) and dimension requirements as outlined in sections 6.0 Annotation.
7. Schedules & Tables a. Consultants WILL adhere to the requirement as outlined in sections 7.0 Schedules & Tables.
8. Inserted & Drawn Objects a. Consultants WILL adhere to the requirement as outlined in sections 8.0 Inserted & Drawn Objects.
9. Sheet Numbers & Sequence a. Consultants WILL adhere to the requirement as outlined in sections 9.0
Sheet Numbers & Sequence.
8
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 7
10. Electronic File Management a. As project milestones are submitted to TCCD, consultants will turn in organized and clean directories of files as described in section 10.0 Electronic File
Management.
11. AutoCAD File Transmission a. Consultants will adhere to the standards as described in section 11.0 AutoCAD File Transmission.
12. Plotting & Plot File Management a. This section if for TCCD in-house design teams only.
13. Archiving & Recovery Management a. This section if for TCCD in-house design teams only.
14. Master Drawing Updates Process a. This section if for TCCD in-house design teams only. Upon completion of the services required, TCCD will perform an assessment of a project’s DWG files so that it may assess the Design Team’s compliance with the TCCD’s AutoCAD Standards and the effectiveness of the Design Team’s required “Quality Control Program”. Upon the TCCD’s completion of a DWG quality assessment, TCCD will provide the Design Team with a copy of the “Quality Assessment Report” for appropriate action which shall include, but not be limited to, bringing a project’s DWG’s into full compliance with the TCCD’s AutoCAD Standards.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 8
For the purposes of establishing unit and precision settings, drawings are broken into three categories as follows:
Category Types of Work Included Survey Land Surveys, Plats, Property Deeds Site Work Civil, Landscape, and Site Utilities drawings for wholly site related documentation Building Architectural, Structural, and MEP&F drawings Within TCCD Facility Drawings all three types may be employed. For example, TCCD South Campus might have grounds topographical drawings, site utilities drawings, and building plans. The building plans may include architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, and fire protection as-built conditions drawings.
Imperial units are the standard system of measurement for TCCD drawings unless S.I. (International System of Units) units are specified by the reviewing agency, or an industry standard for the type of work being performed.
Imperial Units
Setting Survey Site Work Building Length Type Decimal Decimal Architectural Length Precision* 0.0000’ 0.0000’ 0’-0 1/128” Angle Type Surveyor’s Units Deg./ Min./Sec. Decimal Angle Precision* Seconds (N0d00’00”E) Seconds (0d00’00”) 0.0000° Insertion Scale Feet (ft, ‘) Feet (ft, ‘) Inches (in, “)
Metric (SI) Units
Setting Survey Site Work Building Length Type Decimal Decimal Decimal Length Precision* 0.0000 0.0000 0.000 Angle Type Surveyor’s Units Deg./ Min./Sec. Decimal Angle Precision* Seconds (N0d00’00”E) Seconds (0d00’00”) 0.0000° Insertion Scale Meters (m) Meters (m) Millimeters (mm) * Length and Angle Precision only affects how AutoCAD displays object properties and measurements (not dimensions). See the Annotation module for guidance on dimensioning unit settings, which are distinct from drawing unit settings.
10
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 9
Drawing “Length Precision” settings are not intended to establish or imply a required degree of field or construction precision. For example, four decimals of precision (0.0000) for a site utilities drawing does not indicate that four decimals of utilities placement as-built information accuracy is expected or required. Dimensioning precision is completely independent of drawing precision. Dimensioning precision, unlike drawing precision, is generally related to the expected degree of construction precision, which will be discussed in Annotation module.
If you insert an architectural drawing (where the insertion units are inches) into a civil drawing (where insertion units are feet), the inserted architectural drawing will be automatically scaled down by a factor of 12 so that it is in the appropriate scale relative to the current (civil in this case) drawing. This should be addressed by the following: 1. Set the "Default settings when units are set to unitless" to "Unspecified-unitless" as shown below. This way, no auto-scaling will occur if either the inserted or current drawing has INSUNITS set to "unitless.”
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 10
Buildings in Model Space Draw or insert building drawings in model space so that the lower left intersection of the outermost column/building lines that remain constant on most floors are placed at 0,0,0. In order to ensure the proper insertion of external references (Xrefs) and the stacking of floor plans, the origin point for an entire building or site must be consistent between model layers. Once the origin is established, it should not be changed.
Site Drawings in Model Space Draw or insert site drawings in model space on the coordinate system used for the project. This may be an arbitrary coordinate system assigned by the surveyor or a formal coordinate system, such as State Plane Coordinates. All site related drawings should exactly overlay this coordinate system. Once the origin is established, do not change it unless a global correction to a new coordinate system is required. All survey drawings should be tied to existing survey monuments and bench marks.
Paper Space ONLY title block, sheet numbers, drawing titles, stamps, general notes, and tables should be placed in the paper space. Any drawn objects along with drawing related annotation should go in the Model space.
12
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 11
When placing the TCCD standard title block in a sheet file, place the lower left corner of the blue “no plot” boundary of the title block at 0,0,0. The title block should default to this origin when inserted. This will allow the sheet to have the correct margins when plotted to “extents” and centered on the page.
Model Space Do not set the drawing limits any larger than necessary to accommodate the drawing in model space. In other words, clean-up drawings and do not leave drawing debris floating in the model space that is not part of the drawing.
Paper Space No entities shall be located outside the blue “no plot” boundary for the title block in paper space. This is critical since title blocks are plotted “by extents.”
Buildings In model space, buildings are typically oriented orthogonally with the longest edge of a building running horizontally.
Site Drawings In model space, the site should be oriented such that true north is the top of the drawing area. In paper space, the preferred orientation of viewports is true north generally toward the top or left edge of the sheet. When the view of a model space region, as established through a viewport in paper space, needs to be rotated, it is absolutely critical that only the view is affected and not the actual orientation of the model space drawing. DVIEW/ TWIST and MVSETUP are two of the acceptable methods to orient a view of a model space drawing in the viewport. All drawings should be saved with the User Coordinate System (UCS) oriented to the World Coordinate System (WCS). The UCS icon should be displayed at all times to let you know if you inadvertently rotated the UCS.
Because building drawings are often referenced into site drawings and vice versa, the process for inserting, rotating and scaling one drawing type into another should be clearly established, documented and understood by AutoCAD professionals on multi-discipline projects. When inserting a “building” drawing into a site drawing (or vice versa), the procedure described here is what TCCD expects to minimize the work required in updating the drawing. The explanation below assumes that a building drawing is being referenced to a site drawing, but the procedure is similar for the reverse case.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 12
The “tie point” is the most critical piece of information to know when inserting one drawing into another. This is an arbitrary point on the building that is determined by the design professional and should not change. The location and alignment of the building as it relates to this point should be communicated to those working on the site drawings to ensure the building is inserted at the correct location. In this case, the tie point is the middle of the building.
1. Xref (attach) the building drawing in a new model file (Arch Model). This file should be named according to the “Model File Naming Convention” (see Electronic File Management module). Within the Arch Model: a. Turn off all layers in Arch Model except the ones you wish to appear in the target drawing (Site Model). b. Temporarily Xref (overlay or attach) the site drawing (Site Model) into Arch Model to aid in proper alignment of architectural drawing. c. Move building in Arch Model to place the tie points between the Arch Model and Site Model exactly on top of each other.
14
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 13
d. Using the tie point as the point of rotation, rotate the building in Arch Model so it aligns with the established bearing of the building. In this case, that means the line from the tie point to Point A. e. Scale architectural building envelope down (by a factor of 12 typically). In newer versions of AutoCAD scaling may happen automatically if the units are properly set in both drawings. 2. Document this process for all AutoCAD professionals on project. 3. Detach Site Model from Arch Model because the building drawing is properly set. 4. Xref (overlay) Arch Model into Site Model for use in site design. 5. If the building envelope is revised in the future, the following steps should be followed to swap out the architectural drawing without rescaling, aligning or rotating it: a. Replace the old building drawing with the new one. They should have the same name. b. You may move the old building drawing to an archive folder or simply delete it. c. Open the Arch Model drawing and the Xref will automatically be updated and the changes will be apparent (no scaling, aligning or rotation needed).
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 14
Virtually all vector-based AutoCAD systems support the concept of layers. This function allows building design information to be organized in a systematic fashion, facilitates the visual display of the information on a computer screen, and allows the information to be efficiently converted to the conventional print media of drawings. Efficient use of layers can reduce document preparation time and improve document coordination. Organizing data by layers allows a single AutoCAD file to contain a wealth of information about a building or facility. By turning selected layers on or off, data can be created, reviewed and edited according to a hierarchy that simulates the physical organization of building systems, the relative position of building elements, or the sequence of construction.
The layering standard is based on the NCS standard, which breaks up layer names into four data field types 1. Discipline Designator 2. Major Group 3. Up to 2 Minor Groups 4. An optional Status field. The format for standard TCCD layer names is shown below:
An example of Architectural Interior Full Height Wall Dimension for New Construction shown below:
The Discipline Designator for layers is the same as the Discipline Designator used for sheet numbering and electronic file naming. The following table defines the designators to be
X -XXXX -XXXX -XXXX -X
DISCIPLINE MAJOR
GROUP
MINOR
GROUP I
MINOR
GROUP II
STATUS
FIELD
-
-
REQUIRED FIELD
OPTIONAL FIELD
A -W A L L -F U L L -D I M S -N
DISCIPLINE STATUS
FIELD
MINOR
GROUP II
MAJOR
GROUP
MINOR
GROUP I
16
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 15
A -W A L L -F U L L -D I M S -N
used in the first field of the layer name, the Discipline Designator field. Note that the TCCD standard does not allow for the NCS Level 2 modifier as described in the note to the right of the table. Above is a typical layer name showing the required & optional data fields. The mandatory Discipline Designator field is highlighted. The Discipline Designator is always one (1) character, and follows the NCS except for the addition of “K” for Space Tracking and “U” for Site Utilities and substituting “L” for Life Safety instead of Landscaping. Discipline Designator may not be modified by the user. Discipline Designator choices are limited to those in the table below.
*Greyed out fields are defined by NCA, but might not be used by TCCD.
CODE DISCIPLINE NOTES
A Architectural
B Geotechnical
C Civil/ Site
D Process
E Electrical
F Fire Protection
G General
H Hazardous Materials
I Interiors
K Space Tracking
L Life Safety
M Mechanical
O Operations
P Plumbing
Q Equipment
R Resource
S Structural
T Telecommunications
U Site Utilities
V Survey / Mapping
W Distributed Energy
X Other Disciplines
Z Contractor / Shop Drawings
LEVEL 1 DISCIPLINE DESIGNATOR
Note that the NCS provides an option for Level 1 and Level 2 Discipline Designators. A Level 2 designator would append to the Level 1 designator to add a level of detail, such as AI for Architectural Interiors or SD for Structural Demolition. The TCCD layer standard DOES NOT use the Level 2 Designator and therefore drops the level designation and simply refers to the Discipline Designator.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 16
The Major Group is used to define the “building system,” where “building" does not literally mean building, but a major project system or component. The prescribed Major Group field codes (four-character abbreviations) shown in the Appendix A are logically grouped with specific discipline designators. However, any Major Group may be combined with any prescribed Discipline Designator, provided that the definition of the Major Group remains unchanged. Therefore, any reasonable combination of the prescribed Discipline Designators and Major Groups is permitted. Some examples of Major Groups include WALL, SSWR (sanitary sewer), and COLS (columns). The Major Group is always four (4) characters in length. User modification to the Major Group field is not permitted. Major Group options are limited to those used within the NCS and layer tables for this standard. Above is a typical layer name showing the required & optional data fields. The mandatory Major Group field is highlighted.
The Minor Groups are optional, four-character fields and are used to subdivide Major Groups by material, type, orientation, or other differentiating characteristics. For example, A-WALL-FULL denotes Architectural, Wall, Full-height. A second minor group may be used for still further delineation of the data contained on a layer. For example, A-WALL-FULL TEXT indicates Architectural, Wall, Full-height, Text. The prescribed Minor Group field codes (four-character abbreviations) shown in the Appendix B are to be logically grouped with specific Major Groups. However, any Minor Group may be used to modify any Major Group, provided that the definition of the Minor Group remains unchanged. Therefore, any reasonable combination of the prescribed Major and Minor Groups is permitted. The standard allows for up to two Minor Groups, and they are always 4 characters in length. A typical layer name showing one optional Minor Group field: A typical layer name showing two optional Minor Group fields:
NOTE: User-defined Minor Group field codes are permitted. They must contain four alphabetic and/or numeric characters and/or "~".
A -W A L L -F U L L -D I M S -N
A -W A L L -F U L L
A -W A L L -F U L L -D I M S
18
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 17
The single-character Status field can be used to designate the status of the work or a construction phase as shown in the table below. A typical layer name showing the location of the optional Status field:
Note the following when using Status Field Codes • Apply the Status Field Codes consistently throughout the project. • Do not use multiple status designations simultaneously. For example, do not use “E” in combination with “A”, such as V-SSWR-MHOL-E-A to indicate an existing sanitary manhole that is abandoned. When dealing with TCCD facility master drawings, inherently all drawings show existing conditions, therefor “E” designator is not needed. A majority of the drawings generated and managed by TCCD will be facility and site master drawings indicating existing conditions for all disciplines. However, some departments will be creating their own drawings of renovations, proposed conditions, what-if studies, etc. While these files might only exist with-in their local drives, they should still follow AutoCAD standards outlined in this document. Once the new information needs to be incorporated into the masters as as-built information, the process will be streamlined. TCCD’s layering standard limits the use of the Status field to very specific cases. Understanding the rules of using the Status field requires one to understand the standards for how existing information is separated from new work in model files. The TCCD standard is to have separate model files for existing information (master files) and new information (local files generated by TCCD design and maintenance staff). It is still beneficial to use the “N” designation in new model files. The “E” designation should be used when it is necessary to combine existing and new work in the same file. Those combined files should NEVER override the master drawings of existing conditions.
A -W A L L -F U L L -D I M S -N
A AbandonedDExisting to demolishEExisting to remainFFuture workMItems to be movedNNew workTTemporary workXNot in contract1-9 Phase numbers
STATUS FIELD CODES
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 1908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 18
Note that the use of the Status field as allowed by the TCCD standard is still optional, but should be applied consistently on any project on which it is used. There is no requirement to use the Status field – this is a project decision – use the field if it helps to control layers associated with work status or construction phasing that need to be isolated, turned off, or frozen.
Using the Status Field for Model Files of Existing Data Use of the Status field in model files that contain existing project data shall be limited to the following:
D – for existing items that are designated for demolition M – for existing items that are designated to be moved Using the “D” and “M” status designations will allow for items on those layers to be frozen or turned off so that model files with existing data, when x-referenced into model files of new work, will accurately reflect the project in “final design” view.
Using the Status Field for Model Files of New Work Use of the status field suffix for layers within model files of new work shall be limited to the following:
N – to designate new work within existing facility/ site F – to designate future work, not part of the current contract T – to designate temporary work 1-9 – to designate construction phasing
TCCD standard layers are shown in layer tables in Appendix C. The layers should be deployed into AutoCAD drawings using appropriate AutoCAD templates and Layer Library Manager (LLM) Add-in. AutoCAD Templates and standard layers are organized by discipline.
Note the following when using standard layers:
Purge drawings of unused layers
Insert blocks on the layer that the block is most closely associated with. For example, a sanitary manhole symbol might be inserted on C-SSWR-MHOL layer.
Do not reproduce the General Layers to other disciplines and change the Discipline Designator, such as creating an E-ANNO-SYMB layer in lieu of the G-ANNO-SYMB. The General Layers are intended for use in all disciplines and should retain the “G” Discipline Designator when used.
o Note that some disciplines do include specific ANNO layers such as C-SSWR-ANNO when it is common to need to isolate certain discipline specific text.
Do not put anything on layer zero or on the Defpoints layer. Defpoints is not recognized by NCS and receives data that is generated by AutoCAD. For these reasons, notes intended for users to see but not plot should be put on other “no plot”
20
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 19
If there are multiple options for layers, pick the most general. Only use more specific layers if you know that greater granularity is needed in the layer assignments.
layers. Note that NO information should exist outside the title block in paper space because it will be included in the “extents” when plotting the sheet.
Do not change the line thickness or line type of a standard layer. It is acceptable to force a line type on individual entities in certain cases, but do not change the line type associated with the layer.
o Refer to the “Layer Properties / Line Types” sections below for instances when line types can be forced.
Making Decisions about Layer Selection TCCD’s layering standard follows the NCS layering standard (AIA layering system). This standard provides discipline-based layers that draw from the NCS standard where needed and add layers within the discipline where needed. Layers that are added strictly follow the NCS layering syntax and format. Generally, the NCS provides more than enough layers to distinguish aspects of an AutoCAD drawing. An effort has been made in developing the TCCD standard layers to narrow down the NCS layers to those commonly needed and to minimize the number of decisions AutoCAD users have to make when assigning layers. For example, the NCS standard provides 10 structural layers for structural bracing, allowing bracing to be defined by material and orientation. However, the TCCD standard only includes 1 of the 10 layers (S-BRCG) of the standard database of layers that is automatically deployed using TCCD’s AutoCAD template. This should suffice for most projects but the standard does allow for the user to add suffixes when more detail is needed. In many cases, there are multiple choices for a layer. Unless the more detailed distinction is necessary, always select the simplest (most general) layer. Example - Layer Choices for Columns* S-COLS S-COLS-PRIM S-COLS-RCON S-COLS-WOOD S-COLS-ALUM * These are not actual TCCD layers – this is an example The following approach is taken in creating and maintaining the list of standard TCCD layers: • Number of layers are limited to the greatest extent possible to avoid drafters having to make decisions about which layer to use, while still providing enough detail to adequately manage the layers on drawings for appearance and plotting • The general layers should not be re-created within every discipline. The general layer groups can be added to any drawing but the “G” prefix should remain.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 20
• Major Groups that are in the NCS standard, but provide more granularity than needed, are limited to one group. For example, the TCCD standard only uses the PVMT (Pavement) Major Group, eliminating similar Major Groups of ROAD, HGWY. • Minor Group 1 choices of different types of material are generally eliminated from the TCCD standard such that the layer for columns is simply S-COLS, eliminating the layer choices of S-COLS-ALUM, S-COLS-RCON, S-COLSSTEL, and S-COLS-WOOD.
Each standard layer, in addition to a layer name, includes definitions for the layer properties of color, line type, line thickness, plot style, and whether or not the layer is plotted. The following should be noted in reference to the standard TCCD layers: • The TCCD plotting standard is to plot by color representing a specified line weight, NOT by the line thickness assigned to the layer. The TCCD plotting standard is color-based (CTB) rather than style-based (STB).
• For black & white plotted lines, the colors are limited to the 1-9 primary colors in the AutoCAD Color Index (ACI). For Grey Lines (referred to as halftones) a transparency value is assigned to the layer property rather than screening assigned in the plot style table (CTB) file. For lines plotted in color a specific set of colors will be identified.
22
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 21
• Because of the above, only one CTB file will be required for ALL TCCD drawings for all disciplines. Each of the layer properties is described below (Sections 5.9 and 5.10).
Each standard layer is assigned color based on a number of considerations including the following: • Colors are selected logically based on what line weight the layer will need to print. For example, a wall layer is green, as it needs to print darker, and layers used to define hatch patterns will typically be light gray, with transparency assigned as needed, so that the hatch "does the talking" but does not dominate the drawing. • Colors are selected to clearly show up on black backgrounds, with consideration given to other common background colors that some users select. Because plotting is based on color assignments, changing the color of layers will impact plotting. Therefore, it is not acceptable for users to modify the color assignments, unless approved by a Senior AutoCAD Manager.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 22
Some additional rules should be observed for projects with black and white plotting:
Only change colors if necessary - for example, if you are color blind and have trouble seeing certain colors on screen. Do not change just because you like red better than yellow. • Prior to saving the drawing, colors should be reset to the assigned layer color with Layer States Manager in AutoCAD.
Each TCCD standard layer is assigned a line type from one of five approved line type sets, described in the table below.
in mmColor 1 Black 0.0276"0.7000 mmColor 2 Black 0.0197"0.5000 mmColor 3 Black 0.0157"0.4000 mmColor 4 Black 0.0118"0.3000 mmColor 5 Black 0.0079"0.2000 mmColor 6 Black 0.0059"0.1500 mmColor 7 Black 0.0039"0.1000 mmColor 8 Black 0.0035"0.0900 mmColor 9 Black 0.0025"0.0500 mmColor 12 Red TBD TBDColor 30 Use Object Color TBD TBDColor 50 Yellow TBD TBDColor 80 Green TBD TBDColor 130 Cyan TBD TBDColor 170 Blue TBD TBDColor 220 Magenta TBD TBDColors not listed above Black 0.0059"0.1500 mm Object Color
Color on
Screen
Plot Style Table Settings
Black & White Settings
Color Line Settings
Other Colors
Properties
LineweightPlot Style Color
Line Type Set DescriptionGeneral line types are generic in nature and are used for many different layers.Site line types such as utilities, fence lines, paving lines, etc.Building material line types such as walls, floors, insulation, etc.MEP line types – mechanical, electrical, plumbing, process, under-building utilities, etc.Sized Utility – See comments below.
24
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 23
The General group includes line types that are part of AutoCAD, and are used on layers in all disciplines. The Site related, Building related, and mechanical/electrical/plumbing line type sets are self-explanatory. In a few cases there may be line types duplicated between these sets. The Sized Utility set includes line types such as ------16”G--- for 16” Natural Gas line. These are for situations when the size of the utility as part of the line type is appropriate. Examples of this include: • Agency, client requirements • Planning drawings where utility size needs to be identified without cluttering up the drawing • Utilities where safety is a concern, such as high pressure gas lines When this line type is necessary, simply override the line type of the layer to assign a “sized” version – such as changing the standard assignment of -------G------- for the C-NGAS-UNDR layer to ------16”G---------. Do not create separate layers for each size of utility. Do not change the line type assigned to the layer.
TCCD_acad.lin File AutoCAD references a default acad.lin file for the line type definitions. TCCD Standards defined and created some custom line types (NFPA compliant fire walls, utility line types, mechanical line types, etc.). All TCCD AutoCAD users as well as outside consultants MUST use TCCD provided TCCD_acad.lin. Refer to Appendix E for standard line types.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 24
Each layer is assigned an appropriate color out of a set of standard colors and associated plotted line weights shown in the table below and line type out of set of standard line types shown in the Appendix E.
26
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 25
The TCCD plotting standard is color-based (CTB) rather than style-based (STB). This allows tremendous flexibility in the manner in which shading and color are treated.
TCCD_Standard.ctb is the Plot Style Table to be used with ALL TCCD Facility Master drawings. This plot style table allows for both Black & White as well as Color plotting. All paper space layout tabs should have the following setting:
All standard layers have their own color and line type assigned (listed in the Appendix C). If necessary, users may modify the color of a layer for the drawing presentation, such as showing certain layers in color. For example, all layers, by default, are assigned to plot as black. However, by modifying the color property of one or more, items on those layers will plot in an assigned color.
Screening Screening may be accomplished by setting the Transparency Property for a layer to the appropriate value (such as 50%).
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 26
Setting Existing Conditions as "Background" A common use of screening is when it is desired to include existing condition floor plan information in the background of a Mechanical or Life Safety drawing showing discipline specific features, with the intent of having the floor plan show up while not overwhelm the drawing. To accomplish this, simply select the layers associated with the existing conditions and set the Transparency to 75%-50% (depending on your printer) for those layers. It is critical that screened areas of plotted, scanned, and copied sheets be checked for appropriate appearance since screening tends to fade or darken when copied (especially after successive copying) or when scanned. Ideally, original plotted sheets should always be issued, but if copies are necessary, they should only be made from original sheets.
Introduction When considering all disciplines in a project, number of layers needed is overwhelming to manage. Using a drawing template with all of the layers present is helpful, but sometimes gets cumbersome if you only need a handful of layers to work with. To make drawing process and layer management process, TCCD is implementing a Layer Library Manager. LLM is a third party developed Add-in which appears in the AutoCAD ribbon after it is installed.
LLM is used to quickly import layers for any discipline into your drawings with already pre-defined layer properties (layer, color, linetype, lineweight, transparency, etc.) Implementation Use the following steps to acquire and install LLM on your workstation:
Add-in can be found at Autodesk App web page: apps.autodesk.com
Search for “Layer Library Manager”
Select and install Layer Library Manager LLM developed by CAD Manager Tool, LLC
Contact your CAD manager for Set up and Library Files
28
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 27
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 2908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 28
When annotating AutoCAD drawings, a few guidelines should be followed:
Annotation of drawing items should always be on layers with “ANNO” or “TEXT” as a major or minor group. The General layer group includes a set of G-ANNO layers that should be used in all disciplines. The Discipline Designator for these layers should always be G; it should not be changed to A or C or any other Discipline Designator.
When annotation will repeatedly occur in a drawing type, such as sanitary sewer piping, which needs to be controlled separately from the rest of the annotation in the drawing, it is acceptable to create layers such as C-SSWR-PIPE-TEXT.
Annotation will typically be in the model space view of a model file. And it should be placed on the annotation layers as needed.
The use of Arial family fonts for the TCCD standard has been selected. Follow these rules when using these fonts:
Use a width factor of 0.8 (except for Arial Narrow) on all text styles, but most importantly in general notes, tags, and dimensions.
To get italics, apply italics option in the text editor as needed, NOT in the Font Style.
To accentuate items of critical importance, use bold option in the text editor, NOT in the Font Style. Underline in the text editor can also be used.
ALL of the text, dimensions, multi-leaders, tags, and symbol blocks should be set to “Annotative” and only contain appropriate annotation scales assigned. A few text styles were defined as non-annotative to be used with in block attributes and line type definitions only.
30
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 29
Text Style Names Text styles are named based on the use:
The “Standard” font style will remain in all drawings as it is a default AutoCAD style and it cannot be deleted. Because most AutoCAD users modify this style to match their own drafting standards, this is not a recommended style definition to use. If drawings are acquired from outside consultants with a different definition of this style, it may adversely affect your own drawing. In TCCD Standards, “Standard” font style is defined as follows:
Some additional text styles were defined to be used with TCCD standard block attributes and Line Types. If you have any questions regarding the use of these text styles, contact your CAD manager.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 30
Text and dimension text should always read left to right and bottom to top. When text is oriented at an angle between horizontal and vertical the following guide should be used in determining text orientation. Notice as text approaches vertical orientation, as in the top left and bottom right quadrants below; it is read top to bottom.
Use associative dimensioning whenever possible.
Never force or override dimensions (do not manually enter 10’-6” as a dimension if the drafted distance is actually 10’-6 ½”).
o The exception to this might be a detail that was not drawn to scale. In this case the dimension would read NTS.
Never explode dimensions.
Model space entities shall be dimensioned in model space and paper space entities shall be dimensioned in paper space.
o While cross-space dimensioning is possible, this should be avoided unless necessary for practical reasons.
Dimension precision is independent of drawing precision, which is covered in the Units and Precision module.
The overall objective with dimensioning is for all dimensions of a similar type to have a uniform appearance in terms of arrowheads or ticks, offsets, text height, and other dimension settings. To accomplish this objective, TCCD has developed common dimension
32
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 31
styles to achieve dimensioning consistency throughout all drawings. TCCD dimension styles should be used for all dimensioning. Annotative dimension styles are provided for decimal and architectural formats. Decimal format dimension styles use arrows only and are used for Feet units. Architectural format dimension styles use ticks and are used for Inch units (displayed as: 10’-6 ½”)
Annotative dimension styles are the only method of dimensioning permitted by the TCCD AutoCAD Standards, because they control the scale automatically. Modifying placed dimensions are subject to the following rules:
Do not modify TCCD Dimension Style definitions
If a placed dimension requires modifying a property (i.e., text position, flip arrow, extension line turned off, etc.) you can do so via the properties palette or right-click context menu.
Only applicable scales should be assigned to ALL annotative objects. Avoid using “Add scales to annotative objects when the annotation scale changes”
Dimension Style Use by Drawing Category As described in the Units and Precision module, drawings are broken into three categories; Building, Site Work, and Survey. For Building work, which encompasses Architectural, Structural, and MEP drawings, dimension styles with “Inch” units and “Tick” terminators should be used. For Survey and Site work drawings, dimension styles with “Feet” units and
“Arrow” terminators should be used.
Architectural Example
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 32
Civil Example
All callout type annotation shall be made using the TCCD Multi-leader styles described below. Rules of good drafting, such as having the same length for all lines of Mtext whenever possible and not crossing leader lines, should be followed on all drawings.
Callouts with leaders should always be created using Multileaders. The “leader” and “Qleader” methods should not be used.
Leader style and all Multileaders used in the TCCD drawing must be annotative. Both right and left justified text can be used in drawings, with left justified being preferred. Regardless, the left justification or right justification should be consistent on the entire drawing set. Key settings are listed below:
Text – multi-line text, ALL CAPS, Arial, at 3/32” text height (Use TCCD_Standard text style).
Justification – Right/top justify if leader on right and left/top justify if leader on left (see example below).
Leader – There should be ½ text height (3/64”) between text and landing line of leader, and the landing line length should equal the text height (3/32”). The leader line should always be straight, not splines (area callout is the exception).
Terminator – Size shall be 3/32”. The default terminator type is a closed, filled arrow. However, other terminator types are discussed in the subsection titled “Leader Terminator Types” on the next page.
34
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 33
Leader Terminator Types It is important for the drawings to convey information in a clear, consistent, and effective manner. To accomplish that TCCD standard requires the use of different leader terminations when calling out objects on the drawings. The standard terminator types are described and pictured here:
Closed filled – This is the most common type of arrowhead and should be used for pointing to a general location of an object, such as top of wall. End of arrowhead should touch the object.
Dot blank – Use this type for identifying a small object such as rebar in section view (in fact, this will almost exclusively apply to rebar).
Dot – Use this type for adding notes to the dimension string.
None – Use this type for pointing to a particular location on an object such as a box highlighting a section that is detailed elsewhere or calling attention to a revision cloud with a note.
Integral – Use this type for pointing to an object or region but not a specific location on the object or region.
Loop – Use this type for identifying conduits, pipes, horizontal rebar, etc.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 34
Multileader Styles
Annotative multi-leader styles are the required callout method for TCCD drawings and standard (non-annotative) multi-leaders cannot be used. Modifying placed multi-leaders are subject to the following rules:
Do not modify TCCD Multi-leader Style definitions.
If a placed Multi-leader requires modifying a property (i.e., text size, different terminator symbol, etc.) you can do so via the properties palette or right-click context menu.
Only applicable scales should be assigned to ALL annotative objects. Avoid using “Add scales to annotative objects when the annotation scale changes”.
Do not explode multi-leaders.
36
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 35
In general, all tables should be created using the “Insert Table” method. It is not acceptable to create tables by simply drawing lines and text. It is understood that Civil 3D, AutoCAD Architecture, AutoCAD MEP and similar systems that run on top of AutoCAD create tables that are linked to the drawing data such as door schedules. These are certainly acceptable – see Properties and Layout below for differences in how these tables are treated in terms of paper space versus model space. Table editing is much simpler and more efficient when using a Table Object in AutoCAD. A TCCD table style called “TCCD_Standard” has been created for general table creation and is available via the TCCD drawing template. All tables should be placed on the G-ANNO-TABL layer unless a more discipline-specific layer assignment is needed. All tables that are created using the Insert Table method in AutoCAD should be created in paper space. See Appendix F for the standard schedule format based on the NCS v6.0.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 36
The ability to link tables from Microsoft Excel to AutoCAD can be extremely beneficial in terms of accuracy and efficiency.
Do not use OLE links for this as there are significant formatting issues and other limitations. It is strongly encouraged to use this functionality as it leverages the ability to use calculations in Excel, which is ideal for tables such as space square footage tracking and different occupancy type calculations. A Data Link can be created prior to, or during the Insert Table process. The following rules should be followed: 1. Format your Excel Table the way you want it to appear in AutoCAD. 2. Select the range that encompasses your table in Excel and name the range – use a logical name like "Occupancy_Table". Note that you can have as many named ranges as you like in the Excel Workbook – simply name each range that you want to link to AutoCAD. 3. Create a Data Link to the Excel file and the named range in the file. 4. Import the “TCCD_Standard” table style and set it current. 5. Create a table using Insert Table and select the option to create the table from the Data Link created above. 6. Modify the table by setting the “Cell style” and “Row style” to “Title”, “Header”, and “Data” as necessary to use the table style properties.
38
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 37
File Management of Linked Tables It is important that any Excel files that are linked to tables in AutoCAD reside under the CAD directory in the project folder, specifically in the “3 – Misc” folder, as described in “Electronic File Management” section. These files should be clearly under control of the CAD designers and drafters such that other project team members do not have "ready access" outside of the CAD folder where they may alter the Excel file without realizing the information is linked to a CAD drawing. If necessary, the Excel file should be protected, however password protection should not be used. Alternatively (or in addition) the file properties should be set to “Read-Only”. The naming convention for Excel files linked to AutoCAD tables is the same as the model files naming convention found in the Electronic File Management module.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 3908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 38
In order to employ the best drawing practices, productivity, and efficient file size management, follow best drawing management practices including:
Ensure that all lines that should meet at intersections do meet at intersections (always use OSNAP’s).
Avoid crossing leader or dimension lines.
Draw objects accurately – For example, use 0.0833 to represent 1" in decimal feet instead of 0.08.
Blocks should not be inserted on top of each other even if on different layers.
No drawing objects should remain on Layer 0.
Purge all drawings of empty, unused, or non-essential drawing data. This includes all unused layers, line types, blocks, fonts and entities. At the end of the project use “super purge” command: -purge
Audit all drawings and fix all errors.
Make sure the following variables are set correctly:
o LTSCALE = 1/3 o MSLTSCALE = 1
o PSLTSCALE= 1
All drawing objects except those schematic in nature shall be created or inserted at 1:1 in model space and on the correct coordinate system. Alternatively, technical schematic drawings may be drawn “not to scale.” Examples of technical schematics include:
Schedules
Riser diagrams
Schematic diagrams
Single line diagrams o This does not refer to drawings created during the schematic phase of a project.
Creating Details, Sections, Elevations, and Schematics When drafting details, sections, elevations, and schematics, the G-DETL, G-SECT, and G-ELEV layers should be used (See Appendix C, Drawing View Layer List section). These include a variety of line types and line weights. This convention greatly reduces the number of layers needed for these types of files.
Creating Blocks When creating blocks, the following guidelines should be followed:
Make sure the block does not already exist in a standards library.
40
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 39
Follow block naming convention described below.
Nested blocks are permitted but should be avoided whenever possible.
Create blocks on layer 0 (zero) with all properties BY LAYER so that the block inherits the properties of the layer on which it is inserted. If a block is complex enough to require multiple line weights or line styles, standard layers should be used, but use as few as possible.
Use logical insertion points such as the center of a circle or the lower-left corner of a square.
Blocks that contain a text variable should use an attribute. Attributes must use TCCD standard text properties.
Dynamic Blocks are preferred where a single block can replace numerous blocks of similar types or size variables.
Do not use the “TCCD” prefix when naming blocks as this is reserved for Tarrant County College District standard blocks and symbols.
Anny annotation and symbols blocks should be “Annotative”.
Use TCCD standard blocks whenever applicable.
TCCD Standard Block Naming TCCD standard block naming is similar to the NCS layer naming standard, which breaks up layer names into four or more field types. The TCCD block names are prefixed with “TCCD” and are named in accordance with the following convention:
TCCD BlockName = TCCD-Discipline-Major group-Minor group-Description_Identifier (The Minor group and the Identifier are optional) Examples:
TCCD-C-FIRE-HYDR – TCCD-Civil-Fire-Hydrant TCCD-E-CIRC-JBOX – TCCD-Electrical-Circuit-Junction Box Do not modify or redefine TCCD standard blocks and symbols! User created and project specific blocks will follow the same naming convention as above, except TCCD- prefix will be dropped (avoid anonymous blocks, such as *U29 or UNL468$54):
C-FIRE-HYDR –Civil-Fire-Hydrant
E-CIRC-JBOX –Electrical-Circuit-Junction Box
TCCD provides standard Title Blocks for all common sheet sizes. 24x36 vertical Title block is the TCCD preferred standard and should be used on all projects unless another size or orientation title block is required due to the nature of the project. Title blocks should be inserted as a block in paper space on layer G-ANNO-REFR.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 40
The base point of the standard title block is the lower left corner of the invisible sheet boundary and the insertion point in paper space is 0, 0. The title block should default to this insertion point when inserted. Attributes may be edited upon insertion or with AutoCAD Sheet Set Manager. The advantage of using Sheet Set Manager is that attributes within the sheet can be labeled on all title blocks (as well as elsewhere in the sheet) simultaneously. The use of Sheet Set Manager is considered a TCCD best practice as it improves efficiency and reduces the possibility of errors associated with callout information. All applicable fields in the title block MUST be filled out. Project Number, Name, Sheet Title, and Sheet Number are defined in the Sheet Set Manager. Refer to Appendix K for detailed explanation of Title Block attribute data.
Cover Sheets for Consultants Block named TCCD-G-ANNO-TTBK-CVER_CONSULT.dwg is to be use by all the consultants generating drawing for TCCD projects. Project specific attributes must be populated. Space below the horizontal line is reserved for the use of consultants. It can be used for project renderings, images, or maps. Items such as legends, abbreviations, sheet list, etc. will be placed on the subsequent sheet with a standard Title Block.
42
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 41
Cover Sheets for TCCD In-House Design Team Block named TCCD-G-ANNO-TTBK-CVER_INHOUSE.dwg is to be used by all TCCD in-house projects. Project specific attributes must be populated. Space below the horizontal line is reserved for the campus map (block named TCCD-G-ANNO-FWMAP-COVER.rfa must be inserted and visibility state selected based on the campus) and additional TCCD governing body information. Items such as legends, abbreviations, sheet list, etc. will be placed on the subsequent sheet with a standard Title Block.
TCCD provides a standard north arrow. The north arrow is a dynamic block with two distinct visibility states:
Architectural (top right)
Engineering (bottom right) When using a TCCD drawing template, the north arrow will be inserted on the TCCD standard layer G-ANNO-SYMB. The north arrow should not be exploded, redefined or modified, even with Refedit. The insertion point of the block is the center. The north arrow block name is: TCCD-G-ANNO-NRTH-DYN.dwg
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 42
TCCD provides a standard bar scale as a dynamic block with the most common scales built into it. The bar scale should be inserted on layer G-ANNO-SYMB. The units may be set to inches, feet or meters. The insertion point of the block is the left center. The bar scale should not be exploded, redefined or modified, even with Refedit. The bar scale block name is: TCCD-G-ANNO-BARS-DYN
Every space in TCCD facility will have a room identifying tag on the drawings. TCCD-G-ANNO-ROOM-TAG block has been designed in such way as to capture critical information that TCCD staff will manage. All applicable fields of both visible and invisible attributes must be filled in for every space.
Space type definition is controlled and selected via a drop down view menu. For space usage definitions and typical room name abbreviations please refer to the Appendix H.
To establish TCCD brand and unified look of drawing set produced by the different consultants, TCCD requires that all consultants as well as in-house design teams use TCCD issued drawing titles. Drawing titles are set up in such way that allows for a total of (3) line titles. This option is controlled via attributes.
44
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 43
There are a number of additional typical blocks developed for use in TCCD drawings for all trades. This library will be continually evolved so please request the updated library before starting a new project. Refer to Appendix I for the additional block definitions.
When hatching, the following guidelines should be followed:
Hatching shall be drawn on layers with “PATT” as a minor or minor2 category.
Do not use polylines with increased width for hatching.
Do not use hatch patterns that are not AutoCAD standard or included in the hatch patterns set for the TCCD standard.
To reduce drawing size, it may make sense to only hatch certain portions of an area, such as hatching representative areas of a paving hatch for parking lot or a brick hatch for a wall elevation.
It is preferred for all hatching to be "associative" or "annotative" – both of these describe methods of producing hatch patterns in AutoCAD. Refer to the sections below for more information on these.
The hatch border should be placed on a "No Plot" layer.
Associative Hatch Patterns Use associative hatching if you want the hatch updated when you change the boundary.
Hatched areas created with the HATCH command are associative by default.
Set your variable HPASSOC to one (1). Hatch patterns and gradient fills are associated to the boundaries and update when the boundaries are changed.
Set your system variable HPGAPTOL to zero (0). Specifies the maximum gap (or opening) that is to be bridged when trying to form a closed hatch boundary.
After a hatch pattern is edited, it may need to be re-associated.
Column to be stretched down
Result of editing boundary with non-associative hatch
Result of editing
boundary with associative hatch
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 44
Annotative Hatch Patterns Use annotative hatching if you want the hatch scale to match the drawing scale and want the hatch to be associative. Instead of creating multiple annotations at different sizes and on separate layers, you can turn on the annotative property by object or by style, and set the annotation scale for layout or model viewports. The annotation scale controls the size of the annotative objects relative to the model geometry in the drawing.
Annotative Hatch Patterns - Example
46
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 45
External References (Xrefs) When working with Xrefs, the following guidelines should be observed:
All Xrefs should be set as "overlays" – do not “attach” or “bind”. Occasionally there are exceptions to this guideline in that it might be necessary to “attach” an Xref for a specific purpose.
Xrefs should never be exploded, redefined or modified, even with Refedit.
Xrefs should always be on the same coordinate system and at the same scale as the drawing they are referenced into.
Xrefs should always be on a TCCD standard layer for Xrefs. In most cases, all Xrefs can be placed on the standard “G-ANNO-REFR” layer. However, if Xrefs need to be on separate layers, additional layers may be created with a Minor 2 Category such as “G-ANNO-REFR-UTIL” for a utility drawing.
Always use relative file paths for Xrefs to ensure that character limits for the Xref path are not exceeded.
Do not exceed 15 Xrefs per file, unless approved by TCCD.
External Reference map must be provided for every project in a Microsoft Excel format for all drawings containing Xrefs. This file should follow appropriate naming conventions and is stored on a “3 – Misc” folder and described further in the Standards Manual.
Image Files Image files shall be treated similarly to Xrefs, except for the assigned layer, “G-ANNO-REFR-IMAG.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 46
Following the cover sheet, sheets should be organized into subsets as per below image:
TCCD Sheet numbering Syntax follows NCS recommendations with some modification for the Facility Master Drawings and includes the following components:
The discipline designator, consisting of one alphabetical character and a hyphen or two alphabetical characters and a hyphen.
The sheet type designator, consisting of one numerical character.
The sheet sequence number, consisting of two numerical characters. Sheet numbering refers to the sheet designation labeled in a specified spot within the title block that uniquely identifies the sheet. Sheets are drawings that are part of the contract document set and the sheet number is therefore quite important for organizing the
48
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 47
drawing set and for referencing between drawings. An example of sheet numbering is shown below.
The syntax for assigning sheet numbers is shown below: Examples:
A-102 – Architectural Plan, Second Floor A-105 – Fifth Floor Architectural Master Plan S-220 – Structural Framing elevations P-602 – Plumbing Riser Diagrams Note the cover sheet does not have a Discipline Designator, or Sheet Type Designator. The sheet number is simply “Cover” or no designation at all. Each section of the Sheet Numbering Syntax, specifically Discipline Designator and Sheet Sequence Designator are explained in the sub-sections below.
Discipline Designator The Discipline Designator creates the primary “sort order” of the drawing set. Sheets are grouped by discipline and disciplines are ordered in a logical fashion, according to NCS.
Sheet number A-102 (Architectural Plan, 2nd Floor)
X -NNLEVEL 1DISCIPLINEDESIGNATOR SHEET SEQUENCE DESIGNATOR
NSHEET TYPE DESIGNATOR
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 4908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 48
CODE DISCIPLINECover Sheet
G General
H Hazardous Materials
V Survey / Mapping
B Geotechnical
C Civil/ Site
U Site Utilities
S Structural
L Life Safety
A Architectural
K Space Tracking
I Interiors
Q Equipment
F Fire Protection
P Plumbing
D Process
M Mechanical
E Electrical
W Distributed Energy
T Telecommunications
R Resource
X Other Disciplines
Z Contractor / Shop Drawings
O Operations
LEVEL 1 DISCIPLINE DESIGNATOR
Discipline Designator Table in order of drawing set, rather than alphabetical: The primary organizer of drawing sets is disciplines. The order that the disciplines appear in the drawing set generally follows the order in which a project is built, starting with site related disciplines (geotechnical, civil, landscape, hazardous materials, etc.), then to overall building/facility related disciplines (architectural, structural, interiors), then to building/facility systems (mechanical, electrical, plumbing, etc.), and finally to construction and maintenance with shop drawings and operations.
Sheet Type Designator The Sheet Type Designator is a single digit that indicates the “type” of information presented on the sheet such as plan, elevation, schedule, etc. If multiple types of information are presented on a sheet, select the dominant one from this table. The practice of putting multiple information types on a sheet is encouraged to avoid creating a separate sheet for a minimal amount of information.
DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
0 General Symbols legend, notes, etc.
1 Plans Horizontal views
2 Elevations Vertical views
3 Sections Sectional views, wall sections
4 Large-Scale Views Enlarged plan, elevation views, stair sections, or other sections that are not considered details
5 Details
6 Schedules and Diagrams Door schedules, equipment schedules, plantingschedules, electrical one-line diagrams, etc.
7 User Defined
8 User Defined
9 3D Presentations Isometrics, perspectives, photographs
SHEET TYPE DESIGNATOR
TCCD does not have any types defined, but reserves the option to do so in future TCCD AutoCAD/ BIM Standard revisions
50
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 49
Mixed Sheet Types It is common for elements of sheets to be of mixed “Sheet Types.” For example, details or elevations are often included as part of plan sheets. This is perfectly acceptable as long as:
The primary element of the sheet controls the Sheet Type Designator
The sheet title in the title block is descriptive enough to indicate the nature of the drawing, such as “Storm Drainage Plan and Details” for a storm drainage plans that includes details.
Sheet Sequence Designator Because of the wide variety of projects within TCCD, the practice of using the Sheet Sequence Designator is thoroughly controlled by the standard. Sheet Number Blocking – For large facility drawing sets such as at TCCD, it is useful to do Sheet Number Blocking, which may be defined as using the Sheet Sequence Designator to block out ranges for different types of drawings within a Sheet Type. A master floor plan example is grouping Plans (Sheet Type 1) by designating that sheet numbers in the range A-100 to A-109 are reserved for existing condition plans, A-110 to A-119 are reserved for
A-102 (uses a “Plan” sheet type designator)
SECOND FLOOR ARCHITECTURAL PLAN &
DETAILS (Title indicates that drawings is of “mixed” type)
DETAIL 1
DETAIL 2
PLAN 1
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 5108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 50
reflected ceiling plans, sheet numbers in the range A-120 to A-129 are reserved for finish plans, etc. Gaps in Sheet Sequence Number – Using the above approach to group types of sheets will create gaps between sheet sequence numbers. However, if TCCD standard is properly followed, there should be very few sheets that need renumbering when sheets are added or deleted. This is critical because most revision comments are based on sheet number. It is not necessary to designate sheet numbers as “Not Used” on the cover sheet. As long as all sheets are listed on the cover sheet, the order of the plan set should be obvious. 00 vs. 01 – The use of Sheet Sequence Designator ending in zero (0), such as A-100, A-110, A-120 etc. should be reserved for cases where a general or overall sheet, like a key plan or notes, precedes a series of other sheets. A master plan example is an Overall Campus Plan (A-110) preceding 5 sheets that are separate building plans on that campus (A-111 to A-115). Otherwise, 01 should be the first Sheet Sequence Designator.
Sheet Set Sequencing Sheet sets are ordered first by the Discipline Designator (see the Discipline Designator table for order) and then by the three digit number that is composed of the Sheet Type Designator and Sheet Sequence Designator. When sheets are placed in numerical order, this numbering system will group sheets by Sheet Type such as Cover Sheet, General, Plans, Elevations, Sections, etc. The Discipline Designator Table is taken directly from NCS (with the exception of "U" for Site Utilities and “K” for Space Tracking) and lays out the order that discipline specific drawings should fall within a plan set.
Sheet Index Lists CAD designers and technicians must recognize that projects have team members without access to CAD, but who routinely review, utilize, and/or provide design input to sheets in the project sheet set. It is considered a “best practice” to maintain a sheet list outside of the CAD environment that reflects the sheets for all disciplines (existing and planned) in the CAD environment. This is the function of the Master Sheet Index (MSI). All facility drawings as well as new projects with contract drawings are advised to maintain a Master Sheet Index (MSI) that is stored under the “3 – Misc” folder of the project folder. The filename should be G-SH-MSHT_INDEX.xlsx. In the case of multiple or distinct final packages, the description field of the filename can be modified to reflect the respective package. The MSI should be maintained by the project team member responsible of the CAD drawings on the project (project CAD coordinator).
Minimum Required Master Sheet Index Info All master sheet indexes must at minimum, include the following information:
Header information:
o Project Number, Name, and Manager
o Campus
o Building Name and ID
o File Name
52
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 51
o Date last updated o Latest Revision Number
List Information
o Sheet Index
Sheet Numbers
Sheet Titles o Completion date (must be included once issued for construction, if applicable) o Comment column for coordination notes and to indicate ‘placeholder’ drawings (i.e. drawings that are planned but not yet assembled)
Using the MSI in the Plan Sets The other function of the MSI is to be used / shown as the sheet index in the plans. This can be accomplished by Data Linking the MSI into the plan set. Sheet Index will also maintain a dynamic link between the plans and the MSI. When using the Sheet Set Manager (SSM) to manage your drawings within the plan set, replicate the MSI as closely as possible. This also facilitates the use of just one MSI and the ability to have it displayed in multiple places.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 5308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 52
An AutoCAD file is an electronic file that represents one or more sheets in the project drawing set (sheet files), “component" drawings, or data files (model files, schedule files,
details files) that are referenced into the sheet files. TCCD file structure is organized to facilitate proper management of the Master Facility Drawings and keep them separated from the on-going projects. Later described workflow allows for efficient updates to facility master drawings based on any completed projects. Folder structure screen shots shown throughout this section indicate the standard file management practices, but do not show an entire folder structure.
0 – Master Facility Drawings This is where the Master Facility drawings will be stored. Drawings will be in a read only format (write-protected) and used as a reference and for information reporting purposes.
1 – Current Projects – In-House Contains active project drawings generated at TCCD by TCCD design team.
2 – Current Projects – Consultants Contains active project drawings generated by the outside consultant teams.
3 – Completed Projects – Add To Masters Contains complete project close-out documentation, including final as-built drawings, generated by either TCCD in-house teams or outside consultants; that are to be incorporated into the Master Facility Drawings and databased for archival information.
4 – Record Drawings Contains all of the existing drawings TCCD has for all facilities and sites in DWG, PDF, TIFF, JPG and other formats. These files are databased and searchable. They should only be used as historical reference documents.
54
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 53
XXXX -BUILDING ID MASTER_SETDESCRIPTION
Sheet File is NCS term for the electronic files that represent the sheets that will be printed as part of your project drawing set, or contract drawings. Sheet files generally include a sheet border in paper space, various paper space symbols and annotations, and typically include viewports to drawing information in model space where drawing objects and one or more model files may reside. This folder should contain only sheet files that make up the sheet set; however Sheet Set Manager (SSM) .DST files, should reside here as well.
Creating Subfolders under Sheet Files As a general rule, subfolders should only be created to segregate drawings by discipline as is shown above. For Current Projects, the discipline subfolders can be omitted if project size and scope does not warrant discipline subfolders.
Using Multiple Sheet Tabs within Sheet Files AutoCAD allows multiple sheets in the sheet set to be represented by a single sheet file containing multiple sheet tabs. The TCCD standard requires having one sheet tab per sheet file.
Sheet Set Manager File Names Due to the probability of having multiple sheet sets open from different projects at the same time, the following naming convention must be used. Facility Master Drawings:
Examples: TRWF-MASTER_SET.dst SACT-MASTER_SET.dst All Other Projects:
Examples: 20028-TRTR_MATH_EMPORIUM.dst 20154-TR_FIRE_PANEL_UPGRADES.dst
NNNNN -TCCD PROJECT NUMBER NNNNNNNNNNDESCRIPTION
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 5508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 54
XXXX _X M -NNBUILDING ID LEVEL 1DISCIPLINEDESIGNATOR MASTER SHEET SEQUENCE DESIGNATOR
NSHEET TYPE DESIGNATOR
Sheet File Naming Convention Sheet file naming convention differs from the actual Sheet Numbering convention and includes Building ID prefix for all sheet files (and an “M” designator for Facility Master Drawings only). Different projects can have the same sheet number (such as Architectural 2nd floor plan: A-102), but it is critical that there is minimal file name duplication to avoid accidental file overrides when moving or copying files between projects. Sheet files shall be named in accordance with the following conventions. Facility Master Drawings:
Examples: TRWF_AM-001.dwg SACT_MM-104.dwg Sheet files naming convention differs from the actual Sheet Numbering convention and includes Building ID prefix All Other Projects:
Examples: TRWF_A-001.dwg SACT_M-104.dwg
The “2 – Model Files” folder includes all file types used to assemble the sheet files that make up the project drawing set. This includes model files, detail files, image files, and schedule / table files. All files in the “2 – Model Files” folder should be current files that are referenced or linked into sheet files. Do not "clutter" the “2 – Model Files” folder with different versions of files as this ultimately leads to confusion and errors.
Model Files Naming Convention Model files are drawings that form the "base" drawings of the project – both existing and proposed representations of the project (above ground and underground site, building layouts, etc.). Detail files, image files, and schedule / table files are another type of model file. Image files are typically TIF, JPG, etc. that are referenced into the drawings. Detail files in this context include details, sections, small plans and elevations and anything else that would fall in the DT model file type. Schedules and tables are essentially the same thing – tabular representations of detailed information, typically created in Excel and linked into the drawing.
XXXX _X -NNBUILDING ID LEVEL 1DISCIPLINEDESIGNATOR SHEET SEQUENCE DESIGNATORSHEET TYPE DESIGNATOR
N
56
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 55
X -XXXXXXXXXX *-NN -XXXX .DWGDISCIPLINEDESIGNATORDESCRIPTION(UP TO 10 CHARACTERS)FLOOR NUMBER BUILDING ID FILE EXTENSION
-
-
-XXMODEL FILE TYPE CODEREQUIRED FIELDOPTIONAL FIELD
All model files shall be named in accordance with the following convention
* Only an underscore (_) character may be used when word separation is desired in “Description” field. Do not use dashes (-) or spaces. Discipline designators remain the same as described in section 8.2 Sheet Numbering
Syntax. The “Model File Type” table lists acceptable drawing type codes.
Examples:
A-FP-MASTER-02-TRWF.DWG - Architectural – Floor Plan – Master - 2nd Floor – Trinity River West Fork
C-UP-MASTER_WTR-WFSC.dwg - Civil – Utility Plan – Master Water – Northwest Fire Service Training Center
CODE DESCRIPTION DISCIPLINE CODE DESCRIPTION DISCIPLINE* -CS Cover Sheet I-CP Ceiling Plan* -FP Floor Plan I-EP Enlarged Plans* -SP Site Plan I-FN Finish Plans* -DP Demolition Plan I-FR Furnishings Plan* -QP Equipment Plan C-ER Environmental Plan* -XP Existing Plan C-GD Grading Plan* -EL Elevation C-SV Survey* -SC Section C-RP Roads/ Topographic Plan* -DT Detail C-UT Utility Plan* -SH Schedules C-PF Profile Plan* -3D Isometric/3D M-CT Control Plan* -DG Diagrams M-HP HVAC Plan* -IM Images (aerials, etc.)M-PP Piping Plan* -KP Key Plan E-CM Communications Plan* -NT Notes E-GP Grounding Plan* -QP Equipment Plan E-LP Lighting Plan* -ZZ Exhibits & Figures E-PW Power PlanA -CP Ceiling Plan P-PP Plumbing Plan PlumbingA -EP Enlarged Plans S-FN Foundations PlanA-FN Finish Plans S-FR Framing PlanA-FR Furnishings Plan F-KP Sprinkler Plan Fire ProtectionA-RP Roof Plan L-VP Evacuation PlanL-LS Life Safety PlanT-DP Data PlanT-TP Telephone
MODEL FILE TYPES
Drawing Type Codes that apply to all disciplines (where *- represents any discipline code)
Architectural
Interiors
Civil
Mechanical
Electrical
Structural
Life SafetyTelecommunications
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 5708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 56
10.4 Miscellaneous Files Miscellaneous files are files that are referenced into Model or Sheet files (such as schedules, Maps, Logos, etc.) or information retrieved from the Master Drawings (square footage calculations, occupancy information, fire/ smoke damper attributes extracted into a spreadsheet, etc.) Miscellaneous file naming convention should adhere to the Model file naming convention.
10.5Master Facility Drawings “Master Facility Drawings” directory is organized based on the following Hierarchy:
•Campus
oBuilding
Sheet Files
•Discipline
Model Files
•Discipline
Misc. Files All of the Drawings in the Facility Master Drawings directory will be for reference and reporting only. NO new design work should ever be done on these AutoCAD files. Only after projects are complete and a set of final as-built drawings has been provided to TCCD, TCCD Facilities Department staff will incorporate the latest information into the Facility master drawings.
58
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 57
“Current Project – In-House” directory is organized based on the following Hierarchy:
Campus
o Project
Sheet Files
Discipline
Model Files
Discipline
Misc. Files
Conceptual
Publish
Support Files
Survey All of the projects being developed by TCCD in-house design, construction, and maintenance teams will be stored in this folder for the duration of the project. “Sheet Files”, “Model Files”, and “Misc.” folders will serve the same purpose and follow same standards as described in the preceding sections 9.2 through 9.4.
Projects Projects folder naming convention will follow currently established e-Builder format.
e-Builder automatically assigns project number and the Project Manager will assign the project name.
Conceptual The Conceptual folder is intended as the storage location for model files and sheet files that only pertain to the conceptual phase of a project. The file naming convention is the same as the model and sheet files described later in this module. Subfolders may be created as needed. Serious consideration, as well as data validation should be taken before copying any conceptual data into the “Model Files” folder for use in design.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 5908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 58
Publish When drawings are published, such as to a printer/plotter “hardcopy” or DWF/PDF/PLT “digital” format, they represent the status of the drawing at the time they are published, essentially creating a picture or snapshot in time of a drawing. The published drawing loses continuity with the active drawing immediately after it is published as it has no ability to keep pace with the changes in the drawings, until the next time it is published. To the design team, the value has a short time span, but to the client or a reviewing agency, it is valuable because it is a snapshot at a particular milestone on a project. To that end, the Publish folder is intended as a temporary holding location for published drawings in a DWF, or PDF format. The published drawings either proceed to the printer/plotter for “hardcopy” distribution or to the Deliverables folder as part of a “digital” deliverable package to the client. In either case, the Publish folder should be cleared of all files after the project is complete.
Support Files Support files are all the files that are created and saved over the course of a project that neither get submitted to a client nor referenced to a file. This folder is also to store data as it is being assembled for use in the “Model Files”, “Sheet Files”, and Misc” folders (the folders containing the drawings that make up the project drawing set). Use of this folder will prevent two things that often affect project AutoCAD work from occurring:
It will keep the "production folders" (Model Files, Sheet Files, and Misc) clear of multiple versions and "junk" files, which often lead to confusion and misuse of files.
It provides a specific location to store temporary files so they are not stored on local drives or in other network folders. When folders and files in the “Support Files” folder are no longer needed, they should be deleted.
Survey The Survey folders contain Field Survey related files generated by TCCD staff and/ or outside consultants. This folder will contain documents such as field surveys for any trade, civil/ site survey information, raw point clouds generated via 3D scanner, photos, etc. Users can generate sub-folders as needed to organize different types of field information, but should use logical and easy to follow names (such as “Photos”, “Point Clouds”, “Field Notes”, etc.)
60
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 59
Projects developed by outside consultants will follow the same file storage format as the in-house projects. Any documentation received from the consultants will be placed in an appropriate folder for the project duration. Final close-out documents will be databased, incorporated into the Master Drawings and moved to the Record Drawings folder. It is the responsibility of TCCD consultants to turn over their project documentation in an appropriate format and file organization.
This is a temporary file storage location for recently complete projects. It contains complete project close-out documentation, including final as-built drawings, generated by either TCCD in-house teams or outside consultants. Once the complete project information is incorporated into the Master Facility Drawings and the rest of the documents are databased, the entire project MUST be moved to “4 – Record Drawings” folder. Maintenance of this folder should take place bi-annually.
Contains all of the existing drawings TCCD has for all facilities and sites in DWG, PDF, TIFF, JPG and other formats. These files have been sorted for duplicates, organized, databased and indexed to be searchable based on a number of project parameters. They should only be used as a historical reference document and are in a “Read-Only” format.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 6108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 60
All employees working on TCCD projects are expected to take measures to keep project folders "clean." The project CAD lead is responsible for occasionally auditing the CAD folder to ensure that this standard is being followed and that good file management practice is being employed. A few things to keep in mind: • Keep folders free of “junk”, “old”, or “erase me” files.
The “Model Files” folder and the “Sheet Files” folder should only contain current files that can be reliably used on the project. There should be no confusion as to file "versioning" because multiple versions should not exist in these folders. Use the “Support Files” folder as described herein for versioning, assembly and "experimenting", and short term archiving.
All drawings shall be purged of empty, unused, or non-essential drawing data. This includes layers, linetypes, blocks, fonts, and entities.
The following diagram is shown to depict the relationships between different file types, the standard TCCD AutoCAD folder structure, and the project drawing set.
62
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 61
Electronic AutoCAD Files, herein simply referred to as “AutoCAD files” are defined as AutoCAD drawings and include any other files referenced by the AutoCAD drawings or included for reference.
1. Unless electronic AutoCAD file distribution is explicitly defined by the contract, no AutoCAD files may be distributed to outside parties unless the policy defined herein is followed. 2. All electronic file transfers shall include a copy of the standard TCCD Terms of Electronic File Transfer (TOFT) with the transmittal. This is available on the TCCD web page (see Appendix J for a standard TOFT Form). 3. When sending the files by email or notifying the recipient of a download site by email include the TOFT at the bottom of the email or as an attachment in PDF format. 4. The electronic files should be prepared by transmittal such that all necessary data files, font files, plot settings, x-refs, etc. are included and appropriately structured. The transmittal should include adequate documentation to explain the contents of the electronic files. The standard policy for preparation of electronic documents for transmittal is to utilize the built-in “e-transmit” feature.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 6308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 62
When the term "plot file" is used herein, it refers to the file that is created from a drawing file (.DWG, .DGN, PDF, etc.) that will be sent to a plotter to produce a paper copy of the drawing file. Plot File in this standard does not refer to a .PLT file, which is a specific type of plot file but is often called a "plot file" The following three (3) categories of plot files are defined for the purposes of describing the standards for creating, naming, and organizing plot files: 1. Check Plots - are run for AutoCAD operator review, informal review or for other team members. Check plots are not associated with a formal milestone review or review submittal. 2. Milestone Review Plots - are run for established project milestones or internal review prior to project milestones. Project milestones include review milestones but not the final deliverable and are typically submitted to clients, client representatives, or review agencies. Milestone review plots are often submitted to obtain permits or approvals. 3. Final Deliverable Plots - are run for submittal of final drawings to clients, client representatives, or review agencies. Final Deliverables include: a. Bid Sets b. Construction Sets c. Supplemental Drawings d. Record Drawings
Plot File Formats The most common types of plot files are Design Web Format (DWF) and Portable Document Format (PDF) files. The TCCD standard is to produce plot files in PDF format whenever possible. While the requirements for naming and storing the two categories of plot files described above differ, all should be produced in the same plot file format as the final deliverable will be plotted in (preferably PDF) to ensure that drawings plotted for review are consistent with final deliverables.
All plot files, whether used for checking a drawing/set or a deliverable drawing/set, shall be kept in the "Publish" folder. The individual plot files
64
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 63
shall match the name of the plotted drawing. For deliverable sets, a merged single-page PDF version of the sets shall be created and moved under the "Deliverables" folder. This way the project team has access to the package, as delivered, and no duplicate plot files exist under the “Publish” folder. The relationship between the “Publish” folder and the “Deliverables” folder is illustrated in the preceding image.
In order to produce consistent plots, the selections shown below should be made when plotting sheet files. Areas circled in blue will vary by project. • Page setup – varies by project depending on the sheet size. • Printer/plotter – use AutoCAD built–in PDF generator “DWG to PDF” • Paper size – varies by project depending on the sheet size. • Plot area – Plot to extents when using the standard title blocks. There should be nothing outside the “no plot” border of the title block. • Plot offset – Center the plot when using the standard title blocks. Plot offset should indicate small positive values. • Plot Scale – Always plot 1:1 when using the standard title blocks. Select “Scale lineweights” option when producing reduced size prints. • Plot Style Table – Should always be set to TCCD_Standard.ctb
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 6508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 64
For any archiving or archive retrieval needs contact Al Clark - Assistant Director Records Management/Construction AEC Repository at TCCD. For any lost file recovery and backup file retrieval needs contact the Network Administrator at TCCD.
66
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 65
This section outlines the workflow for updating Facility Master Drawings with new project information.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 6708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 66
TCCD will hold the latest Master Facility Drawings based on the Electronic File Management procedures outlined in the preceding sections. No design work will be done on the Master Drawings directly. For new work, copies of the Master Drawings will be acquired by the project manager to use as a reference.
Following is the folder structure for managing files for new work;
On TCCD Server
0 - Master Facility Drawings: This is where all Facility Master Plans are stored.
1 - Current Projects – In House: The TCCD Project Manager obtains a copy of the relative Master Drawings for use by the in-house design staff. Progress drawings are stored in this folder.
2 - Current Projects – Consultants: The TCCD Project Manager obtains a copy of the relative Master Drawings for use by the outside Consultants. Progress drawings are stored in this folder.
3 - Completed Projects – Add to Masters: When the project is complete, the TCCD Project Manager moves the final project files to this folder. A copy of these files as well as a copy of the relevant Master Drawings is also placed on Buzzsaw to the same named folder. B-CAD will use these for updating the Master Plans.
On BUZZSAW – Under Folder “1 – From TCCD”
a – Master Plans – To Be Updated: When the project is complete, the TCCD Project Manager places a copy of the relevant Master Plans in this folder.
b – Master Database – To Be Updated: When the project is complete, the TCCD Project Manager places a copy of the Master Drawing Database in this folder.
c – Completed Project – Add to Masters: When the project is complete, the TCCD Project Manager places a copy of the final project files in this folder.
68
Tarrant County College District AutoCAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 2016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled 67
On BUZZSAW – Under Folder “2 – From B-CAD”
a – Updated Master Plans: B-CAD will update the Master Plans based on the final project files. All TCCD Standards will be followed.
b – Updated Master Drawing Database: B-CAD will update the Master Drawing Database to include all final Design Drawings. All TCCD Standards will be followed.
Final Step: The TCCD Project Manager downloads the updated Master Plans and Master Drawing Database from Buzzsaw and updates the Masters on TCCD Server.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 6908/22/2024[Appendix D]
AutoCAD Standards Manual for TCCD Facility Drawings
Updated: April 21, 2016
70
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled i
Group
Name Description Group
Name DescriptionACCSAccessCRPTCarpet / carpet tilesALGNAlignmentCSWKCaseworkALRMAlarm system CTRL Control pointsANNOAnnotationCWTRChilled water systemsAREAAreaDATAData / LAN systemAUXLAuxiliary systems DECK DeckBARRBarrierDECNDecontaminationBEAMBeamsDETLDetailBLDGBuildings and primary structures DFLD Drain fieldsBLINBaselineDIAGDiagramsBNDYPolitical boundaries DOMW Domestic water systemsBRCGBracingDOORDoorsBRDGBridgeDRANDrainsBRKLBreak / fault lines DRIV DrivewaysBRLNBuilding restriction line DTCH Ditches or washesBZNABuffer zone area DUAL Dual temperature systemsCABLCable systems DUST Dust and fume collection systemsCATHCathodic Protection System ELEC Electrical system, telecom planCATVCable television system ELEV ElevationCCTVClosed-circuit television system ELHT Electric heatCHIMChimneys and stacks EMCS Energy monitoring control systemCLNGCeilingENEREnergy management systemsCLOKClock system EQPM EquipmentCMPACompressed / processed air systems EROS Erosion and sediment controlCMPRComputerESMTEasementsCNDWCondenser water systems EVAC Evacuation planCO2SCO2 system EXHS Exhaust systemCODECode compliance plan FENC FencesCOLSColumnsFIREFire protectionCOMMCommunicationsFLHAFlood hazard areaCONTControls and instrumentation FLOR Floor
MAJOR GROUPS
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 7108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled ii
Group
Name Description Group
Name DescriptionFUELFuel systems MNTG Mounting systemFUMEFume hood MPIP Miscellaneous piping systemsFURNFurnishingsNGASNatural gas systemsGAS~Gas NODE NodeFNDNFoundationNURSNurse call systemFNSHFinishesOBSTObstructionsFRAMBraced frame or moment frame OIL~OilFSTNFasteners and connections OTGR OutgrantsGATEGatePADSPadsGLAZGlazingPGNGPaging systemGLYCGlycol systems PHON Telephone systemGRADGrading work PIPE PipingGRAYGraywater systems PLAN Key Plan (Floor Plan)GRID Grids PLAT PlatformGRLNGrade line PLNT Plant and landscape materialGRNDGround system POND PondsHWTRHot water heating system POWR PowerHVACHVAC systems PRKG Parking lotsHYDRHydraulic structure PROC Process systemsIGASInert gas PROF ProfileINSTInstrumentation system PROP PropertyINTCIntercom / PA systems PROT Fire protection systemIRRGIrrigationPRTNPartitionsJNTSJointsPVMDPhotovoltaic modulesJOISJoistsPVMTPavementLANDLandRAILRailroadLEGNLegend, symbols keys RAIR Relief air systemsLEVELeveeRCOVEnergy recovery systemsLGASLaboratory gas systems REFG Refrigeration systemsLIQDLiquidRIGGRigging / automation systemsLITELightingRIVRRiverLNTLLintelsROADRoadwaysLOCNLimits of construction ROOF RoofLTNGLightning protection system RRAP RiprapMAJQMajor equipment RUNW RunwayMDGSMedical gas systems RWAY Right-of-wayMILLMillworkSECTSectionMINQMinor equipment SERT Security systemMKUPMake-up air systems SGHT Sight distance
72
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled iii
Group
Name Description Group
Name DescriptionSIGNSignSWLKSidewalksSITESite features TILE TileSLABSlabTOPOTopographic featureSLURSlurryTRAFTrafficSMOKSmoke extraction systems TRAL Trails or pathsSOILSoilsTRANTransmission systemSOUNSound system TRUS TrussesSPCLSpecial systems TVVS Television and video systemSPFXEntertainment special effects system UNID Unidentified site objectsSPKLSprinklerUTILUtilitiesSRFSSurface sensor system VACU VacuumSSWRSanitary sewer VIDO Entertainment projection systemsSTEMSteam system WALL WallsSTIFStiffenerWATRWater supplySTRMStorm sewer WETL WetlandsSTRSStairsWINDWind poweredSURVSurveyWWAYWaterway
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 7308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled iv
ABLT Anchor bolts CA~~Compressed air-systemABOVAboveCABLCableABUTAbutmentCAIRCompressed airACCSAccessCARSCars and other vehiclesAIR~Air CATV Cable televisionALRMAlarmCAVICavityALUMAluminumCBOXCombiner boxANNNOptional number (A = letter, NNN = number between 001 and 999)CD~~Condensate drain-systemANNOAnnotationCDA~Clean dry air-systemANTNAntennaCDFFCeiling diffusersASPHAsphaltCHIMChimneyBACKBackCIPRCulvert inlet protectionBARRBarrierCIRCCircuitsBENTTop of bent CLAS ClassificationsBFW~Boiler feed water-system CLDA Cold airBKRSBreakersCLG~Chlorine gas-systemBLBDBoiler blow down piping CLHD Ceiling headsBLDGBuilding points CLNG CeilingBLINBaselineCLV~Chlorine vacuum-systemBMRKBenchmarksCLW~Concentrated lead waste-systemBNDYBoundaryCMTLCorrugated metalBOTBBottom of bank CMUW Concrete masonry unitBOTMBottomCMW~Concentrated metals waste-systemBRCKBrickCNDSCondensate pipingBRDGBridgeCNDTDiversionary/bypass conduit/culvertBRGXBridgingCNMBCircuit numbersBRKLBreak lines CNTE Construction entranceBROWBrush row points CNTJ Construction jointBRSHBrush points CNTR CenterBUSHBushes and shrubs CNTY CountyBUSSBus duct COAX Coax cableBUSWBuswaysCONCConcreteBUT~Butane-system CONS ConservationBWTRBreakwaterCPIPCold water piping
MINOR GROUPS
Group
Name Description Group
Name Description
74
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled v
Group
Name Description Group
Name DescriptionCRITCriticalDIMSDimensionsCRKTCricketsDISCDischargeCMUWConcrete masonry unit DLW~Dilute waste-systemCMW~Concentrated metals waste-system DMPR Fire, smoke, volume damperCNDSCondensate piping DOOR Equipment doorsCNDTDiversionary/bypass conduit/culvert DRAN Drainage slope indicationsCNMBCircuit numbers DRIP Drip irrigation tubingCNTEConstruction entrance DRIV Driveway pointsCNTJConstruction joint DRNS DrainsCNTRCenterDSCODisconnect switchesCNTYCountyDTCHDitches or washesCOAXCoax cable DUCT DuctworkCONCConcreteDVDKDiversion dikeCONSConservationDVDRThin dividersCPIPCold water piping EASP Elevation attributes for survey pointsCRITCriticalEDGEEdgeCRKTCricketsEG~~Ethylene glycol-systemCSTGConstruction/Grading EGW~Ethylene glycol waste-systemCSWKCaseworkELECElectricalCTLAControlled access ELEV ElevationCTLJControl joint EMER EmergencyCTNRContainer or planter ENCL Equipment enclosuresCUPWCopper plating waste-system ENGR Engineering InformationCURBCurbEPDUEquipment with piping, ductwork and electricityCURRImpress current EPIP Equipment with piping and electricityCURTCurtainEQPMEquipmentCURVCurveEQUIEquipotentialCURWCopper rinse waste-system ERTH EarthCUSWCopper slurry waste-system ESMT EasementCV~~Chemical vacuum-system EV~~Equipment vacuum-systemDATADataEVTRElevator cars and equipmentDECKDeckEXHSExhaust airDEICDe-icing EXIT ExitDEPRDepressionEXPJExpansion joint
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 7508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled vi
Group
Name Description Group
Name DescriptionDEV~Developer-system EXTI ExtinguishersDEVCDevicesEXTRExteriorDIAGDiagramsFACEFaceFALTFault/break lines GRID GridFDPLFlood plain GRIL GrillesFDTAField data GRND GroundFEEDFeedersGRTGGratingFENCFencesGRVLGravelFIBRFiber optics cable H2~~Hydrogen-systemFILEFile cabinets H2O2 Hydrogen peroxide-systemFILLFill and cover material HCDA High pressure clean dry air-systemFINEFine lines 0.18 mm (0.007")HCL~Hydrochloric acid-systemFIREFire protection HEAD Door and window headersFISHFish ladder/passage HIDD Objects or lines hidden from viewFIXDFixedHOLEHolesFIXTFixturesHORZHorizontalFLDRFloor drains HOSE HosesFLLWFlowHOTAHot airFLNEFire lane HPIP Hot water/high-pressure pipingFLORFloorHPN2High purity nitrogen-systemFLOWFlowlineHPO2High purity oxygen-systemFLPLFlagpoleHRALHandrails/guard railsFLUMFlumeHRDWHardwareFLYSFly station HSSS Hollow structural steelFNSHFinishesHTCHHatchFORCForce main HTEX Heat exhaust-systemFREEFreestandingHV~~House vacuum-systemFRMGFramingHVACHVAC systemsFTNGFootingsHVPTHorizontal/verticalFTPTArea footprints HWAL HeadwallFULLFull-height HYDT Hydrants and connectionsFURNFurnishingsIA~~Instrument air-systemFW~~Fire water-system ICW~Industrial city water-systemGAGEGaugeIDENIdentification tagsGCVRGround cover INEG Ingress/egressGENFGeneral features INPR Inlet protectionGENRGeneratorsINSTInstrumentation
76
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled vii
Group
Name Description Group
Name DescriptionGGEPGas general piping INTK IntakeGLAZGlazingINTRInteriorGNDWGround water JACK JacksGPRPGas process piping JAMB Door and window jambsGRALGuard rail JBOX Junction boxGRBMGrade beams JNTC Control jointJNTEExpansion joint MRKG Pavement markingsKEYNKey notes MRKR Landmarks or other markers for orientationLABLLabelsMSNWMasonryLADDLadders and ladder assemblies MULT Multi-conductor cableLATLLateral line MVNG Moving/SuspendedLEASLeaseMW~~Metals waste-systemLEGNLegend, symbol keys NG~~Natural gas-systemLEVLLevel changes NGAS Natural gas lineLIMILimit of earthwork NITG NitrogenLINELinesNOTENotesLINKChain link NOVR Non-overflow structureLMTALimited access NPLT Non-plotting graphic informationLO~~Lube oil-system NPW~Non-potable water-systemLOGOCompany logo NPWR Non-potable water reuse-systemLONGLongitudinalNSBRNoise barrierLOWRLowerO2~~Oxygen-systemLPG~Liquid petroleum gas-system OA~~Outside air-systemLPIPLow-pressure piping OBJT ObjectsLQPGLiquid petroleum gas OCCP Occupant or employee namesLSCPLandscapeODFFOther diffusersLTRLLateral pipe OPNG OpeningsMAINMain line OPNX Opening indicationMAJRMajorOPRPOil process pipingMARKMarkers, break marks, leaders OTLN OutlineMATCMatch lines OVHD OverheadMBNDMaterial beyond cut PADS PadsMCUTMaterial cut by the view PANL PanelsMESHMesh or wire PATT Texture or hatch patternsMETLMetalPAVRUnit pavers
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 7708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled viii
Group
Name Description Group
Name DescriptionMETRMetering devices PCAP Pile capsMHOLManholePCSTPre-cast concreteMINRMinorPCWRCooling water return-systemMISCMiscellaneousPCWSCooling water supply-systemMKUPMake-up water PENE PenetrationsMLCHMulches-organic and inorganic PENS PenstockMNTGMounting system PEQP Process equipmentMOORMooringPERIPerimeterMOVEMovablePERMPermanentMPIPMedium-pressure piping PHON Telephone linePIERDrilled piers RFEQ Rooftop equipmentPILEPilesRISRRisersPIPEPipingROADRoadwayPLNTPlantsROCKLarge rocks and rock outcroppingsPLYWPlywoodROFAAirport runway object free areaPMITPermitROOFRoofPNHSPenthouseRPIPRecirculation pipingPNLSSystem panels RRAP RiprapPOI~Point of interconnection RTWL Retaining wallPOLEPolesRWAYRight-of-wayPONDRetention pond SAFT Safety areasPOOLPools and spas SATD Satillite dishesPOSTPostsSAUDAudio signalPRCHPorchSBCKSetback linesPRCLParcelsSBSTSubstationsPRHTPartial-height SCHD SchedulesPRIMPrimarySCOMCommunications signalPRKGParkingSCTLControl signalPRO~Propane-system SDAT Data signalPROFProfileSDFFSupply diffusersPROSDate/time/file name stamp SDGA Digital audio signalPROVProvinceSDGVDigital video signalPRPTParapetSEATSeatingPUMPPumpsSECDSecondaryPV~~Vacuum-system SECT SectionPVMTPavementSHEAStructural bearing or shear walls
78
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled ix
Group
Name Description Group
Name DescriptionPW~~Potable water-system SHLF Wall-mounted shelvingRAISRaisedSIGNSignageRAMPAccessible ramp SILL Window sillsRATERatingsSILTSilt fenceRBARReinforcing bar SIZE Ductwork sizeRCONReinforced concrete SKCH SketchRDFFReturn air diffusers SKLT SkylightRDGERoof ridges SLVE Pipe sleeveRDMERead-me layer (not plotted)SMIC Microphone signalREDLRedlinesSMOKSmoke detector/heat sensorsREFRReference, external files SOUN SoundingsRETNReturnSPCLSpecial/specialtiesREVCRevision clouds SPKL SprinklersREVSRevision indicators and text SPLY SupplyRFDRRoof drains SPOT Spot elevationsSPRTSports fields TRAY Cabletray and wirewaysSPWRPower signal TREE TreesSRFIRF signal TROW Tree rowSRGBRGB and component video signal TSHP Town or townshipSSWRSanitary sewer TTLB Border and titleblockSTELSteelTURFLawn areasSTEPStepsUCPTUnder-carpet wiringSTORStorageUCTRUnder counterSTRCStructuresUGNDUndergroundSTRMStorm Sewer UPPR UpperSTRPStripingUPS~Uninterruptible power supplySTRSStair treads UPVD Unpaved surfaceSUBACabinet sub-assemblies, drawer boxes URAC Under-floor racewaysSUBDSubdivision (interior) lines UTIL Utility linesSUBSSub-surface areas V~~~Vent-systemSUPTSupportVACUVacuumSURFSurface areas VALT Vault & pitsSUSPSuspended elements VALV ValvesSVIDVideo signal VEGE Trees, shrubs, and other vegetationSWAYSpillwayVENRVeneerSWBDSwitchboardsVENTVentsSWCHSwitchesVERTVertical
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 7908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled x
Group
Name Description Group
Name DescriptionSWLKSidewalksVINEVinesSWMTStorm water management VOID Void regionsSYMBReference symbols WALL WallTABLData tables WAR~Weld argon-systemTANKStorage tanks WATR Water supplyTEMPTemporaryWDWKArchitectural woodworkTEXTTextWEIRPool weirTHERThermostatsWELLWellTICKTick marks WHIT White paintTITLDrawing or detail titles WIRE WiringTOP~Top WKSF WorksurfaceTOPBTop of bank WOOD WoodTOWRTowersXFMRTransformersTPTNToilet partitions XTRU ExtrusionTRALTrail or path ZONE Zoning
80
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xi
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
⍁-DETL-1 Red Continuous 0⍁-DETL-2 Yellow Continuous 0⍁-DETL-3 Green Continuous 0⍁-DETL-4 Cyan Continuous 0⍁-DETL-5 Blue Continuous 0⍁-DETL-6 Magenta Continuous 0⍁-DETL-7 White Continuous 0⍁-DETL-8 Color 8 Continuous 0⍁-DETL-9 Color 9 Continuous 0⍁-DETL-PATT Color 8 Continuous 25 Hatch Pattern for Details⍁-ELEV-1 Red Continuous 0⍁-ELEV-2 Yellow Continuous 0⍁-ELEV-3 Green Continuous 0⍁-ELEV-4 Cyan Continuous 0⍁-ELEV-5 Blue Continuous 0⍁-ELEV-6 Magenta Continuous 0⍁-ELEV-7 White Continuous 0⍁-ELEV-8 Color 8 Continuous 0⍁-ELEV-9 Color 9 Continuous 0⍁-ELEV-PATT Color 8 Continuous 25 Hatch Pattern for Elevations⍁-SECT-1 Red Continuous 0⍁-SECT-2 Yellow Continuous 0⍁-SECT-3 Green Continuous 0⍁-SECT-4 Cyan Continuous 0⍁-SECT-5 Blue Continuous 0⍁-SECT-6 Magenta Continuous 0⍁-SECT-7 White Continuous 0⍁-SECT-8 Color 8 Continuous 0⍁-SECT-9 Color 9 Continuous 0⍁-SECT-PATT Color 8 Continuous 25 Hatch Pattern for Sections
The Drawing View field code DETL is specialized code for layers that are organized primarily by drawing type (Detail in this case), rather than by major building system.
Number designators 1 to 9 indicate color (and thus lineweight) assignments to the layers: Color 1 (the darkest lineweight to Color 9 (the lightest lineweight). See Section "4.9 Color" in the TCCD AutoCAD Standards Manual for additional Lineweight information. Use linetype override in properties as needed for hidden, center and other line types needed.
The Drawing View field codes are specialized codes for layers that are organized primarily by drawing type, rather than by major building system. The field codes DETL, ELEV, and SECT may also be used as Minor Group field codes to modify a major building system.⍁ Symbol in the layer name can be substituted for any discipline (A - for Architectural, U - for Utilities, etc.).
DRAWING VIEW LAYER LIST
The Drawing View field code DETL is specialized code for layers that are organized primarily by drawing type (Detail in this case), rather than by major building system.
Number designators 1 to 9 indicate color (and thus line weight) assignments to the layers: Color 1 (the darkest line weight to Color 9 (the lightest line weight). See Section "4.9 Color" in the TCCD AutoCAD Standards Manual for additional Line weight information. Use linetype override in properties as needed for hidden, center and other line types needed. The Drawing View field code DETL is specialized code for layers that are organized primarily by drawing type (Detail in this case), rather than by major building system.
Number designators 1 to 9 indicate color (and thus line weight) assignments to the layers: Color 1 (the darkest line weight to Color 9 (the lightest line weight). See Section "4.9 Color" in the TCCD AutoCAD Standards Manual for additional Line weight information. Use linetype override in properties as needed for hidden, center and other line types needed.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xii
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
G-ANNO-CTRL Color 9 Center2 0 Center LinesG-ANNO-DIMS White Continuous 0 Dimensions Use TCCD_Standard Dimension Style for Proper settingsG-ANNO-IDEN Magenta Continuous 0 Identification tagsG-ANNO-KEYN Magenta Continuous 0 KeynotesG-ANNO-LABL Cyan Continuous 0 LabelsG-ANNO-LEGN Cyan Continuous 0 Legends, symbol keysG-ANNO-LOGO White Continuous 0 Company logoG-ANNO-MARK Magenta Continuous 0 Markers, break marks, leadersG-ANNO-MATC Red Continuous 0 Match linesG-ANNO-NPLT Color 150Continuous 0 Non-plotting graphic informationG-ANNO-PROS Blue Continuous 0 Date/Time/File name stampG-ANNO-PATT Color 8 Continuous 50 General hatch patternsG-ANNO-REDL Green Continuous 0 RedlinesG-ANNO-REFR White Continuous 0 Reference, external filesG-ANNO-REVS Green Continuous 0 Revision clouds & Revision indicators and textG-ANNO-SCHD Cyan Continuous 0 Schedules Use TCCD_Standard Table Style for proper table border and grid line weightsG-ANNO-SYMB Magenta Continuous 0 Reference symbolsG-ANNO-TABL Cyan Continuous 0 Data tables Use TCCD_Standard Table Style for proper table border and grid line weightsG-ANNO-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Text Use TCCD_Standard Multi-Leader Style for proper settingsG-ANNO-TITL Green Continuous 0 Drawing or detail titles Properties override - Color: CyanG-ANNO-TTLB Yellow Continuous 0 Border and title block Use TCCD_Standard Table Style for proper table border and grid line weights
ANNOTATION LAYER LIST
Annotation consists of text, dimensions, notes, sheet borders, detail references and other elements on CAD drawings that do not represent physical aspects of a building. Use of the Major Group ANNO allows all annotation to be placed in a defined group of layers.Discipline G designates "General" indicating that theses layers are the same to all disciplines. Some discipline specific annotation layers are defined under those disciplines.
82
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xiii
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSA-ANNO-CTRL Color 9 Center2 0 Center LinesA-ANNO-RMTG Blue Continuous 0 Room tagA-ANNO-RMNM Green Continuous 0 Room name Attribute LayerA-ANNO-RMNB Cyan Continuous 0 Room number Attribute LayerA-ANNO-SQFT Cyan Continuous 0 Area square footage Attribute LayerA-ANNO-OCC~Cyan Continuous 0 Space occupancy type Attribute LayerA-ANNO-OCC~-PATT Color 8 Continuous 50 Space occupancy type pattern For Color coded plans, Layer Color TBD based on Occupancy types legendA-CLNG-OTLN Green Continuous 0 Ceiling OutlineA-CLNG-ACCS Blue Continuous 0 Ceiling: accessA-CLNG-GRID Color 8 Continuous 0 Ceiling: gridA-COLS Yellow Continuous 0 ColumnsA-CONV Blue Continuous 0 Conveying systemsA-DOOR Blue Continuous 0 DoorsA-DOOR-SWNG Color 8 Center2 0 Door swing line A-EQPM Magenta Continuous 0 EquipmentA-EQPM-OVHD White Hidden2 0 Equipment: overheadA-FLOR-CSWK Blue Continuous 0 Built-in Casework For overhead casework use line properties override: Linetype = Hidden2A-FLOR-EVTR Magenta Hidden2 0 Floor: elevator cars and equipmentA-FLOR-FIXT Magenta Continuous 0 Floor: fixtures (plumbing)A-FLOR-HRAL Magenta Continuous 0 Floor: handrails/guard railsA-FLOR-LEVL Magenta Continuous 0 Floor: level changes (ramps, pits, depressions)A-FLOR-OTLN Green Continuous 0 Floor: outlineA-FLOR-OVHD White Hidden2 0 Floor: overheadA-FLOR-PATT Color 8 Continuous 25A-FLOR-SIGN Cyan Continuous 0 Floor: signageA-FLOR-SPCL Magenta Continuous 0 Floor: specialties (toilet room accessories, display cases)A-FLOR-STRS Magenta Continuous 0 Floor: stair treadsA-FLOR-TPTN Blue Continuous 0 Floor: toilet partitionsA-GLAZ Blue Continuous 0 GlazingA-GLAZ-SILL White Continuous 0 Glazing: window sillsA-ROOF-HRAL Magenta Continuous 0 Roof: handrails/guard railsA-ROOF-LEVL Magenta Continuous 0 Roof: level changesA-ROOF-OTLN Yellow Continuous 0 Roof: outlineA-WALL-CURT Cuan Continuous 0 Walls: curtainA-WALL-EXTR Green Continuous 0 Walls: full-height: exteriorA-WALL-INTR Cyan Continuous 0 Walls: full-height: interiorA-WALL-HEAD Magenta Continuous 0 Walls: door and window headersA-WALL-MOVE Blue Continuous 0 Walls: moveableA-WALL-PATT Color 8 Continuous 50 Walls: texture and hatch patternsA-WALL-PRHT Blue Continuous 0 Walls: partial-height
ARCHITECTURAL LAYER LIST
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xiv
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSC-ANNO-CTRL Color 9 Center2 0 Center LinesC-ANNO-PATT Color 9 Continuous 50 Hatch patternC-ANNO-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Site related text such as street namesC-BLDG Red Continuous 0 Buildings and primary structuresC-BLDG-DECK Blue Continuous 0 Buildings and primary structures: deck (attached, no roof overhead)C-BLDG-ANNO Green Continuous 0 Site Building names and Numbers Make certain to use appropriate Mtext StyleC-BLDG-OTLN Red Continuous 0 Buildings and structures: outlineC-BLDG-OVHD White Hidden2 0 Buildings and structures: overheadC-BRDG Green Continuous 0 BridgeC-CEME White Continuous 0 CemeteryC-CHAN Blue Continuous 0 ChannelsC-CURB Magenta Continuous 0 CurbsC-DRIV Cyan Continuous 0 DrivewaysC-ESMT Cyan Hidden 0 EasementsC-FENC Green Fence 0 FencesC-FLHA Magenta Dashed 0 Flood hazard areaC-FLHA-025Y Magenta Flood_25 0 Flood hazard area: 25 year markC-FLHA-050Y Magenta Flood_50 0 Flood hazard area: 50 year markC-FLHA-100Y Magenta Flood_100 0 Flood hazard area: 100 year markC-FLHA-200Y Magenta Flood_200 0 Flood hazard area: 200 year markC-POND Blue Continuous 0 PondsC-PRKG Blue Continuous 0 Parking lotsC-PRKG-CARS Color 8 Continuous 0 Parking lots: cars and other vehiclesC-PRKG-FIXT White Continuous 0 Parking lots: fixtures (wheel stops, parking meters, etc.)C-PRKG-FLNE Blue Continuous 0 Parking lots: fire laneC-PRKG-FLNE-MRKG Color 8 Continuous 50 Parking lots: fire lane: pavement markingsC-PRKG-MRKG Color 8 Continuous 50 Parking lots: pavement markingsC-PROP-LINE Red Phantom2 0 Property: linesC-PROP-SBCK Cyan Hidden 0 Property: setback linesC-PVMT Blue Continuous 0 PavementC-RAIL Cyan Continuous 0 RailroadC-RAIL-EQPM Magenta Continuous 0 Railroad: equipment (gates, signals, etc.)C-RAIL-TRAK Cyan Continuous 0 Railroad: trackC-RIVR Blue Continuous 0 RiverC-ROAD Green Continuous 0 RoadwaysC-RRAP Color 8 Continuous 0 RiprapC-SOIL White Dashed X2 0 SoilsC-SOIL-TEXT White Continuous 50 Soils identifying textC-SWLK Magenta Continuous 0 Sidewalks
CIVIL/ SITE LAYER LIST
84
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xv
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSC-TOPO-MAJR Cyan Hidden 0 Topographic feature: major C-TOPO-MINR White Hidden2 0 Topographic feature: minor C-TOPO-SPOT Cyan Continuous 0 Topographic feature: spot elevsC-TOPO-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Topographic feature textC-TRAL Blue Continuous 0 Trails or pathsC-WALL Green Continuous 0 WallsC-WALL-RTWL Green Continuous 0 Walls: retaining wall
CIVIL/ SITE LAYER LIST (Cont.)
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSE-ALRM Magenta Continuous 0 Alarm systemE-AUXL Magenta Continuous 0 Auxiliary systemsE-BELL Magenta Continuous 0 Bell systemE-CABL Magenta Continuous 0 Cable systemsE-CABL-COAX Magenta Continuous 0 Cable systems: coax cableE-CABL-FIBR Magenta Continuous 0 Cable systems: fiber optics cableE-CABL-TRAY Green Continuous 0 Cable systems: cable tray and wire waysE-CATH Magenta Continuous 0 Cathodic protection systemE-CCTV Magenta Continuous 0 Closed-circuit television systemE-CLOK Magenta Continuous 0 Clock systemE-COMM Magenta Continuous 0 CommunicationsE-DATA Magenta Continuous 0 Data/LAN systemE-DIAG-BUSS Magenta Continuous 0 Diagrams: bus ductE-DIAG-ENCL Green Continuous 0 Diagrams: equipment enclosuresE-DIAG-EQPM Green Continuous 0 Diagrams: equipmentE-DIAG-FEED Magenta Continuous 0 Diagrams: feedersE-DIAG-GRND Magenta Continuous 0 Diagrams: groundE-DIAG-SWCH Magenta Continuous 0 Diagrams: switchesE-DICT Magenta Continuous 0 Dictation systemE-FIRE Magenta Continuous 0 Fire protectionE-GRND Magenta Continuous 0 Ground systemE-INTC Magenta Continuous 0 Intercom/PA systemsE-LITE Green Continuous 0 LightingE-LITE-EMER Green Continuous 0 Lighting: emergencyE-LITE-SWCH Cyan Continuous 0 Lighting: switchesE-LTNG Green Continuous 0 Lightning protection systemE-POWR Green Continuous 0 PowerE-POWR-BUSW Blue Continuous 0 Power: buswaysE-POWR-CNDT Blue Continuous 0 Power: conduitE-POWR-DEVC Blue Continuous 0 Power: devicesE-POWR-EQPM Green Continuous 0 Power: equipmentE-POWR-EQPM-ACCS White Hidden2 0 Power: equipment accesE-POWR-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Power: equipment textE-POWR-PANL Green Continuous 0 Power: panelsE-POWR-URAC Cyan Hidden2 0 Power: underfloor racewaysE-PVMD Blue Continuous 0 Photovoltaic modulesE-SOUN Magenta Continuous 0 Sound system
ELECTRICAL LAYER LIST
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xvi
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSF-AFFF-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Aqueous film-forming foam system: equipmentF-AFFF-PIPE Green Continuous 0 Aqueous film-forming foam system: pipingF-CO2S-EQPM Green Continuous 0 CO2 system: equipmentF-CO2S-PIPE Yellow Continuous 0 CO2 system: pipingF-HALN-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Halon: equipmentF-HALN-PIPE Green Continuous 0 Halon: pipingF-IGAS Green Continuous 0 Inert gasF-IGAS-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Inert gas: equipmentF-IGAS-PIPE Green Continuous 0 Inert gas: pipingF-PROT-ALRM Magenta Continuous 0 Fire protection system: alarmF-PROT-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Fire protection system: equipmentF-PROT-EXTI Magenta Continuous 0 Fire protection system: extinguishersF-PROT-HOSE Green Continuous 0 Fire protection system: hosesF-PROT-HYDT Green Continuous 0 Fire protection: hydrants and connectionsF-PROT-RATE Green Continuous 0 Fire protection system: ratingsF-PROT-RATE-DOOR Green Continuous 0 Fire protection system: ratings: doorsF-PROT-RATE-WALL Green Continuous 0 Fire protection system: ratings: wallF-PROT-SMOK Cyan Continuous 0 Fire protection system: smoke detector/heat sensorsF-SPKL Magenta Continuous 0 SprinklerF-SPKL-PIPE Green Continuous 0 Sprinkler: piping
FIRE PROTECTION/ FIRE ALARM ALARM LAYER LIST
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSH-ANNO-TAG Blue Continuous Annotation Tag indicating Date & Project number of remediation Properties override - Color: CyanH-ASBS-CLNG Magenta Continuous Asbestos CeilingH-ASBS-CONT-1 Color 10 Continuous 25 Asbestos Contamination - Type 1H-ASBS-CONT-2 Color 30 Continuous 25 Asbestos Contamination - Type 2H-ASBS-CONT-3 Color 50 Continuous 25 Asbestos Contamination - Type 3H-ASBS-CONT-4 Color 80 Continuous 25 Asbestos Contamination - Type 4H-ASBS-CONT-5 Color 130 Continuous 25 Asbestos Contamination - Type 5H-ASBS-CONT-A Color 220 Continuous 25 Asbestos Contamination - ActiveH-ASBS-FLOR Magenta Continuous 0 Asbestos FlooringH-ASBS-FIRE Magenta Continuous 0 Asbestos Fire proofingH-ASBS-INSL Magenta Continuous 0 Asbestos InsulationH-ASBS-REMD-1 Color 10 Continuous 25 Asbestos Remediation - Type 1H-ASBS-REMD-2 Color 30 Continuous 25 Asbestos Remediation - Type 2H-ASBS-REMD-3 Color 50 Continuous 25 Asbestos Remediation - Type 3H-ASBS-REMD-4 Color 80 Continuous 25 Asbestos Remediation - Type 4H-ASBS-REMD-5 Color 130 Continuous 25 Asbestos Remediation - Type 5
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS LAYER LIST
Remediated areas will be Plined and color coded based on the provided legend - TBD. Additional layers and colors will be defined as needed
Contaminated areas will be Plined and color coded based on the provided legend - TBD. Additional layers and colors will be defined as needed
86
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xvii
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSI-AREA Blue Continuous 0 AreaI-AREA-OCCP Cyan Continuous 0 Area: occupant or employee namesI-CRPT Color 8 Continuous 0 Carpet/carpet tileI-EQPM White Hidden2 0 EquipmentI-FLOR-SIGN Magenta Continuous 0 Floor: signageI-FLOR-SPCL Magenta Continuous 0 Floor: architectural specialties (toilet room accessories, display cases)I-FNSH Color 8 Continuous 0 FinishesI-FURN Green Continuous 0 FurnishingsI-FURN-FILE Green Continuous 0 Furnishings: file cabinetsI-FURN-FREE Green Continuous 0 Furnishings: freestandingI-FURN-PLNT Blue Continuous 0 Furnishings: plantsI-FURN-PNLS Cyan Continuous 0 Furnishings: system panelsI-FURN-SEAT Green Continuous 0 Furnishings: seatingI-FURN-STOR Green Continuous 0 Furnishings: storage (component system)I-FURN-WKSF Green Continuous 0 Furnishings: work surface (component system)I-PRTN-MOVE Cyan Continuous 0 Partitions: moveableI-TILE Color 8 Continuous 0 Tile
INTERIORS LAYER LIST
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSK-ANNO-TAG~Blue Continuous 0 Space tracking tagK-ANNO-RMNM Green Continuous 0 Room name Attribute LayerK-ANNO-RMNB Cyan Continuous 0 Room number Attribute LayerK-ANNO-SQFT Cyan Continuous 0 Area square footage Attribute LayerK-ANNO-OCC~Cyan Continuous 0 Space occupancy type Attribute LayerK-ANNO-OCC~-ALLW Cyan Continuous 0 Allowable occupancy Attribute LayerK-ANNO-OCC~-CONT Cyan Continuous 0 Actual occupancy count Attribute LayerK-AREA-GROS Magenta Continuous 0 PLined gross area around building/ floor Layer normally frozenK-COST-CTR~Yellow Continuous 0 Cost Center Outline Layer normally frozenK-COST-CTR~-0001 Color 10 Continuous 50K-COST-CTR~-0002 Color 30 Continuous 50K-COST-CTR~-0003 Color 50 Continuous 50K-COST-CTR~-0004 Color 80 Continuous 50K-OCC~-TYPE-0001 Color 10 Continuous 50K-OCC~-TYPE-0002 Color 30 Continuous 50K-OCC~-TYPE-0003 Color 50 Continuous 50K-OCC~-TYPE-0004 Color 80 Continuous 50K-SPACE Blue Continuous 0 P-Lined area around each space Layer normally frozen
SPACE TRACKING LAYER LIST
Cost centers will be Plined and color coded based on the provided legend - TBDOccupancy types will be Plined and color coded based on the provided legend - TBD
Additional layers and colors will be defined as needed
Additional layers and colors will be defined as needed
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xviii
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSL-AED~Green Continuous 0 AED DevicesL-DOOR-FIRE Cyan Continuous 0 Fire Rated DoorL-EXIT-DRCT Yellow Continuous 0 Direct ExitL-EXIT-VERT Yellow Continuous 0 Vertical ExitL-HAZD-AREA Color 10 Dashed 0 Hazardous AreaL-OCCU-SEPR Cyan Continuous 0 Occupancy separationL-SUIT-BDRY White Continuous 0 Suite BoundaryL-WALL-SMKE-PART Color 30 Continuous 0 Smoke PartitionL-WALL-SMKE-BARR Color 130 Smoke 0 Smoke BarrierL-WALL-1HR~Color 10 1HR Fire 0 1hr rated fire wallL-WALL-1HR~-SMKE Color 220 1HR Fire-Smoke 0 1hr rated fire and smoke wallL-WALL-2HR~Color 80 2HR Fire 0 2hr rated fire wallL-WALL-2HR~-SMKE Color 170 2HR Fire-Smoke 0 2hr rated fire and smoke wallL-WALL-3HR~TBD 3HR Fire 0 3hr rated fire wallL-WALL-3HR~-SMKE TBD 3HR Fire-Smoke 0 3hr rated fire and smoke wall
LIFE SAFETY LAYER LIST
ONLY use Plines for the walls. Assign Global width of 3" to all Polylines
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
M-CMPA Green Continuous 0 Compressed/processed air systemsM-CMPA-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Compressed/processed air systems: equipmentM-CMPA-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Compressed/processed air systems: equipment textM-CMPA-PIPE Green ____ CA ____0 Compressed/processed air systems: pipingM-CNDW Green Continuous 0 Condenser water systemsM-CMPA-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Compressed/processed air systems: piping textM-CNDW-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Condenser water systems: equipment M-CNDW-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Condenser water systems: equipment textM-CNDW-RETN Blue ___ CTWR ___0 Condenser water systems: return pipingM-CNDW-SPLY Green ___ CTWS ___0 Condenser water systems: supply pipingM-CNDW-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Condenser water systems: piping textM-CONT Green Continuous 0 Controls and instrumentation
MECHANICAL LAYER LIST
For color-coded piping systems, layer color overrides will take place in the VP properties overrides with in the sheet view of the piping system.
88
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xix
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSM-CONT-THER Green Continuous 0 Controls and instrumentation: thermostatsM-CWTR Green Continuous 0 Chilled water systemsM-CWTR-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Chilled water systems: equipmentM-CWTR-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Chilled water systems: equipment textM-CWTR-RETN Blue ___ CHWR ___0 Chilled water systems: return pipingM-CWTR-SPLY Green ___ CHWS ___0 Chilled water systems: supply pipingM-CWTR-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Chilled water systems: piping textM-DMPR-FIRE Green Continuous 0 HVAC systems: fire damper Properties override - Color: Color 9M-DMPR-FIRE-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 HVAC systems: fire damper text Properties override - Color: MagentaM-DMPR-SMOK Green Continuous 0 HVAC systems: smoke damper Properties override - Color: Color 9M-DMPR-SMOK-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 HVAC systems: smoke damper text Properties override - Color: MagentaM-DMPR-COMB Green Continuous 0 HVAC systems: combination damper Properties override - Color: Color 9M-DMPR-COMB-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 HVAC systems: combination damper text Properties override - Color: MagentaM-DUAL Green Continuous 0 Dual temperature systemsM-DUAL-RETN Blue ___ DTR ___0 Dual temperature systems: return pipingM-DUAL-SPLY Green ___ DTR ___0 Dual temperature systems: supply pipingM-DUAL-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Dual temperature systems: piping textM-ELHT Green Continuous 0 Electric heatM-ELHT-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Electric heat: equipmentM-ELHT-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Electric heat: equipment textM-ENER Green Continuous 0 Energy management systemsM-ENER-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Energy management systems: equipmentM-ENER-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Energy management systems: equipment textM-EXHS Green Continuous 0 Exhaust system Not HVAC systemsM-EXHS-GRIL Magenta Continuous 0 Exhaust system: ceiling grill Not HVAC systemsM-EXHS-DUCT Green Hidden2 0 Exhaust system: ductwork Not HVAC systemsM-EXHS-DUCT-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Exhaust system: ductwork text Not HVAC systemsM-EXHS-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Exhaust system: equipment Not HVAC systemsM-EXHS-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Exhaust system: equipment text Not HVAC systemsM-FLOR-PENE Magenta Continuous 0 Floor: penetrations
MECHANICAL LAYER LIST (cont.)
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 8908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xx
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSM-FUEL Green Continuous 0 Fuel systemsM-FUEL-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Fuel systems: equipmentM-FUEL-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Fuel systems: equipment textM-FUEL-RETN Blue ____ FOR ____0 Fuel systems: oil general piping: return pipingM-FUEL-SPLY Green ____ FOS ____0 Fuel systems: oil general piping: supply pipingM-FUEL-VENT Magenta ____ FV ____0 Fuel systems: oil general piping: vent pipingM-FUEL-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Fuel systems: piping textM-FUME Yellow Continuous 0 Fume hoodM-FUME-DUCT Green Continuous 0 Fume hood: ductworkM-FUME-DUCT-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Fume hood: ductwork textM-FUME-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Fume hood: equipmentM-FUME-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Fume hood: equipment textM-GLYC-RETN Blue ___ GLYR ___0 Glycol systems: return pipingM-GLYC-SPLY Green ___ GLYS ___0 Glycol systems: supply pipingM-GLYC-TEXT Blue Continuous 0 Glycol systems: piping textM-HVAC Green Continuous 0 HVAC systemsM-HVAC-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 HVAC systems: equipmentM-HVAC-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 HVAC systems: equipment textM-HVAC-EXHS-DUCT Green Continuous 0 HVAC systems: exhaust air: ductworkM-HVAC-EXHS-GRIL Magenta Continuous 0 HVAC systems: exhaust air: grillesM-HVAC-RETN-GRIL Magenta Continuous 0 HVAC systems: return air grillM-HVAC-RETN-DUCT Green Continuous 0 HVAC systems: return ductworkM-HVAC-SPLY-DIFF Magenta Continuous 0 HVAC systems: supply diffusersM-HVAC-SPLY-DUCT Green Continuous 0 HVAC systems: supply ductworkM-HVAC-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 HVAC systems: ductwork textM-HWTR Green Continuous 0 Hot water heating systemM-HWTR-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Hot water heating system: equipmentM-HWTR-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Hot water heating system: equipment textM-HWTR-RETN Green ___ HHWR ___0 Hot water heating system: return pipingM-HWTR-SPLY Green ___ HHWS ___0 Hot water heating system: supply pipingM-HWTR-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Hot water heating system: piping textM-LGAS Green Continuous 0 Laboratory gas systems
MECHANICAL LAYER LIST (cont.)
90
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxi
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSM-LGAS-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Laboratory gas systems: equipmentM-LGAS-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Laboratory gas systems: equipment textM-LGAS-PIPE Green ___ LG ___0 Laboratory gas systems: pipingM-LGAS-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Laboratory gas systems: piping textM-MDGS Green Continuous 0 Medical gas systemsM-MDGS-CAIR Green ___ MA ___0 Medical gas systems: compressed air pipingM-MDGS-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Medical gas systems: equipmentM-MDGS-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Medical gas systems: equipment textM-MDGS-NITG Green ___ N ___0 Medical gas systems: nitrogen pipingM-MDGS-NOXG Green ___ NO ___0 Medical gas systems: nitrous oxideM-MDGS-OXYG Green ___ O ___0 Medical gas systems: pure O2 pipingM-MDGS-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Medical gas systems: piping textM-MDGS-VACU Green ___ MV ___0 Medical gas systems: vacuum pipingM-MKUP Green Continuous 0 Make-up air systems pipingM-MKUP-DIFF Magenta Continuous 0 Make-up air systems: ceiling diffusersM-MKUP-DUCT Green Continuous 0 Make-up air systems: ductworkM-MKUP-DUCT-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Make-up air systems: ductwork textM-MKUP-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Make-up air systems: equipmentM-MKUP-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Make-up air systems: equipment textM-MPIP-PIPE Green Continuous 0 Miscellaneous piping systems: pipingM-MPIP-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Miscellaneous piping systems: piping textM-NGAS Green Continuous 0 Natural gas systemsM-NGAS-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Natural gas systems: equipmentM-NGAS-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Natural gas systems: equipment textM-NGAS-PIPE Green ___ G ___0 Natural gas systems: pipingM-NGAS-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Natural gas systems: piping textM-PROC Green Continuous 0 Process systemsM-PROC-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Process systems: equipmentM-PROC-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Process systems: equipment text
MECHANICAL LAYER LIST (cont.)
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 9108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxii
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSM-PROC-PIPE Green Continuous 0 Process systems: pipingM-PROC-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Process systems: piping textM-RCOV Green Continuous 0 Energy recovery systemsM-RCOV-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Energy recovery systems: equipmentM-RCOV-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Energy recovery systems: equipment textM-RCOV-PIPE Green Continuous 0 Energy recovery systems: pipingM-RCOV-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Energy recovery systems: piping textM-REFG Green Continuous 0 Refrigeration systemsM-REFG-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Refrigeration systems: equipmentM-REFG-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Refrigeration systems: equipment textM-REFG-RETN Blue ___ REFR ___0 Refrigeration systems: return pipingM-REFG-SPLY Green ___ REFS ___0 Refrigeration systems: supply pipingM-REFG-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Refrigeration systems: piping textM-ROOF-PENE Magenta Continuous 0 Roof: penetrationsM-STEM Green Continuous 0 Steam systemM-STEM-CNDS-HPIP Green ___ HPC ___0 Steam system: high-pressure condensate pipingM-STEM-CNDS-LPIP Green ___ LPC ___0 Steam system: low-pressure condensate pipingM-STEM-CNDS-MPIP Green ___ MPC ___0 Steam system: medium-pressure condensate pipingM-STEM-CNDS-PUMP Green ___ PC ___0 Steam system: pumped condensate pipingM-STEM-CNDS-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Steam system: condensate piping textM-STEM-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Steam system: equipmentM-STEM-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Steam system: equipment textM-STEM-HPIP Green ___ HPS ___0 Steam system: high-pressure pipingM-STEM-LPIP Green ___ LPS ___0 Steam system: low-pressure pipingM-STEM-MPIP Green ___ MPS ___0 Steam system: medium-pressure pipingM-STEM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Steam system: steam piping textM-TEST-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Test equipmentM-TEST-EQPM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Test equipment textM-WALL-PENE Magenta Continuous 0 Wall: penetrations
MECHANICAL LAYER LIST (cont.)
92
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxiii
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
P-DOMW Green 0 Continuous Domestic water systemsP-DOMW-CPIP Green 0 Continuous Domestic water systems: cold water pipingP-DOMW-EQPM Yellow 0 Continuous Domestic water systems: equipmentP-DOMW-EQPM-TEXT Cyan 0 Continuous Domestic water systems: equipment textP-DOMW-HPIP Green ___ HW ___Continuous Domestic water systems: hot water pipingP-DOMW-MKUP Magenta ___ HWM ___Continuous Domestic water systems: make-up waterP-DOMW-RPIP Green ___ HWR ___Continuous Domestic water systems: recirculation pipingP-DOMW-PIPE-TEXT Green 0 Continuous Domestic water systems: piping textP-FLOR-PENE Magenta 0 Continuous Floor: penetrationsP-GRAY Green 0 Continuous Graywater systemsP-GRAY-PIPE Green ___ GW ___Continuous Graywater systems; pipingP-GRAY-EQPM Yellow 0 Continuous Graywater systems; equipmentP-GRAY-EQPM-TEXT Cyan 0 Continuous Graywater systems; equipment textP-ROOF-PENE Magenta 0 Continuous Roof: penetrationsP-SSWR Green 0 Continuous Sanitary sewerP-SSWR-EQPM Yellow 0 Continuous Sanitary sewer: equipmentP-SSWR-EQPM-TEXT Cyan 0 Continuous Sanitary sewer: equipment textP-SSWR-FIXT Magenta 0 Continuous Sanitary sewer: fixturesP-SSWR-FLDR Magenta 0 Continuous Sanitary sewer: floor drainsP-SSWR-PIPE Green ___ SS ___Continuous Sanitary sewer: pipingP-SSWR-TEXT Cyan 0 Continuous Sanitary sewer: piping textP-SSWR-VENT Blue 0 Hidden2 Sanitary sewer: ventsP-STRM Green 0 Continuous Storm sewerP-STRM-PIPE Green ___ ST ___Continuous Storm sewer: pipingP-STRM-TEXT Cyan 0 Continuous Storm sewer: piping textP-STRM-RFDR Magenta 0 Continuous Storm sewer: roof drainsP-WALL-PENE Magenta 0 Continuous Wall: penetrations
PLUMBING LAYER LIST
For color-coded piping systems, layer color overrides will take place in the VP properties overrides with in the sheet view of the piping system.
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 9308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxiv
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSS-BEAM Green 0 Continuous BeamsS-BRCG Blue 0 Hidden2 BracingS-COLS Yellow 0 Continuous ColumnsS-DECK Blue 0 Continuous DeckS-FNDN Magenta 0 Hidden2 FoundationS-FNDN-FTNG Magenta 0 Hidden2 Foundation: footingsS-FNDN-GRBM Cyan 0 Continuous Foundation: grade beamsS-FNDN-PCAP White 0 Hidden2 Foundation: pile capsS-FNDN-PIER Green 0 Continuous Foundation: drilled piersS-FNDN-PILE Green 0 Continuous Foundation: pilesS-FNDN-RBAR Red 0 Continuous Foundation: reinforcing barS-FSTN Blue 0 Continuous Fasteners and connectionsS-GRID Color 8 0 Center2 GridsS-GRTG Color 8 0 Continuous GratingS-HYDR White 0 Hidden2 Hydraulic structureS-JNTS-CNTJ Magenta 0 Continuous Joints: construction jointS-JNTS-CTLJ Magenta 0 Continuous Joints: control jointS-JNTS-EXPJ Magenta 0 Continuous Joints: expansion jointS-JOIS Cyan 0 Continuous JoistsS-JOIS-BRGX White 0 Hidden2 Joists: bridgingS-LNTL Yellow 0 Phantom2 LintelsS-PADS Green 0 Continuous PadsS-PADS-EQPM Green 0 Continuous Pads: equipmentS-SIGN Magenta 0 Continuous SignS-SLAB Green 0 Continuous SlabS-SLAB-OPNG Magenta 0 Continuous Slab: openings (and depressions)S-STIF White 0 Continuous StiffenerS-STRS Magenta 0 Continuous StairsS-STRS-LADD White 0 Continuous Stairs: ladders & ladder assembliesS-TRUS Green 0 Continuous TrussesS-WALL Green 0 Continuous WallsS-WALL-ABOV Magenta 0 Hidden2 Walls: aboveS-WALL-CMUW Green 0 Continuous Walls: concrete masonry unitS-WALL-CONC Green 0 Continuous Walls: concreteS-WALL-SHEA Green 0 Continuous Walls: structural bearing or shear walls
STRUCTURAL LAYER LIST
94
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxv
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTST-ALRM Green Continuous 0 Alarm system Properties override - Color: CyanT-BCST Green Continuous 0 Broadcast-related system (radio or TV)Properties override - Color: CyanT-BELL Green Continuous 0 Bell system Properties override - Color: CyanT-CABL Green Continuous 0 Cable systems Properties override - Color: CyanT-CABL-TRAY Magenta Continuous 0 Cable systems: cable tray and wirewaysT-CATV Green Continuous 0 Cable television system Properties override - Color: CyanT-CCTV Green Continuous 0 Closed-circuit television system Properties override - Color: CyanT-CLOK Green Continuous 0 Clock system Properties override - Color: CyanT-COMM Green Continuous 0 Communications Properties override - Color: CyanT-CONT Green Continuous 0 Controls and instrumentation Properties override - Color: CyanT-CONT-DEVC Green Continuous 0 Controls and instrumentation: devices Properties override - Color: CyanT-CONT-WIRE Magenta Continuous 0 Controls and instrumentation: wiringT-DATA Green Continuous 0 Data/LAN system Properties override - Color: CyanT-DIAG Magenta Continuous 0 DiagramsT-DIAG-ENCL Cyan Continuous 0 Diagrams: equipment enclosuresT-DIAG-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Diagrams: equipmentT-DICT Green Continuous 0 Dictation system Properties override - Color: CyanT-ELEC Green Continuous 0 Electrical system, telecom plan Properties override - Color: CyanT-FIBR-OPTC Green Continuous 0 Fiber Optics SystemT-FIRE Green Continuous 0 Fire protection Properties override - Color: CyanT-INTC Green Continuous 0 Intercom/PA systems Properties override - Color: CyanT-PHON Green Continuous 0 Telephone system Properties override - Color: CyanT-PHON-JACK Cyan Continuous 0 Telephone system: jacksT-PROJ Green Continuous 0 Projector system Properties override - Color: CyanT-SERT Green Continuous 0 Security system Properties override - Color: CyanT-SOUN Green Continuous 0 Sound system Properties override - Color: CyanT-TRAN Green Continuous 0 Transmission system (RF and microwave)Properties override - Color: CyanT-TVVS Green Continuous 0 Television and video systems Properties override - Color: Cyan
TELECOMMUNICATIONS LAYER LIST
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
U-CATV Green Continuous 0 Cable television systemU-CATV-OVHD Green __ CATV __0 Cable television system: overhead VP Color: Color 30 (Orange)U-CATV-POLE Cyan Continuous 0 Cable television system: poleU-CATV-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Cable television system: textU-CATV-UGND Blue --- CATV ---0 Cable television system: underground VP Color: Color 30 (Orange)U-CWTR Green Continuous 0 Chilled water systemU-CWTR-RETN Blue __ CHWR __0 Chilled water system: return piping VP Color: Color 130 (Cyan)U-CWTR-SPLY Green __ CHWS __0 Chilled water system: supply piping VP Color: Color 130 (Cyan)U-CWTR-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Chilled water system: textU-COMM Green Continuous 0 CommunicationsU-COMM-OVHD Green __ COMM __0 Communications: overhead VP Color: Color 30 (Orange)U-COMM-POLE Cyan Continuous 0 Communications: poleU- COMM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Communications: textU- COMM-UGND Blue --- COMM ---0 Communications: underground VP Color: Color 30 (Orange)U-CNDW-MHOL Green Continuous 0 Condenser water system: manhole
SITE UTILITIES LAYER LIST
All layer line weight setting are based on Black & White prints. Layer properties overrides in the Comments section suggest color overrides for color prints. Those overrides MUST be assigned in a separate sheet layout, under "VP Color" setting in the "Layer Properties Manager"
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 9508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxvi
LAYER NAME COLOR LINETYPE TRANS-
PARENCY DESCRIPTION COMMENTSU-CNDW-RETN Blue __ CTWR __0 Condenser water system: return piping VP Color: Color 220 (Magenta)U-CNDW-SPLY Green __ CTWS __0 Condenser water system: supply piping VP Color: Color 220 (Magenta)U-CNDW-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Condenser water system: textU-FBOP-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Fiber Optics: textU-FBOP-UGND Blue --- FOPT ---0 Fiber Optics: underground VP Color: Color 30 (Orange)U-FIRE-HYDT Green Continuous 0 Fire protection: hydrants and connectionsU-FIRE-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Fire protection: textU-FIRE-UGND Blue --- FIRE ---0 Fire protection: underground VP Color: Color 170 (Blue)U-FUEL-EQPM Green Continuous 0 Fuel systems: equipment (pumps, motors)U-FUEL-PIPE Green __ FUEL __0 Fuel systems: piping VP Color: Color 50 (Yellow)U-FUEL-TANK Green Continuous 0 Fuel systems: storage tanksU-FUEL-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Fuel systems: textU-FUEL-UGND Blue ---- FUEL ----0 Fuel systems: underground VP Color: Color 50 (Yellow)U-NGAS-EQPM Yellow Continuous 0 Natural gas systems: equipmentU-NGAS-PIPE Green ___ G ___0 Natural gas systems: piping VP Color: Color 50 (Yellow)U-NGAS-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Natural gas systems: textU-NGAS-UGND Blue ----- G -----0 Natural gas systems: underground VP Color: Color 50 (Yellow)U-POWR-MHOL Green Continuous 0 Power: manholeU-POWR-OVHD Green ___ E ___0 Power: overhead VP Color: Color 80 (Green)U-POWR-POLE Green Continuous 0 Power: poleU-POWR-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Power: structures textU-POWR-UGND Blue ----- E -----0 Power: underground VP Color: Color 12 (Red)U-SSWR-MHOL Green Continuous 0 Sanitary sewer: manholeU-SSWR-PIPE Green ___ SAN ___0 Sanitary sewer: piping VP Color: Color 80 (Green)U-SSWR-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Sanitary sewer: structures textU-SSWR-UGND Blue ----- SAN -----0 Sanitary sewer: underground VP Color: Color 80 (Green)U-STEM-CNDS-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Steam system: condensate piping textU-STEM-CNDS-UGND Blue ----- C -----0 Steam system: condensate underground piping VP Color: Color 220 (Magenta)U-STEM-MHOL Green Continuous 0 Steam system: manholeU-STEM-PIPE Green ___ STM ___0 Steam system: piping VP Color: Color 220 (Magenta)U-STEM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Steam system: piping textU-STEM-UGND Blue ----- STM -----0 Steam system: underground VP Color: Color 220 (Magenta)U-STRM-MHOL Green Continuous 0 Storm sewer: manholeU-STRM-PIPE Green ___ ST ___0 Storm sewer: piping VP Color: Color 130 (Cyan)U-STRM-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Storm sewer: textU-STRM-UGND Blue ----- ST -----0 Storm sewer: underground VP Color: Color 130 (Cyan)U-WATR-PIPE Green ___ CW ___0 Water supply: piping VP Color: Color 170 (Blue)U-WATR-UGND Blue ----- CW -----0 Water supply: underground VP Color: Color 170 (Blue)U-WATR-TEXT Cyan Continuous 0 Water supply: textU-WATR-WELL Green Continuous 0 Water supply: well
SITE UTILITIES LAYER LIST (cont.)
96
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxvii
TBD
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 9708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxviii
Below table indicates standard linetypes used by TCCD. In order for these linetype to function properly, you MUST use TCCD provided acad.lin file and also have TCCD_LS and TCCD_PIPE Text Styles defined in your drawing.
* This list is incomplete and will continue to evolve
98
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxix
Below are samples of schedules to be used on TCCD projects. These schedules are based on National CAD Standards V6.0. For any schedules not shown here, please refer to the NCS V6.0 for additional guidelines.
DOOR SCHEDULE
WINDOW SCHEDULE
W HT THK W HT HEAD JAMB SILLMATLMATL
DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME
FIRE RATING
LABEL
HARDWARE
NOTESMARK
SIZE
ELEL GLZ
DETAIL
SET NO KEYSIDE
RM NOGLZ
LOUVER
WIDTH HEIGH
T HEAD JAMB SILL HORIZ
MULL
VERT
MULL
TYPE MATL
WINDOW SCHEDULE
GLZ FIRE
RATING
DETAIL
NOTESMARK
SIZE
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 9908/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxx
LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE
PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
DIFFUSER, REGISTER & GRILLE SCHEDULE
TYPE TYPE WATTS MOUNTINGDESCRIPTIONMARK
LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
NOTES
LAMPS
LENS FINISH
CW HW WASTE VENT
SUPPLY
FITTING
SUPPLY
PIPE(S)DRAIN TRAP CONNECTIONS NOTES
PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
MARK DESCRIPTION MFR MODEL
SPLY RET EXH DAMPERMFRTYPEUSEMTGPANEL SIZE NECK SIZE PATTERNFINISH NOTESMODELMAX m3/s (CFM)
DIFFUSER, REGISTER, AND GRILLE SCHEDULE
MARK
100
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxi
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10108/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxii
* This list is incomplete and will continue to evolve
102
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxiii
* This list is incomplete and will continue to evolve
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10308/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxiv
104
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxv
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10508/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxvi
Attached is a “Terms of Electronic File Transfer” (TOFT) for TCCD vendors. (TOFT is also available for download on TCCD web page as a separate document).
106
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxvii
TECHNICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES 10708/22/2024[Appendix D]
Tarrant County College® CAD Standards Manual
Rev. 01 – April 21, 016
Printed Copies Uncontrolled xxxviii